CITY OF TSHWANE METROPOLITAN MUNICIPALITY

STANDARD
SPECIFICATIONS
FOR
MUNICIPAL
CIVIL ENGINEERING
WORKS

ISSUED BY:
The General Manager The General Manager
Water & Sanitation Roads & Stormwater
P O Box 1022 P O Box 1409
PRETORIA PRETORIA
0001 0001

Munitoria
Cnr Vermeulen and
Van der Walt Streets
Pretoria
0002

Third Edition 2005

 CITY OF TSHWANE METROPOLITAN MUNICIPALITY

STANDARD
SPECIFICATIONS
FOR
MUNICIPAL
CIVIL ENGINEERING
WORKS

ISSUED BY:
The General Manager The General Manager
Water & Sanitation Roads & Stormwater
P O Box 1022 P O Box 1409
PRETORIA PRETORIA
0001 0001

Munitoria
Cnr Vermeulen and
Van der Walt Streets
Pretoria
0002

Third Edition 2005

CITY OF TSHWANE METROPOLITAN MUNICIPALITY

STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR MUNICIPAL CIVIL ENGINEERING WORKS

CONTENTS

Section Page
SERIES 0 : GENERAL
001 G e n e r a l r e q u i r e m e n t s a n d charges 001-1
002 Engineer’s accommodation 002-1

SERIES 1 : ANCILLARY WORK

101 Site clearing and grubbing 101-1
102 Accommodation of traffic 102-1
103 Overhaul 103-1
104 Landscaping and grassing 104-1
105 Fencing 105-1
106 Service ducts 106-1

SERIES 2 : EARTHWORKS
201 General 201-1
202 Trenching 202-1
203 Mass earthworks 203-1

SERIES 3 : SEWERS
301 Materials 301-1
302 Construction 302-1
303 Testing 303-1

SERIES 4 : WATER RETICULATION AND WATER MAINS

401 Materials 401-1
402 Construction 402-1
403 Testing 403-1

SERIES 5 : DRAINAGE AND EROSION PROTECTION

501 Subsurface drains and drainage blankets 501-1
502 Prefabricated culverts and stormwater sewers 502-1
503 Kerbing and channelling 503-1
504 Open drains 504-1
505 Erosion protection 505-1

SERIES 6 : ROADS AND PARKING AREAS

601 Gravel pavement layers 601-1
602 Crushed-stone pavement layers 602-1
603 Unpaved areas 603-1
604 Stabilization 604-1
605 Prime coat 605-1
606 Asphalt base and surfacing 606-1
607 Bituminous surface treatments 607-1
608 Road and surfacing rehabilitation and overlay construction 608-1
609 Segmented paving 609-1
610 Concrete pavements 610-1
611 Guardrails 611-1
612 Traffic signs 612-1
613 Traffic markings 613-1
614 Macadam layers 614-1

i
Section Page
SERIES 7 : STRUCTURES
701 Foundations for structures 701-1
702 Falsework, formwork and concrete finish 702-1
703 Steel reinforcement for structures 703-1
704 Concrete 704-1
705 Prestressing of concrete 705-1
706 Joints in structures 706-1
707 Construction tolerances for structures 707-1

SERIES 8 : SPECIFIC WORKS

801 Concrete reservoirs 801-1
802 Cast in situ concrete sewers 802-1
803 Railway work 803-1
804 Pipe jacking and boring 804-1
805 Building work 805-1
806 Painting 806-1
807 Piling 807-1
808 Bridges 808-1
809 Structural steelwork 809-1

SERIES 9 : QUALITY CONTROL

901 General requirements 901-1
902 Statistical judgment scheme for acceptance control 902-1
903 Testing 903-1

ANNEXURE A
LIST OF SPECIFICATIONS AND CODES OF PRACTICE TO WHICH
REFERENCE IS MADE IN THE SPECIFICATIONS

Definitions and Interpretation

Words relating to any gender shall include the other genders

ii
SERIES 0 : GENERAL 03 ABBREVIATIONS
For the purposes of these Specifications the
SECTION 001 : GENERAL REQUIREMENTS abbreviations listed below shall apply and shall have
AND CHARGES the meanings as given. Abbreviations of units of
measurement shall be the standard abbreviations as set
CONTENTS out in the SI system. Where necessary, further
abbreviations and their meanings will be shown on the
01 SCOPE Drawings or given elsewhere in the Specifications.
02 APPLICATION
03 ABBREVIATIONS AASHTO : American Association of State
04 CONTRACT RATES Highway and Transportation Officials
05 ALTERNATIVE OFFERS ASTM : American Society for Testing and
06 APPROVAL Materials
07 ACCESSES, USE OF LAND, AND
TRESPASSING BS : British Standards Institution
08 CONTRACTOR ACTIVITIES ON PRIVATE CBR : California Bearing Ratio
PROPERTY
09 WORKMEN TO BE KEPT WITHIN BOUNDS CP : British Standard Code of Practice
10 EXTENT OF OCCUPATION OF SITE CSIR : Council for Scientific and Industrial
11 TEMPORARY CLOSING OF ROADWAYS Research
12 SERVICES REQUIRED BY CONTRACTOR
13 PROTECTION OF EXISTING SERVICES CKS : SANS Co-ordinating Specification
14 NOTICES, SIGNS AND ADVERTISEMENTS OMC : Optimum Moisture Content
15 TEMPORARY WORKS
16 WORK IN RESTRICTED AREAS PI : Plasticity Index
17 SAFE WORKING CONDITIONS
SANS : South African National Standards
18 USE OF EXPLOSIVES
published by Standards, South Africa,
19 WORK ON, OVER, UNDER OR ADJACENT
a division of SABS Holdings (Pty) Ltd.
TO A RAILWAY LINE
20 SITE MEETINGS TMH : Technical Methods for Highways of
21 MATERIALS the National Institute for Transport and
22 ORDERING OF MATERIALS Road Research.
23 MATERIALS SUPPLIED BY THE EMPLOYER
24 REJECTION OF MATERIALS SUPPLIED BY WISA : Water Institute of South Africa
THE EMPLOYER
25 TOLERANCES AND AUTHORIZED 04 CONTRACT RATES
DIMENSIONS 04.01 Contract rates
26 SIGNS AND LIGHTING
27 DEALING WITH WATER In computing the final Contract Price, payments shall be
28 VARIATIONS FROM SPECIFIED NOMINAL based only on the actual quantities of authorized work
RATES OF APPLICATION OR NOMINAL MIX done in accordance with the Specifications, the
PROPORTIONS Drawings and the Engineer's instructions.
29 THE CONTRACTOR'S ESTABLISHMENT ON The Contract rates shall apply, subject to the provisions
SITE of the General Conditions of Contract and Special
30 COMMUNITY LIASON OFFICER Conditions of Contract, irrespective of whether the
31 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT actual quantities are more or less than the scheduled
quantities.
01 SCOPE
Where reference is made in these Specifications to a
This section covers the principles, responsibilities and tendered rate, price or lump sum, it shall be construed
requirements applicable to the Contract as a whole, to to mean the rate, price or lump sum accepted by the
certain tender conditions, as well as to all work and Employer by the acceptance of the Tender.
costs involved in the establishment of the Contractor's
organization, camps and construction equipment on the 04.02 Rates to be inclusive
Site, and their removal after completion of the work.
The Contractor shall accept the payment for which
provision is made in the Contract and as represented by
02 APPLICATION
the rates tendered by him in the Schedule of Quantities
This section, like the General Conditions of Contract as payment in full for executing, completing and
and Special Conditions of Contract, contains maintaining the work as specified and described in the
requirements of a general nature and as such also pay items, for procuring, furnishing, installing and/or
deals with matters covered by the General Conditions of placing all materials, for labour, supervision, plant, tools
Contract and Special Conditions of Contract. This and equipment, for wastage, transport, loading and off-
section applies to all sections of these Specifications. loading, handling, storage, maintenance, temporary
work, testing, quality control including process control,
This section does not intend to alter or replace the overheads and profit, for all risks, liabilities and
General Conditions of Contract and Special Conditions obligations described or implied in the Contract, for
of Contract in any way but purports to complement them Regional Services levies, for all fees, taxes, levies and
by providing more specific details and requirements and other charges and amounts in respect of patented and
it should therefore be read in conjunction with both other protected rights, for all other incidentals
these documents. necessary for the completion of the work and
Where reference is made in these Specifications to the maintenance during the defects liability period as well
General Conditions of Contract only, such reference as for any items of work listed in the pay item
shall also imply reference to the Special Conditions of description. Value Added Tax (VAT) shall be calculated
Contract, and vice versa. and added separately.
001-1
This subclause shall fully apply to all pay items, except Where the phrase "The tendered rate shall include full
where the requirements may have been specifically compensation..." or any similar phrase is used in the
amended in a particular case. description of a pay item, the word "include" shall not
signify that the compensation is limited to the items of
04.03 Pay items work or cost listed but that the compensation covers,
The descriptions under the pay items in each section of inter alia, the items listed.
the Specifications, which indicate the work for which
allowance should be made in the tendered rates for 05 ALTERNATIVE OFFERS
such pay items, are for the guidance of the Contractor The Tenderer may, when so permitted in the Project
and do not necessarily repeat all the details of work and Specifications, submit prices with his Tender for
materials required by and described in the designs prepared by him or on behalf of him as
Specifications. The pay items for each section shall be alternatives to the structures, systems, layouts,
deemed to cover payment collectively for all the work
materials, etc, included in the Tender Documents.
specified in that section.
When submitting alternatives, the Tenderer shall in any
The description in the pay items shall be read in
case complete the pricing of the Schedule of Quantities
conjunction with the relevant documents of the Contract for the original design. Should the Contractor fail to
and the Contractor shall, when tendering, make comply with this requirement, the Tender may not be
allowance for his rates to be all-inclusive as specified in
given further consideration.
subclause 04.02 above. Value Added Tax (VAT) shall
however be shown separately. Unless the contrary is stipulated in the alternative offer,
it shall be assumed that the acceptance of the
04.04 Rate only items alternative offer does not constitute an amendment to
Opposite an item in the Schedule of Quantities where the time for completion tendered for the original design.
no quantity is given but where a "rate only" is required, All alternative designs shall be submitted with the
the Contractor shall fill in a rate or price which will Tender, and no alternative designs submitted after the
constitute payment for any work that may be required closing date of the tender will be considered when
under this item. Such "rate only" items shall be used tenders are adjudicated.
where it is anticipated that little or no work will be
required under the item, or where the item is an Alternative offers submitted and agreed to in writing
alternative to another item where a quantity is given, or during the currency of the Contract shall be dealt with
for variations in rates of application or mix proportions as an amendment to the original Contract. It will not
in certain items of work. constitute a variation in terms of the General Conditions
of Contract unless specifically so agreed.
04.05 The meanings of certain words and phrases
In order to enable the Employer to adjudicate such
Where one or more of the words "supply", "procure", alternative offers, the following requirements shall be
"provide" or "furnish" (material) are used, it shall mean complied with:
the supply and delivery to the point of use of all
materials of any kind whatsoever required for the work 05.01 Design specifications
covered by the particular pay item, including all tax,
The designs shall be executed in strict accordance with
purchase costs, claims, damages, royalties and
the codes of practice and the requirements specified in
transport costs involved, but excluding overhaul where
the Project Specifications or as prescribed by the
this is applicable. In the case of borrow materials, stone
Engineer for the type of alternative offered. Where no
and sand, it shall also include all negotiations with the
such specifications are given, the Tenderer shall obtain
owners concerned, excavation, producing, preparing,
the Engineer's requirements before submitting his
processing, testing, hauling and delivering the material
alternative offer.
to the point of use, as well as the construction, repair,
maintenance and making good after completion of all 05.02 Calculations
access roads, and all work required for the opening,
using and finishing off of borrow pits when this is not Preliminary calculations and all relevant data shall be
covered by other pay items in the Schedule of Quantities. submitted with the Tender. Such calculations shall be
set out in a clear and logical manner in order to
The phrase "placing material" shall, in the case of facilitate their checking. A full description of the design
earthworks and roadworks, mean the off-loading, assumptions and codes of practice used shall
spreading, blending, processing, watering, mixing, accompany the calculations.
shaping and compaction (where specified) of the
material in the embankment, road or parking area prism, 05.03 Drawings
pavement layers, shoulders, sidewalks, banks and
bypasses, as well as the procurement, supply, Drawings of the alternative designs, prepared in
application and admixing of water, the breaking down of accordance with the requirements of SANS 10143,
oversize material, the removal of oversize material shall, when applicable, also be submitted with the
which cannot be broken down, the correcting of irregular Tender. These drawings shall be to a suitable scale.
or uneven surfaces or deficient thickness, finishing off to Sufficient large-scale sections and other details shall
within the specified tolerances, refilling test holes, and also be submitted to show up clearly all dimensions.
the maintaining of the completed work. In the case of Foundation levels and sizes shall also be given in the
asphalt courses and bituminous treatments, it shall also case of structures.
mean the heating and spraying of binder, the spreading 05.04 Further details
of aggregate or asphalt mixtures, rolling, compacting,
finishing off to within the specified tolerances, and If the Engineer should find that the calculations and
maintaining the completed work. drawings submitted for alternative designs are not
sufficiently complete for proper evaluation, it may mean
"Concrete work" shall mean the supply of all materials, that no further consideration will be given to such
the manufacturing, placing, compacting, curing, testing alternative designs. The Engineer, however, reserves
and repairing of the concrete, the finishing of the the right to call on the Tenderer to submit such further
concrete surfaces, and the construction of contraction calculations and drawings as may be required.
and construction joints.

001-2
If such further details are not submitted within ten days The Engineer's approval of the design will neither
of being requested, the alternative designs may not be relieve the Contractor of his responsibilities as stated
given further consideration. above nor will it constitute an assumption of any such
responsibilities or liabilities by the Engineer on behalf of
05.05 Completion of accepted alternative design the Contractor.
If the Tender for an alternative design is accepted by 05.08 Basis of payment for alternative designs
the Engineer, a complete set of working drawings,
conforming in all respects to the requirements of the The Tenderer shall submit his price for each alternative
Engineer, shall be submitted for approval before design by way of a lump-sum price, together with a fully
construction may be proceeded with. The Engineer will priced Schedule of Quantities, in accordance with the
indicate which drawings are acceptable and which are measurement and payment clauses of the relevant
not. sections of the Specifications, suitably amended where
necessary, showing how the lump sum is made up.
Drawings submitted by the Contractor and which are
accepted and signed by the Engineer shall form an This Schedule of Quantities shall be used for purposes
integral part of the Contract Documents. Drawings not of monthly progress payments as the work proceeds, up
accepted and signed by the Engineer shall neither be to a maximum equal to the lump sum tendered for the
permitted on the Site of Works for construction alternative offer.
purposes nor be used for the manufacture of any item. The tendered lump sum shall, if accepted, be the full
Notwithstanding the approval and/or acceptance and and inclusive price for the alternative, which sum shall
signing of the drawings, the Contractor shall take full not be subject to alteration, except as provided
responsibility for all details, discrepancies, omissions, hereinafter.
errors, etc, in respect of the said drawings as well as for
the integrity of the design. The Contractor shall submit Tenderers who have submitted Tenders for alternative
only fully completed drawings and shall not be entitled designs that do not conform to the design requirements
to claim for delays resulting from the submission of may be requested to modify such designs in order to
incomplete drawings. The Engineer shall require a conform to the design requirements, but no alteration to
period of four to eight weeks, depending on the tendered lump sum for the structure will be allowed
circumstances, for reviewing the complete drawing(s). on account of such modifications. Furthermore,
alterations to the tendered lump sum will not be allowed
Separate payment will not be made for the design, on account of any errors in the quantities, extensions or
preparation and submission of drawings, and all such additions in the Schedule of Quantities.
costs shall be included in the rates tendered for the
relevant pay items of the alternative offer. Where the Engineer requires modifications in the design
for reasons other than failure to conform to the design
05.06 Acceptance of alternative designs requirements or errors in designs, as for example
foundation conditions which differ materially from those
Tenderers shall note that the acceptance of a Tender indicated by the test holes, the Contractor shall effect
which includes alternative designs signifies that the such modifications. Where this results in a variation in
alternative designs have been approved only in the quantities of work to be done, such variations in
principle and on the basis of an examination of the quantities shall be valued in accordance with the rates
broad details supplied with the Tender. Once the and prices in the Schedule of Quantities and the
Tender has been accepted, the Contractor shall supply tendered lump sum for the structure shall be adjusted
detailed working drawings and calculations which shall upwards or downwards, depending on whether the
be checked by the Engineer. Should the design not modifications result in an increase or decrease in the
comply with all the requirements specified, or not be in quantity of work done.
accordance with accepted design practice or applicable
codes, or should there be obvious deficiencies that 06 APPROVAL
would prejudice its intended function or structural
Approval of any material or plant and its operation, or of
integrity, the Contractor shall suitably amend the
any construction procedure to be used, shall not imply
designs in accordance with the Engineer's instructions.
any relaxation of the requirements governing the quality
Such amendments shall not entitle the Contractor to
of the materials or of the finished work, or relieve the
adjust the price or prices tendered for the alternative
Contractor of his responsibilities under the Contract.
designs offered.
Approval which had been granted to the Contractor in
05.07 Responsibility for design the past regarding certain practices not wholly in
The Contractor shall be held solely responsible for accordance with these Specifications shall not be
regarded as a precedent or waiver, and such prior
conforming to the specified design requirements and for
the integrity and functionality of the alternative design practices shall not in any way prejudice the
enforcement of these Specifications.
offered. He shall be liable for all damages, direct and
consequential, resulting from the design which has If the Engineer's Representative approves the
proved to be deficient in any respect, regardless of workmanship or materials of any work, and the
when this deficiency is discovered. workmanship or materials are subsequently found to be
not in compliance with the specified requirements, then
As regards the design of the alternative, Tenderers are
the Contractor shall, at his own cost, remove and
referred to the Engineering Profession Act, 2000
reinstate such work with work which complies with the
(Act 46 of 2000).
specified requirements, if so ordered by the Engineer.
The Tenderer shall offer to take out Professional
Indemnity Insurance and the amount offered and the 07 ACCESSES, USE OF LAND, AND
period for which it will be maintained shall be indicated TRESPASSING
by the Tenderer in a covering letter to his Tender. The Contractor shall make arrangements with the
Allowance shall be made in the rates or amounts owners or tenants in respect of access to the Site
tendered for the alternative for the cost of such across their properties and shall pay all costs incurred
insurance. in this regard.
001-3
Where existing roads are used, they shall be protected • record in writing the details of the above; the
from damage by extraordinary traffic. The Contractor form and substance of such records and
shall keep all gates closed and shall immediately repair agreements shall be subject to the Engineer's
any damage done by him to fences, gateways, drains or approval and a copy of the details as recorded
to any other structure in the execution of the Contract shall be sent to the Engineer for his records
and shall leave everything in the same state as it was and his approval.
found by him.
(c) In the event of the Contractor failing to reach
The Contractor shall not harm or destroy any vegetation agreement with the owner, lessee or occupier of
by fire or by any other means nor allow any practice the property on any of the matters referred to
which may have a detrimental effect on the above, the matter shall be referred to the Engineer
environment. He shall be responsible for any damage for further action.
whatsoever caused by his employees.
(d) Not less than three days before actually entering
The Contractor shall as far as possible confine his such property, the Contractor shall again give
operations to within the limits of the Site or the land notice in writing to the owner, lessee or occupier of
provided by the Employer, but if this is inadequate for the exact date on which he intends to enter the
his purpose, he shall make all arrangements for any property. If this date is not adhered to, he shall
further land he may require and shall pay all costs and again give similar notice of his revised date.
charges in this connection.
08.02 Execution of the Works
The Contractor shall not use the land constituting the
Site of the Works or a construction camp for any The Contractor shall take all reasonable measures to
purposes whatsoever other than for the proper limit as far as possible damage to gardens, fences,
execution of the Contract, and shall be debarred outbuildings, swimming pools and other property and
specifically from any form of trading or bartering. The disruption to the occupiers while he is working on
Contractor shall not sell any spirituous liquors or allow private property. He shall particularly programme his
them to be sold or brought within the limits of the activities so as to minimize his time of occupation.
Works, and shall in every way discourage their use and Where normal access by way of driveways and
distribution. footpaths is obstructed, he shall provide suitable
He shall erect and maintain suitable temporary fencing temporary vehicle or pedestrian crossings. Grass and
wherever necessary, and he shall pay for all damage in topsoil shall be carefully removed and stored separately
respect of trespassing, and for all damage to the stock, for replacement upon completion of the work.
crop or other property on the land, which may arise Upon completion of construction, the affected area shall
from the inefficiency or disrepair of such temporary be restored to its original condition within one week as
fencing or from interference with existing fencing in the far as this is reasonably possible, and all rubbish and
course of the work. debris shall be removed and all damage made good.
The Contractor's employees and those seeking 08.03 After completion of the work
employment shall be prohibited from trespassing on
adjoining lands and from killing and disturbing any As soon as the work on any property has been
game, livestock or domestic animals. completed and the area restored as set out above, the
Contractor shall obtain from the owner, lessee or
occupier, on a form approved by the Engineer, a signed
08 CONTRACTOR ACTIVITIES ON PRIVATE
statement that the owner, lessee or occupier is satisfied
PROPERTY
with the condition to which the property has been
08.01 Action required prior to entering property restored and that he has no unsettled claims for
damage. This statement shall be delivered to the
The Contractor shall not enter onto private property or Engineer.
property not belonging to the Employer for the purpose
of carrying out any work in connection with the Contract In the event of the owner, lessee or occupier refusing to
without having completed the following formalities well sign such statement, the matter shall be referred to the
Engineer for further instructions.
ahead of his intended date for entering such property:
(a) The Contractor shall give notice, in writing, to the 08.04 Dumping on Private Property
owner, lessee or occupier, on a form approved by In the case of the Contractor requesting permission to
the Engineer, of his intention of entering upon the dump excavated material or any other material from the
property, together with full details of the work he works on private property, the Contractor shall provide
intends to carry out on the property and the the Engineer with the following documentation before
intended dates and duration of occupation. dumping commences:
(b) The Contractor shall arrange a meeting with the (a) A signed indemnification by both parties, that is
owner, lessee or occupier, to - the Contractor and the Owner of the property on
which dumping will occur. The indemnification
• confirm that the owner, lessee or occupier has
shall exempt the City of Tshwane Metropolitan
permitted the Contractor to enter upon the
Municipality from any claims that may arise from
property for the said purpose;
the dumping of material on the specific property.
• obtain details from the owner, lessee or
(b) The agreements or conditions under which
occupier, regarding any special precautions
dumping shall take place.
that should be taken by the Contractor during
the execution of the Works;
09 WORKMEN TO BE KEPT WITHIN BOUNDS
• record details, with photographs if necessary,
of the condition of the property at that stage, The Contractor will be responsible for keeping all
including any defects in buildings, swimming persons under his control, including personnel
pools, outbuildings, fences, etc that may be employed by subcontractors, within bounds and will be
affected by his activities; liable for all damage to adjoining premises and property
caused by workmen, by transportation, or by any other
occurrence under his control.
001-4
10 EXTENT OF OCCUPATION OF SITE Sufficient back-up services shall be provided to ensure
the uninterrupted execution of the Works such as
The Contractor shall limit his occupation of the Site to storage tanks for water for use in the mixing of
such period and the number of working places to such concrete, stand-by electrical power for work at night and
number as would reasonably be necessary in the for electrical plant and equipment used on Site.
circumstances. Trenches shall not be allowed to remain
open for longer than is necessary and access for the The electrical wiring of all buildings shall be carried out
public shall be limited or restricted for as short a period by registered and licensed electricians in accordance
as is reasonably possible. with the requirements of SANS 10142-1 and the
regulations of the local authority.
11 TEMPORARY CLOSING OF ROADWAYS
13 PROTECTION OF EXISTING SERVICES
The Contractor shall take every precaution to prevent a
nuisance or an obstruction in public or private streets, 13.01 General
roads, rights of way, footpaths and entrances and shall
Specific requirements relating to the location, protection
not interfere unnecessarily or improperly with the public and work in the vicinity of certain services such as
convenience or the use or occupation of properties,
electrical cables may be included in the Project
buildings, etc. Specifications.
Should the Engineer deem it advisable for any portion
13.02 Location of existing services
of a street, road, right of way, footpath or entrance to be
temporarily closed, arrangements will be made by him Before any underground or excavation work is carried
to do so, in which case the Contractor shall comply with out, the Contractor shall ascertain the presence and
such orders and regulations as may be in force. The position of all services likely to be damaged or
Employer will pay the cost of inserting advertisements interfered with by his activities. For this purpose he
in the public press to give notice of the intended closure shall obtain from the Engineer up-to-date plans showing
and its probable duration. The Contractor shall notify the position of services in the area where he intends to
the occupiers of premises along the route affected by work. As the location of services can often not be
any proposed closure of the intended closure and its reliably determined from such plans, he shall further
probable duration and shall, as punctually as possible, determine the exact position of such services by means
reopen same at the set time or times. Should of suitable detecting equipment and afterwards by
circumstances arise which could defer reopening at the careful hand excavation where necessary in order to
appointed time, the Contractor shall inform the Engineer expose the service at the positions of possible
and notify the occupiers timeously. interference by his activities. The latter procedure shall
also be followed in respect of any service not shown on
Where a trench crosses or traverses the length of any
plans but believed to be present.
public or private road, the Contractor shall exhibit road
signs in advance of the barricades at such distances as All such services, the positions of which have been
to give sufficient warning to approaching traffic that located at the critical points, shall be designated as
work is in progress on the road. The type of sign to be "known" services and their positions shall be indicated
used shall be approved by the Engineer, the General on a separate set of drawings, a copy of which shall be
Manager: Roads and Stormwater and the Chief of furnished to the Engineer.
Police, Tshwane Metropolitan Police Department.
While he is in occupation of the Site, the Contractor
During the hours between sunset and sunrise the road shall be liable for all damage caused by him to known
signs shall be clearly illuminated as specified in services as well as for consequential damage arising
clause 26 of this section. therefrom, whether caused directly by his operations or
by lack of proper protection.
12 SERVICES REQUIRED BY CONTRACTOR
The locating of existing services and any hand
The Contractor is responsible for the provision of all the excavations done to expose such services will be paid
services he requires such as telephone, sewerage as for separately under the measurement and payment
well as water and electricity for domestic and/or clause of this section.
construction purposes.
13.03 Protection during construction
Should the Contractor wish to make use of the relevant
authority for providing some or all of the above The Contractor shall exercise all the necessary care to
services, he will nevertheless remain fully responsible if prevent damage to known services during construction
the authority cannot fully meet his requirements operations. Major excavating equipment and other plant
regarding the type, capacity or quantity of the service. shall not be operated in dangerously close proximity of
these services. Where necessary, excavation in close
Should the Contractor make use of local services, he proximity of these services shall be carefully carried out
shall make arrangements, where applicable, for by means of suitable hand tools, excluding picks
connections to be made, complete with meters, from wherever their use could cause damage to the services.
these services for use at the Site. All costs incurred in No additional payment will apply to such more difficult
respect of these connections and the meters, pipes, work.
cables, etc, from the connections to his facilities, the
cost of the water and electricity consumed, the cost of Services left exposed shall be suitably protected from
the removal of sewage and the use of the telephone, damage.
and the cost for finally disconnecting and removing the 13.04 Liability for damage and insurance
services shall be paid by the Contractor, who shall
include full compensation for such costs in his tendered The Contractor's attention is drawn to the relevant
rates for the various items of work requiring the use of clauses of the General Conditions of Contract and
one or more of the services. The Contractor shall Special Conditions of Contract regarding liability for
furnish the Engineer with documentary proof that proper damage to the Works or property, or injury to persons
notice has been given to the relevant authority for arising from the construction of the Works and
termination of the services. regarding insurance of the Works and public liability
insurance to be effected.
001-5
13.05 Alterations and repairs to existing services The Contractor shall note that no reclassification of
excavated material and no additional payment over and
Unless the contrary is clearly specified or ordered, the above the rates for normal construction will be made for
Contractor shall not carry out any alterations to existing such work, unless provision for this has specifically
services. Where this may be necessary, the Contractor been made in a particular case.
shall inform the Engineer, who will either make
arrangements for such work to be executed by the 17 SAFE WORKING CONDITIONS
owner of the service or instruct the Contractor to make
such arrangements himself. 17.01 General
Where existing services are damaged by the The Contractor shall at all times observe adequate
Contractor, he shall immediately inform the Engineer safety precautions on Site to ensure the safety of the
and the relevant authority, and shall obtain instructions public as well as of his own staff and other persons
as to who should carry out repairs. In urgent cases the engaged in or about the Works. In this respect he shall
Contractor shall take all necessary steps to minimize observe all laws, ordinances and regulations pertaining
damage to and the interruption of the service. No to his work.
repairs shall be attempted to telecommunication cables
or electric power lines and cables. When work is carried out within a road reserve, the road
surfaces not affected by the work and which remain
A list of the important telephone numbers to be used open to traffic, shall be kept clean at all times so that
when services are damaged or need to be altered will gravel and debris will not be thrown up by passing
be included in the Project Specifications. vehicles, causing possible injury to persons and
damage to property and other vehicles.
No liability for damages arising from any delay in having
such alterations or repairs effected will be accepted by The contractor's attention is specifically drawn to the
the Employer. The Contractor shall provide all following Acts and Regulations, and particularly to the
reasonable opportunity, access and assistance to relevant regulations under each Act, copies of which
persons doing alterations or repairs to existing services. shall at all times be kept by the contractor on the Site:

14 NOTICES, SIGNS AND ADVERTISEMENTS The Occupational Health and Safety Act, 1993
(Act 85 of 1993) and its Regulations
The Contractor shall not erect any notices, signs or
The Explosives Act 2003, (Act 15 of 2003)
advertisements on or near the Site without the written
approval of the Engineer. The Explosives Regulations, 2002
As part of his general obligations, the Contractor shall The Mine Health and Safety Act, 1996 (Act 29 of
supply and erect the official name-board(s), the details 1966)
of which are shown on the Drawings. The name-
board(s) shall be erected in the position(s) indicated by Should the work so require, the Contractor shall comply
the Engineer. with the safety precautions set out in the following
publications, copies of which shall also be kept by him
All notices, signboards, the official name-board(s), and on the Site:
advertisements shall be removed by the Contractor on
completion of the Work or by the end of the defects The latest edition of the Code of Practice relating to
liability period, as may be decided by the Engineer. the safety of persons working in small diameter
shafts and test pits for Civil Engineering purposes,
15 TEMPORARY WORKS obtainable from the Secretary, SA Institution of Civil
Engineers.
Temporary Works will not be paid for under separate
pay items, except where provision for this is specifically The latest edition of the Operation of Waste Water
made elsewhere in the Specifications, and payment for Treatment Works Handbook, Chapter 25, Safety,
temporary work not covered by specific pay items shall obtainable from WISA.
be included in the rates and prices tendered for the 17.02 Occupational Health and Safety Act
related items of permanent work which do or may
require Temporary Works. The Contractor shall comply with the Occupational
Health and Safety Act (Act 85 of 1993) and its
The Contractor shall be solely responsible for the safety Regulations.
and efficacy of all Temporary Works provided by him,
but the Engineer may order such alterations or In particular the Construction Regulations, 2003
additions to be made to Temporary Works which he (Government Gazette No 25207) shall be adhered to at
considers necessary for the safety of the Works or to all times.
comply with any other requirements under the Contract. The Employer or his Agent shall inspect the works from
time to time to monitor the contractor’s compliance with
The Contractor is referred to clause 27 of this section
the above legislation.
regarding the Temporary Works required for dealing
with water, and to clause 26 of this section and section Where any such investigations reveal, or where it
102 of these Specifications regarding temporary comes to the Engineer’s attention that the contractor is
barricading, lighting, signposting and accommodation of in any way in breach of the requirements of the above
traffic. legislation, the engineer shall in accordance with the
Conditions of contract, be entitled to suspend
16 WORK IN RESTRICTED AREAS construction of the works, or any part thereof, until such
time as the breach has been rectified to the satisfaction
In certain cases, particularly in road work, trenching, of the Engineer.
excavations for structures and in pipe jacking
operations, work may have to be carried out in The Contractor shall have no grounds for a claim
restricted areas or in narrow widths which would against the Employer for extension of time and/or
preclude the use of equipment suitable only for work in additional costs if the construction of the works or any
unrestricted areas or normal full-width construction. part thereof is suspended by the Engineer in terms of
the conditions of contract.

001-6
The Contractor shall, in terms of the contract, remain 17.07 Personal protective clothing and
fully liable for the payment of penalties for late equipment (PPE)
completion should the Contractor fail to complete the
works within the time for completion as a consequence All employees employed on the construction site and
of the suspension of construction for the above reason. visitors shall wear clothing and equipment as prescribed
in the site hazard analysis.
17.03 Health and safety plan
The Contractor shall identify tasks requiring protective
The health and safety plan required by the Act and clothing and equipment and issue the necessary to
supporting Regulations shall include, but not limited to, employees on site.
the following: Employees shall maintain all PPE in a safe, clean
Occupational health and safety policy condition.

Administrative requirements Personnel not wearing PPE where PPE is prescribed

will be disciplined in accordance with the company’s
Risk identification and assessment including disciplinary code of conduct
maintenance of all registers
17.08 Provision of safety fences, signs and
Training barricades
Incident and accident reporting The contractor shall in accordance with the act and
Incident and accident investigation supporting regulations erect fences and/or barricades to
protect the public passing by or entering the
First aid construction area.
Occupational heath and safety representatives The Contractor shall, in accordance with the act and
Occupational heath and safety committees supporting regulations, erect Notices and Signs at
entrances and along perimeters of the construction site
Permits indicating “No Unauthorized Entry” and “Visitors to
report to Site Office”. Notices and Signs at the
Certificates of competence and compliance Permits construction site entrance instructing visitors and non-
Audits and inspections employees what to do, where to go, and where to report
to on entering the site shall also be erected.
17.04 Health and Safety file
Where necessary, or as instructed by the Engineer, the
Every Contractor shall ensure that a health and safety Contractor shall employ security guards to safeguard
file, which shall include all documentation required in safety fences, signs and barricades from theft or
terms of the provisions of the Act and the relevant vandalism.
Regulations, is kept on site and made available to the
client, agent or inspectors on request. 18 USE OF EXPLOSIVES
A Principal Contractor shall hand over a consolidated The Contractor will generally be permitted to use
health and safety file to the client upon completion of explosives for breaking up rock and hard material
the construction work and shall, in addition to the during excavations, for demolishing existing structures
documentation referred to in the regulations , include a and for such other purposes where they may normally
record of all drawings, designs, materials used and be required, subject to any provisions to the contrary in
other similar information concerning the completed the Project Specifications and to the following
works. conditions:
A Principal Contractor shall ensure that in addition to (a) The Engineer shall be authorized to prohibit the
the documentation required in the health and safety file use of explosives in cases where, in his opinion,
as determined in the regulations, a comprehensive and the risk of injury to persons or damage to property
updated list of all sub-contractors on site accountable to or adjoining structures is too high. Such action by
the principal contractor, the agreements between the the Engineer shall not entitle the Contractor to any
parties and the type of work being done are included additional payment for having to resort to other
and available. less economical methods of construction unless
otherwise provided in the Project Specifications.
17.05 Safety Officer
(b) The Engineer's prior approval shall be obtained in
The Contractor shall in accordance with the act and writing in respect of each and every blasting
supporting regulations upon having considered the size operation carried out. Such approval may be
of the project, the degree of dangers likely to be withheld in the event of the Contractor not acting
encountered or the accumulation of hazards or risks on responsibly and carefully in his use of explosives.
the site, appoint a full-time or part-time construction
safety officer with the necessary competencies and (c) The requirements of the Various Acts and
resources to assist him in the control of all safety Regulations referred to under clause 17.01 of this
related aspects on the site. section and the requirements of the Inspector of
Explosives shall be complied with.
17.06 Health and safety training
(d) Where the excavation work involves the use of
The Contractor shall provide employees with the explosives, a method statement shall be
necessary information and training or supervision that is developed in accordance with the applicable
necessary to enable them to perform their work safely explosives legislation, by an appointed person who
and without risk to health, and shall ensure that every is competent in the use of explosives for
employee becomes familiar with work-related hazards excavation work and the contractor shall ensure
and risks and the measures that must be taken to that the procedures therein are followed.
eliminate, control and minimize those hazards and
risks.

001-7
(e) Where the demolition work involves the use of 20 SITE MEETINGS
explosives, a method statement is to be developed
in accordance with the applicable explosives The Contractor will be required to attend regular site
legislation, by an appointed person who is meetings which will normally be held once a month to
competent in the use of explosives for demolition discuss general progress, quality of work, problems,
work and the contractor shall ensure that the claims, payments, etc, but not any matters concerning
procedures therein are followed. the day-to-day running of the Contract.

(f) Before any blasting is undertaken, the Contractor 21 MATERIALS

shall satisfy the Engineer that he has established, in
collaboration with the Employer's Manager, The Contractor, when using materials that are required to
Insurance Operations, whether or not the insurers comply with any standard specification, shall, if so
concerned require pre- and post-blasting inspections ordered, furnish the Engineer with certificates showing
of buildings and structures within a certain perimeter that the materials do so comply. Where so specified,
of the proposed blasting to be carried out. materials shall bear the official mark of the appropriate
authority. Samples ordered or specified shall be delivered
Should such inspections be required, the to the Engineer's office on the Site free of charge.
Contractor shall, together with the Engineer and
the insurer, examine and measure up any Unless otherwise specified, all proprietary materials
buildings, houses or structures in the vicinity of the shall be used and placed in strict accordance with the
proposed blasting and establish and record, relevant manufacturer's current published instructions.
together with the owner, lessee or occupier Where proprietary products have been specified, similar
thereof, the extent of any cracking or damage that products may be used subject to the prior written
may exist before the commencement of blasting approval of the Engineer.
operations. It shall be the responsibility of the
Contractor to make good at his own expense any Unless anything to the contrary is specified, or
further damage to such houses, buildings or approved by the Engineer in writing, all manufactured
structures which is a result of the blasting. articles or materials supplied by the Contractor shall be
new and unused.
(g) Where there is a reasonable possibility of damage to
power and telephone lines or any other property, the Earth, stone, gravel, sand, and all other materials
Contractor shall suitably adapt his method of blasting excavated or present on the Site or in borrow areas
and the size of charges and shall use adequate provided by the Employer shall not become the property
protective measures, such as cover blasting, to limit of the Contractor, but will be at his disposal only in so
the risk of damage as far as possible. Specific far as they are approved for use on the Contract.
requirements relating to certain services may be Existing structures on the Site shall remain the property
included in the Project Specifications. of the Employer and, except as and to the extent
required elsewhere in the Contract, shall not be
(h) All accidents, injury to persons and damage to interfered with by the Contractor in any way.
property shall be reported in detail and in writing to
the Engineer as soon as is practicable. All materials to be included in the Works shall not be
damaged in any way and, should they be damaged on
(i) The Engineer shall be given 24 hours' notice by delivery or by the Contractor during handling,
the Contractor before each blasting operation is transportation, storage, installation or testing, they shall
carried out. be replaced by the Contractor at his own expense.
(j) Where blasting is to be performed in built-up areas All places where materials are being manufactured or
or close to infrastructural components susceptible obtained for use in the Works, and all the processes
to vibration damage, the Contractor shall, before connected therewith, shall be open to inspection by the
commencing blasting, employ the services of a Engineer (or other persons authorized by the Engineer)
specialist blasting consultant to prepare a method at all reasonable times, and the Engineer shall be at
statement for approval by the Engineer, specifying liberty to suspend any portion of work which is not being
in detail the requirements for all the activities executed in conformity with these Specifications.
related to blasting operations, to ensure that the
vibration damage potential is controlled by keeping
22 ORDERING OF MATERIALS
within the limiting criteria for vibration levels.
These criteria shall be in accordance with Immediately upon his Tender being accepted, the
acknowledged international standards, as Contractor shall purchase all materials which are in short
approved by the Engineer, and shall relate to both supply or for which the delivery period may be long.
peak particle velocity and wave frequency. The
method statement shall be based on site-specific The quantities set out in the Schedule of Quantities are
vibration characteristics determined by trial estimated quantities. The Contractor shall therefore,
blasting as planned and monitored by the before ordering materials of any kind, confirm with the
specialist-blasting consultant. Engineer the quantities required. No liability or
responsibility whatsoever shall attach to the Employer
Vibrations caused by blasting operations shall be for materials ordered by the Contractor except if they
recorded by one or more blasting seismographs of a have been ordered in accordance with written
type as approved by the Engineer and in positions confirmation issued by the Engineer.
as described by the specialist blasting consultant.
23 MATERIALS SUPPLIED BY THE EMPLOYER
19 WORK ON, OVER, UNDER OR ADJACENT TO
A RAILWAY LINE Materials designated in the Contract Documents to be
supplied by the Employer shall not be obtained by the
All work carried out on, over, under or adjacent to a Contractor from any other source except from the
railway line shall be carried out strictly in accordance Employer. All requisitions for materials which are to be
with the requirements of the owner of such railway line. supplied by the Employer shall be submitted in writing
Specific requirements in this regard may be included in and shall be signed by the Contractor or his authorized
the Project Specifications. representative and the Engineer.

001-8
The Contractor or his authorized representative shall warning lights have been placed in position and are
sign a receipt upon delivery of all such materials which, burning, and that road signs are illuminated.
having once been accepted by the Contractor, will be
deemed to be in sound and satisfactory condition and The watchman shall have access to a telephone if
will be his sole responsibility thenceforth. available, and to a list of the relevant telephone
numbers in case of an emergency.
24 REJECTION OF MATERIALS SUPPLIED BY THE
EMPLOYER 26.02 Lighting

The Contractor shall ensure that he accepts only sound Open trenches shall be illuminated by red lights in the
materials from the Employer which are suitable for the following manner:
purpose intended, and the Engineer shall be authorized • At least two red lights shall be placed across the
to reject any materials on the Site of the Works, which ends of open trenches, at a maximum spacing of
are unsuitable, unsound or defective in any way. The 2 m.
Contractor shall immediately remove such rejected
materials from the Site of the Works to a place • Red lights shall be placed along open trenches at
designated by the Engineer and at the Employer's 10 m intervals on the road side and at 3 m intervals
expense. However, should the Engineer be of the along the pedestrian side.
opinion that the Contractor should not have accepted
the materials, such removal shall be carried out at the • At least one red lamp shall be placed at each of the
Contractor's expense. four corners of each pedestrian crossing and at
least two red lamps at each of the four corners of
25 TOLERANCES AND AUTHORIZED DIMENSIONS each vehicular crossing.

The work specified in the various sections of these • All lamps shall be in position and burning between
Specifications shall comply with the various dimensional the hours of sunset and sunrise, and shall be
and other tolerances specified in each case. Where no provided with a chain and padlock and locked to
tolerances are specified, the standard of workmanship suitable posts to prevent theft.
shall be in accordance with normal good practice. No Open excavations (other than open trenches) which
guarantee is given that the full specified tolerances will constitute a hazard to persons or traffic shall be
be available independently of each other, and the provided with lighting as directed. The Contractor shall
Contractor is cautioned in regard to the fact that the apply for directions from the Engineer in good time.
liberal or full use of any one or more of the tolerances
may deprive him of the full or any use of tolerances
26.03 Fencing
relating to other aspects of the work. The latter would
apply particularly in respect of level tolerances on layer Open excavations that may constitute a hazard to
work and the related requirements regarding layer pedestrians and vehicular traffic, including all open
thicknesses. trenches, shall be fenced off with stout temporary
In the description of certain pay items where it is stated fencing in accordance with the details shown on the
that quantities will be determined from the "authorized" Drawings or as approved by the Engineer.
dimensions, this shall be taken to mean the dimensions In addition, one line of red-and-white plastic warning
as specified or shown on the Drawings or, if changed, tape of an approved design shall be securely fixed
as finally instructed by the Engineer, without any along the top of the fence for its full length.
allowance for the tolerances specified. Save as
hereinafter specified to the contrary, all measurements
27 DEALING WITH WATER
for determining quantities for purposes of payment will
be based on the "authorized" dimensions. The Contractor shall deal with and dispose of all water
If the work is therefore constructed in compliance with so as to ensure that the Works are kept sufficiently dry
the authorized dimensions plus or minus any tolerances at all times so that they can be properly executed, and
allowed, quantities will be based on the authorized he shall protect them against flood damage.
dimensions regardless of the actual dimensions to For this purpose the Contractor shall provide sufficient
which the work has been constructed. pumps, pipes and other equipment that may be
Where the work is not constructed in accordance with necessary. Where necessary, the Contractor shall
the authorized dimensions plus or minus any tolerances construct temporary berms, culverts and channels to
allowed, the Engineer may nevertheless in his sole drain away the water, but, in order to limit such work as
discretion accept the work for payment. In such cases far as possible, the permanent drainage provided in the
no payment shall be made in respect of quantities of Contract shall be constructed at the earliest opportunity
work or material in excess of those calculated from the as may be practicable.
authorized dimensions and, where the actual Payment for dealing with water shall be included in the
dimensions are less than the authorized dimensions Contractor's rates for preliminary and general charges,
minus any tolerance allowed, quantities for payment except in so far as special provision for dealing with
shall be based on the actual dimensions as constructed. water may be made elsewhere in the Specifications.
26 SIGNS AND LIGHTING 28 VARIATIONS FROM SPECIFIED NOMINAL
Without limiting the Engineer's right to request RATES OF APPLICATION OR NOMINAL MIX
additional requirements in terms of the General and PROPORTIONS
Special Conditions of Contract, the following shall be
regarded as the minimum requirements for safety and The various sections of these Specifications prescribe
security of the Works: nominal rates of application or nominal mix proportions
for materials such as bituminous materials, aggregates,
26.01 Watching mineral fillers, stabilizing agents, paint and the like.
At least one watchman shall be employed after hours to Tenderers shall base their Tenders on these nominal
patrol the Works and to ensure, inter alia, that all rates of application and mix proportions.
001-9
Allowance is made, in the various sections of the Such facilities shall at all times be maintained in a clean
Specifications where such rates of application and mix and hygienic condition and shall be sited so as not to be
proportions are given, for variations arising from offensive.
different rates of application or mix proportions ordered
The Contractor shall provide and maintain the facilities
by the Engineer to suit the materials and conditions on
and move them to the required positions, and finally
Site in every particular case.
remove them, on completion of the Works, all to the
Where the actual rates of application or mix proportions satisfaction of the Health Care Division of the relevant
used in the Works vary from the nominal specified rates authority. Toilets must be screened from public view
or proportions, compensation will be adjusted as and their use shall be enforced.
follows:
The Contractor shall make arrangements where
(a) As a payment to the Contractor in respect of any necessary for the removal of night-soil.
authorized increase in the quantities specified
which has been ordered in writing by the Engineer; 29.04 Storage

or The Contractor shall provide adequate storage

accommodation for and/or protection to all perishable
(b) as a refund to the Employer in respect of any materials to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
decrease in the quantities specified, whether such
decrease results from an authorized decrease in All materials shall, in addition, be stored or stacked in
the rates of application or mix proportions, or from such positions as will preclude any interference with
unauthorized reductions made by the Contractor. traffic and any public rights or the progress of the Works.

Payment for a varied rate shall be based on the actual Materials subject to deterioration with time shall be
rate of application used, provided that this does not used in the order in which they have been received.
exceed the rate of application ordered by the Engineer
plus any tolerance in the rate of application allowed. If 30 COMMUNITY LIAISON OFFICER
the actual rate of application exceeds the above, When scheduled, the Contractor shall appoint a
payment shall be based on the rate of application Community Liaison Officer (CLO) from the local
ordered. If the actual rate of application is below the community after the person has been identified by the
rate of application ordered, payment shall be based on Ward Councillor and Ward Committee.
the actual rate of application regardless of any
tolerance allowed. Notwithstanding the above, the The Community Liaison Officer shall perform the
Engineer shall have full authority to reject work that has following duties:
been constructed at variance with the Specifications or Meet regularly with Ward Councillor, ward
the rates of application ordered by him. committee and the community;
The Employer shall be refunded for any decrease in the Attend and report at site meetings and PSC
specified rates of application or mix proportions at the meetings;
same price per unit of measurement as that tendered by
Coordinate community activities with construction
the Contractor for additional materials required by an
works;
increase in the rates of application or mix proportions.
Arrange special meetings;
29 THE CONTRACTOR'S ESTABLISHMENT ON Interact with the Contractor daily
SITE
Facilitate in resolving community disputes;
29.01 General Manage the labour desk
The Contractor shall establish his construction camp on - Coordinate local labour matters,
a Site made available for this purpose by the Employer, - Give feedback to the community on local labour
or selected by him and approved by the Engineer. matters,
The camp shall be fenced off and shall contain all - Recruit local labour and local entrepreneurs,
offices, stores, workshops, testing laboratories, toilet - Keep record of the wages and labour force,
facilities, etc. The camp shall always be kept in a neat - Facilitate in resolving labour disputes.
and tidy condition and, upon completion of the Works,
the camp shall be removed and the Site cleaned and The contract with the CLO shall make provision for
restored to its original condition as far as is practicable, payment by the Contractor to the CLO of a maximum
unless otherwise specified in the Project Specifications. amount calculated as follows:
Wage per Month = CTMM’s minimum B1-level monthly
29.02 Housing
notch (prior to deductions)
Unless the Contractor is specifically given permission in
the Project Specifications to erect temporary housing The contractor shall also be responsible for the
for personnel on the Site, no personnel will be allowed payment of contributions to all statutory charges
to reside on the Site. Only night-watchmen may be on The City of Tshwane Metropolitan Municipality’s
the Site after hours. Where permission is granted for (CTMM) current minimum B1-level monthly notch is
personnel to reside on Site, provision for housing must specified in the Project Specifications
be in accordance with the regulations of the relevant
authority. Only one CLO shall be appointed per project, however,
the functions of CLO and labour desk may be split
29.03 Workplace Facilities between persons with the understanding that the
Toilets, showers, change rooms and eating facilities remuneration will also be split.
shall be provided for the Contractor’s personnel in Should the Contractor experience any difficulty with
accordance with Regulation 28 of the Construction community matters, these matters shall immediately be
Regulations, 2003 (Government Gazette No 25207) and brought to the attention of the Engineer who shall
the Facilities Regulations 1988, (Government Notice arrange a meeting with the relevant Ward Councillor(s)
R1593 of 12 August 1988). and the CLO to resolve such matters.

001-10
31 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Subitem 001.01.01 "Fixed charges" shall be deemed to
include full compensation for all charges that do not
Note: vary with variations in the final completion time and/or
The Contractor's obligations under this section, the the final Contract Price.
General Conditions of Contract and the Special Payment of the lump sum tendered under
Conditions of Contract will be collectively measured and subitem 001.01.01 shall be made in three separate
paid for under pay item 001.01, except where separate instalments as follows:
pay items are provided as specified in clause 13,17 and
30 of this section or where pay items are provided • The first instalment, which is 40% of the lump sum,
under this section in the Project Specifications. will be paid when the Contractor has met all his
obligations to date under this section, the General
Item Unit Conditions of Contract and the Special Conditions of
001.01 Preliminary and general charges Contract, and where the value of work certified for
payment, excluding materials on Site and any
001.01.01 Fixed charges lump sum payments under preliminary and general items is
equal to not less than 5% of the total value of the
001.01.02 Time-related charges lump sum
work listed in the Schedule of Quantities.
The lump sums tendered for subitems 001.01.01 and
001.01.02 shall collectively include full compensation • The second instalment, which is 40% of the lump
for the following: sum, will be made when the amount certified for
payment, including retention monies but excluding
(a) All the Contractor's obligations in terms of the the second instalment referred to herein, exceeds
General Conditions of Contract, Special 50% of the Tender Price.
Conditions of Contract and this section of these
Specifications, except the following: • The final payment, which is 20% of the lump sum,
will be made when the Works have been certified as
• Work carried out for the purpose of locating completed and the Contractor has fulfilled all his
and exposing existing services which will be obligations to date under this section, the General
paid for under pay items 001.02 and 001.03 Conditions of Contract and the Special Conditions of
respectively as well as work specified in the Contract.
Project Specifications and for which separate
pay items are provided. The lump sum tendered under subitem 001.01.02 above
shall represent that part of the Contractor's preliminary
• The cost of preparing alternative offers, which and general charges which is related to the time
shall be included in the rates for items of work required for the completion of the Contract.
tendered for the alternative offers.
Payment of the lump sum tendered under
• Compensation for certain work of a general subitem 001.01.02 shall be made as follows:
nature such as quality control shall be deemed
to be included in the rates for the related items • A pro rata payment of the lump sum will be made
of work unless provision is made for separate monthly in the proportion that the value of the Works
payment. completed up to the date of the certificate bears to
the final value of the Works, estimated if not known,
• Compensation for risks, obligations and costs less the amount of all previous payments under this
associated more specifically with a certain type subitem.
of work which, at the Contractor's discretion,
may be included in the rates for the related • The amount of any additional or reduced time-
items of work. related preliminary and general charges to be paid
to the Contractor or to be subtracted from payments
(b) Site and head office overheads and profit.
to the Contractor, shall be calculated in accordance
(c) The Contractor's establishment on Site. with the following formula:
(d) All other obligations, costs and charges of a t
general nature for which no provision is made A = Cx wherein:
T
elsewhere in the Contract Documents, including
but not limited to - A = amount of time-related preliminary and
• moving personnel, equipment, materials and general charges to be paid in addition to C
plant to the Site, setting up, maintaining and to the Contractor or to be subtracted from
running the Contractor's establishment on Site C in payments to the Contractor
and removing them from the Site on completion
C = lump sum tendered under subitem 001.01.02
of the Works;
• controlling the quality of materials and t = time determined in accordance with the
workmanship, including the cost of performing General Conditions of Contract for which
such tests as may be necessary or required for additional or reduced time-related
this purpose except where the contrary is preliminary and general charges apply
specified elsewhere;
T = tendered completion period
• supplying, erecting and later removing any
name-boards as specified in clause 14 of this T and t shall have the same units in the formula.
section; The amount calculated in accordance with this
• all finishing and clearing of the Site not formula shall be taken to be the amount agreed
specified in other sections of these upon for full compensation for additional or reduced
Specifications, and the clearing of all drainage time-related preliminary and general charges.
structures and streams of debris, soil, silt and
other material.

001-11
Item Unit 001.04.03 Provision of construction
supervisors lump sum
001.02 Locating existing services lump sum
The lump sum tendered shall include full compensation
The tendered lump sum shall include full compensation
for the provision of one or more competent and
for the supply or hiring of specialized detecting
experienced construction supervisors as may be
equipment, for the use of such equipment and for
necessary for the duration of the construction work.
drawing up plans of the located services as specified.
Alternatively an approved specialist firm may be The payment will be made in four equal instalments
employed to carry out the work. when the value of all permanent work done, excluding
escalation, reaches 25%, 50% and 75% of the Tender
Item Unit Price. The final payment will be payable when the
001.03 Excavate by hand to expose completion certificate has been issued.
3
existing services, and backfill cubic metre (m )
001.04.04 Provision of a safety officer
The unit of measurement shall be the cubic metre of (state full-time or part-time) lump sum
material excavated.
The lump sum tendered shall include full compensation
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for all for the provision of a competent and experienced safety
hand excavation within the lengths and widths officer, part-time or full-time as the case may be, for the
authorized by the Engineer and the depth required to duration of the construction work.
expose the service (excavation in excess of the
authorized dimensions shall not be measured for The payment will be made in four equal instalments
payment), for backfilling and compacting to a minimum when the value of all permanent work done, excluding
of 90% of modified AASHTO density, for disposal of any escalation, reaches 25%, 50% and 75% of the Tender
excavated material not required for backfilling, for Price. The final payment will be payable when the
keeping excavations safe, for dealing with any surface completion certificate has been issued.
or subsurface water, for taking special care to ensure
that services are not damaged in any way, and for any 001.04.05 Health and Safety training lump sum
other operation necessary to complete the work. The The lump sum tendered shall include full compensation
tendered rate shall also include the transporting of for the provision of training programs for the
surplus excavated material within the defined free-haul contractor’s employees and also, where applicable, for
boundaries as well as for supplying adequate sub-contractors.
supervision during both excavation and backfilling
operations. Eighty per cent (80%) of the amount will be paid when
the contractor’s personnel and sub-contractors, where
No distinction will be made between hard and soft relevant, have received health and safety training. A
material neither will distinction be made between the further 10% will be paid when the value of all work
various types of services to be exposed or the depths to done, excluding escalation, exceeds one-half of the
which excavations are taken. Tender Price, and the remaining 10% will be payable
Item Unit when the completion certificate has been issued.

001.04 Compliance with the 001.04.06 Provision of personal

Occupational Health and protective clothing and
Safety Act and applicable equipment lump sum
regulations
The lump sum tendered shall include full compensation
001.04.01 Provision of a Health and for the provision, maintenance, repair and/or
Safety plan lump sum replacement of damaged or unsuitable protective
clothing and equipment for use by the contractor’s
The lump sum tendered shall include full compensation employees, subcontractors and visitors on site.
for the provision and maintenance of a health and
safety plan, risk assessment, permit applications and Sixty per cent (60%) of the amount will be paid when
notifications as called for in the act and regulations. the contractor’s personnel and sub-contractors, where
relevant, have received personal protective clothing and
Eighty per cent (80%) of the amount will be paid when equipment. The payment of the remaining amount will
an approved health and safety plan has been received be made in four equal instalments when the value of all
by the client. A further 10% will be paid when the value permanent work done, excluding escalation, reaches
of all work done, excluding escalation, exceeds one-half 25%, 50% and 75% of the Tender Price. The final
of the Tender Price, and the remaining 10% will be payment will be payable when the completion certificate
payable when the completion certificate has been has been issued.
issued.
001.04.07 Provision of safety fences,
001.04.02 Provision of Health and signs and barricades lump sum
Safety file lump sum
The lump sum tendered shall include full compensation
The lump sum tendered shall include full compensation for the provision of safety fences, signs and barricades
for the provision and maintenance of a health and as well as maintenance, repair and/or replacement of
safety file on site containing all the documentation damaged safety fences, signs and barricades and for all
required in terms of the act and applicable regulations. labour and costs required for the placement, removal or
The payment will be made in four equal instalments moving to fresh positions as and when necessary. The
when the value of all permanent work done, excluding cost of safeguarding the above items against theft and
escalation, reaches 25%, 50% and 75% of the Tender vandalism shall also be included in the tendered sum.
Price. The final payment will be made when a
consolidated health and safety file is handed to the
client on completion of the works.

001-12
The payment will be made in four equal instalments
when the value of all permanent work done, excluding
escalation, reaches 25%, 50% and 75% of the Tender
Price. The final payment will be payable when the
completion certificate has been issued.

01.04.08 Other obligations

01.04.08.01 Short description of

obligation Lump sum

01.04.08.02 Etc for other obligations Lump sum

The lump sum tendered shall include full compensation
for the contractor’s obligations in terms of the
occupational health and safety act and supporting
regulations not specifically covered in the items above.
The payment will be made in four equal instalments
when the value of all permanent work done, excluding
escalation, reaches 25%, 50% and 75% of the Tender
Price. The final payment will be payable when the
completion certificate has been issued.
001.05 Community liaison officer Lump sum
The lump sum tendered shall include full compensation
for the appointment of a community liaison officer for
the duration of the construction works.
Payment shall be made in equal monthly instalments,
spread over the tendered completion period, upon proof
of payment to the Community Liaison Officer.
In the event of the construction period exceeding the
tendered completion period and no extension of time
been granted, the Contractor shall still pay the
Community Liaison Officer the specified remuneration,
but shall not be reimbursed therefor.

Note:
The following item of work, when specified, shall be
carried out, measured and paid for in accordance with
the relevant sections of the Specifications, but shall be
listed under this section in the Schedule of Quantities.

Item Applicable section

(a) Overhaul on surplus excavated-material 103

001-13
SERIES 0 : GENERAL (b) General-purpose steel cabinets shall have at least
1,5 m2 shelf area and a volume of 0,70 m3 each.
SECTION 002 : ENGINEER'S ACCOMMODATION Each cabinet shall have a lock with two keys.

CONTENTS (c) Steel filing cabinets shall each be fitted with four
drawers on runners. Each cabinet shall be fitted
01 SCOPE with a lock and shall be 1 300 mm high, 460 mm
02 OFFICE AND LABORATORY ACCOMMODATION wide and 600 mm from front to back.
03 HOUSING (d) Shelves shall be suitable for storing all the
04 SERVICES Contract Drawings or shall be as detailed on the
05 GENERAL Drawings.
06 SURVEY EQUIPMENT AND ASSISTANTS
(e) Each wash-hand basin shall be fitted with taps and
07 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT a drain.

01 SCOPE (f) Air-conditioning units and heaters shall be as

specified in subclause 02.06 of this clause.
This section covers the provision of accommodation for
the Engineer's resident staff. This accommodation (g) Lights shall be of the fluorescent type, either
includes the necessary office space, laboratory double 80 W, single 80 W or double 55 W, or of
accommodation and houses, as well as the provision of the incandescent type, as may be required or
all the services required. specified.
(h) Each draughtsman's stool shall be fitted with a
02 OFFICE AND LABORATORY ACCOMMODATION padded seat, the height of which shall be
02.01 General requirements adjustable.

The various units of accommodation and the fittings (i) Electric power plug points shall be provided. Each
office shall have at least two 15 A plug points.
shall be constructed in accordance with the details
Earth leakage shall be provided for the local
shown on the Drawings, given in the Project
authority's network.
Specifications or provided by the Engineer.
(j) Each drawing table shall have either an inclined or
The siting and orientation of all offices, laboratories,
a horizontal surface, as may be required, and a
housing or other accommodation shall be to the
smooth top constructed to the dimensions shown
Engineer's satisfaction and shall be decided on in
on the Drawings.
consultation with him and confirmed in writing before
erection. All accommodation shall include the provision (k) Chairs shall be sturdy and comfortable.
of 240 V electricity and, where required, fresh clean
potable water and sewerage, including septic tanks if (l) Telephone extensions shall be provided as
necessary, which will be considered to be part and specified and tendered rates shall include the cost
parcel of the accommodation provided and will not be of all local calls and trunk calls in connection with
paid for separately, except in so far as their costs are the Works.
covered under pay item 002.01. (m) Each conference table shall be large enough to
Buildings for offices and laboratories shall be seat the number of persons stipulated on the
constructed of timber, fibre-cement or other approved Drawings and schedules.
materials. The huts shall have double walls filled with (n) Blinds shall be one of two types:
insulating material and lined on the inside with timber or
other approved material. Ceilings shall be provided for (i) Venetian blinds shall be adjustable so as to
both office and laboratory huts. Office huts shall have permit light to enter the room but shall shut
timber floors or concrete floors with vinyl floor tiles and out direct sunlight.
laboratory huts shall have concrete floors.
(ii) Opaque roller blinds.
The clear height of all offices between floor and ceiling
shall be a minimum of 2,4 m. All windows shall be of the 02.03 Laboratories
type of which the full window area can open.
All or any of four types of laboratories may be required:
After erection, the office and laboratory huts shall be laboratories for soils, bituminous materials, chemistry
painted with an approved paint and the paintwork shall and concrete testing.
be maintained during the Contract Period.
The sizes, layout and other details of the laboratories
Each door shall be provided with a lock and two keys. shall be as shown on the Drawings and schedules of
fittings, equipment and furniture.
All accommodation shall meet with the approval of the
Engineer. The laboratories, fittings, furniture and equipment shall
conform to the following:
02.02 Offices
(a) Conventional chairs, telephone extensions,
The various types of offices required shall be as electricity plug points, air-conditioners, heaters
detailed in the Project Specifications or as shown on the and lights shall be as specified for offices,
Drawings. All offices shall be dustproof. All fittings, including earth-leakage protection where
furniture and equipment detailed in the Project necessary.
Specifications or as shown on the Drawings and
schedules of fittings, equipment and furniture shall be (b) Shelf space provided against walls shall be of
provided and shall conform to the following heavy construction and shelving shall be of
requirements: suitable timber or fibre-cement material as
required. Shelving below work tables shall be
(a) Each office desk shall have a surface area of at 390 mm above floor level. Shelving above working
2
least 1,5 m and shall be provided with at least areas shall be 1 980 mm above floor level.
three drawers, one of which can be locked.

002-1
(c) Work-bench areas shall be one of two types, as 02.04 Carports
may be required:
Carports shall be so constructed as to protect the vehicles
(i) Of wooden construction: The tops shall be hard parked under them at all times against the weather and
and smooth, free from warping or other sun. The car ports shall each be at least 20 m2 in area
defects. and their floors shall consist of a layer of concrete or
broken stone to minimize dusty and muddy conditions.
(ii) With concrete tops: The tops shall be at least
75 mm thick concrete slabs with a smooth, 02.05 Areas surrounding offices and laboratories
hard steel-trowelled finish.
The access and other roads and parking areas
All work benches shall be solid and their upper surrounding the offices and laboratories shall be treated
surfaces shall be 920 mm above floor level. and maintained to make them dust free, either by using
crushed stone or bituminous surfacing, or by any other
(d) Gas installations shall consist of the necessary approved means. They shall be well drained and kept
gas cylinders, regulators, tubing, taps and suitable trafficable and free from mud at all times. Footpaths
approved burners. The number of burners shall be shall be similarly treated to provide convenient access
as specified in the schedules. to all buildings.
(e) High stools for use at work benches shall be solid 02.06 Air-conditioning units and heaters
and of a fixed height of 800 mm.
The Contractor shall provide and install air-conditioning
(f) Where required, a 415 V, 3-phase electric power units and heaters as specified in the Project
supply shall be provided. Power points for ovens Specifications. The air-conditioning unit shall be an
and a crusher shall be adequate. Power points in electrically operated compressor type with closed
oven rooms shall be 1,2 m above floor level. circuit, and not an evaporation type. The capacity of the
air-conditioning units shall be at least 2,2 kW each.
(g) Concrete working floors shall be at least 125 mm
thick and shall have a hard, smooth finish. The Heaters shall be preferably of the space-heating type
working areas shall be either entirely open or without exposed elements and shall have a capacity of
under a lean-to roof, as required. not less than 1,5 kW each.

(h) Wash-hand basins shall be as ordered, either of 02.07 Ablution units

stainless steel or of precast concrete, at least
2 Ablution units shall be constructed in accordance with the
0,3 m in size and with a minimum depth of 0,3 m,
requirements of the relevant authority and the details
and shall be provided with swan-neck type
shown on the Drawings or given in the Project
laboratory taps and drain pipes.
Specifications. They may be constructed from fibre-cement
(i) A supply of fresh clean potable water at a constant sheeting with steel frames or from other suitable approved
head of not less than 3 m at the taps shall be materials, and the floors shall be of concrete with vinyl
provided. Storage capacity for the laboratory water floor tiles. Latrines shall be provided with vitreous enamel
supply shall be not less than 700 litre. WC pans with PVC seats, covers and flushing cisterns.
Wash-hand basins shall be of vitreous enamel of the
(j) Fire extinguishers shall be manufactured to minimum size, complete with taps and drains.
SANS 1151 and suitable for types A, B and E fires.
The extinguishers shall contain not less than Provision shall be made for sanitary arrangements, as
2,5 kg of extinguishing fluid and shall be fitted to specified in clause 04 of this section.
the wall in suitable positions by means of quick- Where required, a separate shower and change-room
release brackets. They shall be kept freshly section shall be provided, complete with shower, hot
charged and their seals shall be unbroken. If and cold running water and drains.
necessary they shall be serviced and recharged
every twelve months. Each latrine or shower shall be provided with a door
fitted with a latch. Each ablution unit shall be provided
(k) Any extractor fans required shall be mounted so with an outside door with a lock. At least two keys shall
as to operate silently and they shall have a be provided for each lock.
capacity of at least 0,15 kW each.
03 HOUSING
(l) Fume cupboards shall be constructed in
accordance with the details shown on the No housing for the Engineer’s supervisory staff will be
Drawings. required.
(m) When required a jaw-type gravel crusher suitable 04 SERVICES
for crushing gravel material to less than 13,2 mm
shall be provided. It shall be fitted with a 100 mm x 04.01 Sanitary arrangements
150 mm jaw complete on a concrete foundation
The Contractor shall be responsible for providing all
and with its own power connection and switchgear.
sanitary services necessary to keep latrines in a clean,
(n) Where required, concrete footings and pedestals neat and hygienic condition.
for the installation of certain test equipment shall When no municipal sewage connection is available, the
be constructed to the dimensions indicated by the Contractor shall provide the necessary septic tanks for
Engineer. all latrines. Waste water and septic-tank effluent shall
(o) When required, temperature-controlled baths for run off in properly designed French drains.
the curing of concrete test cubes, beams and Where the construction of septic tanks or water-borne
cylinders shall be provided. The baths shall be of sewerage is not feasible, the Contractor shall construct
the size as shown on the Drawings and shall be conservancy tanks and shall make arrangements for
provided with automatic temperature control and sewage removal and disposal.
suitable circulating pumps. The baths shall be
made from heavy-gauge galvanized iron or other The Contractor shall make provision for the removal of
suitable approved material. all rubbish.

002-2
04.02 Water, electricity, gas and telephone 06 SURVEY EQUIPMENT AND ASSISTANTS
The Contractor shall provide a constant supply of clean Survey equipment shall be provided, maintained and
potable water suitable for human consumption, as well insured by the Contractor for the duration of the
as the necessary 240 V power supply to the offices and Contract and shall consist of a theodolite and an
laboratories and a separate telephone service to the automatic level each fitted with an optical plumb as well
Engineer's office as soon as this service is available. as the necessary tripods, metric staffs with built-in
plumb bubbles, ranging rods and tapes.
Where specified, the Contractor shall provide 415 V, 3-
phase power to the laboratories. The specified 240 V The instruments and accessories shall be approved by
power available shall be not less than 10 kVA for each the Engineer and shall be serviced and adjusted for
40 m2 of laboratory space with a minimum of 10 kVA. If accuracy prior to bringing them onto the Site. A
415 V, 3-phase electricity is required for the laboratories, certificate stating that this has been done shall be
the power available shall be not less than 12 kVA per provided.
2
50 m of laboratory space with a minimum of 12 kVA.
The equipment shall be for the exclusive use of the
Electric power shall be supplied to the laboratories Engineer's supervisory staff and shall, when no longer
24 hours per day and shall be available between 06:00 required, be returned to the Contractor.
and 22:00 for the offices.
The Contractor shall also make available to the
The Contractor shall also provide a constant supply of Engineer's supervisory staff at least two capable survey
liquid petroleum gas for the burners used in the assistants as and when required.
laboratories.
07 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
04.03 Maintenance
Item Unit
The Contractor shall provide all labour, equipment and
material which may be necessary to keep all 002.01 Services
accommodation in a neat and clean condition, and
repairs shall be done immediately upon their being The provision of water, electricity,
requested by the Engineer. telephone, low-pressure gas, sewerage,
septic tanks, sewage and rubbish
04.04 Cooking facilities removal, cleaning services, maintenance
and repairs, all as specified in clause 04
The Contractor shall make available suitable cooking of this section:
facilities for the Engineer's Site staff and shall provide a
regular supply of fuel for cooking. The cooking area 002.01.01 Services for offices and
shall be kept clean and tidy. laboratories lump sum

05 GENERAL 002.01.02 Services for cooking and

ablution facilities on Site for
(a) The Contractor shall not order any buildings, the Engineer’s Site staff lump sum
materials, equipment or fittings on the basis of
their having been specified or scheduled without Payment of the lump sums tendered shall be in full
the written confirmation of the Engineer having compensation for the provision of the services
been obtained. No buildings shall be erected specified. Payment will be made in four equal
without the Engineer's written instructions as to the instalments. The first three instalments will be paid
exact position and orientation of the buildings. when the value of all permanent work done, excluding
escalation, reaches 25%, 50% and 75% of the Tender
(b) Unless otherwise agreed upon, the offices and Price. The final payment will be made when all the
laboratories shall be erected in close proximity to accommodation provided has been removed from the
the Contractor's offices and laboratories. Should Site.
the Contractor decide to move his own offices
and/or laboratories to a new site, the offices, Item Unit
laboratories and other buildings erected for the
use of the Engineer shall, if so required by the 002.02 Treatment and maintenance of
Engineer, be moved to the new site and re-erected areas surrounding offices and
at no additional charge. laboratories

(c) The Contractor may not proceed with the The treatment and maintenance of access
permanent Works before the required offices and and other roads and parking areas
laboratories have been erected by him. surrounding the offices and laboratories
and of footpaths providing access to all
(d) The ownership of all offices, laboratories, sanitary buildings, all as specified in subclause
facilities, laboratory equipment and other items
02.05 of this section lump sum
provided by the Contractor shall, when they are no
longer required by the Engineer, revert to the The tendered lump sum shall be in full compensation for
Contractor on the written advice of the Engineer the treatment and maintenance of the areas specified.
and shall be dismantled and removed from the The payment will be made in four equal instalments
Site. when the value of all permanent work done, excluding
(e) The Contractor shall take all reasonable escalation, reaches 25%, 50% and 75% of the Tender
precautions to prevent unauthorized entry to the Price.
offices and laboratories and to ensure the general The final payment will be made when all the
security of the offices and laboratories. accommodation provided has been removed from the
(f) No accommodation shall be erected without the prior Site.
approval of the Drawings by all local or Government
authorities requiring such prior approval.

002-3
Note:
Calculation of additional or reduced time-related
amounts for items 002.01 and 002.02:
Any additional or reduced time-related amounts to be
paid to the Contractor or to be subtracted from
payments to the Contractor in respect of items 002.01
and 002.02, shall be determined in accordance with the
following formula:
t
A = Cx wherein:
T
A = amount to be paid in addition to C to the
Contractor or to be subtracted from C in
payments to the Contractor
C = lump sum tendered under subitems 002.01.01 or
002.01.02 or item 002.02, as applicable
t = time determined in accordance with the General
Conditions of Contract for which additional or
reduced amounts in respect of C apply
T = tendered completion period.
T and t shall have the same units in the formula.
The amount calculated in accordance with this formula
shall be taken to be the amount agreed upon in full
compensation for additional or reduced costs under the
relevant pay item.

Item Unit
002.03 Office and laboratory accommodation
Office and laboratory accommodation,
including fittings, furniture and equipment
and car ports, all as specified in the
Project Specifications and/or as shown on
the Drawings and schedules lump sum
The tendered lump sum shall be in full compensation for
the supplying and erecting of the accommodation,
fittings, furniture and equipment as specified and as
shown on the Drawings and schedules and for their
proper maintenance and for their subsequent removal
from the Site on completion of the Works.
Eighty per cent (80%) of the amount will be paid when
the office and laboratory accommodation have been
provided complete with all the fittings, furniture and
equipment, all to the Engineer's satisfaction. A further
10% will be paid when the value of all work done,
excluding escalation, exceeds one-half of the Tender
Price, and the remaining 10% will be payable in the
certificate which follows the removal of the items from
the Site.

Item Unit
002.04 Provision of survey equipment
and assistants lump sum
The tendered lump sum shall include full compensation
for the provision and maintenance of survey equipment
and for making available at least two survey assistants
as specified.
Eighty per cent (80%) of the amount will be paid when
all the survey equipment has been provided and
approved by the Engineer. A further 10% will be paid
when the value of all work done, excluding escalation,
exceeds one-half of the Tender Price, and the
remaining 10% will be payable when the Certificate of
Completion is issued.

002-4
SERIES 1 : ANCILLARY WORK bulldozer with a mass of approximately 20 t and a
flywheel power of approximately 130 kW. (Structures
SECTION 101 : SITE CLEARING AND GRUBBING that cannot be so cleared shall be dealt with as
specified in Item 101.05, the Project Specifications
or as directed by the Engineer.)
CONTENTS
The moving of a certain amount of soil or gravel may be
01 SCOPE inherent in or unavoidable during the clearing process.
02 GENERAL No extra payment will be made for the removal of such
03 AREAS TO BE CLEARED AND GRUBBED soil or gravel.
04 CLEARING Areas that are cleared in strips for the purpose of
05 GRUBBING constructing fences shall be cleared over the full length
06 THE CUTTING OF TREES of the fence to a width as specified in the Project
07 THE RECLEARING OF VEGETATION Specifications and as scheduled. Surface irregularities
08 THE CONSERVATION OF TOPSOIL shall, in the case of fencing, be so graded that the fence
09 THE CONSERVATION OF FLORA will follow the general ground contour.
10 THE DISPOSAL OF MATERIAL
11 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
05 GRUBBING
01 SCOPE All stumps and roots exceeding 75 mm in diameter shall
be removed to a depth of at least 100 mm below the
This section covers the clearing of the Site and the original ground level. In the case of roads and parking
grubbing necessary for the construction of the Works areas, grubbing shall be done to a depth of at least 600
covered by the Contract. mm below the projected finished road level. Where a
construction bed or any other area has to be compacted,
Reference shall be made to clause 02 of section 202
all stumps and roots including matted roots shall be
regarding the payment of clearing and grubbing for
removed to a depth of at least 200 mm below the
trenching operations.
cleared surface.

02 GENERAL All material produced by the grubbing shall be disposed

of.
The taking down of fences and the sorting, coiling and
stacking of the fencing material are specified in and Except in borrow areas, cavities caused by grubbing
shall be measured and paid for under section 105. shall be backfilled with approved material and
compacted to a density equal to at least that of the
Pipelines, electricity transmission lines and cables, surrounding ground.
telephone lines and cables and other existing services
shall be dealt with as specified in clause 13 of section 06 THE CUTTING OF TREES
001.
06.01 Protection of persons, animals and structures
03 AREAS TO BE CLEARED AND GRUBBED The Contractor shall take the necessary precautions to
Normally borrow areas and the portions of the Site on prevent injury to persons and animals and damage to
which excavations are to be made and embankments, structures and other private and public property.
fences and structures are to be constructed, shall be Where necessary, trees shall be cut in sections from the
cleared or grubbed, or both, but the Contractor shall not top downwards.
commence clearing and/or for grubbing until the
Engineer has designated, in writing and in detail, the 06.02 Branches overhanging boundaries
exact areas or strips to be cleared and/or grubbed and
the time when the work is to start. The Contractor shall The branches of trees to be left standing shall be so
ensure that the general shape, profile, and levels of the trimmed as not to encroach upon the space (to a height
area are not materially altered during clearing and of at least 7 m) vertically above any carriageway, railway
grubbing operations. formation, or other designated area.

In order to avoid reclearing or to control dust or erosion 06.03 Preservation of trees

the Contractor shall, if so ordered, clear and grub at the
No tree shall be cut down and no branches shall be
latest practicable stage of construction.
trimmed off any of the trees to be preserved until the
Engineer has given written authorization for such work
04 CLEARING to commence. Individual trees indicated and marked by
the Engineer as trees to be preserved shall be left
Clearing shall involve the following:
standing and undamaged. The amount stated in the
• The removal of all trees and bushes (complete with Project Specifications shall be deducted from monies
roots), other vegetation, rubbish and all other owing to the Contractor as a penalty in respect of every
material that may interfere with the construction of such tree that has been damaged or removed
the Works. unnecessarily.

• The removal of all rocks and boulders of up to 06.04 Indigenous forest

3
0,15 m in size, which are lying on the surface to be
cleared or which are exposed during the clearing Before commencing the clearing of an indigenous forest
operations. or a part of such forest, the Contractor shall obtain from
the Engineer a copy of the written confirmation of the
• The disposal of all material produced by the clearing. Director-General of the Department of Environment
Affairs, and Tourism to the effect that work may be
• The removal and disposal of structures which proceeded with, and of the written instructions on which
encroach upon or may otherwise obstruct other work the Contractor is required to act.
on the Site and which can be cleared by means of a

101-1
07 THE RECLEARING OF VEGETATION 11 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
If during the currency of the Contract vegetation should Item Unit
again grow on any portion of the Site, borrow areas, or
other areas or strips that have been cleared in 101.01 Clearing and grubbing
accordance with the Specifications, the Engineer may, if 101.01.01 Areas square metre (m )
2
it is deemed by him to be necessary, order that such
area(s) be recleared. 101.01.02 Strips (width indicated) metre (m)
Such reclearing shall include the removal and disposal The unit of measurement for clearing and grubbing is
of grass, shrubs, and other vegetation, grubbing, the the square metre or metre.
backfilling of holes, and the removal, transport and Only those areas or strips designated by the Engineer
disposal of material produced by these operations, as under clause 03 of this section and cleared and grubbed
during the first clearing and grubbing operation. in accordance with the requirements of this section shall
be measured.
08 THE CONSERVATION OF TOPSOIL
The tendered rates shall include full compensation for
When suitable topsoil is found within the limits of the clearing the surface, removing boulders with a size of up
area to be cleared, the Contractor shall, if so ordered by 3
to 0,15 m , cutting trees with single or multiple trunks
the Engineer, remove and conserve the topsoil together each with a girth of 1 m or less, grubbing the stumps
with any grass or other acceptable vegetation in and roots of such trees, cutting trunks and branches into
accordance with the requirements specified in section transportable lengths, backfilling cavities, demolishing
201. If it is not used immediately, or if it is not stockpiled structures, and removing, transporting and disposing of
in windrows clear of the working areas, the topsoil shall material thus cleared, grubbed, cut and demolished.
be transported and deposited in stockpiles for later use. Boulders exceeding 0,15 m3 in size shall be dealt with
The Contractor will not be required to remove topsoil as set out in series 2.
from any area in which the average depth of the topsoil
is less than 150 mm. Item Unit
The removal, stockpiling and placing of topsoil shall be 101.02 Cutting and removing large
measured and paid for under section 104 except in the trees with a girth-
case of trenching operations, in respect of which
reference shall be made to clause 05 of section 202. 101.02.01 exceeding 1 m and up to
and including 2 m number (No)
Where the topsoil can be removed without prior clearing
and grubbing, no payment will be made for clearing and 101.02.02 exceeding 2 m and up to
grubbing under this section. and including 3 m number (No)

09 THE CONSERVATION OF FLORA 101.02.03 etc in steps of 1 m

When so required in terms of the Project Specifications, The unit of measurement shall be the number of tree
certain designated flora encountered in areas to be trunks cut and removed in each size group. The girth of
cleared, including borrow areas, shall be preserved by a tree trunk will be measured at the narrowest point of
the Contractor. He shall carefully remove and plant the the trunk in the first metre of its height above ground
flora in a protected and fenced-off area, and on level.
completion of the Works he shall replant the flora on the The tendered rates shall include full compensation for
Site or in the borrow areas in accordance with the cutting the trees, for cutting the trunks and branches into
Engineer's instructions. transportable lengths, and for removing, transporting
and disposing of all such trees, trunks, branches and
10 THE DISPOSAL OF MATERIAL associated material.
Any material obtained from clearing and grubbing, the Item Unit
demolition of structures, the reclearing of vegetation and
the cutting of trees shall be disposed of in borrow pits or 101.03 Grubbing and the removal of the
other suitable places indicated by the Engineer. Spoil stumps and roots of large trees
areas shall be treated as specified for borrow areas in with a girth-
the third last paragraph of clause 05 section 201. Where 101.03.01 exceeding 1 m and up to and
no such place for the disposal of material is indicated by including 2 m number (No)
the Engineer, the Contractor shall make his own
arrangements to provide a suitable place which 101.03.02 exceeding 2 m and up to and
complies with the requirements laid down by the including 3 m number (No)
Engineer. The disposal or burning if specially permitted
of combustible material on the Site may be done only 101.03.03 etc in steps of 1 m
with the prior written approval of the Engineer. Care The unit of measurement shall be the number of tree
shall be taken to observe the provisions of the stumps and associated roots of which were grubbed and
Atmospheric Pollution Prevention Act, 1965 (Act 45 of removed in each size group.
1965), and any regulations published in terms of the Act.
The tendered rates shall include full compensation for
All tree trunks and major branches shall be sawn into grubbing the stumps and roots, backfilling holes, cutting
transportable lengths before removal from the Site. the stumps and roots into transportable pieces, and
No haulage will be payable to the Contractor for the removing, transporting and disposing of all such stumps
disposal of material obtained from clearing and and roots and associated material.
grubbing, the demolition of structures, the reclearing of
The girth of a tree trunk shall be measured as specified
vegetation, and from the cutting of trees.
in item 101.02.

101-2
Item Unit Note:
101.04 Reclearing areas (only on the The following items of work, when specified, shall be
written instructions of the carried out, measured and paid for in accordance with
Engineer) the relevant sections of the Specifications, but shall be
listed under this section of the Schedule of Quantities.
101.04.01 Strips (width indicated) metre (m)
101.04.02 Areas not classified as Item Applicable section
2
strips square metre (m ) (a) Saw cutting of asphalt 606
The unit of measurement for reclearing areas which
have been previously cleared shall be the metre for
strips and the square metre for other areas.
The tendered rates shall include full compensation for
reclearing the surface in accordance with the
requirements of clause 07 of this section.
Item Unit
101.05 Removal and Disposal of
specific elements
101.05.01 Concrete Kerbing/Kerbing
combination metre (m)
101.05.02 Concrete or brick elements
(reinforced or unreinforced)
101.05.02.01 (Description and type of
3
material indicated) cubic metre (m )
101.05.02.02 Etc for other elements
and types of material
2
101.05.03 Asphalt surfacing square metre (m )

Note:
Separate items shall be scheduled for elements that are
too large or cannot be safely and efficiently cleared as
part of the clearing operations covered by clause 04 of
section 101.
101.05.01
The unit of measurement shall be per running metre
of the existing kerb removed.
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for
uplifting, demolishing, removing, transporting and the
disposal of material to a dump site.
101.05.02
The unit of measurement shall be the actual cubic
metres of existing concrete or brickwork broken out,
removed and disposed of. Dimensions in determining
volumes are to be confirmed on site by the Engineer
or his representative before the work commences.
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for
demolishing, removing, uplifting, transporting, the
disposal of material to a dump site and the backfilling
and finishing off of the excavation to the satisfaction
of the Engineer.
101.05.03
The unit of measurement shall be the actual square
metres of existing asphalt surfacing broken out,
removed and disposed of. Dimensions in
determining the areas are to be confirmed on site by
the Engineer or his representative before the work
commences.
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for
demolishing, removing, uplifting, transporting, the
disposal of material to a dump site and the backfilling
and finishing off of the excavation to the satisfaction
of the Engineer.

101-3
SERIES 1 : ANCILLARY WORK 02.04 Consultation and arrangements
At least three weeks before construction work in a
SECTION 102 : ACCOMMODATION OF TRAFFIC
railway or road reserve is due to commence, the
Contractor shall consult with the relevant authorities
CONTENTS and make arrangements with them in connection with
all traffic matters. The Contractor shall submit written
01 SCOPE
confirmation of such arrangements to the Engineer, and
02 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
construction shall not commence until the Engineer has
03 TRAFFIC CONTROL
approved the arrangements.
04 DRAINAGE WORKS FOR BYPASSES
05 EARTHWORKS FOR BYPASSES 02.05 Failure to comply with the provisions
06 GRAVEL WEARING COURSES FOR
BYPASSES The failure or refusal of the Contractor to construct or to
07 PAVEMENT LAYERS, STABILIZATION AND maintain or to construct and maintain bypasses and
ROAD MARKING FOR BITUMEN-SURFACED detours at the proper time, or to take the necessary
BYPASSES precautionary measures for the safety and convenience
08 BITUMEN-SURFACED BYPASSES of the traffic as required by the relevant statutory
09 TEMPORARY FENCING AND GATES authorities or as ordered by the Engineer, shall be
10 EXISTING ROADS USED AS BYPASSES sufficient cause for ordering all the work under this
11 MAINTENANCE OF GRAVEL BYPASSES AND Contract to be suspended until the Contractor has
EXISTING GRAVEL ROADS USED AS complied with all the specified requirements to the
BYPASSES satisfaction of the Engineer.
12 MAINTENANCE OF BITUMEN-SURFACED
BYPASSES AND EXISTING BITUMEN- 02.06 Width and vertical clearance
SURFACED ROADS USED AS BYPASSES The minimum usable width of bypasses and detours
13 THE CONTRACTOR'S USE OF BYPASSES accommodating two-way vehicular traffic shall be 9 m.
14 OBLITERATION OF BYPASSES Where bypasses or detours consist of two separate
15 TRAFFIC LIGHTS one-way lanes, the minimum usable width of each lane
16 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
shall be 5 m. The aforementioned widths may be
01 SCOPE reduced only with the written permission of the
Engineer.
This section covers the construction and maintenance
of the necessary detours and bypasses, barricades and The minimum vertical clearance over any portion of a
signs, and everything necessary for the safe and easy bypass or a detour for vehicular traffic shall be 4,9 m.
passage of all vehicular and pedestrian traffic during For pedestrian bypasses and detours the minimum
the construction and defects liability periods. It also usable width shall be 1,2 m and the minimum vertical
covers the obliteration of bypasses as they become clearance shall be 2,5 m.
redundant and the reinstatement of existing roads and
streets that were used as bypasses or detours. 02.07 Access to properties
In accordance with the requirements of the General
02 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Conditions of Contract, the Contractor shall at all times
02.01 Safe and easy passage of traffic provide and allow pedestrian and vehicular access to
properties that fall within or adjoin or are affected by the
During the construction and defects liability periods the area in which he is working. The Contractor shall at all
Contractor shall be responsible for the safe and easy times, wherever possible, keep open and maintain all
passage of vehicular and pedestrian traffic over, existing roads on or about the Site which may be
underneath, past or alongside the Works. affected by his operations in the execution of the
During all his operations and when using his machinery, Contract, and he shall construct and maintain to the
plant and equipment, the Contractor shall at all times satisfaction of the Engineer temporary access roads
take the necessary care to protect the public and to and steel or timber bridges over excavations in roads,
facilitate the traffic flow. pavements, entrances or accesses to properties.
Temporary pedestrian access bridges shall be at least
02.02 Haul and construction roads 1,2 m wide and temporary access bridges for vehicles
shall be at least 3,6 m wide. All temporary access
Before tendering, the Contractor shall ascertain the bridges shall be fitted with hand-rails as well as
need for haul and construction roads as well as the protective mesh fencing on both sides. On completion
extent of the work involved in connection therewith and of the work, the Contractor shall dismantle and remove
he shall satisfy himself of the feasibility of providing the all such temporary structures and reinstate the areas so
haul and construction roads that will be necessary for used and occupied to their former condition.
the execution of the Works in accordance with the
construction programme. Full compensation for providing access to properties,
excluding temporary access bridges, shall be included
The Contractor shall timeously submit detailed in the rate tendered for item 102.01. Temporary access
proposals for haul and construction roads to the bridges shall be measured and paid for under items
Engineer so that the Engineer's written approval can be 102.12 and 102.13.
obtained before construction commences.
02.08 Existing services
02.03 Bypasses and detours
Bypasses and detours shall be constructed in The Contractor shall comply with the requirements
accordance with the Engineer's instructions and the specified in clause 13 of section 001.
details shown on the Drawings and the requirements of Where no moving of services is required, the Contractor
the relevant sections of these Specifications. The shall clearly indicate where services cross the bypass
Contractor shall not commence with the construction of or detour so that these points will be clearly visible to
a bypass or a detour or any section thereof until he has operating staff.
obtained the Engineer's written permission to do so.

102-1
03 TRAFFIC CONTROL Where the construction of bypasses necessitates the
construction of elements of the permanent drainage
03.01 General requirements
works, such work will be measured and paid for under
Wherever the Contractor's activities on Site affect or the relevant sections of these Specifications.
have the potential to affect the normal flow or safety of
traffic during the construction and defects liability 05 EARTHWORKS FOR BYPASSES
periods, he shall be responsible for all aspects of traffic
control, including flagmen, warning devices, signs, The Contractor shall shape and grade the bypasses,
channelization devices, layout of detours and bypasses, making full use of all approved material that can be
sign sequences and layouts, and all the requirements of obtained from alongside the bypasses, or from the
the General Manager: Roads and Stormwater Division immediate vicinity. If sufficient material cannot be
and the Chief of Police, Tshwane Metropolitan Police obtained in this manner, he shall import material from
Department. other sources. Where necessary, cuttings shall be
made to obtain a satisfactory vertical alignment. Where
Full compensation for all aspects of traffic control as the in situ material is not sufficiently dense in its natural
specified in this clause shall, in the case of detours and condition, it shall be given a three-pass roller
bypasses, be included in the rate tendered for compaction as specified in section 203 prior to the
item 102.01, but, where construction takes place construction of the earthworks.
alongside an existing road as well as where trenches in
roadways obstruct the traffic flow, full compensation for The Contractor shall also do the necessary clearing and
all aspects of traffic control shall be included in the grubbing, including the removal of all trees and stumps,
rates tendered for item 102.14 and where applicable, all as specified in section 101. Clearing and grubbing
item 102.15. shall be measured and paid for in accordance with
section 101.
03.02 Warning devices, signs, speed limits and
channelization devices All material shall be watered, mixed and compacted
with suitable compaction equipment to give sufficient
The dimensions and other properties of all signs and density to the material so that it will be capable of
devices and the sign and device sequences, layouts carrying traffic without undue wear or distress. In case
and spacings shall be in accordance with the provisions of disagreement between the Engineer and the
of the National Road Traffic Act, (Act 93 of 1996) and Contractor as to the adequacy of this compaction, a dry
its Regulations. In addition, signs and devices shall be density of 90% of modified AASHTO density shall be
placed at the positions shown on the Drawings. In taken as the required minimum density.
cases not covered by the Act, the signs, speed limits,
devices, sequences, layouts and spacings shall comply Any fills which may be necessary for any reason, e.g.
with the requirements of The Southern African for the construction of drifts, shall be constructed and
Development Community Road Traffic Signs Manual, compacted by the Contractor as described above.
the General Manager: Roads and Stormwater Division, Wherever possible, drifts shall be constructed of rock fill
the Chief of Police, Tshwane Metropolitan Police or coarse material so as to limit flood water damage as
Department, and of the Engineer. far as possible.

03.03 Language 06 GRAVEL WEARING COURSES FOR

Traffic signs shall be alternately in Afrikaans and BYPASSES
English. When the earthworks for bypasses as described in
clause 05 of this section have been completed, those
04 DRAINAGE WORKS FOR BYPASSES portions of the bypasses and of existing gravel roads
The Contractor shall construct and maintain the used as bypasses indicated by the Engineer shall be
necessary temporary drainage works, such as side provided with a wearing course of suitable gravel
drains, catchwater drains, mitre drains, culverts, approved by the Engineer.
catchpits, chutes, berms, channels, etc, to deal The Contractor shall provide, spread, water, mix and
adequately with surface run-off. compact such material to a density at which it can carry
Temporary culverts shall be installed on existing traffic without undue wear and tear. In case of
drainage channels wherever required by the Engineer disagreement between the Engineer and the Contractor
and shall be of the sizes and types as ordered by him. as to the adequacy of the compaction, a dry density
equal to 93% of modified AASHTO density shall be
Suitable metal or precast concrete culverts salvaged taken as the required minimum density.
from existing roads or abandoned bypasses may be re-
used if they are in a good condition and approved by 07 PAVEMENT LAYERS, STABILIZATION AND
the Engineer.
ROAD MARKING FOR BITUMEN-SURFACED
Any damage caused to bypasses by the inability of BYPASSES
temporary culverts, installed in accordance with the
Engineer's instructions, to cope with floods, shall be Where shown on the Drawings or required by the
repaired and the Contractor shall be paid for the cost of Engineer, pavement layers such as gravel layers of
such work at applicable rates or, where no such rates subgrade or subbase quality, crushed-stone and
exist, the work shall be carried out on a daywork basis asphalt base courses, the stabilization of pavement
in accordance with the provisions of the General layers and road marking shall be constructed and
Conditions of Contract. measured and paid for in accordance with the
requirements of the relevant sections of these
Payment for the construction of temporary culverts will Specifications.
be made under the appropriate items provided in this
section. Full compensation for the construction of the
other temporary drainage works for bypasses and for
the maintenance of all drainage works including
temporary culverts shall be included in the rates
tendered for item 102.01.

102-2
08 BITUMEN-SURFACED BYPASSES 11 MAINTENANCE OF GRAVEL BYPASSES AND
EXISTING GRAVEL ROADS USED AS
08.01 Standard bituminous surfacing BYPASSES
The following bituminous surface treatment shall be The Contractor shall maintain all gravel bypasses and
applied to the central 7,4 m width of the top compacted existing gravel roads used as bypasses in a good and
pavement layer for two-way traffic and 3,7 m for single- safe trafficable condition for as long as they are used as
lane traffic, unless otherwise instructed or authorized by bypasses. Whenever required by the Engineer, the
the Engineer: roads and bypasses shall be bladed by means of self-
(a) Prime propelled graders to provide a smooth riding surface
free of corrugations. All potholes shall be promptly
The prime coat shall be applied as specified in repaired. The Engineer may also instruct the Contractor
section 605. Road tar of grade RTH 3/12P shall to water the bypasses to keep down dust or to facilitate
be used. the proper blading of the surface.
(b) Tack coat Maintenance shall also include the clearing and repair
of all drainage works, the repair and keeping in good
A coat of RTH 45/50 road tar shall be applied at a
condition of guard rails, guide posts, road signs and
rate of 1,0 /m2. This coat shall be applied only
fences, and painting and other incidental work.
after the prime coat has dried and, in the opinion
The blading of the surfaces of bypasses and the
of the Engineer, will not pick up under traffic.
application of gravel and water shall be measured and
(c) Crushed-stone aggregate paid for separately, but full compensation for all other
maintenance shall be deemed to be included in the rate
• Immediately after the tack coat has been tendered for item 102.01.
applied, it shall be covered by a 6,7 mm
nominal size crushed-stone aggregate at a 12 MAINTENANCE OF BITUMEN-SURFACED
3 2
spread rate of 0,0050 m /m . No more than BYPASSES AND EXISTING BITUMEN-
10 minutes shall elapse between application of SURFACED ROADS USED AS BYPASSES
the tack coat and spreading of the chips at any
particular point. All bitumen-surfaced bypasses and existing bitumen-
surfaced roads used as bypasses shall be maintained in
• Rolling shall be done as specified for the initial
a good and safe trafficable condition for as long as they
rolling in section 607.
are used as bypasses. Maintenance shall include the
• The grading of the 6,7 mm aggregate shall patching and repair of the bitumen surfacing, the
conform to that given in section 607 for 6,7 mm clearing of shoulders, the clearing of all drains,
aggregate. including culvert inlet and outlet drains, and other
incidental work, and the care and maintenance of all
08.02 Other types of surfacing road markings, guide posts, guard rails and fences.
Any other type of surfacing or surface course may be The cost of repairs to the bituminous surfacing and to
ordered in lieu of the surfacing specified above and the pavement layers shall be measured and paid for
payment will be at the appropriate rates tendered or separately under item 102.08. All the other maintenance
agreed on, as the case may be. of bitumen-surfaced bypasses shall be deemed to be
included in the rate tendered for item 102.01.
09 TEMPORARY FENCING AND GATES
13 THE CONTRACTOR'S USE OF BYPASSES
New fencing and gates shall be provided or existing
fencing and gates shall be moved and subsequently Where the Contractor constructs bypasses, haul or
reinstated in accordance with the Specifications and construction roads at his own initiative for
Drawings or, in the absence thereof, to standards accommodating construction traffic, he shall construct
acceptable to the property owners concerned. and maintain them at his own cost and in accordance
with details previously agreed on with the Engineer, in
New fencing and gates shall be removed when no
writing. Such roads shall be obliterated and the surface
longer required, and previously existing fencing and properly reinstated when no longer required, also at the
gates which have been temporarily moved shall be Contractor's own cost.
reinstated to their original position and condition.
The Contractor has the right to use public roads,
Temporary grid gates shall be constructed in including bypasses open to the public, but where his
accordance with the Drawings and shall be demolished own traffic causes excessive damage or wear to such
and removed when they are no longer required.
roads or constitutes a traffic hazard, the Engineer shall
have the right to regulate the Contractor's traffic over
10 EXISTING ROADS USED AS BYPASSES such bypasses and to require that the Contractor
The Contractor shall carry out all repairs, alterations or provide, at his own cost, such maintenance including
additions, as required by the Engineer, to bring existing wearing-course gravel and watering, as in the
roads which are to be used as bypasses in a good and Engineer's opinion is necessary in addition to any
safe trafficable condition. When existing roads are no requirements in respect of the proper maintenance of
longer required as bypasses, they shall be reinstated to the bypasses when not used by the Contractor's
their original condition. construction traffic. Where regulation of the Contractor's
traffic does not satisfactorily alleviate the traffic hazard,
Gravel courses for bypasses shall be measured and or the maintenance of the bypasses cannot be or is not
paid for under item 102.03. All other work ordered by properly executed, the Contractor shall, conditions
the Engineer in terms of this clause shall be measured permitting, divert his traffic over construction roads
and paid for under item 102.07. provided and maintained at his own cost.

102-3
14 OBLITERATION OF BYPASSES The unit of measurement shall be the metre bypasses
shaped, compacted and constructed in accordance with
On completion of construction, the bypasses which are the provisions of clause 05 of this section. Where the
no longer required and any sections of obsolete roads Contractor has to provide access roads to private
as may be instructed by the Engineer, shall be levelled property, the length of such access roads shall be
off with the original ground. Bituminous and asphalt included in the quantity measured for payment.
surfacing and crushed-stone layers shall be broken up
and removed from the Site, after which the entire area The tendered rate shall include full compensation for
occupied by the bypasses and obsolete roads shall be shaping, compacting and constructing the bypasses, all
scarified and broken up to a depth of 150 mm in order as specified in clause 05 of this section, but shall
to promote plant growth. include only those portions of the fills which do not
exceed 0,5 m in height and of which the fill material is
All work ordered by the Engineer in terms of this clause imported from a location not more than 100 m from the
shall be measured and paid for under item 102.16. point of use.
15 TRAFFIC LIGHTS 102.02.02 Cut and borrow to fill cubic metre (m )
3

Traffic lights shall be provided at the positions shown The unit of measurement shall be the cubic metre of fill
on the Drawings. The Contractor shall make all the measured in situ from levelled cross-sections taken
arrangements for the provision and installation of the before and after construction where such material is
traffic lights and shall in each case co-operate with the either imported from a point further than 100 m from the
relevant authority. point of use or is utilized in a portion of fill which is more
than 0,5 m above the original ground level.
16 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
Where measurement by cross-sections is considered by
Item Unit the Engineer to be impracticable, the in situ volume
shall be measured in a manner mutually agreed upon
102.01 Accommodation of traffic and by the Engineer and the Contractor.
maintenance of bypasses metre (m)
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for
The unit of measurement shall be the metre measured procuring and furnishing and the placing of all classes
along the centre line of the bypass constructed and of material, including transport. Where overhaul is
along the centre line of existing roads used as applicable, the requirements of section 103 shall apply.
bypasses and maintained by the Contractor. Sections
where traffic is diverted onto existing roads which the 102.02.03 Cut to spoil cubic metre (m3)
Contractor is not required to maintain shall not be
included. Where, on the Engineer's instructions, The unit of measurement shall be the cubic metre of
bypasses are provided as two one-way roads, the authorized excavation taken from cut in bypasses or
average length along the two roads shall be measured removed from fill in redundant bypasses and carted to
for payment. spoil on the instructions of the Engineer, all measured
in situ before excavation by means of levelled cross-
The tendered rate for the accommodation of traffic and sections.
the maintenance of bypasses shall include full
compensation for all general obligations and incidental The tendered rate shall include full compensation for
items of cost necessary for the accommodation of traffic excavating in all classes of material, loading,
and the maintenance of bypasses and of existing roads transporting, off-loading, including the shaping and
used as bypasses, during the construction period and levelling of spoil material and transport. Where overhaul
during the defects liability period where such items of is applicable, the requirements of section 103 shall
cost are not specifically paid for under the pay items apply.
provided under this section in the Schedule of Item Unit
Quantities. It shall also include full compensation for
traffic control, the provision of traffic signs and, where 102.03 Gravel wearing courses
necessary, communications equipment required to for bypasses cubic metre (m3)
regulate traffic, for the construction of temporary
drainage works, excluding temporary culverts, and for The unit of measurement shall be the cubic metre of
the maintenance of all drainage works, arranging for the gravel measured in the final position after compaction
moving of services, attending to traffic problems, and computed from the dimensions authorized by the
complying with the requirements of the Road Traffic Act Engineer.
and of the relevant local authorities, and for providing
Where measurement by the above method is
temporary access to properties, excluding temporary
considered by the Engineer to be impracticable, the
bridges.
volume may be computed in a manner mutually agreed
Payment shall be made in two equal instalments in upon by the Engineer and the Contractor.
respect of each section. The first instalment shall be
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for
made when suitable bypasses have been approved for
procuring and furnishing all materials and for the
use. The second instalment shall become due when the
construction of the gravel wearing course as specified,
traffic can again be accommodated on the permanent
including transport. Where overhaul is applicable, the
roads, all bypasses have been obliterated, all previously
requirements of section 103 shall apply.
existing roads have been reinstated and all general
obligations of the Contractor have been complied with, Item Unit
everything to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
102.04 Watering of bypasses kilolitre (k )
Item Unit
The unit of measurement shall be the kilolitre of water
102.02 Earthworks for bypasses applied to the bypasses on the written instructions of
the Engineer. Water required for the construction of
102.02.01 Shaping of bypasses metre (m) bypasses shall not be measured for payment.

102-4
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for Item Unit
the supply, transportation and application of the water.
Overhaul shall not apply to the transportation of water 102.09 Traffic lights provisional sum
used for the watering of bypasses. The provisional sum allowed for covering the cost of
Item Unit providing traffic lights shall be expended in accordance
with the provisions of the General Conditions of
102.05 Blading of bypasses Contract.
by motor grader kilometre pass (km pass)
Item Unit
The unit of measurement for using a motor grader to
blade the surface of bypasses shall be the kilometre 102.10 Temporary fencing and gates
pass, i.e. each kilometre of a full-width bypass the
whole surface of which has been bladed by one pass of 102.10.01 Temporary fencing metre (m)
the motor grader. Where bypasses are constructed as The unit of measurement shall be the metre of
two separate one-way roads, the average length along temporary fencing erected by the Contractor.
the two roads shall be considered to be one full-width
bypass for purposes of measurement. The tendered rate shall include full compensation for
the construction of fencing by supplying and using new
Only the number of kilometre passes actually
or approved second-hand material and its subsequent
authorized by the Engineer, in writing, shall be
removal, or for the moving and re-erection of existing
measured.
fencing when permitted by the Engineer and
Where the blading of bypasses has been carried out as subsequently the reinstating of such fencing to its
a single pass and the surface has not been improved as original condition, in its original position.
much as can reasonably be expected from such
operation, the Contractor shall, at his own cost, carry 102.10.02 Temporary gates number (No)
out further grader work until a satisfactory result is
The unit of measurement shall be the number of
obtained.
temporary gates provided by the Contractor.
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for
the provision of the motor graders and operators, The tendered rate shall include full compensation for
flagmen, guards, barriers, signs, and all other costs the supply and erection of new or approved second-
incidental thereto and for the blading of the bypasses to hand gates and their subsequent removal and the
a smooth surface free of corrugations. reinstating of the fencing, or for moving existing gates
where permitted and their subsequent removal, the
Item Unit reinstating of the fencing where it had been installed,
and reinstating of the gates in their original positions.
102.06 Standard bituminous
surfacing of bypasses square metre (m2) Item Unit
The unit of measurement shall be the square metre of 102.11 Temporary culverts
completed standard bituminous surfacing constructed
as specified in sub clause 08.01 of this section. Where 102.11.01 Supplying and laying temporary
any type other than the standard surfacing specified is prefabricated culverts complete
used, payment shall be as provided for in the relevant (state type, size and type of
section of series 6 of the Specifications or as provided bedding) metre (m)
for in the Project Specifications. The unit of measurement shall be the metre of culvert
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for provided and installed by the Contractor.
procuring and furnishing all materials and for the The tendered rate shall include full compensation for
construction of the bituminous surface as specified. procuring and providing new culverts, all excavations,
Item Unit bedding, laying and backfilling and the eventual
removal of the culverts, including excavation, loading,
102.07 Existing roads used as transporting off Site, and the reinstating of surfaces.
bypasses provisional sum
102.11.02 Re-using of pre-fabricated
The provisional sum allowed for covering the cost of
culverts complete (state type,
work ordered by the Engineer in terms of clause 10 of
size and type of bedding) metre (m)
this section shall be expended in accordance with the
provisions of the General Conditions of Contract. The unit of measurement shall be the metre of culvert
installed.
Item Unit
102.08 Maintenance of surfacing and The tendered rate shall include full compensation for
pavement layers of bitumen- taking up the culverts from their positions where they
surfaced bypasses and existing have been originally installed in bypasses and installing
bitumen-surfaced roads used them in new positions, including all excavation,
as bypasses provisional sum backfilling and bedding, the loading, transporting and
off-loading of the culverts, the eventual removal of the
The provisional sum allowed for covering the cost of culverts, including excavation, loading, transporting, off-
work ordered by the Engineer in terms of clause 12 of loading and stacking them at a suitable site, and the
this section for repairing and maintaining the bituminous reinstatement of surfaces.
surfacing and pavement layers of bitumen-surfaced
bypasses and existing bitumen-surfaced roads used as
bypasses shall be expended in accordance with the
provisions of the General Conditions of Contract.

102-5
Item Unit
• 102.14.01
102.12 Provision of temporary bridges
for maintaining access to The lump sum tendered for this item shall include
properties full compensation for all flagmen who may be
required to control traffic by way of flags or portable
102.12.01 Temporary pedestrian bridges number (No) STOP and GO-RY signs and shall include the
102.12.02 Temporary vehicular bridges number (No) provision of flags.

The unit of measurement shall be the number of • 102.14.02 to 102.14.05 and 102.14.07
temporary pedestrian and vehicular bridges actually The unit of measurement shall be the number of
provided in accordance with the Specifications and to each sign or light provided, and, as may be
the Engineer's satisfaction. applicable, completely erected. In the case of
The tendered rates shall include full compensation for subitem 102.14.02, the tendered rate shall include
the supply, first installation, maintenance and final full compensation for moving the sign as may be
dismantling and removal of the temporary access necessary.
bridges when no longer required, all as specified in • 102.14.06
subclause 02.07 of this section. A distinction shall be
made between temporary pedestrian and vehicular The unit of measurement shall be the square metre
access bridges for purposes of payment. of sign face, measured on the face of each item
provided. The tendered rate shall include full
Item Unit compensation for providing and erecting each sign,
complete with posts.
102.13 Moving of temporary bridges
to and their re-erection in • 102.14.08
entirely new positions
The unit of measurement shall be the number of
102.13.01 Temporary pedestrian bridges number (No) movable barricades provided, complete with road
signs. The tendered rate shall also include full
102.13.02 Temporary vehicular bridges number (No) compensation for moving the barricades to fresh
The unit of measurement shall be the number of times positions as and when necessary.
each temporary bridge is moved to and re-erected in an • 102.14.09
entirely new position, excluding its first erection in the
position where it was originally installed. The lump sum for traffic cones shall include full
compensation for providing as many cones as may
No payment shall be made unless the Engineer has be necessary, irrespective of their number, and for
furnished prior approval for the moving and re-erection all labour and costs required for their placement,
of a temporary bridge. removal or moving as may be necessary.
The tendered rates shall include full compensation for • 102.14.10
the taking down, transporting, handling, re-erection and
maintenance of the temporary bridges in the new The unit of measurement shall be the number of
positions. Plastic New Jersey barrier sections provided and
erected in positions instructed by the Engineer.
Item Unit
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for
102.14 Temporary traffic-control facilities supply, first erection, maintenance and final
102.14.01 Flagmen lump sum dismantling and removal of the barricades when no
longer required.
102.14.02 Portable STOP and GO-RY
signs number (No) General:
The tendered rates for the respective traffic-control
102.14.03 Amber flicker lights number (No)
facilities shall also include full compensation for their
102.14.04 Road signs, TR-series, maintenance and the replacement of items which have
1 200 mm in diameter or become unserviceable, and their removal when no
900 mm x 675mm if longer necessary.
rectangular number (No) Seventy five per cent (75%) of the tendered amount will
be payable when the items have been provided and
102.14.05 Road signs, TW-series, erected, and 25% when finally removed from the Site.
1 524 mm sides number (No)
2 Item Unit
102.14.06 Road signs, TG-series square metre (m )
102.15 Re-use or removal of traffic-control
102.14.07 Danger plates and delineators number (No)
facilities
102.14.08 Movable barricades
102.15.01 Amber flicker lights number (No)
(chevron and ROAD CLOSED
types) number (No) 102.15.02 Road signs, TR and
TW-series number (No)
102.14.09 Traffic cones lump sum
102.15.03 Road signs, TG-series number (No)
102.14.10 Plastic New Jersey Barrier number (No)
102.15.04 Danger plates and delineators number (No)
102.15.05 Plastic New Jersey Barrier number (No)

102-6
The unit of measurement shall be the number of each
unit removed once and re-erected.
The tendered rates shall include full compensation for
the dismantling, storing if necessary, transporting and
re-erecting in a fresh position of the various items
specified above.

Note:
The tendered rates for item 102.14 and where
applicable, item 102.15 shall collectively include full
compensation for all other aspects of traffic control for
which no pay items have been provided. (See
subclause 03.01 of this section.)
Item Unit
102.16 Obliteration of bypasses metre (m)
The unit of measurement shall be the metre of bypass
obliterated.
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for
the obliteration of bypasses as specified in clause 14 of
this section.
Note:
The following items of work, when specified, shall be
carried out, measured and paid for in accordance with
the relevant sections of the Specifications, but shall be
listed under this section in the Schedule of Quantities.
Item Applicable section

(a) Clearing and grubbing 101

(b) Overhaul 103

(c) Removal of excess overburden 201

(d) Three-pass roller compaction 203

(e) Gravel pavement layers 601

(f) Crushed-stone layers 602

(g) In situ stabilization of materials 604

(h) Asphalt paving and bituminous

surfacing (other than the standard
type specified in this section) 607 and 608

(i) Road marking 613

102-7
SERIES 1 : ANCILLARY WORK Free-haul areas are the areas contained within the free-
haul boundaries, and overhaul shall apply only to haul
SECTION 103 : OVERHAUL outside the free-haul boundaries.

CONTENTS 02.04 Overhaul distance

The overhaul distance for the materials listed in
01 SCOPE subclause 02.01 shall be the distance between the free-
02 DEFINITIONS haul boundary as defined on the Drawings for the
03 QUANTITY OF MATERIAL purposes of overhaul and the borrow, stockpile or spoil
04 PAYMENT OF OVERHAUL area outside these free-haul boundaries measured to
05 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT the nearest 0,1 km along the shortest practicable route
as designated by the Engineer between the centres of
01 SCOPE volume of the material at the points of loading and off-
loading.
This section covers the hauling of overhaul material, as
defined herein, from the place of excavation or stockpile If the Contractor chooses to haul material over some
to the position where finally placed or disposed of, to other longer route, computations for payment shall
the extent that such haul is carried out outside the free- nevertheless be based on the haul distance measured
haul boundaries. along the shortest practicable route designated by the
Engineer.
02 DEFINITIONS
03 QUANTITY OF MATERIAL
02.01 Overhaul material
The volume of the overhaul material shall be measured
Overhaul shall apply only to materials obtained from either in excavation or in fill or backfill as determined by
approved borrow pits and from mass excavations, the pay item according to which the material being
trench and open drain excavations and excavations for hauled is paid for.
structures.
04 PAYMENT OF OVERHAUL
Overhaul material shall include only the following
materials: Overhaul will be paid only where so specified in the
• Gravel, soil or rock used in the construction of fills, Project Specifications.
and in the subgrade, subbase, base and shoulders
of roads, streets, and parking areas. 05 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

• Gravel, soil or rock used in the construction of banks Item Unit

and dykes.
103.01 Overhaul on material
• Gravel ordered by the Engineer as wearing course hauled outside the
for bypasses. defined free-haul
• Selected material used for backfilling trenches, but boundaries cubic metre-kilometre (m3 - km)
excluding permeable material used in subsurface
The unit of measurement shall be the cubic metre of
drains.
overhaul material hauled multiplied by the overhaul
• Spoil material resulting from authorized excavations distance.
in road prisms and trenches and for structures and
from fills in redundant bypasses. The rate tendered for overhaul shall include full
compensation for hauling overhaul material outside the
• Crushed stone used in the construction of subbase defined free-haul boundaries.
and base courses of roads, streets and parking
areas and in the construction of certain types of pipe Overhaul of material in excess of that required for the
bedding. completion of the Works, unless authorized by the
Engineer, will not be measured for payment purposes.
Overhaul shall not apply in the case of -
Notes:
• material to be obtained from commercial sources or
sources to be supplied by the Contractor; In the special cases detailed below, overhaul shall be
measured as follows:
• material to be disposed of to sites to be provided by
the Contractor; or (a) Crushed and/or screened gravel and stone.

• any material transported within the free-haul In the case of crushed and/or screened gravel as
boundaries as defined below. described in section 601 and crushed-stone base
or subbase material as specified in section 602,
02.02 Overhaul overhaul, if applicable, shall be measured along
the shortest practicable route as determined by the
Overhaul, when applicable, shall be the product of the
Engineer from the point of excavation or borrow to
volume of overhaul material hauled, multiplied by the
the crushing or screening plant and from these to
overhaul distance as defined below.
the point of final use.
02.03 Free-haul boundaries and free-haul areas Overhaul shall be measured only along the part or
The free-haul boundaries are the boundaries shown on parts of this route falling outside the free-haul
the Drawings for the purpose of indicating the areas boundaries.
within which the cost of hauling material shall be
included in the tendered rates for the operation or item
of work for which such material is used.

103-1
(b) Stockpiled material
When material is stockpiled as set out in clause 07
of section 201, or when material is stockpiled
outside the free-haul area and provided always
that the Engineer's written permission for such
stockpiling has been obtained, overhaul may be
applicable.

Overhaul, when applicable, shall be calculated on

the basis of two operations, the first being
excavation to stockpile and the second stockpile to
point of final use.

The route along which overhaul shall be measured

shall be the shortest practicable route as
determined by the Engineer from the point of
excavation to the stockpile and from there to the
point of use.

Overhaul shall be measured as specified for (a)

above.

103-2
SERIES 1 : ANCILLARY WORKS 02.05 Grass sods

SECTION 104 : LANDSCAPING AND GRASSING Grass sods shall be nursery-grown and shall be
harvested, delivered and planted within 36 hours,
unless otherwise authorized by the Engineer. Grass
CONTENTS
sods shall be free from noxious weeds and diseases
and shall contain a minimum of 30 mm of soil.
01 SCOPE
02 MATERIALS Sods shall be of the variety of grass specified in the
03 LANDSCAPING OF AREAS Project Specifications, unless otherwise approved by
04 PREPARATION OF AREAS FOR GRASSING the Engineer. The grass shall have been grown
05 GRASSING specifically for sod purposes, mown regularly and
06 ESTABLISHING AND MAINTENANCE OF maintained to provide an approved quality of uniformity.
GRASS It shall be harvested by special machines manufactured
07 TREES, SHRUBS AND GROUND COVERS for this purpose to ensure an even depth of cut with
08 GENERAL sufficient root material and soil.
09 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
02.06 Revegetation cylinders
01 SCOPE
Revegetation cylinders shall consist of cylindrical
This section covers the landscaping and/or the capsules with a diameter of approximately 125 mm and
establishing of vegetation in such areas as indicated on a length of 1 500 mm. They shall be manufactured from
the Drawings or ordered by the Engineer, in writing. extruded plastic netting or similar approved
biodegradable material. The plastic material shall be
02 MATERIALS specially formulated to provide protection against ultra-
violet rays from the sun, and shall be sufficiently robust
02.01 Fertilizer to last for a period of not less than three years without
disintegration under normal service conditions.
The type of fertilizer to be used shall be as specified in
the Project Specifications, ordered by the Engineer or The revegetation cylinders shall be filled with shredded
scheduled. or partially compressed organic matter, such as wood
chippings. Where wood chippings are used, only
02.02 Grass cuttings material passing a 31 mm sieve with round holes and
Grass cuttings shall be fresh and in a good condition for having been retained on a 5 mm sieve with square
planting, with sufficient root material to ensure good holes shall be used. The wood chippings shall be
treated with Tanalith C or a similar approved wood
growth. Species to be planted shall be local couch-
grass ("kweek") or other species as specified in the preservative.
Project Specifications. The Contractor's attention is drawn to the fact that the
use of revegetation cylinders is subject to patent rights
02.03 Grass seed
and that all royalties shall be payable by the Contractor.
Only good-quality fresh seed shall be used. The types
The Contractor shall, at the start of the Contract,
of seed in the mixture and the pure live-seed content
ascertain what delivery period applies in respect of the
shall be as specified in the Project Specifications.
cylinders so that orders can be placed in good time.
02.04 Trees, shrubs and ground covers
02.07 Anti-erosion compounds
Plants shall be of the variety and size shown on the
Drawings or indicated in the Project Specifications. Anti-erosion compounds shall consist of a plastic
material in dispersion, such as Verdyol or a similar
When trees, shrubs and ground covers are supplied approved compound, which can be sprayed onto the
and delivered to the Site by the Employer, the soil to bind and protect it against erosion.
Contractor shall give the Engineer at least six weeks
advance notice of his requirements. Upon receipt of the 02.08 Topsoil
plants, the Contractor shall ensure that the plants are in Topsoil shall consist of fertile loamy soil selected from
good condition and free from obvious diseases and
areas showing a good coverage of natural vegetation,
shall accept full responsibility to maintain the plants in preferably grasses. It shall be free from deleterious
good condition throughout the Contract, including the matter such as large roots, any stones, refuse, stiff or
defects liability period. The plants shall be fully
heavy clays and noxious weeds, which would adversely
maintained and watered during this period, and any affect its suitability for the planting of grass.
losses of plants due to lack of maintenance or diseases
developing during the Contract period and the defects Topsoil shall be obtained wherever suitable material
liability period shall be replaced at the Contractor's occurs, either from the Site or from borrow areas to be
expense. cleared, as described in clauses 03 and 05 respectively
of section 201. The Engineer shall indicate his
Plants shall be handled and packed in the approved requirements to the Contractor regarding the quantity of
manner for the particular species or variety, and all topsoil required and the areas at which it shall be
necessary precautions shall be taken to ensure that selected and whence it shall be removed. Unless
plants will arrive at the point of use in proper condition otherwise specified or instructed by the Engineer,
for successful growth. Trucks used for transporting topsoil shall not be taken from more than 400 mm below
plants shall be equipped with covers to protect plants
the original undisturbed surface. If the Contractor fails
from windburn. Containers shall be in a good condition. to conserve topsoil as instructed, he shall obtain
Plants supplied by the Contractor shall be healthy, suitable substitute material from other sources at no
shapely and well-rooted. Roots shall not show any extra cost to the Employer.
evidence of having been restricted or deformed at any
time. Plants shall be well-grown and free from insect
pests and diseases.

104-1
Where so specified, the Contractor shall procure and 03.03 Plant rates
supply topsoil from his own sources outside the Site.
Such sources shall be subject to the approval of the The Engineer shall be entitled to pay for shaping and
Engineer. trimming as described above on the basis of the hourly
rates for motor graders and bulldozers. The motor
In respect of borrow material obtained from sources grader and bulldozer to be provided shall each have a
provided by the Contractor, the provisions of fly-wheel power of not less than 93 kW. Any labour or
clause 05(f) of section 201 are applicable. other plant ordered shall be paid for as "extra work" as
specified in the General Conditions of Contract.
Topsoil shall be stockpiled in separate loose heaps as
tipped from the trucks and shall not be stockpiled higher
than 2,0 m unless otherwise authorized. 04 PREPARATION OF AREAS FOR GRASSING
The various areas to be grassed shall be prepared as
02.09 Manure
follows:
Manure shall, unless another type is approved by the
Engineer, be pure "kraal" manure, free from soil, weed 04.01 Areas not requiring topsoil
seed or other objectionable material. It shall not contain Where the areas to be grassed consist of organically
any particles that will not pass through a 50 mm screen. suitable material, they shall be scarified to a minimum
Only manure which has been approved by the Engineer depth of 150 mm. All loose stones larger than 30 mm on
shall be delivered to the Site. areas to be mowed by machine shall be removed.
Areas to be mowed by machine will be as shown on the
02.10 Compost drawings.
Compost shall be well-decayed, friable and free from
weed seed, dust and other objectionable materials. 04.02 Areas requiring topsoil
Where areas to be grassed consist of organically
03 LANDSCAPING OF AREAS unsuitable material, the surface shall be roughened to
ensure a proper bonding between the topsoil and the
03.01 Shaping subsoil. If required, the area shall be scarified as
Areas that require shaping which involves bulk described in subclause 04.01 above.
earthworks, such as contoured areas, shall be Topsoil shall be placed on the prepared surfaces and
excavated, filled, compacted when required, and trimmed to the uniform thickness required. The topsoil
shaped to the correct contours to within a tolerance of shall be prepared by means of hand-rakes or light
plus or minus 150 mm. Such work shall be considered rotavators to obtain a smooth surface. All stones shall
as earthworks and measurement and payment shall be be removed as specified for areas not requiring topsoil
made under series 2 of these Specifications, except in subclause 04.01 above.
that quantities may be measured by means of a grid of
levels taken at 10 m intervals before and after shaping, 04.03 Fertilizing
or by means of levelled cross-sections.
The Contractor shall, without any additional
03.02 Trimming compensation, have the top 150 mm of the prepared
surfaces tested to determine the amount and type of
Trimming shall consist of bringing the existing or fertilizer required for establishing proper growing
previously shaped ground to an even surface with the conditions for the grass. The fertilizer shall be evenly
final levels generally following the original surface. applied at the recommended rate of application over all
Trimming shall normally be done by grader, or, in more surfaces where grass is to be planted and shall then be
confined or steep areas, by bulldozer. Where machine thoroughly mixed with the soil, either mechanically or
operations are not practicable because of confined manually, to a depth of 150 mm. Where hydroseeding
spaces or steep slopes, trimming shall be done using is to be performed, the fertilizer may be mixed with the
hand tools. cellulose pulp and water used in hydroseeding.
All trimming alongside roads and streets shall be
completed before construction of the subbase layer 05 GRASSING
commences. Such trimming shall be carried out on both The method of establishing grass shall depend on the
sides of the road or street up to the boundaries of the circumstances relating to each case. The method to be
road reserve unless otherwise specified or instructed by used in each case shall be as specified or as agreed on
the Engineer. by the Engineer and the Contractor.
Where applicable, trimmed surfaces shall be left slightly 05.01 Planting of grass cuttings
rough to facilitate binding with topsoil or the natural
establishing of vegetation. The areas to be planted shall, unless they are wet, be
thoroughly watered before planting to ensure that soil
When subsequent grassing is required or when will be uniformly wet over a depth of at least 150 mm
instructed by the Engineer, areas previously shaped during planting.
shall be trimmed as described above to within a
tolerance of plus or minus 25 mm, with all undulations The Contractor shall plant an approved variety of
following a smooth curve. The above tolerance shall couch-grass ("kweek") cuttings, using his own method,
apply only to areas where the final contours are given in in such a way as to obtain a sufficient number of live
the Drawings. and actively growing plants per square metre to provide
an acceptable cover as defined in subclause 06.02 of
During trimming, all stones in excess of 50 mm in size this section. At least 70 grain bags of cuttings shall be
and all excess material shall be removed. The trimming planted per hectare. Only fresh cuttings shall be used;
of any areas requiring grass shall be done in such a grass cuttings that have been allowed to dry out shall
way that, after cultivation and application of any topsoil, not be used. Immediately after planting, the grass
the finished surface of the area shall be approximately cuttings shall be given a copious watering and when
25 mm below the top of adjacent kerbing, channelling or sufficiently dry shall be rolled with a light agricultural
pavement. roller.

104-2
05.02 Sodding After the revegetation cylinders have been placed and
secured in position, the space between rows shall be
Areas to be grassed by sodding shall be given a layer filled with an approved topsoil and the upper surface of
of topsoil at least 75 mm thick unless the Engineer the topsoil shall be finished flush with the top of the
instructs that the topsoil be omitted where suitable revegetation cylinders. The use of rake-shaped wooden
subsoil is present. The areas to be sodded shall be tools is recommended for this purpose. Care shall be
thoroughly watered beforehand so that they will be wet taken during construction not to compact the topsoil
to a depth of at least 150 mm after sodding. The excessively or to damage the cylinders when topsoil is
surface shall be slightly roughened to ensure a good moved down the slope. On slope lengths exceeding
penetration of roots into the soil. Sods shall be 10 m, special measures shall be taken to protect
protected against drying out and shall be kept moist finished work, such as the use of metal chutes or plastic
from the time of harvesting until finally placed. sheeting to move topsoil down the slope. All topsoiling
Wherever possible, the first row of sods shall be laid in shall start from the top of the slope.
a straight line and, if on a slope, laying shall be started The Contractor's attention is directed to the more
at the bottom of the slope. The sods shall be butted comprehensive details of construction which may be
tightly against each other and care shall be taken not to given on the Drawings and in the manufacturer's
stretch or overlap the sods. Where a good fit cannot be instructions.
obtained, the intervening space shall be filled with
topsoil. The next row shall similarly be placed tightly 05.05 Grassing of borrow pits, temporary
against the bottom row with the joints staggered, and so bypasses, camp sites, access roads
on, until the entire area is covered with sods. On the and stockpile sites
instructions of the Engineer, sods shall be held in
position on steep slopes by a sufficient number of Prior to any grassing that may be required on borrow
robust wooden stakes approximately 300 mm in length areas, the finishing-off of borrow pits as described in
by 20 mm in diameter. clause 05 of section 201, the obliteration of bypasses
and access roads as described in clause 14 of
Each section of completed sodding shall be lightly rolled
section 102 and the clearing of camp sites as described
and thoroughly watered.
in section 001 shall have been carried out as specified
05.03 Hydroseeding in the relevant sections.

The types and mixtures of seeds to be used shall be as 06 ESTABLISHING AND MAINTENANCE OF
specified in the Project Specifications or, if not so GRASS
specified, shall be agreed on by the Engineer and the
Contractor before any seed is ordered for use by the 06.01 Watering, weeding, cutting and replanting
Contractor. The Contractor shall be solely responsible
for establishing an acceptable grass cover, and any All sodded and planted areas shall be adequately
approval by the Engineer of seed or seed mixtures watered at frequent and regular intervals in order to
proposed for use shall not relieve him of this ensure proper seed germination and the growth of
responsibility. grass until the grass has established an acceptable
cover and thereafter until the beginning of the defects
Cellulose pulp shall be added to the hydroseeding mix liability period of the grass. The amount and frequency
at a rate of 25 kg of pulp per kilolitre of water used, of watering shall be subject to the Engineer's approval.
except where otherwise instructed for flat slopes. Where hydroseeding is carried out, the commencement
of watering may be postponed until a favourable time of
Hydroseeding shall then be carried out with the use of
the year, but watering shall in any case commence and
an approved hydroseeding machine at a rate of
continue as soon as the seeds have germinated and
application of not less than 38 kg of seed mixture per
growth begins.
hectare, unless otherwise specified in the Project
Specifications. The Contractor shall mow the grass on all areas that
have been grassed, whenever so instructed by the
When the use of an approved anti-erosion compound
Engineer, until the end of the defects liability period.
such as an organic adhesive or biodegradable covering
material is required and the compound is to be applied All grass cuttings shall be collected and disposed of if
simultaneously with the hydroseeding, it shall be mixed so directed by the Engineer. Weeds shall be controlled
with the hydroseeding mixture before application. In this by means of pulling or cutting or by any other approved
case the amount of cellulose pulp shall be decreased by means. Any bare patches where the grass has not
one-third to a half, depending on the amount of taken, or where it has been damaged or has dried out
compound added. shall be recultivated, planted, sodded or hydroseeded
at the Contractor's expense.
05.04 Revegetation cylinders
All grassed areas shall have acceptable cover as
Revegetation cylinders shall be placed end to end in defined below at both the beginning and end of the
rows along the contour lines of the slope, as directed by defects liability period.
the Engineer. The spacing of rows shall be as shown on
the Drawings and the cylinder ends shall be staggered 06.02 Acceptable cover
in alternate rows to prevent runnels from forming.
Revegetation cylinders shall be secured at their ends An acceptable grass cover shall mean that not less than
and in the middle to barbed-wire stays running down the 75% of the area planted or hydroseeded shall be
slope; special wire ties supplied by the manufacturer covered with grass and that there shall be no bare
and a suitable wire-tying tool shall be used. patches the maximum dimension of which shall not
exceed 500 mm. In the case of sodding, acceptable
The stay wires shall be secured to the slope by means cover shall mean that the full area shall be covered with
of steel stakes and shall be pulled taut. The slope face live grass at the end of a period of not more than three
shall preferably be not smooth but kept slightly rough in months after sodding.
order to facilitate the retention of topsoil.

104-3
06.03 Defects liability period 07.04 Maintenance
The defects liability period of grass shall commence During the defects liability period, which shall end
when an acceptable cover as defined in subclause twelve months after completion of the actual planting of
06.02 above has been established and shall be one trees, shrubs and ground covers, the Contractor shall
year. This means that the defects liability period for be responsible for watering the plants and for keeping
grass can commence earlier or later than the defects them free from weeds and pests.
liability period for other portions of the Contract.
Every plant that is not healthy or shows unsatisfactory
The defects liability period for grassing by revegetation growth shall be replaced by the Contractor at his own
cylinders shall start whenever an acceptable grass expense before the end of this period.
cover is obtained or when the section of the Works
where grassing is done is handed over for maintenance, 08 GENERAL
whichever is the earlier date, and shall be one year.
08.01 Time of planting
If the defects liability period for the grass expires before
The planting of grass, trees, shrubs and ground covers
the end of the defects liability period for the Contract,
shall be carried out as far as is practicable during
the Contractor shall further mow the grass on such
periods most likely to produce beneficial results. The
areas as instructed by the Engineer up to the end of the
Contractor shall make every effort to programme his
defects liability period for the Contract.
operations to make this possible.
07 TREES, SHRUBS AND GROUND COVERS 08.02 Traffic on grassed areas
07.01 Positions of plants The Contractor shall not plant grass until all operations
that may require construction equipment to be moved
The positions in which trees, shrubs and ground covers over the grassed areas have been completed. No
are to be planted shall be as indicated on the Drawings equipment, trucks or water carts shall be allowed on
or as determined by the Engineer, and care shall be
areas that have been grassed and only equipment
taken that the taller plants will not obscure traffic signs.
required for the preparation of areas, the application of
07.02 Preparation of plant holes fertilizer and the spreading of topsoil will be allowed to
operate on areas ready for grassing.
Unless otherwise directed by the Engineer, holes for
trees and shrubs shall be placed and prepared as 08.03 Erosion control
follows: During construction, the Contractor shall protect all
• All holes shall be square in plan. areas susceptible to erosion by installing all necessary
temporary and permanent drainage works as soon as
• For shrubs the holes shall be at least 500 mm possible and by taking such other measures as may be
square by 600 mm deep. necessary to prevent the concentration of surface water
• For trees the holes shall be at least 600 mm square and the scouring of slopes, banks and other areas.
by 700 mm deep. Runnels or erosion channels developing during the
• The planting holes shall be refilled with selected and construction period or during the defects liability period
approved topsoil, thoroughly mixed with manure or shall be backfilled and consolidated and the affected
compost (one heaped spadeful added to every plant areas shall be restored to their former proper condition.
hole), and, depending on soil-test reports, the The Contractor shall not allow large-scale erosion to
required amount and type of fertilizer. develop before effecting repairs and all erosion damage
shall be repaired as soon as possible and in any case not
• The holes shall be thoroughly watered before later than three months before the end of the defects
planting. Where the local soil has poor drainage, liability period. Topsoil washed away shall be replaced.
150 mm of broken rock shall be placed at the bottom
of the planting hole before filling it with soil. 08.04 Proprietary brand materials used for
erosion control
07.03 Planting
Proprietary brands of materials that may be required for
Before planting, the plants shall be well watered before erosion protection to enable natural grass to become
they are removed from their containers. established shall comply with the requirements
Ground-cover plants shall be carefully lifted from their specified in the Project Specifications.
containers and transferred to holes in the prepared soil,
08.05 Responsibility for establishing an
which holes shall be just large enough to accommodate
the plant and the adhering soil. acceptable cover

Care shall be taken to avoid exposure of the roots Notwithstanding the fact that the method of grassing
during planting. Soil for ground covers shall be and the type of seed or grass used and the rate of seed
prepared as for grassing, as specified in clause 04. application may be specified or agreed to by the
Engineer, and that the frequency of mowing will be as
Directly after the planting, plants shall be well watered instructed by him, the Contractor shall be solely
to establish them firmly in the soil. After the soil has set, responsible for establishing an acceptable grass cover
additional soil shall, in the case of trees and shrubs, be and for the cost of replanting or rehydroseeding where
added where necessary to bring the backfill material to an acceptable cover has not been obtained. Where,
within 150 mm of the ground surface to ensure the however, in the opinion of the Contractor, it is doubtful
retention of sufficient water. All trees shall be tied to a from the outset whether an acceptable cover can be
suitable creosote-treated timber stake planted firmly in established, he may inform the Engineer of his reasons
the ground. The stake shall have a minimum diameter for this, and the Engineer shall, if he agrees, either
of 35 mm and shall be 300 mm longer than the planted adopt another grassing method or agree to accept
tree, with a maximum length of 3 m above the ground. whatever cover can be obtained, provided that all
After planting, the ground surface around the plants reasonable efforts are made to establish a good cover
shall be covered with straw or grass or any other type of by the method proposed. Such agreement shall only be
mulch to minimize evaporation. valid if given in writing by the Engineer.

104-4
09 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 104.03.04.03 Limestone ammonium nitrate ton (t)

Item Unit 104.03.04.04 2:3:2(22) ton (t)

104.03.04.05 Other fertilizers if required
104.01 Trimming
(type stated) ton (t)
104.01.01 Machine trimming square metre (m2)
104.03.05 Stockpiling of topsoil cubic metre (m 3)
104.01.02 Hand trimming square metre (m2)
• 104.03.01 Scarifying
Note: The unit of measurement for scarifying shall be the
All bulk earth-moving operations as described in sub hectare of ground scarified and prepared as
clause 03.01 shall be measured and paid for under specified. Only areas scarified on the written
section 203. instructions of the Engineer shall be measured.
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for
The unit of measurement for trimming shall be the scarifying, removing stones and smoothing the
square metre of area trimmed on the Engineer's surface.
instructions, including areas trimmed after shaping.
• 104.03.02 and 104.03.03 Topsoiling
The tendered rates shall include full compensation for
trimming areas to the specified finish, including the The unit of measurement shall be the cubic metre of
moving of small quantities of material which would be topsoil applied to the specified thickness or as
inherent in this process, and the removal of surplus directed by the Engineer, measured in situ after the
material and stones. For payment purposes a distinction topsoil has been placed. The quantity shall be
shall be made between machine trimming that can calculated from the net area of the surface topsoil
reasonably be carried out by bulldozer or motor grader, multiplied by the average thickness of the topsoil
and hand trimming that cannot be done by machine before the application of grass sods. Any topsoil
owing to confined space, steep slopes or difficult placed in excess of the average thickness specified
shapes. or ordered shall not be measured.

Item Unit For payment purposes a distinction shall be made

between topsoil obtained from designated areas on
104.02 Use of machines for trimming the Site or borrow areas and topsoil obtained by the
or shaping (alternative to Contractor from outside sources found by himself
subitem 104.01.01) when sufficient topsoil is not available from the said
designated areas. For payment purposes a further
104.02.01 Bulldozer hour (h) distinction shall be made between topsoil applied to
104.02.02 Motor grader hour (h) areas on the Site and topsoil applied to borrow
areas.
The unit of measurement shall be the hour actually
worked by each machine in trimming or shaping areas. The tendered rates shall include full compensation
Standing time shall not be measured. for excavating and loading the topsoil, for
constructing the topsoil as specified, any royalties or
The tendered rates shall include full compensation for compensation that may be payable in the case of
the supply and use of the machines, including the cost topsoil under subitem 104.03.02.02, transport, off-
of fuel, operators, maintenance, transporting the loading, placing, spreading, for removing any stones
machine to and from the point of use, and for all other and for roughening the surface to be topsoiled.
incidentals necessary to carry out the work.
Where overhaul is applicable, the requirements of
Item Unit section 103 shall apply.
104.03 Preparing areas for grassing • 104.03.04 Furnishing and applying fertilizers
and ground covers
The unit of measurement of fertilizer shall be the ton
104.03.01 Scarifying hectare (ha)
of each type of fertilizer ordered and applied.
104.03.02 Topsoiling on the Site with -
The tendered rates shall include full compensation
104.03.02.01 Topsoil obtained from the for supplying the fertilizers, and for fertilizing the
Site or borrow areas designated surfaces, all as specified.
provided by the
• 104.03.05 Stockpiling of topsoil
Employer cubic metre (m3)
The unit of measurement shall be the cubic metre of
104.03.02.02 Topsoil provided by the
topsoil stockpiled, on the written instructions of the
Contractor from other Engineer, where this operation is unavoidable
sources (including all despite proper advance planning. Only material
3
haul) cubic metre (m ) actually loaded, transported to and stockpiled on
104.03.03 Topsoiling of borrow pits sites designated for stockpiling shall be measured,
and not any material merely pushed or bladed into
with topsoil obtained from
heaps adjacent to the area from which it was taken.
borrow areas or from the
3
Site cubic metre (m ) The tendered rate shall include full compensation for
removal and loading the topsoil, transporting it,
104.03.04 Supplying and applying placing it in stockpile, and for any payments to
chemical fertilizers: private owners for the use of stockpile areas.
104.03.04.01 Lime ton (t)
Where overhaul is applicable, the requirements of
104.03.04.02 Superphosphate ton (t) section 103 shall apply.

104-5
Item Unit General
104.04 Grassing Half the payments under item 104.04 shall become due
when the grassing or hydroseeding has been carried
104.04.01 Planting of grass cuttings hectare (ha) out, and the remainder shall become due when a
104.04.02 Sodding square metre (m )
2 satisfactory cover has been established, except in the
case of subitem 104.04.03 where the full amount will
104.04.03 Revegetation cylinders metre (m) become due upon the satisfactory execution of the
work.
104.04.04 Hydroseeding
Item Unit
104.04.04.01 Providing approved seed
mixture for hydroseeding kilogram (kg) 104.05 Mowing of grass hectare (ha)
104.04.04.02 Hydroseeding hectare (ha) The unit of measurement shall be the hectare,
measured each time when the grass has been cut on
• 104.04.01 Planting of grass cuttings the instructions of the Engineer.
The unit of measurement for the planting of grass The tendered rate shall include full compensation for all
cuttings shall be the hectare of established grass plant, equipment and labour required for each grass
with an acceptable grass cover. cutting and the disposal of grass cuttings, i.e. payment
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for shall be made every time the grass has been cut on the
furnishing and planting of grass cuttings, the instructions of the Engineer.
establishing of an acceptable cover, the replanting
Item Unit
of dead areas and the maintenance of the grass, all
as specified, but excluding the mowing of grass. 104.06 Anti-erosion compounds
• 104.04.02 Sodding such as organic adhesives
or bio-degradable covering
The unit of measurement for sodding shall be the material (type indicated) kilogram (kg)
square metre covered with sods and having an
acceptable cover. The unit of measurement shall be the kilogram net
mass of anti-erosion compound used as approved by
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for the Engineer.
procuring, furnishing, loading, transporting, off-
loading, placing and watering the sods, for the The tendered rate shall include full compensation for
establishing of an acceptable cover, the replanting supplying the material and mixing and applying it with
of dead areas, and the maintenance of the grass, all the hydroseeding or by itself.
as specified, but excluding the mowing of the grass.
Item Unit
• 104.04.03 Revegetation cylinders
104.07 Trees, shrubs and ground covers
The unit of measurement for revegetation cylinders
104.07.01 Provision of trees and shrubs
shall be the metre of revegetation cylinders
(types indicated) number (No)
furnished and placed as specified, measured along
the rows in which they are placed end to end. 104.07.02 Provision of ground covers number (No)
The tendered rates shall include full compensation The unit of measurement shall be the number of each
for all labour, materials, plant and transport variety of tree, shrub or ground cover supplied and
necessary to construct and maintain the established.
revegetation cylinders, as specified. Topsoiling shall
be paid for separately under item 104.03, and due The tendered rate shall include full compensation for
allowance shall be made for excluding the volume supplying the plants at the point of final use, including
occupied by the revegetation cylinders from the substitutes for plants that may become diseased or may
volume of topsoil measured for payment. die.
Hydroseeding shall be paid for separately. 104.07.03 Planting and establishing of -
• 104.04.04 Hydroseeding 104.07.03.01 Trees number (No)
104.04.04.01 The unit of measurement for providing 104.07.03.02 Shrubs number (No)
seed shall be the kilogram of seed of the specified
mixture, excluding the mass of any pulp added 104.07.03.03 Ground covers number (No)
thereto. The unit of measurement shall be the number of each
type planted and established.
104.04.04.02 The unit of measurement for
hydroseeding shall be the hectare of grass The tendered rates shall include, in the case of trees
established by hydroseeding and having an and shrubs, full compensation for excavating the holes
acceptable cover . to the specified dimensions, for supplying topsoil,
wooden stakes, broken rock, manure and compost, and
The tendered rates shall include full compensation mixing them with any fertilizer required for planting, for
for furnishing and mixing the materials refilling each hole with the topsoil mixture and other
hydroseeding, for the establishing of an acceptable soil, for watering the plants until the end of the defects
cover, rehydroseeding bare patches, and the liability period, and in the case of ground covers, for
maintenance of the grass, all as specified, but planting in the soil prepared as specified in clause 04,
excluding the mowing of the grass. for supplying and replanting substitutes for plants that
have died, and for maintaining the plants as specified
until the end of the defects liability period, including any
other incidentals that may be necessary for the proper
execution of the work.

104-6
Where the Employer supplies the plants, the above
rates shall also include full compensation for taking
delivery of the plants, maintaining them until required,
transporting them to the point of final use, and for
providing substitutes for plants that die or become
diseased during storage.
Any chemical fertilizer required will be measured and
paid for under subitem 104.03.04. Preparation of soil for
the planting of ground covers will be measured and paid
for under item 104.03.
Item Unit
104.08 Extra work for
landscaping provisional sum
The provisional sum allowed shall be expended at the
discretion of the Engineer to cover the cost of work in
addition to the scheduled items that may be required in
respect of landscaping when plant is used at hourly
rates, e.g. the cost of loading and transporting surplus
material, in respect of establishing the grass by
topsoiling only, repairing erosion damage after topsoil
has been applied, or in respect of any other items of
work required for which no pay items have been
provided.
Payment shall be made as specified in the General
Conditions of Contract.

Note:
The following item of work, when specified, shall be
carried out, measured and paid for in accordance with
the relevant sections of the Specifications, but shall be
listed under this section in the Schedule of Quantities.

Item Applicable section

(a) Overhaul on topsoil 103

104-7
SERIES 1 : ANCILLARY WORK Corner, gate and straining posts shall be suitably drilled
for stay bolts or gate fittings as indicated on the
SECTION 105 : FENCING Drawings.

03.02 Bolts for stays

CONTENTS
Bolts shall be of mild steel and galvanized in
01 SCOPE accordance with SANS 121 Table 2 or 3, as applicable.
02 TYPES OF FENCES The length and diameter of the bolts shall be as shown
03 MATERIALS on the Drawings. All the necessary bolts, together with
04 CLEARING OF FENCE LINE nuts and washers, shall be supplied with each post.
05 INSTALLING POSTS AND STANDARDS
06 INSTALLING WIRE AND TENSION FENCING 03.03 Wire
07 INSTALLING DROPPERS All wire shall conform to the requirements of SANS 675
08 INSTALLING DIAMOND MESH and shall be zinc coated as set out in Table 3 of this
09 INSTALLING BARBED TAPE CONCERTINAS specification.
10 CLOSING OPENINGS UNDER FENCES
11 EXISTING FENCES (a) Barbed wire
12 TEMPORARY FENCES
13 INSTALLING GATES Barbed wire shall be one or both of the following
14 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS AND types:
TOLERANCES (i) High-tensile grade, oval shaped, single-
15 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT strand wire, 2,60 mm x 2,00 mm.
(ii) Mild-steel grade, double strand, uni-
01 SCOPE
directional twist wire, each strand 2,50 mm in
This section covers the erection of new fences, the diameter.
moving of existing fences, the erection and later Barbs shall be spaced at not more than
removal of temporary fences, the dismantling of existing 150 mm intervals.
fences, and finally the stacking of the fencing material.
(b) Smooth wire
02 TYPES OF FENCES Smooth wire shall be of the types specified below:
The following types of fences shall be erected in (i) Straining wire shall be mild-steel wire,
accordance with the dimensions shown on the 4,00 mm in diameter.
Drawings:
(ii) Fencing wire shall be high-tensile strength-
(a) Ordinary fences with diamond mesh, or tension grade 2,24 mm diameter wire.
fencing to the full height of the fence. (iii) Tying wire or binding wire shall be 2,50 mm
(b) Security fences, either the verandah type with diameter, mild-steel for tying fencing wire to
diamond mesh or tension fencing on the vertical standards and droppers, and 1,60 mm
portion and barbed wire on the overhang, or the diameter, mild-steel for tying wire mesh to
vertical type with full height diamond mesh, fencing wire.
barbed wire or tension fencing, with or without (c) Barbed-tape security barriers
rolls of barbed-tape concertinas fitted as shown
on the Drawings. Verandah-type fences can also Barbed-tape security barriers shall comply with the
be fitted with barbed-tape concertinas. requirements of SANS 1620 for type A and shall
consist of close-coiled high-tensile strength wire
03 MATERIALS with a continuous strip of flat steel barbs (barbed
tape) crimped to the wire along the entire length of
03.01 Posts, stays, standards and droppers the wire. The coils shall further be attached
together by clips to give a concertina configuration
Posts, stays, standards and droppers shall be of the
when pulled apart. The coils shall be of the
type and size indicated on the Drawings. Posts shall
diameter as shown on the Drawings. Each
include gate posts, straining posts and corner posts.
concertina shall have a minimum of 55 coils, and
Metal posts, stays, standards and droppers shall the maximum effective length of open concertina,
comply with the requirements of CKS 82 and when pulled apart, shall depend on the diameter of
SANS 280. "Acceptable" in CKS 82 means "acceptable the roll but shall be at least 12 m.
to the Engineer".
The high-tensile wire shall be Class B galvanized
Tubular posts shall be sealed at the top with caps and as per SANS 935.
shall be fitted with base plates as shown on the
The barbed tape shall be made of cold-rolled
Drawings.
carbon steel galvanized to Class Z600 as per
Tubular posts, standards and stays shall be galvanised SANS 934.
in accordance with SANS 32 quality B1 or SANS 121
The concertina clips shall be manufactured from
Table 2 or 3, as applicable. All rail sections, Y-sections
steel strip galvanized to Class Z600 as per
and metal droppers shall be provided with a protective
SANS 934.
coating of tar or other approved material.
Timber posts, stays, standards and droppers shall 03.04 Diamond mesh
comply with the requirements of SANS 457 part 2 or Diamond mesh (chain-link fencing) shall comply with
part 3 as applicable and shall be creosote-impregnated the requirements of SANS 1373. The width shall be as
in accordance with SANS 10005, with creosote shown on the Drawings, and both edges shall be
complying with SANS 538 or SANS 539. All timber shall clinched.
be straight and free from unsightly knots, splits and
other imperfections.

105-1
The diameter of the wire shall be 2,5 mm and the mesh The size of drilled holes shall be such that a tight fit is
size shall be as shown on the Drawings. obtained. Care shall be taken not to buckle or damage
the standards when driven. Where indicated, standards
The wire shall be Class B galvanized as per SANS 935.
shall be provided with concrete bases to the dimensions
03.05 Tension fencing shown on the Drawings.
Pre-assembled tension fencing shall be manufactured All posts and standards shall be accurately aligned and
from wires complying with the requirements of set plumb. Where verandah-type security fencing is
SANS 675. The height shall be as shown on the used, the posts and standards shall be planted with the
Drawings with the edge wires and intermediate wires overhang as shown on the Drawings and at right angles
having a minimum diameter of 2,24 mm. Edge wires to the direction of the fence. After posts and standards
and intermediate wires shall be of a high-tensile have been firmly set in accordance with the foregoing
strength grade, and all wires shall be galvanized as per requirements, the fencing wire shall be attached thereto
SANS 935. as described below.
03.06 Gates 06 INSTALLING WIRE AND TENSION FENCING
Gates shall comply with the requirements of CKS 146
All fencing wire shall be carefully stretched and hung
and shall be manufactured to the dimensions shown on
without sag and with true alignment, and care shall be
the Drawings.
taken not to stretch the wire so tightly as to cause
Gates shall be complete in every respect, and shall breaking, to pull up straining posts, or to be easily
include hinges, washers, bolts and locking mechanism. damaged during veld fires.
03.07 Materials for temporary fences Each strand of fencing wire shall be securely fastened
in the correct position to each standard with galvanized
All new material for temporary fences shall be of the binding wire. The binding wire for each horizontal fence
same quality as the material for new fences. Second- wire shall pass through a hole or notch in the standard,
hand material, whether available on Site or purchased, and the ends of the wire shall be wound at least four
shall be thoroughly inspected for defects before use. times around the fencing wire.
The protective galvanized coating on all second-hand
fencing wires shall be intact, but barbs, diamond mesh, At the end, corner, straining and gate posts the fencing
posts, standards, droppers and gates may have a rusty wire shall be securely wrapped twice around the post
appearance provided that the rust is superficial and and secured against slipping by tying the end tightly
does not impair the structural strength of the items. around the wire by means of at least six snug, tight
twists. In the case of high-tensile wire, two long
03.08 Concrete windings must first be made before the six tight twists to
Concrete used for fencing shall comply with the prevent the wire from breaking at the first twist. Where
requirements of section 704. smooth wire is used, the loose end shall be bent back
and hooked into the opening between the fencing wire
04 CLEARING OF FENCE LINE and the first winding.
Strip clearing for the fence shall be carried out and paid Splices in the fencing wire will be permitted if made in
for in accordance with section 101 of these the following manner with the use of a splice tool. The
Specifications. end of each wire at the splice shall be carried at least
75 mm past the splice tool and wrapped snugly around
05 INSTALLING POSTS AND STANDARDS the other wire for not less than six complete turns, after
Straining posts shall be erected at all ends, corners and which the two separate wire ends shall be wound in
bends in the line of fencing and at all junctions with opposite directions. After the splice tool has been
other fences. Straining posts shall not be spaced further removed, the space left by it in the splice wire shall be
apart than shown on the Drawings. The height of the closed by pulling together the wire ends. The unused
posts above the ground shall be such that the correct ends of wire shall be cut close so as to leave a neat
clearance between the lowest wire and the ground can splice.
be obtained. The gaps between gate posts and the adjacent straining
Posts shall be accurately set in holes and, where posts shall be fenced off with short fencing wires.
indicated, shall be provided with concrete bases to the Tension fencing shall be installed according to the
dimensions shown on the Drawings. methods and with the special tools recommended by
Holes shall be dug to the full specified depth. Where, the manufacturer.
owing to the presence of rock, the holes cannot be
excavated by hand or by pneumatic tools and the 07 INSTALLING DROPPERS
Contractor has to resort to the use of explosives, he will
be paid separately for the drilling and blasting Droppers shall be tied to each fence wire with binding
operations required. wire in the required position to prevent vertical slipping.
The spacing of droppers between any two standards
Corner, gate, end and straining posts shall be braced shall be uniform. Droppers shall be suspended clear of
by means of stays or anchors, as shown on the the ground at a distance as shown on the Drawings.
Drawings. Pipe stays shall be bolted to the posts. Gate
posts shall not be used as straining posts, but at each 08 INSTALLING DIAMOND MESH
gate post a straining post shall be placed as shown on
the Drawings and stayed by means of an anchor Where indicated on the Drawings, diamond mesh shall
consisting of six strands of wire. be stretched against the fence and properly tied to the
fencing wire. The diamond mesh shall be secured by
Standards shall be firmly planted in the ground at the means of binding wire at 1,2 m centres along the top
spacing shown on the Drawings or as directed by the and bottom wires and at 3 m centres along each of the
Engineer. The spacing of standards between any two other fencing wires, unless shown otherwise on the
straining posts shall be uniform. In rock or hard material Drawings.
non-tubular standards shall either be driven or set in
holes drilled into the rock.
105-2
09 INSTALLING BARBED-TAPE CONCERTINAS Payment for temporary fencing around the Contractor's
camp shall be included in the amount tendered for the
Barbed-tape concertinas shall be positioned on the
Contractor's establishment on Site as specified in
fence as shown on the Drawings. The concertinas shall
section 001.
be fastened to the appropriate fencing wires at each
standard as well as at 1,0 m maximum intervals 13 INSTALLING GATES
between standards.
Gates shall be installed at the positions indicated on the
Rolls of barbed-tape concertinas shall be joined with Drawings.
binding wire at four points, spaced at equidistant
intervals around the circumference of the loop. Joints The gates shall be hung on gate fittings in accordance
shall be made to coincide with the positions of with the details shown on the Drawings. Gates shall be
standards. so erected that they swing in a horizontal plane at right
angles to the gate posts and clear of the ground in all
10 CLOSING OPENINGS UNDER FENCES positions. Double swing gates shall close to have a gap
of not more than 25 mm between them, and other gates
At ditches, streams, drainage channels or other hollows
shall close to be not further than 25 mm from the gate
where the fence cannot follow the general ground
post.
contour, the Contractor shall close the opening under
the fence by means of horizontal barbed wires 150 mm 14 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS AND
apart and stretched between additional straining posts TOLERANCES
as shown on the Drawings. The opening shall be
covered with strips of diamond mesh, 1 000 mm wide, The completed fences shall be plumb, taut, true to line
fixed to the barbed wires. and to the ground contour, and with all posts, standards
and stays firmly set.
In the case of larger streams the opening below the
lower fencing wire shall be closed by means of loose- The height of the lower fencing wire above the ground
hanging wire nets as shown on the Drawings. These at posts and standards shall not vary by more than 25
mats shall be erected at streams only on the mm from that shown on the Drawings. Other fencing
instructions of the Engineer. wires shall not vary by more than 10 mm from their
prescribed relative vertical positions.
11 EXISTING FENCES
Anchoring of a fence to structures shall be done as
Where a new fence joins an existing fence, whether in shown on the Drawings.
line or at an angle, the new fence shall be erected with
a new straining post positioned at the junction with the The Contractor shall, on completion of each section of
existing fence. fence, remove all cut-offs and other loose wire or mesh
so as to leave the fence with a neat and finished
Existing fences that are required to be taken down or appearance.
moved to a new location shall be dismantled and shall
either be re-erected to the same design as originally 15 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
constructed, with such modifications as the Engineer
may require, or shall be erected to one of the standards Item Unit
specified in clause 02 if so scheduled. 105.01 Supply and erection of new
Material not required for re-erection or declared to be fencing material
unsuitable for re-use shall be neatly stacked at 105.01.01 Barbed wire (grade, size and
approved locations in accordance with the Engineer's type of wire indicated) metre (m)
instructions. Fencing wire, mesh or netting shall be
stacked clear of the ground. 105.01.02 Smooth wire (grade and
size indicated) metre (m)
In the case of existing fences that require moving, the
Contractor shall, where possible, re-use all material 105.01.03 Barbed tape security barriers
found to be suitable for this purpose, and shall supply (type and where applicable
any such new material as may be required for re- coil diameter indicated) metre (m)
erecting the fence to the standards specified for new
The unit of measurement shall be the metre of each
fences.
type of fencing wire and security barriers measured
The Contractor shall take extreme care when straining between end posts. Binding wire and wire used for the
used wire to avoid unnecessary breakage. bracing and anchoring of posts shall not be measured
for payment.
12 TEMPORARY FENCES
105.01.04 Diamond mesh
At any time during the currency of the Contract, the (mesh size indicated) square metre (m2)
Engineer may direct the Contractor to erect temporary 2
fencing where necessary in order to prevent 105.01.05 Tension fencing square metre (m )
unauthorised access to the Works. Such fencing shall The unit of measurement shall be the square metre of
be of one of the types mentioned in clause 02 and the diamond mesh or tension fencing and the quantity shall
type to be used shall be as scheduled. be calculated on the prescribed height and the length
Should material be available from fences that have between straining posts or gate posts, or the length of
been dismantled elsewhere on the Site, it shall be strips for covering openings under fences, or the length
utilized, where possible, before additional new or used for the covering of gates.
second-hand material is acquired for completing the 105.01.06 Corner, end, straining and gate
fence. posts, including anchors (type,
The fencing shall be maintained in good order during size and length indicated) number (No)
construction operations, and on completion of the
Works it shall be removed from the Site. Wherever
practicable, the Engineer may instruct that permanent
and not temporary fencing be erected before
construction operations commence.
105-3
The unit of measurement shall be the number of posts The tendered rate for each metre of existing fence
erected in accordance with the maximum specified moved, or for each existing gate moved, shall include
spacing or such lesser spacing as authorized by the full compensation for dismantling the old fence, coiling
Engineer. New gate posts that may be required when and stacking the material not suitable for re-use,
existing gates are moved will be paid for under this moving all material, including posts and wire, re-
item. However, gate posts for new gates shall not be erecting the fence or gate in the new position, and
measured for payment. providing new binding, tying and straining wire.
Additional new material used during the re-erection of
105.01.07 Standards (length and type the old fence shall be paid for under item 105.01. For
indicated) number (No) payment a distinction shall be made between the
105.01.08 Droppers (length and type moving of ordinary and security fences.
indicated) number (No) The tendered rate for each gate moved shall include full
The unit of measurement shall be the number of compensation for taking down the gate and re-erecting
standards and droppers erected in accordance with the it where required, including all new bolts, nuts and other
maximum specified spacing or such lesser spacing as accessories required, but excluding new gate posts,
authorized by the Engineer. which will be measured and paid for under
subitem 105.01.06.
The tendered rates shall include full compensation for
all excavations, for providing all materials including Item Unit
concrete, binding wire, straining wire, bolts, washers
105.04 Dismantling of existing fences metre (m)
and nuts, for the drilling of holes for standards, and for
the complete erection of the fence as specified and as The unit of measurement shall be the metre of existing
shown on the Drawings. The tendered rate for posts fencing, including gates taken down and dismantled on
shall make provision for the construction of the stays of the instruction of the Engineer.
the types shown on the Drawings.
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for
The quantity of material used shall be determined by taking down existing fences and gates, the coiling of
measuring the quantities of individual items of material wires, rolling netting into rolls, transporting the material
installed in the completed fence. No linear measure of to designated sites, and stacking the material.
completed fence shall be applicable.
Item Unit
Item Unit
105.05 The drilling and blasting
105.02 New gates of holes for posts and
105.02.01 Single leaf (size and type anchors number (No)
indicated) number (No)
The unit of measurement shall be the number of holes
105.02.02 Double leaf (size and type for posts and anchors made by drilling and blasting
indicated) number (No) where excavation by hand tools or pneumatic tools
cannot be done economically.
The unit of measurement shall be the number of new
gates erected. A pair of gates shall be measured as The tendered rate shall include full compensation for
one. drilling and blasting the holes and for all other expenses
in connection with the provision, storage, transportation
The tendered rates shall include full compensation for and use of explosives.
providing all materials including gate posts, hinges,
bolts, concrete and straining wire, and for the erection Item Unit
of the gates as specified and as shown on the
105.06 Provision of temporary
Drawings. It shall not include compensation for any
fencing wire or mesh used on the gate. fencing
105.06.01 Ordinary metre (m)
Item Unit
105.06.02 Security metre (m)
105.03 Moving of existing fences
and gates The unit of measurement shall be the metre of each
type of temporary fence erected as instructed by the
105.03.01 Fences:
Engineer.
105.03.01.01 Ordinary fences metre (m) The tendered rates shall include full compensation for
105.03.01.02 Security fences metre (m) the provision of all labour, and new or suitable second-
hand material, including gates, for the erection of the
105.03.02 Gates number (No) temporary fence and, when no longer required, the
dismantling and removal of such material from the Site
The unit of measurement for moving existing fences
or to any new position where required. For payment a
shall be the metre of fence moved and the quantity shall
distinction shall be made between the erection of
be taken as the length of fence which is permanently re-
ordinary and security fences.
erected where material available from fences that have
been dismantled elsewhere is used. Additional new When second-hand material is obtained from existing
material used during the re-erection of existing fences fences for the erection of temporary fences, the material
shall be measured as set out under item 105.01. The shall be transported to designated sites and stacked
unit of measurement for the moving of gates shall be when the fence has been dismantled and the material is
the number of gates moved. A double-leaf gate shall be no longer required.
measured as two.

105-4
Item Unit
105.07 Ring bolts for anchoring
fencing to structures number (No)
The unit of measurement shall be the number of ring
bolts supplied and fixed to the structure.
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for
the supplying and fixing of ring bolts, of the type shown
on the Drawings, to the structure, including, where
necessary, drilling holes, the grouting-in of ring bolts
with epoxy resin, and for all incidentals.

Note:
The following item of work, when specified, shall be
carried out, measured and paid for in accordance with
the relevant sections of the Specifications, but shall be
listed under this section of the Schedule of Quantities.

Item Applicable section

(a) Clearing and grubbing 101

105-5
SERIES 1 : ANCILLARY WORK Where single or multiple ducts are to be encased in
concrete or soilcrete, the width of the trench shall be
SECTION 106 : SERVICE DUCTS determined either by the width of the encasing as
shown on the Drawings or by the Engineer on Site.
CONTENTS 04 BEDDING
01 SCOPE No bedding shall be placed until the trench bottom has
02 MATERIALS been inspected and approved by the Engineer or the
03 EXCAVATION controlling authority.
04 BEDDING The bedding on which the ducts are to be laid will be
05 LAYING OF DUCTS one of the following:
06 BACKFILLING
07 PROVING 04.01 Concrete bedding
08 DRAW WIRE
09 DUCT MARKERS The thickness of the concrete below the pipe, the height
10 SCREENING to which it extends upwards on either side of the pipe
11 TOLERANCES as well as the class of concrete to be used shall be as
12 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT indicated on the Drawings. During concreting, pipes
shall be supported on suitably shaped temporary
01 SCOPE pedestals and strapped down to prevent uplift.

This section covers the construction of service ducts to 04.02 Gravel bedding
make provision for the easy installation, maintenance
and protection of existing, new and future cables and The pipe shall be bedded on a layer of selected gravel
other services at road crossings. with a PI not exceeding 6, which is free from stones
exceeding 20 mm, organic matter and lumps of clay.
02 MATERIALS In the case of telecommunication-cable ducts, the
bedding shall be of an approved, selected, granular,
Service ducts shall normally be constructed from one or
non-cohesive material graded from 13,2 mm to dust
more of the following materials: with not more than 60% passing the 0,6 mm sieve or
(a) Normal-duty PVC pipes conforming to SANS 791 crusher stone graded from 13,2 mm to dust. No extra
payment will however be made for the use of crusher
(b) Pitch-fibre pipes conforming to SANS 921 stone unless its use is prescribed by the Engineer.
Class 1
Gravel bedding material shall be compacted to 90% of
(c) Fibre-cement pressure pipes conforming to modified AASHTO density and the thickness of the
SANS 1223 Class C for COD pipes bedding material below the pipes shall be as shown on
the Drawings.
(d) Vitrified clay pipes conforming to SANS 559
(e) Precast concrete pipes conforming to SANS 677 05 LAYING OF DUCTS
Type SI. Ducts shall be laid and jointed true to line and shall be
Joints for ducts shall be of the rubber-ring type or the evenly supported for their full length on the bedding. If
sleeve-type couplings as scheduled, and shall be lengths of ducting are jointed alongside the trench, care
watertight. Material for telecommunication cable ducts shall be taken to avoid straining of the joints when the
will normally be supplied by Telkom. ducting is lowered into the trench. The insides of the
ducts shall be kept clean as they are laid.
Split pipes shall only be used to provide ducts for
Jointing of all pipes shall be carried out strictly
existing services which cannot be severed and threaded
according to the manufacturer's instructions.
through the ducts. The pipes shall be accurately cut in
the middle and opposite halves shall be matched as
06 BACKFILLING
sawn. Split pipes shall be placed around the service,
firmly bound by steel straps, and finally encased in After the ducts have been laid and approval has been
concrete if required. obtained, one of the following methods will be specified
to fill in the space surrounding the pipes.
Draw wires shall be mild-steel Class B galvanized wire,
3,05 mm in diameter for all ducts. 06.01 Gravel backfilling
Concrete used for bedding, encasing and duct markers To ensure adequate compaction between pipes, an
shall comply with the requirements of section 704. The approved tamping tool shall be used. For the backfilling
class of concrete to be used shall be as shown on the of telecommunication-cable ducts, a T-shaped tamping
Drawings or specified in the Project Specifications. tool must be used which shall consist of a 300 mm long
mild steel rod, 32 mm in diameter, welded to a 20 mm
03 EXCAVATION diameter mild-steel handle approximately 1,35 m in
length.
The excavation of trenches and the preparation of
trench bottoms for the installation of ducts shall be The gravel used for backfilling shall be similar to the
carried out as specified in section 202 and shall extend gravel used for bedding and must be placed and
beyond the kerb line for a distance as shown on the compacted to 90% of modified AASHTO density
Drawings. alongside and over the pipes to a height of 300 mm or
such lesser height as shown on the Drawings. When
The minimum trench widths for single ducts shall be specified, the gravel must be stabilised by the addition
determined as specified in subclause 04.01 of section of a quantity of cement equal to 5% of the dry weight of
202 and the widths for multiple ducts as well as the the gravel. Vibratory equipment shall only be used when
depth of the duct trenches shall be as shown on the compacting material more than 100 mm above the
Drawings. pipes.

106-1
06.02 Concrete encasing 09 DUCT MARKERS
Where shown on the Drawings or required by the Temporary and permanent markers for ducts shall be
Engineer, pipes shall be fully encased in concrete of the constructed to details as shown on the Drawings or as
strength and to the dimensions as shown on the specified in the Project Specifications.
Drawings or as instructed by the Engineer. During
concreting, pipes shall be supported on suitably shaped 10 SCREENING
pedestals and strapped down so as to prevent uplift. All telecommunication cable ducts shall be screened with
Poker vibrators shall be used to ensure that all spaces copper wires. The screen shall consist of two strands of
under and around the pipes are properly filled with 2,5 mm diameter wires bound together by two turns of
concrete. Concrete encasing shall be cast in one similar copper wire at 5 m intervals. The screen shall be
continuous operation until completed. placed approximately 200 mm above the pipe or top layer
of pipes. All joints in the screening wires shall be soldered.
06.03 Soilcrete encasing
Where shown on the Drawings or required by the 11 TOLERANCES
Engineer, soilcrete shall be used to encase the pipes Permissible tolerance limits shall be as follows:
completely. Soilcrete shall be prepared as described in
clause 12 of section 202 and shall be placed in a Grade: Maximum deviation from the specified
manner identical to the encasing with concrete, with the grade, expressed as a percentage of
pipes supported and strapped as described above. the specified grade 10%

Notes: Plan: Maximum deviation 25 mm

Invert level: ±10 mm.
• Where multiple layers of ducts are to be encased in
concrete or soilcrete, the operation shall be carried 12 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
out in stages, each stage being taken to the
underside of the next layer of pipes. Irrespective of Note:
the backfilling specified, the vertical distance
between layers of ducts shall be 75 mm. Reference shall be made to the last paragraph of
clause 02 of section 202 regarding payment for work
• When backfilling or encasing to the prescribed carried out under this section.
height above the pipes has been completed and
approved, the balance of the trench shall be Item Unit
backfilled as specified in clause 13 of section 202. 106.01 Bedding and backfilling
up to 300 mm above pipes
07 PROVING
106.01.01 Using selected excavated
3
After the laying of ducts and the backfilling have been material cubic metre (m )
completed, the interior of the ducts shall be thoroughly
106.01.02 Using imported selected
cleaned by drawing a cylindrical cleaning brush through 3
material cubic metre (m )
each duct twice, once in each direction. The ducts shall
then be proved by drawing a polished hardwood or 106.01.03 Using imported non-cohesive
3
aluminium mandrel, with spherical ends through the material cubic metre (m )
ducts. The diameter of the mandrel shall be less than
106.01.04 Using crushed stone cubic metre (m 3)
the internal diameter of the duct by -
106.01.05 Using stabilized material cubic metre (m3)
(a) 3 mm in the case of ducts with diameters up to
and including 75 mm (mandrel 300 mm long); The unit of measurement shall be the cubic metre of
material in place after compaction and the quantity shall
and be calculated from the leading dimensions of the
(b) 5 mm in the case of ducts with diameters bedding and backfilling as specified or authorized by
exceeding 75 mm (mandrel 400 mm long). the Engineer. The volume occupied by the ducts shall
be subtracted for calculating the volume of backfilling.
08 DRAW WIRE The tendered rates shall include full compensation for
furnishing the material bedding under and backfilling
Duct ends shall be provided with suitable stoppers to
alongside and over conduits, for watering and
prevent dirt from entering. One strand of draw wire shall
compacting the backfill material, for mixing the material
be threaded through each unit. The strand shall extend
with 5% cement where applicable, and for supplying the
2 m outside each end and shall be wedged firmly into
cement. In addition, the rates tendered for
position with the stoppers.
subitems 106.01.01 and 106.01.05 shall include
These projections shall be neatly coiled into 300 mm transport within the free-haul boundaries. Where
diameter coils except where duct markers are to be overhaul is applicable, the requirements of section 103
installed, in which case the projecting wires must be shall apply only when the material has been imported
attached to the markers. from borrow pits furnished by the Employer.
No overhaul shall be paid on crushed stone or cement.

106-2
Item Unit The tendered rate shall include full compensation for
the manufacture, delivery and installation of the
106.02 The casting of in situ concrete markers complete as shown on the Drawings or as
in bedding and the encasing specified in the Project Specifications.
of pipes (class of concrete
3
indicated) cubic metre (m ) Item Unit
The unit of measurement shall be the cubic metre, and 106.06 Extra over items 106.01 and
the quantity shall be calculated from the dimensions of 106.03 for using material
the excavation as shown on the Drawings or as obtained from sources
specified or authorized by the Engineer, irrespective of provided by the
whether the actual excavation exceeds the specified or Contractor
3
cubic metre (m )
authorized dimensions, minus the volume occupied by
the pipes. The unit of measurement shall be the cubic metre of
material provided and placed.
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for all
materials, formwork, pedestals, labours, plant and The tendered rate shall be in full compensation for the
equipment necessary to complete the work as specified additional cost of paying any royalties or charges for
in section 704 and this section. procuring the material from sources provided by the
Contractor as well as for transporting the material from
Item Unit where obtained to where used on the Site.
3
106.03 Soilcrete cubic metre (m ) Note:
The unit of measurement shall be the cubic metre of The following items of work, when specified, shall be
soilcrete backfilling or encasing constructed, calculated carried out, measured and paid for in accordance with
from the authorized dimensions of the excavations and the relevant sections of the Specifications, but shall be
the height of the encasing or backfilling in soilcrete. The listed under this section of the Schedule of Quantities.
volume occupied by conduits shall not be included in
the quantities measured. Item Applicable section
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for (a) Overhaul on selected
the supply of all material, plant labour and equipment backfill and soilcrete material 103
for constructing soilcrete encasing and backfilling
complete and in accordance with clause 12 of (b) Excess overburden at borrow
section 202, including full compensation for cement, pits provided by the Employer 201
used at the rate of 5% of the dry mass of the soil used,
and stone-packing or temporary formwork at duct ends
to support wet soilcrete.
Overhaul shall apply when gravel material used for
soilcrete is imported from sources not furnished by the
Contractor, which are situated outside the free-haul
boundaries.

Item Unit
106.04 Service duct pipes
106.04.01 Ordinary pipes:
106.04.01.01 (type and diameter indicated) metre (m)
106.04.02 Split pipes:
106.04.02.01 (type and diameter indicated) metre (m)
The unit of measurement shall be the metre of service
duct laid.
The tendered rates shall include full compensation for
procuring, providing and laying the pipes including end
plugs and draw wires as well as for proving the duct as
specified, but excluding excavation, backfilling and
encasing which shall be measured and paid for under
the relevant pay items of this section. The tendered rate
for telecommunication-cable ducts shall not include
procurement but it shall include their screening.
The tendered rates shall include the marking of the duct
position on the kerbs as shown on the Drawings.

Item Unit
106.05 Duct markers
(type indicated) number (No)
The unit of measurement shall be the number of
markers installed.

106-3
SERIES 2 : EARTHWORKS (iv) Trench excavations
Long narrow excavations, specified to have
SECTION 201 : GENERAL
vertical sides, which can be excavated,
ground conditions permitting, with equipment
CONTENTS specifically designed for trench excavation.
Trenches which qualify as mass excavations
01 SCOPE will be classified as mass excavations.
02 DEFINITIONS
03 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS (d) Excess overburden
04 SELECTION OF MATERIALS Overburden within a borrow area, which is neither
05 BORROW MATERIAL required nor suitable for use in construction.
06 SURPLUS MATERIAL
07 STOCKPILING OF MATERIALS (e) Mass earthworks
08 PLANT
Earthworks, which include mass excavations as
09 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
defined above, and fills that can be constructed
with equipment normally used for fills and layer
01 SCOPE work in road construction.
This section covers provisions of a general nature (f) Overbreak
relating to all earthworks and trenching operations.
An inevitable excess excavation caused by the use
02 DEFINITIONS of explosives or heavy construction equipment
during excavation operations.
For the purposes of this section in particular and these
Specifications in general, the following words and (g) Selected material
expressions shall, unless inconsistent with the context, Material obtained and selected from excavations,
have the meanings hereby assigned to them. borrow pits or other sources to be used as bedding
(a) Borrow area material for pipes and services, backfilling around
and over pipes and services, the construction of
An area within designated boundaries, which has certain pavement layers, and for the making of
been approved by the Engineer for the purpose of soilcrete.
obtaining borrow material. A borrow pit is the
excavated pit in a borrow area. (h) Spoil
(b) Borrow material Material originating from construction operations,
and which is not utilized for construction purposes.
Any gravel, sand, soil, rock or ash used in the
construction of the Works and obtained from 03 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
borrow areas, stockpiles or sources other than
excavations which form part of the Works, but Prior to starting any excavations, construction-bed
excluding crushed stone and sand obtained from preparations, or embankment and fill construction, the
commercial sources. Contractor shall obtain instructions from the Engineer
regarding any stripping of topsoil or any clearing and
(c) Excavations grubbing that may be required.
(i) Hand excavations Excavations shall be made within the applicable
Excavations which, on account of their size, tolerances to the dimensions specified or shown on the
shape or location, or of the need to avoid Drawings. In the case of excavations made in hard
damage to existing services or structures, material, a certain amount of overbreak is inevitable but
cannot be made by means of trenching or the Contractor shall include in his rates tendered for
by large excavating equipment and have to excavation, the costs in respect of the backfilling of
be made by hand tools, but shall exclude over-excavated sections as a result of overbreak or
the trimming by hand of excavations to their excavation outside the specified limits.
final shape.
The Contractor shall not import, remove from the Site,
No excavations shall be classified as hand or waste any material without the Engineer’s approval,
excavations unless designated as such in and he shall arrange the construction of fills and the
the Project Specifications or ordered by the backfilling of trenches so as to make the best possible
Engineer to be a hand excavation. use of excavated materials. The necessary safety
(ii) Mass excavations precautions as set out in clause 17 of section 001 shall
be observed at all times.
Excavations which by virtue of their size,
will permit their construction by large
04 SELECTION OF MATERIALS
equipment such as bulldozers, motor
graders, scrapers, mechanical shovels, etc. The Engineer may instruct that particular materials from
(iii) Structure excavations excavations or borrow areas be selected for a specific
purpose. Where such selection is instructed, the
Excavations intended purely for method of excavation and the sequence of carrying out
accommodating structures such as the work shall be so arranged as to avoid the
reservoirs, retaining walls, culverts and contamination or waste or the double handling of
bridges or elements of such structures, selected materials.
such as foundations or wing walls.
Structure excavations which could also If selected materials are contaminated or used
qualify as trenches or mass excavations by incorrectly or if they become unavailable through the
virtue of their shape or size will injudicious planning of excavation operations, the
nevertheless be classified as structure Contractor shall be required to replace the shortfall with
excavations. Structure excavations are material of at least equal quality, imported at his own
covered under section 701. expense.

201-1
05 BORROW MATERIAL Where borrow areas are provided by the Employer, the
plans of borrow pits will be included in the Documents.
Where sufficient quantities of suitable material cannot
The information shown on these plans reflects the
be obtained from the excavations or trenches to
results of Site investigations and laboratory tests and is
complete certain work, additional material shall be
furnished in good faith as to the material being of
imported from borrow areas or other sources
sufficient quantity and adequate quality. Should it
designated in the Project Specifications or by the
therefore appear at any time during construction that
Engineer.
the quantity of material in such borrow area is
Should borrow areas not be provided by the Employer for insufficient or its quality inadequate and should the
this Contract, the Contractor shall supply the necessary Employer have no other borrow areas available, the
material from sources obtained by him. The following Contractor shall make use of approved sources found
provisions shall apply in respect of borrow material by himself.
obtained from sources provided by the Contractor,
Prior to opening a borrow pit or extending an existing
including material obtained from commercial sources:
borrow pit belonging to the Employer, the Contractor
(a) Samples of all such material shall be submitted to shall obtain from the Engineer written instructions
the Engineer for approval before the material is regarding the removal of topsoil and excess
brought onto the Site. overburden, and any clearing and grubbing that may be
required. The measurement of excess overburden shall
(b) No haulage will be payable to the Contractor and
be made only after the removal of topsoil and any
the cost of transporting such material from its
clearing and grubbing if required. Clearing and grubbing
source to its final point of use shall be deemed to
and the removal of topsoil shall be measured and paid
be included in the rates tendered for imported
for in accordance with the provisions of sections 101
material.
and 104 respectively.
(c) The material will not be classified for purposes of
excavation and breaking down, and no extra over- No contaminated material may be brought onto the Site.
payment will apply in respect of material The Contractor shall exercise the necessary control in
excavated in intermediate, hard or boulder this respect during the loading of material from borrow
formations. pits.

(d) Tendered rates shall include for all royalties and On completion of his operations in the borrow areas
other charges whether in cash or in kind to be paid provided by the Employer, the Contractor shall reinstate
by the Contractor to the owner of such borrow the entire area to blend with the surrounding area and
material. so as to be suitable for the re-establishment of
vegetation. For this purpose the borrow area shall be
(e) No payment will be made for removing shaped to even contours with no slopes steeper than 1
overburden, bringing it back after completion of in 2. Material which is incapable of supporting
borrow operations, for stockpiling such material vegetation shall be buried and used for shaping the
unless so ordered by the Engineer, for providing borrow area and shall be subsequently covered with
haul roads and for restoring the borrow area to the material capable of supporting vegetation if available.
condition required by the owner.
All haul roads shall be obliterated and their surfaces
(f) The Contractor shall comply with the Mineral and scarified, earth banks constructed to prevent erosion,
Petroleum Resources Development Act, 2002 (Act and damaged fences reinstated.
No 28 of 2002) and its supporting Regulations, in
respect of borrow material obtained from sources The rates tendered for the various items of work for
provided by him. which borrow materials are used shall include full
compensation for procuring and supplying borrow
Compliance with the provisions of the Mineral and material and also, in the case of borrow areas provided
Petroleum Resources Development Act, 2002 by the Employer, for the final shaping and finishing off
(Act 28 of 2002) and its Regulations does not of the borrow areas, the reinstatement of fences, the
necessarily guarantee that the Contractor is in prevention of erosion, and the obliterations of haul
compliance with other Regulations and legislation. roads.
Other legislation that may be immediately
applicable includes, but are not limited to:
06 SURPLUS MATERIAL
National Monuments Act, 1969 (Act 28 of 1969)
Any surplus material produced by excavations,
National Parks Act, 1976 (Act 57 of 1976) including waste or oversize material, shall be disposed
of as directed by the Engineer, who may require that
Environmental Conservation Act, 1989 (Act 73 of the material be somehow utilized in the Works or that
1989) the material be removed from the Site.
National Environmental Management Act, 1998 If the Employer does not provide spoil sites, this will be
(Act No 107 of 1998) specified in the Project Specifications and it shall then
Atmospheric Pollution Prevention Act, 1965 be the responsibility of the Contractor to find the
(Act 45 of 1965) necessary spoil sites for material removed from the
Site. All such spoil sites are to be approved by the
The National Water Act, 1998 (Act 36 of 1998) Engineer in writing and the written consent of the owner
shall be submitted to the Engineer. The rates tendered
Mine Safety and Health Act, 1996 (Act 29 of
under the relevant sections for the removal of such
1996)
material to spoil shall include full compensation for all
The Conservation of Agricultural Resources Act, haulage and for reinstating the spoil area.
1983 (Act 43 of 1983).
Surplus material produced by trench excavations and
Tendered rates shall also include full carted to spoil shall be measured and paid for as
compensation for any costs or charges in follows:
complying with the above legislation by the
Contractor.

201-2
(a) Trenches for pipes with a diameter of 300 mm and Topsoil shall be stockpiled in separate loose heaps as
less: tipped from the trucks and shall not be stockpiled higher
than 2,0 m unless otherwise ordered.
The volume of spoil shall be taken as being equal
to the authorized volume of soil or gravel backfill Stockpiling, when specified or authorized in writing, shall
material imported from outside sources. be paid for under section 104 in the case of topsoil, and in
accordance with this section in the case of other material.
(b) Trenches for pipes with a diameter exceeding
300 mm and for culverts: Where selected material and topsoil are stockpiled
temporarily within a borrow-pit area, this operation shall
The volume of spoil shall be determined as in (a)
above, plus the volume occupied by the pipe or not be paid for separately as temporary stockpiling but
culvert. shall be deemed to be part of the obligations described
in clause 05 of this section.
The volumes occupied by beddings, encasings,
manholes, junction boxes, etc, shall not be used for Selected material from trenching operations shall
preferably be placed alongside the trench, separate
determining the amount of material carted to spoil.
from the other excavated material. Should sufficient
The carting to spoil of surplus material produced by space not be available alongside the trench, the
additional excavations, the excavation of tunnels, and selected material shall be removed to stockpile sites
excavations for subsurface drains in trench bottoms when authorized by the Engineer.
shall be deemed to be included in the rates tendered for
such excavations in section 202. 08 PLANT
When material for earthworks and layerwork is either Plant and equipment used in the various construction
oversize or otherwise unsuitable for use - activities shall be suitable for achieving the required
end result under the condition applicable to the Site.
• because it has not been properly excavated to
ensure adequate breaking down in the borrow pit or
09 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
in excavation; or
• because it has not been properly selected or has Note:
been contaminated; or Save as provided hereunder, payment in respect of the
• because careless excavation has spoilt the material general obligations and requirements described in this
for its intended final use; section shall be deemed to be covered elsewhere by
the rates tendered for the various items of work to
it shall be removed from the Works and carted to spoil which these general obligations and requirements
and, except as provided below, no payment shall be apply.
made in respect of the removal of such material to spoil.
The rates for the various items of work for which borrow
Where there is a local surplus of material from materials are used shall specifically include
excavations other than trenches and material is also compensation for the provision of haul roads, the
present which is unsuitable or oversize for the reasons selecting of suitable material in the borrow area, the
set out above, the material removed shall be paid for as final shaping and finishing-off of the borrow areas, the
excavation to spoil under item 203.03 to the extent of reinstatement of fences, erosion protection and the
such local surplus of material. obliteration of haul roads.
Other oversize material removed from the Site shall, In the case of borrow or spoil areas provided by the
subject to the provisions of this clause, be paid for as Contractor, they shall also include any royalties
specified in sub clause 06.09 of section 203. payable.
Any soft material which the Engineer requires to be Item Unit
tipped over the sides of rock fills without further shaping
or finishing shall be classified as excavation to spoil, but 201.01 Excess overburden at
if shaping and finishing is required, material shall be
borrow pits provided by
classified as excavation to fill, and all such material
shall be measured and paid for in addition to fill the Employer cubic metre (m3)
measured according to the net specified dimensions of The unit of measurement shall be the cubic metre of
the road, parking area or embankment. excess overburden measured in place before stripping,
which measurement shall be based on the depth of
07 STOCKPILING OF MATERIALS overburden measured in the trial pits excavated by the
Contractor in a square pattern at intervals of 10 m over
Where materials from excavations cannot be placed
the whole area in question.
directly in their required positions, or cannot be
temporarily stockpiled alongside the excavation such as The tendered rate shall include full compensation for
in built-up areas, the Engineer may authorize their digging the trial pits, stripping, removing and stockpiling
removal to temporary stockpiles. Stockpile sites shall be the excess overburden prior to the excavating of borrow
approved by the Engineer and shall be cleared prior to material, replacing the excess overburden in the borrow
being used. The temporary stockpiling of all materials pit after completing the excavating of borrow material, and
within or outside the free-haul boundaries shall be at for levelling off the excess overburden in the borrow area.
the Contractor's own cost unless otherwise specified in
the Project Specifications. Where the stockpiled excess overburden has to be
moved beyond the limits originally indicated by the
Overhaul will be paid on materials transported to and Engineer, it shall be measured once more for payment
from authorized stockpiles, provided that the stockpiles under this item. This item shall only apply to borrow
are situated outside the free-haul boundaries. areas provided by the Employer. Where borrow material
is obtained from sources provided by the Contractor,
The material shall be stockpiled in successive layers
the price of the material shall include the costs of
over the full stockpile area to the approximate
dealing with any excess overburden.
dimensions required by the Engineer and shall
subsequently be reloaded and placed.
201-3
Item Unit
201.02 Temporary stockpiling of
material cubic metre (m3)
The unit of measurement shall be the cubic metre of
material stockpiled on the written instructions of the
Engineer, measured in its final position after placing
and compaction. Only material actually loaded and
transported to a stockpile as instructed shall be
measured for payment. Material dumped or stockpiled
next to where excavated, whether in a trench, cutting,
or borrow area, or anywhere within the free-haul
boundaries shall, unless authorized in writing by the
Engineer, not be measured as stockpiled material.
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for
preparing stockpile areas, the constructing of haul
roads, placing the material in stockpile, loading it when
required, and transporting it within the free-haul
boundaries, as well as for cleaning up and reinstating
the stockpile areas and the obliterating of haul roads
and, in the case of stockpile areas provided by the
Contractor, for any charges made for the use of
stockpile areas.
The stockpiling of topsoil shall be measured and paid
for under section 104 of these Specifications.

201-4
SERIES 2 : EARTHWORKS The owner, lessee or occupier shall be afforded a
reasonable time to remove any small trees, shrubs or
SECTION 202 : TRENCHING other plants as well as improvements from the servitude
should he wish to do so. Trees with a girth exceeding
CONTENTS 300 mm shall not be removed by the Contractor without
the written permission of the Engineer.
01 SCOPE
Before excavation may be started, the Contractor shall
02 GENERAL
notify the Engineer, that the strip has been cleared, to
03 CLASSIFICATION OF MATERIALS EXCAVATED
enable the latter to obtain the necessary ground levels
04 EXCAVATION
for measurement purposes.
05 TOPSOIL
06 TIMBERING AND SHORING The Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining
07 TUNNELS AND BOLSTERS accesses over trenches where applicable, in which
08 EXCESS EXCAVATIONS regard he shall comply with the relevant requirements of
09 PREPARATION OF TRENCH BOTTOMS section 102.
10 EXCAVATIONS FOR PIPE JOINTS
11 DEALING WITH WATER The Engineer reserves the right to limit the length of
12 SOILCRETE excavation of trenches in advance of pipe-laying and
13 BACKFILLING backfilling operations.
14 TRENCHES WITHIN ROAD RESERVES Where trenching, pipe-laying operations and culvert
15 TOLERANCES construction are carried out in built-up areas, the work
16 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT shall be completed as quickly as possible so as not to
unduly inconvenience the public. Payment for work
01 SCOPE carried out under this section as well as under
This section covers all work in connection with trenching sections 106, 302, 402 and 502 regarding such
for pipelines, ducts, culverts, cables and subsurface trenching, pipe-laying operations and culvert
drains. construction will only be made once the work has been
completed and the surface has been reinstated as
Where the dimensions of a trench allow bulldozers and specified. The sections of trench affected by this
motor graders to be used effectively for doing the requirement will be indicated in the Project
excavations, the operation will be classified as mass Specifications.
earthworks as specified in section 203 whether or not
trenching equipment is used. 03 CLASSIFICATION OF MATERIALS
EXCAVATED
02 GENERAL
The materials excavated shall be classified as follows
The Contractor shall examine the route of the proposed for payment purposes:
trench well in advance of construction to determine • Soft material:
whether the route is clear. Should he encounter
unforeseen permanent obstacles such as buildings, Material that can be efficiently removed by a back-
swimming pools, etc, he shall immediately inform the acting excavator of flywheel power approximately
Engineer thereof with a view to solving the problem 0,10 kW per millimetre of tined-bucket width, without
without causing undue delay to construction activities. the use of pneumatic tools such as paving breakers.
Where such investigations are made on private property, • Intermediate material:
the Contractor shall adhere strictly to the requirements
laid down in clause 08 of section 001. Material that requires a back-acting excavator of
flywheel power exceeding 0,10 kW per millimetre of
Clearing and grubbing shall be carried out as specified tined-bucket width or the use of pneumatic tools
in section 101, and the width of the strip to be cleared before removal by equipment equivalent to that
will be indicated in the Project Specifications or by the specified above for soft material and shall include
Engineer on Site. Where fences, precast walling, paving boulders of up to 0,15 m3.
and other improvements to properties are to be
temporarily removed from the line of the trench, they • Hard material:
shall be carefully dismantled or lifted and stored, and Material that cannot be efficiently removed without
later re-erected at or repositioned in the same place and blasting or without wedging and splitting as well as
in the same condition as before their removal. Material boulders exceeding 0,15 m .
3

damaged by the Contractor shall be replaced at his own

cost. Notwithstanding the above classification, all material
excavated from previously constructed fills,
Except for trees with a girth exceeding 1,0 m, no embankments, pavement layers and from above existing
separate payment will be made for such clearing and services shall be classified as soft material.
grubbing or temporary removal of improvements unless
otherwise specified in the Project Specifications, and the The expression "efficiently removed" shall be taken to
cost thereof shall be included in the rates tendered for mean removed in a manner that can reasonably be
excavation. expected from the equipment in question, having regard
to the production achieved.
The removal of trees with a girth exceeding 1,0 m will be
paid for under items 101.02 and 101.03 of section 101 In the first instance the classification shall be based on
and the girth shall be measured as specified under inspection of the material to be excavated and the
section 101. method of excavation proposed by the Contractor. In the
event of disagreement between the Contractor and the
Where trenches are to be made in servitudes or Engineer, the Contractor shall, if required, make
designated areas of specified width, the Contractor shall available such mechanical equipment as specified
confine all his construction activities to within the limits above in order to test the reasonable removability or
of such servitudes unless permission to encroach on his otherwise of the material. The decision of the Engineer
property has been obtained, in writing, from the owner, as to the classification shall thereafter be final and
lessee or occupier. binding.

202-1
The Contractor shall immediately inform the Engineer as The Contractor shall maintain the correct line and grade
and when the nature of the material which is being throughout the work. The trench shall be straight along
excavated changes to the extent that a new the centre line and between pegs, where applicable.
classification for further excavation is warranted. Failure Between pegs the bottom shall be carefully graded and
on the part of the Contractor to advise the Engineer in tested by sight rails and boning rods or other approved
good time shall entitle the Engineer to classify, at his means. Trenches shall, except where otherwise
sole discretion, any material of a different nature which indicated or permitted, or in the case of a statutory
may have been excavated. requirement, be excavated with vertical sides without
any undercutting of the sides.
04 EXCAVATION
All excavated material shall be kept within defined limits
The type of excavation shall be classified in accordance and shall, wherever possible, be deposited alongside
with the definitions given in section 201 based on the the trench. The material shall be deposited so as to
methods and equipment normally used irrespective of leave a clear strip of at least one metre between the
whether or not such methods and equipment have edge of the trench and the excavated material and shall
actually been used. not cause undue inconvenience to traffic and property
owners. The material shall be placed and kept well clear
04.01 Trench excavations of all manhole covers, culvert in- and outlets, fire
Unless otherwise specified or shown on the Drawings, hydrants, bench marks, stand pegs, fences, etc.
the width of trenches for single pipes and precast
To prevent vertical trench walls from collapsing,
culverts shall be the authorized trench widths as
excavated material shall, wherever possible, not be
determined below and will be used to calculate the
stacked on the side where underlying strata slope down
quantities of material excavated. Excavations in excess
towards the trench and in this regard, attention is
of these predetermined widths will not be measured for
specifically drawn to the shales sloping south to north in
payment and excavations narrower than these widths
the Pretoria area.
will only be allowed with the written approval of the
Engineer. 04.02 Hand excavations
The authorized trench widths shall, irrespective of the
Where the use of conventional excavating equipment is
type of pipe or precast culvert and the type of bedding
either unpractical or likely to cause damage to services,
and floor slab, be determined by the following formula:
trees or property, the Contractor shall advise the
W = B + 2S where Engineer thereof, who may then instruct, in writing, that
the excavations be made by means of hand labour and
W = the authorized width
paid for as hand excavation.
B = the outside diameter of the pipe or the external
width of the culvert 04.03 Excavations outside the normal trench profile
S = the working space on each side of the pipe or Excavations outside the normal trench profile, which are
culvert measured between the external surface necessary for the removal of unsuitable material at
of the conduit and the side of the trench. founding levels, for accommodating structures such as
manholes, valve chambers, junction boxes, thrust
For the purpose of these Specifications, S shall be
blocks, draw pits, catchpits, wing walls, and that portion
allotted the following values:
of the sewer-house connections between the junction
S = 200 mm for values of B equal to or less than with the main sewer and its point of connection with the
620 mm and will apply to all pipes and culverts sewer from the property, will be measured and paid for
separately from trench excavations. These excavations
S = 250 mm for values of B in excess of 620 mm may be made by means of excavating plant wherever
and will apply only to water pipes practicable, or otherwise by hand, in which case it shall
S = 450 mm for values of B in excess of 620 mm not be classed as hand excavation. Excavations for
handholes to accommodate pipe joints will not be
and will apply to all culverts and pipes with the
included in payment for excavations outside the normal
exception of water pipes. trench profile. See clause 10 of this section.
The above formula and values of S will only apply to
portal and rectangular culverts if the subsequent 04.04 Mass earthworks
backfilling is done using natural gravel and reference Where pipes are to be installed at a level lower than the
shall be made to sub clause 05.02 of section 502 for level of any mass earthworks that have to be carried out
trench widths applicable when backfilling with concrete for the purpose of constructing a structure or a road, the
or soilcrete. trenching and pipework shall, if so specified in the
The width of trenches for pipes encased in concrete or Project Specifications, be carried out after the mass
soilcrete or for multiple pipes or culverts shall be as earthworks have been completed.
specified in the relevant sections of these Specifications
or as shown on the Drawings. 05 TOPSOIL
The Contractor may side-slope or bench the trench from The topsoil shall be removed from over the full width of
a point above the top of the pipe at his own expense in the trench to a depth of 300 mm or to the actual depth of
compliance with the Construction Regulations 2003. topsoil where subsoil or rock occurs closer than 300 mm
to the existing natural surface. On completion of
The depth of excavations shall be as specified or shown backfilling, the topsoil shall be replaced in its original
on the Drawings or as indicated by the Engineer on Site. position.
Trenches for water pipes shall, unless otherwise
specified, be excavated at a constant depth to follow the Topsoil is the property of the land owner and shall be
general surface contours wherever possible. kept separate from the subsoil. No separate payment
shall be made for the removal and returning of topsoil,
The cost of trimming excavations by hand or machine allowance for which shall be made in the rates tendered
shall not be paid for separately but shall be included in for excavation.
the rates tendered for excavation.

202-2
06 TIMBERING AND SHORING such excess excavation, and shall use the same material
that has been used for the rest of the trench at the level in
The Contractor shall provide all the timbering, strutting
question. Where the trench has been excavated deeper
and shoring required in terms of the Construction
than the required depth, the bottom shall be reinstated to
Regulations 2003 for the safety of the excavations and
the correct level as described in clause 09.
structures adjacent to the trenches, and shall be solely
and wholly responsible for ensuring the adequacy of 09 PREPARATION OF TRENCH BOTTOMS
these measures for this purpose.
Trench bottoms in hard material shall be cleared of all
Without in any way affecting or detracting from the rock projections and of all rock fragments and particles
Contractor's responsibility, the Engineer shall have the of hard material. Poor founding material shall be
right to instruct the Contractor to provide additional or removed to depths determined by the Engineer.
improved timbering, shoring or strutting where he
considers this to be necessary. The Contractor shall The trench bottom shall then be reinstated to the required
have no claim for additional payment on this account. level with selected gravel material compacted to 90% of
modified AASHTO density, with concrete aggregate having
The shoring method adopted shall be compatible with a maximum size of 38 mm, with class 1:3:6/19 concrete, or
the soil type and the excavating, backfilling and pipe- with soilcrete as may be instructed by the Engineer in each
laying methods adopted and shall not place any undue case. Such reinstatement will not be paid for in the case of
restrictions on the laying of the pipes. overbreak or where poor founding conditions have been
Timbering and shoring shall be left in position until the caused by the Contractor's negligence.
Engineer has authorized their removal. Where selected gravel material is used to replace poor
Unless otherwise indicated in the Project Specifications, founding material, the gravel shall be compacted in
no separate payment shall be made for timbering and layers not exceeding 100 mm of compacted thickness.
shoring, except where they are left in the excavations in The minimum selected gravel bedding thickness for
accordance with instructions. The specified trench width trenches in hard material is 150 mm.
shall be the clear width between the timbering and
shoring. Any extra excavations required for the timbering Where trench bottoms consist of loose in situ gravel
and shoring shall be included in the rates tendered for material, they shall be thoroughly compacted to the
excavations. Engineer's approval to provide a firm floor. Trench
bottoms shall be hand-trimmed to final levels and grades
As an alternative to timbering and shoring, the immediately before pipe beddings are placed or pipes
Contractor may, where sufficient space is available and are laid.
where the safety of nearby services and structures is not
jeopardized, elect to slope the sides of the trench from a No separate payment will be made for the preparation of
point above the pipe as mentioned in clause 04, and he trench bottoms, except where material is imported to fill
shall also make allowance for such additional work in excess excavations authorized by the Engineer.
the tendered rates for excavation and backfilling.
10 EXCAVATIONS FOR PIPE JOINTS
07 TUNNELS AND BOLSTERS If necessary, accurately located recesses shall be cut
The Contractor shall be permitted to tunnel underneath into trench bottoms to accommodate pipe joints. Such
obstructions such as trees, walls, etc, provided that he recesses shall be properly shaped and sized to facilitate
has obtained the Engineer's written approval, the trench jointing. Recesses for pipes to be welded together in the
is of sufficient depth, and the in situ material is suitable trench shall provide a clear space of not less than 0,5 m
for tunnelling. No blasting will be allowed for the below the pipes. Payment for making such recesses
excavation of tunnels and bolsters. Tunnelling will not be shall be included in the tendered rates for the supply,
paid for as hand excavation. installation, joining and testing of the various types of
pipes and fittings.
The tunnel or bolster shall have the same width as the
trench and shall have a minimum vertical height of 11 DEALING WITH WATER
1 200 mm above the pipe. Tunnels and bolsters shall be
properly timbered and shored where necessary. Water that may be encountered during the trenching
operations shall be dealt with as set out in clause 27 of
Where a pipeline passes through a tunnel or bolster, the section 001. The Engineer may instruct the Contractor to
pipe shall, after having been tested, be encased in provide a layer of 38 mm maximum size concrete
concrete or soilcrete as may be instructed by the aggregate below the bedding to serve as a drain to
Engineer, after which the tunnel or bolster shall be filled dispose of excess water. The thickness of the layer shall
with hand-packed stones having a maximum dimension be determined on Site by the Engineer.
of 300 mm. The stones shall be so packed as to provide
a minimum of voids. Voids remaining in the stone In the case of trenches for sewer pipes, the Engineer
packing shall be filled with dry sand, as the packing may instruct the Contractor to install a subsurface drain
proceeds. Payment will be made under the applicable below the bottom of the trench, which shall consist of
pay items of this section. 150 mm diameter vitrified clay pipes of commercial
quality (known as irrigation or rejected pipes),
A tunnel with a length of 4,5 metres or less shall be surrounded by 19 mm crushed stone in a
designated as a bolster and shall be paid for as an open 300 mm x 300 mm trench. The position of the drain in
trench, and a tunnel with a length in excess of the trench shall be as shown on the Drawings or as
4,5 metres shall be paid for as a tunnel. determined by the Engineer.
The minimum distance between two consecutive tunnels If required by the Engineer, the Contractor shall leave
or bolsters shall be 3,0 metres. portions of the trench unexcavated to prevent the flow of
water down the trench. These bulkheads shall be at
08 EXCESS EXCAVATIONS least one metre thick and shall be spaced as directed by
Should the Contractor for any reason whatsoever the Engineer. No additional payment over and above
excavate beyond the limits of the authorized normal excavation rates will be made for leaving these
dimensions, he shall, at his own cost, carry out the bulkheads temporarily unexcavated.
additional backfilling that will be required as a result of

202-3
12 SOILCRETE • the use of gravel, wood, tyres, etc as ramps where
kerbs have to be negotiated;
Soilcrete shall consist of an approved soil or gravel
mixed with 5% cement of the type as specified in • the use of tyres and rubber mats where crawler-
section 704 and only sufficient water to give it a tracked equipment is used;
consistency that will permit the soilcrete to be so placed,
• the placing of wooden blocks under the hydraulic
with the use of vibrators, as to properly fill all voids
stabilizing arms of excavators, cranes, etc;
between the pipes and the sides of excavations.
• the tined buckets of excavating equipment shall be
The aggregate used for soilcrete shall preferably be a
placed on wooden blocks when fully lowered; and
sandy material but may contain larger particles up to
38 mm and its plasticity index shall not exceed 10. • loading equipment shall be fitted with buckets
Harmful percentages of silt or clay shall be avoided and without tines and shall be used to remove dumped
the aggregate shall be obtained from an approved source. material to a minimum of 200 mm above a paved
surface. The remaining 200 mm of material shall be
The soilcrete shall be mixed on Site by means of
removed by means of hand labour.
suitable concrete mixers. The water and cement
contents shall be carefully controlled during mixing. The The Contractor shall at his own cost adhere to the
material shall be placed and then thoroughly compacted approved proposals and will be held liable for repairing
by means of concrete vibrators so as to fill all voids as the damage caused by his equipment to surfaced roads,
described above. paved side-ways, kerbing, etc and restoring them to
their original condition.
13 BACKFILLING
Before excavations are made in a surfaced roadway or
The backfilling of trenches to a point 300 mm above the paved side-way, the width of the trench or such other
tops of pipe barrels (200 mm in the case of water pipes) width as may be agreed on by the Engineer, shall be
shall be carried out as specified in the relevant sections marked on the surface and the surfacing material or in
of these Specifications. situ concrete paving shall be neatly cut along the
markings, to avoid any overbreak of the surfacing or
Further backfilling shall be done with approved
paving beyond the limits agreed on. Paving units shall
excavated material, which shall not contain any stones
however not be cut but shall be lifted as near as possible
larger than 150 mm. Backfilling shall, in the case of
along the markings and stored for re-use. The cost of
pipes on a class A concrete bedding, not be commenced
removing surfacing and paving material shall be deemed
before the concrete has attained a compressive strength
to be included in the rates tendered for trenching.
of at least 15 Mpa. For other concrete beddings, further
backfilling may commence 3 days after the backfilling Where services and culverts are to be installed across
over the pipes has been completed. All backfill material or along new roads that are under construction, such
shall be compacted to 90% of modified AASHTO density work shall be completed before the subbase layer is
in layers not exceeding 150 mm in compacted thickness constructed, provided the requirements for mass
and with the use of vibratory equipment. earthworks as set out in subclause 04.04 are not
applicable.
Topsoil previously set aside shall be replaced as a final
layer on top of the backfilling leaving the material 100 mm The excavating and backfilling of trenches in road
proud of the original ground surface to allow for settlement. reserves shall be carried out as specified in clauses 04
and 13 except that the material shall be compacted
During the contract period and also during the defects
during backfilling to the density specified hereafter.
liability period, the Contractor shall make good promptly
and at his cost any settlement that may occur in the Where excavated material cannot be temporarily placed
surfaces of roads, sidewalks, private or public property, alongside the excavation, the material shall be
etc, caused by his trenches. He shall be liable for any stockpiled as specified in clause 07 of section 201.
accidents caused by it and shall repair, at his cost, any
The backfilling in respect of gravel roads shall be
damage to property.
compacted to 93% of modified AASHTO density and
The backfilling of culverts shall be carried out as shall be taken to the level of the existing road surface
specified in section 502. or, in the case of new roads under construction, to the
top of the subgrade.
14 TRENCHES WITHIN ROAD RESERVES
The backfilling in respect of surfaced roads shall also be
In this clause the word side-way denotes the area compacted to 93% of modified AASHTO density and
between the edge of a road and the boundary of the shall be taken up to a level 500 mm below the existing
road reserve. road surface. Selected material, stabilized by the
addition of a quantity of cement of the type as specified
Where trenching operations are carried out in a
in section 704 equal to 3% of the dry mass of the gravel
roadway, at least half the roadway shall remain open to
and compacted in three 150 mm thick layers to 95% of
traffic at all times and where trenching is carried out on
modified AASHTO density shall be used to backfill the
side-ways, safe, uncluttered thoroughfares shall be
balance of the trench to a level 50 mm below the
provided for pedestrians.
existing road surface.
Where the temporary closing of any road to vehicular
The remaining 50 mm shall be filled with asphalt after
traffic is required in exceptional circumstances, the
the stabilized surface and the cut sides of the existing
requirements set out in clause 11 of section 001 shall be
surfacing have been primed with a 60% anionic
adhered to.
bituminous emulsion.
Before construction equipment is allowed onto surfaced
The asphalt shall be supplied by the Contractor and
roadways or paved side-ways, the Contractor shall
shall conform to the requirements for medium grade,
obtain approval from the Engineer for his proposals of
continuously graded asphalt as specified in section 606.
how he intends operating his equipment without causing
The asphalt shall be placed and thoroughly compacted
damage to the road and side-way surfaces. Such
by means of vibratory equipment and shall be finished
proposals shall include the following:
off flush with the existing road surface.

202-4
If for some reason the remaining 50 mm cannot be filled The tendered rates shall include full compensation for
immediately with asphalt, approved excavated material clearing and grubbing the trench areas except for trees
shall be used as a temporary measure, enabling the with a girth larger than 1,0 m, the temporary removal of
road to be opened to traffic as soon as possible. This improvements from the line of the trench, the removal of
temporary backfill shall be well compacted and surfacing and paving material, for excavating the trench,
maintained until the asphalt can be placed. Before preparing the bottom of the trench, separating material
priming is done and the asphalt placed, all traces of the unsuitable for backfill, keeping the excavations safe,
temporary material shall be removed. which includes the provision, installation and later
removal of shoring and strutting, dealing with any
The backfilling of trenches in paved side-ways shall be
surface or subsurface water, for separating topsoil and
carried out as specified for trenches in roadways and the
selected backfill material where necessary and for
compaction to 93% of modified AASHTO density shall
temporary stockpiling of material unless otherwise
be taken to below the paving material with due
specified in the Project Specifications. Excavations in
allowance, where applicable, for the thickness of the
bolsters less than 4,5 m in length will be measured and
sand bedding layer.
paid for as for trench excavations.
The paving blocks or slabs shall be replaced as
specified in section 609 and in situ concrete paving as Item Unit
specified in section 610. Payment will be made under 202.02 Extra over items 202.01,
item 609.05 for replacing blocks or slabs and under 202.03, 202.04 and 202.09 for
items 610.01 and 610.02 for in situ concrete paving. excavating in -
After completion of the work in road reserves, the
202.02.01 Intermediate material cubic metre (m3)
Contractor shall repaint in the manner specified in
section 613, any traffic markings that have been 202.02.02 Hard material cubic metre (m )
3

damaged or obliterated. Payment for repainting traffic

markings will be made under the applicable items of The unit of measurement shall be the cubic metre of
section 613. material excavated and classified as intermediate or
hard, in accordance with the classification set out in
15 TOLERANCES clause 03.

A tolerance of plus or minus 25 mm in respect of the The tendered rates shall be paid over and above the
required level of the trench bottom shall be the rate tendered for excavation in respect of items 202.01,
maximum deviation allowed. The maximum permissible 202.03, 202.04 and 202.09 in full compensation for the
deviation in plan shall be 25 mm, whereas the grade of additional cost of excavating in material other than soft
the trench shall be within the same tolerance limits as material. The tendered rates shall include full
the service for which it is excavated. compensation for any overbreak as well as the
additional backfilling required, reinstating the trench
Where trenches are deepened or widened to bottom, and for any other incidentals resulting from
accommodate structures, etc, as mentioned in clause overbreak.
04, the tolerance limits of the excavations shall be the
same as those of the structures, etc, in so far as invert Item Unit
level and plan are concerned.
202.03 Excavations outside the
16 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT normal trench profile cubic metre (m3)

Note: The unit of measurement shall be the cubic metre of

material excavated, if necessary by hand, outside the
Reference shall be made to the last paragraph of normal trench profile for manholes, catchpits, valve
clause 02 of this section regarding payment for work chambers, thrust blocks, etc, and for removing
carried out under this section. unsuitable material from trench floors, all as specified in
Item Unit sub clause 04.03 of this section.

202.01 Trench excavations The tendered rate shall include full compensation for
excavating outside the normal trench profile, trimming
202.01.01 Up to 1,0 m wide the excavations, separating any material unsuitable for
202.01.01.01 Up to 1,0 m deep cubic metre (m3) backfill, keeping excavations safe, dealing with water,
separating selected backfill material, for carting all
202.01.01.02 Over 1,0 m and up to surplus or unsuitable material to spoil sites indicated by
3
1,5 m deep cubic metre (m ) the Engineer or provided by the Contractor, as may be
specified in the Project Specifications and for temporary
202.01.01.03 Etc, increased by additional
stockpiling of material unless otherwise specified in the
0,5 m depths
Project Specifications.
202.01.02 Over 1,0 m and up to 2,0 m wide
Item Unit
202.01.03 Etc, increased by additional 1,0 m widths
202.04 Hand excavation (extra
The unit of measurement shall be the cubic metre of over item 202.01) cubic metre (m3)
material excavated as if in soft material, classified
according to the various depth and widths ranges listed. The unit of measurement shall be the cubic metre of
The depth classification shall be in accordance with the trench material excavated by means of hand tools as
total depth of the trench and not with the depth range in instructed or authorized in writing by the Engineer in
which the material is situated before excavation. For accordance with the provisions of subclause 04.02 of
measurement purposes the width of a trench shall be this section.
determined from the authorized dimensions and not from
the width range listed and the depth of excavation shall The tendered rate shall be paid extra over the rates
be measured to the underside of the bedding, except tendered for item 202.01 in full compensation for the
where no bedding is required, in which case it shall be additional expense of excavating by means of hand
measured to the underside of the conduit. labour instead of conventional trenching equipment.

202-5
Item Unit • Subitem 202.07.02 for payment of any royalties or
charges for procuring the material from sources
202.05 Excavation in tunnels provided by the Contractor as well as for transporting
exceeding 4,5 m in the material from where obtained to where used on
length in - Site.
202.05.01 Soft material cubic metre (m3) Item Unit
3
202.05.02 Intermediate material cubic metre (m ) 202.08 Backfilling additional
202.05.03 Hard material cubic metre (m3) excavations in trench floor,
using -
The unit of measurement shall be the cubic metre of
material excavated in tunnels exceeding 4,5 m in length 202.08.01 Class 1:3:6/19 concrete cubic metre (m3)
in accordance with the authorized dimension.
202.08.02 Concrete aggregate, max
The tendered rates shall be in full compensation for size 38 mm cubic metre (m3)
excavating by hand or machine in tunnels through soft,
The unit of measurement shall be the cubic metre of
intermediate and hard material, for separating material
backfill placed and compacted as specified.
unsuitable for backfill, for supporting the roof if
necessary, for compacting the floor of the tunnel if The tendered rates shall include full compensation for
necessary, for carting all surplus or unsuitable material mixing, furnishing and placing the concrete.
to spoil sites indicated by the Engineer or provided by
Where gravel is used as backfill, it shall be paid for
the Contractor, as may be specified in the Project
under items 202.06 and 202.07, and where soilcrete
Specifications and for temporary stockpiling of material
backfill is used, it shall be paid for under item 202.13.
unless otherwise specified in the Project Specifications.
This item shall apply only to tunnels exceeding 4,5 m Item Unit
and up to 10,0 m in length. 202.09 Subsurface drains in trench
Item Unit bottoms
(Drawing number indicated) metre (m)
202.06 The backfilling of trenches
(excluding backfill around The unit of measurement shall be the metre of subsoil
the pipe barrel) with drain constructed complete as specified and shown on
the Drawings.
material obtained from
3
excavations cubic metre (m ) The tendered rate shall include full compensation for
constructing the subsoil drain complete, including
The unit of measurement shall be the cubic metre of excavation by hand in soft material, the supply and
backfill placed in ordinary trench excavations from installation of reject pipes, and the supply and placing of
300 mm above the pipe barrel (200 mm in the case of concrete aggregate. The rate shall be subject to an
water pipes), from above concrete encasement, and in extra over-payment under item 202.02 for excavation in
excavations outside the normal trench profile, as intermediate or hard material, and shall also include full
specified in clause 13 of this section. compensation for the removal of all surplus or unsuitable
The tendered rate shall be in full compensation for the excavated material to spoil sites indicated by the
backfilling of trenches, compacting the backfill to 90% of Engineer or provided by the Contractor, as may be
modified AASHTO density, replacing topsoil previously specified in the Project Specifications.
set aside, and for transporting previously excavated
Item Unit
material, from where dumped to where used, as backfill,
regardless of the distance transported. 202.10 Removal of spoil material -
Item Unit 202.10.01 To positions indicated on
the Drawings or by the
202.07 Extra over items 202.06 and 3
Engineer cubic metre (m )
202.13 for using backfill
material obtained - 202.10.02 To dumping areas to be
3 provided by the
202.07.01 From borrow areas cubic metre (m )
Contractor cubic metre (m3)
202.07.02 From sources provided
The unit of measurement shall be the cubic metre of
by the Contractor cubic metre (m3)
material removed to spoil measured as specified in
The unit of measurement shall be the cubic metre of clause 06 of section 201.
imported backfill material.
The tendered rates shall include full compensation for
The tendered rates paid extra over items 202.06 and loading the material and transporting it in the case of -
202.13 shall be in full compensation for the additional
• Subitem 202.10.01 within the free-haul boundaries,
cost of excavating and loading borrow material, and in
and
the case of the following:
• Subitem 202.10.02 for the full distance and for
• Subitem 202.07.01 for all operations at borrow areas
providing the dumping area, and shall include any
not subject to separate payment as specified in
payments to the landowners.
clauses 05 and 09 of section 201 and for hauling
material within the free-haul boundaries, and

202-6
The rates shall also include the provision of haul roads Item Unit
and the clearing up of haul roads and dumping areas on
completion of the work. Spoil areas shall be finished-off 202.15 Reinstatement of
as specified for borrow areas in the third last paragraph bitumen surfaced
of clause 05 of section 201. roads square metre (m2)

Item Unit The unit of measurement shall be the square metre of

road surface reinstated, measured in accordance with
202.11 Timbering and shoring the authorized dimensions.
left in excavation square metre (m2)
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for
The unit of measurement shall be the square metre of procuring and furnishing selected material, stabilizing
tunnel wall or roof or trench wall against which timbering the material with cement, compacting the material in
and shoring is required to be left in position permanently three 150 mm layers to 95% of modified AASHTO
on the Engineer's instructions. Each side of the trench or density, for temporarily filling the top 50 mm if necessary
tunnel shall be measured. with excavated material and for compacting, maintaining
and later removal of the material, for priming and for
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for furnishing, placing and compacting the asphalt, all as
leaving the timbering and shoring permanently in specified in clause 14.
position, for ensuring that the timbering and shoring will
not be disturbed during backfilling, and that the The backfill of the trench up to 500 mm from the road
backfilling is compacted fully around the shoring. surface will be paid for under items 202.06 and 202.12.

Item Unit Note:

202.12 Extra over item 202.06 for The following items of work, when specified, shall be
additional compaction of carried out, measured and paid for in accordance with
backfill to 93% of modified the appropriate sections of the Specifications, but shall
AASHTO density in road be listed under this section in the Schedule of
reserves cubic metre (m3) Quantities.

The unit of measurement shall be the cubic metre of Item Applicable section
material subjected to additional compaction, as
specified. (a) Removal of trees 101

The tendered rate shall be paid as an extra over the rate (b) Overhaul 103
for item 202.06 in full compensation for the additional (c) Excess overburden at borrow areas 201
cost resulting from the higher compaction requirement.
(d) Temporary stockpiling of excavated material 201
Item Unit
(e) Replacing segmented paving over trenches 609
202.13 Backfilling trenches
with soilcrete 3
cubic metre (m ) (f) Replacing in situ concrete paving over
trenches 610
The unit of measurement shall be the cubic metre of
soilcrete. The volume shall be determined from the (g) Repainting traffic markings 613
authorized dimensions of the trench minus the volume
occupied by a conduit or casing.
The tendered rate shall be in full compensation for
providing suitable gravel from excavations, providing
and mixing in the cement, and placing the material. It
shall also include all haulage. Where gravel for soilcrete
is obtained from borrow areas or from sources provided
by the Contractor, the extra over item 202.07 shall
apply.

Item Unit
202.14 Stone packing
3
202.14.01 In bolsters cubic metre (m )
202.14.02 In tunnels cubic metre (m3)
The unit of measurement shall be the cubic metre of
stone packing constructed as specified in clause 07,
determined from the authorized dimensions.
The tendered rates shall include full compensation for
furnishing the stones and sand and for all labour
required to hand-pack the stones as specified.

202-7
SERIES 2 : EARTHWORKS (g) Pavement layers
The upper layers of a road or parking area
SECTION 203 : MASS EARTHWORKS comprising the subgrade, subbase, basecourse
and surfacing.
CONTENTS
(h) Pioneer layer
01 SCOPE An initial layer constructed over a weak
02 DEFINITIONS construction bed where selected material is used
03 MATERIALS to provide a stable surface for the construction of
04 CLASSIFICATION OF EXCAVATED MATERIAL subsequent layers.
05 CLASSIFICATION OF COMPACTION
06 PLACING AND COMPACTION (i) Roller-pass or pass
07 EXCAVATION One pass of a roller comprising a single coverage
08 FINISHING OF SLOPES of the drum of a roller with only sufficient overlap
09 CONSTRUCTION BED TREATMENT to ensure that no area is left uncompacted.
10 FILL CONSTRUCTION
11 PROTECTION OF FILLS (j) Side drain
12 CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES An open longitudinal drain situated adjacent to and
13 TESTING at the bottom of cut or fill slopes.
14 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
(k) Slope
01 SCOPE Unless otherwise stated, slope is expressed in
terms of the ratio of the vertical difference in
This section covers the construction of mass earthworks elevation between any two points and the
as defined in clause 02 of section 201. It mainly covers horizontal distance between them. This ratio may
the construction of cuttings and embankments for road also be expressed as a percentage.
and railway construction up to the underside of the
pavement or the subballast layers, and the construction 03 MATERIALS
of large excavations and embankments for other works
such as sports fields. 03.01 In situ materials
In situ materials in construction beds and excavations
02 DEFINITIONS have been tested, and the results of the tests are
For the purposes of this section in particular and these shown on the Drawings. The test results, read in
Specifications in general, the following words and conjunction with these Specifications, give a preliminary
indication as to the purposes for which excavated
expressions shall, unless inconsistent with the context,
have the meanings hereby assigned to them. material may be used and the treatment, if any, to be
given to the construction bed. During construction the
(a) Construction bed Engineer shall give final instructions regarding the use
of excavated material and the treatment of the
The natural material on which fills or, in the construction bed.
absence of fills, pavement layers are constructed.
03.02 Fill
(b) Cut or Cutting
Fill material shall conform to the requirements specified
A large excavation, in mass earthworks, usually below.
for the purpose of accommodating a road or
railway line. (a) The material shall contain no rock fragments with
a maximum dimension exceeding 750 mm, unless
(c) Embankment otherwise authorized by the Engineer.
A structure consisting of imported material, usually (b) The minimum CBR at a specified in situ density
rock, soil or gravel, and built above the natural shall be as follows:
ground level. Depth below final fill level Minimum CBR
(d) Fill 0 m to 9 m 3
That portion of an embankment below the 9 m to 12 m 5
pavement, subballast or topsoil layers. By way of a written instruction the Engineer may
(e) Fill material allow or order the use of material not meeting
these requirements, provided that he has satisfied
Material used in the construction of an himself regarding the stability of the fills to be
embankment up to the underside of the pavement, constructed from such material, and provided
subballast or topsoil layers. further that the minimum CBR of the material at
100% AASHTO density exceeds 3.
(f) Grade line
The requirements in respect of material in the
The grade line is a reference line shown on the lower layers of fills which exceed 12 m in height
Drawings of the longitudinal sections of the road shall be set out in the Project Specifications.
or railway line which at regular intervals indicates
the elevations according to which the road or (c) Compaction requirements, minimum in situ dry
railway line is to be constructed. The grade line density.
may refer to the surface level of the completed • When compacted to a percentage
road or railway line, the base, fill or subballast and of modified AASHTO density 90%
may indicate the elevations either along the
carriageway or railway centre line or along any • When compacted by proof
designated position on the cross-section. rolling 98% of proof density

203-1
 • Rockfill no density specified The rest of the material shall be classed as soft or
intermediate material according to the nature of
Sands which for the purposes of this requirement
the material.
are specified as being non-plastic and, of which
not less than 95% passes through a 4,75 mm All the equipment specified in subclauses (a), (b) and
sieve, shall be compacted to 100% of modified (c) above shall be in a good mechanical condition. The
AASHTO density. expressions "efficiently ripped", "efficiently removed" or
"efficiently loaded" as used in this subclause shall in
04 CLASSIFICATION OF EXCAVATED MATERIAL this context be taken to mean ripped, removed or
loaded (as the case may be) in a manner than can
04.01 Classes of material
reasonably be expected of the equipment in question
The material from excavations and borrow shall be having regard to the production achieved.
classified as follows for purposes of measurement and
payment. 04.02 Method of classifying
(a) Soft material The Contractor shall be at liberty to use any method he
wishes to excavate any class of material, but the
Material which can be efficiently removed or method of excavation shall not dictate the classification
loaded, without prior ripping, by any of the of the material.
following plant:
• A bulldozer having a mass, including the mass The Engineer shall decide under which one of the
of a ripper if fitted, of 22 t and flywheel power classes excavated material shall be classified and paid
of approximately 145 kW; for.

or In the first instance the classification shall be based on

inspection of the material to be excavated and the
• a tractor-scraper unit having a mass of method of excavation proposed by the Contractor. In
approximately 28 t and flywheel power of the event of disagreement between the Contractor and
approximately 245 kW, pushed during loading the Engineer, the Contractor shall, if required, make
by a bulldozer equivalent to that specified in available at his own cost, such mechanical equipment
subclause 04.01(b); as specified in subclauses 04.01 (a) and (b) in order to
or test the reasonable removability or otherwise of the
material. The decision of the Engineer as to the
• a track-type front-end loader having a mass of
classification shall thereafter be final and binding.
approximately 22 t and flywheel power of
approximately 140 kW. The Contractor shall immediately inform the Engineer
(b) Intermediate material as and when the nature of the material which is being
excavated changes to the extent that a new
Material which can be efficiently ripped by a classification for further excavation is warranted. Failure
bulldozer of approximately 35 t mass when fitted on the part of the Contractor to advise the Engineer in
with a single-tine ripper, and having a flywheel good time shall entitle the Engineer to classify, at his
power of approximately 220 kW. sole discretion, any material of a different nature which
(c) Hard material may have been excavated.

Material which cannot be efficiently ripped by a 05 CLASSIFICATION OF COMPACTION

bulldozer equivalent to that described in
subclause 04.01 (b). For purposes of measurement and payment, the
method of processing and the compaction of material
This material generally includes formations of
shall be classified as described below. The Engineer
unweathered rock, which can only be removed
shall, except in the case of compaction to a minimum
after blasting.
percentage of proof density, decide in advance on the
(d) Boulder material Class A classification of compaction to be employed, and the
classification of material for purposes of excavation
Material containing more than 40% by volume of
shall have no bearing on the classification of the
boulders between 0,03 m3 and 20 m3 in size in a
compaction of material.
matrix of softer material or smaller boulders.
Dolomite formations other than solid dolomite Compaction to a minimum percentage of proof density
shall also be classed as Class A material if the shall be carried out only after a written request by the
formation contains more than 40% by volume of Contractor to use this type of classification has been
lumps of hard dolomite between 0,03 m and
3 received and approved by the Engineer.
3
20 m in size in a matrix of soft material or smaller
lumps of hard dolomite. 05.01 Compaction to a minimum percentage of
modified AASHTO density
Solid boulders or lumps of hard dolomite in excess
3
of 20 m in size shall be classed as hard material. Wherever a density requirement for a soil or gravel
Fissured or fractured rock shall not be classed as layer is specified in terms of a percentage of modified
boulder material but as hard or intermediate AASHTO density in these Specifications or on the
material according to the nature of the material. Drawings or in the Project Specifications or when
directed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall be at
(e) Boulder material Class B liberty to employ any type of compaction equipment he
Where a material contains 40% or less by volume may prefer in order to achieve the required density over
of boulders or lumps of hard dolomite ranging the full specified depth of the layer, always provided
between 0,03 m3 and 20 m3 in size, in a matrix of that he complies in all respects with the general
soft material or smaller boulders or lumps of hard requirements of these Specifications, and that the
dolomite, then those boulders or lumps of hard equipment employed is adequate and suitable for the
dolomite between 0,03 m3 and 20 m3 in size shall purpose and is in no way detrimental to any part of the
be classed in Class B boulder material. Works.

203-2
05.02 Compaction to a minimum percentage of 05.03 Rock-fill processing and compaction
proof density
Rock-fill processing and compaction shall apply to
Where serious difficulties are encountered in regard to material which contains more than 25% of rock particles
obtaining the densities specified in terms of a the greater dimension of which exceeds 150 mm, and
percentage of modified AASHTO density, the Engineer which, on account of the mechanical interlocking of the
may, as a concession to the Contractor, specify rock, cannot be effectively compacted by the
compaction to 98% of proof density as described below. construction methods normally used for soils and
gravels.
(a) Materials
Where the layer thickness after compaction is 200 mm
The requirements of subclause 05.01 shall apply or less, as has been directed by the Engineer, the
in respect of material compacted to a percentage processing and compaction of such material shall not
of proof density, save that the required density necessarily be classed as rock-fill processing and
shall be expressed as a percentage of a proof compaction, in which case the Engineer may direct that
density as described below, instead of as a the material be compacted as described in
percentage of modified AASHTO density. subclause 05.04.
For each type of material encountered, a trial The maximum-size rock used in a rock-fill shall be
section shall be constructed from material which is 750 mm, and the layer thickness before compaction
representative of the type of material for which a shall not exceed one and a half times the maximum
proof density is to be determined. The material actual size of the rock. The Engineer may direct that,
shall be placed and compacted as described in after the material has been dumped in the fill, up to 5%
clause 06. The compaction shall consist of a total of the oversize material be bladed off and disposed of
of twelve passes or coverages per 150 mm of as described in subclause 06.09 in order that the layer
compacted layer thickness over every section of thickness need not be dictated by the presence of
the area to be compacted, by various items of isolated large rocks.
compaction equipment to give the most efficient
combination for the material in question. The The compacted layer shall not contain any rock with a
Contractor shall use a combination of all or any of maximum dimension which exceeds the compacted
the following equipment: heavy grid rollers, layer thickness.
sheepsfoot rollers, tamping rollers, flatwheel
The material to be compacted shall be off-loaded by
rollers and vibratory rollers, or any other item of
progressive end tipping and so spread, pushed and
equipment agreed on by the Engineer as being
levelled by means of bulldozers or other suitable
suitable. The Contractor shall include four passes
equipment as to cause the fine material to be well
by a vibratory roller for each 12-pass-roller
mixed with the rock. Hauling, spreading and compacting
combination. On completion of the compaction of
equipment shall be routed uniformly over the full width
the trial section, at least ten dry-density
of the layer to be compacted.
measurements shall be made in the top 150 mm of
the layer, or, in the case of non-plastic sand in the During the spreading and compaction process the
layer 100 mm to 250 mm below the surface, the material shall be compacted and broken down by grid or
proof density of which shall be the average of other suitable roller and shall finally be compacted by
these dry densities. vibratory roller in accordance with the formula given
below, so as to achieve a good mechanical interlock of
The specified dry density to which the material
the rock and a maximum compaction of the finer
shall be compacted shall be 98% of the proof
material in the interstices between the rock.
density and shall be measured in the top 150 mm
of the layer in the case of soils and gravels and in The type of vibratory roller used, the operating speed,
the layer 100 mm to 250 mm below the surface in the number of passes and the layer thickness shall be
the case of non-plastic sands. governed by the following formula:
(b) Equipment
Pe x n
The equipment shall be of any size and type = 1 500 (minimum)
deemed to be suitable by the Engineer, except hxv
that the following items of equipment shall comply
with the requirements set out below: Where

• Vibratory roller Pe = total static and dynamic force per metre width,
exerted by the vibratory roller at the operating
The vibratory roller shall be capable of exerting frequency given by the manufacturer (kN/m)
a combined static and dynamic load of not less
than 120 kN/m at an operating frequency not n = number of passes required
exceeding 25 Hz.
h = compacted layer thickness in metres
• Grid roller
v = roller speed in metres per second
The mass of the grid roller shall be not less
than 13 t when ballasted, and it shall be loaded Operating frequencies shall be between 18 Hz and
to this mass. 30 Hz and Pe shall be not less than 120 kN/m in width x
(the loose-layer thickness in metres).
(c) Payment
Compaction to 98% of proof density shall be paid
for at the rate tendered for compaction to the
percentage of AASHTO density replaced by it at
the Contractor's request.

203-3
05.04 Twelve-pass roller compaction To prevent the fill-layer thicknesses from being
governed by the presence of isolated larger rocks, the
When, on account of the nature of the material used,
Engineer may direct that any material, which cannot be
the degree of compaction cannot be satisfactorily
broken down to the size which can generally be
controlled by way of testing the in situ densities, the
obtained for the rest of the material in the layer, be
Engineer may instruct that the material be placed and
bladed off the fill and removed and that payment
compacted as described in subclause 05.02 by way of
therefore be made as described in sub clause 06.09.
twelve passes or coverages (per 150 mm of compacted
layer thickness) by a combination of various items of The material placed on the fill shall be thoroughly
compacting equipment. The Engineer may also instruct broken down through the entire layer by equipment
that the number of passes required be increased or suited for this purpose. The Contractor shall be at
reduced, in which case adjustment in the compensation liberty to use any equipment considered by him to be
to be paid to the Contractor shall be made either as a the most suitable, but in the event of disagreement
payment to the Contractor in respect of the increased between the Engineer and the Contractor as to the
number of passes required by the Engineer, or as a adequacy of the equipment used or the process
refund to the Employer in respect of the reduced employed, the material shall be given a normal grid
number of passes required by the Engineer. rolling as described in subclause 06.07, and the
Engineer may at any time require that all material be
The provisions of subclause 05.02 shall apply mutatis
mutandis to this method of compaction, with the proviso given a normal grid rolling or any equivalent alternative
treatment approved by him.
that compaction to a specified density will not be
required, but that the full number of roller passes During such processing the material shall be frequently
required and paid for shall be done. bladed to bring oversize material to the surface to
facilitate breaking-down.
06 PLACING AND COMPACTION
When normal grid rolling cannot effectively break down
06.01 General the material to the required size, the Engineer may
negotiate with the Contractor in regard to the use of
This clause covers the placing, breaking down, specialized equipment such as heavy vibrating grid
watering, mixing and compaction of natural gravel rollers and self-propelled tamping rollers to break down
materials by conventional construction techniques. the material. Where the extensive use of such
06.02 Spreading of materials equipment is contemplated in advance, its use and
payment for such use will be specified in the Project
All materials which are deposited in place prior to Specifications.
compaction shall be evenly spread over the entire area
designated for the layer concerned and in a quantity Where the coarse and fine fractions of the material are
that will give the thickness of any one layer which, when not uniformly distributed or have been allowed to
measured after compaction, shall comply with the become segregated, the material shall be thoroughly
specified requirements. mixed on the road by blading with a motor grader being
done in successive cuts over the full depth of the layer
A new layer of less than 75 mm of compacted thickness after the required amount of water has been added as
shall be bonded to the previous layer by the previous described in subclause 06.04. Mixing shall continue
layer being scarified to a depth of not less than 25 mm, until a uniform mixture of the variously sized fractions of
or to such greater depth as to give a total compacted the material has been obtained.
thickness of the new layer plus the scarified portion of
the previous layer, of not less than 100 mm. 06.04 Watering and mixing

06.03 Breaking down and preparation of the Any water that is required before the material is
material compacted shall be added to the material in successive
applications by means of water sprinklers fitted with
All material used in the construction of the fill shall be sprinkler bars or by means of pressure distributors, all
reduced to a maximum size of 750 mm in the capable of applying the water evenly and uniformly over
excavation or the borrow pit by cross ripping, secondary the area concerned.
blasting or other suitable means if necessary, before
any breaking down on the fill is attempted. The water shall be thoroughly mixed with the material to
be compacted by means of motor graders or other
Once reduced to this size, the material shall be either suitable equipment. Mixing shall continue until the
processed and broken down as described below and in required amount of water has been added and a
subclause 06.06, or it shall be utilized directly in rock-fill uniform mixture is obtained, after which compaction
construction as described in subclause 05.03, all as may be proceeded with.
instructed by the Engineer.
The amount of water to be added shall be sufficient to
No separate payment shall be made for any breaking- bring the material up to the optimum moisture content
down as described above, and the cost of such required for the compaction equipment used and to the
breaking-down, which shall include any secondary required density, provided always that compaction shall
blasting, shall be included in the rates tendered for the not be attempted with and will not be approved in
construction of fill layers. respect of materials the moisture content of which
Excavated material not required for the construction of exceeds the optimum moisture content by 2%. Should
the Works, need only be broken down sufficiently to the material be too wet on account of rain or for any
facilitate handling and so as not to be unsightly where it other reason, it shall be harrowed and allowed to dry to
is finally deposited in spoil. attain a moisture content which conforms to the above
requirement before compaction is proceeded with.
The material shall be broken down to a size not
exceeding the compacted thickness of the fill layers.
The thickness of the fill layers will depend on the size to
which the material can be broken down by the specified
techniques and will be decided on the Site by the
Engineer.

203-4
06.05 Compaction 06.09 Disposal of oversize material
Compaction shall be done in a series of continuous The Engineer will direct that oversize material be
operations which cover the full width of the layer disposed of or utilized elsewhere in the construction of
concerned. The length of any section of a layer to be the Works and that it be paid for in one of the following
compacted shall, wherever possible, neither be less ways:
than 150 m nor more than can be properly compacted
(a) Where the oversize material is bladed off the fill
with the available equipment.
and utilized in the uniform widening of fills beyond
The Engineer is authorized to instruct the Contractor to the specified dimensions, the material shall be
reduce the area of any layer which is compacted in any paid for as "excavation to spoil" material.
single operation if such layer is not being properly (b) Where the material is bladed off the fill, loaded,
compacted. transported and taken to spoil, the material shall
The types of compaction equipment to be used and the be paid for under the item "removal of oversize
amount of rolling to be done shall be of such a nature material".
as to ensure that specified densities are obtained (c) Where the material is bladed off the fill, loaded,
without damage being done to lower layers or transported to the point of use and utilized in any
structures. During compaction the layer shall be other item of construction, it shall be paid for under
maintained to the required shape and cross-section, the item "removal of oversize material" as well as
and all holes, ruts and laminations shall be eliminated. under the item of construction for which it is utilized.
06.06 Construction of thick layers Notwithstanding the methods of payment described
above, tender rates for the construction of all the fill
Where the blading and mixing of fill layers by motor layers from excavated or borrow material shall include
grader becomes very difficult on account of the full compensation for the removal of oversize material of
thickness of the layer to be constructed, the Engineer up to 5% by volume at no additional payment to the
may allow this operation to be curtailed or entirely Contractor.
omitted during any breaking-down, mixing or watering
process in which blading and mixing has been Only that volume of oversize material removed in
specified. In such cases the Contractor shall take all excess of 5% of the compacted volume of any fill layers
reasonable measures to ensure that the material is constructed from excavated and borrow material will
nevertheless thoroughly broken down and brought as therefore be measured for payment under the items
near as is practicable to the moisture content required "removal of oversize material" in the case of (b) or (c)
for proper compaction. above, or as "excavation to spoil" material in the case of
(a) above.
During breaking-down on the fill, the loose-layer
thickness shall be adapted to the size of the material The Contractor shall take all reasonable care not to
being handled and shall not be so excessive as to bring onto the fill any material which cannot be broken
reduce the efficacy of the breaking-down process. down to the required size by processing on the fill. This
can be avoided by proper selection in excavation or in
06.07 Normal grid rolling borrow. In excavation any material thus selected shall
be taken direct to spoil or shall be utilized as directed
For the purposes of this Specification, normal grid by the Engineer.
rolling shall be taken to mean the following:
(a) The material to be grid-rolled shall be evenly 07 EXCAVATION
spread over the entire width of the layer being
07.01 Dimensions of excavations
prepared.
The dimensions of excavations shall be generally in
(b) The grid roller, which shall have a minimum mass accordance with the details as shown on the Drawings
of 13,5 t, shall make two complete passes over the and shall further be defined or amended during the
material, where each pass shall consist of rolling course of construction as may be instructed by the
with the grid roller in a longitudinal direction over Engineer. The Contractor shall obtain instructions
the entire width of the layer so that each roll laps beforehand from the Engineer regarding the slope of
over half of the previous roll. the sides of cuttings and other excavations and the
(c) The material shall then be bladed to a windrow on depth to which excavations are to be taken, also
one side of the road, respread and subjected to regarding the dimensions of excavations during any in
two more grid-roller passes. situ treatment that may be required below the pavement
layers, where applicable.
The above procedure shall apply to a compacted layer
thickness of up to 150 mm. Where the actual layer In rock cuttings for road construction the rock shall be
thickness exceeds 150 mm, the number of passes of removed to such a depth as will permit the construction
the grid roller shall be increased proportionately. of the subbase layer, unless otherwise instructed.
All excavations carried below the specified depths shall
06.08 Drainage and protection be backfilled with suitable material and shall be
The compacted layers shall be adequately drained and compacted, all at the Contractor's own expense, as
shaped to prevent water from standing on or scouring directed by the Engineer.
the finished work. Windrows shall be removed to If deemed necessary by him, the Engineer may instruct
facilitate the drainage of water from the surface. the Contractor to widen any existing cuttings which
have been completed or partially completed either
No material for a succeeding layer shall be placed if the
uniformly or by altering the slopes of the sides of
underlying layer has been softened by excessive
cuttings, cutting benches, or in any other way.
moisture.

203-5
Those portions of cut slopes situated more than a In the case of rock fill, the Engineer may order the
vertical height of 2,5 m above the cutting floor and dumping of soft material over the side and that it be
widened horizontally by less than 4 m, either by worked into the interstices between the rock on the
flattening the slope or by relocating the sloping side slope surface. It is recommended that the Contractor
uniformly in an outward position, as well as by benches establish beforehand whether this will be required and
cut less than 4 m wide and situated at any height above that he follow this procedure as the fill is being built up.
the cutting floor, shall be measured and paid for under Payment for soft material thus worked into fill slopes
item 203.06. shall be made under subitem 203.01.01 and the volume
of such material shall be taken to be equal to 70% of
Those portions of cutting slopes widened horizontally by
the loose volume measured in the trucks.
more than 4 m by any of the above-mentioned methods
and irrespective of the height above the cutting floor, as 08.03 General
well as those portions of cutting slopes less than 2,5 m
above the cutting floor and irrespective of width, shall, Except in solid rock, the tops and bottoms of all slopes,
except in the case of benching as described above, be including the slopes of drainage ditches, shall be
measured and paid for as excavation to fill or rounded as indicated on the Drawings or as instructed
excavation to spoil, as the case may be. by the Engineer. Slopes at the junctions of excavations
and fills shall be adjusted and warped to flow into one
07.02 Use of excavated material another or into the natural ground surfaces without any
All suitable and approved materials excavated shall, in noticeable break.
so far as it is practicable, be used in the construction of When directed by the Engineer, slopes shall be
fill, shoulders, pavement layers, mitre banks and for adjusted to avoid harm being done to existing trees,
such other purposes as shown on the Drawings or as and also to harmonize with existing landscape features.
directed by the Engineer. The transition to such adjusted slopes shall be gradual.
Coarse rock encountered in excavations shall be Slopes of excavations and fills shall be finished to give
utilized for the construction of the lower layers of fills to a uniform appearance without any noticeable breaks.
a sufficient height to accommodate thick layers or, The degree of finish required for all fill slopes and for
where so required, shall be conserved and used as slopes of excavations flatter than 1 in 4 shall be that
directed for constructing the sides of embankments or normally obtainable by motor-grader or hand-shovel
to serve as protection against embankment or channel operations.
erosion.
The slopes of excavations and fills which are
The Engineer shall have full control of the use of all
designated for grassing shall, after having been
material produced by excavations, but the Contractor finished, be prepared for grass planting with or without
shall so plan his operations, and in particular his topsoil as specified in section 104 of these
excavation to fill operations, that all excavated material
Specifications.
can be used to the best economical advantage to the
Employer. This would mean that no material shall be All trimming of the side slopes of cuttings shall be
unnecessarily spoiled, borrowed or hauled. completed before any work on the subbase is
commenced inside such cuttings.
The Contractor shall neither borrow nor spoil any
material without the Engineer's approval and without
satisfying the Engineer that it is necessary and the most 09 CONSTRUCTION BED TREATMENT
economical method of constructing the Works.
09.01 Removal of unsuitable material
08 FINISHING OF SLOPES All construction bed material which is considered by the
Engineer to be of a quality that would prejudice the
08.01 Slopes of excavations performance of the completed road, railway line or
The slopes of cuttings and other excavations shall be parking area, shall be removed to such widths and
trimmed to neat lines and to a standard that is generally depths as instructed by the Engineer and shall be
attainable with proper care and workmanship in the type disposed of as directed. The excavated spaces shall
of material concerned. All loose rocks, stones and nests then be backfilled with approved imported material
of loose material shall be removed, especially in solid- compacted to the required density. This excavation
rock cuts, which must be completely free of such shall be measured and paid for under item 203.03.
material. The final surface of batters must not be The Engineer may also instruct that material which is
absolutely smooth, but shall have a slightly rough too wet to provide a stable platform for the construction
surface which will be suitable for subsequent grassing of the fill be removed and replaced with suitable dry
or for the establishing of natural vegetation on the material. The Contractor shall be paid for this work,
surface and, in the case of the slopes of open drains, provided that the Engineer is satisfied that, despite any
the surface shall be trimmed as specified in adequate temporary drainage installed by the
section 504. Contractor and any permanent drainage that the
Contractor may have installed on the Engineer's
08.02 Fill slopes instructions, the wet conditions are not likely to be
Fill slopes shall be finished to neat lines with all loose remedied within a reasonable period and could not have
rocks and uncompacted material removed. The degree been reasonably foreseen and avoided by proper
of finish required shall depend on the nature of the advance planning, e.g. by carrying out the construction
material used for the slopes, but the finish shall be as during a dry period. This excavation shall also be
smooth as is consistent with the material involved and measured and paid for under item 203.03.
good workmanship.
No boulders exceeding 750 mm in size may be present,
and isolated large boulders in otherwise smaller-size
material shall not be allowed to project from the
surface.

203-6
09.02 Three-pass roller compaction 09.04 Draining of construction bed
Any portion of the construction bed which, by reason of A drainable, water-logged construction bed where
its inadequate natural density, is shown on the saturated material overlies less pervious strata shall
Drawings or is specified or directed by the Engineer to first be drained by all permanent surface or subsoil
be given three-pass roller compaction, shall be drainage shown on the Drawings or as directed by the
prepared by shaping where necessary and by Engineer being installed before any other construction
compacting with a vibratory roller complying with the is started on these sections.
requirements specified in subclause 05.02(b), or with an
Such drains shall be constructed, measured and paid
impact roller. for in accordance with the requirements of sections 501
The impact roller shall be a multi-faced roller with a and 502 of these Specifications.
maximum of five flat or practically flat faces and a roller
mass of between 8 t and 10 t. The roller and towing 09.05 In situ treatment of construction bed
mechanism shall be designed in such a manner that all Wherever shown on the Drawings or directed by the
the energy applied in lifting the roller, when the roller is Engineer, the construction bed shall be treated in situ
supported on the ridge between consecutive faces, will by the breaking-up of undesirable formations of hard or
be available for dissipation on impact when the roller rocky materials to attain a uniform standard of
drops down again. The roller shall be towed at a speed compaction or to improve drainage.
of between 8 km/h and 24 km/h.
In situ treatment shall consist of ripping or blasting to
Except where otherwise authorized by the Engineer, depths below subgrade level. Unless otherwise
compaction shall comprise not less than three complete indicated on the Drawings or directed by the Engineer,
coverages by the wheels of the roller specified or the depth of ripping shall be not less than 300 mm.
ordered over every portion of the area being Similarly the depth of drilling and blasting shall be not
compacted. less than 700 mm.
While the Contractor is not meant to apply water to the After ripping or blasting, the material shall be processed
construction bed under this class of compaction and as follows:
while no rigid moisture control will be exercised during
• Where the Engineer instructs the Contractor to rip
compaction, the Contractor shall nevertheless satisfy
the in situ material, all the material shall be sized by
the Engineer that every endeavour is being made to
rolling or knapping until the maximum dimension of
take full advantage of favourable soil-moisture
any clod or spall does not exceed two-thirds of the
conditions during the rainy season, and, as far as
thickness of the layer after compaction.
possible, to carry out such compaction when the
construction bed is neither excessively dry nor The material shall then be compacted as described
excessively wet. in clause 06 and in subclause 05.04 by twelve
passes being made by an approved combination of
The Engineer is authorized to decide as to when various rollers.
conditions are favourable for compaction and where
such compaction shall be done at any particular time, • Where the Engineer instructs the Contractor to blast
and he shall have the right to instruct the Contractor to the in situ material, all the material shall be
water the construction bed at the Contractor's expense processed and compacted as described in
where, in the opinion of the Engineer, the Contractor subclause 05.03.
has failed, neglected or refused to comply with these
requirements. In both cases surplus material produced by bulking after
in situ treatment shall be removed and disposed of or
09.03 Preparation and compaction of construction utilized elsewhere, as directed by the Engineer.
bed
10 FILL CONSTRUCTION
A construction bed which is classified as suitable for in
situ use, save that it fails to meet density requirements, 10.01 General
shall be scarified, watered and compacted to 90% of The dimensions of fills shall be in accordance with the
modified AASHTO density. The depth of compaction typical cross-sections and with the details shown on the
shall be as directed by the Engineer. If necessary, Drawings, and as may be further defined or amended
construction-bed material may have to be temporarily by the Engineer during the course of construction.
bladed off to windrow to attain the necessary depth of Before construction, the Contractor shall obtain
compaction. instructions regarding any matter that may affect the
Where additional material has to be imported to obtain construction of the fill or sequence of operations.
the required levels and layer thicknesses, and where All material used in the construction of fills shall be
the thickness of the imported material, measured after broken down during excavation and during the
compaction, is less than the specified layer thickness, placement and compaction of the material.
the construction-bed material shall be scarified and the
required imported material placed, and the combined The thickness of individual layers shall depend on the
material thus obtained shall be mixed and compacted to type of material encountered and on the maximum size
the full specified depth of the layer. The imported of the particles in such material. Where the material can
material shall be measured and paid for under generally be broken down to a maximum size of
"Excavation and borrow to fill" and the construction-bed 200 mm or less, the layer thickness shall not exceed
material shall be measured and paid for under 200 mm after compaction, except in the case of
"Preparation and compaction of construction bed cohesionless sands where layers may be up to 400 mm
material". thick, subject to specified densities over the full depth of
compaction being attained.

203-7
In the case of material that cannot be reduced to a The material shall be placed in a single layer at the toe of
maximum size of 200 mm or less after removal of the the fill to the minimum elevation that will allow the placing
oversize material, thicker layers shall be constructed, and compacting equipment to operate on such layer.
but the thickness of the loose layer shall not be more
Material excavated from benches, if suitable, shall be
than is necessary to ensure that the maximum particle
incorporated in the fill. Bench-making shall be
size generally does not exceed the completed layer
measured and paid for as "Excavation to fill" or
thickness. The Engineer may, at his sole discretion,
"Excavate and spoil", unless otherwise provided in the
allow thicker layers than those specified above to be
Project Specifications.
constructed, provided that he is satisfied that the
specified densities can be obtained throughout the full 10.05 Construction of fills near structures
depth of each layer and that the layers will be uniformly
compacted with the use of equipment specifically suited At all fills adjoining uncompleted structures such as
to this purpose. bridges and large culverts, where the construction of
the fill and the backfilling behind the structure cannot be
Wherever practicable, the successive layers of material done simultaneously, the fill shall be so constructed that
shall be placed parallel to the final surface. The the longitudinal slope of the surface of the fill will at any
construction of tapered layers shall be restricted to the stage form a continuous plane sloping towards the
bottom layers where it may be unavoidable on account structure with a gradient not exceeding 10%. When the
of the crossfall, tapering out of fills or super elevation of structure is completed, the remaining portion of the fill
the final surface. shall be similarly completed and shall coincide with the
backfilling of the structure, with the backfill behind the
10.02 Placing of rock
structure being maintained at the same elevation as the
Rock material containing rock particles exceeding adjoining fill. No additional payment shall be made for
300 mm in size shall not be used at a depth of less than similarly constructing the fill outside the restricted area.
150 mm below the top of the fill level, unless otherwise
See subclause 08.04 of section 701 regarding the
authorized by the Engineer.
construction of the fill in restricted areas.
The Contractor shall, by judiciously planning the layer
thicknesses and selecting the smaller-sized material to 11 PROTECTION OF FILLS
be placed in the thinner fill layers, avoid the
unnecessary spoiling of the larger-sized rock material During construction the fills shall be kept well-drained
and ensure, wherever practicable, its full utilization. and protected at all times. All windrows shall be cut
away after construction to prevent flow being
10.03 Placing on unstable ground concentrated on completed layers, but, where
necessary, flat berms shall be constructed to prevent an
Where fill is to be constructed across water-logged or
undue erosion of the slopes. All permanent drains shall
soft clayey soil that displays excessive movement under be constructed as soon as possible, together with a
normal compaction equipment and haulage trucks so as sufficient number of additional temporary drains as may
to preclude the effective compaction of the bottom
be necessary to protect the fill, and they shall be
layers, the Engineer may direct the construction of a maintained in a good working order. Ruts and potholes
pioneer layer on the unstable ground. This layer shall which develop in the fill after completion shall be
be constructed by the dumping and spreading of
repaired and damaged sections shall be reshaped and
successive loads of suitable coarse material in a recompacted at the Contractor's own cost.
uniform layer of a thickness just sufficient to provide a
stable working platform for the construction of further All slopes shall be maintained by the Contractor until
layers which are to be compacted to a controlled the final acceptance of the Works. All erosion and flood
density. damage to slopes shall be promptly repaired.
Light hauling equipment and, where necessary, end Side drains and all other drains shall be so constructed
tipping shall be used to place the material, and the layer as to avoid any erosion damage.
shall be compacted with such light compaction
equipment as will give the most effective compaction 12 CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES
without overstressing the construction bed. Pioneer
layers need not be compacted to a controlled density. The work described in this section shall be constructed
to the dimensional tolerances given below.
The compacted volume of material used may be
determined on the basis of 70% of the loose volume in 12.01 Level
trucks as an alternative to the taking of cross-sections The level tolerances referred to in subclause 05.01 of
before and after construction. section 902 shall be as follows for fill:
10.04 Benching H90 = ±25 mm
Where the crossfall of the construction bed exceeds
Hmax = ±33 mm
1 in 4, the construction bed shall be cut away, as shown
on the Drawings, to form benches with each bench
being cut as the material is compacted and built up. The 12.02 Width
benches shall be of sufficient dimensions to allow (a) Common fill
placing and compaction equipment to operate on the
benches. The transverse width of a fill at any level,
measured horizontally, shall not at any place be
Where solid rock occurs, the dimensions of the benches more than 125 mm less or 250 mm more than the
may be smaller than those required for the operation of design width at that level.
equipment. Those benches may be made by stepping
or serrating the slope, with the steps sloping inwards to (b) Rock fill
ensure a satisfactory bond between the slope and fill. The transverse width of rock fill at any level,
The fill in such cases shall preferably consist of rock. measured horizontally, shall not at any place be
more than 250 mm less or 500 mm more than the
design width at that level.

203-8
(c) Slopes of excavations modified AASHTO-density, for up to four field
densities
No specific tolerances are given, but the excavation
slopes shall be finished to a standard generally ** For large areas such as parking areas, 1 test equals
attainable with proper care and workmanship, a series of points 5 m apart, in a straight line across
bearing in mind the nature of the material the full width of the fill at every 20 m cross-section.
excavated. Care shall be taken not to undercut any
slopes to give sections a slope steeper than 14 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
specified. All loose material shall be removed.
Note:
13 TESTING
The Contractor may, at his own expense, take the
13.01 Process control levels and prepare the cross-sections necessary for the
The minimum testing frequency required from the measurement and computation of fill quantities should
Contractor in terms of clause 05 of section 901 for he wish to check the Engineer's quantities. The
purposes of process control is shown in table 203/1. Engineer will, however, conduct check tests on any
such cross-sections as he may consider necessary to
13.02 Routine Inspection and testing confirm their accuracy and adequacy. Failure on the
part of the Contractor to submit his own cross-sections
Routine inspection and testing will be carried out by the
to the Engineer before commencing with construction
Engineer in accordance with the provisions of clause 06
will indicate his preparedness to accept the cross-
of section 901 for testing the quality of materials and
sections provided by the Engineer, and no subsequent
workmanship with a view to compliance with the
claims in this regard will be considered.
requirements of this section.
The requirements specified in subclause 03.02 for the Cross-sections for fill quantities shall be taken after any
clearing and grubbing, removal of topsoil and
compaction of fill material to a percentage of modified
AASHTO density or proof density shall be deemed to preparation of the construction bed has been
have been complied with if at least 75% of in situ completed.
density tests on any lot are equal to or above the values Item Unit
specified and no single density is more than
5 percentage points of relative compaction below the 203.01 Excavation and borrow to fill
value specified.
203.01.01 Compaction to 90% of
Any materials which do not comply with the specified modified AASHTO density cubic metre (m )
3

requirements shall be removed and replaced with

materials which comply with the specified requirements 203.01.02 Rock-fill processing and
or, if the Engineer so permits, be repaired as specified compaction cubic metre (m3)
in section 901 so that it will comply with the specified
requirements after having been repaired. Similarly any 203.01.03 Twelve-pass roller
3
workmanship which does not comply with such compaction cubic metre (m )
requirements shall be made good so as to comply
The unit of measurement shall be the cubic metre of
therewith.
material measured in the compacted fill. The quantity
Table 203/1 measured shall be computed after clearing and
grubbing, the removal of topsoil and the completion of
Testing frequency any preparatory construction-bed treatment which may
have been instructed by the Engineer. For
Position or Minimum measurement, a distinction shall be made between the
Test number of three alternative methods of processing and
layer One test
tests per compacting.
every -
lot or road
section Material excavated for the construction of open drains,
subsurface drains, culverts, bridge foundations and
Materials other structures shall, if it is of a suitable quality and if
Field (i) Ordinary so directed by the Engineer, be used for the
density fill 2 000 m
3
4 per fill construction of the fill. Payment shall be made under
and OMC* this item notwithstanding any payment previously made
for the excavation of such material. All such material
(ii) Top 300 mm shall be classified as soft material.
of fill and
5 000 m2 4 The tendered rates shall include full compensation for
construction
bed excavating the material as if it were soft material, for the
temporary stockpiling of material unless otherwise
Tolerances
specified in the Project Specifications, for transporting,
Surface Top of fill 20 m mixing, watering, placing and compacting the material,
levels (1 test = 3 pts per and for the removal and disposal of up to 5% oversize
cross-section)** material. Overhaul shall apply in accordance with the
Width (for Cut and fill provisions of section 103 and will not apply to material
roads and slopes 500 m obtained from borrow areas provided by the Contractor.
railways) For payment purposes, a distinction shall be made
between the three methods of processing and
* The determination of field density expressed as a compacting specified, as itemized above. Compaction
percentage of modified AASHTO density implies a to 98% of proof density shall be paid at the rate
modified AASHTO density determination for each tendered for subitem 203.01.01.
field density. Where material is homogeneous, this
ratio can be decreased to one determination of the

203-9
Item Unit is too wet, shall be measured for payment under this
payment item.
203.02 Extra over item 203.01
for excavating in Item Unit

203.02.01 Intermediate material

3
cubic metre (m ) 203.03 Removal of oversize
3
3
material cubic metre (m )
203.02.02 Hard material cubic metre (m )
The unit of measurement shall be the cubic metre of
203.02.03 Boulder material class A cubic metre (m3) oversize material from excavations or borrow which
3 cannot be broken down, as specified, and is removed.
203.02.04 Boulder material class B cubic metre (m )
The volume shall be determined by taking 70% of the
The unit of measurement shall be the cubic metre of measured volume in stockpiles or, where this is
material removed as specified and measured as impracticable, in a manner mutually agreed upon by the
specified under item 203.01. Engineer and the Contractor. Only that volume of
oversize material in excess of 5% of the compacted
No extra over shall apply to material obtained from volume of any fill layers will be measured for payment,
sources provided by the Contractor and all such all as specified in subclause 06.09.
material shall be classified as soft material regardless
of the methods employed to excavate such material. The tendered rate shall include full compensation for
excavating all classes of material, loading and
The tendered rates shall be paid as extra over the rates transporting, placing, any break-down treatment given
tendered for item 203.01 and shall include full or attempted, blading all oversize material off the fill,
compensation for excavating the various classes of loading, transporting it to the point of disposal or
material over and above the rates tendered for soft subsequent use, and for off-loading and spreading of
material, also the cost of all additional work, plant, the material. Overhaul shall apply in accordance with
tools, materials, labour and supervision required for the the provisions of section 103 to material hauled outside
excavating and breaking down of the material as the free-haul boundaries but not when spoiled in
specified. dumping areas to be provided by the Contractor.
The tendered rates shall include full compensation for Item Unit
any overbreak as well as the additional backfilling
required and for all other incidentals resulting from 203.05 Variations in compactive effort
overbreak and over-excavation resulting from (applicable to subitem 203.01.03
excavation carried out below the specified depths. and item 203.07)
203.05.01 Vibratory
Item Unit
rollers square-metre-pass (m 2 pass)
203.03 Excavate and spoil of -
203.05.02 Impact roller square-metre pass (m2 pass)
203.03.01 Soft material cubic metre (m3) 2
203.05.03 All other rollers square-metre pass (m pass)
3
203.03.02 Intermediate material cubic metre (m )
The unit of measurement for the increased or
3
203.03.03 Hard material cubic metre (m ) decreased number of roller passes used for
construction-bed compaction or for twelve-pass roller
203.03.04 Boulder material class A cubic metre (m3) compaction shall be the square-metre pass, which shall
203.03.05 Boulder material class B
3
cubic metre (m ) be computed by multiplying the area in square metres,
to which the variation applies, by the increased or
The unit of measurement shall be the cubic metre of decreased number of roller passes by which the
material measured in its original position in the specified effort has been increased or decreased.
excavation.
The tendered rate for each additional square-metre
Where this is not considered by the Engineer to be pass required by the Engineer over and above the
practicable, excavation to spoil may be measured in a specified number of passes shall include full
manner mutually agreed upon by the Engineer and the compensation for all supervision, labour, plant,
Contractor. equipment, fuel, materials, work and incidentals
necessary to complete and test the work as specified.
No excavation in excess of the authorized cross-
sections shall be paid for, notwithstanding any The Employer shall be refunded for any lesser number
tolerances in workmanship allowed. of square-metre passes at the same tendered rate as is
paid to the Contractor for any increased number of such
The tendered rates shall include full compensation for passes under this item.
excavating the various classes of material, for the
temporary stockpiling of material unless otherwise Item Unit
specified in the Project Specifications, for loading and 203.06 Widening of cuttings
transporting the material and for off-loading and (extra over items 203.01
disposing of the material as specified, including the
and 203.03)
shaping and levelling-off of spoil sites in the manner
specified for borrow areas in the third last paragraph of 203.06.01 In hard material cubic metre (m )
3

clause 05 of section 201.

203.06.02 In intermediate and soft
Overhaul shall apply in accordance with the provisions material cubic metre (m3)
of section 103 to material hauled outside the free-haul
boundaries but not when spoiled in dumping areas to be 203.06.03 In boulder material class A
3
provided by the Contractor. or class B cubic metre (m )
Any construction-bed material below the bottom of the The unit of measurement shall be the cubic metre of
subgrade level, which is removed as described in sub material excavated in those portions of cutting slopes
clause 09.01 because it is of poor quality or because it as specified in subclause 07.01 of this section.

203-10
Measurement shall be in the original position in the Item Unit
cutting.
203.10 In situ treatment of the
Material excavated in excess of the authorized cross- construction bed
section shall not be paid for, irrespective of any
tolerances in workmanship allowed under the Contract. 203.10.01 In situ treatment by
ripping cubic metre (m3)
The tendered rates shall be paid as extra over the rates
tendered for items 203.01 and 203.03 and shall include 203.10.02 In situ treatment by
full compensation for the additional costs involved, over blasting cubic metre (m 3)
and above those involved in the excavating of new
cuttings, for excavating material by widening the cuts as The unit of measurement shall be the cubic metre of
specified. material treated in situ, as specified. The quantity shall
be calculated from the authorized dimensions of the in
Item Unit situ material treated.
203.07 Three-pass roller compaction The tendered rates shall include full compensation for
ripping or blasting, shaping, scarifying, sizing, knapping,
203.07.01 Vibratory roller square metre (m2) rolling, and the mixing of in situ and imported material if
203.07.02 Impact roller square metre (m2) required, and for preparing and compacting the material
as specified. For payment purposes a distinction shall
The unit of measurement shall be the square metre of be made between in situ treatment by ripping and in situ
material compacted, as specified, in the area treatment by blasting. Surplus material shall be
designated by the Engineer. measured and paid for as in item 203.01 if placed in fill
and as in subitem 203.03.01 if placed to spoil, and no
The tendered rates shall include full compensation for payment under item 203.02 shall apply.
shaping, providing and keeping the rollers ready for use
when soil-moisture conditions are favourable as Item Unit
specified, and for compacting the construction bed by
three roller passes. Extra-over payments shall apply in 203.11 Finishing off slopes
respect of providing the impact rollers and keeping 203.11.01 Excavation slopes square metre (m2)
them available. (See items 203.12 and 203.13).
203.11.02 Fill slopes square metre (m2)
Item Unit
The unit of measurement shall be the square metre of
203.08 Preparation and compaction slopes finished off as specified. The areas shall be the
of construction bed material area between the shoulder breakpoint and the toe of the
to 90% of modified fill in the case of fill slopes, and the area between the
3
AASHTO density cubic metre (m ) top of the excavation slope and the toe in the case of
excavation slopes. The areas occupied by side drains
The unit of measurement shall be the cubic metre of
or any other drains shall not be included.
construction bed material prepared and compacted as
specified. The tendered rates shall include full compensation for
finishing off the slopes as specified and for loading,
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for
transporting and disposal of any material brought down
shaping, scarifying and the mixing of in situ and
during finishing operations. For payment purposes a
imported material if required, and for preparing and
distinction shall be made between excavation and fill
compacting the material as specified.
slopes.
Compaction to 98% of proof density shall be paid at the
Item Unit
rate tendered for this item.
203.12 Provision of impact roller
Item Unit
(extra over item 203.07) number (No)
203.09 Material bladed to
windrow cubic metre (m3) Where the use of an impact roller is required and the
Contractor is instructed to provide this item of
The unit of measurement for material temporarily equipment, he shall be paid separately for providing it
bladed to windrow shall be the cubic metre of material on Site.
required to be bladed off, measured in its original
position before blading-off. No payment shall be made for returning an impact roller
that has been removed from the Site or for providing a
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for replacement.
temporarily removing and subsequently replacing the
material, as well as for all tidying-up that may be The unit of measurement shall be the number of impact
rollers provided on the instructions of the Engineer.
required after completion of the replacement.
Only material bladed to windrow on instructions of the The tendered rate shall be extra over item 203.07 and
Engineer in terms of subclause 09.03 for the purpose of shall include full compensation for the provision of the
exposing underlying construction-bed material to be impact roller, including its transport to and from the Site.
treated shall be measured and paid for as described No payment shall be made for the providing of
substitute rollers for rollers that have broken down.
here.

203-11
Item Unit
203.13 Keeping impact rollers
available on the Site
(extra over item 203.07) roller-day
The unit of measurement shall be the number of days
for which each impact roller is held available on the Site
in a good working order in accordance with the
instructions of the Engineer. No payment shall be made
in respect of the time when rollers are under repair or
not in a good working order.
The tendered rate shall be extra over item 203.07 and
shall include full compensation for keeping the impact
rollers available for use and maintaining them in a good
working order.

Item Unit
203.14 Extra over item 203.01 for
borrow material from
sources to be supplied
by the Contractor cubic metre (m3)
The extra over rate shall be in full compensation for
obtaining the material and transporting it to the point of
use including for all activities at the borrow areas such
as removal and replacement of overburden, finishing off
borrow areas and for the payment of royalties and other
charges.

Item Unit
203.15 Extra over items 203.03
and 203.04 for disposing
of spoil material to sites to
be provided by the
3
Contractor cubic metre (m )
The extra over rate shall be in full compensation for
disposing of the material to sites to be provided by the
Contractor, for transporting the material from the point
of excavation to the point of disposal and for all charges
to the Contractor for accepting spoil material.

Note:

The following items of work, when specified, shall be

carried out, measured and paid for in accordance with
the relevant sections of the Specifications, but will be
listed under this section of the Schedule of Quantities.

Item Applicable section

(a) Overhaul 103
(b) Excess overburden at borrow areas 201
(c) Temporary stockpiling of excavated
material 201

203-12
SERIES 3 : SEWERS 02.04 Reinforced concrete pipes

SECTION 301 : MATERIALS Reinforced concrete pipes shall comply with the
relevant requirements of SANS 677 for SI type spigot-
and-socket D-load pipes and shall have been
CONTENTS
manufactured from dolomitic aggregate.
01 SCOPE During the manufacturing process, each pipe shall be
02 PIPES AND FITTINGS provided with a sacrificial layer of concrete to increase
03 MANHOLES the minimum cover to the reinforcement as specified in
04 ACCESSORIES SANS 677, with the following additional thicknesses:
05 HANDLING AND STORAGE
06 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT (a) Pipes with a nominal diameter up to and including
1 500 mm - at least 15 mm;
01 SCOPE
(b) Pipes with a nominal diameter of 1 800 mm and
This section covers the materials used in connection over - at least 20 mm.
with the construction of sewerage systems which utilize The sacrificial layer of concrete shall be ignored for the
prefabricated pipes. purpose of determining the strength of the pipe and the
position of the reinforcement.
02 PIPES AND FITTINGS
Pipes with elliptically placed reinforcement shall not be
02.01 General used.
All pipes and fittings shall be marked with the Only rubber-ring joints as specified in subclause 02.09
manufacturer's name, its grade, type or class, the below shall be used.
SANS standardization mark where applicable, and any
other markings that may be required in terms of this Additional to the marking requirements specified in
section. SANS 677, the contract number shall be indelibly
marked on each pipe at the factory.
Should different manufacturers supply the same type of
pipe for a Contract, the products of only one The minimum wall thickness, including the additional
manufacturer shall be used in any section of pipeline cover stipulated above, shall be as follows for the
between two manholes. different pipe diameters:
Record of where the different products have been
installed shall be handed to the Engineer for inclusion in Nominal pipe Minimum wall
the as-built drawings. diameter thickness thickness
(mm) (mm)
Pipes shall be supplied in standard lengths. The cutting
of pipes on Site will only be permitted if the Contractor 300 46
can satisfy the Engineer that he can finish off the ends
of cut pipes to the same standard and within the same 375 48
tolerances as the ends of uncut pipes. Standard shorter 450 51
lengths of concrete pipes shall be factory-made and the
cutting of concrete pipes on Site will only be allowed at 525 54
manholes where the cut ends are cast into the manhole 600 57
foundation.
675 64
The relevant requirements for materials under
section 401 shall apply where a rising main forms part 750 67
of the sewerage system.
825 67
02.02 Unplasticized poly (vinyl chloride) structured 900 77
wall pipes and fittings (PVC-U)
1050 83
PVC pipes shall comply with the relevant requirements
of SANS 1601 for stiffness Class 400 pipes and shall be 1200 92
fitted with approved spigot and socket joints with rubber 1350 95
seal rings. PVC products shall be stored out of the sun
and must be backfilled as soon as practical after been 1500 112
laid. 1800 133
02.03 Vitrified clay pipes and fittings
Where required in terms of the Project Specifications,
Vitrified clay pipes and fittings shall comply with the concrete pipes shall be factory-coated externally with
requirements of SANS 559. an approved bitumen or epoxy.
All pipes with a diameter of 200 mm and smaller shall 02.05 Fibre-cement (FC) pipes and fittings
be plain-ended and joined with polypropylene couplings
such as Vitro Hepsleve or an approved equivalent. FC sewer pipes shall comply with the relevant
Pipes exceeding 200 mm in diameter shall have spigot- requirements of SANS 819 and shall have suitable
and-socket ends with factory applied polyurethane approved flexible joints. FC fittings shall have a
joints, or shall be plain-ended with an approved crushing strength equal to or better than that of the
fibreglass-type of coupling. pipes to which they are coupled and shall otherwise
comply with the relevant requirements of SANS 819.
Notwithstanding the requirement for crushing strength
given in SANS 559, all 375 mm diameter pipes shall Fibre-cement pipes and fittings shall be factory-coated
have a crushing strength of at least 50 kN per metre of internally and externally with an approved bitumen or
bearing surface and shall be marked accordingly. epoxy.

301-1
02.06 Cast-iron (Cl) pipes and fittings As types Y and Z manholes are not used at pipeline
junctions, special manholes at such junctions will be
Cast-iron pipes and fittings shall comply with the
specified in the Project Specifications and shown on the
requirements of BS 78 and BS 2035 respectively. Pipes
Drawings when necessary.
and fittings shall be class A and shall be factory-coated
internally and externally with an approved bitumen or Non-standard structures such as manholes for in situ
epoxy. sewers, metering structures and inlet and outlet
structures shall be constructed in accordance with the
02.07 Steel pipes and fittings details shown on the Drawings and shall be measured
Steel pipes and fittings shall be both lined and coated and paid for under the applicable items of sections 202,
with a protective layer as specified in clause 05 of 302, 702, 703, 704, 706 and 805.
section 401.
03.02 In situ concrete
Steel pipes shall comply with the requirements of
SANS 719 for grade A or B pipes, as scheduled, In situ concrete used in the construction of manholes
whereas steel fittings shall comply with BS EN 10224. and related structures shall conform to the relevant
requirements of section 704. Only dolomitic aggregates
Steel pipes shall be joined by using flanges, by welding shall be used. The dolomitic sand, however, may be
or by using flexible couplings, all as specified in blended with up to a maximum of 40% by mass of an
subclause 05.03 of section 402. Gaskets for flanges approved pit sand.
shall be of the full-face type, with the appropriate
diameter, provided with bolt holes, and shall be made of In situ concrete used for the construction of pipe
virgin rubber and shall comply with the requirements of beddings and the concrete encasing of pipes shall also
BS EN 681 Class WC. conform to the relevant requirements of section 704,
except that dolomitic aggregates need not be used.
02.08 Polyethylene (PE) pipes and fittings
03.03 Precast concrete manhole sections and slabs
PE pipes shall comply with the relevant requirements of
SANS 4427 and shall be one of the following: Precast concrete manhole sections and slabs shall
PE80 PN16 SDR9, or PE63 PN12,5 SDR9. Pipes shall comply with the relevant requirements of SANS 1294
be joined together and to fittings by means of and shall have been manufactured from dolomitic
thermofusion carried out in accordance with the aggregate. Spun concrete chamber and shaft sections
requirements of SANS 10268-1. The type of fittings and shall also comply with the requirements of SANS 677
thermofusion to be used shall be specified on the for SI type pipes. Joints between cylindrical sections
Drawings or in the Project Specifications. shall be of the interlocking self-centering type. The
joints shall be sealed so as to be watertight in
02.09 Rubber joint rings accordance with the Drawings.
Rubber joint rings shall comply with the relevant The dimensions of the various sections and slabs shall
requirements of Part I of SANS 974-1 and shall not be as shown on the Drawings.
have more than one joint, which joint shall be positioned
at the soffit of the pipeline. 03.04 Granolithic concrete

03 MANHOLES Granolithic concrete shall consist of 1 part CEM I

strength class 32,5N Cement complying with
03.01 General SANS 50197-1, 1 part blended dolomitic sand and
2 parts of coarse dolomitic aggregate with a nominal
There are six types of standard manholes, the details size of 4,75 mm.
and specifications of which are shown on the Drawings:
(a) Types I, MA and MB 03.05 Mortar

These manholes are used in conjunction with Mortar for the bedding of prefabricated roof slabs and
sewer pipes with a diameter of 300 mm and spacer slabs shall consist of 1 part of cement and
smaller. 6 parts of blended dolomitic sand.
(b) Type III All mortar shall be prepared using CEM I strength class
This manhole is similar to types I, MA and MB but 32,5N Cement complying with SANS 50197-1, unless
shall be constructed of precast concrete sections. otherwise specified, and shall be used within
30 minutes of being prepared.
(c) Type Z
03.06 Soilcrete
This manhole is used in conjunction with pipe
diameters from 375 mm up to and including Soilcrete, where specified, shall be prepared as
600 mm and is constructed from cast in situ described in clause 12 of section 202.
class 20/19 concrete. The roof slab is provided
with a 225 mm diameter hole for the fitting of a
04 ACCESSORIES
ventilation pipe.
(d) Type Y 04.01 Manhole covers and frames
This manhole is similar to type Z, except that it is Manhole covers and frames shall be of the type as
used on pipelines exceeding a diameter of scheduled or as shown on the Drawings.
600 mm.
Cast-iron manhole covers and frames shall comply with
Manholes shall be provided with access shafts and/or the relevant requirements of SANS 558, and all
step irons as shown on the Drawings or specified in the surfaces not embedded in concrete shall receive two
Project Specifications. Roof slabs and spacer slabs for coats of epoxy-tar paint. The types of covers and
cast in situ manholes may be precast on Site if the frames shall be type 2A or type 4 as scheduled or as
Contractor can satisfy the Engineer that he is capable shown on the Drawings.
of carrying out such work satisfactorily.

301-2
Precast concrete manhole covers will be scheduled for Concrete pipes however shall, irrespective of the
use either with precast concrete frames or with manufacturer, be handled and stored as set out in the
types 2 A and 4 cast-iron manhole cover frames. latest issue of the Concrete Pipe Handbook issued by
Concrete manhole covers and frames shall be of the Concrete Manufacturers Association, unless
approved manufacture and capable of carrying the otherwise directed by the Engineer.
same load as their cast-iron counterparts.
Should the Engineer consider that any pipes or
04.02 Step irons components are being handled, stacked, stored or
transported in such a way that damage, deterioration or
Step irons, shall comply with the requirements for contamination is liable to occur, he may instruct the
malleable cast-iron step irons of BS EN 13101, or shall Contractor to adapt the method used, or to take specific
be of the type as shown on the Drawings or specified in precautions without the Contractor being entitled to any
the Project Specifications. additional payment.
04.03 Ventilation pipes Unless otherwise specified, no separate payment shall
be made for taking delivery of, or for handling, storing,
Ventilation pipes shall be manufactured of steel pipes
stacking, transporting, protecting, etc, pipes and
complying with the requirements of SANS 719 for grade A
components or materials, and allowance must be made
pipes in accordance with the details shown on the
(in the rates tendered for pipe-laying) for all labour,
Drawings. The flange, welded onto the lower end, shall be
plant and equipment required for such work during the
drilled in accordance with SANS 1123, Table 1600.
validity of the Contract.
The upper end of the pipe shall be closed by means of
a rodent-proof cap in accordance with the details shown 06 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
on the Drawings.
Except where pay items are provided for certain
The pipe shall be fixed to the roof slab by means of materials, no separate measurement and payment shall
eight 16 mm diameter, grade 304, stainless-steel bolts be made for materials, the cost of which shall be
cast into the roof slab. included in the appropriate tendered rates of
section 302.
Where no ventilation pipe is fitted over the manhole, the
hole in the roof slab shall be covered by a 10 mm thick,
368 mm square plate of Grade A steel, conforming to
the requirements of SANS 719, bedded on 1:6 mortar
and firmly bolted down. The steel plate shall be painted
all over with two coats of epoxy tar.

04.04 Lamp holes

Lamp holes shall be constructed to details as shown on
the Drawings and shall be fitted with a cast-iron
lamphole cover and frame and an access bend
connector (ABC).
Cast-iron covers and frames shall comply with the
relevant requirements of SANS 558, and all surfaces
not embedded in concrete shall receive two coats of
expoxy-tar paint.
Precast concrete covers will be scheduled for use either
with precast concrete frames or with cast-iron cover
frames. Concrete covers and frames shall be of
approved manufacture and capable of carrying the
same load as their cast-iron counterparts.

04.05 Marker blocks

Marker blocks indicating the positions of house
connections shall be constructed in accordance with the
details shown on the Drawings.

04.06 Epoxy-tar paint

Epoxy-tar paint used for protecting metal surfaces,
where specified, shall conform to the requirements of
SANS 801 type III and shall be applied in two coats with
a total dry thickness of 0,460 mm.

05 HANDLING AND STORAGE

The method of handling pipes and other items will
depend on the material from which the item is made or
with which the item is coated. Light-sensitive items as
well as items prone to weathering shall be stored under
cover. The manufacturer's instructions regarding the
handling and storage of their products shall, where
applicable, be strictly adhered to and copies of such
instructions shall be supplied to the Engineer before
any such item is despatched to the Site.

301-3
SERIES 3 : SEWERS 03.02 Class A bedding

SECTION 302 : CONSTRUCTION This class of bedding shall be of cast in situ concrete in
accordance with SANS 10102-2. The dimensions of the
bedding are shown on the Drawings.
CONTENTS
Vertical joints, details of which are shown on the
01 SCOPE Drawings, shall be provided in the concrete bedding to
02 EXCAVATION coincide with the flexible joints in the pipeline.
03 PIPE BEDDING Concreting between joints shall be carried out in one
04 LAYING OF PIPES continuous operation using class 20/19 concrete.
05 ENCASING OF PIPES
06 HOUSE CONNECTIONS 03.03 Class B bedding
07 MANHOLES This class of bedding shall be of an approved selected
08 MARKERS gravel material with a PI not exceeding 6, which is free
09 CLEANING EYES from stones exceeding 20 mm, organic matter and
10 RAMPS lumps of clay.
11 BACKFILLING
12 CONNECTION TO EXISTING NETWORK The bedding material shall be compacted to 90% of
13 TOLERANCES modified AASHTO density.
14 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
04 LAYING OF PIPES
01 SCOPE
Each pipe and fitting shall be thoroughly cleaned out
This section covers the construction of sewers, house and carefully examined for damage and defects
connections, manholes, etc, (excluding sewer rising immediately before laying. The onus for detecting
mains) to the details shown on the Drawings and with damaged and defective pipes and fittings before
the use of materials conforming to the appropriate installation shall be on the Contractor. Should any
requirements as set out in section 301. Sewer rising damaged or defective pipe or fitting be found in the
mains shall be constructed in accordance with the sewer after it has been laid, it shall be removed and
requirements of section 402. replaced at the Contractor's expense.

02 EXCAVATION Pipes shall be laid on the specified bedding according

to approved methods to ensure trueness to line and
The excavation of trenches and the preparation of level and in such a manner that the barrels of pipes
trench bottoms as well as the excavation for manholes, bear evenly on the bedding over their full length.
house connections, etc, shall be carried out as specified
in section 202 and shall be approved by the Engineer Unless otherwise indicated in the Project Specifications
or on the Drawings, sewers shall be laid straight
before any pipe-bedding and pipe laying is carried out
or house connections, and manholes are constructed. between adjacent manholes and also along the centre
line of the trench.
The minimum trench widths, shall be as specified in
Unless otherwise ordered or authorized by the
section 202, and any variations to specified widths may
only be effected with the written approval of the Engineer, pipe-laying shall commence at the lower end
Engineer before excavation commences. of each section of pipeline. Spigot-and-socket pipes
shall be placed with the socket facing upstream. Pipes
Where pipes are to be encased in concrete or soilcrete, shall be laid and jointed strictly in accordance with the
the trench width shall be determined either by the width manufacturer's instructions and a badger or other
of encasing as shown on the Drawings, or by the suitable device shall be drawn through all pipes smaller
Engineer on Site. than 600 mm in diameter as the laying proceeds. Pipes
of 600 mm in diameter and larger shall be kept clean on
The Engineer will have the power to limit the length of the inside by the pipes being swept by hand as laying
excavation preceding the pipe-laying activities as well progresses. The open ends of the pipelines shall be
as the length of pipeline laid ahead of the backfilling. closed by means of approved plugs at all times when
Excavations for manholes shall be 1 200 mm wider than laying is not in progress.
the outer diameter of the manhole barrel to provide a Except in the case of class A beddings, the pipes and
working space of 600 mm around the circumference of fittings shall be placed on the bedding material, and the
the manhole. bedding shall be completed by the placing and tamping
of additional concrete or gravel, as the case may be,
03 PIPE BEDDING into place to the shape and dimensions as shown on
the Drawings. Care shall be taken to ensure that the
Pipe beddings shall be properly designed for the haunches of the pipes are fully supported.
specific application in accordance with SANS 10102
parts 1 and 2. For class A beddings, the pipes shall first be placed in
position by using suitable approved precast concrete
The various types and applications of beddings are as spacers or cradles and also timber wedges. The pipes
shown and specified on the Drawings. shall then be tested and the concrete placed, and care
shall be taken to fill all voids, and to prevent any
03.01 Types I and II beddings movement or flotation of the line.
These beddings consist of zero slump 1:3:6/19 Vertical joints, the details of which are shown on the
concrete which is placed and consolidated by hand. Drawings, shall be provided in the concrete of type II
Aggregates smaller than 19 mm may be used with the and class A beddings to coincide with the flexible joints
written approval of the Engineer. in the pipeline.

302-1
During all pipe-laying and bedding operations care shall The pipes built into manholes or into the culverts
be taken to prevent the entry of any dirt or concrete into adjoining large manholes, shall be encased in concrete
the flexible pipe joints by sealing the joint with clay or after the walls have been completed, and the sewer
by other approved means. shall be so jointed to the pipes as to produce a flexible
joint on each side of each manhole or culvert, as shown
05 ENCASING OF PIPES on the Drawings.
Where shown on the Drawings or where ordered by the Roof slabs and spacer slabs may be precast slabs of
Engineer, pipes shall be fully encased in class 20/19 class 20/19 concrete and shall be bedded on a
concrete to the dimensions as shown on the Drawings 1:6 cement: sand mortar.
or as ordered by the Engineer. During concreting, pipes Manhole frames shall be bedded in a 1:3 cement:sand
shall be supported near their ends on suitable pedestals mortar and finished off with a reinforced concrete
and strapped down where necessary to prevent surround in accordance with the Drawings.
uplifting. All spaces under and around the pipes shall be
properly filled with concrete. 08 MARKERS
Vertical joints shall be provided in the concrete to
The marker blocks shall be placed after completion of
coincide with the flexible joints in the pipeline.
the pipework and trimming of the area where the marker
Concreting between joints shall be carried out in one block is to be installed. Marker blocks shall be
continuous operation.
constructed in accordance with the details shown on the
Care must be taken to seal the flexible joint with clay to Drawings.
prevent concrete from entering the joint.
09 CLEANING EYES
The encasing of pipes shall be carried out only after the
pipeline has been tested and approved. Cleaning eyes shall be constructed in the positions and
to the details shown and specified on the Drawings.
06 HOUSE CONNECTIONS
10 RAMPS
House connections shall be constructed as shown and
specified on the Drawings. Ramps shall only be allowed under special
circumstances with the written permission of the
The requirements specified herein for the construction General Manager: Water and Sanitation.
of sewers shall apply mutatis mutandis in respect of the
11 BACKFILLING
construction of house connections.
No backfilling shall be carried out until authorized by the
07 MANHOLES Engineer.
Manholes shall be constructed to details shown on the After a pipeline has been laid, tested and approved, the
Drawings. All cast in situ concrete shall be class 20/19. trench shall be partly backfilled (with hand implements),
to a height of 300 mm above the top of the pipe barrel,
After the manhole foundation slab has been cast, the with suitable selected backfill material free from stones
semi-circular channels and fittings suitable for the type exceeding 20 mm, organic matter and lumps of clay
of pipe laid shall be placed in position and embedded in exceeding 75 mm, but which contains sufficient fine
the concrete benching. The sockets of channels and the material to ensure a densely graded, well-compacted
space between two abutting channels shall be filled with backfill. Backfilling around and over the pipeline shall
a 1:1 cement:sand mortar well worked in, and all joints be in layers not exceeding 100 mm compacted
shall be neatly finished off. Where standard channels thickness.
and fittings cannot be used and where they are not
available for the size or type of pipe used, the Backfilling shall be carried out simultaneously and
Contractor shall form the channels in class 20/19 equally on both sides of the sewer to avoid unequal
concrete. forces from being exerted.

The cast in situ channelling and benching in manholes Should suitable material be not available from the
and adjoining culverts shall, where applicable, be excavation of the trench which is being backfilled, the
rendered in 25 mm thick granolithic concrete and Contractor shall obtain suitable material from other
finished smooth and true with a steel trowel and excavations on the Site. In the event of suitable
rounded at corners and edges. The benching shall be material being not available on the Site, the Contractor
taken to 25 mm above the highest pipe soffit. shall screen excavated material using a sieve with
20 mm clear openings but, if the latter method is
Pipes entering manholes shall be cast into position in impracticable, the Engineer may order the Contractor to
the benching in order to ensure a watertight joint import suitable material. Separate pay items are
between the pipe and the manhole. Caulking will only provided in the Schedule of Quantities for the screening
be allowed where a pipe is built into an existing of excavated material and for obtaining suitable material
manhole. Short lengths of concrete pipe that have been from other sources.
cut on Site shall only be used for casting into position in
the benching. In respect of backfill material obtained from sources
provided by the Contractor, the provisions of
The walls of cast in situ manholes shall be constructed clause 05(f) of section 201 are applicable.
in lifts not exceeding 1,5 m and the first construction
Selected backfill material shall be compacted at an
joint shall be 50 mm above the highest pipe soffit. The
optimum moisture content to at least 90% of modified
starting ring of precast concrete manholes shall be
AASHTO density.
placed on the concrete foundation and the joint shall be
made watertight with granolithic rendering as shown on Where pipes are encased in concrete, backfilling with
the Drawings. selected material can proceed as soon as the concrete
has, in the opinion of the Engineer, attained sufficient
All joints between factory units shall be keyed and shall strength and the thickness of backfilling shall be
be made watertight as described in subclause 03.03 of reduced by the thickness of the encasement.
section 301.

302-2
When backfilling to the prescribed height above the diameter equal to or less than 600 mm, from centre to
pipes or encasing has been completed and approved, centre of adjacent manholes, or from the ends of ramps,
the balance of the trench shall be backfilled as specified cleaning eyes and stop ends, and, in the case of sewers
in clause 13 of section 202. exceeding 600 mm in diameter, between the internal
faces of the walls of manholes or the internal ends of
The material and method of compaction used for the culverts. No deductions will be made for any fittings
backfilling around manholes, cleaning eyes and vertical laid in the lines as these will be paid for as extra over to
house connections shall be subject to the same the pipes.
requirements as specified in respect of pipe trenches,
except that the entire backfilling process shall be The testing of pipes will be paid for under section 303.
carried out using selected material. Backfilling in layers
shall proceed simultaneously around the whole The tendered rates shall also include full compensation
circumference of the manhole, cleaning eye or house for the cutting of pipes, the provision of short sections of
connection and payment for such backfilling shall be pipes at manholes, the provision and installation of
included in the rates tendered for the pay items for the jointing material and for all work and incidentals
construction of manholes, cleaning eyes and house required to complete the work as specified and as
connections. shown on the Drawings.
This pay item shall also apply to the construction of
12 CONNECTION TO EXISTING NETWORK 100 mm diameter straight pipes used in the construction
of sloping house connections (types 2 and 3), house
Wherever a new sewerage system joins up with an
connections from manholes (type 5), and for the straight
existing network, the Contractor shall timeously notify
pipework from all house connections to the erf
the Engineer as to when he intends to construct the
boundaries.
connection and he may carry out this work only with the
written permission of the Engineer and only under the Item Unit
supervision of the Employer.
302.02 Constructing of pipe beddings
Where connecting to an existing network is done at an
302.02.01 (State type or class of bedding)
existing manhole, payment for the connection will be
made under item 302.16. However, where the 302.02.01.01 (Diameter of pipe stated) metre (m)
connection is to be made at a point along the pipe
between two manholes, a new manhole shall be 302.02.01.02 Etc for other pipe diameters
constructed and payment will be made as follows: 302.02.02 Etc for other types and classes
• excavation, under items 202.01, 202.02 and 202.03 of bedding
of section 202; The unit of measurement shall be the metre of bedding
• breaking into the existing pipeline, accommodating provided for the different pipe diameters as specified
existing flow and other preliminary work, under and in accordance with the Drawings.
item 302.20 of this section; and The tendered rates shall also include full compensation
for formwork and for constructing the joints in the
• building the manhole, under items 302.09, 302.10
concrete bedding where they apply, to the details as
and 302.11 of this section.
shown on the Drawings.
13 TOLERANCES Item Unit
Permissible tolerance limits shall be as follows for 302.03 Concrete encasing
pipelines and manholes: of pipes cubic metre (m3)

Plan : maximum deviation 25 mm The unit of measurement shall be the cubic metre of
encasement provided to dimensions shown on the
Invert level: ± 5 mm Drawings when ordered by the Engineer in writing or
when specified.
14 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
The tendered rate shall also include full compensation
Note: for formwork and for constructing the joints in the
concrete encasement to the details as shown on the
Reference shall be made to the last paragraph of Drawings.
clause 02 of section 202 regarding payment for work
carried out under this section. The concrete encasement of vertical house connections
and cleaning eyes shall be measured and paid for
Item Unit under items 302.06 and 302.07 and the concrete
encasement of the short pipes cast into manhole or
302.01 Supplying, laying and jointing adjoining culvert foundations shall be included in the
of sewer pipes irrespective of rates tendered for manholes and culverts.
depth or width of trench:
Item Unit
302.01.01 For type and class of pipe
(state diameter, and type 302.04 Extra over Item 302.01 for
of coupling) metre (m) supplying, installing and
jointing with an approved
302.01.02 Etc for different diameters, types method of coupling the
and classes of pipes and types of following pipe fittings in the
couplings main sewer lines (type specified)
The unit of measurement shall be the metre of each 302.04.01 Branch junctions:
size and type of pipe supplied, laid, jointed and
302.04.01.01 100 mm dia off 150 mm dia number (No)
approved, measured in the case of sewers with a

302-3
302.04.01.02 Etc for other sizes of The tendered rates shall include full compensation for
junctions the supply and installation of vertical 100 mm dia pipes,
two 100 mm dia 45° bends, one 100 mm dia x 100 mm
302.04.02 Reducers: dia junction, a stopper or an access bend connector
302.04.02.01 150 mm dia x 100 mm dia number (No) (ABC) with lamphole cover and frame, as well as for
concrete bedding and encasing, including formwork,
302.04.02.02 Etc for other sizes of reducers and backfilling with selected material and for all labour
302.04.03 Stoppers: and equipment necessary to complete the work as
specified on the Drawings.
302.04.03.01 100 mm dia (type) number (No)
Excavation shall be paid for under item 202.04 of
302.04.03.02 Etc for other sizes and section 202.
types of stoppers
Item Unit
302.04.04 Etc for other fittings
302.07 Construction of cleaning eyes
The unit of measurement for supplying, installing and
jointing fittings shall be the number of each type of 302.07.01 Up to but not exceeding
fitting installed, and approved in accordance with the 1,5 m in depth number (No)
Drawings and Specifications.
302.07.02 Exceeding 1,5 m but not
The tendered rates shall be extra over the rates for exceeding 2,0 m in depth number (No)
item 302.01 and shall include full compensation for all
extra costs involved in carrying out the work as 302.07.03 Etc for various depths in
specified. Distinction shall be made between different depth increments of 0,5 m
sizes of fittings.
The unit of measurement shall be the number of
This payment item shall also apply to fittings laid in the cleaning eyes constructed to various depths complete,
main sewer lines for house connections, stop ends and in accordance with the Drawings. For payment
cleaning eyes. purposes, the depths shall be measured from the
socket of the bend to the top of the lamphole cover.
Item Unit
The tendered rates shall include full compensation for
302.05 Supplying, laying and jointing
the supply and installation of the vertical 150 mm dia
with an approved method of pipes, the access bend connector (ABC) with lamphole
coupling, 100 mm dia vitrified cover and frame, as well as for encasing the bend in
clay bends for house concrete, including formwork, and for backfilling the
connections cleaning eye with selected material.
302.05.01 22,5° bends number (No) Excavation shall be paid for under item 202.01 of
302.05.02 45° bends number (No) section 202.

The unit of measurement shall be the number of 22,5° Item Unit

and 45° bends installed for sloping house connections
302.08 Marker blocks number (No)
in accordance with the Drawings, as well as the number
of each type of bend installed additional to those shown The unit of measurement shall be the number of marker
on the Drawings for any type of house connection. blocks installed.
The tendered rates shall include full compensation for The tendered rate shall include full compensation for all
all work and incidentals required for supplying and labour, equipment and material necessary for installing
installing bends in positions as shown on the Drawings the marker blocks in accordance with the Drawings.
or as determined by the Engineer on Site.
Item Unit
Item Unit
302.09 Construction of manholes,
302.06 Construction of vertical up to 1,0 m deep
house connections
302.09.01 For sewers 300 mm in diameter
302.06.01 Type 1 house connections: and smaller
302.06.01.01 Up to but not exceeding
302.09.01.01 (Type of manhole stated) number (No)
1,5 m in depth number (No)
302.09.01.02 Etc for other types of manholes
302.06.01.02 Exceeding 1,5 m but not
exceeding 2,0 m in depth number (No) 302.09.02 For sewers with diameters
exceeding 300 mm
302.06.01.03 Etc for various depths in
depth increments of 0,5 m 302.09.02.01 (Type of manhole stated) number (No)
302.06.02 Type 4 house connections: 302.09.02.02 Etc for other types of manholes
302.06.02.01 Etc for depth increments as The unit of measurement for the construction of
for 302.06.01 above manholes shall be the number of each type of manhole
The unit of measurement shall be the number of vertical constructed (irrespective the angles of deflection, where
these apply) for different pipe diameter ranges and up
house connections constructed to various depths. For
payment purposes the depths shall be measured from to 1,0 m deep, complete, as shown on the Drawings
the socket of the junction in the main sewer to the top of and as specified. The depth of manhole shall be
measured from the top of the manhole cover to the
the lamphole cover in the case of type 4 house
connections, and to the stopper in the case of type 1 invert of the channel in the centre of the manhole.
house connections.

302-4
The tendered rates for the construction of manholes 302.12.04 Precast concrete cover with
shall also include full compensation for encasing in type 4 Cl frame number (No)
concrete the sections of the pipes cast into the manhole
and for backfilling around the manhole with selected 302.12.05 Precast concrete cover with
material. precast concrete frame:

Item Unit 302.12.05.01 (Type stated) number (No)

302.10 Extra over item 302.09 for the 302.12.05.02 Etc for other types
construction of manholes in The unit of measurement shall be the number of each
excess of 1,0 m deep type of manhole cover and frame installed.
302.10.01 For sewers 300 mm in diameter The tendered rates shall include full compensation for
and smaller supplying and installing the covers and frames and for
302.10.01.01 (Type of manhole stated) metre (m) the cost of all labour, equipment and appurtenant
materials required to carry out the work.
302.10.01.02 Etc for other types of manholes
Item Unit
302.10.02 For sewers with diameters 302.13 Extra over item 302.09 for the
exceeding 300 mm construction of house
302.10.02.01 (Type of manhole stated) metre (m) connections from manholes

302.10.02.02 Etc for other types of manholes 302.13.01 One-house connections number (No)

The unit of measurement shall be the metre of each 302.13.02 Two-house connections number (No)
type of manhole constructed in excess of 1,0 m deep, The unit of measurement shall be the number of single
measured to the nearest 0,1 m. or double house connections installed from manholes in
The tendered rates shall be paid as an extra over the accordance with the Drawings.
rates tendered for item 302.09 and shall include full The tendered rates shall be extra over the rates
compensation for the cost of labour, plant and materials tendered for item 302.09 and shall include full
required to construct and backfill with selected material, compensation for additional excavations, for the supply
each additional metre depth of manhole. and installation of additional channels, for the
modification of the standard benching to suit the
Item Unit
additional channels, for additional concrete encasing,
302.11 Construction of culverts for additional backfilling, and for all extra costs involved
adjoining manholes for carrying out the work as specified and in accordance
with the Drawings.
302.11.01 (Pipe diameter stated) meter (m)
Item Unit
302.11.02 Etc for other diameters
302.14 Supplying and placing selected
The unit of measurement shall be the metre length of
backfill material around and up
culvert constructed on each side of the manhole,
measured along the centre line of the culvert from the to 300 mm above pipe barrels
outside face of the manhole wall to the internal end of using
the culvert for the different pipe diameters, irrespective 302.14.01 Excavated material cubic metre (m3)
of the depth of the adjoining manhole and of whether
3
the culvert is straight or curved. 302.14.02 Imported material cubic metre (m )
The tendered rates shall include full compensation for The unit of measurement shall be the cubic metre of
the building-in of pipe ends into the culvert, for the material placed around and up to 300 mm above pipe
encasing of the short sections of pipe, but excluding barrels. Where pipes are encased, the thickness of the
their provision, for construction of the channelling, backfill material shall be reduced by the thickness of the
including the granolithic concrete finish, for all encasement. The quantity shall be calculated from the
reinforcement, for permanent and temporary formwork, authorized dimensions of the backfill. The volume of the
for backfilling with selected materials, and for all labour, pipe and encasing shall be subtracted when calculating
equipment and incidentals necessary for completing the the volume of the backfill.
work as specified and in accordance with the Drawings.
The tendered rates shall include full compensation for
Short pipes built into culverts shall be paid for under excavating and loading the material from approved
item 302.01 and excavations outside normal trench borrow areas, or alternatively for loading approved
widths shall be paid for under item 202.03 of material previously excavated from trenches and other
section 202. excavations, transporting it to where required, and for
off-loading, placing and compacting the material.
Item Unit
Material shall be imported only on the instructions of the
302.12 Supplying and installing Engineer, and overhaul shall apply when imported
manhole covers and frames material is obtained from sources not provided by the
Contractor and which lie outside the free-haul
302.12.01 SANS 558 Type 4 circular number (No) boundaries.
302.12.02 SANS 558 Type 2A circular number (No)
302.12.03 Precast concrete cover
with type 2A Cl frame number (No)

302-5
Item Unit The tendered rates shall include full compensation for
removing the cover and frame, demolishing the top of
302.15 Extra over subitem 302.14.01 the manhole if required, providing materials and labour
for screening material cubic metre (m3) for rebuilding the manhole to the designated new level,
The extra over rate shall include full compensation for setting and grouting the cover and frame to the correct
the additional handling and transport necessary, for level, and disposing of debris and surplus material.
screening excavated material and for disposing of the
Item Unit
material screened out.
302.19 Supplying and installing
Screening of material will only be paid for if ordered by
ventilation pipes number (No)
the Engineer in writing.
The unit of measurement shall be the number of
Item Unit
ventilation pipes installed where specified and in
302.16 Connecting to existing accordance with the Drawings.
manholes The tendered rate shall also include full compensation
302.16.01 (Pipe size, type, grade or for carrying out all work as specified in subclause 04.03
class indicated) number (No) of section 301.

302.16.02 Etc for other pipes Item Unit

The unit of measurement shall be the number of each 302.20 Preliminary work prior to the
size of pipe built into existing manholes. construction of a manhole on
an existing pipeline
The tendered rates shall include full compensation for
the supply of all labour, plant and materials, for carrying 302.20.01 (Diameter and description
out the necessary excavations, for breaking into of existing pipe) number (No)
existing manholes for new connections, for fitting new
pipes into the newly formed access, for sealing around 302.20.02 Etc for other pipes
the pipes and making them watertight, for breaking out The unit of measurement shall be the number of
the existing benching and channelling where required manhole positions where preliminary work has been
and the reconstruction thereof complete with granolithic
carried out. A distinction shall be made between the
concrete rendering to suit the new pipe arrangement, different sizes and types of existing pipelines.
for disposal of all debris to a dumping site and for
backfilling around the manhole with selected material. The tendered rates shall include full compensation for
the supply of all labour, equipment and materials, for
The tendered rate shall also include for dealing with the neatly cutting through the existing pipe and concrete
sewage flow in the existing manholes during encasing or bedding, for removal of the necessary
construction and for any additional costs should the length of pipe together with its concrete encasing or
work have to be carried out at night or during non- bedding, for accommodating the existing sewage flow,
working days. for disposal of all debris to a dumping site, for any
additional costs should the work have to be carried out
Item Unit
at night or during non-working days and for the cost of
302.17 Construction of anchor any appurtenant work not provided for under
blocks on steep grades cubic metre (m3) items 302.09, 302.10 and 302.11.

The unit of measurement shall be the cubic metre of Item Unit

concrete used. 302.21 Extra over subitem 302.14.02
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for for using material obtained
excavations, shuttering, concrete, backfilling, the from sources provided by
disposal of surplus excavated material as well as all the Contractor cubic metre (m3)
labour, plant and other materials necessary to complete
the blocks to the dimensions and in positions shown on The unit of measurement shall be the cubic metre of
the Drawings. material provided and placed.
The tendered rate shall be in full compensation for the
Item Unit additional cost of paying any royalties or charges for
302.18 Raising or lowering of procuring the material from sources provided by the
existing manholes: Contractor as well as for transporting the material from
where obtained to where used on the Site.
302.18.01 (Type of manhole stated)
Item Unit
302.18.01.01 Raised/lowered up to 0,5 m number (No)
302.22 Building pipes into concrete work
302.18.01.02 Raised/lowered exceeding
302.22.01 Pipes supplied and installed by the
0,5 m but not exceeding
Contractor (irrespective of type)
1,0 m number (No)
302.22.01.01 (State diameter of pipe) number (No)
302.18.01.03 Etc in increments of 0,5 m
302.22.01.02 (Etc. for other diameters) number (No)
302.18.02 Etc for other types of
manholes The unit of measurement shall be the number of pipes
built into the concrete work as shown on the Drawings.
The unit of measurement shall be the number of
manholes raised or lowered.

302-6
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for
supplying all materials (wet to dry epoxy in the case of
casting new concrete against the faces of old concrete)
concreting in the pipes, cutting and placing formwork to
fit around pipes and neatly finished to conform to a
class F2 surface finish.
Where necessary the rate shall also include for holding
the pipe in position and aligning the pipes to the correct
levels as indicated on the Drawings or as ordered by
the Engineer.
Note:
The following items of work, when specified, shall be
carried out, measured and paid for in accordance with
the relevant sections of the Specifications, but shall be
listed under this section of the Schedule of Quantities.

Item Applicable section

(a) Overhaul on selected material 103
(b) Excess overburden at borrow
pits provided by the Employer 201

302-7
SERIES 3 : SEWERS Should house connections, cleaning eyes and stop
ends form part of the section being tested, they shall be
SECTION 303 : TESTING tested together with the section.
All sections of pipeline of 900 mm diameter and smaller
CONTENTS shall be tested twice: the first time after the pipes have
been laid and visually inspected (with the use of mirrors
01 SCOPE where appropriate), and before the bedding or
02 GENERAL encasement is completed, and the second time, in the
03 TESTING OF MANHOLES case of bedded pipes, after the bedding has been
04 TESTING OF SEWERS completed and the trenches have been backfilled to
05 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 300 mm above the tops of the pipes, and, in the case of
encased pipes, after the encasement has been
completed.
01 SCOPE
All pipelines of 900 mm diameter and smaller shall be
This section covers the various tests to which sewerage tested by conducting the air test. Should a section of
systems shall be subjected as the work progresses.
the pipeline fail the air test, the Contractor may, if he so
wishes, apply the water test entirely at his own expense
02 GENERAL whether such water test is successful or not.
When the Contractor considers any section of the 04.01 Air test
sewerage system to be ready for testing, he shall
timeously advise the Engineer of his intention to carry The air test consists of pumping air into the pipeline or
out the appropriate test and arrange a time therefore portion thereof until a specified pressure is reached,
with the Engineer. and then measuring the time it takes for the pressure to
drop from one pressure level to a lower level.
All tests shall be carried out in the presence of the
Engineer, and the Contractor shall provide all labour, Under no circumstances shall the Eclipse or equivalent
equipment and material (including water) that may be air-test apparatus be used.
required for carrying out the tests.
The apparatus to be used for the air test, (see the
Should any portion of the work fail to pass a test, the CSIR's NBRI publication X/BOU 2-34 for a diagram of
fault or faults shall be made good by the Contractor at the apparatus) should be shielded from the direct rays
his own expense according to methods approved by the of the sun when in use, is commercially available and
Engineer. After repairs have been completed, the work consists of the following:
shall be tested again at the Contractor's own expense
until finally approved. (a) An air compressor or blower of adequate capacity.

Where a manhole or pipeline passes a test but visual or (b) A flexible 50 mm diameter pipe, approximately
other defects are still apparent, these defects shall be 10 m in length, with a standard sewer-testing plug
repaired before the section of work will be accepted. with an appropriate diameter at one end, which is
connected to the compressor or blower outlet at
the other end. A suitable stop valve must be
03 TESTING OF MANHOLES inserted on the 50 mm dia pipe between the
Manholes shall, on completion and before backfilling, blower or compressor and the plug.
be tested by the Contractor for watertightness by (c) A Bourdon tube type pressure gauge connected by
completely filling the manhole with water up to the a 6 mm OD rubber or plastic tube to a copper pipe
underside of the manhole cover frame after pipes which passes through the sewer-plug connection
leading from manholes have been closed off for the into the pipeline under test.
test.
(d) A stopwatch.
The manhole shall be allowed to stand for one hour to
allow initial absorption to take place, after which the The testing procedure shall consist of the following
water shall be topped up if necessary. After topping up, sequence of operations:
the water level shall not drop by more than 20 mm in
one hour. • The sewer-testing plug attached to the testing
apparatus shall be inserted in one end of the sewer
The Contractor shall be responsible for the disposal of and the other end and any other openings shall be
the water used in the test by pumping or other approved plugged off.
means.
• The stop valve in the blower tube shall be opened
The Engineer reserves the right to determine whether or and the blower set in operation, the throttle being
not each and every manhole shall be tested. Should it adjusted until the pressure in the sewer is kept
be decided not to test all manholes, the Engineer will constant at about 380 mm water gauge (3,80 kPa).
determine which of the manholes shall be tested.
• After two minutes at this pressure, the stop valve
shall be shut off sharply. At the same time the
04 TESTING OF SEWERS stopwatch must be kept in readiness and the
Sewers with a 375 mm diameter and less shall be pressure gauge carefully watched in case of a rapid
visually inspected by means of handheld mirrors before pressure drop. The time taken for the pressure to
the pipes are backfilled, and again on completion of the drop from 250 mm to 125 mm water gauge (2,5 to
backfilling. Sewers shall be tested in sections between 1,25 kPa) shall not be less than the value of T (in
manholes after the section being tested has been seconds) determined as follows:
isolated from other sections by means of suitable plugs
or stoppers that have been adequately braced.

303-1
For pipelines of which the internal surface area is less The tendered rates shall include full compensation for
than or equal to 58 m2, the value of T shall be the provision of all labour and materials required for the
determined by the formula: provision, installation, calibration and operation of the
equipment used for testing, for testing the pipelines
T = 1 181,0 D twice, as well as for visual inspections, all as specified
and where the internal surface area exceeds 58 m , by
2 in clause 04 of this section.
the formula: Item Unit
2
T = 63,973 D L 303.03 CCTV Camera Inspection
Where D = internal pipe diameter, in metres 303.03.01 (Pipe diameter stated) metre (m)
L = length of pipe tested, in metres 303.03.02 Etc. for other diameters
T = time in seconds. The unit of measurement shall be the metre of each
diameter of sewer inspected by CCTV Camera and
04.02 Watertest
which has met the tolerances specified in clause 13 of
The test shall be conducted by closing the pipe at the section 302.
lower manhole and by slowly filling the pipeline and the
The tendered rates shall include full compensation for
upper manhole with water until the depth of water in the
the provision of all labour and materials required for the
manhole is 1,5 m.
provision, installation, calibration and operation of the
Should the upper manhole be less than 1,5 m deep, the equipment used for inspecting the pipeline, the
Contractor may use an approved apparatus to raise the provision of a written report, pipeline profile and an
water pressure in the pipeline, measured at the highest electronic report of the pipeline in .pdb format.
point, to 15 kPa. Should the difference in invert levels
between the lower and the higher manholes of the
section to be tested exceed 3,5 m, the water test shall
not be conducted.
After a period of at least 10 minutes to allow initial
absorption to take place, the loss of water over the next
30 minutes shall be noted. The amount of water lost
shall not exceed 0,34 litres per 10 mm internal pipe
diameter per 100 metres of pipeline per hour.
04.03 Camera Inspection
Sewers shall be inspected by means of a Closed Circuit
Television (CCTV) Camera on completion of the backfill
and manhole construction.
The inspection shall be conducted by inspecting the
pipe with a CCTV Camera equipped with inclinometers
so that a pipeline profile can be produced.
The Contractor shall provide the Engineer with a written
report, a pipeline profile as well as an electronic report
of the pipeline in .pdb format.
Any sewer pipeline not meeting the tolerances specified
in clause 13 of section 302 shall be made good by the
Contractor, at his own expense, with methods approved
by the Engineer.

05 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

Item Unit
303.01 Testing of manholes number (No)
The unit of measurement shall be the number of
manholes tested and passed, irrespective of the depth
and type of manhole.
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for all
labour, plant and materials necessary, including the
supply and disposal of water, for carrying out the tests
as specified in clause 03 of this section.
Item Unit
303.02 Air testing of sewers
303.02.01 (Pipe diameter stated) metre (m)
303.02.02 Etc. for other diameters
The unit of measurement shall be the metre of each
diameter of sewer tested and which has passed the air
test.

303-2
SERIES 4 : WATER RETICULATION AND Pipe diameters other than those specified in this section
WATER MAINS shall only be used if prior written approval is obtained
from the General Manager Water and Sanitation.
SECTION 401: MATERIALS
Galvanized steel pipes or fittings may be used for
underground water pipelines provided that prior written
CONTENTS approval is obtained from the General Manager Water
and Sanitation. GMS pipes and fittings below ground
01 SCOPE
shall be protected against corrosion as specified in the
02 DEFINITIONS
Project Specifications.
03 ABBREVIATIONS
04 PIPES, FITTINGS AND SPECIALS All pipelines shall be positioned in accordance with the
05 COATING AND LINING OF STEEL PIPES Project Specifications or as shown on the Drawings.
06 VALVES AND HYDRANTS
07 ACCESSORIES AND APPURTENANT A minimum cover of 1,0 m over pipelines shall be
MATERIALS maintained under roads and sidewalks, and a maximum
08 HANDLING, STORAGE AND TRANSPORT cover of 1,5 m where other services are encountered or
09 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT where gradients of roads require this.
Main supply pipelines for proposed adjacent township
01 SCOPE extensions shall be laid right up to the boundary of the
This section covers the materials to be used in adjoining township.
connection with the construction of water reticulation
Communication pipes shall only be of polyethylene (PE)
networks, pipelines and service connections operating
with a minimum diameter of 40 mm and shall be
under pressure.
installed in accordance with the Drawings. In the case
The requirements for materials as set out in this section of erven smaller than 400 square metres, a diameter of
shall also apply to pumping mains forming part of 25 mm may be used to supply not more than two
sewerage systems. residential properties.
House connections shall be installed as shown on the
02 DEFINITIONS
Drawings. No holes larger than 25 mm in diameter shall
For the purpose of this series, the following definitions be drilled into PVC pipes for house connection saddles.
shall apply:
04.02 Polyethylene (PE) pipes and fittings
(a) Fittings
PE pipes shall comply with the relevant requirements of
Standard accessories available ex stock, such as SANS 4427 and shall be one of the following:
bends, crosses, tees, plugs, flanges, sockets,
PE80 PN16 SDR9, or
adaptors, reducers, couplings, elbows, saddles, etc.
PE63 PN12,5 SDR9.
(b) Specials
Pipe fittings and couplings for PE pipes shall be
Any of the accessories mentioned in (a) above Plasson or approved equivalent compression fittings
which are purpose-made for a specific project or and shall be manufactured for a working pressure of
for use in conjunction with large-diameter pipes. 1 600 kPa. Only fittings that the General Manager
Water and Sanitation has approved shall be used with
03 ABBREVIATIONS PE pressure pipes.
For the purpose of this series, the following Acceptable nominal pipe diameters for PE high
abbreviations shall apply: pressure pipes are 25 mm, 40 mm, 50 mm, 63 mm,
CI Cast iron 75 mm and 90 mm.
CID Constant inner diameter Under no circumstances may saddles be used with
COD Constant outer diameter PE pipes. Welded adaptors may also not be used with
GMS Galvanized mild steel PE pressure pipes.
PE Polyethylene
04.03 PVC pipes and fittings
PVC Poly (vinyl chloride)
PVC pipes shall comply with the requirements of
04 PIPES, FITTINGS AND SPECIALS SANS 966-1 (PVC-U) or SANS 966-2 (PVC-M) for
class 12 pressure pipes and shall be fitted with spigot
04.01 General and socket joints with rubber sealing rings.
All pipes and fittings shall be marked with the Except for bends, which shall be of PVC with a factory-
manufacturer's name, the grade, type or class, the SANS made socket joint at one end in accordance with the
standardization mark where applicable, and any other
above specifications, all fittings for use with PVC pipes
markings that may be required in terms of this section. shall be of cast iron, with wall thicknesses in
Pipes shall be supplied in standard lengths unless accordance with SANS 546 and socket dimensions in
otherwise shown on the Drawings. accordance with SANS 966. Only fittings that the
General Manager: Water and Sanitation has approved
Specials shall be fabricated to the details shown on the shall be used with PVC pressure pipes. Welded
Drawings, using, where applicable, the same materials, adaptors may also not be used with PVC pressure
welding procedures and protective linings and coatings pipes.
as are specified for the corresponding straight pipes.
Acceptable nominal pipe diameters for PVC pressure
Satisfactory temporary end covers shall be provided for
pipes are 75 mm, 90 mm, 110 mm, 160 mm, 200 mm,
the protection of threads, flanges and the prepared
250 mm, 315 mm and 400 mm; 75 mm diameters shall
ends of pipes, fittings and specials, and for the
only be allowed when a network analyses shows that
prevention of damage to internal linings during
the water demand for fire fighting is satisfied.
transportation and during handling on Site.
401-1
All PVC pipes and fittings shall, prior to delivery, be (b) Flexible couplings
factory-tested to 4,2 times the specified working
All flexible couplings for plain-ended steel pipes
pressure, and a certificate to this effect shall
and fittings shall be of the slip-on type without
accompany all deliveries. PVC products shall be stored
centre register, such as Viking Johnson or an
away from sunlight and shall be backfilled as soon as
approved similar, and shall comply with the
practicable after having been laid.
relevant requirements of BS EN 10224. Flexible
04.04 GMS pipes and fittings couplings shall be thoroughly cleaned and painted
as specified in the Project Specifications.
GMS pipes shall be solid-drawn, seamless, medium-
duty, screwed-and-socketed pipes which comply with (c) Electrical continuity bonds
the requirements of SANS 62-1. Screwed pieces shall
Steel pipes other than those with welded joints
comply with the requirements of SANS 62-2. Welding
shall be double bonded by two separate copper
will not be permitted on GMS piping.
connecting wires of 16 mm2 copper strand black
Pipe fittings shall be of malleable cast iron and shall PVC-covered wire being installed across all
comply with the requirements of SANS 514. flanged joints and flexible couplings to provide
electrical continuity over the entire pipeline.
Pipes and fittings shall be galvanized inside and outside
in accordance with SANS 532 and SANS 121. Connections on the pipe on either side of the
coupling and on the coupling barrel shall be made
GMS pipes and fittings below ground shall be protected
by Thermite welds and shall be done only when
against corrosion as specified in the Project
the pipeline is full of water, (i.e. during pressure
Specifications.
tests, etc) to prevent possible damage to the
04.05 Steel pipes, fittings and specials internal lining of the pipe.

(a) General The costs of repairing the external coating at the

welds shall be included in the price of the pipes.
All steel pipes with a diameter exceeding 150 mm
shall conform to the requirements of SANS 719 (d) Pipe record
and specials shall be manufactured from straight The Contractor shall maintain a record, in an
pipes in accordance with the relevant requirements approved form, showing the pipe serial and
of BS EN 10224. All welding in pipes and specials delivery numbers, the steel cast number for the
shall be electric fusion welding in accordance with plate used in each pipe section, the date of
SANS 719. fabrication and hydrostatic testing, together with
The grade of the steel plate or strip to be used in the actual test pressure and details of defects and
the manufacturing process, the wall thickness and subsequent repairs. Each record shall be signed
diameter of the pipes, and whether flanges, by the Contractor, and copies shall be handed over
welding or couplings will be used for jointing the to the Engineer before the commencement of the
pipes and specials, shall be as specified in the defects liability period.
Project Specifications or as shown on the
Drawings. 05 COATING AND LINING OF STEEL PIPES

The Contractor shall furnish the Engineer with the The material used for protecting steel pipes against
manufacturer's certificates which cover the corrosion shall be as specified in the Drawings or
chemical analysis and physical properties of the Project Specification. Coatings and linings shall be
steel used in the manufacture of pipes and tested as specified in clause 04 of section 403.
specials, and shall provide written confirmation 05.01 Surface preparation
that welding has been carried out by coded
welders. Surfaces to be treated shall have all projections, sharp
edges, laminations and tool marks removed to provide
All production welding of pipes and specials shall
a smooth surface and shall be cleaned in accordance
be done by welders who are competent in terms of with sections 2, 3 and 4 of SANS Code of
the procedure approval tests set out in Practice 10064 to meet the following requirements:
SANS 10044-4 or an acceptable equivalent
standard, and all welding, whether by hand or (a) A cleanliness of not less than Sa 2½ when they are
otherwise, shall be so carried out that the height of tested according to SANS test method 5767.
inner-weld reinforcement and of upset metal on the
(b) A surface profile not exceeding 0,09 mm when they
inner surface shall not exceed 1 mm. Field welding
are tested according to SANS test method 5772.
shall comply with the relevant requirements of
ANSI / API 1104. (c) Freedom from dust and debris not more than 0,2%
when they are tested according to SANS test
All bends used shall be long radius bends with
method 5769.
minimum outer leg lengths of 1,5 m.
Tenderers shall, with their Tenders, submit information
The ends of pipes and specials shall be bevelled
regarding the cleaning methods to be employed to meet
for the field welding of butt-welded joints and shall
the above requirements, and the Contractor shall
be plain-ended for use with slip-on couplings, all in
furnish the Engineer with the manufacturer's guarantee
accordance with the relevant requirements of
that the requirements have been met.
BS EN 10224.
Acceptable nominal mild steel pipe diameters are 05.02 Materials to be used
200 mm to 1 200 mm, with 50 mm intervals up to (a) Internal linings
and including 500 mm, and after that with 100 mm
intervals up to 1 200 mm. (i) Epoxy lining : A solvent-free liquid epoxy such
as Copon Solvent Free Hot-cote DW (Plascon
code JHCI) or an approved similar product, hot
applied in one operation.

401-2
 (ii) Cement Mortar lining: Shall be done according valves as specified in the Project specifications or on
to specification: AWWA C 205-00 (for Cement- the drawings.
mortar protective lining and coating for steel
water pipe - 4 in. and larger - shop-applied). Where practically possible, a strategically placed fire
hydrant may replace a scour valve.
(b) External coatings
Where a valve is abnormally deep under the finally
Fusion-bonded medium-density polyethylene such finished off ground level, an extension shall be fitted to
as Sintakote or an approved similar product. the valve stem to ensure that the normal valve key will
open the valve stem.
05.03 Epoxy linings
A list of approved Valve Suppliers is included in the
Epoxy coatings and linings shall have a total dry-film Project Specifications and is also available from the
thickness of at least 250 micron, shall be applied strictly General Manager: Water and Sanitation.
in accordance with the epoxy manufacture's instructions
and shall comply with the requirements of SANS 1217. 06.01 Resilient seal gate valves
The Contractor shall furnish the Engineer with a Anticlockwise closing gate valves for water works, with
certificate which confirms that the coatings and/or compression-type seals and non-rising spindles shall be
linings have been applied to the manufacturer's used. The valve shall conform to the requirements of
satisfaction. Such certificate shall be signed by the the latest edition of SANS 664, subject to the following
manufacturer. additional requirements:
05.04 Fusion-bonded, medium-density, The valve shall have socketed ends to fit PVC pipes.
polyethylene coatings (MDPE) (Where double flanged valves are specified the flange
dimensions and drilling shall be to SANS 1123:1977
A uniform MDPE coating shall be obtained by dipping Table 1600 (or 2500 when specified.) The face to face
the already prepared and heated pipe into a fluidified dimensions for double flanged valves shall conform to
bed of MDPE powder which then fuses directly on to the either SANS 664 or DIN 3202 part 4.
heated surface.
The body and bonnet shall be epoxy-coated internally
A coating thickness of between 1,8 mm and 2,5 mm and externally. The spindle seal shall consist of at least
depending on the diameter of the pipe and the service two O-rings located in a corrosion resistant housing. A
for which it is required shall be obtained with the wiper ring to prevent ingress of dirt shall be provided.
coating extending around the ends of the pipe to under- The spindle nut may be loose or fixed in the gate.
lap the concrete lining for Sinta Joint pipes.
The valves shall be provided with a straight,
Fusion bonded MDPE coatings and concrete linings unobstructed body passage without any pocket and the
shall meet the applicable SANS requirements for this gate shall be completely clear of the waterway in the
type of pipe protection. fully open position. The sealing and gate-guide areas
05.05 Cutting back of linings and coatings shall be designed to eliminate deposits in the valve
body. The gate guides shall be of substantial design so
The extent to which linings and coatings shall be cut as to support the gate until the point of closure.
back will depend on the type of jointing specified, and
the linings and coatings shall be cut back cleanly from All components shall be interchangeable between
the ends of the pipes and specials. valves of one size.

Linings and coatings shall be taken to the ends of pipes Materials of construction:
for welded and Viking Johnson type couplings and Valve gate: Cast Iron covered with nitrile,
according to the manufacturer's instructions for Sinta EPDM or similar rubber.
Joint pipes. Coatings shall also be applied according to Spindle: Stainless steel.
the manufacturer's instructions for Sinta Joint pipes and
50 mm from the end of pipes for Sintakote pipes. Valve body and bonnet: Spheroidal graphite, grey cast
or ductile iron.
The uncoated portions of the pipe shall be protected
with a primer conforming to SANS 926 and applied to a The rated working pressure shall be 16 bar (or 25 bar
maximum dry thickness of 0,25 mm. when specified). The valves are required to seal drop-
tight from zero to a test pressure of 1,5 times the rated
06 VALVES AND HYDRANTS working pressure under test and field conditions.

Valves shall be of the types, sizes and ratings as The valve shall be capable of being opened and closed
specified in the Schedule of Quantities or Project under an unbalanced pressure equal to the rated
Specifications or as shown on the Drawings. Hydrants working pressure.
shall be constructed to details shown on the Drawings. The valve shall operate via a cap top (or hand wheel
All valves shall be at least Class 16 valves which are when specified).
suitable for dealing with a maximum working pressure
06.02 Butterfly valves
of 1 600 kPa. Where higher working pressures are
experienced, depending on circumstances, Class 25 or Butterfly valves shall comply with the requirements of
Class 40 valves shall be used. Valves shall be able to BS EN 593 and be of double-flanged, lugged or wafer
open and close under an unbalanced pressure equal to types, as specified. They shall be designed to fit
the specified maximum working pressure. between flanges in which holes are drilled in
accordance with SANS 1123. It shall be possible to
Valves shall be installed on street corners, directly
install the valve in any position and for the valve to
opposite the splay corner of the erf. Line valves on
function in any open position, without the disc adjusting
supply pipelines shall be installed every 500 m or as
its position or causing any flutter.
instructed by the General Manager: Water and
Sanitation. High pressure pipelines shall be equipped
with a suitable bypass and scour pipes provided with
401-3
Butterfly valves shall be controlled by weather-proof 06.03 Air valves
actuators fitted with hand wheels. Arrows shall indicate
Air valves shall be double-acting as specified and shall
open and closed directions. Valves shall open or close
be manufactured, when applicable, to the same
without any difficulty under an unbalanced pressure
standards of quality and finish as laid down in SANS 664
equal to the specified working pressure. Valves shall
for gate valves. Sizes less than 80 mm diameter shall, in
close by anticlockwise movement of the hand wheel or
accordance with SANS 62-2, have screwed inlets, and
ratchet handle. It shall be possible to positively stop in
larger sizes shall be flanged in accordance with
positions which are completely open and completely
SANS 1123. Built-in isolating valves are not required. All
closed. When specified, valves with diameters of
air valves shall however be fitted with a separate
200 mm and less may be controlled by direct-mounted
isolating valve which shall be approved by the Engineer.
ratchet handles.
All material shall resist corrosion or be coated with a
Actuators shall be equipped with position indicators and
protective layer which is highly resistant to corrosion,
adjustable travel stops. Safety measures such as shear
such as an epoxy coating of excellent quality. Floats
pins shall be built into actuators to prevent damage to
shall not lose their shape or leak and they shall resist
valves when excessive force is applied to the hand
wear so as to ensure long life.
wheel in a fully open or closed position. Valve bodies
should preferably be equipped with integral disc stops Air valves shall withstand twice the maximum rated
to limit the movement of the disc. This is to prevent working pressure and ensure a positive drop-tight seal
damage when actuators are incorrectly adjusted and from a minimum pressure of 50 kPa to the maximum
also damage to seals and seats. rated working pressure.
Valve discs shall be cast in one continuous process, The large orifice diameter shall be the same as the
and they shall have a streamlined shape and a smooth nominal diameter of the valve. The small opening valve
surface. Seat profiles shall be smooth and continuous. shall function through the whole range of pressures up
During closure of the disc, adequate "lead in" for the to the rated pressure.
resilient seal shall be provided to prevent the
development of excessive seating torque. Resilient Tenderers shall, with their tenders, furnish the minimum
seals shall lock in completely, and be removable and working pressure at which the specified air valves are
replaceable, and it should be possible to readily remove watertight.
and replace the seats on site. 06.04 Hydrant valves
Resilient seals shall have durable non-weathering, non- The 65 mm diameter hydrant valves shall be tamper-
sticking and long-life properties. Securing elements of resistant and shall be fitted with a single or a double-
seals and seal seats shall be manufactured of stainless lugged, 65 mm diameter, aluminium alloy instantaneous
steel or nickel-plated mild steel. Butterfly valves of coupling complying with SANS 1128 Parts I and II and
Class 16 and higher or with a diameter of 350 mm and shall be equipped with a square stainless steel spindle
more shall be fitted with self-lubricating, two-way, on which the keys of the local fire brigade fit.
adjustable thrust bearings to permit precise disc-to-seat
positioning at all times. After installation, fire hydrants shall be painted with one
undercoat of zinc chromate conforming to SANS 679
Valve shafts should preferably be continuous, but if stub followed by two coats of bright red high-gloss enamel
shafts are provided, each of these shall extend into the paint which conforms to SANS 630.
disc hub for a distance of at least 1,5 times the
diameter of the shaft. 06.05 Hydrants
The composition of stuffing box assemblies shall be The requirements of SANS 10400 part T, Fire Protection
such that the packing can be adjusted or replaced and of the Chief Fire Officer shall be adhered to.
under pressure without removing the valve from the
Fire hydrants shall be placed in accordance with
pipeline. O-rings may be used for valves with working
SANS 10090, Community Protection against Fire,
pressures up to 2 500 kPa.
450 mm from the erf boundary directly opposite the
Materials for construction: corner peg of the erf as shown on the Drawings.
Valve body: Spheroidal graphite, grey cast or ductile Proposed positions shall be submitted to the General
iron. Manager: Tshwane Electricity for approval to ensure
that the positions of fire hydrants and electricity meter
Disc: Spheroidal graphite, grey cast, ductile iron boxes do not clash.
or stainless steel.
Fire hydrants shall be jointed to the water main by a
Valves shall be coated inside and out with an epoxy flanged hydrant tee of which the flange is drilled in
paint of the highest quality. accordance with SANS 1123 Table 1600. Where the
All butterfly valves shall be tested hydrostatically to be water main exceeds 150 mm, an isolating gate valve
drip-free so as to determine whether the valve seats and shall be fitted to the tee. From the gate valve or hydrant
actuators are correctly adjusted. The seat shall be tested tee, a length of horizontal diameter GMS pipe and a 90°
to be drop tight to 1,1 times the rated working pressure GMS bend shall link up with the hydrant as shown on
and, in the case of a valve designed for unidirectional the Drawings.
flow, the seat shall be tested to the rated pressure in the On completion, the portion of the GMS pipe housing
opposite direction of flow. Valve bodies and discs shall which protrudes above the ground, shall be cleaned and
be designed to withstand 1,5 times the specified working painted with one coat of zinc chromate primer conforming
pressure. The bodies and discs of all valves with to SANS 679, followed by two coats of medium yellow
diameters of 300 mm and greater shall be hydrostatically high-gloss enamel paint such as Plascon code G6 or an
tested at 1,5 times of their rated working pressure. approved similar which conforms to SANS 630.
GMS pipes and fittings below ground shall be protected
against corrosion with Denso tape or as specified in the
Project Specifications.

401-4
07 ACCESSORIES AND APPURTENANT (a) Valve chambers
MATERIALS (i) In roadways:
07.01 Flanges A rectangular cast-iron (CI) box of
175 mm x 115 mm, with a hinged lid in
Unless otherwise specified, the flanges of flanged pipes accordance with the Drawings shall be placed
and fittings shall be drilled in accordance with on the surface with the longest side in the
SANS 1123, Table 1600, for pipes and fittings with a direction of the water pipeline which the valve
diameter of 150 mm and smaller, and in accordance controls. The box shall be supported by a
with Table 1000 for diameters exceeding 150 mm. pipe shaft as indicated on the drawings.
Where a pressure is specified, the flanges shall be
drilled in accordance with the required pressure class. The covers and frames of valve chambers
In the case of flanges of air-valve matching tees, the shall be of Cl and shall comply with the
drilling shall conform to the drilling of the valve requirements of SANS 558.
supplied. The Contractor shall be at liberty to precast
Loose flanges for galvanized steel pipes shall be the surface box into its concrete surround by
threaded to fit the threaded pipe, and loose flanges for using a mould made of 2 mm steel plate. The
concrete shall be class 1:2:4/19, and light
welding onto steel pipes shall be manufactured from the
same steel as is specified for the pipes and shall be reinforcing shall be used as shown on the
Drawings.
either flat faced or raised in accordance with
SANS 1123. (ii) On sidewalks:
Any item that is found to have flanges that are Reinforced manhole rings with an internal
incorrectly drilled will be rejected, and the reaming of diameter of 750 mm shall be used to form the
bolt holes to oversize dimensions to make a particular chamber as shown on the drawings. A
piece fit will not be permitted. type 11A CI surface box for access to the
valve cap top shall be cast into the reinforced
All flanged items shall be supplied with one set of bolts concrete lid as shown on the drawings.
and nuts and one suitable gasket with the appropriate
diameter and the gasket shall be made of a material The Cl surface box shall comply with the
that is suitable for the maximum test pressure. requirements of SANS 558 and the manhole
rings with SANS 1294.
07.02 Bolts and nuts
(b) Manhole covers
Bolts and nuts shall be of mild steel unless otherwise
specified in the Project Specifications or shown on the On sidewalks, for medium service, a prefabricated,
Drawings and shall comply with the relevant welded, mild steel lid with hinges and a frame as
requirements of the appropriate section of SANS 1700 shown on the Drawings. In the case of manhole
for coarse thread, medium fit bolts. The length of each covers to be placed in streets, the design of the
bolt shall be such that, after the nut has been tightened, cover shall be approved in writing by the General
the end of the bolt shall be flush with the outside of the Manager: Water and Sanitation.
nut or project above the nut by not more than two full (c) Meters
threads.
Under normal circumstances, meters are placed
All nuts, bolts, screws and threaded articles shall be above ground just outside the boundary of the erf.
hot-dip galvanized in accordance with the requirements
of SANS 121 Table 2 or 3, as applicable, or coated with (d) Air valve chamber lids
a material used to protect steel against corrosion as
Welded mild steel lids as specified on the
specified in the Project Specifications.
Drawings shall be used.
07.03 Step irons (e) Control valve chambers
Step irons shall be of stainless steel and shall comply The design of control valve chambers shall be
with the appropriate requirements of BS EN 13101. The approved in writing by the General Manager: Water
length of step irons shall be suitable for being fixed in and Sanitation.
brick or in situ concrete.
07.05 Appurtenant materials
07.04 Surface boxes and valve chamber covers and
frames (a) Bricks
All surfaces which will not be in contact with concrete Bricks shall be obtained from an approved
shall be painted with two coats of epoxy-tar paint prior manufacturer, shall be of the class shown on the
to installation. Following installation all exposed upper Drawings and shall comply with the appropriate
surfaces of manhole and valve box covers shall be requirements of SANS 227. The Contractor shall
painted with two layers of white road-marking paint as furnish the Engineer for his approval with samples
specified in section 613. of the bricks which he intends to use.

A 400 mm x 400 mm white mark shall be painted (b) Mortar

directly opposite the cover on the kerb of the road and Mortar for brickwork shall consist of 1 part cement
parallel to the pipeline. and 4 parts of building sand.
The types of boxes, covers and frames shall be as All mortar shall be prepared using ordinary
follows: masonry cement complying with SANS 50413
Parts 1 and 2.

401-5
(c) Concrete
Concrete shall conform to the requirements of
section 704.
(d) Soilcrete
Soilcrete shall be prepared as described in
clause 12 of section 202.
(e) Marker blocks and markers
Where specified, concrete marker blocks indicating
the position of pipelines shall be constructed in
accordance with the Drawings.
Markers indicating the position of all reticulation
pipelines and erf connection pipelines shall be
constructed and positioned in accordance with the
Drawings. Markers shall consist of the letter W,
75 mm high, recessed into the concrete during
road kerb construction. Where kerbing is already in
place, the letter shall be cut clearly and legibly into
the concrete or sandblasted with a template.
Markers indicating the position of valves shall be
constructed and positioned in accordance with the
drawings. These markers shall consist of a
400 mm x 400 mm block painted onto the concrete
kerb with white road marking paint as specified in
section 613.
No separate payment will be made for such
markers and the cost thereof shall be included in
the rates tendered for kerbing under section 503,
or, where no kerbing is to be constructed, in the
rate tendered for pipe laying or valve installation as
may be applicable.
(f) Epoxy-tar paint
Epoxy-tar paint used for protecting metal surfaces
where specified, shall conform to the requirements
of SANS 801 Type III and shall be applied in two
coats with a dry film thickness of 0,230 mm each.
(g) Welding electrodes
Welding electrodes shall comply with SANS 455,
and the type of electrode shall be compatible with
the welding operation to be performed.

08 HANDLING, STORAGE AND TRANSPORT

The handling, storing and transporting of pipes and
other items shall be carried out as specified in
clause 05 of section 301.

09 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

Except where pay items are provided for certain

materials, no separate measurement and payment shall
be made for materials and the cost thereof shall be
included in the appropriate tendered rates of
section 402.

401-6
SERIES 4 : WATER RETICULATION AND 04 LAYING OF PIPES
WATER MAINS
All pipes, fittings, specials and valves shall be
thoroughly cleaned and carefully examined for damage
SECTION 402 : CONSTRUCTION
and defects before they are laid. The onus for detecting
damage and defects before installation shall be on the
CONTENTS Contractor. Should any damaged or defective pipe,
fitting, special or valve be found after laying or
01 SCOPE installation, it shall be removed and replaced at the
02 EXCAVATION Contractor's expense.
03 SELECTED BACKFILL
04 LAYING OF PIPES After the bottom of the trench has been approved by the
05 JOINTING OF PIPES Engineer, a 100 mm thick layer of uncompacted
06 ENCASING OF PIPES selected backfill material shall be placed thereon.
07 THRUST BLOCKS
08 VALVE CHAMBERS Pipes shall be laid in the centre of the trench and,
09 BACKFILLING except where it is specified that they should be
10 SERVICE CONNECTIONS supported on precast pedestals (subclause 05.05(a)
11 MARKERS and clause 06), they shall be laid in such a manner that
12 CONNECTION TO EXISTING NETWORK OR the full length of their barrels will bear uniformly on the
PIPELINE uncompacted material. After the pipes have been
13 STERILIZATION OF PIPELINES placed in position the loose material shall be well-
14 TOLERANCES compacted on both sides of the pipes by using hand
15 CATHODIC PROTECTION implements. Valves shall be placed in the upright
16 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT position unless otherwise specified or shown on the
Drawings. All valves, specials and fittings shall be set,
supported and placed in their correct positions as the
01 SCOPE
work proceeds and their positions shall not be governed
This section covers the construction of water by the standard lengths of pipe.
reticulations, pipelines and service connections to the
Pipes shall be laid with the identification marks
details shown on the Drawings using materials
(subclause 04.01 of section 401) visible from the top of
conforming to the requirements of section 401.
the trench. Where markings are no longer visible once
the pipes have been laid, the Contractor shall at his
02 EXCAVATION expense, re-mark the pipes in a manner approved by
The excavation of trenches, the preparation of trench the Engineer. Control of laying shall be by means of
bottoms, and the additional excavation for valve boning rods and sight rails or by other approved
chambers and joint holes shall be carried out as methods.
specified in section 202 and shall be approved by the Precautions shall be taken to prevent the entry of
Engineer before any pipe bedding and pipe laying is foreign matter and unwanted water into the pipes, and
carried out. to prevent the flotation of the pipes caused by water
The minimum trench widths shall be as specified in and mud in the trenches. At the close of each day's
section 202 but, where the Contract requires the laying work, or at any time when work is suspended for a
of more than one pipe in the same trench, the trench significant period, the last laid section of each pipe shall
width in such cases will be as given in the Project be plugged, capped or otherwise tightly closed until
Specifications or as determined by the Engineer on the laying is recommenced.
Site. An approved badger shall be drawn through all pipes
Where pipes are to be encased in concrete or soilcrete, smaller than 600 mm in diameter as they are being laid
the trench width shall be determined either by the width and jointed. Pipes with a 600 mm diameter and larger
of encasing as shown on the Drawings, or by the shall be kept clean internally by the pipes being
Engineer on Site. carefully swept by hand as laying progresses.

Variations in the authorized widths may only be effected 05 JOINING OF PIPES

with the written approval of the Engineer.
Subject to approval of the methods to be used and the
The Engineer reserves the right to limit the length of observance of the necessary precautions, only steel
excavation preceding the pipe-laying activities. pipelines with welded joints and PE pipes may be
jointed outside their trenches prior to being laid. In all
Excavations for valve chambers and other brickwork
other cases pipes shall be jointed in their final positions
structures shall be 200 mm wider than the outer
in trenches.
dimensions of the structures, i.e. 100 mm measured
from each outer face. 05.01 PE pipes
Excavations for reinforced-concrete chambers which PE pipes and their fittings shall be jointed in
require the use of formwork shall be such that a working accordance with the manufacturer's instructions, and
space of 600 mm will be available around the outer special care shall be taken not to over-tighten the
perimeter of the structure. couplings.

03 SELECTED BACKFILL 05.02 PVC pipes

Selected backfill material shall be free from stones PVC pipes and their fittings shall be jointed strictly in
exceeding 10 mm in size and from organic matter and accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and,
clayey material, and shall contain sufficient fine material except for the joint, shall be backfilled as soon as
to ensure a densely graded, well-compacted backfill. possible after laying.

402-1
05.03 GMS pipes Care shall be taken to prevent concrete or soilcrete
from entering the flexible joint.
Before connections are made, all external and internal
threads of GMS pipes and fittings shall be thoroughly The encasing of pipes shall be carried out only after the
cleaned, and external threads shall be covered with a pipeline has been tested and passed and when the
small quantity of yarn and a thin layer of approved pipeline is still full of water. Formwork shall be used
jointing compound. The external threads of pipes and where necessary to ensure that flexible joints remain
fittings smaller than 25 mm may be wrapped with an uncased, and payment for such formwork shall be
approved tape in lieu of the yarn and compound. deemed to be included in the rates tendered for the
encasing of the pipe.
Care shall be taken to avoid tool damage to the
surfaces of pipes and fittings during installation. All 07 THRUST BLOCKS
joints shall be screwed up tightly.
Thrust blocks shall be constructed in accordance with
05.04 Steel pipes the Drawings at tees, bends, terminal valves and end
caps and where otherwise directed by the Engineer.
(a) Flanged joints
In the jointing of steel pipes with flanges, special The sides and bottoms of excavations against which
care shall be taken to align and level the pipes, thrust blocks are cast shall be sound and undisturbed,
and all loose material shall be removed. Excess
specials, fittings and valves to avoid straining of
the flanges. To facilitate the alignment process, all excavations shall be filled with concrete simultaneously
with the concreting of the thrust block and shall not be
flanged pipes and larger fittings, specials and
paid for unless the excess excavations have been
valves shall be supported on precast pre-
authorized.
positioned concrete pedestals, all in accordance
with the Drawings. Care shall be taken to leave all joints accessible and no
The mating face of each flange shall be thoroughly pipeline shall be tested unless the concrete has
cleaned immediately before jointing. Gaskets shall attained its full strength. Formwork shall be used to
be placed so that no portion of the gasket will ensure the accessibility of joints.
project inside the bore of the pipe. No thrust blocks shall be constructed where steel pipes
Nuts shall be tightened up evenly in opposite pairs with flanged or welded joints are used, unless otherwise
to ensure a uniform bearing on the gasket but shall directed.
not be fully tightened until all bolts have been
inserted and the flanges accurately aligned relative 08 VALVE CHAMBERS
to each other.
Valve chambers shall be constructed to details as
Wherever loose flanges are welded onto pipes, the shown on the Drawings.
Contractor shall make sure that the linings and
coatings are repaired and are soundly jointed to Chambers for flanged gate valves with a nominal bore
existing linings and coatings. not exceeding 200 mm and for air valves shall, unless
otherwise specified, be constructed after the selected
(b) Slip-on type couplings backfill material has been thoroughly compacted around
the valve and above the pipe to serve as a firm base for
Slip-on type couplings shall be installed in strict
the chamber.
accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations, and the angular deflection Where pipes with diameters exceeding 200 mm pass
allowed by the couplings shall on no account be through the brick or concrete walls of chambers,
exceeded. relieving arches shall be built neatly over the upper
halves of the pipes. In all other cases the bricks shall be
(c) Welded joints carefully cut to fit closely and neatly against the pipes.
All field welding of butt-welded joints shall be Cl valve chamber covers and frames, surface boxes
carried out by welders who are competent in terms and surface boxes precast into their surrounds shall be
of the procedure- approval tests of SANS 044 fitted on top of the chambers as shown on the
Part III. Pipes shall be well ventilated in an
Drawings.
approved manner when welding is done inside the
pipes.
09 BACKFILLING

06 ENCASING OF PIPES No backfilling shall be carried out unless authorized by

the Engineer.
Where specified or ordered by the Engineer, pipes shall
be fully encased in accordance with the Drawings. Before pipelines are hydraulically tested, the selected
During concreting pipes shall be adequately supported backfill shall be completed, also at joints, valves,
and anchored to prevent movement and uplift. All specials and fittings to a height of 200 mm above the
spaces under and around the pipes shall be properly top of the pipe barrels, as shown on the Drawings, with
filled with concrete. the use of the material described in clause 03 of this
section and with great care being taken not to damage
No part of the concrete casing shall be closer than protective materials with which pipes, specials, etc, may
150 mm to any flexible joint, and concreting between be coated. All joint holes shall be carefully backfilled
joints shall be carried out in one continuous operation. with the same material.
The concrete shall be raised equally on both sides of
the pipe. All backfilling with selected material shall be carried out
in 100 mm layers and shall be compacted using hand
Where shown on the Drawings or ordered by the implements. The compaction shall be approved by the
Engineer, soilcrete shall be used to encase the pipes Engineer.
fully and shall be placed in the same manner as
concrete casing.

402-2
Should suitable material for selected backfill not be 13 STERILIZATION OF PIPELINES
available from the excavation of the trench which is
backfilled, the Contractor shall obtain suitable material After each pipeline has been successfully tested, it shall
from his other excavations on the Site. In the event of be thoroughly flushed out with clean water until all
suitable material not being available on the Site, the sediment and other foreign matter have been removed.
Contractor shall screen the excavated material using a The pipeline shall then be filled with water containing
sieve with 10 mm clear openings but, if the latter 0,015 grams per litre of chloride of lime. The solution
method is impracticable, the Engineer may order the shall be allowed to flow slowly into the pipeline until it
Contractor to import suitable material. Separate pay fills it completely, and shall be left there for at least
items are provided in the Schedule of Quantities for the 24 hours. All valves shall be opened and closed during
screening of excavated material and for obtaining sterilization to ensure that all surfaces are sterilized.
suitable material from sources outside the Site of the
Works. The pipeline shall then be thoroughly and repeatedly
flushed with clean water until the water which is flushed
In respect of backfill material obtained from sources from the pipeline complies with the requirements of the
provided by the contractor, the provisions of Employer.
clause 05(f) of section 201 are applicable.
Where work, which has to be carried out on a section of
After the selected backfill has been completed and
pipeline which has been sterilized, causes internal
approved, the balance of the trench shall be backfilled
contamination of the pipeline, the entire section of the
as described in clause 13 of section 202, except above
pipeline shall again be sterilized. Water for the first
the joints, valves, specials and fittings.
sterilization will be provided free of charge by the
Testing of the pipeline shall now be carried out as Employer.
specified in section 403.
14 TOLERANCES
When the tests have been successfully completed and
the pipeline approved, the balance of the trench shall The permissible tolerance limits shall be as follows:
be backfilled at joints and at all other positions where
no chambers have to be constructed. (a) Valves, fittings and specials
• Lateral deviation:
At valves the selected backfill shall be completed to a
height as shown on the Drawings, or, as may be • Plus or minus 100 mm except where pipelines
applicable, a concrete slab shall be constructed are to be laid at a designated distance from a
followed by the construction of the valve chambers. fence, kerb or boundary, in which case the
Backfilling around valve chambers shall be carried out permissible deviation shall be plus or minus
with selected backfill material compacted by hand in 25 mm.
100 mm layers or with soilcrete where insufficient space • Vertical deviation: Plus or minus 100 mm.
is available and the cost of backfilling shall be included
in the rates tendered for valve chambers. (b) Pipelines

No separate payment shall be made for the backfilling Permissible horizontal deviation from a straight
of joint holes and for backfilling over joints, specials, line joining valves, fittings and specials shall be
etc, after testing has been completed, the cost of which plus or minus 100 mm with a permissible
shall be included in the rates tendered for backfilling. deviation per pipe length of plus or minus 20 mm.
The permissible vertical deviation from a straight
Backfilling of the authorized excavations in excess of line joining valves, fittings and specials shall be
the specified trench width shall be paid for under pay plus or minus 50 mm.
item 202.06 of section 202.
(c) Valve chambers
10 SERVICE CONNECTIONS • Lateral deviation:
Service connections shall be constructed to details As for valves, provided that access to bolts,
shown on the Drawings. nuts, etc, is maintained.

Payment for the installation of the connecting pipes and • Vertical deviation:
fittings will be made under items 402.01 and 402.02 To suit the valve.
respectively.
15 CATHODIC PROTECTION
11 MARKERS
Cathodic protection where specified, shall be as set out
The marker blocks shall be installed, after the trimming in the Project Specifications. No separate payment
of the surrounding area has been completed, to mark shall be made for cathodic protection, the cost of which
the sealed ends of connecting pipes temporarily until shall be included in the rates tendered for the laying
such time as the distribution pipes are installed by the and jointing of pipes.
Employer.
16. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
12 CONNECTION TO EXISTING NETWORK Note:
OR PIPELINE
Reference shall be made to the last paragraph of
Wherever a new reticulation system or pipeline joins up clause 02 of section 202 regarding payment for work
with an existing network or pipeline, the Contractor shall carried out under this section.
timeously notify the Engineer as to when the connection
will be required. The work will be carried out by the
Employer unless otherwise specified in the Project
Specifications.

402-3
Item Unit Overhaul shall apply when gravel material used for
soilcrete is imported from sources not furnished by the
402.01 Supplying, laying and jointing
Contractor, which are situated outside the free-haul
of water pipes irrespective boundaries.
of depth:
Item Unit
402.01.01 (Type, grade or class of pipe
indicated) 402.04 Providing thrust blocks
using class 15/19
402.01.01.01 (Diameter indicated) metre (m)
concrete cubic metre (m3)
402.01.01.02 Etc for other diameters
The unit of measurement for thrust blocks shall be the
402.01.02 Etc for other types, grades or cubic metre of concrete in place. Quantities shall be
classes of pipes calculated from the dimensions shown on the Drawings
or as authorized by the Engineer.
The unit of measurement shall be the metre of each
type, grade, class and size of pipe measured in place, The tendered rate shall include full compensation for
including couplings. No deductions shall be made for trimming the contact faces, procuring and furnishing all
fittings, valves or specials as these, except couplings, materials, including formwork, and for all concrete work.
will be paid for as an extra over to the pipes.
Item Unit
The tendered rates shall include full compensation for
supplying and laying the pipes, for the protective linings 402.05 Supplying and placing
and coatings and supplying electrical continuity bonds, unscreened selected
and cathodic protection for keeping the pipes clean, for backfill material under,
all accessories and appurtenant materials such as alongside and up to
flanges, welding electrodes, gaskets, bolts, nuts and 200 mm above pipe
washers, as well as precast concrete pedestals, where barrels using:
applicable, and for excavating and backfilling the joint
holes. 402.05.01 Excavated material cubic metre (m3)
Item Unit 402.05.02 Imported material from
sources provided by the
402.02 Extra over item 402.01 for 3
Employer cubic metre (m )
providing and installing
fittings, valves and 402.05.03 Imported material from
specials: sources provided by the
402.02.01 (Type of fitting, valve or Contractor cubic metre (m 3)
special indicating class or The unit of measurement shall be the cubic metre of
grade): material placed under, around and up to 200 mm above
pipe barrels. The quantity shall be calculated from the
402.02.01.01 (Diameter indicated) number (No) dimensions of the bedding as specified or authorized by
402.02.01.02 Etc for other diameters the Engineer. The volume of the pipe will be subtracted
when the volume of the material is calculated.
402.02.02 Etc for other types of
fittings, valves or specials The tendered rates shall include full compensation for
excavating and loading the material or alternatively for
The unit of measurement shall be the number of each loading approved material previously excavated from
item installed in positions as shown on the Drawings. trenches and other excavations, transporting it to where
required and for offloading, placing and compacting the
The tendered rates for each item shall be paid as an
material as specified.
extra over the rate tendered for item 402.01 and shall
include full compensation for any additional costs, work Material shall only be imported on instructions from the
or materials required to provide and install each item, Engineer, and overhaul shall apply when the imported
all as specified and approved by the Engineer, as well material is obtained from sources not provided by the
as for refilling joint holes with the appropriate material, Contractor, which are situated outside the free-haul
as specified. boundaries.
Item Unit Item Unit
402.03 Encasement of pipes with : 402.06 Extra over item 402.05 for
402.03.01 Class 15/19 concrete cubic metre (m3) screening excavated
3 material for selected
402.03.02 Soilcrete cubic metre (m ) 3
backfill cubic metre (m )
The unit of measurement shall be the cubic metre of
encasement provided, to dimensions shown on the The extra over rate shall include full compensation for
Drawings, when specified or when ordered by the the additional handling and transport necessary, for
Engineer, in writing. At flexible joints, a gap shall be left screening the material and for disposing of the material
in the encasement as specified. screened out.

The tendered rates shall include full compensation for Screening of material will only be paid for if ordered by
providing the necessary concrete pedestals and the the Engineer in writing.
strapping down of the pipe, where applicable, to prevent
uplift, and for providing and removing the necessary
formwork.

402-4
Item Unit The tendered rate shall be in full compensation for the
additional cost of paying any royalties or charges for
402.07 Valve chambers complete procuring the material from sources provided by the
for - Contractor as well as for transporting the material from
402.07.01 Flanged gate valves not where obtained to where used on the Site.
exceeding 200 mm in dia: Note:
402.07.01.01 (Diameter indicated) number (No)
The following items of work, when specified, shall be
402.07.01.02 Etc for other diameters carried out, measured and paid for in accordance with
the relevant sections of the Specifications, but shall be
402.07.02 Flanged gate valves exceeding listed under this section of the Schedule of Quantities.
200 mm in dia:
402.07.02.01 (Diameter indicated) number (No) Item Applicable section
402.07.02.02 Etc for other diameters (a) Overhaul on selected material 103
402.07.03 Single air valve number (No)
(b) Excess overburden at borrow pits
402.07.04 Double air valve number (No) provided by the Employer 201
The unit of measurement shall be the number of
chambers constructed complete as shown on the
Drawings and as specified.
The tendered rates shall include full compensation for
all labour and materials necessary to construct and
backfill the chambers complete with surface boxes,
covers and frames and step irons.

Item Unit
402.08 Installation of marker blocks number (No)
The unit of measurement shall be the number of marker
blocks manufactured and installed in accordance with
the Drawings.
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for all
labour, equipment and materials required to provide
and install the marker blocks.

Item Unit
402.09 Installation of hydrants number (No)
The unit of measurement shall be the number of
hydrants installed complete.
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for
compliance with the requirements of subclause 06.05 of
section 401.
The horizontal 80 mm diameter piping will be measured
and paid for under item 402.01.

Item Unit
402.10 Sterilizing of pipelines
402.10.01 (Pipe diameter stated) metre (m)
402.10.02 Etc for other diameters

The unit of measurement shall be the metre of each

diameter of pipeline sterilized.
The tendered rates shall include full compensation for
the provision of all labour, chemicals and equipment
and for sterilizing the pipeline.
Where pipelines have to be sterilized again due to
some fault of the Contractor, the cost of the water shall
be for the Contractor's account.

Item Unit
402.11 Extra over subitem 402.03.02
for using material obtained
from sources provided by
the Contractor cubic metre (m3)
The unit of measurement shall be the cubic metre of
material provided and placed.
402-5
SERIES 4 : WATER RETICULATION AND 03.03 Defects
WATER MAINS
Cracks, a lack of complete penetration or a lack of
complete fusion shall be considered as being injurious
SECTION 403 : TESTING
defects, and defective field welds shall be repaired in
accordance with API 1104. The full length of all repairs
CONTENTS shall be radiographically tested.
01 SCOPE 04 TESTING OF LININGS AND COATINGS
02 GENERAL
03 TESTING OF WELDS 04.01 Epoxy linings and coatings
04 TESTING OF LININGS AND COATINGS A low-voltage pinhole detector with a wet-sponge
05 HYDROSTATIC TESTING OF STEEL PIPES probe, which is operated at a voltage between 80 V and
06 HYDRAULIC FIELD-TESTING OF PRESSURE 100 V, shall be used for the detection of pinholes in
PIPES linings and coatings with a thickness of less than
07 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 0,50 mm. A high-voltage holiday detector operated at a
voltage between 12 kV and 15 kV shall be used to
01 SCOPE detect pinholes and holidays in linings and coatings
exceeding 0,50 mm in thickness.
Although this section covers some of the tests to be
conducted at various stages during the manufacture of This test shall be carried out both in the factory and on
pipes, fittings and specials and on completion of Site.
sections of water reticulations and pipelines, the
Contractor will remain responsible for carrying out any 04.02 Repairs
other test that may be required to ensure that his work
complies with the Specifications. Repairs to and the making good of damaged areas and
areas that have failed shall be carried out strictly in
accordance with the manufacturer's instructions unless
02 GENERAL otherwise specified.
All tests shall be conducted in the presence of the Where linings and coatings have been cut back to
Engineer (or his representative) as well as an Inspector facilitate the jointing of pipes, the uncoated section shall
of the Water Supply Division who will verify that the test be recoated in an approved manner to a standard and
results are to the satisfaction of the client. The quality not inferior to the original protection. Protective
Contractor shall, except for field testing as specified in linings and coatings shall be reinstated strictly in
clause 06, be responsible for the cost of all tests accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
incurred in this connection, and shall submit all test
results to the Engineer. All testing equipment and
05 HYDROSTATIC TESTING OF STEEL PIPES
testing methods to be used by the Contractor shall be
submitted to the Engineer for approval. Prior to the application of protective coatings and
Should any portion of the work fail to pass a test, the linings, each pipe shall be subjected to an approved
hydrostatic test at a test pressure determined as
fault or faults shall be made good by the Contractor at
his own expense according to methods approved by the follows:
Engineer. After repairs have been completed, the work 2 000 tf
shall again be tested by the Contractor or by others P
engaged by the Employer at the Contractor's expense. D
where P = the test pressure in kPa
03 TESTING OF WELDS
t = the wall thickness in mm
03.01 Shop welds
f = 85% of the guaranteed minimum
To prove the procedures, radiographic examination yield stress in MPa for the steel
shall be carried out on 100% of the welded seams of plate
the first pipe of each type. If unsatisfactory results are
obtained, the successive pipes shall be radiographically and
examined until the procedures are acceptable. D = the outer diameter of the pipe in
Thereafter one pipe from each lot of 50 pipes shall be
mm.
radiographically examined.
Irrespective of the above, each and every coil-joining Hydrostatic testing shall not be done until all aspects of
butt weld for helically formed pipes, a 400 mm length fabrication have been completed.
from each end of every longitudinal weld seam of every The pressure shall be applied steadily by an approved
pipe, and all welded seams of all specials shall be method and shall be maintained, without variation, for a
tested radiographically. sufficient period of time to allow proving and inspection.
03.02 Field welds Should water ooze from any part, or any defect of any
other nature be detected, the pipe shall be emptied and
The Contractor shall supply all equipment and materials
the defect made good. The pipe shall then be retested.
on the Site and also personnel to conduct the
Should a pipe, after repair, fail to pass the second
radiographic examination in accordance with the
hydraulic test, the Engineer may order its rejection.
requirements of API 1104 of the full length of 10% of
the circumferential welds made by hand welding and
2,5% of the circumferential welds made according to an
approved automatic process during the installation of
pipes and specials.

403-1
06 HYDRAULIC FIELD-TESTING OF PRESSURE 07 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
PIPES
Note:
06.01 General
Except for the hydraulic field test, no separate payment
Hydraulic testing shall be commenced only after will be made for conducting any of the abovementioned
permanent thrust blocks have attained their specified tests, the cost of which shall be deemed to be included
strength. The Contractor shall provide all the necessary in the rates tendered under section 402 for items
testing equipment, including pressure-testing domes, requiring testing.
blank flanges, the pump, meters, temporary valves etc,
to carry out the tests on the various pipes. Water for Item Unit
testing purposes will be provided free of charge by the
403.01 Hydraulic field-testing of pipelines
Employer from the nearest supply point.
403.01.01 (Pipe diameter stated) metre (m)
After the trench has been partially backfilled and before
the trench is filled in at the pipe joints and the fittings, 403.01.02 Etc for diameters
the pipelines shall be tested in sections between
isolating valves, end caps, blank flanges or other The unit of measurement shall be the metre of each
isolating devices at a pressure of 1,5 times the design diameter of pipeline tested and which has passed the
maximum working pressure of the pipe, unless test.
otherwise specified.
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for
In the case of fibre cement pipelines, each section shall the provision of all labour and materials required, for the
be filled with water 24 hours before the pressure is provision, installation, calibration and operation of the
applied. equipment used for testing and for visually inspecting
Care shall be taken to ensure that all air is expelled the pipe for leaks, all as specified in clause 05 of this
from the line to be tested after it has been filled and section.
before the test commences.

06.02 Visible leaks

The test pressure shall be maintained for a period of at
least 3 hours (or such longer period as is necessary for
the inspection of the pipeline) by means of a suitable
pump, during which period all pipes, specials, joints and
fittings shall be carefully inspected for leaks. All visible
leaks shall be made good and any pipe, special or
fitting found to be defective shall be removed and
replaced at the expense of the Contractor, and such
replacement material shall, after installation, be tested
at the expense of the Contractor.

06.03 Permissible leakage rates

The test pressure shall be maintained for a further
period of 1 hour after the completion of the visible leaks
test during which time the volume of water required to
be pumped into the pipeline for maintaining the
pressure shall be measured. No additional water shall
be required in the case of continuously welded steel
pipes, and in other cases the volume shall not exceed
the value, in litres, calculated from the appropriate
formula below:

Fibre-cement pipes:
0,075 x diameter of pipe in millimetres
x length of test section in kilometres
x square root of the test pressure in
megapascal.

Jointed pipes in steel, PVC and PE:

0,01 x diameter of pipe in millimetres
x length of test section in kilometres
x square root of the test pressure in
megapascal.

403-2
SERIES 5 : DRAINAGE AND EROSION (a) Sand
PROTECTION
Sand shall be clean, hard sand obtained from
approved sources. The grading of the sand shall
SECTION 501 : SUBSURFACE DRAINS AND be subject to the Engineer's approval. The
DRAINAGE BLANKETS requirements in respect of each type and the
comparative prices of sand from the available
CONTENTS sources will determine which source is to be used.
The Contractor shall submit samples and prices
01 SCOPE from available sources when so instructed by the
02 MATERIALS Engineer.
03 CONSTRUCTION
04 TOLERANCES (b) Crushed stone
05 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Crushed stone shall be clean, hard, durable
crushed stone from approved sources. The
01 SCOPE aggregate crushing value of the stone shall not
This section covers all the work in connection with the exceed 30 when tested in accordance with
construction of subsurface drains and drainage blankets method B1 of TMH1.
at the locations and to the sizes, shapes, grades and (i) Crushed stone for graded filters
dimensions as shown on the Drawings or as directed by
the Engineer. Crushed stone for graded filters shall conform
to the grading requirements set out in
table 501/1.
02 MATERIALS
Table 501/1
02.01 Pipes
Percentage
Pipes for subsurface drains shall be one of the following Sieve size
Grade passing by
types as specified: (mm)
mass
(a) Perforated pitch-fibre pipes which comply with the Fine grade 26,5 100
requirements of SANS 921.
13,2 60 - 85
(b) Perforated or slotted unplasticized PVC pipes
which comply with the requirements of SANS 791. 3.35 15 min
(c) Porous concrete pipes which comply with the 1,18 15 max
requirements of BS 5911-1144.
Coarse grade 26.5 100
(d) Vitrified clay pipes which comply with the
requirements of SANS 559 (excepting the 13,2 60 - 85
requirement regarding nominal diameter) and
which have special joints intended for subsoil 6,70 15 min
drains may be specified or used if the Engineer's
approval is obtained in advance, provided that, 2,36 15 max
where the gaps at the joint do not conform to the
requirement for the slots specified below, the The aggregate shall be evenly graded between
grading of the permeable material shall be suitably the coarse and fine fractions with no excessive
adapted to meet the design requirements for discontinuities. The Engineer shall indicate the
preventing permeable material from entering the grade of stone required.
pipe.
(ii) Crushed stone for filters which incorporate
The size of perforations in perforated pipes shall in all geotextiles
cases be 8 mm in diameter plus or minus 1,5 mm, and
the number of perforations per metre shall not be fewer Crushed stone for filters which incorporate
than 26 for 100 mm pipes and 52 for 150 mm pipes. geotextiles shall be nominally sized stone
Perforations shall be spaced in two rows for 100 mm which conforms to the grading requirements of
pipes and in four rows for 150 mm pipes, as shown on SANS 1083, or crushed stone which complies
the Drawings. with the grading requirements for graded filters.
The Engineer shall indicate the type of stone to
Slotted pipes shall have a slot width of 8 mm with a be used in each particular case.
tolerance of 1,5 mm in width. The arrangement of slots
shall be subject to the Engineer's approval, but the total (c) Geotextiles
slot area shall not be less than that specified for Geotextiles shall be a non-woven, spun or thermic-
perforations. bonded continuous filament fabric consisting of at
Pipes without slots or perforations required for least 85% by mass of polypropylene, polyester or
transporting subsoil water from the subsoil drain proper other approved material and manufactured for
to the point of discharge shall be unperforated pitch- civil-engineering applications by a recognized
fibre or PVC pipes of the types specified above, or manufacturer. The brand and type of geotextile to
concrete pipes which comply with the requirements of be used shall be as specified in the Project
SANS 677 Class 25D. Specifications or on the Drawings or as directed by
the Engineer.
02.02 Permeable material 02.03 Polyethylene sheeting
Sand, crushed stone and geotextiles used as Polyethylene sheeting shall be black in colour with a
permeable filter materials for subsurface drains and minimum thickness of 0,15 mm and manufactured by a
drainage blankets shall conform to the following recognized manufacturer.
requirements.

501-1
03 CONSTRUCTION Permeable material in subsoil drains shall not be taken
to the surface but shall be discontinued at such heights
03.01 Excavation as will be determined by the Engineer.
The excavation of the trenches for subsurface drains
Any section of a subsurface drain constructed from
shall comply with the requirements specified in and
pipes without perforations or slots shall be backfilled
shall be measured and paid for under section 202:
with impermeable backfill material as described above.
Trenching. The trenches shall have a width as
Where suitable, the excavated material may be used for
determined by the formula in clause 04 of section 202
backfilling. Impermeable material will be paid for under
unless a different width is specified on the Drawings or
section 202.
has been authorized by the Engineer. No payment will
be made for excavations outside the specified width or 03.03 Filter drains which incorporate geotextiles
for additional permeable and impermeable material
required because of excess trench widths. After the completion of the excavations, the bottom
portion of the trench shall be lined with geotextile
03.02 Graded filter drains sheeting as shown on the Drawings. The top edges of
the vertical portions of the geotextile sheeting shall be
After the completion of the excavations, the bottom
tacked to the sides of the excavation with nails or by
portion of the trench shall be lined with polyethylene
another suitable approved means. An overlap of at least
sheeting as shown on the Drawings. The top edges of
200 mm shall be provided at each joint. Geotextile
the vertical portions of the sheeting shall be tacked to
sheeting damaged during the installation or construction
the sides of the excavation with nails or by any other
shall be replaced at the Contractor's cost.
suitable approved means. The sheeting shall be heat-
welded at the laps. Sheeting damaged during The specifications set out in subclause 03.02 above for
installation or construction shall be replaced at the the construction of the pipe bedding, the pipe laying,
Contractor's cost. and the placing of the crushed stone filter material for
graded filter drains shall apply mutatis mutandis to filter
A layer of permeable material of the class and thickness
drains which incorporate geotextiles.
as shown on the Drawings shall be placed on the
polyethylene sheeting on the bottom of the trench and After the pipes have been laid and the specified layer of
shall be lightly tamped and finished to the required crushed stone filter material has been completed, the
gradient to serve as a bedding for the pipes. protruding vertical sections of the geotextile sheeting
shall be folded back across the filter material so that the
Pipes of the type and size required shall then be firmly
filter material will be completely enwrapped in the
bedded in the permeable material, true to level and
geotextile sheeting. An overlap of at least 200 mm shall
grade, and shall be coupled where required. Where
be provided between the portions folded back.
spigot-and-socket pipes are used, the socket ends shall
be laid upgrade with the spigot fully entered into the The specifications set out in subclause 03.02 above
adjacent socket. Where plain butt-ended pipes are shall apply mutatis mutandis to the placing of the
used, they shall be laid firmly together to prevent the remaining layers of permeable material and the top
infiltration of backfill material. Perforated and slotted layer of impermeable material, all as shown on the
pipes shall be joined by couplers. Perforated pipes shall Drawings or ordered by the Engineer.
be laid with the perforations at the top unless otherwise
shown on the Drawings or instructed by the Engineer, in 03.04 Drainage blankets
writing. The higher end of a subsurface drain pipe shall Drainage blankets shall be constructed in accordance
be sealed off with a loose concrete cap, and at the with the details shown on the Drawings. Firstly
lower end the pipe shall be built into a concrete geotextile sheeting shall be laid on top of the layer on
headwall to provide a positive outlet, or it shall be which the drainage blanket is constructed. Then
connected to stormwater pipes or culverts, all as shown permeable material of the type specified shall be spread
on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer. on the geotextile sheeting to the specified depth. The
Successive layers of permeable material, shall be Contractor shall take care not to damage the
placed after the pipes have been laid. Permeable geotextiles. The permeable material shall be lightly
material shall be placed in layers not exceeding compacted and finished to the required level. To
300 mm at a time, and shall be lightly compacted. The complete the drainage blanket, geotextile sheeting shall
total thickness of each type of permeable material shall be laid on the layer of permeable material.
be carefully controlled by means of spacers. When The layers on top of the drainage blanket shall be
successive layers are placed, the lower layer shall not constructed in such a manner that the permeable
be walked on and shall, as far as is possible, not be material or the geotextile sheeting will not be displaced
disturbed. Care shall be taken to prevent the or damaged. Normally material which is to be
contamination of permeable material during compacted on top of the drainage blanket shall be
construction of the subsurface drains, and all watered and mixed before it is placed on the blanket. It
permeable material contaminated by soil or silt shall be shall then only be necessary to level and compact the
removed and replaced by the Contractor at his material on the blanket.
expense. Care shall also be taken at all stages not to
perforate or otherwise damage the polyethylene lining. 04 TOLERANCES
The remainder of the trench shall be immediately Permissible tolerance limits shall be as follows:
backfilled with approved impermeable material
preferably obtained from the excavations, in layers not Grade : maximum deviation from the specified
exceeding 100 mm and compacted to 90% of modified specified grade expressed as a
AASHTO density, unless otherwise ordered by the percentage of the specified grade 10%
Engineer. The trench must be specially protected
Plan : maximum deviation 25 mm
against the ingress of water, soil and silt until the
backfilling with impermeable material has been Invert level : ±10 mm
completed.

501-2
05 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 501.05.03 Etc for other types of pipes.
05.02 Pay items 501.05.04 Etc for other types of fittings.
Item Unit The unit of measurement for pipes shall be the metre of
pipe, measured in place along its centre line, including
501.01 Crushed stone the length of fittings. The unit of measurement for
501.01.01 Graded crushed stone cubic metre (m )
3 fittings shall be the number of fittings, irrespective of the
type.
501.01.02 Single-sized crushed stone
(specify nominal aggregate The tendered rates shall include full compensation for
3 procuring, furnishing, laying and jointing the pipes and
size) cubic metre (m )
fittings as specified.
The unit of measurement for graded or single-sized
crushed stone shall be the cubic metre of crushed stone Item Unit
in place, calculated according to the authorized
501.06 Polyethylene sheeting
dimensions.
0,15 mm thick, or an
The tendered rates shall include full compensation for equivalent approved
the supply of the material and construction of the material, for lining
crushed stone layers as specified. No overhaul shall be subsurface drains square metre (m2)
paid on crushed stone for subsurface drains and
drainage blankets. For payment purposes a distinction The unit of measurement shall be the square metre of
shall be made between the different grades and sizes of polyethylene sheeting installed, measured net from the
crushed stone. specified dimensions.
Impermeable material will be paid for under The tendered rate shall include full compensation for
section 202. the supply, installation and bonding of the sheeting as
specified, including overlap and wastage.
Item Unit
501.02 Procuring of filter sand provisional sum Item Unit

The provisional sum allowed to cover the cost of 501.07 Concrete outlet structures
authorized expenditure incurred in procuring, for subsurface drains,
transporting and furnishing approved filter sand including formwork (specify
including the cost of transporting the material to the class of concrete) cubic metre (m 3)
Site, shall be expended in accordance with the
provisions of the General Conditions of Contract. The unit of measurement shall be the cubic metre of the
specified class of concrete provided for outlet structures
Item Unit for subsurface drains.
3
501.03 Placing of filter sand cubic metre (m ) The tendered rate shall include full compensation for
the construction of the outlet structures as specified,
The unit of measurement shall be the cubic metre of
including formwork, excavation and backfilling.
filter sand measured in place and calculated from the
authorized dimensions. Item Unit
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for 501.08 Concrete caps for subsurface
the construction of the filter sand layers as specified. drain pipes number (No)
Item Unit
The unit of measurement shall be the number of caps
501.04 Geotextiles (specify type, supplied.
grade, brand, etc) square metre (m2)
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for
The unit of measurement shall be the square metre of supplying and installing the caps as specified.
geotextiles installed, calculated from the authorized
dimensions, including the specified overlap on the top
surface of filter drains but not at the joints.
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for
the supply and installation of the geotextiles, as
specified, including wastage and overlap.
Item Unit
501.05 Pipes in subsurface drains
501.05.01 (Type of pipe indicated)
complete with couplings:
501.05.01.01 (Diameter and whether
perforated or not, indicated) metre (m)
501.05.01.02 Etc for other diameters
501.05.02 (Type of fitting indicated)
501.05.02.01 (Diameter indicated) number (No)
501.05.02.02 Etc for other diameters

501-3
SERIES 5 : DRAINAGE AND EROSION Ogee joints or spigot-and-socket joints with rubber rings
PROTECTION shall be used as indicated on the Drawings. Rubber
rings shall comply with the requirements of SANS 974-1.
SECTION 502 : PREFABRICATED CULVERTS
03.02 Portal and rectangular precast-concrete
AND STORMWATER SEWERS
culvert units
CONTENTS Portal and rectangular precast-concrete culvert units
shall comply with the requirements of SANS 986.
01 SCOPE
02 TYPES OF CULVERTS 03.03 Corrugated-metal culvert units
03 MATERIALS
Corrugated-metal culvert units shall comply with the
04 CONSTRUCTION METHODS
requirements of CKS 176 for riveted and nestable pipes
05 EXCAVATION
and pipe arches, and of CKS 437 for multiplate pipes
06 CONSTRUCTION UNDER EMBANKMENT and pipe arches.
CONDITIONS
07 BEDDING AND LAYING OF PREFABRICATED Culvert units the gauge of which is below that specified,
CULVERTS or the spelter coating of which has been bruised or
08 BACKFILLING OF PREFABRICATED broken, or which show defective workmanship shall be
CULVERTS rejected.
09 INLET AND OUTLET STRUCTURES, The following defects are specified as constituting poor
CATCHPITS, MANHOLES AND JUNCTION workmanship, and the presence of any or all of these or
BOXES other defects in any individual unit or in general shall be
10 ROAD CROSSINGS sufficient cause for rejection:
11 TOLERANCES
12 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Uneven laps, distorted shapes, variations from a
straight centre line, ragged or diagonally sheared
01 SCOPE edges, loose rivets, unevenly aligned or spaced rivets,
poorly finished rivet heads, illegible trade marks, lack of
This section covers the work in connection with the rigidity, dents or bends in the metal.
construction, using prefabricated units, of culverts and
stormwater sewers together with inlet and outlet Nestable culvert units shall be stored on the Site in a
structures, manholes and other appurtenant structures. manner that will prevent any moisture from
accumulating between the contact faces of the nested
The specifications in respect of culverts, which are set units, as this could adversely affect the spelter coating
out in this section, and which include the method of and render the units liable to rejection. Any units
measurement and payment, shall apply mutatis damaged by corrosion shall, if not rejected, be repaired
mutandis to the construction of stormwater sewers by all affected areas being cleaned and at least two
which are constructed from the prefabricated units coats of an approved zinc-rich epoxy primer which
described in clause 03 of this section. complies with SANS 926 being applied in accordance
In the Schedule of Quantities no distinction will be made with the manufacturer's instructions or as directed by
between the construction of culverts and the the Engineer.
construction of stormwater sewers, which are both
classed as culverts. 03.04 Fine granular material
Wherever the use of fine granular material is specified
02 TYPES OF CULVERTS in this section for the bedding of culverts, it shall mean
For the purposes of these specifications, the term sand or other cohesionless material, all of which shall
"prefabricated culverts" shall mean culverts constructed pass a 6,70 mm square mesh sieve, and not more than
from 10% of which shall pass a 0,150 mm square mesh
sieve.
(a) circular prefabricated concrete pipes, hereinafter
referred to as "concrete pipe culverts"; 03.05 Protective coating for metal culverts
(b) prefabricated concrete culverts other than pipe Where corrosive soil or water conditions are likely to
culverts, hereinafter referred to as "portal culverts" cause excessive corrosion of metal culverts, or where
or "rectangular culverts"; and culverts are to be backfilled with soilcrete as specified
(c) prefabricated corrugated-metal pipes and pipe in clause 12 of section 202, the Engineer may order the
arches, hereinafter referred to as "metal culverts". protection of prefabricated units by the application of a
mastic asphalt protective coating before installation.
Other types of prefabricated culverts not mentioned The coating shall be applied to the inside or the outside
above, if required, shall comply with the requirements or to both sides of the metal culvert units, as may be
specified in the Project Specifications or in the directed by the Engineer.
Schedule of Quantities or on the Drawings.
The material to be used shall be a proprietary brand of
03 MATERIALS mastic asphalt which contains asbestos fibres and
mineral filler, such as Bituseal or an equivalent
The prefabricated culvert units shall be factory approved material, and shall be supplied in a spray or
produced by a reputable manufacturer of these articles brush grade, as may be directed by the Engineer.
and shall comply with the following requirements:
The surfaces to be protected shall be cleaned to
03.01 Precast-concrete pipe-culvert units remove all moisture, dirt, oil, paint, grease, alkalies,
rust, millscale or other deleterious matter.
Precast-concrete pipe-culvert units shall comply with
the requirements of SANS 677 for SC type pipes of the The coating material shall be mixed so as to effect the
class or D-load specified in the Project Specifications, uniform distribution of all asbestos fibres and mineral
in the Schedule of Quantities or on the Drawings. filler.

502-1
Spray-grade mastic shall be applied by means of an Engineer considers it advisable, under certain local or
airless gun, and it shall be of a suitable consistency climatic conditions, that prefabricated culverts be
without excessive amounts of thinner being added. constructed before the fills. Culverts shall be
constructed under embankment conditions only where
Brush-grade mastic shall be applied with an ordinary shown on the Drawings or on the written authority of the
roofing brush, and the second coat shall be applied at Engineer.
right angles to the first coat.
Surface drainage shall be controlled by the construction
The final dry-film thickness shall be a minimum of of temporary earth berms and drainage channels to
1,30 mm or such other thickness as may be specified, prevent stormwater from entering the trench.
measured on the crest of corrugations.
Care shall be taken not to damage the protective 05 EXCAVATION
coating, which must be allowed to harden before
All excavations for prefabricated culverts shall be
handling or assembly. All damage to the coating shall carried out as specified in section 202. However, the
be repaired before assembly.
Contractor's attention is drawn to the contents of the
03.06 Skewed ends second paragraph of clause 01 of section 202 regarding
wide trenches.
Where culverts are to be constructed at a skew angle
exceeding 20°, the culvert units at the inlet and outlet of 05.01 Depth of excavation
the culvert shall be supplied with skew ends, if required. In the case of culverts to be constructed under trenched
Skewed units shall be supplied by the manufacturer and conditions, the Contractor shall first construct the fill,
the cutting of skew ends on the Site shall be allowed and, if necessary, the pavement layers to a level which
only if authorized by the Engineer, in writing. will provide the minimum cover above the proposed
level of the top of the culvert, as described hereinafter
Metal culverts shall be supplied with inlet and outlet for the various types of culverts. Thereafter the
ends that have been finished as set out below, Contractor may commence excavation of the trench for
whichever is shown on the Drawings or directed by the the culvert.
Engineer:
The amount by which the excavation is to exceed the
(a) Where no concrete inlet and outlet structures are proposed level of the invert of the culvert shall be
required, inlet and outlet units shall be bevelled to sufficient to allow for the type and thickness of bedding
suit the skew angle of the culverts and the slope. material or invert slab to be placed as specified or as
Bevelling of the units shall be done in the factory shown on the Drawings.
and not on the Site.
Where the bottom of the trench as excavated does not
(b) Where concrete inlet and outlet structures are provide a suitably firm foundation for the culvert, the
required, the ends of the culvert units shall be cut unsuitable material shall be replaced by approved
to the required plan skew angle (if any) and shall material to provide a firm earth cushion as specified in
be provided with anchor bolts which project section 202. When ordered by the Engineer, the
radially around the edge, as shown on the Contractor shall construct a blinding layer of concrete to
Drawings, for securing the metal culvert to the provide a suitable working floor for casting the invert
concrete inlet and outlet structures. slabs of rectangular culverts.

Portal and rectangular units shall not be provided with The minimum cover above the top of the culvert and the
skewed ends unless specified in the Project minimum depth of excavation below the underside of
Specifications. These culvert units shall be supplied the culvert shall be as follows:
square, and the portion that would otherwise be cut off (a) Concrete pipe culverts
shall project outside the culvert head walls.
The minimum height of embankment construction
03.07 Defects over the top of the proposed pipe culvert before
All broken, bent, chipped, cracked, dented, corroded or excavation may commence is the minimum cover
otherwise damaged units shall be repaired to the specified on the Drawings for the type of pipe and
Engineer's satisfaction or, where this cannot be done, bedding condition used.
they shall be removed and replaced with undamaged (b) Portal and rectangular culverts
units.
The minimum height of embankment construction
04 CONSTRUCTION METHODS over the top of the proposed culvert before
excavation may commence is 100 mm or such
Prefabricated culverts shall be constructed under either greater height as may be shown on the Drawings.
(a) "trenched conditions", where the units are laid in a (c) Metal culverts
trench excavated below the existing ground level,
or in a trench excavated in previously constructed The minimum height of embankment construction
fills, subgrade and, if necessary, subbase layers; over the top of the proposed metal culvert before
or excavation may commence is the minimum cover
specified on the Drawings for the type of metal
(b) "embankment conditions", where the units are laid culvert, or 0,25 times the diameter of the pipes, or
more or less on the existing ground surface and 0,25 times the span of the pipe arches, whichever
the fill or embankment is then constructed on is the greater.
either side and over the culvert.
05.02 Width of excavation
As a rule all prefabricated culverts and all stormwater
sewers shall be constructed under trenched conditions. The widths of trenches shall be determined by the
The only exceptions to this rule are normally the larger formula given in clause 04 of section 202. The widths of
sizes of metal culverts and in some cases the larger trenches may vary only with the written approval of the
portal or rectangular culverts, or cases where the Engineer.

502-2
If the width of any trench is increased by the slipping or (c) Concrete casing
collapsing of the side of the trench, the Contractor shall
inform the Engineer immediately and shall not proceed Where shown on the Drawings or ordered by the
with any further pipe-laying or backfilling in the relevant Engineer, pipes shall be fully encased in class
section until the Engineer has reviewed the 20/19 concrete in accordance with clause 05 of
circumstances and has given instructions as to the need section 302.
for altering the class of pipe or bedding conditions. 07.02 Portal and rectangular culverts
Where pipe culverts consist of two or more pipes next to
(a) Cast in situ invert slabs
each other, the minimum spacing between adjacent pipes
shall be 300 mm or half the outer diameter of the pipe, Cast in situ invert slabs shall be constructed to the
whichever is the greater, up to a maximum of 900 mm. dimensions and at the locations as shown on the
Where the backfilling between multiple pipe culverts is Drawings or as directed by the Engineer. They
done with soilcrete as specified in clause 12 of shall be reinforced with steel reinforcement as
section 202, the spacing between adjacent pipes shall be detailed on the Drawings.
225 mm or one-third of the outer diameter of the pipe,
whichever is the greater, up to a maximum of 500 mm. (b) Precast invert slabs
Where pipes are to be encased in concrete or soilcrete, A layer of fine granular material with a thickness of
the trench width shall be determined either by the width at least 75 mm shall be placed on the bottom of
of encasing as shown on the Drawings, or by the the excavation, and shall be levelled, compacted
Engineer on Site. and trimmed to grade and line to form a bed
suitable for receiving the precast invert slabs.
Where portal and rectangular culverts are to be
backfilled with concrete or soilcrete as described The slabs shall be carefully placed on the
hereinafter, the width of excavation shall be equal to the prepared bed, true to line and grade, and shall be
total outside width of the culvert portal, plus 0,5 m for bedded in such a manner that they will be
both single and multiple openings. In the case of uniformly supported over their entire area on the
rectangular culverts with a span of up to 1 200 mm, bedding.
which are so located that the tops of the culverts are in
or just below the subbase layer, the Engineer may (c) Placing of upper portion of culverts
require that the excavation width shall be the net width The upper portion of portal and rectangular
of the cast in situ invert slabs or the net width of precast culverts shall be placed true to line and grade on
invert slabs, plus 100 mm. the invert slabs, with a thin layer of 1:3 cement:
The width of excavation for metal culverts shall be sand mortar between the contact surfaces to
equal to the inner diameter or the span of the metal ensure a firm and uniform support.
pipe or pipe arch plus 0,8 m on each side of the culvert.
The units shall be butted end to end and the joints
Where metal culverts consist of two or more units next
shall be covered on the outside with two layers of
to each other, the minimum clearance between adjacent 2
340 g/m hessian which has been presoaked in
culverts shall be 0,8 m.
bituminous emulsion. The hessian shall be at least
150 mm wide, and the culverts shall first be primed
06 CONSTRUCTION UNDER EMBANKMENT with a coat of 60% bituminous emulsion before
CONDITIONS they are covered with the hessian. The hessian
Where culverts are to be constructed under strips shall be placed symmetrically over the joints.
embankment conditions as defined in clause 04 of this
Where two or more culverts are placed side by
section, the Contractor shall level the existing ground
side to form a multi-barrel culvert, the space
by excavating and filling and compacting as required,
between the culverts shall be filled with
so that the foundation for the culvert will be true to
class 20/19 concrete up to the level of the top of
grade and of a uniform density over the entire length of
the culvert.
the culvert and over a width determined as specified in
subclause 04.01 of section 202. 07.03 Metal culverts
The finished level of the ground on which the culvert is
The excavation shall be trimmed to the contour of the
to be bedded shall be in accordance with the Drawings.
invert of the culvert, and a bed of fine granular material
with a thickness of not less than 75 mm shall be placed,
07 BEDDING AND LAYING OF PREFABRICATED compacted and shaped to enable the culverts to be
CULVERTS bedded as shown on the Drawings. The culverts shall
07.01 Concrete pipe culverts be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations and as approved by the Engineer. In
Ogee-type pipes and spigot-and-socket pipes shall be case of a discrepancy between these Specifications and
laid with the spigot ends pointing downstream. The the manufacturer's recommendations, these
inside of the culverts shall be smooth with no displaced Specifications shall apply. Anchor bolts shall be
joints. All pipes shall be laid true to line and level. installed at the ends of metal pipe culverts in
accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and as
(a) Bedding
approved by the Engineer, for tying them to inlet and
The pipes shall be laid on a class A or class B outlet head walls.
bedding as specified for sewers in clause 03 of
section 302, and to the dimensions as indicated on No concrete bedding or casing shall be used in the
the Drawings. installation of metal culverts.

(b) Rock foundation Where metal culverts with diameters or spans

exceeding 1 500 mm are to be laid on steep grades, the
Where rock, shale or other hard material is Engineer may direct that the invert be protected with a
encountered on the bottom of an excavation, the layer of concrete with dimensions and of a class as
bottom shall be prepared as specified in clause 09 shown on the Drawings.
of section 202.

502-3
07.04 General Metal culverts shall be backfilled symmetrically to
prevent distortion of the units, and the Contractor shall
Construction of culverts shall begin at the one end, the
also make sure as to whether the required cover as
position of which shall be fixed as shown on the
specified in subclause 05.01(c) has been provided over
Drawings or as directed by the Engineer. The position
the culvert before his construction equipment may be
of the other end of the culvert shall normally be
routed across the culvert.
determined by the end of the last complete unit, the top
of which breaks through the fill slope. However, in the Where the width of excavation for rectangular culverts
case of skew culverts, culverts with a cover of less than has been limited by the Engineer, as described in
0,5 m at the shoulder, or metal culverts, the Engineer subclause 05.02 of this section, the backfilling shall
may order that the end unit be cut to the length and consist of class 1:4:8/38 concrete placed between the
skew required. side of the culvert and the excavation up to the top of
the culvert.
Any deformed or cracked units, or units which are not
constructed to the required lines, levels and grades, or When specified or ordered by the Engineer, culverts
which become displaced in the process of the work or shall be backfilled with a soilcrete in lieu of a
during the maintenance period, shall be removed and compacted gravel or lean concrete.
replaced by the Contractor at his own expense.
The soilcrete shall be placed by vibrators so as to
Precast units shall be lifted and handled by means of properly fill all voids between the culverts and the sides
approved lifting devices only. Lifting eyes shall be of excavations, and between culverts in the case of
caulked with a suitable mortar after the units have been multi-barrel culverts. The height to which the soilcrete
installed. backfill is taken shall be as determined by the Engineer
or as shown on the Drawings, and any remaining
The Contractor shall exercise due care not to damage, backfilling shall be carried out as described above with
overstress or displace any prefabricated culverts with a granular material.
his own traffic or compaction equipment and he shall
provide additional cover over the culverts or take other Soilcreting shall be carried out in accordance with the
approved measures so as to ensure that the design requirements of section 202.
stresses of the culverts are not exceeded. Where soilcrete is used for the backfilling of corrugated
All concrete work shall be carried out in accordance metal culverts, they shall be provided with a protective
with the provisions of series 7 of these Specifications. coating as specified in subclause 03.05 of this section.
The backfilling of stormwater sewers with selected
08 BACKFILLING OF PREFABRICATED material to 300 mm above the barrel of the pipes shall
CULVERTS be carried out as specified in clause 11 of section 302,
and the balance of the trench as specified in clause 13
After the culverts have been firmly laid on the required of section 202.
bedding, backfilling shall be carried out as follows:
Backfilling carried out without selected material shall be
The material used for the backfilling of those portions of measured and paid for under section 202.
culverts subject to traffic loads shall be selected
material as specified in clause 11 of section 302. Where 09 INLET AND OUTLET STRUCTURES,
the quality of the excavated material is poor, selected CATCHPITS, MANHOLES AND JUNCTION
material shall be imported for this purpose. The BOXES
Contractor shall ascertain in advance from the Engineer
what portions will require selected material for Inlet and outlet structures for prefabricated culverts and
backfilling. stormwater sewers and catchpits, manholes and
junction boxes shall be constructed in accordance with
In the case of concrete pipe culverts on class B bedding the details shown on the Drawings.
and metal culverts, the backfilling material shall be
thoroughly tamped in under the flanks of the culverts to 09.01 Excavation
provide a uniform bedding, all to the Engineer's
satisfaction. Metal culverts shall be temporarily Excavation shall be carried out in accordance with the
ballasted during backfilling to prevent them from lifting. requirements of section 202.

Backfilling alongside and over all culverts shall be 09.02 Backfilling

watered, mixed, placed and compacted, in layers not The material and method of compaction used for
exceeding 150 mm after compaction, to a density of at backfilling around manholes, cathpits, precast inlet and
least the density required for the material in adjoining outlet structures and junction boxes shall be subject to
layers of fill, subgrade and subbase. The density of the same requirements as specified in respect of
backfilling in excavations made in natural ground shall prefabricated culverts, except that the entire backfilling
be at least 90% of modified AASHTO density. process shall be carried out using selected material.
Backfilling shall be carried out simultaneously and Backfilling in layers shall proceed simultaneously
equally on both sides of a culvert to avoid any unequal around the whole circumference of the structure and
lateral forces from being exerted. payment for such backfilling shall be included in the
rates tendered for the pay items for the construction of
Where culverts have been constructed under manholes, catchpits, precast inlet and outlet structures
embankment conditions as defined in clause 04 of this and junction boxes.
section, the backfilling shall be carried out to the same
standard as described above, simultaneously and 09.03 Concrete work
equally on both sides of the culvert and over the culvert,
Concrete work shall be carried out in accordance with
until the minimum specified cover is obtained. After
the provisions of series 7 of these Specifications.
completion, the width of backfill on each side of the
Unless otherwise specified, concrete for blinding shall
culvert shall be at least equal to the diameter (or span)
be class 15/19 concrete, and class 25/19 for other
of one of the openings of the culvert.
purposes.

502-4
09.04 Brickwork (b) Pipelines and culverts:
Bricks shall be engineering grade burnt clay masonry • Plan : maximum deviation 25 mm
units complying with SANS 227 and shall be of the • Grade : maximum deviation from
class NFX E14 unless otherwise specified in Project
the specified grade expressed
Specifications or Drawings.
as a percentage of the specified
Brickwork shall be built in accordance with the grade 10%
requirements of section 805.
(c) Culvert in- and outlets: to suit the pipes
Where pipes enter brickwork, they shall be thoroughly
caulked into the wall and rendered with mortar. 12 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
09.05 Plaster and mortar Note:
Plaster and mortar work shall be carried out in Reference shall be made to the last paragraph of
accordance with the requirements of section 805. clause 02 of section 202 regarding payment for work
carried out under this section.
09.06 Manhole covers, grid inlets, etc
Item Unit
Manhole covers and frames, grid inlets and other metal
accessories such as step irons, etc, shall be supplied 502.01 Backfilling with selected
and/or manufactured in accordance with the details excavated material compacted to -
shown on the Drawings. 502.01.01 90% of modified AASHTO
After having been fixed, all exposed metal surfaces of density cubic metre (m3)
covers, frames and gratings shall, after having been 502.01.02 93% of modified AASHTO
cleaned, be painted with two coats of epoxy tar paint
density cubic metre (m3)
conforming to the requirements of SANS 801 type III.
Manhole frames shall be set firmly in cement mortar so 502.01.03 95% of modified AASHTO
that the covers will be flush with the final surface with density
3
cubic metre (m )
allowance as may be required for any future paving.
The unit of measurement shall be the cubic metre of
09.07 Benching material in place after compaction and the quantity shall
be calculated from the authorized dimensions of the
All benching shall be rendered in granolithic concrete
backfilling as specified or as authorized by the
with a minimum thickness of 20 mm and shall be
Engineer. The volume occupied by the culvert shall be
finished smooth and true with a steel trowel, and all
subtracted when the volume of backfilling is calculated.
corners shall be rounded.
The tendered rates shall include full compensation for
09.08 Precast inlet and outlet structures
selecting the material, for backfilling alongside and over
Where the use of precast inlet and outlet structures for culverts, for watering and compacting the backfill
culverts is specified, they shall be manufactured in material to the specified densities and for transporting
accordance with the dimensions shown on the the material from where excavated to where used,
Drawings. These units shall be laid and jointed regardless of the distance transported.
generally as specified for precast concrete pipe
Item Unit
culverts.
502.02 Supplying and laying of concrete
Kerb inlets shall be installed in positions shown on the
pipe culverts (type SC-pipes)
Drawings and shall be parallel to the road centre line
and at the same grade as the road, but the specified 502.02.01 (Bedding, class or D-load indicated)
positions of kerb inlets shall be modified if necessary to
ensure that they are located at the lowest points of the 502.02.01.01 (Diameter indicated) dia pipes metre (m)
vertical curves of the roads they serve.
502.02.01.02 Etc for other diameters
10 ROAD CROSSINGS 502.02.02 Etc for other beddings, classes
or D-loads
Where stormwater drains cross existing roads, the work
shall be carried out as specified in clause 14 of Item Unit
section 202.
502.03 Supplying and laying of metal
11 TOLERANCES culverts

Permissible tolerance limits shall be as follows: 502.03.01 (Type and wall thickness indicated)
(a) Catchpits, kerb inlets, junction boxes and grid 502.03.01.01 (Diameter indicated) metre (m)
inlets:
502.03.01.02 Etc for other diameters
• Plan : maximum deviation (with
the proviso that catchpits, kerb 502.03.02 Etc for other types and wall
inlets and grid inlets shall be thicknesses
placed at the exact lowest point Item Unit
of the road) 25 mm or to suit
the kerbing where 502.04 Supplying and laying bevelled
applicable ends for metal culverts

• Invert level: ± 25 mm 502.04.01 (Type and wall thickness indicated)

502.04.01.01 (Diameter indicated) number (No)

502-5
502.04.01.02 Etc for other diameters 502.08.01.02 Etc for other sizes

502.04.02 Etc for other types and wall 502.08.02 Etc for other types
thicknesses Item Unit
Item Unit 502.09 Extra over item 502.06 for end
502.05 Supplying and installing anchor units for portal and rectangular
bolts for metal culverts culverts with a skew of more
than 20°
502.05.01 (Size indicated) number (No)
502.09.01 Complete with precast invert slab
502.05.02 Etc for other sizes (type indicated)
Item Unit 502.09.01.01 (Size indicated) number (No)
502.06 Supplying and laying portal 502.09.01.02 Etc for other sizes.
and rectangular culverts
502.09.02 Without precast invert slab
502.06.01 Complete with precast invert (type indicated)
slab (type indicated) 502.09.02.01 Size indicated number (No)
502.06.01.01 (Size of culvert indicated) metre (m) 502.09.02.02 Etc for other sizes
502.06.01.02 Etc for other sizes The unit of measurement for providing manufactured
end units for skew culverts shall be the number of such
502.06.02 Without precast invert slab skew end units supplied for each type and size of
(type indicated) prefabricated culvert, irrespective of the angle of skew.
502.06.02.01 (Size of culvert indicated) metre (m) The tendered rates shall be extra over the rates for
items 502.02, 502.03 and 502.06 and shall include full
502.06.02.02 Etc for other sizes
compensation for all additional costs involved in
The unit of measurement for prefabricated culverts manufacturing, supplying and laying the skew end units.
(concrete pipes, metal culverts and portal or rectangular
culverts) shall be the metre of culvert laid as shown on Item Unit
the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer. 502.10 Cast in situ concrete
The length shall be measured along the soffit of the 502.10.01 In class A bedding,
culvert. In the case of metal culverts with bevelled ends, blinding layers and encasing
the bevelled portions which extend beyond the soffit of pipes, including any form-
shall be measured separately per unit for each size of work required
culvert.
502.10.01.01 (Class of concrete
The tendered rates shall also include full compensation indicated) cubic metre (m3)
for the testing, loading, transporting and off-loading of
the culverts, and for the provision and placing of the 502.10.01.02 Etc for each class of concrete
fine granular material where it is required for the required
bedding of culverts.
502.10.02 In invert slabs for portal or
For payment purposes a distinction shall be made rectangular culverts, including
between the different sizes and types of culverts and, in formwork to provide class F1
the case of concrete pipe culverts, between pipes laid surface finish and class U2
on class A or B bedding. surface finish for unformed
Bevelled ends of metal culverts shall be paid for surfaces
separately per end. 502.10.02.01 (Class of concrete
Item Unit indicated) cubic metre (m3)
502.10.02.02 Etc for each class of concrete
502.07 Extra over item 502.02 for
required.
end units for concrete pipe
culverts with a skew of more 502.10.03 In inlet and outlet structures,
than 20° catchpits, manholes and
junction boxes excluding form-
502.07.01 (Type indicated)
work, but including class U2
502.07.01.01 450mm number (No) surface finish
502.07.01.02 Etc for other diameters 502.10.03.01 (Class of concrete
3
indicated) cubic metre (m )
502.07.02 Etc for other types
502.10.03.02 Etc for each class of
Item Unit concrete required.
502.08 Extra over item 502.03 for end 502.10.04 Formwork for concrete under
units for metal culverts with item 502.10.03 above
a skew of more than 20°
502.10.04.01 (Type of finish
502.08.01 (Type indicated) indicated) square metre (m2)
502.08.01.01 (Size indicated) number (No) 502.10.04.02 Etc for each type of finish

502-6
502.10.05 In concrete lining for invert Item Unit
of metal culverts, including
502.15 Protective mastic-asphalt
formwork and class U2
coating for corrugated-
surface finish
metal culvert units (state
502.10.05.01 (Class of concrete whether applied by brush
3
indicated) cubic metre (m ) or spray gun) square metre (m2)
502.10.05.02 Etc for each class of concrete. The unit of measurement shall be the square metre of
protective coating applied as specified and directed by
Measurement of and payment for formwork and
the Engineer. When both inner and outer surfaces have
concrete (where paid for separately) shall be as
been treated, both surfaces shall be measured.
specified in series 7 of these Specifications.
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for
Item Unit
procuring and furnishing the mastic-asphalt and for the
502.11 Class 1:4:8/38 concrete treatment of the surface with the protective coating as
backfill for culverts cubic metre (m3) specified.

The unit of measurement shall be the cubic metre and Item Unit
the quantity shall be calculated from the dimensions of 502.16 Manholes, catchpits, precast
the excavation as specified or authorized by the
inlet and outlet structures and
Engineer, minus the volume occupied by the culverts.
junction boxes complete
Payment for concrete shall be made as specified in
section 704. 502.16.01 Manholes (type and standard
depth indicated) number (No)
Item Unit
502.16.02 Catchpits (type indicated) number (No)
502.12 Supplying and laying precast 502.16.03 Precast inlet and outlet
concrete inlets and outlets structures (type indicated) number (No)
for culverts
502.16.04 Transitions before and after
502.12.01 (Type indicated) catchpits (length and type
502.12.01.01 (Size indicated) number (No) indicated) number (No)

502.12.01.02 Etc for each size required 502.16.05 Junction boxes (size
indicated) number (No)
502.12.02 Etc for other types
502.16.06 Extra over or under item
Precast concrete inlets and outlets to concrete pipe 502.16.01 for variation in
culverts shall be measured per inlet or outlet complete depth of manholes from the
in position. standard depth designated
The tendered rates shall include full compensation for for purposes of tendering
providing, loading, transporting off-loading and installing (manhole type indicated) metre (m)
the inlets or outlets as specified.
The unit of measurement shall, in the case of subitems
Item Unit 502.16.01, 502.16.02, 502.16.03, 502.16.04 and
502.16.05 be the complete unit as shown on the
502.13 Welded-steel fabric Drawings, including all concrete, brickwork, covers,
frames, grids and other accessories.
502.13.01 (Nominal longitudinal and
cross pitch and nominal The tendered rates shall include full compensation for
diameter of longitudinal procuring, furnishing and installing the complete units
and cross wires indicated) kilogram (kg) and for backfilling around the unit with selected
material. The tendered rates shall also include full
502.13.02 Etc for other pitches and compensation for connecting up and building any
diameters conduits into the walls of the various structures.
Measurement of and payment for welded-steel fabric The unit of measurement in the case of subitem
shall be made as specified in section 703. 502.16.06 shall be the metre of increased or decreased
depth of the manhole measured in relation to the
Item Unit standard depth designated for tendering purposes. The
502.14 Reinforcement tendered rate per metre shall be an adjustment of
compensation for the standard item, payable to the
502.14.01 Mild steel Contractor either as an increased compensation in the
case of an increase in depth, or as a decrease in
502.14.01.01 Bars with an 8 mm dia ton (t) compensation in the case of a decrease in depth
502.14.01.02 Etc. for other diameters measured in relation to the standard depth.

502.14.02 High-yield-stress steel Where the above items of work cannot be conveniently
standardized according to complete units for payment
502.14.02.01 Bars with an 8 mm dia ton (t) purposes, the various types of work and items of
material provided shall be measured separately in
502.14.02.02 Etc for other diameters accordance with items 502.17 to 502.20 and such other
502.14.03 Etc for other types of steel items as may be necessary.

Measurement of and payment for steel reinforcement Excavation shall be measured and paid for under
shall be made as specified in section 703. section 202.

502-7
Item Unit Where gravel material for soilcrete is imported, the
extra over item 502.22 shall apply.
502.17 Brickwork
502.17.01 115 mm thick square metre (m2) Item Unit

502.17.02 230 mm thick

2
square metre (m ) 502.22 Extra over items 502.01 and
2
502.21 for using backfill material
502.17.03 345 mm thick square metre (m ) obtained -
The unit of measurement shall be the square metre of 502.22.01 from borrow areas provided
brickwork built, calculated from the leading dimensions by Employer
3
cubic metre (m )
of the brickwork. Areas in walls occupied by conduits
shall not be included in the areas measured, and 502.22.02 from sources provided
3
corners and intersections common to more than one by Contractor cubic metre (m )
brick wall shall be measured only once.
The unit of measurement shall be the cubic metre of
The tendered rates per square metre shall include full imported backfill material.
compensation for the brickwork complete as specified,
including pointing and building in conduits. The tendered rates paid extra over items 502.01 and
502.21 shall be in full compensation for the additional
Item Unit cost of excavating and loading the material, and in the
case of -
502.18 Plaster square metre (m2)
• subitem 502.22.01, for all operations at borrow
The unit of measurement shall be the square metre of areas not subject to separate payment as specified
plasterwork provided. in clauses 05 and 09 of section 201 and for hauling
material within the free-haul boundaries, and
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for
raking out joints in the brickwork and applying a • subitem 502.22.02, for payment of any royalties or
1:3 plaster as specified to all surfaces required. charges for procuring the material from sources
provided by the Contractor as well as for
Item Unit transporting the material from where obtained to
502.19 Benching square metre (m2) where used on Site.

The unit of measurement shall be the square metre of Item Unit

benching, measured in plan, constructed in class 20/19
502.23 Cleaning of existing
concrete with granolithic rendering. 3
culverts cubic metre (m )
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for
procuring and furnishing all materials and placing the The unit of measurement shall be the cubic metre of
benching complete as specified with granolithic material/ debris removed from the existing culvert.
rendering.
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for
Item Unit the provision of all labour and plant necessary to clean
the culvert and the removing, transporting and
502.20 Accessories disposing of all material to sites to be provided by the
contractor.
502.20.01 Manhole covers including
frames (description) number (No) Note:
502.20.02 Inlet grids including frames The following items of work, when specified, shall be
(description) number (No) carried out, measured and paid for in accordance with
the relevant sections of the Specifications, but shall be
502.20.03 Step irons (description) number (No) listed under this section of the Schedule of Quantities.
502.20.04 Etc for other accessories
Item Applicable section
The unit of measurement shall be the number of each
(a) Overhaul on selected backfill material 103
type of accessory delivered and installed.
The tendered rates shall include full compensation for (b) Excess overburden at borrow pits
procuring, furnishing and installing the accessories. provided by the Employer 201

Item Unit
502.21 Soilcrete cubic metre (m3)
The unit of measurement shall be the cubic metre of
soilcrete backfilling constructed, calculated from the
authorized dimensions of the excavations and the
height of the backfilling in soilcrete. The volume
occupied by conduits or other structures shall not be
included in the quantities measured.
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for
constructing soilcrete backfilling complete and in
accordance with clause 12 of section 202 of the
specifications, including full compensation for ordinary
cement, used at the rate of 5% of the dry mass of the
soil used, and stone-packing at culvert ends to support
wet soilcrete.

502-8
SERIES 5 : DRAINAGE AND EROSION cases, depending on the thickness of the base and
PROTECTION wearing course, a difference in level exists between the
top of the subbase and the bottom of the kerbing as is
SECTION 503 : KERBING AND CHANNELLING shown on the Drawing.
This difference in level will vary depending on how
CONTENTS accurately the subbase layer has been constructed.
01 SCOPE 04.02 Precast concrete kerbing
02 MATERIALS
Precast kerbing shall be constructed on a bedding layer
03 TYPES OF KERBS
of the type of material specified in subclause 02.03, and
04 CONSTRUCTION
approved by the Engineer.
05 TRANSITION SECTIONS
06 TOLERANCES Precast concrete kerbing shall be laid with close joints
07 SURFACE FINISH of 3:1 sand : cement mortar at the ends. The joints may
08 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT not exceed 10 mm in width and must be neatly pointed
with a pointing trowel. Guide-lines and straight-edges
01 SCOPE shall be used to ensure that the exposed faces of kerbs
are set true to line and elevation. Kerbing around
This section covers the work in connection with the curves shall be laid along the full curve length before
construction of precast and cast in situ concrete kerbing the joints are made, unless otherwise allowed by the
and channelling. Engineer.

02 MATERIALS After the precast kerbing has been constructed, the cast
in situ channelling shall be constructed as specified in
02.01 Concrete subclause 04.03 below.
All concrete work shall be carried out in accordance Precast kerbs shall be supported with a concrete
with the requirements of sections 702 and 704 of these backing of the dimensions and class of concrete as
Specifications. shown on the Drawings.
02.02 Kerbing and channelling 04.03 Cast in situ kerbs and channels
Precast kerbing shall be of the dimensions shown on Where there is a difference in level between the top of
the Drawings, shall comply with the requirements of the subbase and the bottom of the cast in situ kerbs or
SANS 927 and shall, unless otherwise directed, be channels, such difference shall be made up with the
supplied in 1,0 m long sections, except around curves same concrete as specified for the kerb or channel.
at road intersections where they shall be 0,3 m in This additional concrete shall be cast in one operation
length. Kerbing and channelling cast in situ shall be of with the kerb or channel. Alternatively, if the difference
the class of concrete indicated on the Drawings. in level exceeds 75 mm, it can be made up with a layer
of subbase material compacted to at least 90% of
02.03 Bedding material modified AASHTO density, the surface of which shall be
finished off true to line and level.
The material on which precast concrete kerbs are to be
bedded shall consist of crushed stone, cinders, slag, Kerbs and channels cast in situ shall be cast in
sand or other approved porous material with a alternate sections. The lengths of sections shall be 2 m
maximum particle size of 13,2 mm. except where shorter sections are necessary for
closures or where otherwise shown on the Drawings or
02.04 Mortar required by the Engineer. Cast in situ channels used
Mortar shall be mixed in the ratios of sand and cement with precast kerbs shall be of the same length as the
specified. kerbs.

Only ordinary cement shall be used. Forms shall be accurately set to line and elevation and
shall be firmly fixed in position during the placing of the
concrete. Stops at the ends of sections shall be placed
03 TYPES OF KERBS
accurately so as to ensure that the joints between
Kerbing shall be one or more of the following types: adjacent sections are truly perpendicular to the surface
of the concrete and at right angles to the edge of the
(i) Precast barrier kerbs (fig 3 in SANS 927) with cast road. After the concrete has been placed in the forms, it
in situ-channels shall be tamped and spaded until the exposed surfaces
(ii) Precast semi-mountable kerbs (fig 7 in SANS 927) are entirely covered with mortar. Exposed faces shall
with cast in situ channels then be finished to smooth and even surfaces and
edges shall be rounded to the radii shown on the
(iii) Cast in situ sloping kerbs as indicated on the Drawings.
Drawings.
The forms of concrete surfaces that will be exposed
Sloping kerbs may also be constructed with slip forms shall be removed within a period of 24 hours after the
in a continuous operation with an approved machine. concrete has been placed. Minor defects shall be
repaired with a 2:1 sand : cement mortar. Plastering
04 CONSTRUCTION shall not be permitted on exposed faces and all rejected
portions shall be removed and replaced at the
04.01 General Contractor's expense. Exposed surfaces shall be
Kerbing and channelling shall be constructed after the finished while the concrete is still green, by wetting a
subbase, which extends below and beyond the kerbing soft brick or a wooden block and rubbing the surfaces
and channelling, has been completed. until they are smooth. When the concrete has been
smoothed by using water, it shall be rubbed with a thin
No excavation into the completed subbase is necessary paste of 1:1 sand : cement mortar to obtain a uniform
to accommodate kerbing and channelling and in most colour and texture.

503-1
When completed, the sections shall be cured in the uniform sections, but with the required modifications
accordance with the requirements specified in as detailed on the Drawings. Sections may be either
section 704. precast or cast in situ units. Transition sections which
form part of inlet structures shall be measured and paid
After the concrete in alternate sections has set, the for under section 502.
intermediate sections shall be cast and finished off in
accordance with all the requirements specified above
for alternate sections. The exposed end surfaces of the 06 TOLERANCES
alternate sections cast first shall be coated with an Concrete kerbing and channelling shall be constructed
approved bituminous emulsion containing 60% net to within the following dimensional and alignment
bitumen by mass, and the emulsion must be allowed to tolerances:
set and dry before the intermediate sections are cast.
(a) Horizontal alignment:
Guide-lines and straight-edges shall be used to ensure
that the exposed faces of kerbs and channels are The maximum deviation of edges, the centre line
formed true to line and elevation. or vertical surfaces from the specified position
shall be 25 mm.
The Contractor may use an approved machine which is
capable of placing cast in situ kerbs and channels in The maximum deviation of edges, the centre line
one continuous operation by means of slip forms. He or vertical surfaces from the specified horizontal
must, however, be able to obtain at least the same alignment shall be 1:500 when taken over any
standard of finish, in respect of both appearance and section exceeding 10 m in length.
line, as can be obtained by the methods described (b) Vertical alignment and level:
above. The concrete strip shall also be provided with
neat joints at the intervals described above. The inside edge of channelling shall nowhere be
less than 20 mm and not more than 30 mm below
04.04 Backfilling the finished road surface. The invert level of
channels and the top of kerbing shall nowhere
After completion of concrete work, the excavated deviate more than 10 mm from the required level,
spaces at the back of kerbs shall be refilled with and nowhere shall channels have any adverse
approved material to shoulder or sidewalk level. Such grade.
backfill shall be placed in layers not exceeding 150 mm
in thickness and each layer shall be watered and (c) Trueness of exposed surfaces:
thoroughly compacted before the succeeding layer is
placed thereon. The construction of medians, When tested with a 3 m straight-edge, no surface
sidewalks, traffic islands and other unsurfaced areas irregularities shall exceed 6 mm.
behind kerbs shall be carried out in accordance with the (d) Cross-sectional dimensions:
relevant clauses of section 104 : Landscaping and
grassing, and shall be measured and paid for under that All cross-sectional dimensions shall be within
section. 6 mm of the specified dimensions, except that the
underside of channelling may extend up to 25 mm
Where the basecourse is to be constructed after the below the level at which it would have the required
kerbing has been laid, the concrete backing to the kerbs thickness.
and backfill behind the kerbs shall be completed prior to
the construction of the basecourse in order that the
07 SURFACE FINISH
kerbing shall not be displaced during construction of the
basecourse. All unformed exposed concrete surfaces shall have a
class U2 surface finish, and all formed exposed
Where kerbs and channels are laid after the basecourse concrete surfaces shall have a class F2 surface finish.
has been constructed, the spaces between the concrete
and adjoining base shall be backfilled with premixed
bituminous material. 08 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
Item Unit
04.05 Protection
503.01 Concrete kerbing (Class of
Care shall be taken to protect all precast units against
chipping or breakage during transportation and laying. concrete indicated for in situ
Broken or badly chipped sections may not be used and concrete)
shall be removed and replaced with undamaged units. 503.01.01 (Description of type with
Concrete kerbing and channelling as well as any other reference to Drawing) metre (m)
structures adjacent to the road shall be protected from 503.01.02 Etc for other types
discolouration by bitumen being sprayed or premix
being placed. Where bitumen is to be sprayed, all such Item Unit
work shall be completely covered with polyethylene
sheeting at least 0,25 mm thick and weighted down by 503.02 Concrete kerbing-channelling
packed stones and sand to prevent the sheeting from combination (Class of concrete
lifting during windy conditions. Any work discoloured by indicated for in situ concrete)
bitumen shall be broken down and replaced, unless all
503.02.01 (Description of type with
such bitumen is completely removed so that no
reference to Drawing) metre (m)
discolouration is visible at all. Painting over discoloured
sections will not be allowed. 503.02.02 Etc for other types

05 TRANSITION SECTIONS The unit of measurement shall be the metre of concrete

kerbing or kerbing-channelling combination complete as
Transition sections for kerbing and kerbing-channelling constructed, measured along the front face of the kerb.
combinations shall be constructed to the same
standards and by the same methods as described for
503-2
The tendered rate for each metre of concrete kerbing
and kerbing-channelling combination shall include full
compensation for constructing the complete item,
including the necessary excavation, bedding, additional
concrete or subbase material as specified in
subclause 04.03, backfilling, formwork, concrete, curing
and finishing, for recessing the specified letters into the
concrete where necessary to indicate the positions of
service ducts or house connections for water and for
the installation of the concrete backing.
Item Unit

503.03 Transition sections (Type

designs)

503.03.01 (Description of type, etc with

reference to Drawing and
class of concrete) number (No)

503.03.02 Etc for other types

The unit of measurement and payment shall be the
number of completed units of each type of transition
section constructed, and payment shall include full
compensation for all formwork, concrete, curing,
excavation, trimming and backfilling.

503-3
SERIES 5 : DRAINAGE AND EROSION PROTECTION constructed, measured and paid for in accordance with
the provisions of this section.
SECTION 504 : OPEN DRAINS
03.03 Hand excavation
CONTENTS In the case of open drains paid for as type designs, and
in the case of mitre drains, catchwater drains and
01 SCOPE concrete chutes, no extra over payment will apply in
02 DEFINITIONS respect of hand excavations, and the Contractor shall,
03 EXCAVATIONS as may be necessary, make allowance in his rates for
04 CONSTRUCTION all hand excavations.
05 MISCELLANEOUS DETAILS
06 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT For side drains and channels paid for by components,
the Engineer shall classify as hand excavation such
01 SCOPE excavations or parts thereof as he may consider can be
excavated only by hand tools, and the Contractor shall
This section covers the construction of open drains as be paid accordingly. Notwithstanding the above, any
defined in clause 02, either as unlined excavations and hand excavation required solely for the purpose of
banks, lined excavations, or as concrete drains. accurately trimming the excavations to the final shape
specified, shall not be classified or paid for as hand
02 DEFINITIONS excavation.
For the purpose of this section in particular and these 03.04 General
Specifications in general, the following words shall have
the meanings hereby assigned to them. Open drains shall be excavated true to line, grade, level
and cross section, and unlined drains shall be
(a) Catchwater drain
maintained to this shape until completion of the Works
An open drain constructed at the top of a cutting to has been certified. Care shall be taken not to excavate
prevent water from running down the face of the beyond the limits of the required cross section, and any
cutting. over-excavation or overbreak shall be backfilled to the
required cross section and at the Contractor's own cost,
(b) Channel
either with class 1:3:6/19 concrete, soilcrete or with
Any open drain other than a chute, mitre drain, compacted gravel, as may be directed by the Engineer.
catch-water drain or side drain.
Where open drains are to be lined, the final trimming of
(c) Chute excavations shall be done by hand and shall be guided
A drain, usually in precast concrete, running down by the use of accurately installed profile guides or other
the slope of an excavation or embankment. Chutes approved means. Trimming shall include the removal by
are called down-lets in railway work. hand of not less than the final 75 mm of material or
such additional thickness as may be necessary under
(d) Mitre drain the circumstances to ensure accurate excavation.
An open drain consisting of an excavation and
bank, normally at an angle to the road or rail 04 CONSTRUCTION
centre-line, for the purpose of conveying water
away from the road or rail reserve. 04.01 Mitre drains and banks

(e) Open drain Mitre drains and banks shall be constructed to the
dimensions shown on the Drawings and as instructed
A chute, mitre drain, catchwater drain, side drain by the Engineer. The mitre banks shall be constructed
or channel constructed for the purpose of with the material excavated from the drains or with
conveying stormwater. imported material, which shall be thoroughly compacted
(f) Side drain to 90% of modified AASHTO density.
A longitudinal open drain situated adjacent to and Payment will only be made for material in the mitre
at the bottom of a cutting or embankment slope or banks and not for the excavation of the material used in
adjacent to the shoulder of a road. the mitre banks.

03 EXCAVATIONS 04.02 Catchwater drains

03.01 Classification of excavations according to Catchwater drains shall be constructed in accordance

the type of material excavated with the details shown on the Drawings and as
instructed by the Engineer. Material excavated from
Excavations shall be classified as either soft catchwater drains shall be placed on the lower side of
excavations or hard excavations in accordance with the the drain and thoroughly compacted. Where a sufficient
provisions of clause 03 of section 202. quantity of suitable material cannot be obtained from
the excavations, imported material shall be used. The
03.02 Mass excavations
larger-sized stones shall be placed on the inside faces
All mass excavations for road and railway cuttings shall of catchwater drains to afford protection against
be completed, measured and paid for under erosion. As is the case with mitre drains, payment will
section 203. Only the remainder of such excavations only be made for the material in the banks and not for
which is required solely for the purpose of constructing excavations.
open drains will be measured and paid for in
accordance with the provisions of this section. (See 04.03 Side drains
diagram 504/01.) After completion of any mass earthworks (see
In the case of large open drains, the excavation thereof diagram 504/01), such further excavations as may be
or part thereof shall be treated as mass excavations necessary shall be done by hand to complete the
(and earthworks) under section 203, or be measured excavations for the side drains to the dimensions shown
and paid for under that section wherever so specified in on the Drawings.
the Project Specifications, otherwise they shall be
504-1
 DIAGRAM 504/01

Where the shape of side drains is of such a nature that Precast units shall be laid from the bottom upwards and
mass excavation methods can produce the final shape firmly bedded, and the space between the side walls
of the side drains, no further payment will be made for and the excavation shall be backfilled and thoroughly
side drains except if they have to be lined for erosion compacted.
protection.
Inlet sections shall be provided as shown on the
The final surface of the side drains shall be neatly cut Drawings.
and trimmed to shape. Where required, the side drains
may be lined for erosion protection, or they may be 04.06 Protective linings
constructed entirely from concrete. Side drains that are Where open drains are required to be provided with
paved with or constructed from concrete shall be protective linings which consist of gabions, stone
protected against disfigurement by bitumen being split pitching, riprap, masonry walls, concrete-block pitching
onto the concrete during surfacing operations. This or cast in situ concrete, these shall be constructed in
shall be done by covering the side drains completely in accordance with the provisions of section 505 and this
plastic sheeting which has been properly weighted section.
down by stones or by other means. All bitumen spilt on
the paving or concrete of the side drains shall be 04.07 Concrete construction
removed entirely, and no overpainting will be allowed.
Where open drains are required to be constructed in
04.04 Channels concrete either from precast units or from cast in situ
concrete, they shall be constructed as specified in
Channels shall be excavated with any suitable sections 702, 703 and 704 of these Specifications.
excavating or earth-moving equipment and, where the Where the drains are lined with concrete, they shall also
size and shape of the channel precludes the use of comply with the requirements of section 505. Similarly
excavating equipment, with hand tools. inlet, outlet and transition sections shall be constructed
Surplus excavated material shall be utilized, as far as in accordance with the provisions of sections 702, 703
possible, in the construction of fills, banks and other and 704, as may be applicable.
structures and, where this is not feasible, the material The excavations shall be compacted and accurately
shall be removed to spoil as instructed by the Engineer. trimmed to receive the concrete. Where side walls are
Where specified or instructed by the Engineer, channels not cast against the excavation, the excavation shall be
shall be protected against erosion by means of gabions, widened just sufficiently to accommodate the formwork
grassing or concrete lining, or they may be constructed and, on completion of the concreting, the excavation
entirely from concrete in accordance with the provisions of shall be backfilled against the side walls and thoroughly
sections 702, 703 and 704, in which case formwork shall compacted.
also be used for the outer faces of the channel sides.
04.08 Casting against the side of the excavation
The final surfaces of all channel excavations shall be
neatly cut and trimmed to shape. Where soil conditions are suitable, the concrete side
walls or paving of open drains shall be cast against the
04.05 Chutes
prepared excavations, in which case inside formwork
Chutes shall be constructed, as may be required, either shall be used where the slope of the side walls exceeds
in precast units or from cast in situ concrete to the one vertical to two horizontal.
details shown on the Drawings.
Where prices are based on type designs, the Contractor
The excavations for chutes shall be thoroughly compacted shall be at liberty to choose whatever method of
and accurately trimmed to shape, and graded so as to be construction he may prefer, either by casting against the
ready to receive the cast in situ concrete or precast units. prepared surface, or by doing additional excavation and
using inside and outside formwork for the side walls.
Outlet structures shall be constructed before the chutes
are constructed so as to provide the necessary support
for the chute.
504-2
Where payment is based on components, the Engineer (c) Trueness of exposed surfaces:
shall decide whether casting side walls against the When tested with a 3 m straight-edge, no exposed
excavation is practicable or whether outside formwork is surface shall show surface irregularities exceeding
necessary, and payment will be based on his ruling
10 mm.
irrespective of the method of construction ultimately
employed by the Contractor. (d) Cross-sectional dimensions:
04.09 Excess excavation and overbreak Cross-sectional dimensions shall be within 10 mm
of the specified dimensions.
The Contractor shall take due care not to excavate
outside the authorized dimensions and any over- (e) Thickness of concrete lining:
excavation shall be backfilled at the Contractor’s own The thickness of the concrete lining shall not at
expense, with a stiff soilcrete, well compacted, in the any place be less than the specified thickness, nor
case of unlined drains and with class 1:3:6/19 concrete shall it be thicker by more than 10 mm or 10% of
or a stiff soilcrete, as the Engineer may require, in the the specified thickness, whichever is the greater.
case of lined open drains cast against the excavations.
The Contractor shall make allowance in his unit rates 06 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
for the construction of the drains for the risk of
Item Unit
overbreak as no specific payment will apply in respect
of overbreak. 504.01 Mitre drains and catchwater drains:
3
05 MISCELLANEOUS DETAILS 504.01.01 Mitre drains cubic metre (m )
3
05.01 Joints 504.01.02 Catchwater drains cubic metre (m )

Watertight joints in concrete shall be constructed in The unit of measurement for mitre drains and
accordance with the details shown on the Drawings and catchwater drains shall be the cubic metre of material
the provisions of section 706. During the construction of placed in the mitre bank or in the bank of the
butt joints, the exposed joint surfaces of alternate catchwater drain in accordance with the authorized
panels cast first shall be coated with two coats of an dimensions.
approved bituminous emulsion which contains 60% The tendered rates shall include full compensation for
bitumen by mass, and the emulsion shall be allowed to excavating the drains by machine or, where necessary,
set and dry before the intermediate panels are cast. by hand, for importing additional material where
05.02 Surface finish required, placing and compacting the material to the
required dimensions in the mitre bank or catchwater
All unformed concrete surfaces shall be finished to a bank, and for all other incidentals necessary for
class U2 surface finish, and all formed surfaces to a constructing the drains complete as specified and
class F2 surface finish, all as specified in section 702. detailed on the Drawings.
05.03 Polyethylene sheeting Where excavations are done in hard material, an extra
over payment shall apply for excavating in hard
Unless otherwise specified, the surfaces on which
material, but no payment shall apply in respect of
concrete lining is to be cast shall, after having been
overbreak, the cost of which shall be included in the
trimmed, be covered with polyethylene sheeting,
rates for item 504.01.
0,150 mm thick, and all joints in the sheeting shall
overlap by at least 150 mm. Care shall be taken not to Item Unit
damage this sheeting during concreting or the placing
of reinforcement. 504.02 Concrete chutes (type designs):
05.04 Transition sections 504.02.01 (Description of the type with
reference to the Drawings. State
Transition sections for concrete-lined open drains shall whether it will be precast or cast
be constructed to the same standards and according to
in situ and state the class of
the same methods as described in respect of uniform
sections, but with the necessary modifications. concrete) metre (m)

05.05 Inlet and outlet structures 504.02.02 Etc in respect of other types

Inlet and outlet structures for channels, side drains and The unit of measurement shall be the metre of concrete
chutes shall be constructed using the same methods as chute measured along the slope, but shall exclude inlet
described in respect of the uniform sections, but with and outlet structures.
the necessary modifications. The tendered rates shall include full compensation for
05.06 Tolerances procuring, furnishing and installing the concrete chutes
complete as specified and shown on the Drawings,
No specific constructional tolerances shall apply in including excavation by hand where necessary, the
respect of unlined open drains, but the following trimming of excavations, backfilling, and the disposal of
tolerances shall apply in respect of lined open drains excavated material.
and open drains constructed in precast concrete:
Where excavations are made in hard material, an extra
(a) Horizontal alignment: over payment shall apply in respect of excavating in
The maximum deviation from the true position of hard material, but no payment shall apply in respect of
the centre line shall be 25 mm. overbreak, the cost of which shall be deemed to be
included in the rates for item 504.02.
(b) Vertical alignment:
The invert level shall not at any place deviate
more than 25 mm from the required level and the
inverts shall not at any place have an adverse
grade.
504-3
Item Unit required for the side drains shall be measured and paid
for under item 504.05.01.
504.03 Side drains (type designs):
Item 504.05.01 shall also apply in respect of the
504.03.01 (Description of the type with excavations for inlet and outlet structures, transition
reference to the Drawings. sections and any other structures or non-standard cross
State the class of concrete) metre (m) sections required for the open drains.
504.03.02 Etc in respect of other types 504.05.02 Preparation of excavations
The unit of measurement shall be the metre of side for concrete-lined open
2
drain with a standard cross section, but shall exclude drains square metre (m )
the inlet, outlet and transition sections. The unit of measurement shall be the square metre of
The tendered rates shall include full compensation for open drain excavation prepared to receive concrete.
procuring, furnishing and installing the concrete side The tendered rate shall include full compensation for
drains complete as specified and shown on the trimming, compacting and preparing excavations to the
Drawings, including, where necessary, excavation by standard required for receiving concrete.
hand outside the limits of mass excavation (see
diagram 504/01), disposing of excavated material as 504.05.03 Cast in situ concrete for the
directed by the Engineer, and trimming the excavations. lining of open drains, or open
Where excavations are in hard material, extra over drains constructed in concrete
rates shall apply in respect of excavating in hard (concrete class and type of
material but not in respect of overbreak, the cost of
drain stated. Class U2
which shall be included in the rates for item 504.03. 3
surface finish) cubic metre (m )
Item Unit
Measurement and payment shall be as specified in
504.04 Channels (type design): section 704, but payment shall include compensation
for painting the open joint surfaces as specified.
504.04.01 (Description of the channel
with reference to the Drawings. 504.05.04 Formwork for cast in situ
State the class of concrete) metre (m) concrete (class F2 surface
finish):
504.04.02 Etc in respect of other types.
504.05.04.01 To vertical sides of open
The unit of measurement shall be the metre of channel drains (formwork on
which shall exclude the inlet, outlet and transition internal face only)
2
square metre (m )
sections.
504.05.04.02 To sloping sides of open
The tendered rates shall include full compensation for drains (formwork on
procuring, furnishing and installing the channel 2
internal face only) square metre (m )
complete in all respects, including excavation where
necessary by hand, trimming the excavations, and 504.05.04.03 To both internal and
disposing of excavated material as directed by the external faces of open
Engineer. Where excavations are made in hard drain sides (both sides
material, extra over rates shall apply in respect of 2
measured) square metre (m )
excavating in hard material, but not in respect of
2
overbreak, the cost of which shall be included in the 504.05.04.04 To ends of slabs square metre (m )
rates for item 504.04.
504.05.04.05 To inlet and outlet
Item Unit structures and non-
2
standard sections, etc square metre (m )
504.05 Construction of chutes,
side drains channels, inlet Measurement and payment shall be in accordance with
and outlet structures, the provisions of section 702. Formwork under
transition sections and item 504.05.04.02 shall be measured and paid for only
auxiliary structures (Measured when the slope of the side exceeds one vertical to two
by components): horizontal, and the tendered rate shall include the
weighing down or anchoring of formwork to prevent uplift.
3
504.05.01 Excavation cubic metre (m )
504.05.05 Joints in the concrete lining
The unit of measurement shall be the cubic metre of of open drains
material excavated in accordance with the authorized
dimensions of the open drain, plus, where applicable, 504.05.05.01 (Description of type with
an allowance for formwork to the outside of side walls. reference to the Drawings) metre (m)

The tendered rate shall be in full compensation for The unit of measurement shall be the metre of
excavating the open drains, compacting and trimming completed joint of each size and type measured along
the excavations, for disposing of excavated material as the upper surface of the joint.
directed by the Engineer and, where applicable, for Measurement and payment shall be as specified under
backfilling behind side walls. Where excavation is made the appropriate pay items of section 706.
in hard material, extra over payment shall apply in
respect of hard material but not in respect of overbreak, 504.05.06 Welded steel fabric
the cost of which shall be included in the rates for
item 504.05. 504.05.06.01 (Nominal longitudinal and
cros pitch and nominal
For side drains for road or railway work, the mass diameter of longitudinal
excavations shall be measured and paid for under mass and cross wires indicated) kilogram (kg)
earthworks, and only the remainder of the excavations
504-4
Item Unit Item Applicable section
504.05.06.02 Etc for other pitches and (a) Overhaul on selected material 103
diameters
(b) Excess overburden at borrow
Measurement and payment for welded steel fabric shall pits provided by the Employer 201
be made as specified in section 703.
(c) Temporary stockpiling of excavated
504.05.07 Mild steel material 201
504.05.07.01 Bars with an 8 mm dia ton (t) (d) Erosion protection (other than the
504.05.07.02 Etc for other diameters concrete lining of open drains for
which provision has been made
504.05.08 High yield-stress steel for payment in this section 505
504.05.08.01 Bars with an 8 mm dia ton (t)
504.05.08.02 Etc for other diameters
504.05.09 Etc for other types of steel.

Measurement and payment for steel reinforcement shall

be in accordance with the provisions of section 703.
Item Unit
504.06 Polyethylene sheeting
(0,150 mm thick) for
concrete-lined open
2
drains square metre (m )
The unit of measurement shall be the square metre of
area covered with polyethylene sheeting.
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for
supplying and installing the sheeting and for wastage
and overlap.

Item Unit
504.07 Excavation in hard material
(Extra over items 504.01,
504.02, 504.03, 504.04
3
and 504.05) cubic metre (m )
The unit of measurement shall be the cubic metre of
hard material excavated in accordance with the
authorized dimensions.
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for
the additional costs of excavating in hard material.

Item Unit
504.08 Hand excavations
(Extra over subitem
504.05.01) cubic metre (m3)
The unit of measurement shall be the cubic metre of
material excavated in side drains or channels by means
of hand tools and classified as hand excavation by the
Engineer in accordance with the provisions of
subclause 03.03 of this section.
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for
the additional costs of excavating by hand tools, as
against conventional excavating equipment.

Note:
The following items of work, when specified, shall be
carried out, measured and paid for in accordance with
the relevant sections of the Specifications, but shall be
listed under this section of the Schedule of Quantities.

504-5
SERIES 5 : DRAINAGE AND EROSION All stone intended for use on any particular
PROTECTION pitching job shall be subject to the prior approval
of the Engineer.
SECTION 505 : EROSION PROTECTION
Table 505/1
CONTENTS Stone size according to
largest dimension of the
01 SCOPE stone
02 DEFINITIONS
03 MATERIALS Depth of cage Minimum Maximum
04 CONSTRUCTION OF GABION CAGES (m) (mm) (mm)
05 CONSTRUCTION OF GABIONS 0,2 75* 125
06 STONE PITCHING
07 RIPRAP 95**
08 MASONRY WALLS 0,3 100 200
09 CONCRETE BLOCK PITCHING
0,5 100 250
10 CAST IN SITU CONCRETE PITCHING
11 TOLERANCES 1.0 100 250
12 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
* With a 60 x 80 mm mesh
01 SCOPE ** With an 80 x 100 mm mesh
This section covers the construction of gabions, (c) Stone for riprap
masonry walls and various protective coverings for the
protection of earthworks and open drains against Stone for riprap shall be hard field or quarry stone
erosion by stormwater. not susceptible to disintegration or excessive
weathering upon being exposed to the
02 DEFINITIONS atmosphere or water. It shall be free from soft
material such as sand, clay, shale or organic
For the purpose of this section in particular and these material and shall not contain an excessive
Specifications in general, the following words shall have number of elongated stones.
the meanings hereby assigned to them.
The required size of the stones will be determined
(a) Gabion by the "critical mass" specified. At least 50% by
A flexible, wire-mesh cage packed with rock and in mass of the material comprising the riprap shall
the form of a box or a mattress, depending on its consist of stones with a mass exceeding the
dimensions. critical mass, and not more than 10% by mass of
the material shall consist of stone with a mass of
(b) Pitching less than 10% of the critical mass or more than
5 times the critical mass.
A covering of stone, concrete or concrete blocks
placed on a prepared surface to protect it against (d) Stone for masonry walls
erosion. The surface may be horizontal or sloping.
The minimum mass of each stone shall be 10 kg
(c) Riprap and the minimum dimension 75 mm.
One or more layers of large rock dumped or 03.02 Cement
packed on embankment slopes and toes, river and
Cement shall be ordinary cement which complies with
stream beds and other localities where such
the requirements of SANS 50197-1.
protection is required.
03.03 Sand
(d) Masonry walls
Sand for the cement mortar shall comply with the
Walls constructed of natural stone with or without
requirements of SANS 1083.
cement mortar having been used.
Sand for concrete block pitching shall comply with the
03 MATERIALS requirements of concrete sand and shall not contain
more than 3% silt and clay by mass.
03.01 Stone
03.04 Precast concrete blocks
(a) Stone for gabions
Interlocking concrete blocks shall be factory-produced
Stone used as filling for cages shall be clean, precast concrete blocks manufactured from concrete
hard, unweathered boulders or rock fragments. No with a 28-day compressive strength of not less than
rock particles shall exceed the maximum size 30 MPa. The design shall be subject to the Engineer's
given below, and at least 85% of the stones shall approval and shall ensure a sound interlock between
have a size equal to or exceeding the minimum adjacent blocks. The thickness shall be as indicated on
size given in table 505/1. the Drawings and the blocks shall be manufactured to a
(b) Stone for pitching tolerance of plus or minus 3 mm in any dimension.

Stone for pitching shall be sound, tough and Square precast concrete blocks shall, unless otherwise
durable, with no stones with a minimum dimension specified, be of size 450 mm x 450 mm x 50 mm and
of less than 200 mm, apart from smaller pieces or shall be manufactured from class 30/19 concrete. The
spalls which may be used for filling the spaces appearance requirements shall be as specified in
between the larger stones. Rocks or stones shall clause 3.3 of SANS 927.
be of a shape which will form a stable protection Concrete grass-blocks shall consist of concrete slabs
structure of the required thickness. Rounded with the dimensions shown on the Drawings, with
boulders or cobbles shall not be used on slopes openings through the slab totaling at least 20% of the
steeper than 2:1 unless grouted. surface area.

505-1
Other types of concrete blocks as well as prefabricated Other combinations of mesh size and wire
concrete block mats may be specified in the Project diameter may be used when so specified in the
Specifications. Project Specifications.
03.05 Concrete Binding and connecting wire for the construction
of the gabion cages shall be 2,0 mm in diameter.
Concrete work shall be carried out in accordance with
the provisions of sections 702, 703 and 704. (c) Gabions made with PVC-coated wire
03.06 Permeable material for filter backing When gabions made from PVC-coated wire are
specified, the wire used for the gabion mesh and
Permeable material for filter backing shall comply with for wiring the gabions during construction shall be
the requirements specified in subclause 02.02 of a galvanized wire as specified in (b) above onto
section 501 for permeable material for subsurface which a polyvinyl-chloride (PVC) coating has been
drains. extruded. The average thickness of the PVC
03.07 Synthetic-fibre filter fabric (geotextiles) coating shall be, as specified, either 0,30 mm for
use in mildly corrosive conditions, or 0,55 mm for
Synthetic-fibre filter fabric shall be of the grade and type use in severely corrosive or abrasive conditions.
specified in the Schedule of Quantities or the Project The minimum thicknesses of the coatings shall be
Specifications. 0,25 mm and 0,4 mm respectively.
03.08 Wire The PVC-coated gabions shall be subject to the
approval of the Engineer.
All wire used shall be mild steel wire, complying with
SANS 675 and shall be Class A zinc coated in 03.09 Ant poison and vegetation destroyer
accordance with SANS 935.
Where the use of an ant poison and/or a vegetation
(a) Wire for wired pitching destroyer is called for, full details of such products,
Wire for wired pitching shall be 4,0 mm in including the type, the rate of application, the method of
diameter. application, etc, will be specified in the Project
Specifications. The work may only be carried out by a
(b) Wire for gabions firm experienced in such work (and duly licensed, if so
required by law) and approved by the Engineer.
The wire used in the fabrication of the gabions
shall have a minimum mass of zinc coating in
accordance with table 505/2 below: 04 CONSTRUCTION OF GABION CAGES

Table 505/2 04.01 General

Nominal diameter Mass of coating (g/m 2 Gabion cages shall be fabricated from wire mesh with
of coated wire surface area) the size and selvedge and of the type as specified
(mm) below. The cages shall be subdivided into cells by wire-
mesh diaphragms and shall be of two types:
below 2,2 245
(i) Boxes which are generally used for the
2,2 -2,9 260 construction of gabion walls. They are subdivided
3,0 -3,6 275 into cells by diaphragms spaced at 1,0 m intervals.

3,7 -4,0 290 (ii) Mattresses which are generally only used as
single- layer aprons in revetments, channel linings,
etc, the maximum width of which shall be 2,0 m
The wire mesh shall be hexagonally woven mesh
and the maximum depth 0,5 m. Mattresses shall
the joints of which are formed by each pair of
be subdivided by diaphragms into cells with a
wires being twisted through three half-turns. The
width of 600 mm or 1,0 m, as specified in the
twisted joints shall be of a tightness to require a
Project Specifications.
force of not less than 1,7 kN for pulling one wire
to separate it from the other wire, provided that The standard sizes of boxes and mattresses shall be as
each wire is prevented from being turned and the follows:
applied forces and the wire are all kept in the
same plane. • Boxes
Length: 1 m, 2 m, 3 m and 4 m
The diameter of the wire and the size of mesh
used shall be in accordance with table 505/3 Width: 1m
below: Depth: 0,3 m, 0,5 m and 1,0 m
Table 505/3 Diaphragm spacing: 1,0 m.
Wire • Mattresses
Depth of Mesh size
diameter
gabion (mm) Length: 6m
(mm)
0,2 m - 0,3 m 60 x 80 2,0 Width: 2m
80 x 100 2,2 Depth: 0,2 m, 0,3 m and 0,5 m
80 x 100 2,6 Diaphragm spacing: 600 mm or 1,0 m, as
0,5 m and specified.
100 x 100 2,7
over Other gabions may be supplied, provided that the prior
permission of the Engineer has been obtained.
The shorter dimensions of the mesh shall be
taken from centre to centre of the twisted joints
and the larger dimensions shall lie between the
inside ends of the twisted joints.

505-2
04.02 Selvedges (b) Mattresses used for revetments and aprons
The filling of the 0,3 m and 0,5 m gabions for the
The cut edges of all mesh used in the construction of
forming of aprons and revetments shall be carried
gabions, except the bottom edges of diaphragms and
out by random stones being spread on the first
end panels, shall be selvedged with wire with a
layer and selected stones being used for the top
diameter of at least 0,5 mm greater than that of the
layer so as to present a dry-stone-pitched surface.
mesh wire.
Where the selvedge has not been woven integrally with 06 STONE PITCHING
the mesh but has to be fastened to the cut ends of the
06.01 Plain stone pitching
mesh, it shall be attached by the cut ends of the mesh
being bound to the selvedge so as to require a force of The area shall be prepared by excavating, shaping and
not less than 8, kN, applied in the same plane as the trimming to accommodate the stonework and shall be
mesh at a point on the selvedge of a mesh sample 1 m thoroughly compacted by hand-ramming to minimize
long, to separate it from the mesh. subsequent settlement. A trench shall be excavated, as
directed by the Engineer, along the toe of a slope to be
04.03 Diaphragms and end panels
pitched or along the unprotected edge of the pitching in
The diaphragms and end panels shall be selvedged at the beds of streams. Two methods for the laying of
the top and on the vertical sides only. stone are set out below, and the method to be adopted
shall be decided on by the Engineer.
The end panels shall be attached by the cut ends of the
mesh wires being twisted to the selvedge at the bottom Method 1
of the panel at the base of the gabions. Similarly, the
diaphragms shall be attached by the cut ends of the The laying of the stones shall be commenced at the
mesh being twisted to the twisted joints of the mesh at bottom of the trench, where they shall be firmly bedded
the base of the gabion. In each case the force required into the slope and against adjoining stones. They shall
to separate the panels from the base should be not less be laid with their longitudinal axes at right angles to the
than that required to break the mesh over the same slope and with their surfaces in contact with each other
length. so as to stagger the joints. The stones shall be rammed
well into the bank or surface to be protected and the
05 CONSTRUCTION OF GABIONS spaces between the larger stones shall be filled with
fragments of approved pitching stone securely rammed
05.01 Preparation of the foundation and surface into place. Placing of rock by dumping will not be
allowed.
The surface on which the gabion cages are to be laid
prior to filling shall be levelled to a depth as shown on Method 2
the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer so as to
present an even surface. If necessary, cavities between The technique and requirements laid down in method 1
rock protrusions shall be filled with material similar to shall apply to method 2, except for the following
that specified in subclause 03.01 (a) of this section. aspects:
Where required, a foundation trench along the toe of (i) No small stones or spalls shall be used to fill in
the revetment or wall shall be excavated to the spaces between larger stones.
dimensions shown on the Drawings or as indicated by
the Engineer. (ii) Simultaneously with the placing of stones, topsoil
shall be introduced between individual stones,
05.02 Assembly which shall be adequately rammed so as to
The methods of erection, stretching, aligning, wiring and provide a firm bonded construction. The topsoil
filling the gabions shall generally be in accordance with shall be applied to the full depth of the stone
the manufacturer's instructions as approved by the pitching at any point.
Engineer, but nevertheless a sufficient number of (iii) Rooted grass, grass tufts or ground covers of the
connecting wire braces shall be provided and tensioned types specified in the Project Specifications shall
between the vertical sides of each of the outer visible then be planted in the topsoil between the stones
cells to prevent the deformation of the boxes as they and be given copious initial watering. Watering
are being filled with stone. shall then be carried out at regular intervals until
It is essential for the corners of gabion cages to be the plants have been established. The planting
securely wired together to provide a uniform surface and maintenance of grass and ground covers and
and to make sure that the structure will not appear as a establishing an acceptable cover shall be carried
series of blocks or panels. Consecutive courses of out in accordance with section 104.
boxes should preferably be "bonded" as in brickwork in Whichever of the above two methods is adopted, the
order to avoid vertical joints coinciding. finished surface of the pitching shall present an even,
05.03 Rockfilling tight and neat appearance. The thickness of the
pitching, measured at right angles to the surface, shall
(a) Boxes in retaining walls not be less than 200 mm.
Particular care shall be exercised during the filling 06.02 Grouted stone pitching
of the visible faces of gabion boxes, for which only
selected stone of adequate size shall be used, This work shall be done in accordance with all the
which shall be so prepacked as to obtain a fair- requirements specified for plain pitching in
faced finish. Boxes shall be filled in stages to subclause 06.01 above, except that the spaces
prevent deformation and bulging. Boxes shall be between the stones shall be filled with cement mortar
filled to just below the level of the wire braces, composed of one part of cement to three parts of sand.
after which the braces shall be twisted to provide Before the mortar is applied, the surfaces of the stones
tension. Care shall be taken to ensure that shall be thoroughly cleaned of adhering dirt and clay
consecutive layers of cages which are filled, are and then moistened. The mortar shall be placed in a
filled evenly to a level surface ready to receive the continuous operation for any one day's run at any one
next course. location.

505-3
The mortar shall be worked into the pitching so as to 07.03 Packed riprap
ensure that all spaces or voids between the stones are
completely filled with mortar to the depth of the stone Packed riprap shall be constructed from rocks
pitching. individually placed with staggered joints, and shall be
firmly bedded on the prepared surface. The spaces
After the grout has been placed, the stones shall be between larger stones shall be filled with spalls, and
thoroughly brushed so as to expose their top surfaces. smaller stones shall be securely rammed into place. On
The grouted pitching shall be cured with wet sacking or inclined surfaces the rock shall be laid in long horizontal
some other approved wet cover for a period of not less lengths starting from the bottom, and not in strips up the
than four days after grouting and shall not be subjected slope.
to loading until adequate strength has developed.
Where required, weep holes shall be formed in the The completed riprap shall present an even, tight
pitching. surface.

06.03 Wired and grouted stone pitching 07.04 Dumped riprap

The pitching shall be held in position below and above Dumped riprap shall be constructed by stone being
with wire nets with a 150 mm square mesh. The lower dumped onto the prepared surfaces and spread by
net, with wire ties fastened to it at 600 mm centres bulldozers or other suitable earth-moving equipment
which project outwards, shall first be placed over the and trimmed to the required lines and levels. The
surface to be pitched. The stone shall then be laid onto material shall be placed so as to prevent the
this net in accordance with the requirements specified segregation of the smaller and larger stone, and the
for plain stone pitching in subclause 06.01 above. After final layer shall be tight with a minimum of voids.
the stone has been laid, the upper wire net shall be
drawn tightly over the stone course and securely tied 08 MASONRY WALLS
down by the wire ties being passed from the lower net
through the pitching. After tying, these ties shall be 08.01 General
turned down into the pitching. The whole area of wired Masonry walls may be plain with dry joints or may be
pitching shall then be grouted and finished off with constructed with stones set in cement mortar, as
cement mortar in accordance with all the requirements indicated on the Drawings or as ordered.
specified for grouted pitching in subclause 06.02 above.
Where required, weep holes shall be formed in the 08.02 Plain masonry walls
pitching.
A foundation trench shall be excavated down to the rock
07 RIPRAP or to material with an adequate bearing capacity, and
the minimum depth shall be 300 mm below ground
07.01 General level. Selected large stones shall be used in the
foundation layer. Flat and stratified stones shall be laid
Two types of riprap are specified, one type where the with their flat surfaces in the horizontal plane. Stones
rocks are individually packed, which is designated as shall be individually placed with staggered joints and to
packed riprap, and another type where the stone is leave a minimum of voids, and shall be firmly bedded
dumped and then spread by machines, which is against adjoining stones. The spaces between the
designated as dumped riprap. larger stones shall be filled with spalls securely rammed
The surfaces of the areas to receive riprap shall be into place. The larger stones shall not bear on the
neatly trimmed to line and level and all loose material spalls used for filling the voids. The top and ends of the
shall be compacted. The perimeters of riprap shall be wall shall be neatly finished with selected coping
protected by the construction of either rock-filled stones.
trenches, walls or other structures, as may be required. The wall surface shall present an even, tight
Perimeter trenches shall normally be backfilled with appearance.
rock of the same size and quality as that which has
been used in the construction of the adjoining riprap, 08.03 Cement-mortared masonry walls
but any cavities shall be filled with smaller material, and
the entire backfill shall be well consolidated. The walling shall be constructed as specified in
subclause 08.02 above, except that the stones shall be
07.02 Filter backing wetted and set in a 3:1 sand: cement mortar. Exposed
stones on the wall faces shall be cleaned of mortar by
Filter backing shall consist of a layer or layers of washing or wire-brushing. The mortar shall be flush
permeable material placed on the prepared surface to pointed to the approval of the Engineer, who may
the required thickness and finished to an even surface require a capping and end treatment in the same
and thickness after the placement of each layer. mortar.
Compaction of pervious material will not be required.
Care shall be taken not to mix various grades of filter Weep holes shall be provided as ordered and shall be
material nor to disturb material already placed when cleaned of mortar and any other clogging material that
subsequent layers or riprap are constructed. may have entered during construction.

When the use of synthetic-fibre filter fabric is required, The walling shall be protected from the elements and
the material shall be placed on the prepared surface or shall be kept moist for a minimum period of four days
on the filter backing, as may be required. The overlap after completion.
between adjacent sheets shall be 150 mm, unless
otherwise specified. Care shall be taken not to damage
the filter fabric when subsequent layers are placed, nor
to expose the filter fabric to the sun for periods in
excess of one day before it is covered up.

505-4
09 CONCRETE BLOCK PITCHING Where indicated, the concrete pitching shall be
contained by concrete edge beams being constructed
09.01 General as described in subclause 09.02 for the interlocking
All loose material on areas where concrete block type of concrete blocks.
pitching is to be constructed shall be compacted by The concrete pitching shall be cured for at least seven
hand or by mechanical means to at least 90% of days.
modified AASHTO density, and the surface shall be
trimmed to ensure that the surface of the pitching will If specified, joints shall be sealed in accordance with
conform to the required lines, levels and grades. section 706.
For the purpose of this section, concrete block pitching 11 TOLERANCES
shall not be regarded as paving for pedestrian and
vehicular traffic as specified in section 609. The permissible tolerance limits shall be as follows:

09.02 Interlocklng-type of concrete blocks (a) Wire : diameter ± 2,5%

A layer of sand of 25 mm compacted thickness shall (b) Gabion cages assembled on the Site:
first be spread and levelled, where necessary, on the
surfaces to be paved. When required, the prepared • Length ± 3,0%
surfaces shall be treated with a vegetation destroyer • Width ± 3,0% with a
and/or an ant poison of the type specified in the Project maximum of 25mm
Specifications. The concrete blocks shall then be laid
hard up against each other with each block interlocking • Depth ± 3,0%
with the previously laid blocks. Joints shall be filled with
sand which is brushed in. (c) Gabions in position:
• Finished level ± 50 mm
At edges special edge blocks shall be placed, or the
edges shall be finished by means of concrete edge • Permissible vertical and
beams to the dimensions shown on the Drawings. horizontal deviation from a
Concrete shall be class 1:3:6/19 concrete. Earth cuts, if line joining two points
suitable, may be used as forms for the vertical surfaces 30 metres apart ± 100 mm
of edge beams. Where formed vertical faces are used,
they shall be of a class F2 finish. The upper surface • Deviation from a specified
shall be of a class U2 surface finish. position in the plan ±150 mm

The finished surface of the pitching shall present an (d) Stone pitching:
even and neat appearance with no concrete blocks No stones shall vary by more than 25 mm from the
projecting above the surface. specified surface grades or lines.
09.03 Concrete grass-blocks (e) Masonry walls:
Concrete grass-blocks of the size specified or shown on As for gabions in position (see above).
the Drawings shall be placed on areas prepared for
grassing as specified in section 104. The holes in the (f) Concrete block pitching:
blocks shall be filled with topsoil and be grassed by
The finished surface shall not vary by more than
grass cuttings or hydroseeding, as specified in
15 mm from the specified surface lines and
section 104.
grades.
09.04 Precast concrete blocks (g) Cast in situ concrete pitching:
The areas shall be prepared as specified for the When tested with a 3,0 metre straight-edge no
interlocking type of concrete blocks, and shall include a surface irregularities of more than 10 mm shall be
sand bed of 25 mm compacted thickness. revealed.
The concrete blocks shall then be placed on the
prepared areas. Where required, the joints shall be 12 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
grouted with a 3:1 sand: cement mortar. Item Unit

10 CAST IN SITU CONCRETE PITCHING 505.01 Foundation trench excavation

and backfilling
The areas where cast in situ concrete pitching is to be
constructed shall be compacted, trimmed and prepared 505.01.01 In solid rock (material
as described in clause 09 for concrete block pitching. which requires blasting) cubic metre (m3)
The areas shall also be treated with vegetation
505.01.02 In all other classes of
destroyer and/or ant poison if required. 3
material cubic metre (m )
Prior to the placing of the concrete, the surface shall be
covered with polythene sheeting, or it shall be watered The unit of measurement shall be the cubic metre of
and kept damp until the concrete is placed. The type of each class of excavation made in accordance with the
concrete used shall, unless otherwise specified, be authorized dimensions for gabions, edge beams and
class 20/19 and it shall be accurately laid in alternate foundation trenches.
panels to the lines and levels indicated. Accurate
guides shall be set to achieve the required line and
slope. The concrete shall be thoroughly compacted and
finished to a class U2 surface finish.

505-5
The tendered rates shall include full compensation for Item Unit
excavating in each class of material, including full
compensation for unavoidable overbreak, for trimming 505.06 Stone pitching
trenches and compacting trench inverts, for backfilling 505.06.01 Plain pitching:
and consolidating backfill, and for the disposal of
2
surplus excavated material. Overhaul will be paid for 505.06.01.01 Method 1 square metre (m )
where dumping sites have been provided by the
Employer and where they are situated outside the free- 505.06.01.02 Method 2 square metre (m2)
haul boundaries. 505.06.02 Grouted pitching square metre (m2)
Item Unit 505.06.03 Wired-and-grouted
2
505.02 Surface preparation pitching square metre (m )
for the bedding of The unit of measurement for pitching shall be the
gabions square metre (m2) square metre of each type of pitching in place.
The unit of measurement for the levelling and The tendered rates for each type of stone pitching shall
preparation of areas to receive gabions shall be the include full compensation for the supplying of all
square metre to the neat dimensions of wall materials, excavations, excluding trench and bulk
foundations, revetments or aprons. excavations, the compaction and trimming of excavated
areas, the forming and cleaning of weep holes, the
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for placing of stones, grouting or wiring and grouting where
excavating and filling cavities with rock, and for levelling applicable, grassing and watering (in respect of
and compacting the ground surface so as to be ready method 2) and for all other work necessary for
for receiving the gabion cages for retaining walls, completing the pitching as specified.
aprons and revetments.
Excavations for foundation trenches and edge beams
Item Unit and the construction of edge beams shall be paid for
separately.
505.03 Gabions
505.03.01 Gabion boxes (Size of Item Unit
box and mesh 505.07 Riprap
indicated) cubic metre (m 3)
505.07.01 Packed riprap (Critical
The unit of measurement shall be the cubic metre of the mass of stone
rock-filled cages, and the quantity shall be calculated 3
indicated) cubic metre (m )
from the dimensions of the gabions indicated on the
Drawings or ordered by the Engineer, irrespective of 505.07.02 Dumped riprap (Critical
any deformation or bulging of gabions as constructed. mass of stone
The tendered rates shall include full compensation for indicated) cubic metre (m3)
the supply of all materials, including rock fill, wire mesh 505.07.03 Filter backing (sub-
cages, tying and connecting wire, for loading,
clauses 02.02 of section 501
transporting and off-loading, for the assembly and filling
of the cages and for any other work necessary for the and 07.02 of this section)
construction of the gabions. which consists of -
3
505.07.03.01 Crushed stone cubic metre (m )
Item Unit
505.07.03.02 Filter sand obtained from
505.04 Extra over item 505.03 for
borrow sources cubic metre (m3)
supplying gabions with PVC-
coated wire (Thickness of The unit of measurement for riprap and filter backing
PVC coating stated) cubic metre (m 3) shall be the cubic metre of riprap or filter backing in
place, including rock in trench backfill.
The tendered rate shall be in full compensation for the
additional costs over and above the rate tendered for Filter fabric will be measured and paid for under
the relevant item, for supplying PVC-coated gabions item 505.05.
and tying wire.
The tendered rates for subitems 505.07.01, 505.07.02
Item Unit and 505.07.03 shall include full compensation for the
preparation of surfaces, including excavation but
505.05 Filter fabric for gabions excluding excavation for trenches and bulk excavations,
and riprap (Type, class and for furnishing, transporting, handling and placing
and grade stated) square metre (m2) the riprap or filter backing. Collectively the rates shall
also include full compensation for all other incidentals
The unit of measurement shall be the square metre which are necessary for completing the work as
area covered with filter fabric placed in position, specified.
including overlaps.
Item Unit
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for
the supply of the filter fabric, for cutting, waste, placing, 505.08 Masonry walls
joining, overlapping and fastening the material in
position. 505.08.01 Plain cubic metre (m3)
505.08.02 Cement-mortared cubic metre (m3)
The unit of measurement for masonry walls shall be the
cubic metre of actual walling constructed and accepted.

505-6
The tendered rate for each type shall include full Note:
compensation for the supplying of all materials, the
trimming of areas, the placing of stones, cement- The following item of work, when specified, shall be
mortared where necessary, and for all other work carried out, measured and paid for in accordance with
necessary for completing the walls as specified. The the relevant sections of the Specifications, but shall be
excavation of foundation trenches shall be paid for listed under this section of the Schedule of Quantities.
separately. Item Applicable section
Item Unit
(a) Overhaul on surplus excavated material 103
505.09 Concrete pitching
505.09.01 Cast in situ concrete
pitching (Class of concrete
and thickness of pitching
indicated) square metre (m 2)
505.09.02 Interlocking precast
concrete block pitching
(Type and thickness
indicated) square metre (m 2)
505.09.03 Precast concrete grass
blocks square metre (m 2)
505.09.04 Precast concrete blocks
(Thickness indicated) square metre (m 2)
The unit of measurement shall be the square metre of
each type constructed.
The tendered rates shall include full compensation for
the supplying of all materials and for excavation, but
shall exclude bulk excavation, and for excavation for
foundation trenches and edge beams, the compaction
and trimming of all excavated areas, the provision of a
sand bedding (subitems 505.09.02 and 505.09.04),
topsoiling and grassing (subitem 505.09.03), the
construction of concrete pitching, including minor
formwork and the forming of surfaces
(subitem 505.09.01), the forming and cleaning of weep
holes (subitem 505.09.01), and for all other work
necessary for completing the work as specified.

Item Unit
505.10 Concrete in edge beams and
foundation trenches (Class
3
of concrete indicated) cubic metre (m )
The unit of measurement shall be the cubic metre of
concrete in edge beams and foundation trenches
constructed as instructed.
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for
supplying all materials and labour, including formwork
as necessary, for placing concrete, and for forming all
surfaces.
Item Unit
505.11 Provision and application of -
505.11.01 Ant poison (State type and rate
of application) P C sum
505.11.02 Add the Contractor's charges
onto the P C sum per cent (%)
505.11.03 Vegetation destroyer (State
type and rate of application) P C sum
505.11.04 Add the Contractor's charges
onto the P C sum per cent (%)
Payment under the prime cost sum for the provision and
application of ant poison and/or vegetation destroyer by
an approved subcontractor, who shall be licensed to
carry out such work (if so required by law), as well as
the Contractor's charges thereon, shall be made in
accordance with the provisions of the General
Conditions of Contract.
505-7
SERIES 6 : ROADS AND PARKING AREAS 03.02 Compaction requirements

SECTION 601 : GRAVEL PAVEMENT LAYERS An indication of the minimum in situ dry density of gravel
material is given below for the respective layers and is
expressed as a percentage of modified AASHTO
CONTENTS
density.

01 SCOPE • Subgrade: G9 material 90%

02 DEFINITIONS G8 material 90%
03 MATERIALS
G7 material 93%
04 CONSTRUCTION
05 CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES G6 material 93%
06 TESTING
• Subbase: G6 material 95%
07 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
G5 material 95%
01 SCOPE • Base: G4 material 98%
This section covers the construction of subgrade and The G classification used above is that of TRH 14.
subbase layers using unstabilized or stabilized selected
gravel material and the construction of base layers using The materials to be used in the various layers and
only unstabilized material. its/their compaction, will be specified in the Project
Specifications.
This section does not, however, include the construction
of shoulders and gravel wearing courses, which are 03.03 Soluble salinity
dealt with under section 603.
When specified in the Project Specifications, the soluble
salinity of base material shall be subject to the
02 DEFINITIONS requirements of subclause 02.02 of section 602.
For the purpose of this section in particular and these
Specifications in general, the following words and 04 CONSTRUCTION
expressions shall have the meanings hereby assigned to
them, except where the context otherwise requires: 04.01 Removal of in situ material

(a) Subgrade In situ material falling within the specified levels of the
subbase and base layers shall, whether or not the
The layer or layers of gravel material of specified material is suitable for the construction of the subbase
dimensions on top of the fill or embankment and and base layers, be removed unless otherwise
below the subbase. The material may include instructed by the Engineer. Such material removed shall
construction-bed material compacted in situ. be measured and paid for under the relevant pay items
(Construction bed is defined in section 203.) of section 203.
(b) Subbase Should the material thus exposed not conform to the
requirements for the subgrade, it shall be excavated and
The layer of material of specified dimensions on replaced with suitable material or be stabilized as
top of the subgrade and below the base and, where ordered by the Engineer. However, if the material is
applicable, below the shoulders. classified as suitable for use in situ, save that it fails to
(c) Base meet the requirements for density, it shall be scarified to
the full depth of the subgrade layer and watered and
A layer of material of specified dimensions recompacted to the specified percentage of modified
constructed on top of the subbase or, in the AASHTO density.
absence thereof, on top of the subgrade.
Material in the construction bed below the subgrade
03 MATERIALS level shall be dealt with as specified in clause 09 of
section 203.
03.01 General
04.02 Placing and compaction
Gravel material to be used in subgrade, subbase and
base layers shall be obtained from borrow pits provided The various pavement layers shall only be constructed
by the Employer, from excavations, cuttings or from on condition that the underlying layers conform to the
sources provided by the Contractor. requirements specified for the layer concerned.
Immediately before placement of the material, the
In respect of borrow material obtained from sources underlying surface shall be checked by the Contractor
provided by the Contractor, the provisions of for any damage or deficiencies, which shall be made
clause 05(f) of section 201 are applicable. good as directed by the Engineer.
The Engineer must approve all sources of supply and The material shall be placed, spread, broken down and
shall have the authority to direct from which sources all compacted all in accordance with the requirements of
materials are to be obtained. The approval of a specific clause 06 of section 203 except that wherever the word
source of supply will not imply that all material from such "fill" is used, it shall be taken to read as "pavement" or
a source is suitable for use, but it means that suitable "pavement layer", as may be required by the context.
material is available for selection from that source.
Coarse gravel containing non-plastic or slightly plastic
The gravel material for pavement layers shall, unless soil fines and used in the construction of the gravel base
otherwise specified in the Project Specifications, will usually require slushing and rolling in addition to the
conform to the requirements of TRH 14. compaction specified in clause 06 of section 203 in
order to obtain a firm, well-knit surface.
The subgrade layer as defined in clause 02 above is
referred to in TRH 14 as the selected layer.

601-1
If so directed by the Engineer, the base shall, after having 05.02 Width
been processed and compacted as specified above, be
watered well, in short sections at a time, slushed and rolled The average width of the layer shall be at least equal to
with compactors and/or heavy flat-wheel rollers with a that shown on the Drawings and the outer edge of the
mass of not less than 10 t each. Watering and rolling shall layer shall not at any place be less than the lines shown
continue over a section until all excess fines have been on the Drawings. (Where kerbing has been installed, the
brought to the surface of the layer. base shall be contained within the kerbs.)

Such excess fines shall be uniformly distributed over the 05.03 Thickness
surface of the layer by means of stiff brooms, and The thickness tolerances referred to in subclause 05.02
watering, rolling and brooming shall continue until all of section 902 shall be as follows:
areas deficient in fines have been suitably corrected. All
excess fines shall be finally removed from the surface of
the layer. Subgrade Subbase Base
04.03 Crushing and screening
D90 30 mm 27 mm 27 mm
Where the material intended for use in the pavement
layers cannot be suitably broken down by the methods Dmax 40 mm 35 mm 35 mm
described in subclause 06.03 of section 203, or requires
modification by screening out certain fractions, the Daverage 10 mm 5 mm 5 mm
Engineer may direct that the material be crushed or
screened, or crushed and screened.
For single-stage crushing the material shall be passed 05.04 Cross-section (for roads)
through a single-stage crusher capable of breaking
down oversize material to the maximum size specified At any transverse section of the subbase and base
for the layer concerned. layers, the difference in level between any two points
shall not vary by more than 20 mm from their difference
For crushing and screening the material shall be passed in level as computed from the cross-sections shown on
through a multiple-stage crusher and shall be screened so the Drawings.
that, after the crushing and screening, the material will
conform to the grading specified for the layer concerned. When the base layer is tested with a 3 m straight-edge
laid at right angles to the road centre line, the surface
For screening only the material shall be screened through shall not deviate from the bottom of the straight-edge by
one or more screens, the smallest of which shall be the more than 10 mm.
6,7 mm screen, so that the material shall be separated at
this size, and any specified proportion of the minus
05.05 Grade (for roads)
6,7 mm material shall be added back if required.
For the base layer, the deviation from the specified
04.04 Stabilization
longitudinal grade as a result of deviations from level
When specified on the Drawings or in the Project shall not exceed the following:
Specifications or ordered by the Engineer, the material
shall be stabilized by chemical stabilization or by Maximum variation
Length of grade
mechanical modification as specified in section 604. from specified grade
measured (m)
(%)
Where the addition of a natural binder is necessary in
order to reduce the plasticity index or to improve the 2 0,34
grading of gravel base material, the Engineer may direct 5 0,27
that the material be stabilized by mechanical
modification using a suitable binder, all as specified in 10 0,21
section 604.
20 0,13
04.05 Protection and maintenance 30 0,08
The Contractor shall protect and maintain the completed
layers at his own expense until the next layer or, in the
05.06 Surface regularity (for roads)
case of the base, the bituminous surface has been
constructed. Maintenance shall include the immediate When tested with a rolling straight-edge as described in
repair of any damage or defects that may occur to a clause 09 of section 903, the number of surface
layer and shall be repeated as often as is necessary to irregularities in the base layer shall not exceed the
keep the layer continuously intact. Repairs shall be done following:
in a manner that will ensure restoration to an even and
uniform surface. Traffic shall not be allowed on any
completed layer unless authorized by the Engineer. (a) The average number of irregularities per 4
100 m equal to or exceeding 6 mm when
05 CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES taken over 300 m - 600 m lengths shall
The work described in this section shall conform to the not exceed
tolerances given below.
(b) The number of irregularities equal to or 6
05.01 Level exceeding 6 mm when taken over 100 m
sections shall not exceed
The level tolerances referred to in subclause 05.01 of
section 902 shall be as follows: (c) The maximum value of any individual 10 mm
Subgrade Subbase Base irregularity measured with the rolling
H90 ±25 mm ±25 mm ±10 mm straight-edge or a 3 m straight-edge laid
parallel to the road centre line shall not
Hmax ±33 mm ±33 mm ±25 mm
exceed

601-2
06 TESTING The unit of measurement shall be the cubic metre of in
situ subgrade material prepared and compacted as
06.01 Process control
specified.
The minimum testing frequency that will be required
The tendered rates shall include full compensation for
from the Contractor in terms of clause 05 of section 901
for the purpose of process control is shown in scarifying, watering, mixing, shaping and compacting the
table 601/1. material as specified.

Table 601/1 Item Unit

601.02 Gravel layers constructed
Testing frequency
from material obtained from
Minimum borrow pits:
Position of One number of
Test
layer test tests per lot 601.02.01 Subgrade
every or section
of road 601.02.01.01 Compacted to 90% of
modified AASHTO
3
Materials density cubic metre (m )
Field density 2
All layers 1 500 m 4 601.02.01.02 Compacted to 93% of
and OMC*
modified AASHTO
2 3
Indicator tests All layers 2 500 m 4 density cubic metre (m )
Tolerances 601.02.01.03 Compacted to 95% of
20 m (1 test = 3 pts per modified AASHTO
Surface levels All layers density cubic metre (m3)
cross-section)**
Thickness All layers 30 601.02.02 Subbase
Width (for All layers 100 m 1 601.02.02.01 Compacted to 95% of
roads) modified AASHTO
Cross-sections Subbase density cubic metre (m3)
20 m -
(for roads) and base
601.02.02.02 Compacted to 97% of
Smoothness modified AASHTO
Base 40 m2
(for roads) density cubic metre (m3)

* The determination of field dry density expressed as a 601.02.03 Base

percentage of modified AASHTO density implies a 601.02.03.01 Compacted to 98% of
modified AASHTO density determination for each modified AASHTO
field density. Where material is homogeneous, this density
3
cubic metre (m )
ratio can be decreased to one modified AASHTO
density determination for up to four field densities. The unit of measurement shall be the cubic metre of
** For parking areas, 1 test equals a series of points, compacted gravel material, and the quantity shall be
5 m apart, in a straight line across the full width of calculated from the authorized dimensions of the various
the parking area, at every 20 m cross-section. layers.

06.02 Routine Inspection and testing The tendered rates shall include full compensation for
procuring, breaking down, placing and compacting the
Routine inspection and testing will be carried out by the material for the addition of up to 20% of soil binder if
Engineer in accordance with the provisions of clause 09 necessary in the case of the base layer, for transporting
of section 902, to test the quality of materials and the material, and for the removal and transportation of
workmanship for compliance with the requirements of up to 5% by volume of oversize material.
this section.
The tendered rates shall apply irrespective of the
Compliance with the density requirements specified in hardness or other properties of the material.
clause 03 of this section, shall be controlled in
accordance with the statistical judgment scheme Overhaul will apply only if the material is transported
specified in section 902. from the Employer's borrow pits or to his dumping sites
and which are situated outside the free-haul boundaries.
Any materials or workmanship which do not comply with
the specified requirements shall be removed and Item Unit
replaced with materials and workmanship which comply
with the specified requirements or, if the Engineer 601.03 Gravel layers constructed
permits, shall be repaired as specified in section 901 so from material obtained
that they will comply with the specified requirements from excavations:
after having been repaired.
601.03.01 Subgrade
07 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 601.03.01.01 Compacted to 90% of
Item Unit Modified AASHTO
3
density cubic metre (m )
601.01 Preparation and compaction of
in situ subgrade material to - 601.03.01.02 Compacted to 93% of
Modified AASHTO
601.01.01 90% of modified AASHTO density cubic metre (m3)
density cubic metre (m3)
601.03.01.03 Compacted to 95% of
601.01.02 93% of modified AASHTO Modified AASHTO
density cubic metre (m3) density cubic metre (m3)

601-3
601.03.02 Subbase Item Unit
601.03.02.01 Compacted to 95% of 601.06 Extra over Item 601.02
Modified AASHTO for borrow material
density cubic metre (m3) from sources to be
supplied by the
601.03.02.02 Compacted to 97% of
Contractor
Modified AASHTO
3
density cubic metre (m ) 614.02.01 (Layer and type of material
3
indicated) cubic metre (m )
601.03.03 Base
614.02.02 Etc for other layers and type
601.03.03.01 Compacted to 98% of 3
of material cubic metre (m )
Modified AASHTO
density cubic metre (m3) The extra over rate shall be in full compensation for
obtaining the material and transporting it to the point of
Measurement and payment shall be as described in the
use including for all activities at the borrow areas such
first and second paragraphs for item 601.02 above.
as removal and replacement of overburden, finishing off
Item Unit borrow areas and for the payment of royalties and other
charges.
601.04 Extra over item 601.03 for
obtaining material from Note:
601.04.01 Intermediate The following items of work, when specified, shall be
excavations cubic metre (m3) carried out, measured and paid for in accordance with
3 the appropriate sections of the Specifications, but shall
601.04.02 Hard excavations cubic metre (m )
be listed under this section in the Schedule of
The unit of measurement shall be the cubic metre of Quantities.
material obtained from intermediate or hard excavations
as specified in section 203 and measured in the final Item Applicable section
position after compaction. (a) Overhaul 103
The tendered rates shall be paid as extra over the rates
(b) Excess overburden at borrow areas 201
tendered for item 601.03, including the cost of additional
work, plant, tools, material, labour and supervision (c) Removal of oversize material 203
required for excavation of and breaking down the
material as specified in section 203. (d) Stockpiling 201

Item Unit (e) Stabilization 604

601.05 Crushing and screening Items (a), (b) and (c) shall not apply to material obtained
3 from sources provided by the Contractor.
601.05.01 Single-stage crushing cubic metre (m )
3
601.05.02 Screening cubic metre (m )
601.05.03 Crushing and
3
screening cubic metre (m )

The unit of measurement shall be the cubic metre of

material crushed or screened, or crushed and screened
and finally used in construction, measured in place after
compaction. No allowance shall be made for wastage
except in the case of screening only, where the quantity
measured as above for payment shall be increased by
including 70% of the loose volume, measured in
stockpile, of the material screened out and discarded.
The tendered rates shall include full compensation for
crushing or screening or crushing and screening the
material as applicable, including all labour, plant, fuel,
handling, processing, stockpiling if necessary, loading
for transportation to the point of final use, and for
disposing of any material screened out and discarded.

601-4
 -1
SERIES 6 : ROADS AND PARKING AREAS Where the pH 6,0 and the EC < 0,02 Sm
and the qualitative test shows that sulphates
SECTION 602 : CRUSHED-STONE PAVEMENT do not pose a problem, the material may be
LAYERS used. If not, the material shall be further
analysed by the Engineer. In accordance with
CONTENTS the Employer's instructions, and the
proposals for its use shall be submitted to the
01 SCOPE Employer for approval.
02 MATERIALS (b) The tests conducted for determining the above
03 REQUIREMENTS BEFORE CONSTRUCTING judgment parameters shall be the following:
THE CRUSHED-STONE LAYER
04 CONSTRUCTION Electrical conductivity (EC) method A21T of
05 PROTECTION AND MAINTENANCE TMH1 (< 6,7 mm fraction)
06 CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES pH CSIR Transportek method CA 21
07 TESTING
(< 6,7 mm fraction)
08 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
Acid-soluble
01 SCOPE sulphate content BS 1377, part 3, test No 9
This section covers the procurement, furnishing and Water-soluble
placing of approved crushed stone on top of the sulphate content BS 1377, part 3, test No 5
completed subgrade or subbase and the construction of
a crushed-stone base or subbase, as the case may be, (c) Where the salinity of the water used for
in accordance with the requirements of these compaction purposes is so high as to cause a
Specifications. considerable increase in the salinity of the
material, the Engineer shall be entitled to
02 MATERIALS determine the soluble salinity from samples taken
from the compacted layer within 24 hours, and
02.01 General before the prime coat is applied.
The aggregate used for crushed-stone base or subbase 02.03 Grading requirements
shall comply with the requirements for G1, G2 and G3
material as specified in TRH 14 and in this clause. The grading of the crushed aggregate shall conform to
the grading limits set out in TRH 14.
In respect of borrow material obtained from sources
provided by the contractor, the provisions of Where, on account of factors beyond the control of the
clause 05(f) of section 201 are applicable. Contractor, the material available from commercial sources
or obtainable by normal crushing methods is consistently
02.02 Soluble salts above or below the average of the grading limits given in
TRH 14, the Engineer may fix a target grading to suit the
(a) The percentage of soluble salts in the material average grading of the available material, provided that the
shall be subject to the following provisions: target grading shall be within the grading limits, shall follow
(i) Untreated material (6,7 mm fraction) a smooth curve without any marked gaps or excessive
quantities at a particular size, and shall preferably not
• Witwatersrand quartzite : Crushed stone approach the finer limits of the grading envelope. The
and mine sand. material shall then conform to the target grading within the
• Where the pH < 6,0, it shall be treated with tolerances set out in table 602/1 below.
lime until pH 10, and then used. (The Tests to determine whether the crushed-stone material
aggregate is normally treated at the complies with the specified grading requirements shall
crusher, and if the pH exceeds 10 at that be conducted after the material has been mixed and
stage, the decrease which will occur later spread on the road or parking area.
on, shall be ignored.)
The aggregate shall be produced entirely by the
• Where the pH 6,0, the material is used as
crushing of rock. Single-stage crushing will not be
it is.
allowed and the crusher installation shall be capable of
(ii) Other materials such as natural gravel and producing material which complies with the specified
other crushed stone requirements. If, however, the parent rock is of such a
nature that, despite every effort made, the material
• Where the electrical conductivity remains deficient in regard to the finer fractions, the
(EC) 0,15 Sm-1, the material may be Engineer may allow the addition of approved soil fines,
used. crusher fines or sand in controlled quantities. Fines
• Where the EC > 0,15 Sm-1, the pH shall be shall be introduced at the crushing plant.
determined. Table 602/1
• Where the pH < 6,0, the material shall be TOLERANCES FOR TARGET GRADING
treated with lime until the pH 10. The
material may then be used. (Any later Tolerances for target
Sieve (mm)
decrease of the pH shall be ignored should grading
it remain 6,0.)
26,500 ±5,0
• Where the pH 6,0, it may be used, but 19,000 ±6,0
special attention should be given to design 9,5 – 2,0 ±8,0
and construction measures. 0,425 ±6,0
(iii) Material being stabilized (for example with 0,075 ±4,0
lime or cement)

602-1
02.04 Compaction requirements 04.03 Watering and slushing
The minimum dry density to which G1 material shall be After completion of the compaction described above,
compacted when used as base or as subbase is either short sections of the surface shall be thoroughly
86% or 88% of the apparent density as may be watered and rolled and slushed by three-wheeled flat-
specified or ordered by the Engineer. The apparent wheeled rollers with a mass of not less than 12 t each
density shall be determined as specified in or by suitable vibratory rollers approved by the
subclause 08.02(e) of section 903. Engineer.
The minimum dry density to which G2 material shall be The process shall continue until all excess fines have
compacted when used as base or as subbase, is either been brought to the surface. The grout or mulch thus
100% or 102% of modified AASHTO density as may formed shall then be uniformly broomed over the
either be specified or instructed. Field dry densities for surface by means of stiff brooms in order to correct any
G1 and G2 materials shall be determined by test areas still deficient in fines, whereupon the excess fines
method C (Direct radiation) of method A10(b)T as shall be broomed off the surface of the layer. This
described in TMH 1. operation shall continue until all the excess fines in the
mixture have been brought to the surface of the layer
Where the higher density is ordered and the Contractor and the specified density of the layer has been reached.
cannot achieve the required compaction, the Engineer Excess fines and loose aggregate shall then be swept
may, in his sole discretion, accept such sections at the from the surface while the surface is still damp, and the
rate tendered for compaction to the lower density, layer shall be allowed to dry out.
provided that at least this density is obtained.
Care shall be taken during slushing operations not to
G3 material shall be compacted to 98% of modified roll the surface out of shape.
AASHTO density when used as base and to 95% of
modified AASHTO density when used as subbase. The slushing process shall be carried out on each
section in one continuous operation, and each
03 REQUIREMENTS BEFORE CONSTRUCTING section shall be completed before proceeding with the
THE CRUSHED-STONE LAYER next.
Before any crushed-stone layer is constructed, the The completed layer shall be firm and stable with a
following requirements shall be met: closely knit surface of aggregate exposed in mosaic and
free from nests of segregated materials, laminations or
The underlying layer shall comply with the requirements corrugations.
for the layer concerned.
If the underlying layer is not a stabilized layer, care
The crushed-stone base shall, in the case of roads shall be taken not to saturate it during the slushing
without kerbing, be supported during construction along operation.
the outer edge by placing, compacting and trimming the
adjacent shoulder before the base is constructed. The Engineer may permit the slushing process in the
Excess material resulting from the trimming of lower layer of a two-layer crushed-stone base to be
shoulders shall be removed from the area of the base to omitted, provided that the specified densities are
the outside of the shoulders. obtained in each of the layers.
A crushed-stone layer shall not be rolled if, on account 04.04 General
of either rain or any other cause, the underlying layer is (a) Kerbs and channelling
so wet that the underlying layers could be damaged.
Care shall be taken during rolling not to displace
04 CONSTRUCTION any concrete edging, kerbs and channelling which
have already been laid. Any concrete edging,
04.01 Spreading and mixing kerbs or channelling damaged during construction
shall immediately be replaced or repaired by the
Crushed-stone material which complies with any of the Contractor at his own expense.
requirements specified above shall be dumped in
sufficient quantities to ensure that, after construction, the (b) Excess crushed-stone material
completed layer will comply with all requirements in regard Any excess crushed-stone material shall be loaded
to layer thickness, levels, cross-section and density. and removed from the road or parking area. It shall
The maximum compacted thickness of any layer of not be re-used unless it has been rescreened,
crushed-stone base or subbase compacted in one retested and again approved for use. It shall not
process shall be 150 mm, unless otherwise specified or be mixed with approved material unless screened,
permitted by the Engineer. tested and approved for use on its own.
(c) Junctions with existing bituminous surfaces
The dumps of material shall be spread out to a flat-
surfaced layer with a thickness suitable for mixing, after At junctions with existing bituminous surfaces the
which the required amount of water shall be added and new base shall not be feathered off to obtain a
the material mixed until a homogeneous mixture is continuity of grade, but the existing work in the
obtained. vicinity of the joint shall be cut back so as to
ensure an overall compacted thickness of a new
04.02 Compaction base and surfacing of not less than 100 mm.
After mixing, the crushed-stone material shall be placed
05 PROTECTION AND MAINTENANCE
to the correct thickness and levels and shall be
thoroughly compacted by means of suitable equipment The Contractor shall protect and maintain the
so that the specified density is obtained throughout the completed crushed-stone layer at his own expense until
entire layer after slushing. the next layer or the surfacing has been applied.
Maintenance shall include the immediate repair of any
The finally compacted layer shall be free from surface
damage that may be done to or defects that may occur
laminations, portions exhibiting segregation of the fine
in the layer, which shall be repeated as often as is
and coarse aggregates, corrugations or other defects
necessary to keep the layer continuously intact and in
that may detrimentally affect layer performance.
good condition.

602-2
Repairs shall be done in a manner to ensure restoration to Where the material is homogeneous, this ratio may
an even and uniform surface. No traffic shall be allowed to be reduced to one apparent density determination
move direct on any unprimed crushed-stone layer. for every four field densities.
The crushed-stone base shall be primed as soon as
08 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
possible and, where ordered by the Engineer, traffic
may have to be routed across primed layers, as Item Unit
specified in section 605.
602.01 Crushed-stone base
06 CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES constructed with material
obtained from
The completed crushed-stone layer shall comply with
construction tolerances specified in section 601 for 602.01.01 Commercial sources
subbase and base layers.
602.01.01.01 G1 material compacted
Where a base is to be constructed in two layers, the to 86% of apparent
requirements in regard to grade, thickness, cross density
3
cubic metre (m )
section and smoothness shall not apply to the lower
layer, but the lower layer shall be constructed with 602.01.01.02 G2 material compacted
sufficient accuracy to enable the combined layer to be to 100% of modified
3
constructed to the tolerances specified. AASHTO density cubic metre (m )
602.01.01.03 G3 material compacted
07 TESTING
to 98% of modified
07.01 Process control AASHTO density cubic metre (m 3)
The minimum testing frequency the Contractor will be 602.01.02 Approved borrow pits and
required to do in terms of clause 05 of section 901 for crushed by the Contractor
the purpose of process control shall be as given in
table 602/2. 602.01.02.01 G1 material compacted
to 86%of apparent
07.02 Routine inspection and testing density cubic metre (m3)
Routine inspection and testing will be carried out by the 602.01.02.02 G2 material compacted
Engineer in accordance with the provisions of clause 09 to 100% of modified
of section 902 to test the quality of materials and AASHTO density cubic metre (m 3)
workmanship in regard to compliance with the
requirements of this section. 602.01.02.03 G3 material compacted
to 98% of modified
Compliance with the density requirements specified in 3
clause 02 of this section shall be controlled in AASHTO density cubic metre (m )
accordance with the statistical judgment scheme Item Unit
specified in section 902.
602.02 Crushed-stone subbase
Any materials or workmanship which do not comply with constructed with material from
the specified requirements shall be removed and
replaced with materials and workmanship which do 602.02.01 Commercial sources
comply with the specified requirements or, if the
602.02.01.01 G1 material compacted
Engineer permits, be repaired as specified in
section 901 so that it will comply with the specified to 86% of apparent
requirements after having been repaired. density cubic metre (m3)

Table 602/2 602.02.01.02 G2 material compacted

to 100% of apparent
Testing frequency density
3
cubic metre (m )
Test Minimum number 602.02.01.03 G3 material compacted
One test
of tests per lot or to 95% of modified
every
section of road AASHTO density
3
cubic metre (m )
Materials 602.02.02 Approved borrow pits
Field density* 1 500 m2 4 and crushed by the
Contractor
2
Indicator tests 2 500 m (in 2
602.02.02.01 G1 material compacted
road)
3 to 86% of apparent
2 500 m (when 3
density cubic metre (m )
stockpiling)
602.02.02.02 G2 material compacted
ACV 5 000 m3 - to 100% of modified
3
Flakiness 5 000 m3 - AASHTO density cubic metre (m )

Construction - 602.02.02.03 G3 material compacted

tolerances to 95% of modified
AASHTO density cubic metre (m3)
The provisions of
section 601 shall The unit of measurement shall be the cubic metre of
apply completed crushed-stone base or subbase, as the case
may be, compacted to the specified density, and the
* The determination of field dry density expressed as a quantity shall be calculated from the authorized
percentage of apparent density implies an apparent dimensions of the layer as specified or as directed by
density determination for each field density. the Engineer.
602-3
The tendered rates shall include full compensation for Item Unit
procuring, furnishing and placing all materials including
the crusher fines or sand necessary for correcting the 602.04 Additional compaction
grading of the crushed stone or lime for correcting the 602.04.01 Extra over subitems
conductivity where necessary, for rolling, slushing and 602.01.01.01,602.01.02.01,
correcting the layers, and for testing, protecting and
602.02.01.01and
maintaining the work as specified.
602.02.02.01 for
Where overhaul applies, payment therefore will be compaction to 88% of
made in terms of section 103. apparent density
3
cubic metre (m )
Item Unit 602.04.02 Extra over subitems
602.01.01.02, 602.01.02.02,
602.03 The establishment of a
602.02.01.02 and
crushing plant and opening
602.02.02.02 for
of borrow pits where stone
compaction to 102% of
is obtained from approved
modified AASHTO
borrow pits and is crushed 3
density cubic metre (m )
by the Contractor number (No)
The extra over rates tendered for the listed subitems
Where the Contractor obtains the material for crushed-
shall include full compensation for all additional costs
stone base or subbase from approved borrow pits, for compacting the material to the higher density.
whether indicated on the borrow-pit plans or approved
after construction commences, the Contractor shall be Note:
entitled to the compensation provided under this item,
provided that prior instructions were obtained from the The following items of work, when specified, shall be
Engineer in regard to the crushing of such material. carried out, measured and paid for in accordance with
the appropriate sections of the Specifications, but shall
No payment shall be made under this item if the be listed under this section in the Schedule of
crushed-stone material is supplied from commercial Quantities.
sources or from a crusher that was erected or was in
operation prior to the award of the Contract, or from a Item Applicable section
crusher that is not completely or directly under the
control of the Contractor. In such cases payment under (a) Overhaul 103
item 602.01.01 or 602.02.01 shall be in full
compensation for the work performed in accordance (b) Excess overburden at borrow pits 201
with this section.
(c) Temporary stockpiling of material 201
The unit of measurement for the establishment of the
crushing plant and opening of borrow pits shall be the (d) Stabilization 604
number of times the plant is set up and dismantled for
the purpose of supplying crushed-stone material for
base and subbase at the sources of supply, all as
agreed to in writing by the Engineer.

The tendered rate shall include full compensation for

the provision and erection of the crusher ready for
crushing, the later dismantling and removal after
completion of the crushing operations, and the work
involved in opening the borrow pits, including clearing,
the removal of overburden and establishing a working
face and finishing-off the borrow pits upon completion of
the operations.

Payment for crushed-stone material stockpiled on Site

shall be made only if the Engineer is satisfied that the
material in stockpile meets the specified requirements.
Where the Contractor produces his own crushed-stone,
the value of the crushed material per cubic metre,
measured loose in stockpile, shall not be taken to be
more than 45% of the rate tendered per cubic metre of
compacted material.

602-4
SERIES 6 : ROADS AND PARKING AREAS 03.02 Placing and compaction
Gravel wearing courses shall be constructed to the
SECTION 603 : UNPAVED AREAS dimensions specified on top of the final fill layer.
Where shoulders are to be constructed from the same
CONTENTS
material as the base, the shoulders shall be constructed
at the same time as the base.
01 SCOPE
02 MATERIALS Where a crushed-stone base must be constructed, the
03 CONSTRUCTION shoulders shall be constructed first and shall be cut true
04 PROTECTION AND MAINTENANCE to line to provide lateral support for the crushed-stone
05 CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES material. Care shall be taken to prevent shoulder
06 TESTING material from contaminating the base material. In the
07 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT case of asphalt bases, the gravel shoulders may be
constructed after the base has been compacted.
01 SCOPE Shoulder and wearing-course material shall be spread,
broken down, watered, processed and compacted in
This section covers the construction of gravel wearing
accordance with the provisions of clause 06 of
courses for unsurfaced roads and parking areas and
section 203. The material shall be compacted to a
gravel shoulders for surfaced roads.
density of not less than 93% of modified AASHTO
This section does not apply to medians, sidewalks, density.
traffic islands and other unsurfaced areas, which shall
be constructed in accordance with the relevant clauses 04 PROTECTION AND MAINTENANCE
of section 104.
The Contractor shall protect and maintain the
completed shoulders and wearing course. Maintenance
02 MATERIALS shall include the immediate repair of any damage or
defects which may occur and shall be repeated as often
Material for gravel shoulders and wearing courses shall
as is necessary to keep the work continuously intact
be obtained from borrow pits provided by the Employer,
until the end of the prescribed maintenance period,
from excavations, cuttings or from sources provided by
excluding normal wear and tear after the road has been
the Contractor.
opened to the public.
In respect of borrow material obtained from sources
provided by the contractor, the provisions of 05 CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES
clause 05(f) of section 201 are applicable.
The completed shoulders or wearing course shall
The Engineer shall approve all sources of supply and comply with the construction tolerances set out below:
shall have the authority to direct from which sources all (a) Grade
materials are to be obtained. The approval of a specific
source of supply will not imply that all material from The finished surface shall nowhere be more than
such a source is suitable for use, but it means that 25 mm above or below the specified grade.
suitable material is available for selection from that (b) Width
source.
The outer edge of the shoulder or wearing course
After compaction, the coarse aggregate in the gravel shall nowhere be more than 150 mm outside the
shall have a maximum dimension not exceeding 40 mm, lines shown on the Drawings. The tolerances for
unless otherwise ordered by the Engineer. Oversized the position of the inner edge of the shoulder shall
aggregate in the gravel shall be broken down on the be as dictated by the tolerances for the width of
road or parking area and any remaining oversized the base.
material shall be bladed off and disposed of, all as
specified in clause 06 of section 203. Alternatively, the (c) Thickness
material shall be crushed as specified in section 601. The average thickness of the shoulder or wearing
course as determined by way of test holes or
Gravel finally placed in the shoulders or wearing course
accurate levels taken at the same position before
shall conform to the quality of the material suitable for
and after construction, shall not be less than the
the construction of subbase, with the proviso, however,
specified thickness nor shall the thickness at any
that the plasticity index shall not exceed 10 +3 (GM)
point be more than 30 mm less than the specified
unless otherwise authorized by the Engineer. The
thickness.
plasticity index shall not be less than 6.
06 TESTING
03 CONSTRUCTION
(a) Process control
03.01 General The minimum frequency of testing the Contractor
Construction shall be carried out in such a manner that will be required to do in terms of clause 05 of
adequate drainage will take place at all times and, in section 901 for the purpose of process control
the case of shoulder construction, temporary drains shall be as shown in table 603/1.
shall be opened through the shoulder material and (b) Routine inspection and testing
properly maintained until the base has been completed.
Routine inspection and testing will be carried out
The Contractor shall not commence with bituminous by the Engineer in accordance with the provisions
work on any particular section of the road until the of clause 09 of section 902 to test the completed
shoulders on that section of road have been completed work for compliance with the dimensional
and have been approved by the Engineer. tolerances, quality of material, density of
compaction and any further requirements stated in
this section.

603-1
Compliance with the density requirements specified in The tendered rates shall apply irrespective of the
clause 03 of this section shall be controlled in hardness or other properties of the material.
accordance with the judgment scheme specified in
section 902. Overhaul will apply only if the material is transported
from borrow pits or other sources provided by the
Any materials or workmanship which do not comply with Employer, and situated outside the free-haul
the specified requirements shall be removed and boundaries.
replaced with materials and workmanship which do
comply with the specified requirements or, if the Item Unit
Engineer permits, be repaired as specified in
section 901 so that it will comply with the specified 603.02 Extra over item 603.01
requirements after having been repaired. for borrow material from
sources to be supplied
Table 603/1 by the Contractor cubic metre (m3)

The extra over rate tendered for item 603.02 shall be in

Testing frequency full compensation for obtaining the material and
transporting it to the point of use including for all
Minimum No of
Test One test every tests per lot or activities at the borrow areas such as removal and
section of road replacement of overburden, finishing off borrow areas
and for the payment of royalties and other charges.
Materials
Note:
Field density 2
1 500 m 4 The following items of work, when specified, shall be
and OMC*
carried out, measured and paid for in accordance with
Indicator tests 2 500 m
2
2 the appropriate sections of the Specifications, but shall
be listed under this section in the Schedule of
Quantities.
Tolerances
40 m (3 pts per Item Applicable section
Surface levels
cross section)**
(a) Overhaul 103
Width 200 m -
(b) Excess overburden at borrow areas 201
Thickness - 30
(c) Removal of oversized material 203
* The determination of field dry density expressed as a
percentage of modified AASHTO density implies a (d) Single-stage crushing 601
modified AASHTO density determination for each
field density. Where material is homogeneous, this
ratio can be decreased to one modified AASHTO
density determination for up to four field densities.
** For parking areas, 1 test equals a series of points,
5 m apart, in a straight line across the full width of
the parking area, at every 40 m cross section.

07 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

Item Unit
603.01 Compacted gravel shoulder
or gravel wearing course
(compaction requirements
indicated)
3
603.01.01 Shoulder cubic metre (m )

603.01.02 Wearing course cubic metre (m 3)

The unit of measurement shall be the cubic metre of
shoulder or wearing-course material measured in final
position after compaction and the quantity shall be
calculated from the authorized dimensions of the layer
as specified or as directed by the Engineer.
The tendered rates shall include full compensation for
procuring, furnishing and placing all materials, for
testing, protecting and maintaining the work as
specified, for transporting the material and for removing
and transporting up to 5% by volume of oversized
material.

603-2
SERIES 6 : ROADS AND PARKING AREAS 02.02 Soil binder
Soil binder for mechanical modification shall be taken
SECTION 604 : STABILIZATION from within the limits of an approved source and shall
be subject to such requirements regarding grading,
CONTENTS plasticity index or other properties as may be indicated
on the borrow pit plans or in the Project Specifications
01 SCOPE or ordered by the Engineer.
02 MATERIALS
03 CHEMICAL STABILIZATION 02.03 General
04 MECHANICAL MODIFICATION
From the time of purchase to the time of use, all
05 TOLERANCES
stabilizing agents shall be kept under proper cover and
06 QUALITY CONTROL
protected from moisture.
07 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
Consignments of these materials shall be used in the
01 SCOPE same sequence as that in which they are delivered at
the Works. Stocks which may have been stored on the
This section covers the stabilization of materials used in Site for periods exceeding three months shall not be
the construction of the construction bed, fill or used in the work, unless otherwise authorized by the
pavement layers by the addition of a chemical Engineer.
stabilizing agent or by the mechanical modification of
the material by the addition of a soil binder.
03 CHEMICAL STABILIZATION

02 MATERIALS 03.01 Preparation of layer

02.01 Chemical stabilizing agents The material to be stabilized shall be prepared and
placed as specified in clause 06 of section 203, and
For the purposes of this Contract the stabilizing agent
shall be given at least one pass with a flat-wheel roller.
shall be either one or more of the following agents,
The material must be damp.
whichever is specified on the Drawings, in the Schedule
of Quantities, the Project Specifications or ordered by 03.02 Application of stabilizing agent
the Engineer:
After the layer of soil or gravel has been prepared, the
(a) Road lime stabilizing agent shall be spread uniformly over the full
width of the layer at the prescribed rate of application
Road lime shall comply with the requirements of and in a continuous operation by an approved type of
SANS 824, but the use of unslaked lime will not mechanical spreader or by hand.
be permitted. Lime shall bear the SANS mark.
When spreading is done by hand, pockets or bags of
(b) Cement stabilizing agent shall be accurately spaced at equal
intervals along the section to be stabilized to provide
Cement shall comply with the requirements of the specified rate of application. The pockets or bags
SANS 50197-1. The use of rapid-hardening shall be opened and the stabilizing agent spread in
cement will not be permitted. transverse rows across the full specified width to be
stabilized. Such spreading shall be done as evenly as
(c) Blast-furnace cement (CEM III) possible, and uniform distribution of the stabilizing
agent over the entire surface to be treated shall then be
Blast-furnace cement shall comply with the obtained by levelling off the rows of stabilizing agent by
requirements of SANS 50197-1. hand rakes and/or screeds.
(d) Milled blast-furnace slag The Engineer may permit the spreading of the hand-
spotted stabilizing agent by motor grader, provided that
Milled blast-furnace slag shall have a specific the stabilizing agent is spread evenly to his satisfaction.
2
surface of not less than 3 500 cm /g and the
residue on a sieve with 0,075 mm openings shall 03.03 Mixing in of stabilizing agent
not exceed 10% by mass.
Immediately after the stabilizing agent has been spread,
Milled blast-furnace slag shall not be used on its it shall be mixed with the loose gravel to the full depth
own as a stabilizing agent, but shall be mixed to be treated. Care shall be taken not to disturb the
either with cement to form a cement-slag mixture compacted layer underneath, nor to mix the agent
or with lime to form a lime-slag mixture. The ratio below the desired depth. Mixing shall be continued for
by mass of the ingredients of each mixture shall as long a period of time and be repeated as often as
be indicated by the Engineer. may be required to ensure a thorough, uniform and
proper mix of the soil or gravel and stabilizing agent
Cement-slag and lime-slag mixtures shall be
over the full width and depth of the material to be
thoroughly mixed by means of approved mixers
treated and until the resulting mixture is homogeneous
and/or spreaders prior their being applied to any
and of a uniform appearance throughout.
layers to be stabilized, or, provided that the
Engineer is satisfied that the Contractor can do it Mixing shall be done by grader, disc harrow, rotary
satisfactorily and the Engineer agrees thereto, mixer or by similar equipment which shall make
they may be mixed on the road. successive passes over the full width and depth of the
layer to be stabilized.
(e) Other chemical stabilizing agents
Mixing may also be done in central batch-mixing plants,
Other chemical stabilizing agents may be used if but the Contractor will not be entitled to payment for
specified in the Project Specifications. additional overhaul resulting from such procedure.

604-1
03.04 Watering 03.07 Curing of stabilized work
Immediately after the stabilizing agent has been The stabilized layer shall be protected against rapid
properly mixed with the soil or gravel, the moisture drying out for at least seven days following the
content of the mixture shall be determined and the completion of the layer.
required amount of water specified in clause 06 of The methods of protection may be any one or more of
section 203 shall be added. the following:
All water applied or added shall be well mixed with the (a) The stabilized layer shall be kept continuously
gravel or soil to avoid the concentration of water near damp by water being sprayed at frequent intervals.
the surface or a flow of water over the surface of the This method will be permitted for up to a maximum
layer. period of 48 hours, after which time one of
Particular care shall be taken to ensure a satisfactory methods (b), (c) or (d) must be applied. The
moisture distribution over the full depth, width and Contractor is warned that work which is not kept
length of the section being stabilized and to prevent any continuously damp but is subjected to wet-dry
portion of the work from becoming excessively wet after cycles may be rejected by the Engineer in his sole
the stabilizing agent has been added. Any portion of the discretion.
work that becomes too wet after the stabilizing agent (b) The stabilized layer shall be covered with the
has been added and before the mixture has been material required for the next layer whilst the
compacted will be rejected, and such portion shall be stabilized layer is still in a damp condition. The
allowed to dry out to the required moisture content and material that forms the protective layer shall be
shall be scarified, restabilized, recompacted and again watered at such intervals as may be required to
finished off in accordance with the requirements keep the stabilized layer continuously damp, and
specified herein, all at the expense of the Contractor. these intervals shall not exceed 24 hours in dry
The water supply and watering equipment shall be weather.
adequate to ensure that all the necessary water is
added and mixed with the material being treated within (c) The layer shall be covered with a curing
a sufficiently short period to enable compaction and membrane which consists of a spray grade
finishing to be completed within the period specified in emulsion or cut-back bitumen, applied at the rate
subclause 03.08 below. directed by the Engineer. The provisions of
section 605 shall apply mutatis mutandis to the
03.05 Compaction application of a curing membrane.

The provisions of clause 06 of section 203 shall apply. (d) Where prime coat is specified on top of the
During compaction the layer shall be continuously stabilized subbase, the prime coat may be utilized
bladed by a motor grader, and loss of moisture by as a curing membrane and shall be applied as
evaporation shall be corrected by further light specified in section 605.
applications of water. No additional payment shall be made for curing as
During compaction of base layers the Contractor shall described above, except that the application of a curing
harrow or scarify the surface lightly before final rolling, if membrane when ordered by the Engineer shall be paid
so required by the Engineer, to prevent the formation of for separately and the application of a prime coat shall
compaction planes near the surface of the base. Final be paid for under section 605.
rolling shall be done with equipment that will give a 03.08 Construction limitations
smooth surface which conforms to the surface
tolerances specified. The stabilizing agent shall be applied only to an area of
such size that all processing, watering, compacting and
The minimum compaction requirements shall be as finishing can be completed within the period stated below:
specified for the particular layer in the various sections
of these Specifications. Table 604/1

A sufficient number of compacting units shall be Maximum time for

employed on the work to ensure that, from the time completion after
when the stabilizing agent is first applied to the layer, Stabilizing agent stabilizing agent comes
the process of mixing, applying water, compaction, into contact with the
shaping and final finishing is completed within the material to be stabilized
periods specified in subclause 03.08 below.
CEM I, CEM II,
10 hours
03.06 Finishing at junctions CEM III or cement-
slag/lime-slag
Any finished portion of the stabilized layer adjacent to
Lime 24 hours
new work, that is used as a turn-around area by
equipment while the adjoining section is being
constructed, shall be provided with a protective cover of No stabilizing agent shall be applied when the moisture
soil or gravel at least 100 mm thick over a sufficient content of the material to be stabilized exceeds the
length to prevent damage to work already completed. At optimum moisture for the compaction equipment proposed
the time of final finishing of the adjoining section, the by more than 2% of the dry mass of the material. No
cover shall be removed to permit the making of a stabilization shall be done during wet weather or when, in
smooth joint at the junction of the two sections. Material the opinion of the Engineer, windy conditions may
to be used in the vicinity of the joint, which cannot be adversely affect the stabilizing operations. Any rain falling
processed satisfactorily with normal construction on the working area during the process of stabilization
equipment, shall be mixed and compacted by hand or may be sufficient cause for the Engineer to order that
with suitable hand-operated machines. areas affected be reconstructed at the Contractor's cost.

604-2
No traffic nor any equipment not actually used in the He shall also monitor the rate of application when
processing of the layer shall be allowed to pass over bulk-spreading equipment is used by taking a
the freshly spread stabilizing agent. Only equipment canvas patch or tray test every 100 m, with at
required for curing or priming shall be allowed to pass least one test per section of road, unless the
over the treated layers during the specified curing Engineer has permitted the number of tests to be
period. Where specified in the Project Specifications, reduced.
watering shall be done by side spraying by tankers
travelling off the stabilized layer. When a bulk spreader is used on the Site for the
first time, or after it has been adjusted or repaired,
the spread rate shall be checked by at least five
04 MECHANICAL MODIFICATION tests over as short a distance as is practicable,
The modification of soils and gravels by the addition of with the equipment running at normal speed
a soil binder, hereinafter referred to as "mechanical without stops. Spreading shall not continue on a
modification," shall involve the addition of an approved large scale until the spread rate is within the
soil binder to the material to improve the load-bearing permissible tolerances.
capacity, plasticity index, grading and other properties (b) Compaction
of the material.
The requirements for process control in respect of
The material to be treated shall be prepared, broken compaction shall be the same as those stated for
down and spread to the required loose thickness, all as the unstabilized layers in each section. Modified
specified in clause 06 of section 203. An approved AASHTO densities shall be determined as
binder material shall then be spread over the prepared described in subclause 08.02 of section 903.
material at the required rate, and the materials shall be
mixed dry by motor grader, plough or other suitable 06.02 Routine inspection and testing
equipment until the binder material is uniformly and
thoroughly mixed with the material being treated, after Routine inspections will be carried out by the Engineer
which the mixed materials shall be watered, mixed and in accordance with the provisions of clause 09 of
compacted as described in clause 06 of section 203. section 902 to test the quality of materials and
workmanship for compliance with the requirements of
05 TOLERANCES this section.
Compliance with the requirements for the compaction of
05.01 Rate of application stabilized materials shall be as specified in the relevant
The average rate of application of chemical stabilizing section for each layer.
agents when applied by chemical bulk-spreading The requirements for uniformity of mix and rate of
equipment and measured by the canvas patch or tray application shall be deemed to have been complied with
method shall be equal to the specified rate of if the mixture meets the requirements of clause 05 of
application of plus or minus 5% measured over any this section.
section not exceeding 1,0 km in length, and no single
measurement shall show a value exceeding 20% below When the tests for uniformity of mix are not applicable
the specified rate. as stated in subclause 05.02, the material shall be
visually appraised for uniformity of mix.
When hand spotted, stabilizing agents shall be spread
exactly at the specified rate of application. 06.03 Defective work or materials
05.02 Uniformity of mix Any material or work which does not comply with the
specified requirements shall be removed and replaced
The cementitious binder content of the mixed material, with new materials or work which complies with the
as determined from 10 samples per lot, when sampled specified requirements or, if the Engineer permits, be
and tested as specified in subclause 08.04(a) of repaired as specified in section 901 so that it will
section 903, shall be within the following limits: comply with the specified requirements after having
(a) The average cementitious binder content of all been repaired.
10 samples shall be not less than 91% of the
specified binder content. 07 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
(b) Not more than 2 of the 10 samples shall show a Item Unit
cementitious binder content of less than 70% of
604.01 Chemical stabilization,
the specified binder content.
extra over unstabilized
As described in subclause 08.04(a) of section 903, test compacted layers
results shall be adjusted to allow for the presence, in (indicate layer to be
the material to be stabilized, of minerals which affect stabilized) cubic metre (m )
3

the test results. The above requirements in respect of

the uniformity of mix shall be applied only on condition The unit of measurement shall be the cubic metre of
that the variation in these adjustments is within the chemically stabilized material measured in place after
limits specified in subclause 08.04(a) of section 903. compaction in the manner specified for the particular
layer under the various sections of these Specifications.
06 QUALITY CONTROL The quantity shall be determined according to the
authorized dimensions.
06.01 Process control
Chemical stabilization shall be paid for as extra over the
(a) Application rate of stabilizing agent rates tendered for constructing unstabilized layers. The
The Contractor shall keep detailed records of the tendered rates for chemical stabilization shall therefore
quantities of stabilizing agent applied to the road include full compensation for completing the prescribed
and of the volume of material stabilized, and shall work, but shall exclude the cost of providing the
make these records available to the Engineer. stabilizing agent.

604-3
No distinction shall be made in respect of the type of The tendered rates shall include full compensation for
stabilizing agent used, the time for completion, and the procuring, furnishing and applying the membrane and
specific layer which is being stabilized, and the extra- for the maintenance of the curing membrane for a
over rate tendered shall apply to any combination of period of at least fourteen days of its being applied.
these. The Engineer shall have the right to vary the
thickness of the layer to be stabilized without varying
the Contractor's rate for this work. The Contractor will
not, however, be called upon to stabilize any layer of
less than 100 mm or more than 200 mm thick.

Item Unit
604.02 Chemical stabilizing agent

604.02.01 Cement ton (t)

604.02.02 Blast-furnace cement (CEM III) ton (t)

604.02.03 Road lime ton (t)

604.02.04 Milled blast-furnace slag ton (t)

604.02.05 Other stabilizing agents

(specify type) ton (t)

The unit of measurement shall be the ton of stabilizing

agent. When mixtures of slag and cement or lime are
used, the quantity of each constituent agent shall be
measured separately and not the mixture as a whole.
The tendered rates shall include full compensation for
the provision of the stabilizing agent within the works,
irrespective of the rate of application specified or
ordered by the Engineer, but shall allow for the
variations in mixing and compaction times for the
various stabilizing agents. The rate for milled blast-
furnace slag shall include full compensation for
premixing with other stabilizing agents in the required
proportions.

Item Unit
604.03 Mechanical modification,
3
extra over untreated layer cubic metre (m )
The unit of measurement shall be the cubic metre of
compacted material that has been mechanically
modified by the addition of a soil binder.
The tendered rate for mechanical modification shall be
paid for as extra over the rate for the construction of an
untreated layer irrespective of the binder content
specified or eventually used.
The addition of material during a crushing and
screening process, whether it is specially imported
material which is not the product of crushing or whether
it is crushed material screened out and then added back
in part or in full, shall not be measured or paid for as
treatment with soil binder, but shall be considered as
part of the process of producing crushed stone for
subbase, base or other construction work, the cost of
which shall be included in the rates tendered for those
items of work.

Item Unit
604.04 Application of a curing
membrane which consists of
604.04.01 Bituminous emulsion 55%
net bitumen litre ( )
604.04.02 MC-70 grade cut-back bitumen litre ( )

The unit of measurement shall be the litre of bituminous

curing membrane applied in accordance with the
Engineer's instructions.

604-4
SERIES 6 : ROADS AND PARKING AREAS • not have any fuel or binder leaks;
• have a straight and clean spraybar, all the spray
SECTION 605 : PRIME COAT heads of which shall be of the same type which
open simultaneously and shall not leak when
CONTENTS closed;

01 SCOPE • have its spray heads all spraying at the same

02 MATERIALS angle to the spraybar and adjusted to the correct
03 EQUIPMENT level so as to obtain the required overlapping;
04 WEATHER LIMITATIONS • have its fans not interfering with one another;
05 PREPARATION OF THE LAYER TO BE PRIMED
06 APPLICATION OF THE PRIME COAT • have its sieve undamaged and clean;
07 MAINTENANCE AND OPENING TO TRAFFIC
• be under the direct control of an operator
08 TOLERANCES
09 TESTING approved by the engineer on the grounds of a
10 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT reference, in writing, or a certificate of
competence signed by a representative of a
road authority.
01 SCOPE
(b) Water sprinkler
This section covers the application of a tar or bituminous
prime coat to a prepared pavement layer. The water sprinkler shall have efficient spray
equipment capable of spraying a uniform film of
02 MATERIALS water over the entire area to be primed.

02.01 Prime material (c) Rotary broom

The rotary broom shall be power-operated and shall
The prime material shall be one of the following, as
be supplied together with a suitable pneumatic-
specified or directed by the Engineer:
tyred towing vehicle.
• MC-30 cut-back bitumen which complies with
(d) Other equipment
SANS 308;
Other equipment shall include hand brooms,
• MC-70 cut-back bitumen which complies with
reinforced paper for joints, string, nails and all other
SANS 308;
ancillary equipment required to carry out the
• RTH 3/12P tar prime which complies with operation efficiently and neatly.
SANS 748;
• RTL 3/12P tar prime which complies with 04 WEATHER LIMITATIONS
SANS 749; No prime shall be applied under the following adverse
• RTH 1/4P quick-drying tar prime which complies weather conditions:
with SANS 748; or
• During foggy or wet conditions
• Invert bitumen emulsion which complies with
SANS 1260. • When rain is imminent

If ordinary grade tar prime does not penetrate adequately • When wind is blowing sufficiently hard to cause
into the layer to be primed, or if curing is inadequate, uneven spraying
between 10% and 30% by volume of high-temperature • When the layer is visibly wet, thus more than damp
creosote which complies with SANS 538 shall be added
to and mixed with the priming material by introducing the • When, immediately prior to commencing with the
creosote direct into the distributor and using the application of the prime, the temperature of the road
circulating system to mix it with the prime material. surface is below or, in the opinion of the Engineer,
likely to fall below 10°C.
02.02 Mineral aggregate for blinding
The Engineer's decision as to whether or not to apply the
The aggregate used for blinding the primed surface shall prime coat under specific weather conditions shall be
consist of crushed rock or river sand, 100% of which final.
passes through the 6,7 mm sieve and not more than 10%
of which passes through the 2,36 mm sieve. The aggregate
05 PREPARATION OF THE LAYER TO BE PRIMED
shall be clean, hard and free from excessive dust. It shall
not contain any clay, loam or other deleterious matter. Not longer than 24 hours before spraying, the layer to be
primed shall be broomed and cleaned of all loose and
03 EQUIPMENT deleterious material by means of a rotary broom and
hand brooms. A light spray of water, sufficient to dampen
The following equipment shall be available and in good the surface, shall be uniformly applied to the layer
working order: immediately before the application of the prime. If the
water is over-applied, the layer shall be allowed to dry
(a) Binder distributor
until a uniformly damp surface is obtained.
The binder distributor used for distributing the
Before any prime material is sprayed, the layer to be
bituminous binders shall -
primed shall be checked for compliance with the
• comply with TMH2 and shall be covered by a valid specified surface and other requirements. Any sections
certificate of compliance with TMH2 issued by one which do not comply with the specified requirements shall
of the centres for testing binder distributors be corrected as specified in section 901.
mentioned in TMH2;

605-1
06 APPLICATION OF THE PRIME COAT Where practicable, two to four hours shall elapse,
as may be directed by the Engineer. Any "caking" of
(a) Twine-reinforced paper or other suitable approved aggregate which may take place and cause
material shall be used at all joints at the beginning problems during the surfacing process shall be
and end of all sprays in order to obtain a neat start removed before the final surfacing is commenced.
and cut off.
(f) If the prime is applied in more than one lane,
(b) The temperatures for storage and spraying shall be allowance shall be made for the overlapping of
in accordance with table 605/1 below. lanes by 100 mm.
Table 605/1 (g) Care shall be taken to protect any kerbing,
guardrails and channelling from the prime by
Maximum covering them with a suitable protective material
storage when spraying.
temperature °C Spraying
Type of prime
temperature
Up to Over °C 07 MAINTENANCE AND OPENING TO TRAFFIC
24 hrs 24 hrs
As soon as the primed surface has dried sufficiently to
Cut-back bitumen allow the traffic to pass without the primed surface being
picked up or otherwise damaged by the tyres, the road or
MC-30 65 30 45 - 65 parking area shall, where practicable, be opened to
public traffic for a period of 14 days if the primed layer is
MC-70 80 50 60 - 80 constructed of crushed-stone, and one week in the case
of natural gravel layers. During this period the primed
Tar prime area under traffic shall be maintained and all damage
caused by traffic shall be repaired as directed by the
RTH3/12P 70 50 55 - 70 Engineer, all at no additional payment.
RTL3/12P 65 40 50 - 65 The Engineer may negotiate with the Contractor that
sections be opened to traffic for longer periods than
Tar + 10% creosote 60 50 45 - 55 those stated above, but during such extended periods the
cost of maintaining the primed surface and of repairing
Tar + 20% creosote 55 45 40 - 50
any further damage to the primed layer caused by traffic
Tar + 30% creosote 50 40 35 - 45 shall be paid for as "extra work" in accordance with the
provisions of the General Conditions of Contract.

All prime materials stored in a heated condition 08 TOLERANCES

shall be stored in a container with a properly
functioning circulation system and with a securely The actual spray rates shall not deviate by more than
fitting lid. No heat shall be added to materials 0,05 litre/m2 from the required spray rate as specified or
delivered above the storage temperature until the ordered by the Engineer. Any material sprayed in excess
2
temperatures are below those specified above, of 0,05 litre/m more than the required spray rate shall
unless the materials are intended for immediate not be paid for.
use.
09 TESTING
(c) The rate of application shall be as specified in the
Project Specifications or as directed by the The Contractor shall give the Engineer at least 24 hours
Engineer after trial applications have been made to notice of his intention to spray prime material so that the
short sections if necessary. actual spray rates can be controlled by the Engineer.
Unless otherwise agreed beforehand, the Contractor
Should the prime material be sprayed in excess of shall spray only when the Engineer or his representative
the tolerances specified in clause 08 of this section, is present.
the Engineer may require remedial measures to be
taken by the Contractor at his own expense, as 10 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
specified in clause 08 of section 901.
Item Unit
(d) Wherever feasible, the prime shall be applied
evenly over the full width of the surface in one or 605.01 Prime coat
more lanes and be allowed to penetrate and cure
until traffic can pass over the surface without the 605.01.01 RTH 3/12P or RTL3/12P tar
prime being picked up by the tyres. All traffic shall prime litre ( )
be kept off the surface until this condition has been 605.01.02 MC-30 cut-back bitumen litre ( )
reached.
605.01.03 MC-70 cut-back bitumen litre ( )
Where no kerbing is installed, the total width of the
primed surface shall be 300 mm wider than the 605.01.04 Invert bituminous emulsion litre ( )
specified width of the final surfacing, and the edges
of the prime in the case of roads, shall be parallel to 605.01.05 Tar + 10% creosote litre ( )
the centre line. 605.01.06 Tar + 20% creosote litre ( )
(e) Where it is not feasible for traffic to use bypasses, 605.01.07 Tar + 30% creosote litre ( )
the prime shall be applied and allowed to penetrate
for so long as is practicable before a blinding layer 605.01.08 Quick-drying RTH1/4P tar prime litre ( )
of mineral aggregate is applied at a rate of
0,0035 m3/m2. Care shall be taken to ensure that The unit of measurement shall be the litre of priming
the mineral aggregate is not applied too soon after material measured at spraying temperature and sprayed
spraying of the prime. as required.

605-2
The tendered rates shall include full compensation for
supplying the priming material, including the supplying of
high-temperature creosote and mixing the components in
the case of tar-and-creosote mixes, cleaning and
watering the layer to be primed, applying the priming
material and maintaining the primed surface as specified.

Item Unit
2
605.02 Aggregate for blinding square metre (m )
The unit of measurement shall be the square metre of
prime coat blinded with aggregate on the instructions of
the Engineer.
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for
procuring, furnishing and applying the aggregate for
blinding where directed by the Engineer, and for
maintenance of the blinding layer as specified.

605-3
SERIES 6 : ROADS AND PARKING AREAS (a) Resistance to crushing
The crushing value (ACV) of the coarse aggregate,
SECTION 606 : ASPHALT BASE AND SURFACING
when determined in accordance with TMH1
Method B1, shall not exceed the following values
CONTENTS for aggregate used for-
01 SCOPE open-graded surfacing 21
02 MATERIALS other surfacing 25
03 COMPOSITION OF ASPHALT BASE AND
SURFACING base 29
04 PLANT AND EQUIPMENT rolled-in chips 21
05 LIMITATIONS REGARDING THE WEATHER,
AND THE STORAGE OF MIXED MATERIAL (b) Shape of the aggregate
06 PREPARATION OF SURFACE
The weighted average value of the flakiness index
07 PRODUCING AND TRANSPORTING THE
of the coarse aggregate, when determined in
MIXTURE
accordance with TMH1 Method B3T, shall not
08 SPREADING THE MIXTURE
exceed the following values for aggregate used for -
09 JOINTS
10 PRECOATED CHIPS FOR GAP-GRADED Surfacing 30
ASPHALT SURFACING
11 COMPACTION Based on the following separate sifted-out fractions
12 LAYING OF TRIAL SECTIONS of the combined aggregate:
13 PROTECTION AND MAINTENANCE
• fraction passing through the 19,0 mm sieve and
14 CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES AND
retained on the 13,2 mm sieve;
FINISH REQUIREMENTS
15 TESTING • fraction passing through the 13,2 mm sieve and
16 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT retained on the 9,5 mm sieve; and
• fraction passing through the 9,5 mm sieve and
01 SCOPE retained on the 6,7 mm sieve.
This section covers all the work in connection with the
Base 35
construction of asphalt bases and surfacing. It includes
the procurement and supply of aggregate and Based on the following separate sifted-out fractions
bituminous binder, mixing at a central mixing plant, of the combined aggregate:
spreading and compaction of the mixture, all as
specified for the construction of - • fraction passing through the 26,5 mm sieve and
retained on the 19,0 mm sieve; and
• a continuously graded asphalt base;
• fraction passing through the 19,0 mm sieve and
• a semi-gap-graded asphalt base; retained on the 13,2 mm sieve.
• continuously graded asphalt surfacing; Rolled-in chips (all nominal sizes) 20
• gap-graded asphalt surfacing with or without rolled-
in precoated chips; Based on the following separate sifted-out fractions:
• semi-gap-graded asphalt surfacing with or without • fraction passing through the 26,5 mm sieve and
rolled-in precoated chips; retained on the 19,0 mm sieve;
• open-graded asphalt surfacing; • fraction passing through the 19,0 mm sieve and
retained on the 13,2 mm sieve;
This section also covers the construction of asphalt
surfacing on bridge decks. • fraction passing through the 13,2 mm sieve and
retained on the 9,5 mm sieve; and
02 MATERIALS • fraction passing through the 9,5 mm sieve and
retained on the 6,7 mm sieve.
02.01 Bituminous binders
The various bituminous binders specified shall comply (c) Polishing
with the relevant SANS specifications mentioned below: The polished-stone value of aggregate, when deter-
Penetration grade bitumens SANS 307 mined in accordance with SANS Method 5848, shall
not be less than the following values for aggregate
Bitumen emulsions SANS 309 (anionic) used for-
SANS 548 (cationic)
continuously and open-graded surfacing 50
The type and grade of bituminous binder to be used in gap-graded surfacing 45
each case shall be as specified hereinafter or in the
Project Specifications. rolled-in chips 55
When bitumen rubber is specified for use as a Aggregate with polishing values below those stated
bituminous binder, the relevant specification will be above may be approved for use by the Engineer.
incorporated in the Project Specifications.
(d) Adhesion
02.02 Aggregates
When tested in accordance with TMH1 Method C5,
Coarse and fine aggregates shall be clean and free the immersion index of a mixture of the binder and
from decomposed materials, vegetable matter and other aggregate proposed for use shall not be less than
deleterious substances and shall comply with the 75%. The aggregate used for the test mixture shall
requirements of SANS 1083 unless otherwise specified have a grading that is within the limits for the mix
in this section. concerned.

606-1
(e) Absorption Only active filler added on the instructions of the
When tested in accordance with TMH1 Engineer for improving adhesion will be paid for. No
Methods B14 and B15, the water absorption of the payment will be made for filler added to improve the
grading.
coarse aggregate shall not exceed 1% by mass,
and that of the fine aggregate shall not exceed 02.04 General
1,5%, unless otherwise permitted.
All materials shall be handled and stockpiled in a
(f) Sand
manner that will prevent contamination, segregation or
The total fine aggregate used in all asphalt mixes damage. Cement and lime shall be used in the order in
shall have a sand equivalent of at least 35 when which it has been received.
tested in accordance with TMH1 Method B19 and
the sand to be mixed with the aggregate shall The Contractor shall, as often as is necessary, test and
have a sand equivalent of at least 30. control the materials produced by himself or received by
him from suppliers to ensure that the materials always
(g) Design requirements comply with the specified requirements.
By conducting the necessary tests, the Contractor
shall satisfy himself that he will be able to produce 03 COMPOSITION OF ASPHALT BASE AND
a mixture which will meet the design requirements SURFACING
specified hereinafter using the aggregate he
proposes to supply within the grading limits The rates of application and mix proportions of
specified. bituminous binder, aggregates and fillers set out
hereafter are nominal rates and proportions and shall
(h) Grading be used for tendering purposes only. The rates and
The grading of the combined aggregate, including proportions actually used shall be determined to suit the
any mineral filler that may be added in an materials used and the conditions which prevail during
approved quantity as described in construction, and any approved variation of a nominal
subclause 02.03, shall be within the limits stated in mix in the bitumen content or active-filler content shall
tables 606/1 and 606/2 for the various mixes. The be the subject to an adjustment in payment for binder or
approved grading shall be designated as the target active-filler variations, as described in clause 16.
grading and the composition of the working mix At least eight weeks before production or delivery of the
shall subsequently be maintained within the limits materials, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer
specified in subclause 13.03. samples of the aggregates, filler materials and
(i) Rolled-in chips bituminous binders he proposes to use in the mix,
together with his proposed mix design, so that the
Rolled-in chips for gap-graded asphalt surfacing Engineer may test the materials and confirm the use of
mixes shall comply with the grading requirements the proposed mix, if he is satisfied that it meets the
given in table 606/3. specified requirements.
02.03 Fillers As soon as the materials become available, the
If the combined aggregate for asphalt surfacing mixes Contractor shall produce a working mix in accordance
shows a deficiency in fines, an approved filler may be with the design mix, which working mix must again be
used to improve the grading. Filler may consist of tested by him for compliance with the design
"active" filler as defined herein or inert material such as requirements. Samples of the working mix shall also be
rock dust with the required grading which is used to made available to the Engineer, who will authorize the
improve the grading of the combined aggregate. Under use of the working mix proportions as finally approved
no circumstances shall more than 2% by mass of active for use.
filler be used in asphalt mixes. Inert filler such as rock
The composition of the approved working mix shall be
dust used to improve the grading will not be subject to
maintained within the tolerances given in subclause 14.03.
this limitation.
Table 606/3 The nominal mix proportions (by mass) of the various
asphalt mixes are set out in tables 606/1 and 606/2.
GRADING LIMITS FOR ROLLED-IN CHIPS
The design of the asphalt mixes shall be in accordance
Percentage passing by mass
Sieve size (mm) with the design-guidelines of TRH8 for the class of
19,0 mm chips 13,2 mm chips traffic specified in the Project Specifications.
26,5 100 -
Precoated chips shall comply with the requirements of
19,0 85 - 100 100 clause 10 of this section.
13,2 0 - 30 85-100
9,5 0-5 0 - 30 04 PLANT AND EQUIPMENT
6,7 0-5
04.01 General
The Engineer may order the use of any active filler to
improve the adhesion properties of the aggregate. All plant shall be designed and operated to produce a
Active filler shall consist of milled blast-furnace slag, mixture which complies with the requirements of this
hydrated lime, cement, blast-furnace cement, fly-ash or Specification. The plant and equipment used shall be of
a mixture of any of these materials. Individual materials an adequate rated capacity, in good working order and
shall comply with the requirements of the relevant subject to the approval of the Engineer. Obsolete or
SANS or other specifications for such material. worn-out plant will not be allowed on the Site.

Active filler shall have a bulk density in toluene between Any alteration which has been or is being effected to
0,5 g/m and 0,9 g/m with at least 70% by mass any construction plant, and which does not comply with
passing through the 0,075 mm sieve. The voids in dry the Specifications of the manufacturer, shall be brought
compacted filler shall be between 0,3% and 0,5%, when to the attention of the Engineer.
tested in accordance with BS 812.

606-2
606-3
606-4
04.02 Mixing plant These rollers shall be self-propelled and in good
working order, free from backlash, faulty steering
Asphalt shall be mixed in a mixer of an approved type
mechanism and worn parts. The frequency as well as
and of proven suitability for producing a mixture
the amplitude of vibratory rollers shall be adjustable.
complying with all the requirements of the
Rollers shall be equipped with adjustable scrapers to
Specifications.
keep the tyres and drums clean and with efficient
The mixing plant may be controlled either automatically means of keeping the wheels wet to prevent the mixes
or manually, but in the latter case two control operators from sticking to the drums and tyres.
shall be provided.
The mass and/or tyre pressure shall be of such a nature
Tanks for the storage of binder shall be capable of to ensure proper compaction which complies with the
heating the material to the specified temperature Specifications in regard to surface finish and density.
requirements and shall be under effective and positive
04.05 Binder distributors
control at all times. The heating system must be so
designed that the binder will not be degraded during Where bituminous materials are to be sprayed onto
heating. A circulating system for the binder shall be areas before the laying of asphalt is commenced, binder
provided, which shall be of adequate size to ensure the distributors complying with the requirements of
proper and continuous circulation of the binder between clause 03 of section 605 shall be used.
the storage tanks and mixer during the entire operating
04.06 Transporting vehicles
period.
The asphalt shall be transported from the mixing plant
Satisfactory means shall be provided for obtaining the
to the spreader in trucks having tight, clean, smooth
proper amount of binder in the mix within the tolerances
beds and sides, which have been treated to prevent
specified, either by weighing or by volumetric
adhesion of the mixture to the truck bodies. A thin film
measurements. Suitable means shall be provided for
of soapy water or vegetable oil may be used to prevent
maintaining the specified temperatures of the binder in
adhesion, but no petroleum products.
the pipelines, weigh buckets, spraybars and in any
other containers and flowlines. 04.07 Mass-measuring device for asphalt mixes
In the case of a drum type mixer, the system shall Where payment per ton is specified, the Contractor shall
control the cold feeding of each aggregate fraction and keep available at the mixing plant or on the Site, a suitable
of the filler by mass, by means of a load cell or another gauged mass-measuring device for measuring the asphalt
device regulating the feed automatically, and by mixes. The device shall be provided with a printer to print
immediately correcting any variation in mass which the type of mix, the mass, the time and the date. The
results from moisture or from any other cause. The cold printed data shall be submitted to the Engineer.
feed shall be regulated automatically with regard to the
binder feed, to maintain the required mix proportion. 05 LIMITATIONS REGARDING THE WEATHER,
AND THE STORAGE OF MIXED MATERIAL
Suitable dust-collecting equipment shall be fitted to
prevent pollution of the atmosphere in terms of Act 45 The mixing and placing of asphalt shall be carried out
of 1965. only under favourable weather conditions. The mixing
and placing of asphalt shall not be allowed if the
The type of oil used and the control of the burner to dry moisture content of the aggregate affects the uniformity
the aggregates will be such as to ensure full of temperature, or if free water is present on the
combustion of the fuel in order to prevent contamination working surface. Mixing shall not be allowed to take
of the aggregates and pollution of the atmosphere. place more than two hours before paving begins, unless
04.03 Spreading equipment provision has been made for storage. The method of
storage of mixed material shall be approved by the
(a) Paver Engineer and shall be such that the temperature of the
The mixture shall be laid by an approved type of mix shall remain uniform throughout. Storage shall in
any case not be permitted for a period exceeding 12
self-propelled mechanical spreader and finisher
capable of laying to the required widths, hours after mixing, unless otherwise approved by the
thicknesses, profile, camber or crossfall without Engineer. Open-graded mixes shall not be stored or
mixed ahead of paving operations, but shall be laid
causing segregation, dragging or other surface
defects. directly after mixing. The following wind and
temperature conditions are regarded as suitable for
All pavers shall be fitted with automatic electronic paving work:
screed controls for maintaining the required levels,
(a) While the air temperature is rising, work may be
cambers and crossfalls. Where skids are used,
performed at temperatures of -
they shall be at least 9 m long or as specified by
the Engineer. • 6°C and higher, with an allowable wind velocity
of less than 25 km/h.
(b) Chip spreader for gap-graded surfacing
• 10°C and higher, with an allowable wind
Wherever feasible, a machine straddling the full velocity of less than 55 km/h.
paved width shall be used to spread the precoated (b) When the air temperature drops, work must be
chips. Such a mechanical spreader must be self- stopped when the temperature reaches 6°C,
propelled and able to follow immediately behind regardless of wind velocity, and may not be resumed
the paver. before the temperature is definitely rising.
When precoated chips are spread by hand, special
care shall be taken to prevent bunching of the 06 PREPARATION OF SURFACE
chips. 06.01 Correction of base, subbase (in the case of
04.04 Rollers asphalt base) and bridge decks

Compaction shall be done by means of approved flat The base, subbase or bridge deck, as the case may be,
steel-wheeled vibratory or pneumatic-tyred rollers. shall be checked for smoothness and accuracy of
grade, elevation and cross-section.

606-5
Any portion of the base, subbase or bridge deck, as the Bituminous materials delivered to the Site at
case may be, that does not comply with the specified temperatures which are higher than the storage
requirements may, with the permission of the Engineer, temperatures shall not be heated until such
be corrected with premixed asphalt material at the temperatures are below those specified above, unless
Contractor's own expense, until the specified the materials are intended for immediate use.
requirements are met.
07.02 Production of the mixture
The Engineer may, in his sole discretion, allow minor
surface irregularities to remain, provided that they can (a) Using batching plants
be taken up in the following asphalt layer without (i) Heating of the aggregate
adversely affecting that layer. The aggregate shall be so dried and heated
The asphalt material used for the correction of the base, that, when delivered to the mixer, its
subbase or bridge deck shall be the same mixture as temperature will be between 0°C and 20 °C
specified for the surfacing or as directed by the lower than the maximum temperature
Engineer, and the maximum size of the aggregate used indicated in table 606/4 for the mixture. The
shall be dictated by the required thickness of the maximum moisture content of the mixture
correction in each case. shall not exceed 0,5%.
06.02 Cleaning of surface (ii) Batching
The aggregate and binder shall be measured
Immediately before the tack coat is applied or, where
separately and accurately by mass in the
there is no tack coat, before the asphalt is applied, the
proportions in which they are to be mixed. If
surface shall be broomed and cleaned of all loose or
mineral filler is used, it shall be measured
deleterious material.
separately on a scale with a suitable capacity
Where the prime coat (if any) has been damaged, it and sensitivity. The error in the measuring
shall be repaired by priming material being hand- apparatus used shall not exceed 2% for any
brushed or sprayed over the damaged portions. batch.
Concrete bridge decks shall be thoroughly cleaned by (iii) Mixing
washing and brushing to remove all loose material. The aggregate, filler and binder shall be
After the surface has dried, it shall be painted with a mixed until a homogeneous mixture is
tack coat. obtained in which all the particles are
06.03 Tack coat uniformly coated. Care shall be taken to
avoid excessively long mixing times, which
Where required in these Specifications or the Project may cause hardening of the binder.
Specifications or where indicated by the Engineer, a
tack coat shall be applied to the surface to be paved. (b) Using drum-type mixing plants

The tack coat shall consist of an anionic, stable grade The aggregate and filler shall be accurately
bituminous emulsion containing 30% bitumen and shall proportioned and conveyed into the drum mixing
be applied at a rate of 0,55 litre/m2 or as directed by the unit. The correct amount of binder shall be
Engineer. sprayed onto the aggregate in such a manner that
no hardening of the binder shall take place. A
Portions of kerbing, channelling, bridge kerbs and homogeneous mixture and uniform coating of
railings which will be exposed shall be suitably binder must be achieved and the moisture content
protected while the tack coat is being applied. of the asphalt mixture shall not exceed 1,5%.
The tack coat shall not be applied more than 24 hours Once the final mix temperature has been agreed
before the paving is done. on, it may not be altered without the prior consent
of the Engineer.
07 PRODUCING AND TRANSPORTING THE MIXTURE The moisture content of the asphalt mixture shall
07.01 Mixing and storage temperatures of binder be tested according to Method C11 of TMH1.

Bituminous binders shall be stored at temperatures 07.03 Transporting the mixture

which do not exceed those given in table 606/4, and the The mixture shall be transported from the mixing plant
aggregate and bituminous binders shall be heated at to the Works in trucks which comply with the
the mixing plant to such temperatures that the mixed requirements of subclause 04.06. Loads shall be
product shall have a temperature within the range given covered with waterproof canvas or metal sheets when
in table 606/4 when placed. the haul exceeds 10 km or during rainy weather.
Deliveries shall be so made that spreading and rolling
Table 606/4 of all the mixtures prepared for a day's run can be
completed by the end of a normal working day. Any
Max storage asphalt which has become wet on account of rain or by
temp of Temp range of any other means will be rejected. Hauling over freshly
Type of asphalt asphalt at mixer (°C) laid material will not be permitted.
bituminous (°C)
binder in 08 SPREADING THE MIXTURE
mix Cont. and Open-
Over Under The mixture shall be delivered to the paver in such a
gap-graded graded
24 h 24 h manner that the paver will never be forced to stop for lack
mixes mixes
of asphalt. The temperature of the mixture shall be
controlled by measuring at random in the truck
40/50 pen 145 195 140-165 110-140 immediately before emptying, and it shall not exceed
60/70 pen 135 185 135-160 105-135 10°C below the minimum temperature specified for mixing
80/100 pen 125 175 130-155 100-130 in table 606/4. The adjustment of the screed tamping
150/200 pen 115 165 125-150 bars, feed screws, hopper feed, etc, shall be checked
frequently to ensure a uniform spreading of the mix.

606-6
If segregation occurs, the spreading operations shall be 10 PRECOATED CHIPS FOR GAP-GRADED
suspended immediately until the cause has been ASPHALT SURFACING
established and corrected.
Aggregate for precoated chips shall be coated with
The addition and removal of material behind the paver 1,5% plus or minus 0,3% by mass of the same bitumen
shall normally not be allowed and the paver shall be used in the asphalt, provided the bitumen shall not be
capable of spreading the mixture in the correct softer than a 60/70 penetration grade. One per cent by
amounts, which will provide the required compacted mass of active filler which conforms to the requirements
thickness without resorting to spotting, picking-up or of subclause 02.03 shall be added to the mixture.
otherwise shifting or disturbing the mixture.
The type of active filler to be used will be specified in
Paving shall, if possible, commence at the bottom of the the Project Specifications or by the Engineer, and shall
grades and the lower edges of super elevated curves or comply with the requirements of subclause 02.03.
sloping parking areas. On slopes steeper than 5%
paving shall be done uphill. The aggregate shall be dried and fed into the mixer at a
temperature of between 130°C and 185°C, followed by
Spreading shall be so arranged that longitudinal joints
the bitumen at a temperature not exceeding 175°C, and
will not coincide with joints in lower layers of the asphalt
the filler. Immediately after the aggregate has been
base or surfacing. coated and discharged from the mixer, it shall be rapidly
Unless otherwise specified in the Project Specifications, cooled to ambient air temperature by hosing it down
the paver shall be equipped to provide automatic with water.
control of levels and cross-section. In the case of
Precoated chips shall be stockpiled in heaps not
asphalt base construction, automatic control shall be
exceeding 1,0 m in height and shall be protected if
run off reference wires and, in the case of surfacing,
necessary to prevent its temperature from exceeding
skids shall be used.
60°C during storage.
On restricted areas inaccessible to the spreading
equipment used, the mixture may be placed by hand or The precoated chips shall be spread on the asphalt at
by other means to obtain the specified results. the rate of 9 kg/m2 when 13,2 mm nominal sized chips
Spreading shall be carried out in a manner that will are used and 11 kg/m2 when 19,0 mm nominal sized
prevent segregation and allow positive control of levels. chips are used, or as directed by the Engineer. The
chips shall be laid by a mechanical spreader which
The mixer capacity and the operating speed of the paver straddles the paved width and follows immediately
shall be so adjusted that continuous laying is ensured behind the paver. The chips shall be spread to give a
and intermittent stopping of the paver is avoided. uniform texture free from clusters and open patches and
Paving shall cease when rain is imminent or when the shall be rolled in as described in clause 11 below.
surfaces to be paved are visibly wet.
11 COMPACTION
09 JOINTS The mix shall be rolled with steel-wheeled and
All joints between adjacent sections of the work shall be pneumatic-tyred rollers, in an approved sequence,
made by cutting back the layer against which the immediately after it has been laid, and such rolling shall
material is to be placed. All loose and incompletely be continued for only as long as it is effective and does
compacted material shall be removed. A cutting wheel not have any detrimental effect. Only steel-wheeled
shall be used for cutting longitudinal joints. rollers will be permitted for compacting open-graded
mixtures, although rubber-tyred rollers shall be on
In the case of open-graded surfacing, the joints of standby if required.
adjacent lanes shall not be cut.
As many rollers as may be necessary to provide the
Joints shall be either at right angles or parallel to the specified pavement density and the required surface
direction of paving, and in the case of roads, any joints texture shall be used. While only the surfacing is being
in the final layer of the surfacing shall, wherever rolled, the roller wheels shall be kept moist with just
possible, correspond with the lane markings. Joints in sufficient water to prevent the material from being picked
lower layers shall be offset by not less than 150 mm up. After longitudinal joints and edges have been
from joints in subsequent layers. compacted, the rolling shall start longitudinally at the
Before a new layer is placed next to an existing layer, sides and gradually progress towards the centre of the
except in the case of open-graded mixes, the cut edge pavement, except on super elevated curves or where the
of the existing layer shall be painted with a thin coat of road or parking area has a straight cross-fall, in which
bituminous emulsion of the same type used for the tack case the rolling shall begin on the low side and progress
coat, if so directed by the Engineer. to the higher side, uniformly lapping each preceding
track, to cover the entire surface. During initial rolling of
Joints shall be neat and shall have the same texture the mix (break-down rolling) the rollers shall move at a
and density as the remainder of the asphalt course. All slow but uniform speed (not exceeding 5 km/h) with the
joints shall be marked out with chalk lines prior to drive wheel of the roller nearest to the paver.
cutting.
The sequence of rollers used in compaction shall be at
The outside edge of the completed asphalt course shall the discretion of the Contractor, provided the completed
be trimmed along the shoulder and shall be parallel to pavement shall have a density equal to or exceeding
the centre line to give a finished width within the 97 percent, minus the percentage voids in the design
tolerances specified, as shown on the Drawings. mix, of the theoretical maximum density determined as
Any fresh mixture accidentally spread onto existing described in TMH1 Method C4.
work at a joint shall be carefully removed by brooming it
During the construction of an asphalt surfacing with
back onto the uncompacted work with stiff brooms, to
rolled-in chips, the asphalt shall be paver-compacted,
avoid the formation of irregularities at the joint.
whereupon precoated chips shall be spread at the
Whenever the paving operation is stopped due to a lack
specified rate.
of mixture, the Contractor shall form a proper joint as
specified above, if so directed by the Engineer.

606-7
When the asphalt has reached the correct temperature, (b) Grade (for roads)
the chips shall be rolled in so that they are firmly Deviation from the specified longitudinal grade on
bedded in the asphalt. Care shall be taken not to roll account of deviations from the specified levels
the chips flush with the asphalt but to leave them shall not exceed the values given in
slightly proud. subclause 05.05 of section 601.
The procedure for compacting the asphalt and rolling in (c) Width
the chips to produce the desired surface texture and
specified degree of compaction, shall be determined on The average width of both asphalt base and
a trial section as described in clause 12. surfacing, where no kerbing has been installed
shall be at least equal to that shown on the
The following requirements shall apply to rolling and Drawings and nowhere shall the outer edge of the
compacting generally: layer be inside the lines shown on the Drawings.
(a) The material shall not be displaced excessively in a (d) Thickness
longitudinal or transverse direction, especially when
The thickness tolerances referred to in
gears are changed or the rollers are stopped or subclause 05.02 of section 902 shall be as follows:
started.
D90 base = 15 mm surfacing = 5 mm
(b) No cracks or hair cracks shall be formed and the
bond with the underlying layer shall not be broken. Dmax base = 20 mm surfacing = 8 mm
(c) The density shall be uniform over the entire area of Dave base = 5 mm surfacing = 2 mm
the layer. The thickness shall be determined from carefully
(d) The tyre pressure of the pneumatic rollers shall be controlled levels taken in exactly the same
adjusted to the maximum that can be carried by the position before and after construction and/or from
mixture without excessive displacement. cores drilled from the completed layer.
(e) In restricted areas where the specified rollers (e) Cross-section (for roads)
cannot be used, compaction shall be carried out
When tested with a 3 m straight-edge laid at right
with hand- operated mechanical compaction
angles to the road centre line, the surface shall
equipment or approved miniature vibratory rollers.
not deviate from the bottom of the straight-edge
by more than 10 mm.
12 LAYING OF TRIAL SECTIONS
At any transverse sections the difference in level
Before the Contractor commences with the construction between any two points shall not vary by more
of any asphalt base or surfacing, he shall demonstrate, than 20 mm from their difference in level
2
by laying a trial section 200 m in area, that the computed from the cross-sections shown on the
equipment and processes he proposes to use will Drawings.
enable him to construct the particular asphalt course in
accordance with the specified requirements. Only when (f) Surface regularity (for roads)
such a trial section has been satisfactorily laid and
When tested with a rolling straight-edge as
finished, and complies with the specified requirements,
described in clause 09 of section 903, the
will the Contractor be allowed to commence with
number of surface irregularities shall not exceed
construction of the permanent work.
those given below:
The Engineer will determine the position where the trial (i) The average number of irregularities per
section is to be placed so that, if the trial section is 100 m equal to or exceeding 6 mm, when
approved, it will form part of the permanent work. taken over a 300 m - 600 m length, shall not,
in respect of -
13 PROTECTION AND MAINTENANCE
a gap-graded asphalt with rolled-in chips,
The Contractor shall protect the asphalt base and exceed 4
asphalt surfacing from all damage until the work is
finally accepted by the Employer and shall maintain the other asphalt, exceed 2
surfacing work until the end of the maintenance period. (ii) The number of irregularities equal to or
Any damage occurring to the completed base or exceeding 6 mm, when taken over 100 m
surfacing, except fair wear and tear on surfacing during sections, shall not, in respect of -
the maintenance period, or any defects which may
develop on account of faulty workmanship, shall be a gap-graded asphalt with
made good by the Contractor at his own expense and to rolled-in chips, exceed 6
the satisfaction of the Engineer.
other asphalt, exceed 3
14 CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES AND FINISH (iii) The maximum value of any individual
REQUIREMENTS irregularity when measured with the rolling
straight-edge or a 3 m straight-edge laid
14.01 Construction tolerances parallel to the road centre line, shall not
The completed sections of the asphalt base and exceed 10 mm.
surfacing shall comply with the requirements for grade, (g) Multiple-layer base
width, thickness, cross-section and smoothness which
are as follows: Where the base consists of more than one layer,
the requirements specified in respect of width
(a) Level
and thickness shall apply to the combined layers.
The level tolerances referred to in subclause 05.01 The requirements for cross- section, smoothness
of section 902 shall be as follows: and grade shall apply to the final layer only, but
H90 ±15 mm the lower layers shall be so constructed that
Hmax ±20 mm these requirements can be met in the final layer.

606-8
14.02 Spread rate of rolled-in chips 15.02 Special tests
The tolerance in the spread rate of rolled-in chips shall (a) The test for air permeability of asphalt, when
2 2
be 0,9 kg/m for 13,2 mm chips and 1,1 kg/m for required in the Project Specifications, shall be
19 mm chips. conducted as described in document TRH8
(Appendix C), published by the Department of
14.03 Grading
Transport.
The combined aggregate and filler grading shall not
(b) The creep test on gap-graded asphalt shall be
deviate from the approved target grading for the
carried out in accordance with method C6T of
working mix by more than the following:
TMH1. The appropriate minimum creep modulus
Aggregate size: will be given in the Project Specifications.
Allowable deviation
Material passing
from approved target 15.03 Process control
through the following
grading (%)
sieves (mm) The minimum frequency of testing that will be required
37,500 ± 0 from the Contractor in terms of clause 05 of section 901
for the purpose of process control shall be as set out in
26,500 ± 4,0
table 606/5.
19,000 ± 4,0
13,200 ± 5,0 Table 606/5
9,500 ± 5,0 Testing frequency
6,700 ± 5,0 Test
One test per -
4,750 ± 5,0
Aggregate
2,360 ± 4,0
1,180 ± 4,0 ACV 5 000 m³
0,600 ± 4,0
Flakiness index 2 500 m³
0,300 ± 4,0
0,150 ± 3,0 Polishing index
Every change in
0,075 ± 1,5 Immersion index
aggregate
Absorption
14.04 Binder content
Sand equivalent 200 m³
The binder content in asphalt mixes shall not deviate from
the specified binder content by more than the following: Grading (when stockpiling) 300 m³
Mixtures
Maximum deviation of sample mean from
Sample the specified binder content (% binder) Grading and bitumen content 200 t (2/day min.)
size (No) Gap and semi- Cont. and open- Marshall stability, flow and
gap-graded mixes graded mixes 1 per day
voids
2 0,51 0,37 Every time the
3 0,44 0,33 Marshall mix design
aggregate or design
Air permeability
4 0,41 0,30 changes
5 0,38 0,28
Creep test 1 per day
6 0,36 0,27
7 0,35 0,26 Constructed layers
8 0,33 0,25 800 m² with a
Compaction minimum of 2 tests per
Maximum deviation of any single test section of road
value from the specified binder content 1 000 m² + continuous
Sample (% binder) Spread rate of rolled-in chips check on bulk rate of
size (No) Cont. and spread
Gap and semi-
open-graded
gap-graded mixes Construction tolerances
mixes
2 0,76 0,54 200 m with a minimum
3 0,81 0,58 Width (for roads) of 2 tests per section
4 0,84 0,60 of road
5 0,87 0,62 20 m (1 test = 3 pts
6 0,89 0,64 Surface levels
per cross-section)*
7 0,91 0,65
8 0,92 0,66 20 m (1 test = 3 pts
Layer thickness
per cross-section)*
15 TESTING
Cross-section (for roads) 20 m
15.01 Sampling
Smoothness (for roads) 40 m²
Sampling of asphalt mixes shall normally be carried out
at the mixing plant, but the Engineer may direct that
sampling be also carried out at the paver if there is any * For parking areas one test shall equal a series of
danger of segregation of the mix during transportation points, 5 m apart, in a straight line across the full
and spreading. width of the parking area, at every 20 m cross-section.

606-9
15.04 Routine inspection and testing Item Unit
Routine inspection and testing will be carried out by the 606.02 Asphalt surfacing
Engineer in accordance with the provisions of clause 09 (specified thickness indicated)
of section 902 to test the completed work for 2
compliance with the dimensional tolerances, quality of 606.02.01 Continuously graded square metre (m )
material, density of compaction and any further (grade stated) or ton (t)
requirements stated in this section. 2
606.02.02 Gap-graded square metre (m )
Compliance with the requirements specified in respect (stone content indicated) or ton (t)
of certain properties will be controlled by the judgment
scheme as specified in section 902. 606.02.03 Open-graded (grade
2
stated) square metre (m )
Any materials or workmanship which does not comply or ton (t)
with the specified requirements shall be removed and 2
replaced with materials and workmanship which do 606.02.04 Semi-gap-graded square metre (m )
comply with the Specifications, or, if the Engineer so or ton (t)
permits, shall be repaired as specified in section 901 to
comply with the specified requirements after they have The unit of measurement shall be the square metre of
been repaired. asphalt surfacing constructed to the specified thickness.
When specified in the Project Specifications and/or
15.05 The coring of asphalt layers indicated in the Schedule of Quantities, the unit of
measurement shall be the ton of asphalt constructed as
The Contractor shall provide suitable coring machines specified and measured according to the certified mass-
capable of cutting 100 mm diameter cores from the measuring bridge tickets issued in respect of the
completed asphalt layers. The Contractor shall be paid mixture used. No payment will be made for wasted
in accordance with the relevant pay item for cutting any material.
cores ordered by the Engineer. No payment will be
made for cores that do not pass the test. The tendered rates shall include full compensation for
procuring, furnishing, heating, mixing, placing and
The cost of extracting cores for process control shall be compaction of all materials as specified, as well as
included in the Contractor's rates for the construction of process control testing, protecting and maintaining the
asphalt pavement layers and shall not be paid for work as specified.
separately.
When the unit of measurement is a ton of asphalt, the
All core holes shall be neatly repaired with asphalt and tendered rate shall also include full compensation for
compacted to the specified density. Wherever possible, supplying and installing a weighbridge, and for weighing
the cores shall be filled with the same mix as that used the material.
for the layer tested.
The tendered rate for subitems 606.02.02 and
606.02.04 shall not include compensation for rolled-in
16 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT chips.
Item Unit Item Unit
606.01 Asphalt base (specified 606.03 Asphalt surfacing on bridge
thickness indicated) deck (type and thickness
2
606.01.01 Using bitumen (state type): indicated) square metre (m )
2
606.01.01.01 Continuously graded square metre (m ) The unit of measurement shall be the square metre of
or ton (t) surfacing completed to the nominal thickness indicated.
2
Where the bituminous surfacing is tapered in thickness,
606.01.01.02 Semi-gap-graded square metre (m ) the nominal thickness shall be taken as the average
(maximum size indicated) or ton (t) thickness of the layer.
606.01.02 Etc for other binders. Payment shall be made as described for item 606.02,
except that the tendered rate shall also include
The unit of measurement shall be the square metre of compensation for any variation in thickness within the
asphalt base constructed to the specified thickness. specified tolerance for bridge-deck levels.
When specified in the Project Specifications and/or
indicated in the Schedule of Quantities, the unit of Where gap-graded asphalt is specified, the tendered
measurement shall be the ton of asphalt constructed as rate shall not include compensation for rolled-in chips.
specified and measured according to the certified mass-
measuring bridge tickets issued in respect of the Item Unit
mixture used. No payment will be made for wasted
606.04 Rolled-in chips (nominal size
material.
indicated) in surfacing ton (t)
The tendered rates shall include full compensation for
procuring, furnishing, heating, mixing, placing and The unit of measurement shall be the ton of rolled-in
compaction of all materials as well as process control chips applied at the specified rate and measured loose
testing, protecting and maintaining the work as in the hauling vehicles.
specified. The tendered rate shall include full compensation for
When the unit of measurement is a ton of asphalt, the the procuring, furnishing, precoating, spreading, and
tendered rate shall also include full compensation for rolling in of the precoated chips, and for any additional
supplying and installing a weighbridge, and for weighing costs resulting from more difficult construction of the
the material. asphalt surfacing with rolled-in chips.

606-10
Item Unit The tendered rate shall include full compensation for
drilling the cores as directed, for all plant, fuel, labour
606.05 Tack coat of 30% stable and other incidentals necessary and for repairing the
grade emulsion litre ( ) drilled holes.
The unit of measurement shall be the litre of 30% stable
Item Unit
grade emulsion applied as specified.
606.10 Saw-cutting of asphalt,
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for
asphalt base or paving
procuring, furnishing and application of the material as
specified. (depth of cut indicated) metre (m)
The unit of measurement shall be the saw-cut length in
Item Unit
the original position, measured after the excavation and
606.06 Binder variations removal of the material.

606.06.01 Penetration grade bitumens ton (t) A cutting wheel shall be used and the saw-cut, unless
otherwise specified, shall be either at right angles or
606.06.02 Etc for other binders parallel to the centreline of the road.
The unit of measurement in respect of increases or The tendered rate shall include full compensation for
decreases in the bituminous binder from that specified the provision of all plant, tools, consumables and
in the nominal mix shall be the ton. materials and labour for the cutting of a neat joint as
well as the removal of any loose or incompletely
Payment for variations shall be made as specified in
compacted material. No distinction will be made for the
clause 28 of section 001.
depth of the cut or the number of cuts that may be
Item Unit required to achieve the specified depth or to cut through
the thickness of the surfacing.
606.07 Variations in active filler content
606.07.01 Cement ton (t)
606.07.02 Lime ton (t)
606.07.03 Milled granulated blast furnace slag ton (t)
606.07.04 Fly-ash ton (t)
The unit of measurement in respect of increases or
decreases in the active filler content for base and
surfacing mixtures from the content specified in the
nominal mix shall be the ton. No payment shall be made
for inert filler added by the Contractor for the purpose of
achieving the specified gradings.
Payment for variations shall be made as specified in
clause 28 of section 001.

Item Unit
606.08 Trial sections
(nominal thickness
2
indicated) square metre (m )
The unit of measurement shall be the square metre of
asphalt trial section constructed as ordered.
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for
the construction of the trial section of asphalt base or
surfacing complete as specified, and for the application
of rolled-in precoated chips, if specified.
The prime coat will be paid for under item 605.01
provided the trial section is approved.

Item Unit
606.09 100 mm cores in
asphalt paving number (No)
The unit of measurement shall be the number of
100 mm cores drilled and recovered as instructed by
the Engineer, to be tested by him. No separate payment
shall be made for cores drilled as part of the
Contractor's obligations under process control, the cost
of which shall be included in the rates tendered for the
various items of asphalt paving. No payment will be
made for cores that fail the test.

606-11
SERIES 6 : ROADS AND PARKING AREAS (c) Flakiness
The maximum flakiness index, when tested in
SECTION 607 : BITUMINOUS SURFACE accordance with TMH1 Method B3, shall be as
TREATMENTS follows:

CONTENTS Nominal size of Maximum flakiness

aggregate (mm) index (%)
01 SCOPE
02 MATERIALS 19,0 25
03 PLANT AND EQUIPMENT
04 WEATHER LIMITATIONS 13,2 25
05 HEATING OF BITUMINOUS BINDERS 9,5 30
06 PRECOATING OF AGGREGATES
07 PREPARATION OF AREAS TO BE SURFACED
08 GRADES OF BINDER TO BE USED 02.02 Stockpiling
09 CONSTRUCTION OF SURFACE TREATMENTS Sites for the stockpiling of aggregate shall be prepared
10 SLURRY SEAL in such a manner that no grass, mud, dirt or other
11 AREAS INACCESSIBLE TO MECHANICAL deleterious material will be included when the
EQUIPMENT aggregate is loaded for use.
12 DUST CONTROL
13 OPENING TO TRAFFIC Access roads to stockpile sites shall be prepared and
14 BLEEDING maintained in such a way that, whilst aggregate is being
15 MAINTENANCE transported to or from the stockpiles, no dirt is
16 TOLERANCES AND FINISH REQUIREMENTS conveyed by any vehicle wheels onto the areas to be
17 TESTING surfaced or resurfaced.
18 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
Stockpiles shall be so sited that they will not be
exposed to excessive contamination by dust caused by
01 SCOPE construction traffic. Aggregate contaminated to the
This section covers the materials, methods of extent that it contains more than the allowable
construction and requirements for a double-seal surface percentage of material which will pass through the
treatment as well as a surface treatment with aggregate 0,425 mm sieve, shall not be used for surfacing.
and slurry seal.
02.03 Aggregate for slurry seal
02 MATERIALS The aggregate for slurry seal shall be an approved
crusher sand obtained from a parent rock with an ACV
02.01 Aggregate for surface treatments which does not exceed 30, or a mixture of crusher sand
and clean natural sand. The mixture shall not contain
The aggregate shall consist of approved crushed stone more than 25% of natural sand. The aggregate shall be
which complies with the requirements of SANS 1083, clean, tough, durable and angular in shape and shall
and the grading, flakiness index and hardness shall be conform to the grading requirements as set out in
as follows for each nominal size of stone: table 607/2.
(a) Grading The sand equivalent according to TMH1 Method B19
The grading shall comply with the requirements shall be a minimum of 35.
set out in table 607/1. In order to ensure proper adhesion, the immersion
(b) Hardness index of briquettes made from slurry-seal aggregate and
80/100 penetration-grade bitumen shall not be less than
When tested in accordance with TMH1 Method B1, 75 when tested in accordance with TMH1 Method C5.
the aggregate crushing value shall not exceed 21.

Table 607/1

Percentage passing by mass

Sieve size (mm) 19,0 mm
13,2 mm 9,5 mm 6,7 mm 4,75 mm
nominal
nominal size nominal size nominal size nominal size
size

26,50 100 - - - -
19,00 85 – 100 100 - - -
13,20 0 – 30 85 – 100 100 - -
9,50 0–5 0 – 30 85 – 100 100 -
6,70 - 0–5 0 – 30 85 – 100 100
4,75 - - 0–5 0 – 30 85 – 100
3,35 - - - 0–5 0 – 30
2,36 - - - - 0–5

Fine aggregate passing

a 0,425 mm sieve 0,5 0,5 0,5 0,5 1,0
(maximum)

607-1
 Table 607/2 03.02 Bitumen distributor
The bitumen distributor shall comply with the requirements
Percentage passing by mass
Sieve size of subclause 03(a) of section 605.
(mm) Fine Medium Coarse
03.03 Chip spreaders
Grade Grade Grade
The chip spreaders shall be capable of uniformly
6,700 100 100 spreading the stone over widths which vary between
4,750 100 82 – 100 70 – 90 2,4 m and 4,0 m and shall be adjustable to permit
2,360 90 – 100 56 – 95 45 – 70 variations in the rate of application.
1,180 65 – 95 37 – 75 28 – 50 At least two chip spreaders shall be provided, and any
0,600 42 – 72 22 – 50 19 – 34 spreaders which are not self-propelled shall be of a type
0,300 23 – 48 15 – 37 12 – 25 that can be quickly attached to the rear of trucks and
0,150 10 – 27 7 – 20 7 – 18 can operate while they are backing over the stone chips
which are being spread.
0,075 4 – 12 4 – 12 2-8
03.04 Rollers
02.04 Cement filler for slurry seal Sufficient rollers of each of the following types shall be
available at the Works in order to maintain the required
Cement and blast-furnace cement (CEM III ) shall work tempo:
comply with the requirements of SANS 50197-1.
(a) Pneumatic-tyred rollers
Only one of the above materials shall be used
throughout, as alternative usage will produce Pneumatic-tyred rollers shall be of a self-propelled
undesirable colour differences in the surface. type equipped with smooth pneumatic tyres of
uniform size and diameter. The mass of the roller
02.05 Bituminous binders shall not be less than 15 t.

Bituminous binders shall comply with the following The rollers shall be equipped with suitable devices
specifications: to keep the wheels wet and clean during operation.

(a) Road tars The wheels of the roller shall be so spaced that one
pass of the roller will provide one complete
(i) High-temperature coke-oven tars SANS 748 coverage equal to the rolling width of the machine.
(ii) Low-temperature tars and tars The total operating mass and tyre pressure may be
varied by the Engineer, at his discretion. Individual
manufactured from gas-works
tyre pressures shall not differ from one another by
crude SANS 749 more than 35 kPa.
(iii) PVC tars which shall be prepared (b) Steel flat-wheeled rollers
by mixing 1,5% by mass of
Corvic D60/11 polyvinyl-chloride Steel flat-wheeled rollers shall be self-propelled,
with Grade 45/50 or 50/55 tars three-wheeled or tandem rollers with a mass of
between 6 t and 8 t and shall be equipped with
which comply with SANS 748.
suitable devices for cleaning and moistening the
(b) Bitumens wheels.
(i) Penetration-grade bitumens SANS 307 03.05 Brooms
(ii) Cut-back bitumens SANS 308 (a) Dragbroom
(c) Bitumen emulsions The dragbroom shall be of a size, type and mass
that will enable the chips to be distributed evenly
(i) Anionic emulsions SANS 309
over the surface without dislodging stone chips from
(ii) Cationic emulsions SANS 548 the binder.
(b) Rotary broom
The type and grade of bituminous binder to be used for
each type of bituminous surface treatment shall be as An approved rotary broom, complete with towing
specified below or in the Project Specifications. vehicle fitted with smooth pneumatic tyres, shall be
available at all times.
When bitumen rubber is specified for use as a
bituminous binder, the necessary specification will be 03.06 Mixer for slurry seal
incorporated in the Project Specifications.
A mixer of a type approved by the Engineer shall be
provided. It may be either a batch mixer or a
03 PLANT AND EQUIPMENT continuous-type mixer. The paddles of the mixer shall
be so designed to ensure a complete blending of the
03.01 General
slurry constituents.
All plant and equipment used for the Works shall be of
an adequately rated capacity and in good working 03.07 Spreader box for slurry seal
order. A spreader box of a type approved by the Engineer
All plant and equipment which will be operated during shall be used to spread the slurry.
construction of the surface treatment shall be free of The spreader box shall be so constructed that the
any binder, fuel or oil leaks and no refuelling or weight is distributed on metal skids, in such a way that
servicing of any equipment will be allowed to take place no damage is done to the surface when the box is in
while such equipment is on the surface under treatment. operation.

607-2
Soft rubber belting shall be so attached to the During hot weather slurry operations shall be
framework that no slurry will spill over the sides of the suspended as soon as the aggregate becomes
spreader box when the box is in operation. displaced by the spreader box or squeegees.
The spreader box shall be capable of spreading a When strong winds are blowing which are likely to
uniform application of slurry seal in adjustable widths interfere with the proper execution of the work, no
from 2,4 m to 4,0 m at specified rates, and it shall have surfacing, especially the spraying of binder, shall be
efficient mechanical means of adjusting the rates and done.
widths of application as specified.
05 HEATING OF BITUMINOUS BINDERS
03.08 Precoating plant
The temperature ranges between which bituminous
Chips may be precoated in any suitable plant which is binders are to be heated shall be as given in table 607/3.
capable of coating the chips uniformly.
Binders stored in a heated condition shall be kept in a
03.09 Miscellaneous equipment container with a properly functioning circulation system
Sufficient equipment for handling and hauling aggregate and a securely fitting lid.
and binder shall be provided in order to ensure the Binders that have been heated above the maximum
prompt and continuous covering by bituminous temperatures indicated in this table shall not be used
materials as specified. The Contractor shall have and shall be removed from the Site. Every effort shall
available all the necessary ancillary equipment and be made to maintain the spraying temperature of the
hand tools for carrying out the work efficiently. binder to within 50 °C of the recommended
03.10 Front-end loader temperature.
A front-end loader with a sufficient capacity to ensure a 06 PRECOATING OF AGGREGATES
continuous supply of aggregate from the stockpiles into
the trucks shall be available for this work. The Engineer Where hydrophillic or any other aggregate is
shall have the right to call for a stand-by loader if there encountered which is difficult to use, the Engineer may
is any doubt as to the efficiency or capacity of the front- order that the stone chips be precoated, as described
end loader provided. below.

04 WEATHER LIMITATIONS 06.01 The precoating of aggregate

The minimum road-surface temperatures at which the The following method may be used for aggregate
spraying of the different types and grades of binder can intended for immediate use or for stockpiling.
be done are -
The untreated stockpile of the aggregate shall be
40/45 EVT tar 10°C sprayed thoroughly with water, which shall be allowed to
45/50 EVT tar 16°C drain off. The damp aggregate shall then be loaded into
a front-end loader (1 m3 bucket), and 10 litre to 12 litre
50/55 EVT tar 21°C of an approved precoating fluid shall be sprayed evenly
150/200 penetration-grade bitumen 21°C over the aggregate by means of a watering can.
80/100 penetration-grade bitumen 25°C Duomene T or any other similar wetting agent approved
MC-800 cut-back bitumen 10°C by the Engineer shall be added to the precoating fluid at
a rate of 0,5% of the volume of the precoating fluid.
MC-3000 cut-back bitumen 10°C
The mixture of aggregate and precoating fluid shall then
Bitumen emulsion 10°C be dumped on a site prepared as specified in
No bituminous work shall be done during foggy or rainy subclause 02.02. This process shall be repeated until a
weather, and when a cold wind is blowing, the stockpile of approximately 15 m3 to 20 m3 has been built
temperatures mentioned above shall be increased by up.
3°C to 6°C as may be directed by the Engineer.
This stockpile shall then be turned over with the front-
Slurry seal shall not be applied at an air temperature of end loader until the aggregate has been uniformly
less than 7°C when temperatures are rising, or at less coated with the binder. Three complete turnings of the
than 13°C when temperatures are dropping. stockpile will probably be required.
Table 607/3
Maximum storage temperature in °C Heating and spraying temperature in °C
Materials
Over 24 hours Up to 24 hours Minimum Maximum Recommended
Road tars
40/45 EVT 80 90 100 115 110
45/50 EVT 90 100 105 120 115
50/55 EVT 100 105 110 125 120
Penetration-grade bitumens
150/200 115 165 150 175 165
80/100 125 175 165 190 175
Cut-back bitumens
RC-250 60 90 90 115 100
MC-800 75 125 11 135 125
MC-3000 100 155 0 155 145
Bituminous emulsions Air
60% Air temp 60 temp 60 60
65% Air temp 60 Air 60 60

607-3
06.02 Precautions No payment shall be made for bituminous binder
material if it is applied in excess of the rate ordered,
Areas used for stockpiling the precoated aggregate
plus the tolerance allowed, unless such overspray in the
shall be so sited that the minimum amount of dust will
case of a first application, in the opinion of the
be deposited on the chips. Where necessary, bypasses
Engineer, can be satisfactorily corrected by the
and access roads in the immediate proximity shall be
adjustment of the application rate of the second spray.
watered or surfaced.
The nominal rates of application of bituminous binders
During the wet season, when there is danger of the
and the variations in application rate, shall, unless
precoating fluid being washed from the aggregate, the otherwise specified, be measured at spraying
stockpiles must be covered with tarpaulins or similar
temperature.
protective coverings.
The nominal rates of application shall be for
07 PREPARATION OF AREAS TO BE SURFACED tendering purposes only and will not necessarily be
used during construction. The actual rates of
The primed surface shall be cleaned of all dust, dirt, application to be used on the Site shall in all cases
dung, oil or any other foreign materials that may be be as instructed by the Engineer.
deleterious to the surfacing. Where the prime coat has
been damaged, it shall be repaired by hand-brushing or Where the expressions "net bitumen" or "net bitumen
spraying the priming material over the damaged quantity" are used elsewhere in these Specifications to
portions. specify the application rates for the binder, they shall be
taken to mean penetration-grade bitumen, plus the
08 GRADES OF BINDER TO BE USED volatiles it normally contains, but shall exclude any
water, emulsifier or volatile oils added to manufacture
08.01 Tack coat bitumen emulsions or cutback bitumens. The nominal
rates of application of the tack coat and aggregate for a
The tack coat for both surface treatments shall consist double-seal surface treatment are given in table 607/4,
of one of the following binders, whichever is specified in and for a surface treatment with aggregate and slurry
the Project Specifications or the Schedule of Quantities seal in table 607/5. The nominal application rates of the
or ordered by the Engineer: second application of bituminous binder and aggregate
(a) RTH 45/50 or RTL 45/50 road tar for a double-seal surface treatment are given in
table 607/6.
(b) 150/200 penetration-grade bitumen
Table 607/4
(c) PVC tar
DOUBLE-SEAL SURFACE TREATMENT :
(d) MC-3000 or MC-800 cutback bitumen FIRST APPLICATION
(e) 60%, 65% or 70% spray-grade emulsion.
Nominal rates of application
08.02 Second application of binder
Nominal size of Tack coat
The second application of binder for double seal shall aggregate (mm) (litres of tar or Aggregate
consist of one of the binders, specified in
net bitumen (m3 per m2)
subclause 08.01 and for an aggregate with slurry seal, 2
of 30% or 60% bitumen emulsion, whichever is per m )
specified in the Project Specifications or the Schedule 19,0 1,2 0,014
of Quantities or ordered by the Engineer. 13,2 1,0 0,009
Where thinning by water of a bitumen emulsion is
applied, the requirements of TRH3 shall be complied Table 607/5
with.
AGGREGATE WITH SLURRY SEAL
08.03 Slurry seal
Nominal rates of application
The binder used for slurry seal shall be an anionic
stable-grade emulsion (60% bitumen). Nominal size of Tack coat
aggregate (mm) (litres of tar or Aggregate
09 CONSTRUCTION OF SURFACE TREATMENTS net bitumen 3 2
(m per m )
per m2)
09.01 General
The double-seal surface treatment shall be constructed 19,0 1,2 0,013
using either 19,0 mm and 9,5 mm aggregate or 13,2 0,6 0,009
13,2 mm and 6,7 mm aggregate and the surface
treatment with aggregate and slurry seal shall be Table 607/6
constructed using either a 19,0 mm or 13,2 mm
aggregate and the application of a slurry seal in one or DOUBLE-SEAL SURFACE TREATMENT :
two coats. SECOND APPLICATION
The size of aggregate to be used in each type of
surface treatment will be specified in the Project Nominal rates of application
Specifications or the Schedule of Quantities. Nominal size of Tack coat
aggregate (mm) Aggregate
(litres of tar or net 3 2
09.02 Rates of application 2 (m per m )
bitumen per m )
All binders, aggregates and slurry used in the various
types of bituminous surface treatment shall be applied 9,5 0,8 0,006
at the rates of application as determined by the 6,7 0,8 0,005
Engineer after tests have been made on the materials
proposed for use.

607-4
09.03 Application of tack coat and aggregate used in the tack coat, it must be done not less than
14 days in summer and not less than 21 days in winter
A bituminous tack coat which consists of the type and
after the tack coat and aggregate have been applied.
grade of specified binder shall, for both surface
treatments, be sprayed onto the primed surface over 09.07 The second application of bituminous binder
the full specified width of the surfacing. and aggregate for a double-seal surface
Immediately after the binder has been sprayed, it shall treatment
be covered with aggregate of the specified size and The bituminous binder specified shall be applied and
applied by means of chip spreaders. shall be followed by the second layer of aggregate of
Chip spreaders shall commence to spread the the size specified.
aggregate as closely as possible behind the distributor. This second application of binder shall take place within
The chip spreader shall be operated in such a manner 48 hours after the application of the tack coat when
that the tack coat shall be covered with aggregate bitumen is used for the tack coat, and not less than
before the wheels of the chip spreader, or truck pass 10 days after the application of the tack coat when tar
over the uncovered tack coat. All chips shall be spread or cutback bitumen is used in the tack coat.
within 30 minutes of the binder having been sprayed.
Initial rolling of the aggregate followed by broom
The quantity of bitumen sprayed in any single spray dragging and final rolling shall be carried out as specified
operation shall be governed by the quantity of above in subclauses 09.04 and 09.05 respectively.
aggregate and the number of trucks available, which
shall be sufficient to ensure the continuous application The aggregate for the second layer shall be precoated
of stone behind the distributor. with precoating fluid as specified in clause 06, when so
required in the Project Specifications, or if so directed
09.04 Initial rolling of aggregate by the Engineer.
As soon as the aggregate has been applied, rolling
shall commence with a self-propelled 10 t pneumatic- 09.08 Fog or mist spray for a double-seal surface
tyred roller which is operated parallel to the direction of treatment
surfacing, until the entire surface has been covered at When required in the Project Specifications or if so
least three times by the wheels of the roller. In the case directed by the Engineer, in writing, a fog or mist spray
of roads, rolling shall commence at the shoulders and of 30% or 60% spray-grade emulsion shall be applied to
shall move towards the crown of the road. the surface of the second layer of stone by means of a
09.05 Broom dragging and the final rolling of pressure distributor at the rate of application specified
aggregate by the Engineer.

After the bituminous binder has set sufficiently to 09.09 Slurry seal
prevent any aggregate from being dislodged, the Slurry seal shall comply with the requirements of and
surface shall be slowly dragged with a dragbroom to shall be applied as specified in clause 10 below.
ensure an even distribution of the aggregate. If there
are areas which are deficient in stone chips, additional 09.10 Transverse joints between binder sprays
material shall be added by hand to obtain a carpet with
one layer of stone shoulder to shoulder. In order to prevent overlapping at the junctions of
separate binder applications, the first application at a
If there are areas with an excess of stone chips, such transverse joint shall be covered with twine-reinforced
excess shall be removed by hand. The importance of building paper for a sufficient distance back from the
applying only a single layer of stone is stressed. Every joint to ensure that the distributor is operating at the
care shall be taken to avoid over-application of stone. required rate before the untreated surface is reached,
and also to prevent additional binder application onto
When the spreading of aggregate has been completed,
the previously treated section. The same method shall
the surface shall be rolled with a 10 t pneumatic-tyred
be used to ensure a neat joint at the end of the run.
roller for two to four coverages. Final rolling shall then
be done with a steel flat-wheeled roller with a 6 t to 8 t 09.11 Protection of kerbs, channels, etc
mass, in the manner as specified for initial rolling until
every portion of the area concerned has been covered Kerbs, channels, manholes, guardrails, bridge railings
by at least two to four passes of the roller, provided that and any other structures that may be soiled by
only a limited amount of crushing of the aggregate bituminous binders during spraying operations shall be
takes place, but if, in the opinion of the Engineer, covered with suitable plastic sheeting during spraying
general crushing occurs under the rollers, such rolling operations. The sheeting shall be kept firmly in position
shall be stopped regardless of the number of passes by soil, stones or adhesive tape in such a manner that it
completed by the roller. will not be lifted or be blown away during windy
conditions but will keep the areas to be protected fully
The surface shall be well-knit and shall have a uniform covered.
appearance without any roller-tyre marks; all aggregate
contaminated by fuel, oil or grease shall be removed The use of paper bags, sand or other materials will not
and replaced with clean stone. be permitted in lieu of plastic sheeting and the
Contractor shall replace at his own cost any items that
09.06 The second application of bituminous have been soiled and cannot be cleaned entirely. The
binder for a surface treatment with painting of soiled surfaces will not be accepted as a
aggregate and slurry seal suitable remedy.
The required binder shall be sprayed at a nominal rate of
10 SLURRY SEAL
0,50 /m2 (net bitumen) in respect of 13,2 mm sized
2
aggregate and at 0,70 /m (net bitumen) in respect of 10.01 Condition of surface
19,0 mm sized aggregate. This must be done not less than The surface shall be rolled once with a light flat-wheeled
2 days after the application of the tack coat and aggregate roller early in the morning on the day of sealing in order to
when bitumen is used in the tack coat, and when tar is depress any loose stones that may have been displaced.

607-5
The surface shall be cleaned to remove all dust, mud, Before the slurry is applied, the surface shall be
leaves, etc, and shall have a uniform closely knit thoroughly cleaned and lightly sprinkled with water, but
appearance, with edges trimmed correctly to the no free water shall be present on the surface when the
specified width. slurry is applied.
10.02 Time for slurry application The slurry shall be applied in two layers in the case of
19,0 mm chips and in one layer in the case of 13,2 mm
After the second application of bituminous material has chips, unless otherwise specified in the Project
cured or dried out, a slurry seal shall be applied as Specifications or ordered by the Engineer.
specified.
For the first of two layers and also in the areas
10.03 Composition of slurry seal inaccessible to the spreader box, hand spreading of the
The slurry seal shall consist of a mix of the grade of slurry will be allowed. For the final layer the slurry shall
slurry seal aggregate ordered by the Engineer and be spread by means of a spreader box as specified in
specified in subclause 02.03 together with a 60% stable subclause 03.07.
grade emulsion, and filler and water in the proportions The nominal rate of application of slurry seal shall be as
as directed by the Engineer. The following proportions follows for a seal where the following is used:
shall apply in respect of tendering purposes only:
13,2 mm aggregate 0,006 m3/m2
Slurry seal aggregate (saturated volume) 1 m3 for one layer
Stable-grade emulsion 260 litre 19,0 mm aggregate
3
0,008 m /m
2

Cement, slagment or lime 0,01m

3 total for two layers
Water (as directed by the Engineer) approx 235 litre The rate of application of slurry shall be measured in
cubic metres of fine aggregate (saturated volume)
The saturated volume of slurry seal shall be determined contained in the slurry applied, per square metre of
by a correction being made in respect of bulking of surfacing.
moist aggregate, as described in pay item 607.07.
The nominal rates of application given above are
10.04 Mixing of slurry intended for tendering purposes only and the actual
rates of application on the Site shall be as directed by
A mixer of a type approved by the Engineer shall be
the Engineer. The slurry shall be placed in accordance
provided, which shall be in a good working order and
with the requirements of TRH3, unless otherwise
capable of producing uniform slurry from the
specified.
constituent materials. It may be either a batch mixer or
a continuous-type mixer. When the slurry is applied in two layers, the first layer of
slurry shall be struck off level with the tops of the stones
(a) Batch mixer in the aggregate layer so that the tops of the stones will
The slurry shall be mixed in an approved type of be just visible after the slurry has been applied.
mixer as specified in subclause 03.06. The second layer of slurry shall not be applied until the
The hopper of the mixer shall be filled with first layer has dried. Before the second layer of slurry is
aggregate and struck off with a straight-edge to applied, the surface shall, wherever possible, be
ensure that uniformly measured volumes of opened to traffic for as long as possible and as directed
aggregate are obtained for each mix. by the Engineer. On sections where this cannot be
done, the surface shall be well rolled with a pneumatic-
The required quantity of water shall be placed in tyred roller and the second layer applied after sufficient
the mixer, followed by the batch of aggregate to time has been allowed for the first layer to cure. The
which the cement, lime or slagment has been Engineer shall decide on the time necessary for proper
added. When the water has been thoroughly curing, which, in any case, shall be not less than
mixed with the aggregate, the emulsion shall be 24 hours.
added and mixed for at least 2 minutes.
The surface shall be thoroughly cleaned of all dust, dirt
All the components of the slurry seal shall be and foreign materials before the second layer of slurry
accurately proportioned, and due care shall be is applied.
taken and attention given to the sequence in which
the ingredients are introduced into the mixer, and The tops of the stone chips shall not be exposed after
to the period of mixing. Mixing shall be continued the second layer of slurry has been applied and the
until the materials in each batch are thoroughly emulsion has cured and set.
blended. For seals where 13,2 mm nominal-sized chips are used,
(b) Continuous mixer the slurry shall be applied in one layer only. The slurry
shall also be struck off so that the tops of the stone
Aggregate and mineral filler contained in separate chips will not be visible after the emulsion has set and
bins shall be fed into the mixer at controlled rates cured.
by way of metering devices. Water and asphalt
emulsion contained in separate tanks shall Where hand-spreading of slurry is allowed, the
similarly be pumped in to the mixer at controlled squeegees used for spreading shall be at least 1,2 m
rates by way of metering devices. The mixing of wide. The squeegee squad shall be allowed to complete
the slurry shall be at a suitable rate, adjusted to the spreading of each discharged batch before the next
ensure a complete blending of the ingredients and batch may be discharged.
uniformity of mix. Where spreading is carried out by means of the
10.05 Application of slurry seal spreader box, the slurry shall be discharged into the
spreader box by means of a chute, which shall be so
Material which, in the opinion of the Engineer, is not directed that an even supply of slurry is maintained
properly mixed or in which the emulsion shows signs of against the full width of the strike-off blade of the
having broken during mixing shall not be applied. spreader box.

607-6
Areas where an excess of slurry has been applied by emulsion shall be added. Mixing shall continue until the
the spreader box shall be corrected with hand aggregate is uniformly coated with bitumen.
squeegees immediately after the passage of the
spreader box. Before spreading the mixture, the surface shall be
prepared by painting it with one layer of bituminous
Should breaking of the emulsion, segregation of the mix emulsion, which must be allowed to dry.
or formation of lumps occur during the application of the
slurry, the slurry operations shall be discontinued at The mixture shall then be placed on the areas to be
once and any defective material shall be removed. surfaced and shall be screeded off to form a layer of
uniform thickness.
The slurry seal shall be applied in widths of between
2,5 m and 3,8 m, as the Engineer may direct. After the emulsion has broken and the layer has
Successive strips of slurry seal shall overlap attained sufficient stability, it shall be rolled with an
transversely by not less than 25 mm or more than approved flat-wheeled roller to obtain compaction.
150 mm.
The surface shall comply with the requirements
There shall be no overlapping on the longitudinal joint. specified in clause 16 of this section. The thickness of
Each application of slurry seal shall be laid accurately the layer shall be the same as that of the adjacent
next to the adjacent lane and any areas omitted shall be surface treatment.
rectified with squeegees immediately after the passage
of the spreader box. 11.03 Slurry

The Contractor shall make sure that both edges of the Where the bituminous surfacing consists of an
surface are finished to the specified widths and lines. application of aggregate with slurry seal, a slurry seal
All stones dislodged in the process of applying the shall be applied to the surface of the layer constructed
slurry shall be removed on the same day as that on as described above, at a rate of between 0,003 and
which the slurry seal has been applied. All spillage of 0,004 m3/m2 or as the Engineer may direct. This shall
slurry or excess slurry shall be neatly removed and be done simultaneously with the application of the final
buried. slurry on the other sections of the work so as to obtain
a uniform appearance.
A moist burlap drag shall be drawn behind the spreader
box to ensure an even textured finish, unless otherwise 12 DUST CONTROL
permitted by the Engineer.
Bypasses and construction roads shall be kept watered
The work must be so programmed that, in the case of
and damp during all surfacing operations and all dust
roads, the half road widths of slurry seal shall be
shall be removed from surfaces before any binder,
applied on successive days in order to complete a full
aggregate or slurry may be applied.
road width section within two days.
Any damage to the slurry seal by rain or traffic before The supply and application of water on bypasses shall
the slurry has cured shall be rectified by the Contractor be paid for separately as specified in section 102, but
at his own expense. payment for the watering of haul and construction roads
shall be included in the unit rates tendered for the
various types of surfacing used.
11 AREAS INACCESSIBLE TO MECHANICAL
EQUIPMENT 13 OPENING TO TRAFFIC
Areas inaccessible to mechanical equipment shall be The surfaced areas shall not be opened to traffic until
constructed as follows: the binder has set sufficiently to retain the aggregate,
11.01 Prime or, in the case of slurry seals, until the slurry has set
sufficiently so that it cannot be picked up by the wheels
Prime shall be applied to the base by hand spraying of passing traffic.
under the supervision of an experienced person. The
total application shall be controlled to determine The Contractor shall not allow any construction
whether the specified application rate is being obtained. equipment, which is likely to cause damage, to pass
over the completed surface treatment. The Engineer
11.02 Bituminous mixture shall be responsible for determining when any surfacing
is to be opened to public traffic.
A premixed bituminous mixture shall be prepared, which
shall consist of 9,5 mm nominal-sized aggregate,
6,7 mm nominal-sized aggregate and crusher sand 14 BLEEDING
which comply with the requirements of subclause 02.03, Should any bleeding occur during the currency of the
together with a 60% stable-grade emulsion prepared Contract or during the defects liability period and, in the
from 80/100 penetration-grade bitumen, in the following opinion of the Engineer, it can be attributed to the
proportions: failure of the Contractor to observe any of the
9,5 mm nominal-sized aggregate 1 part requirements of the Specifications or to use the correct
rates of application, or to any other omission or fault on
6,7 mm nominal-sized aggregate 1 part the part of the Contractor, any corrective work ordered
Crusher sand (fine grade) 1 part by the Engineer shall be at the Contractor's cost,
including the supply, precoating, stockpiling at selected
3
Net bitumen between 75 and 90 litre/m of dry aggregate sites and the later removal, if not used, of any
mix. aggregate reserved for corrective work during the
The ingredients shall be mixed in a suitable concrete or maintenance period or thereafter.
other type of mixer. Provision shall be made to heat the Where the reason for bleeding, in the opinion of the
aggregate in the mixer by a gas flame or by other Engineer, cannot be attributed to any fault or neglect on
means while the mixer is rotating. the part of the Contractor, the Employer shall pay at the
The aggregate shall be placed in the mixer and heated tendered rates for the cost of any remedial measures
to 100°C during mixing, after which the bituminous taken on the instructions of the Engineer.

607-7
Bleeding shall be corrected by one or more of the 15 MAINTENANCE
methods described below, as ordered by the Engineer:
The Contractor shall maintain the bituminous surface
• Method 1 : Single seal with slurry - Light until the work is finally accepted by the Employer. Any
bleeding damage caused to the surface or any defects that may
develop during the defects liability period, fair wear and
Nominal 6,7 mm stone which conforms to the
tear excepted, shall be corrected by the Contractor at
requirements of clause 02 shall be used. The aggregate his own expense and in a manner approved by the
shall be coated with creosote (Sacrosote 70 or a similar Engineer.
3
material) at the ratio of 12 /m , as described in
clause 06 of this section. 16 TOLERANCES AND FINISH REQUIREMENTS

If the binder of the existing surface has an oxidized film The completed bituminous work shall comply with the
or if the surfacing has been used by traffic for some following requirements regarding surface tolerances
time, it shall be treated either by power paraffin being and finish:
brushed in to soften the surface of the binder, or the (a) Level and grade
surface shall be softened with gas burners. This work
shall be done only on hot days. The requirements relating to the base on which
the surfacing is constructed shall apply.
The aggregate shall immediately be applied to the
3 2 (b) Width
surface at the rate of 0,004 m /m and rolled with a
heavy pneumatic-tyred roller until the aggregate is The edges of the surfacing not bounded by
kerbing, shall nowhere be inside the specified
firmly embedded. All loose stone not embedded shall be
edge line, with a maximum deviation of 15 mm
broomed off before the road is opened to traffic. When it outside the specified edge line.
is opened to traffic, any affected areas shall be
demarcated with traffic cones and speed-limit signs for (c) Cross-section
the first two days, and care shall be taken to remove all The requirements relating to the base on which
loose stone daily. the surfacing is constructed shall apply.
(d) Surface regularity
Areas where whip-off is excessive after the above
treatment has been carried out shall be retreated in The requirements relating to the base on which
accordance with the Engineer's instructions. the surfacing is constructed shall apply.

• Method 2 : Single seal with slurry - Severe bleeding (e) Rate of application
The maximum permissible variation from the rates
The method to be used shall be the same as for of application of bituminous binders, aggregates or
Method 1, except that the aggregate shall be nominal- slurry, as ordered by the Engineer, shall be plus or
sized 9,5 mm or 13,2 mm and that it should be spread at minus 5% of the rate of application required.
3 2 3 2
the rate of 0,007 m /m and 0,010 m /m respectively.
Table 607/7
• Method 3 : Bleeding of double seals
Test Minimum testing frequency
If the surface is non-uniform, i.e. partly bleeding and Materials
partly coarse textured, the surface shall be rectified by
Aggregate for chips:
pretreating the coarse areas in accordance with 3
subclause 03.03(b) of section 608 (type 2 pretreatment) Grading One test every 250 m
ACV 3
to obtain a uniform surface, which shall then be covered One test every 1 000 m
with a single seal in accordance with section 608. The Flakiness One test every 250 m³
type of aggregate to be used shall be determined by the
Engineer. The pretreated surface shall be inspected Aggregate for slurry seal:
and the size of aggregate and the rates of application of Grading One test every 250 m
3
the tack coat and aggregate which the surface can Sand equivalent One test for every type of sand
accommodate shall be established.
Bituminous binders No testing is required, but the
General Contractor shall produce
• All operations to correct bleeding shall be carried out certificates from all suppliers
on warm or hot days only. to the effect that all materials
supplied comply with the
• This work shall be done as soon as possible after
relevant specifications.
bleeding occurs.
Application rates Complete records shall be
• Before any rectified work is opened to traffic, all kept of actual measurements
loose aggregate shall be swept from the surface. made of quantities of
• It is essential that a heavy pneumatic-tyred roller be materials applied and rates of
used for all this work. Rolling shall continue until the application.
Engineer is satisfied that the aggregate has been Construction tolerances
properly embedded. No rolling may be done in wet
weather, cold weather or early in the morning when Width One test at each end of every
the surface is cold. spray run
• Notwithstanding the above methods of treatment, the Cross-section All rough areas shall be
Engineer may order that any seal which has not been Smoothness checked
properly constructed be removed and replaced. The Binder content of slurry One extraction test in respect
seal shall be removed in such a way that no damage of every 100 m³ of aggregate
is caused to the existing base. All aggregate and used
binder shall be removed either by grader or by hand
Bulking of aggregate for One test in respect of every
tools and any damage done to the surface shall be 3
slurry 50 m of aggregate used
repaired to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

607-8
(f) Binder content complete the work as specified, except the application
of a fog spray and precoating of aggregate, which shall
The binder content of slurry seal shall be
be paid for separately.
controlled to within the limits specified in
subclause 13.04 of section 606 for gap and semi- Item Unit
gap-graded mixes.
607.02 Bituminous surface treatment
(g) General with 19,0 mm aggregate and
Any areas that show signs of bleeding after the slurry seal using -
section has been opened to traffic shall be 607.02.01 RTH 45/50 or RTL 45/50 road
corrected as specified in clause 14 above. tar as a tack coat and 150/200
Corrective work shall be so carried out that it will penetration-grade bitumen in
blend in colour, texture and finish with adjacent 2
the penetration spray square metre (m )
work.
607.02.02 150/200 penetration-grade
The completed bituminous surfacing shall be free from
corrugations or any other wave effect where bitumen in both
depressions are preceded and followed by humps or applications square metre (m2)
ridges, irrespective of how small the distance is 607.02.03 150/200 penetration-grade
between the top of the hump and the bottom of the
bitumen in the tack coat and
preceding or following depression.
60% or 65% spray-grade
17 TESTING emulsion in the penetration
2
spray square metre (m )
17.01 Process control
607.02.04 Etc for other combinations of binders
The minimum testing frequency that will be required
from the Contractor in terms of clause 05 of section 901 Item Unit
for the purpose of process control shall be as given in 607.03 Bituminous surface treatment
table 607/7. with 13,2 mm aggregate and
17.02 Routine inspection and testing slurry-seal using -

Routine inspection and testing will be carried out by the 607.03.01 RTH 45/50 or RTL 45/50 road
Engineer in accordance with the provisions of clause 09 tar as a tack coat and 60% or
of section 902 to test the materials and workmanship 65% emulsion in the
2
provided for compliance with the requirements specified penetration spray square metre (m )
in this section.
607.03.02 150/200 penetration-grade
Where specified in the Project Specifications bitumen in the tack coat and
conformance in respect of certain designated properties 60% or 65% emulsion in the
will be controlled in accordance with the judgment
penetration spray square metre (m2)
scheme described in section 902. Where conformance
is not controlled in accordance with this judgment 607.03.03 Etc for other combinations of binder,
scheme, full compliance with the specified properties if required
will be required.
The unit of measurement for the complete surface
Any materials or workmanship which do not comply with treatment process shall be the square metre.
the specified requirements shall be removed and
replaced with materials and workmanship which comply The tendered rates shall include full compensation for
with the Specifications or, if the Engineer permits, be furnishing all materials, demarcating the working area,
repaired as specified in section 901 so that they will spraying the binders, spreading the aggregates, rolling,
comply with the specified requirements after they have mixing and applying the slurry and for all other
been repaired. incidentals necessary to complete the work as
specified, including the watering of haul and
18 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT construction roads in and about the Site.

Item Unit Item Unit

607.01 Double-seal surface treatment using - 607.04 Bituminous binder variations

607.01.01 19,0 mm and 9,5 mm 607.04.01 Road tar RTH 45/50 or

aggregate (state types of RTL 45/50 litre ( )
2
binder to be used) square metre (m ) 607.04.02 150/200 penetration-grade
607.01.02 13,2 mm and 6,7 mm bitumen litre ( )
aggregate (state types of 607.04.03 65% spray-grade emulsion litre ( )
2
binder to be used) square metre (m )
607.04.04 60% spray-grade emulsion litre ( )
The unit of measurement shall be the square metre of
607.04.05 30% anionic spray-grade
completed and accepted surface treatment.
emulsion litre ( )
The tendered rates shall include full compensation for
furnishing all materials, marking the centre line or 607.04.06 Anionic slurry-seal emulsion
reference lines, removing any dust or deleterious (60% bitumen) litre ( )
material, supplying water and spraying haul roads and 606.04.07 Precoating fluid litre (
construction roads, spraying of the binder, spreading of
aggregate, rolling, trimming the edges of the completed 606.04.08 PVC tar litre ( )
surface and for all other incidentals necessary to
606.04.09 MC-3000 cut-back bitumen litre ( )

607-9
The unit of measurement of bituminous binder in and payment for the slurry application variations shall
respect of variations in the specified rates of application be made in accordance with this formula:
shall be the litre, measured at spraying (or mixing)
• True (saturated) volume carried by the truck hopper:
temperature.
Payment for variations shall be made as specified in (B C)
clause 28 of section 001. A 1 0,72
C
Item Unit
Item Unit
607.05 Aggregate variations
3
607.08 Precoating of aggregate for
607.05.01 19,0 mm aggregate cubic metre (m ) second application (indicate
607.05.02 13,2 mm aggregate cubic metre (m3) precoating fluid) cubic metre (m 3)
607.05.03 9,5 mm aggregate cubic metre (m3) The unit of measurement for the precoating of
3
aggregate shall be the cubic metre of aggregate so
607.05.04 6,7 mm aggregate cubic metre (m ) treated, measured in hauling vehicles or in stockpile.
The unit of measurement in respect of variations in the The tendered rate shall include full compensation for
application of aggregate shall be the cubic metre of providing the equipment and materials and precoating
aggregate measured in the truck. the aggregate as specified, including the handling,
Payment for variations shall be made as specified in stockpiling and protection of the stockpiles against
clause 28 of section 001. inclement weather. The rate shall also include full
compensation for providing and adding an anti-stripping
Item Unit agent as specified.
607.06 Application of fog spray consisting of Item Unit
607.06.01 60% spray-grade emulsion litre ( ) 607.09 Treating areas inaccessible
607.06.02 30% spray-grade emulsion litre ( ) to mechanical equipment with
premixed bituminous material
The unit of measurement shall be the litre of emulsion
sprayed as specified and measured at application 607.09.01 19,0 mm thick square metre (m2)
temperature. 607.09.02 13,2 mm thick
2
square metre (m )
The tendered rates per litre of emulsion shall include The unit of measurement shall be the square metre of
full compensation for procuring and providing the binder completed surfacing.
and applying the fog spray as specified.
The tendered rates per square metre of surfacing shall
Item Unit include full compensation for the application of a tack
607.07 Variation in the rate of coat and a slurry seal.
application of slurry seal cubic metre (m3) Item Unit
The unit of measurement for slurry seal variations shall 607.10 Correction for bleeding
be the cubic metre of saturated fine aggregate.
607.10.01 Aggregate:
Payment for variations shall be made as specified in 3
clause 28 of section 001. 607.10.01.01 13,2 mm cubic metre (m )
3
Every load of slurry sand used shall be struck off with a 607.10.01.02 9,5 mm cubic metre (m )
straight-edge at the stockpile. The volume of the load 607.10.01.03 4,75 mm cubic metre (m 3)
shall then be measured and corrected for bulking. The
following method shall be used to calculate the The unit of measurement for aggregate shall be the
corrected volume of fine aggregate when determining cubic metre of aggregate supplied.
the application rate of slurry:
The tendered rates shall include full compensation for
• The struck capacity of the truck used for batching stockpiling the material, if required, at selected sites
aggregate shall be carefully measured in cubic indicated by the Engineer.
metres (say A cubic metres). 3
607.10.02 Precoating of aggregate cubic metre (m )
• A representative sample of aggregate shall be
obtained from the conveyor belt feeding the mixer. The unit of measurement for the precoating of
One thousand millilitres (1 000 m ) of the sample aggregate shall be the cubic metre of material
shall be placed in a plastic measuring cylinder and precoated.
dropped ten times onto a wooden table from a height The tendered rate shall include full compensation for
of 50 mm. The volume of aggregate in the cylinder precoating the material as specified, regardless of the
shall then be measured in m (say B m ). type of precoating material used.
• The sample in the cylinder shall then be saturated 607.10.03 Treatment of surface for
with water and water shall be added until it covers bleeding square metre (m2)
the aggregate by 50 mm. The mixture shall be well
shaken and the cylinder which contains the The unit of measurement for treatment of the surface
aggregate and water shall then be placed on a shall be the square metre of surface treated for
horizontal surface to allow the aggregate to settle bleeding.
until the liquid above the aggregate has cleared
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for
sufficiently to take the reading of the volume of the
treating the surfaces as specified. This item shall apply
saturated aggregate in m (say C m ).
only to Method 1 or 2 as described in clause 14.
• The saturated volume of the aggregate in the hopper of Treatment according to Method 3 shall be paid for in
the truck shall be calculated by the following formula accordance with the provisions of section 608.

607-10
SERIES 6 : ROADS AND PARKING AREAS Crushed stone for layer work shall be treated with
60% anionic bitumen emulsion at a nominal rate of
SECTION 608 : ROAD AND SURFACING 35 litres of emulsion for each cubic metre of
REHABILITATION AND OVERLAY compacted crushed stone. The Engineer may
CONSTRUCTION change the emulsion content at his discretion.
Before it is added to the crushed stone, the
CONTENTS emulsion shall be so diluted with water that the
moisture content of the mix shall be the optimum
moisture content for compaction.
01 SCOPE
02 ROAD REHABILITATION (c) Restrictions
03 SURFACING REHABILITATION
Unless the contrary is authorized in writing by the
04 OVERLAY CONSTRUCTION
Engineer, all excavations shall be backfilled on the
05 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
same day. Special attention shall be given to
controlling and protecting traffic.
01 SCOPE
02.02 Repairing potholes and local pavement layer
This section covers the work in connection with the
failures
replacement of failed layers, the repair of defective
surfaces of existing roads and parking areas and the Potholes are local failures covering an area of less than
2
application of a single seal treatment or asphalt 1m .
surfacing overlay.
Unless otherwise ordered by the Engineer, the existing
material shall be removed to the full depth in a
02 ROAD REHABILITATION
rectangular pattern. The floor of the excavation shall be
02.01 Replacing of failed layers cleaned and a tack coat of 30% anionic stable-grade
2
emulsion shall be applied at a rate of 0,4 litre/m .
The replacement of failed layers involves excavating
the existing failed sections and reconstructing the The excavation shall be backfilled with a fine-grade
excavated fills and pavement layers using gravel, continuously graded asphalt surfacing mix proportioned
crushed stone, or asphalt as specified or as may be in accordance with table 606/2 of section 606 using
determined by the Engineer. 6,5% 80/100 penetration-grade bitumen and 1,0% active
filler. The asphalt shall be placed in accordance with the
Where, in terms of clause 16 of section 001, this work requirements of section 606 and compacted with
can be classified as work in restricted areas, no suitable vibratory rollers or other compacting equipment.
additional payment will be made.
The Engineer will demarcate any failed areas to be 03 SURFACING REHABILITATION
replaced, and shall instruct the Contractor with regard
03.01 Defects
to the repair work to be done.
A defect which requires treatment can be any of the
The various provisions of sections 203, 601, 602, 604,
following:
605 and 606 shall apply mutatis mutandis, together with
the following: (a) The existing surface is deficient in binder;
(a) Excavating pavement material (b) marked differences in texture occur over the surface;
Where no overlay has to be applied to the road (c) the existing surface is open-textured;
surface, and unless otherwise instructed by the (d) unevenness of the surface due to bumps, slacks, etc;
Engineer, the excavated area shall have a neat
rectangular shape. Asphalt layers shall be cut with (e) edges require trimming and/or repairs;
approved sawing equipment. (f) the existing surface exhibits cracking.
Excavated material shall be discarded unless the 03.02 Materials
Engineer instructs its re-use.
The following grades of binder may be used. The actual
After completion of the excavation, the Engineer
type or grade used shall be as specified in the Project
shall be afforded the opportunity to examine it.
Specifications or the Schedule of Quantities or as
Where required, the floor of the excavation shall
ordered by the Engineer.
be compacted to the specified density for the layer
concerned. (a) Binder for fog or mist spray (treatment type 1)
(b) Backfilling excavations 30%- or 60%-cationic or -anionic spray-grade
emulsion.
Excavations shall be backfilled with the material
and in layer thicknesses as ordered by the (b) Tack-coat binder
Engineer, and the backfilling shall be compacted 60%-anionic or -cationic spray-grade emulsion
and finished to the required levels. The (treatment type 2).
requirements for material quality, density and
30% stable-grade emulsion (treatment types 3 and 4).
finish specified in other appropriate sections shall
remain applicable. (c) Slurry-seal binder (treatment type 3)
Stabilized materials shall be mixed in concrete 60% anionic slurry-grade emulsion.
mixers or by other approved equipment. Unless (d) Binder for asphalt skim coat (treatment type 4)
otherwise instructed by the Engineer, gravel
80/100 penetration-grade bitumen (6,5%).
subbase and base shall be stabilized with cement
at a rate of application of 80 kg cement for each (e) Binder for asphalt used in reconstructing
cubic metre of material. Gravel base surfaces shall pavement edges (treatment type 5)
be primed with 30% of anionic emulsion at a rate 60% stable-grade bituminous emulsion for tack coat
of application of 0.4 litre/m2 immediately after and 80/100 penetration-grade bitumen in asphalt.
completion and approval.

608-1
Note: When bitumen rubber is specified for use as a (ii) Where the slurry can be applied mechanically
bituminous binder or, when a surface treatment with a spreader box.
which requires the use of bitumen rubber is
The slurry shall be prepared, mixed and applied
specified, the necessary specification will be
as specified in subclauses 10.03, 10.04 and 10.05
incorporated in the Project Specifications.
of section 607, with the following exceptions:
03.03 Construction (i) Slurry to be applied by hand may be mixed in
Before any treatment is carried out, the area to be a suitable concrete mixer.
treated shall be cleaned of all dust, dirt, dung, oil or any (ii) Where it is to be applied by spreader box,
other foreign materials that may be deleterious to the the slurry shall be applied in a single layer at
surfacing and any failures shall be repaired as specified a nominal rate of 0,004 m3/m2 for tendering
in clause 02 above. purposes. When it is to be applied by hand
(a) Treatment type 1 with brooms or rubber squeegees, the slurry
shall be worked into cracks and any other
This treatment shall be applied where the existing open areas until a sound, uniform surface is
surface is deficient in binder. obtained.
The treatment shall consist of the application of a (d) Treatment type 4
fog spray of the specified grade of emulsion to the
This treatment is intended for use where the road
existing surface by a pressure distributor, at the
surface is uneven and contains slacks, bumps or
rates of application as directed by the Engineer
and in widths that may vary from 0,5 m to 4,0 m. minor rutting on account of the deformation of the
pavement layers, but not on account of the failure
(b) Treatment type 2 of these layers.
This treatment is intended for application where The surface to be treated shall, after having been
marked differences in texture occur in the existing cleaned and prepared, be given a tack coat of 30%
surfacing, in order to obtain a uniform texture anionic stable-grade emulsion at rates directed in
before resealing. the field by the Engineer.
A tack coat of the specified type and grade of Asphalt used shall consist of a medium or fine-
emulsion shall be applied to the surface as grade continuously-graded asphalt surfacing mix, as
specified in subclause 09.03 of section 607, specified in table 606/2 of section 606, and with
followed by an application of doubly washed 6,5% of 80/100 penetration-grade bitumen and
crusher sand. The crusher sand shall be the 1,0% active filler. The actual grades of the mix used
medium-grade specified for slurry seal in shall be as directed by the Engineer or as dictated
clause 02 of section 607, but shall be on the by the required thickness of the asphalt layer.
coarse side of the grading envelope. The nominal The asphalt shall be applied, as specified in
rates of application shall be as follows: section 606, in thicknesses varying between 6 mm
Emulsion 0,70 litre net bitumen/m
2 and 25 mm, depending on the nature of the
irregularities that occur, so that the final surface
Aggregate 0,0035 m3/m2 will conform to the surface tolerances for cross-
The actual rates of application shall be as section and smoothness as specified in clause 14
instructed by the Engineer. of section 606. Where the thickness of the required
asphalt exceeds 25 mm, it shall be laid in separate
It can be anticipated that spraying and spreading layers each not exceeding 25 mm in thickness.
will have to be carried out in narrow bands varying
Any skim coat which exhibits ravelling of the
in width from 0,5 m to 2,0 m. The emulsion shall be
surface shall be given treatment type 3 or shall be
allowed to break before the aggregate is applied.
removed and replaced, all at the Contractor's cost.
As soon as the aggregate has been applied, its
(e) Treatment type 5
distribution shall be corrected by light hand-
brooming or by means of a dragbroom. This treatment is intended for use where trimming
and/or repairing of the edges of the surfaced area
Rolling shall be carried out as specified in is required, including the restoring of the edge
subclause 09.04 of section 607. Any excess lines to the true edge line of the original road or to
aggregate which remains after the road has been such other edge line as may be required.
opened to traffic for two days or longer shall be
removed. Where the existing edge of the surfacing is sound
but exceeds the required width by more than
(c) Treatment type 3 150 mm, the excess surfacing shall be cut back to
Treatment type 3 shall be used when it is the required width.
necessary to treat an existing surface treatment, Where the edges of the surfacing have broken
which is open-textured or exhibits cracking, with away or are narrower than the required width, they
an application of bituminous slurry. shall be cut back to a line or lines along which a
Prior to treatment with a slurry, the surface shall, if sound edge can be obtained and where the edge of
so instructed by the Engineer, be sprayed with a the surfacing, as cut back, requires building-up to
tack coat of 30% stable-grade emulsion at rates bring it to the required width, all material between
directed by the Engineer. the edge of the surfacing and the line to which the
edge has to be built up shall be removed to a depth
For payment purposes, a distinction shall be made of 60 mm below the final surface, and the surface
between two methods of construction: so exposed shall be cleaned and compacted, if
necessary, with a suitably sized vibratory roller to
(i) Where the slurry can only be applied by ensure a sound surface. The exposed surface shall
hand methods, or where the Engineer directs 2
then be watered and primed at a rate of 0,60 /m
or where it is specified that the slurry shall with a 60% stable-grade emulsion diluted with three
be applied by hand methods. parts of water to each part of emulsion.

608-2
 The edges shall then be built up with the asphalt (iv) Restrictions
specified for treatment type 4 and shall be well Cracks may be sealed only where the
compacted with a suitable vibratory roller or temperature of the road surface exceeds
compactor. 10°C. Crack sealing may not be done within
The built-up edges shall be finished neatly to the 3 days after rain has fallen on the Site,
required line and levels. unless otherwise instructed by the Engineer.
(f) Treatment type 6 (crack-sealing) 03.04 Opening to traffic
This treatment is intended for use where the Irrespective of which type of treatment is specified, the
Engineer decides that treatment type 3 will not be surface shall be left open to traffic for at least five weeks
effective and where the cracks are not in excess of or for such longer period as the Engineer may direct
5 mm wide. before further surface treatment work is carried out.
Where cracks wider than 5 mm are to be sealed, 03.05 Joints and the protection of kerbs
the treatment will be specified in the Project
Specifications. The requirements of subclauses 09.10 and 09.11 of
section 607 regarding joints between sprays and the
(i) Equipment for crack-sealing protection of kerbs, channels, etc, shall be complied with.
Over and above the equipment normally used
04 OVERLAY CONSTRUCTION
for surface treatments, the following
additional equipment will be necessary for 04.01 General
the sealing of cracks:
Overlay construction shall consist of the application of a
• A vibratory roller having a mass single-seal surface treatment as specified hereafter or
approximately equal to that of a of asphalt surfacing as specified in section 606. Asphalt
Bomag 905 or similar, with an adjustable overlays shall be measured and paid for under
amplitude and frequency of vibration. section 606, whereas overlays which consist of a
• A mobile pneumatic pump capable of single-seal surface treatment shall be measured and
producing at least 3 m3/min at 750 kPa for paid for under this section.
blowing out cracks. 04.02 Single-seal bituminous surface treatment
• Special spraying equipment with 2 mm
(a) Bituminous binders
nozzle openings and provided with
reserve nozzles. The following bituminous binders shall be used:
(ii) Preparation (i) Tack coat
The cracks shall be blown clean with 80/100 penetration-grade bitumen or, if specified
compressed air, and all foreign and loose in the Project Specifications, a cut-back bitumen,
matter shall be removed from the cracks. a PVC tar manufactured from RTH 45/50 road
tar, a spray-grade emulsion, or bitumen rubber.
The cracks shall then be penetrated with an
invert bitumen emulsion manufactured from (ii) Fog spray
80/100 penetration-grade bitumen such as 30% or 60% spray-grade emulsion of the
MSP/1 or similar suitable primer. anionic or cationic type as may be specified or
(iii) Sealing ordered by the Engineer.
After the primer has been applied, anionic (b) Aggregate
stable-grade emulsion shall be mixed with The aggregate shall consist of approved crushed
synthetic modifiers, as specified in the stone of the size specified in the Project
Project Specifications, and applied with hot Specifications or the Schedule of Quantities, which
bitumen rubber or similar agent by means of complies with the requirements of clause 02 of
pneumatic spray cans or other approved section 607. When required in the Project
equipment at the rate specified in the Project Specifications or if so directed by the Engineer, the
Specifications. aggregate shall be precoated as specified in
Where the cracks are to be rolled, the clause 06 of section 607.
Contractor, in accordance with the provisions (c) Plant and equipment
of the Project Specifications or the
prescriptions of the Engineer, shall treat the In all respects plant and equipment used in the
cracks in one of the following two manners works shall comply with the relevant provisions of
before rolling: clause 03 of section 607, except that both chips
spreaders shall be self-propelled.
(1) The surface shall be heated in an
approved manner along the full length of (d) Preparation of areas to be surfaced
the crack and over a width of 250 mm The areas to be surfaced shall be cleaned of all
on each side of the crack and then dust, dirt, oil or any other foreign materials that may
rolled with approved rollers until an be deleterious to the surfacing.
even surface has been obtained.
(e) Construction
(2) A solution of 1 part of SV250 and
2 parts of diesel oil shall be applied by (i) Application of tack coat and aggregate
paint roller over the crack at a rate The tack coat and aggregate shall be applied
determined by the Engineer. The as specified in subclause 09.03 of section 607.
adjacent surfaces or the crack itself may The nominal rates of application in Table 608/1
not be overfilled with the material. shall be used for tendering purposes only.
Twenty-four hours after treatment of the
crack, it shall be rolled with approved The actual rates of application shall be as
rollers until an even surface is obtained. determined by the Engineer.

608-3
 Not more than 15 minutes shall elapse 05 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
between the application of the bituminous
binder and the spreading of the aggregate at Item Unit
any particular position on the road. 608.01 Replacing of failed layers
Table 608/1 608.01.01 Excavating in existing
3
pavements cubic metre (m )
Nominal rates of application
608.01.02 Compacting the floor
Tack coat 2
Nominal of excavations square metre (m )
(litres of tar or Aggregate
size 3 2
net bitumen (m per m ) 608.01.03 Backfilling of excavations with:
(mm) 2
per m )
608.01.03.01 Chemically-stabilized
3
13,2 1,90 0,010 gravel cubic metre (m )
9,5 1,60 0,009
608.01.03.02 Emulsion-treated
6,7 1,20 0,006 crushed stone cubic metre (m )
3

608.01.03.03 Asphalt base ton (t)

Where a bitumen rubber seal is used on an
existing surfacing, a layer of diluted anionic 608.01.03.04 Asphalt surfacing ton (t)
stable-grade bituminous emulsion (30% of
bitumen) shall first be applied at a rate of • 608.01.01 Excavating in existing pavements
0,55 litre/m2 or as instructed by the Engineer.
The unit of measurement shall be the cubic metre of
After the emulsion tack coat has broken and material excavated from the existing pavement,
when, in the opinion of the Engineer, it has irrespective of the type of material. The quantity shall
dried out sufficiently, a bitumen rubber tack be computed in accordance with the authorized
coat shall be applied at a rate as instructed by dimensions of the excavation.
the Engineer. For tender purposes, the
Contractor shall base his rate on a nominal The tendered rate shall include full compensation for
rate of application of 2,1 litre/m2. demarcating the excavation and excavating and
disposing of the material, including all transport.
The total application of bitumen rubber shall be
applied in a single spray. Payment will not distinguish between the different types
of pavement material excavated.
All the aggregate shall be 13,2 mm and shall
be applied within 5 minutes of the application
of the bitumen rubber tack coat. • 608.01.02 Compacting the floor of excavations

(ii) Initial rolling The unit of measurement shall be the square metre of
excavation floor compacted on the instruction of the
Initial rolling shall be carried out as specified in Engineer, which quantity shall be computed in
subclause 09.04 of section 607. accordance with the authorized dimensions of the
(iii) Final rolling excavation floor.
Any areas deficient in aggregate shall have Payment will not distinguish between the various
additional material added so as to obtain a methods of compaction or various density requirements.
carpet with a single layer of stone where the
stones lie shoulder to shoulder. It is essential • 608.01.03 Backfilling of excavations
to ensure that only one layer of stone is applied
and every care shall be taken to avoid over- The unit of measurement shall be the cubic metre of
application of the aggregate. chemically-stabilized gravel or emulsion-treated
crushed stone or a ton of asphalt placed in accordance
The final rolling shall be done with a 15 t to 20 t with the specified requirements. The quantity will be
pneumatic-tyred roller doing a minimum computed in accordance with the authorized
number of four coverages. dimensions of the layer in the case of gravel or crushed
The finished surface shall be well-knit and shall stone and in accordance with the certified weighbridge
have a uniform appearance free from any tickets issued in the case of asphalt. Payment will not
roller-tyre marks. All aggregate contaminated be made for wasted material.
by oil, fuel or grease shall be removed and The tendered rates shall include full compensation for
replaced by clean aggregate. providing all the material, irrespective of its origin, for all
All loose stones shall be broomed from the mixing, placing, compacting and finishing as specified in
surface with a rotary broom or hand brooms, as this section and other appropriate sections, for all
may be directed by the Engineer. transport, work in restricted areas, and also for all
machinery, equipment, labour, supervision and other
(iv) Fog or mist spray incidentals for executing the work as specified.
When required in the Project Specifications or Item Unit
if so directed by the Engineer, in writing, a fog
spray of 60%- or 30%- anionic or -cationic 608.02 Repairing potholes and local
emulsion shall be applied to the surface of the pavement layer failures with
stone at the required rate by a pressure
asphalt ton (t)
distributor.
(f) Tolerances and finish requirements The unit of measurement shall be the ton of
continuously graded asphalt placed in accordance with
The completed bituminous work shall comply with the specifications, which quantity will be calculated in
the requirements in respect of tolerance and finish accordance with the certified weighbridge tickets issued
as specified in clause 16 of section 607. with regard to the mix used.

608-4
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for The unit of measurement for slurry seal applied by
cleaning the floor of the excavation, for procuring, spreader box shall be the square metre of area to which
providing and mixing all the material and for compacting the slurry is applied as specified.
and finishing the asphalt in accordance with the
required lines and levels. The tendered rate shall also The tendered rates shall include full compensation for
include full compensation for excavating existing procuring and furnishing all the materials, for mixing
surfacing material and disposing thereof as specified, and applying the slurry seal and demarcating all areas
and for supplying and applying an emulsion tack coat to to be treated.
the surface to be treated. Item Unit
The tendered rates shall include full compensation for
608.06 Variation in rate of application
all transport, handling, labour, material, and all
incidentals necessary for completing all the work in of slurry seal (applicable to
accordance with the specifications, and also for work in item 608.05.03 only) cubic metre (m3)
restricted area. The unit of measurement shall be the cubic metre of
No extra payment will be made with regard to this item additional or reduced slurry seal applied, measured as
for producing small quantities of asphalt. specified for pay item 607.07 of section 607.

Item Unit Payment for variations shall be made as specified in

clause 28 of section 001.
608.03 Treatment type 1 (fog or mist spray)
Item Unit
608.03.01 30% spray-grade emulsion litre ( )
608.03.02 60% spray-grade emulsion litre ( ) 608.07 Treatment type 4
608.07.01 Tack coat of 30%-stable-grade
The unit of measurement for treatment type 1 (fog or emulsion litre ( )
mist spray) shall be the litre of bituminous emulsion
sprayed, measured at spraying temperature. 608.07.02 Continuously-graded asphalt ton (t)
The tendered rates shall include full compensation for The unit of measurement for the tack coat shall be the
cleaning and preparing the existing surface, for litre of emulsion applied, measured at spraying
providing the material and applying the fog spray, and temperature. The unit of measurement for asphalt shall
for all other incidentals necessary for completing the be the ton of asphalt laid according to the
work as specified. Specifications.

Item Unit The tendered rate for tack coat shall include full
compensation for procuring, furnishing and applying the
608.04 Treatment type 2 (crusher- tack coat and demarcating the areas to be sprayed, and
sand seal) using : for all incidentals necessary to complete the work as
specified.
608.04.01 60% spray-grade emulsion litre ( )
The tendered rate for asphalt shall include full
608.04.02 An application of doubly
compensation for procuring, furnishing and mixing all
washed slurry-seal the materials required for applying the asphalt and for
aggregate cubic metre (m3) all transport and other incidentals necessary to
The unit of measurement for binder application shall be complete the work as specified.
the litre, measured at spraying temperature. The unit of Item Unit
measurement for the doubly washed slurry-seal
aggregate shall be the cubic metre of aggregate 608.08 Treatment type 5
applied, measured loose in the truck and corrected for
bulking as described in pay item 607.07 of section 607. 608.08.01 Trimming the edges of
existing surfacing metre (m)
The tendered rates shall include full compensation for
providing all materials, demarcating the areas to be 608.08.02 Reconstructing edges using
sprayed, spraying the binder and applying the continuously-graded asphalt ton (t)
aggregate, rolling and sweeping, and for all other The unit of measurement for trimming the edges shall
incidentals necessary for completing the work as be the metre of edge cut back and trimmed as
specified. specified. The unit of measurement for reconstructing
pavement edges shall be the ton of continuously graded
Item Unit asphalt provided and compacted as specified.
608.05 Treatment type 3 (slurry seal) The tendered rate for trimming the edges shall include
full compensation for cutting back the edges as directed
608.05.01 Tack coat of 30% stable-grade
and removing all excavated and loose material. The
emulsion litre ( )
tendered rate for reconstructing pavement edges shall
608.05.02 Slurry seal applied by include full compensation for compacting the surface on
hand cubic metre (m )
3 which the new edge is to be constructed, for procuring,
furnishing and mixing all the materials, and for
608.05.03 Slurry seal applied by spreader compacting and trimming the asphalt to the lines and
box square metre (m2) levels required. It shall also include full compensation
for applying a tack coat of emulsion to the area to be
The unit of measurement for tack coat shall be the litre
treated.
of emulsion, measured at spraying temperature and
applied as specified. The unit of measurement for slurry
seal applied by hand shall be the cubic metre of
saturated fine aggregate used, measured as described
in pay item 607.07 of section 607.

608-5
Item Unit rates of application shall be the litre, measured at
spraying temperature. Payment for variations shall be
608.09 Treatment type 6 (crack sealing) made as specified in clause 28 of section 001.
608.09.01 Cleaning the cracks with
2 Item Unit
compressed air square metre (m )
or metre (m) 608.13 Aggregate variations
608.09.02 Applying bituminous binders 608.13.01 6,7 mm aggregate cubic metre (m 3)
for sealing cracks 3
608.13.02 9,5 mm aggregate cubic metre (m )
608.09.02.01 MSP/1 or similar prime litre ( ) 3
608.13.03 13,2 mm aggregate cubic metre (m )
608.09.02.02 Anionic stable-grade emulsion
mixed with synthetic modifiers litre ( ) The unit of measurement shall be the cubic metre of
increased or decreased aggregate applied, as
608.09.02.03 Hot bitumen rubber litre ( ) compared with the amounts required at the specified
608.09.02.04 SV250 plus 2 parts of diesel nominal rate of application.
oil litre ( ) Payment for variations shall be made as specified in
608.09.03 Rolling the cracks square metre (m )
2 clause 28 of section 001.
or metre (m) Item Unit
The unit of measurement for subitems 608.09.01 and 608.14 Application of fog spray
608.09.03 shall be the square metre of road surface
within which the cracks have been blown clean and 608.14.01 60%-spray-grade emulsion litre ( )
rolled or, in the case of long cracks, the metre length of
crack cleaned and rolled. The unit of measurement for 608.14.02 30%-spray-grade emulsion litre ( )
subitem 608.09.02 shall be the litre of material applied The unit of measurement shall be the litre, measured at
as specified or instructed by the Engineer. spraying temperature.
The tendered rates shall include full compensation for The tendered rates shall include full compensation for
providing as applicable, all equipment, materials, labour, furnishing the material and applying the fog spray as
supervision and incidentals for sealing the cracks as specified.
specified and where instructed by the Engineer.
Item Unit
Item Unit
608.15 Precoating of aggregate
608.10 Single-seal surface treatment 3
(indicate precoating fluid) cubic metre (m )
where 80/100 penetration
grade bitumen is used - The unit of measurement for the precoating of
aggregate shall be the cubic metre of aggregate so
608.10.01 with 6,7 mm aggregate square metre (m2)
treated, measured in hauling vehicles or in stockpile.
2
608.10.02 with 9,5 mm aggregate square metre (m )
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for
608.10.03 with 13,2 mm aggregate square metre (m2) providing the equipment and materials and precoating
the aggregate as specified, including the handling,
Item Unit stockpiling and protection of the stockpiles against
608.11 Single-seal surface treatment inclement weather. The rate shall also include the
providing of and adding an anti-stripping agent as
with bitumen rubber binder
2 specified.
and 13,2 mm aggregate square metre (m )
The unit of measurement for items 608.10 and 608.11
shall be the square metre of completed and accepted
surface treatment.
The tendered rates shall include full compensation for
cleaning the existing surfacing, for furnishing all
materials, marking of centre and edge lines, spraying
the binder, spreading the aggregate and rolling, and for
all other incidentals necessary to complete the work as
specified.

Item Unit
608.12 Bituminous binder variations
608.12.01 80/100 penetration-grade bitumen litre ( )
608.12.02 65% spray-grade emulsion litre ( )
608.12.03 60% spray-grade emulsion litre ( )
608.12.04 PVC tar litre ( )
608.12.05 Precoating fluid litre ( )
608.12.06 Bitumen rubber litre ( )
The unit of measurement for bituminous binder in
respect of an increase or a decrease in the specified

608-6
SERIES 6 : ROADS AND PARKING AREAS 03.03 Sand for bedding

SECTION 609 : SEGMENTED PAVING (a) Sand for bedding the segmental blocks
Sand for bedding shall be free from deleterious
CONTENTS substances or substances that could cause the
discolouring of paving units. The sand shall not
01 SCOPE contain more than 3% silt and clay by mass and
02 DEFINITIONS shall conform to the following grading:
03 MATERIALS
04 CONSTRUCTION Nominal sieve Percentage passing by
05 TRIAL SECTION size (mm) mass
06 TOLERANCES
07 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 9,52 100
4,75 95 - 100
01 SCOPE 2,36 80 - 100
This section covers the paving of roads, parking areas, 1,18 50 - 85
sidewalks, etc, with individual paving units laid closely 0,600 25 - 60
together to form a segmented pavement. Paving units 0,300 10 - 30
can be precast concrete segmental blocks and precast
0,150 5 - 15
concrete paving slabs. The latter are used for
pedestrian and cycle traffic only. 0,075 0 - 10

02 DEFINITIONS (b) Sand for bedding the paving slabs

For the purposes of this section in particular, the Sand for bedding the paving slabs shall comply
following words and expressions shall have the with the requirements for concrete sand and shall
meanings hereby assigned to them unless inconsistent not contain more than 3% silt and clay by mass.
with the context:
(c) Sand for jointing
(a) Bedding Jointing sand shall pass through a 1,18 mm sieve
The operation of placing a paving unit on top of a sand and shall contain between 10% and 15% of
layer, including the compaction of the sand layer. material that passes through a 0,075 mm sieve.
The sand shall not contain substances which may
(b) Lock-up cause the staining of the units.

A phenomenon that occurs with regard to segmented

04 CONSTRUCTION
paving when the sealing of the joints between the
paving units is improved by the action of compaction 04.01 Construction of paving with segmental blocks
equipment, traffic and weathering. Lock-up can also be
defined as the initial settling-in improvement of the (a) General
paving.
Prior to constructing the paving on roads and
(c) Interlock parking areas, the subgrade or subbase shall be
checked for conformance with the requirements
The interaction between adjoining paving units which specified in the relevant sections of this series.
prevents random movement. The earthworks on sidewalks, traffic islands, etc,
to be paved shall be trimmed to within plus or
03 MATERIALS minus 10 mm of the specified level.
03.01 Precast concrete segmental blocks Local high spots shall be removed and local
depressions shall be filled with approved gravel
Precast concrete segmental blocks shall be of the mixed with 5% CEM I cement by mass.
thickness, colour, class of concrete, shape and type Alternatively, the levelling course may consist of
(S-A, S-B or S-C) as specified in the Project lean concrete with a minimum of 7-day cube
Specifications, shall comply with the relevant strength of 5 MPa.
requirements of SANS 1058, and shall be obtained from
a manufacturer approved by the Engineer, in writing. Under no circumstances shall depressions be
levelled with bedding sand.
The colour of coloured blocks shall penetrate to a depth
of at least 5 mm below the wearing surface of each unit (b) Edge restraints
and the coloured layer shall be integrally bound to the
body of the unit. Edge restraints such as kerbs, channelling,
concrete strips or other forms of edge restraints
03.02 Precast concrete paving slabs shall be constructed and approved well in
advance of the paving.
Precast concrete paving slabs shall be square and,
unless otherwise specified, shall measure 450 mm x (c) Grass and weed control
450 mm x 50 mm at the base with the sides sloping
When specified in the Project Specifications, the
slightly inward towards the top.
surface of the layer below the bedding sand shall
The slabs shall be manufactured from class 30/19 be treated with a suitable herbicide to control the
concrete and their appearance shall be as specified in growth of grass and weed. The herbicide shall be
clause 3.3 of SANS 927 for precast concrete kerbs and applied strictly in accordance with requirements of
channels. When specified in the Project Specifications, subclause 03.09 of section 505.
the upper surface of the paving slabs shall have an
approved skid-resistant pattern.

609-1
(d) Placing of sand for bedding (g) Joint filling
To ensure an even paved surface, sand from a Immediately after the initial compaction made by
single source shall be used. The sand shall have two passes of the compactor, a layer of jointing
a moisture content of between 4% and 8%, sand shall be uniformly distributed over the
unless otherwise permitted by the Engineer. surface of the pavement and lightly broomed into
the joints. Further passes of the plate vibrator
The sand shall be evenly spread over the area to shall then be made to fill the joints, and more
be paved, and the kerbs and other restraints sand shall be spread over the surface if required.
shall be used as screeding guides. For wide Finally, the excess sand shall be removed. The
pavements, temporary screeding guides shall be sand and the area treated shall be perfectly dry.
set up in intermediate positions.
After the joints have been filled, the construction traffic
The uncompacted thickness of the sand shall be shall be encouraged to use the pavement to achieve
such that, after compaction, the sand layer will maximum lock-up. Where the use of the construction
be 20 mm plus or minus 10 mm thick. The sand traffic is unfeasible, lock-up shall be achieved,
bed shall be laid slightly in advance of the especially in the case of heavy-duty paving, by at least
placement of the paving units. Where the sand is five passes of a heavy pneumatic-tyred roller.
accidentally compacted before the units are laid,
it shall be raked and evenly re`screeded. 04.02 Construction of paving with paving slabs

(e) Laying of paving blocks Subclauses 04.01 (a) up to and including 04.01 (d)
above apply to the construction of paving with paving
The units shall be laid in a herringbone pattern if slabs, except that the sand shall comply with the
the block shape so permits, and, where the units requirements of subclause 03.03(b).
cannot be so laid, they shall be laid with their
long axes at right angles to the line of traffic. Where specified in the Project Specifications, the sand
Except where curved patterns are required, the shall be mixed with 5% CEM I cement by mass, and
lines of the pattern shall be straight and parallel sufficient water shall be added to form a fairly dry and
to kerbs or buildings or other approved structures crumbly mixture. This mixture shall then be spread and
which adjoin the paved areas. screeded as specified for sand, and the slabs shall be
laid thereon before the initial set has taken place.
Full units shall be laid first, care being taken to
ensure that the joint lines are straight and When slabs are laid in sand or on a sand-cement
square. To control alignment, string lines set up mixture, a rubber hammer shall be used to bed the
in two directions shall be used. slabs firmly. The use of string lines is compulsory.
The disturbance of laid units prior to compaction The slabs shall be laid with their bases butting, and the
by foot or light construction traffic shall be joint formed by the inward sloping sides shall be filled
prevented by placing boards on the paving. with a 1:3 cement:sand mortar. Paving slabs shall not
be cut for infilling but the filling-in of areas shall be
Areas against kerbs, manholes, etc, that require carried out with a class 30/13 concrete which shall be
infilling shall be filled with units cut to size with finished off smoothly with a steel trowel.
appropriate cutting tools.
No pedestrian traffic will be allowed on the paving until
Areas of less than 25 per cent of the area of a 24 hours after the joints and infills have been
full block unit or with a 25 mm minimum completed.
dimension shall be filled in with 30 MPa concrete
with 10 mm coarse aggregate. Smaller areas
05 TRIAL SECTION
shall be filled with a 1:3 cement:sand mortar.
Full-scale paving shall not commence until a trial
After compaction, joints between the blocks shall
section which has been laid as part of the permanent
not be wider than 3 mm.
paving for the purpose of assessing the Contractor's
(f) Compaction ability to produce a paving that complies with the
requirements of the Specifications, has been approved
The surface shall be compacted as soon as by the Engineer.
possible after the blocks are laid, but no
compaction shall be attempted within 1 m of the A trial section in the case of roads or narrow strips of up
laying face. At the completion of each day's to 5 m wide shall be a 20 m long section over the full
work, the surface shall be left fully compacted to width of the road or strip. A trial section in the case of
within 1 m of the working face. parking areas shall be an area 20 m long and at least
5 m wide with one of the long sides butting on a
Units damaged during compaction shall be permanent edge restraint.
removed and replaced. Compaction shall be
done with a vibrating-plate compactor which 06 TOLERANCES
produces a centrifugal force of approximately 16
to 20 kN at a frequency of approximately 75 to Three months after it has been opened to traffic, the
100 Hz, and which has a plate area of between finished paving shall be accurate to within the following
0,35 and 0,5 m². For blocks of less than 80 mm limits:
thick, a vibrating-plate compactor with a 06.01 Line of pattern
centrifugal force of 7 to 16 kN, a plate area of 0,2
to 0,4 m2 and a frequency of 75 to 100 Hz shall (a) Deviation from any 3 m
be used. Sufficient passes shall be made to straight line 10 mm maximum
compact the bedding course fully to produce an
even surface. (b) Deviation from any 20 m
straight line 20 mm maximum

609-2
06.02 Vertical deviation from a 3 m straight edge Item Unit
(a) At the edge restraints plus 3, minus 0 mm 609.04 The lifting of existing segmental
paving, loading and transporting
(b) Elsewhere, except at
it to the stockpile site specified
vertical curves plus 10 minus 15 mm
in the Project Specifications
06.03 Surface levels of adjacent units -
609.04.01 Segmental blocks square metre (m2)
Shall not differ by more than 3 mm
609.04.02 Paving slabs square metre (m2)
07 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT The unit of measurement shall be the square metre of
Item Unit paving material lifted.

609.01 Construction of segmental The tendered rates shall include full compensation for
the cleaning and selecting of paving material, the
block paving made from -
carting to spoil of damaged units, and all labour, plant
609.01.01 (Thickness, type, class, and equipment necessary for carefully lifting, loading,
etc, indicated) precast transporting, off-loading and stacking the units in a
blocks
2
square metre (m ) manner approved by the Engineer.

609.01.02 Etc. Item Unit

The unit of measurement shall be the square metre of 609.05 Construction of segmented
completed paving. paving with material supplied
by the Employer or from the
The tendered rates shall include full compensation for
stockpile
the supply and laying of the blocks, the levelling of
underlying layers, the removal and replacement of 609.05.01 Segmental-block
damaged blocks, cutting the blocks where required, the paving square metre (m )
2

provision and placing of a layer of bedding sand,

jointing sand, the infilling of small areas with cut blocks 609.05.02 Concrete-slab paving
or concrete and the laying of a trial section, all as
609.05.02.01 Bedded on sand square metre (m 2)
specified.
Item Unit 609.05.02.02 Bedded on a sand-cement
2
mixture square metre (m )
609.02 Construction of paving with
precast concrete paving slabs, The unit of measurement shall be the square metre of
paving completed.
450 mm x 450 mm x 50 mm -
The tendered rates shall include compensation for the
609.02.01 Bedded on sand square metre (m2) work covered by pay items 609.01 and 609.02 as well
as the loading and transporting of the material from the
609.02.02 Bedded on a sand-cement stockpiles.
2
mixture square metre (m )
Item Unit
The unit of measurement shall be the square metre of
paving completed. 609.06 Construction of pedestrian
ramps for the disabled number (No)
The tendered rates shall include full compensation for
the supply and laying of the slabs, for the levelling of The unit of measurement shall be the number of
underlying layers, the removal and replacement of pedestrian ramps constructed complete as specified on
damaged slabs, the provision and placing of the the Drawings.
bedding, jointing, the filling in of small areas with
concrete and the laying of a trial section. The tendered rate shall include full compensation for
the procuring, furnishing and installation of all the items
Item Unit required for a complete pedestrian ramp, excavation,
backfilling, bedding, formwork, concrete, joints and the
609.03 The construction of edge disposal of excavated surplus material.
restraints with
Note:
609.03.01 Precast concrete according to
Drawing No (number stated) metre (m) The following item of work, when specified, shall be
carried out, measured and paid for in accordance with
609.03.02 In situ concrete according to
the appropriate sections of the Specifications, but shall
Drawing No (number stated) metre (m)
be listed under this section in the Schedule of
The unit of measurement shall be the metre of edge Quantities.
restraint constructed to the details shown on the
Item Applicable section
Drawings. Kerbing, channelling and structures will not
be classified as edge restraints for the purposes of this The control of grass and weed growth 505
pay item.
The tendered rates shall include full compensation for
excavation and backfill, bedding, formwork, concrete,
joints, and the disposal of excavated surplus material.

609-3
SERIES 6 : ROADS AND PARKING AREAS (iv) The nominal maximum size of coarse
aggregate shall be 37,5 mm.
SECTION 610 : CONCRETE PAVEMENTS
(v) The coarse aggregate shall be supplied in
CONTENTS two separate nominal sizes, the larger of
which shall be 37,5 mm and the smaller
01 SCOPE size either 19,0 mm or 13,2 mm. The
02 MATERIALS relative proportions of larger and smaller
03 PREPARATION OF UNDERLYING LAYERS aggregate shall be determined by
04 SIDE FORMS laboratory testing.
05 CONCRETE WORK (vi) Coarse aggregate produced from
06 REINFORCED PAVEMENT limestone, felsite, dolomite or other
07 TEXTURING, CURING AND PROTECTION calcareous rocks will not be permitted,
08 JOINTS unless authorized by the Engineer.
09 TRIAL PAVEMENT
10 REMEDIAL WORK (vii) The flakiness index of the fraction of the
11 CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES coarse aggregate smaller than 37,5 and
12 TESTING larger than 26,5 mm, determined in
13 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT accordance with SANS Method 847, shall
not exceed 35.
01 SCOPE
02.04 Admixtures to concrete
This section covers all the work in connection with the
construction of cast in-situ concrete pavements where No admixtures shall be used without the written
concrete is placed by hand with the use of side forms. permission of the Engineer, or unless specified in the
Project Specifications. Admixtures, if allowed, shall comply
Should the Contractor elect to use a paving machine for with the requirements of subclause 02.04 of section 704.
placing the concrete, he shall, in good time, submit full
details of such equipment, his method of obtaining the 02.05 Steel reinforcement
specified pavement requirements, and any possible
modifications to the requirements for concrete, to the Reinforcement shall comply with the relevant
requirements of section 703.
Engineer for approval. When the Employer specifies the
use of paver-laid concrete, the necessary modifications 02.06 Curing compound
and additions to this section will be included in the
Project Specifications. The curing compound used shall be a white-pigmented,
resin-based curing compound which complies with the
02 MATERIALS requirements of AASHTO M-148, except that the water
loss as determined by the water-retention test shall not
02.01 Cement 2
exceed 0,040 g/cm within 72 hours.
The cement shall be normal cement or blast-furnace
cement which complies with SANS 50197-1, a mixture A valid certificate from an approved testing laboratory
which contains milled, ground, blast-furnace slag and at shall be submitted, to certify that the curing compound
least 50% CEM 1 cement, or such other cement as may complies with the Specifications and that further testing
be specified in the Project Specifications. shall be carried out at regular intervals.

02.02 Water The curing compound shall be capable of being sprayed

onto a wet surface without loss of stability or
The requirements of subclause 02.03 of section 704 performance. This characteristic shall also be certified
shall apply. by the approved testing laboratory.
02.03 Aggregates for concrete 02.07 Joint sealers
The aggregates shall comply with SANS 1083, but shall (a) Neoprene compression seals
be subject to the following:
Neoprene compression seals for the sealing of
(a) The shrinkage of both fine and coarse aggregate sawn joints shall comply with the requirements of
shall each not exceed 130% of the reference SANS 1023. The seals shall be manufactured by
aggregate referred to in the SANS standard. the extrusion of an elastomeric material which
(b) Coarse aggregate shall comply with the 10% consists wholly of polychloroprene, which has
FACT values specified in the SANS standard for subsequently been vulcanized.
stone to be used in concrete which is subject to
(b) Joint filler
abrasion.
In addition, the aggregates shall comply with the The joint filler for the expansion joints shall be
following requirements: manufactured from a closed-cell polyethylene, and
the filler strips shall be provided with a tear-off
(i) The fine aggregate shall be either a natural or cover strip. The joint filler shall be of an approved
crusher-produced sand, or a blend of natural brand, such as Sondor or an equivalent material,
and crusher sands. and the type used shall be subject to the
Engineer's approval.
(ii) Wherever feasible, the grading of the fine
aggregate shall be such that not less than 8% (c) Liquid sealant in joints between concrete and
is retained between the 4,75 mm and 2,36 mm asphalt pavements
sieves and not less than 12% between the
2,36 mm and 1,18 mm sieves. The liquid sealant used in joints between concrete
and asphalt pavements shall be a hotpoured type
(iii) Aggregates shall not contain any deleterious joint-sealing compound which complies with the
amounts of organic materials such as grass, requirements of US Federal Specification
timber or other foreign materials. SS-S-1401 C(1).

610-1
(d) Lubricant adhesive for compression seals The Contractor shall note that the specified construction
tolerances for any underlying layers shall not relieve
The lubricant adhesive used for inserting neoprene
him of his responsibility to construct the concrete
compression seals shall comply with ASTM D-2835.
pavement to the requirements for thickness, grade,
(e) Polysulphide sealant cross- section and smoothness specified in clause 11 of
this section.
Two-component polysulphide sealant shall comply
with the requirements of SANS 110. As the Contractor has to work to stricter tolerances on
the concrete pavement than those obtained or specified
02.08 Tie bars and dowels for the underlying layers, the costs of any additional work
involved with a view to complying with the requirements
(a) Tie bars specified for the concrete pavement shall be included in
Tie bars shall consist of hot-rolled mild steel or the tendered rates for the concrete pavement.
hot-rolled, deformed high-yield-stress steel which Similarly, the costs of any additional thickness of
comply with the requirements of SANS 920, concrete which may be required to provide the thickness
except that any tie bars to be bent and later re- of pavement slab within the specified tolerances shall be
straightened shall be of mild steel. borne by the Contractor, irrespective of any tolerances
Tie bars of the required dimensions and spacing specified for the construction of the subbase.
shall be placed at right angles to the joints. The 03.02 Application of the prime coat
tie bars shall be free of paint, grease or other
coatings that may affect bonding with the When so specified in the Project Specifications, a
concrete. bituminous prime coat shall be applied to the completed
and accepted subbase as specified in section 605, at a
At the construction joints, one half of the tie bar rate of application as specified in the Project
shall be supported by suitable stools placed on Specifications or as directed by the Engineer. Before
the subbase, while the other half shall project into the pavement concrete is placed, the prime coat shall
the adjacent panel. Alternatively tie bars at be checked and any areas deficient in prime, or where
longitudinal joints may be bent parallel to the the prime coat has been damaged, shall be repaired as
edge of the first panel constructed and shall be directed by the Engineer. The primed surface shall then
straightened into their final positions before the be cleaned thoroughly. The prime coat shall be dry
concrete of the adjacent panel is placed, before any reinforcing steel, tie bars, dowels or
provided the method of fixing and support is concrete is placed.
approved by the Engineer.
03.03 Wetting of the subbase
At weakened-plane hinge joints the bars shall be
firmly supported on steel supporting devices fixed The surface of the subbase shall be kept continuously
to the subbase. wet for a period of at least one hour before the concrete
is placed. Immediately before the concrete is placed,
(b) Dowels the excess water shall be broomed off to ensure that
Dowel bars shall consist of plain, round mild-steel the subbase is still damp but without puddles of water
bars which comply with the requirements of or pockets of mud when the concrete is placed. The
SANS 920. The dimensions and spacing of dowel wetting is of particular importance during hot, dry
bars shall be as shown on the Drawings. weather, and no concrete shall be placed on a subbase
that has not been wetted or that has dried out.
Dowel bars shall be straight, free from burred
edges or other irregularities and with bevelled 04 SIDE FORMS
sliding ends. The free or unbonded end of the
dowel shall be coated with a bond-breaking 04.01 General
compound which consists of 200 penetration- Side forms shall be of steel. The thickness of the steel
grade bitumen blended hot with 14% light used shall not be less than 5 mm. Forms 250 mm or
creosote oil and later, when cold, brought to the more in height shall be at least 250 mm wide at the
consistency of paint by the addition of 20% base; forms less than 250 mm in height shall have a
solvent naphtha. base width at least as wide as the height. Flange
Dowels shall be held rigidly in horizontal and braces shall extend outwards on the base for at least
vertical alignment by an approved dowel- two thirds of the height of the form. The forms shall be
supporting frame. The dowel shall not be tack- free from warps, bends or kinks. The top face of the
welded to the supporting frame but shall be held form shall not vary from a true plane by more than
in position by soft binding wire. 3 mm in 3 m. The inside face of the upstanding leg shall
not vary from a true plane by more than 6 mm in 3 m.
A tolerance of not more than 2 mm in 300 mm
(1 in 150) from the correct alignment, either Side forms shall be of sufficient rigidity, both in the form
vertical or horizontal, will be permitted prior to and in the interlocking connection with the adjoining
concreting. After concreting, the tolerance for forms, so that deflection and springing will not occur
dowels shall remain within 4 mm in 300 mm. under the weight of the wet concrete which is placed in
the pavement.
03 PREPARATION OF UNDERLYING LAYERS 04.02 Setting of forms
03.01 General The forms shall be supported over their entire length.
They shall be set to the correct height by means of steel
The underlying layers shall be constructed in shims and wedges or by other approved methods, and
accordance with these Specifications up to the level of over the full length of the forms the space between the
the underside of the concrete pavement. forms and the supporting layer shall be caulked with a
1:3 cement:sand mortar. The mortar bed shall be
trimmed flush with the inside face of the forms.

610-2
The side forms shall be set to line and secured with not The report shall also indicate the relationship
less than three pins over each 3 m of length, and one between the 28-day compressive and flexural
pin shall be fixed at each side of a joint. The top strengths for at least three cement:water ratios.
surfaces of the forms shall be flush at all joints.
The tests to determine the relationship between
The side forms shall be so set and supported that the the compressive and flexural strength shall be
finished slab surface will comply with the requirements based on not less than six compressive strength
specified in clause 11; the slab edge shall nowhere specimens and not less than twelve flexural
deviate more than 3 mm from the vertical alignment. strength specimens for each cement:water ratio.
All strength tests shall be made in accordance with
The forms shall be cleaned and oiled immediately
SANS Methods 5863 and 5864.
before each use.
(c) Changes in proportions or materials
The forms shall be fixed in position within a reasonable
time for the Engineer to inspect them prior to paving. (i) If, during the progress of the work, the
requirements set out in subclause 05.01 are
04.03 Removal of forms not being met by the concrete being
The side forms shall be removed before any sawing of manufactured, the Contractor shall immediately
transverse joints can be commenced. stop the production of such concrete and shall
make such changes as may be necessary in
The concrete and projecting tie bars shall not be the mix proportions and/or the materials to
damaged in any way during the removal of the forms. meet these requirements.

05 CONCRETE WORK (ii) Any changes made shall be at the Contractor's

expense and no extra payment will be allowed
05.01 Requirements of concrete on grounds of such change.
(a) General (d) Changes in requirements
The specifications for materials to be used for the The Engineer shall have the right, at any time
concrete shall not limit the Contractor's responsibility during the progress of the work, to amend the
to manufacture concrete which complies with the requirements set out in subclause 05.01. In such
requirements of these Specifications. case the Contractor shall be compensated in
accordance with the terms of the Contract for the
(b) Minimum cement:water ratio additional costs of materials or additional handling
The cement:water ratio of the mix shall not be less and placing or for other costs, if any, entailed by
than 1,9. such changes.
(c) Minimum cement content 05.03 Batching, mixing and transporting of concrete
The cement content of the mix shall not be less Concrete shall be batched, mixed and transported as
3
than 320 kg/m . specified in the relevant clauses of section 704.
(d) Specified strength 05.04 Placing and compaction
The specified strength shall be the higher of the (a) Time for placing and compaction
following values:
The placing, compacting and finishing of the
(i) 33 MPa.
concrete shall be carried out as rapidly as possible
(ii) A 28-day compressive strength which corresponds and the operations shall be so arranged that, in
to a 28-day flexural strength of 3,8 MPa. any transverse vertical section of the slab, the
(e) The workability of concrete concrete shall be fully compacted and finished
within two and a half hours of mixing. This time
The mix proportions and consistency shall be such shall be reduced by half an hour for every 5°C by
that, with the equipment in use the concrete can which the concrete temperature is above 20°C at
be fully compacted without the materials the time of placing, unless otherwise permitted by
segregating or the occurrence of excessive the Engineer.
bleeding. Testing shall be carried out in
accordance with clause 07 of section 903. Unless adequate lighting facilities approved by the
Engineer are provided by the Contractor, the
05.02 Determining mix proportions placing of concrete pavement shall cease at a time
when the finishing operations can still be
(a) General
completed during daylight hours.
The preliminary proportions of cement and
(b) Adverse weather conditions
aggregate required to produce concrete which
complies with the requirements of these ( i) Protection against rain and hail
Specifications shall be determined by way of
laboratory tests on concrete which is No concrete shall be placed during rainy
manufactured from the cement, coarse and fine weather. For the concrete to be properly
aggregates, air-entraining agent (if any) and water protected against the effects of rain and hail
as proposed for use in the Works. until it has hardened sufficiently, the
Contractor shall at all times have frame-
(b) Preliminary tests mounted waterproof covers available for the
At least 30 days prior to the construction of the protection of the surface of the unhardened
trial pavement, as specified in clause 09, the concrete. When rain appears to be imminent,
Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for all paving operations shall cease and all
approval samples of the materials he proposes to personnel shall take the necessary steps to
use and a report from an approved testing ensure complete protection of the
laboratory which shows the proportions proposed unhardened concrete.
for the paving concrete.

610-3
 (ii) Paving in cold weather The beams shall be provided with mounted
All reasonable precautions shall be taken to vibrators with an energy input of not less than
ensure that the temperature of the pavement 0,25 kW per metre length of beam. Alternatively,
a vibrating twin-beam compactor of an equivalent
concrete will not fall below 5°C during the
power may be used.
first 48 hours after casting. When prevailing
temperatures are low or when cold weather is The beam shall be lifted and moved forward by
forecast and there is danger of the increments which do not exceed the beam width.
temperature of the freshly cast pavement After every 2 m the beam shall be taken back 2 m
concrete falling below the prescribed limits, and then slowly drawn forward whilst vibrating
the Contractor shall either cease concreting over the compacted surface to provide a smooth
operations or he may be permitted to carry finish.
on, provided the Engineer is satisfied that
adequate protective measures are available The surface shall then be regulated by at least
and will be taken. two passes of a scraping straight-edge with a
blade length of not less than 2 m. If the surface is
(iii) Paving in hot weather torn by the straight-edge on account of
Hot weather is defined as any combination of irregularities in the surface, a further pass of the
high air temperature, low relative humidity vibratory beam shall be made, followed by a
and a wind velocity which is liable to cause further pass of the straight-edge.
cracking in the pavement and/or the
Poker vibrators shall not be permitted to come in
impairment of the quality of fresh or hardened contact with joint assemblies, the underlying layer
concrete, or which will otherwise result in or side forms.
abnormal properties.
A final surface finish of the concrete shall be
When paving during hot weather and when
obtained by means of hand-operated floats. If
the temperature of the fresh concrete can be
necessary, more than one set of equipment
expected to exceed 24°C, the Contractor
consisting of a vibratory beam, a straight-edge
shall implement appropriate precautionary
and floats, shall be used to keep up with the
measures to maintain the concrete at the
concrete produced by the mixer.
coolest temperature as may be practicable.
Paving shall cease when the concrete 06 REINFORCED PAVEMENT
temperature, while being discharged from the
mixer, exceeds 32°C. 06.01 General
(c) Responsibility for protection In this context the term "reinforced pavement" shall
mean isolated reinforced slabs incorporated within
The Contractor shall be responsible for the pavement which is generally unreinforced.
quality and strength of the concrete placed and
for its protection, and any concrete damaged by 06.02 Reinforcement
adverse weather conditions shall be removed and
replaced at the Contractor's expense. Reinforcement shall comply with section 703. The type,
size, spacing and position of reinforcement in the slab
(d) Maintaining the continuity of placing shall be as shown on the Drawings or as directed by the
The Contractor shall make adequate advance Engineer.
arrangements to prevent a delay in the delivery Reinforcement shall be supported on prefabricated
and placing of the concrete. An interval of more metal stools or supports, or in any other manner
than 30 minutes between the placing of any two approved by the Engineer. The method of support for
consecutive batches or loads of concrete shall reinforcement shall maintain the reinforcement in the
constitute a cause for stopping any paving position and at the depth shown on the Drawings.
operations, and the Contractor shall, at his own
expense make a construction joint in the concrete 07 TEXTURING, CURING AND PROTECTION
already placed, at the location and of the type as
may be directed by the Engineer. Paving shall be 07.01 General
continuous, and the rate of paving shall be
After placing, compaction and finishing and before the
adjusted to suit the rate of delivery of the
concrete. curing membrane is applied, the surface of the concrete
shall be provided with a transverse surface texture.
(e) Width of placing Texturing on the downgrade shall be at 80° to the
The width of concrete pavement to be placed in a longitudinal axis of the pavement. The surface texturing
single operation shall be as shown on the shall be made and completed before the concrete has
Drawings or as specified in the Project set to such an extent that the surface will be torn and
Specifications. the coarse aggregate will be unduly loosened during
texturing.
(f) Placing and spreading
07.02 Texturing
The concrete shall be placed and spread to a
surcharge of about one-fifth of the pavement The texturing shall be made with a wire brush. The wire
thickness and shall thereafter be compacted, struck brush shall have 100 mm long tufts which consist of
off and finished to the level of the side forms. tape wire approximately 0,25 mm thick. The brush shall
contain two rows of tufts at 20 mm centres, which two
(g) Compaction and finishing rows of tufts shall be offset 10 mm so that the tufts in
one row will be exactly halfway between the tufts in the
The concrete shall be compacted with poker
other row. The tufts shall average fourteen wires each.
vibrators which are followed by a steel-shod
Brushes shall be replaced when the shortest tufts wear
hardwood compacting beam not less than 75 mm
down to 85 mm.
wide and 225 mm deep.

610-4
Each succeeding sweep of the texturing brush shall Construction joints shall be constructed in accordance
overlap the previous sweep by not more than 15 mm with the requirements of clause 08 of section 704 of
and the average depth of texturing shall be not less these specifications.
than 0,80 mm. In order to ensure straight brush marks,
(a) Longitudinal construction joints
the brush shall be operated against a straight-edge laid
downgrade at 80° to the pavement centre line. Where the pavement is constructed in partial
widths, the construction joint or joints shall be
07.03 Curing provided where shown on the Drawings.
The exposed surfaces of the concrete pavement, Tie bars shall comply with subclause 02.08 and
including the sides of the slab, shall be treated shall have the dimensions and spacings indicated
immediately after the texturing of the surface and after on the Drawings.
removal of the side forms with a white-pigmented curing
When longitudinal construction joints are to be
compound, as specified in subclause 02.06 above.
sealed, the top portion of these joints shall be sawn
The curing compound shall be sprayed onto the surface to a nominal width of 6 mm and to the depth shown
at a rate of 0,30 litre/m2, or as directed by the Engineer, on the Drawings, but not before seven days after
by hand-spraying equipment which produces a fine fog- construction of the pavement. If so indicated on the
type of spray which will not damage the surface of the Drawings, the top arises of these joints shall be
concrete. The curing compound shall be applied in two bevelled 5 mm at 45 degrees at the time of the
applications and coverage shall be uniform on all sawing of the joint, or directly after completion.
surfaces.
(b) Transverse construction joints
Care must be taken to control the spray rate of the
Transverse construction joints are made at the end
curing compound, as a too thick application may cause
of the day's work or where concreting has to be
difficulties when the compound has to be removed from suspended on account of breakdowns or for other
areas which have to be painted with road-marking paint. reasons.
During spraying operations, the curing compound shall These joints may be formed at the position of a
be continuously agitated or stirred to keep the planned contraction joint (in which case a dowelled
pigmentation in suspension. butt joint shall be provided), or midway between
The curing membrane shall be maintained intact for contraction joints (in which case the joint shall be a
seven days after the concrete has been placed. Any keyed and tied construction joint), or at an
damage to the curing membrane on account of the expansion joint (in which case capped dowel bars
Contractor's activities on the pavement shall be made shall be used).
good by respraying the affected areas. When transverse construction joints are to be
07.04 Protection of pavement sealed, the top portion of these joints shall be sawn
to a nominal width of 6 mm and to the depth shown
No vehicles with an axle load exceeding 20 kN shall be on the Drawings, but not before seven days after
run on the finished surface of a concrete pavement construction of the pavement. If so indicated on the
within a period of twenty-one days of its completion, Drawings, the top arises of these joints shall be
unless the Engineer permits a reduction of this period to bevelled 5 mm at 45 degrees at the time of the
fourteen days when the pavement has been constructed sawing of the joint or directly after completion.
during generally warm weather conditions. Rubber-tyred
vehicles with an axle load of less than 20 kN which 08.03 Weakened plane joints
travel at a speed not exceeding 25 km/h, may be Weakened plane joints shall be formed by reducing the
permitted after a period of seven days from the concrete thickness at the joint by sawing a groove in the
completion of the concrete pavement. hardened concrete.
No vehicle with an axle load in excess of 80 kN shall be (a) Longitudinal hinge joints
run on the completed surface during any stage of the
Contract. Where the pavement is constructed in widths of
two or more panels at a time, a hinge joint shall be
08 JOINTS formed by sawing.
08.01 General Sawing shall be carried out as specified in
subclause 08.05 and not later than 48 hours after the
Joints in concrete pavement shall be provided at the concrete has been placed. If, however, longitudinal
positions and spacings indicated on the Drawings or cracking of the concrete takes place before this time,
ordered by the Engineer. sawing shall be completed at an earlier time to
The faces of all joints shall be at right angles to the prevent any future longitudinal cracking.
surface of the pavement. The nominal width of the groove shall be 6 mm for
joints sealed with preformed neoprene seals and
If the joints do not comply with the requirements of the
3 mm for unsealed joints. A width tolerance of plus
Specifications in all respects, it shall be sufficient
or minus 0,5 mm shall be applicable to all joints.
reason for the Engineer to stop the concreting
operations until the Contractor can satisfy the Engineer The depth of the groove shall be one quarter of the
that he will be able to perform the work in accordance nominal pavement thickness, plus 13 mm.
with the Specifications. Deformed steel tie bars shall be installed where
08.02 Construction joints specified or indicated on the drawings.

Construction joints are made by placing fresh concrete (b) Transverse contraction joints
against hardened concrete at predetermined locations. Transverse contraction joints shall consist of
The edges of all construction joints shall be rounded to planes of weakness created by the sawing of
a 5 mm radius. grooves in the surface of the pavement at the
spacings shown on the Drawings.

610-5
 (i) General requirements The joint filler shall comply with the requirements of
subclause 02.07(b) and shall be accurately punched out
Sawing shall be carried out as specified in
or drilled to admit dowels where called for on the
subclause 08.05. Transverse contraction joints
Drawings. The filler for each joint shall be furnished in a
shall be sawn to a depth of one quarter of the
single piece over the full depth and width required for
nominal pavement thickness within 24 hours of
the joint, unless otherwise authorized by the Engineer.
the placing of the concrete. The exact time
When the use of more than one piece is authorized for
shall be determined by the Contractor, who
a joint, the abutting ends shall be fastened securely and
must bear in mind the risk of cracking of the
held accurately to shape by stapling or by any other
pavement and the risk of spalling when green
suitable means of fastening which the Engineer regards
concrete is sawn.
as being satisfactory.
When the pavement is constructed in partial
The joint filler, together with the sealing groove, shall
widths, the transverse joints opposite those
completely separate adjacent slabs, and any loose-
which have opened in the adjacent pavement
shall be sawn within 24 hours of the concrete fitting dowel bars and spaces between the subbase and
having been placed, for which the exact time the filler shall be packed with joint filler material after
assembly of the joint.
will be determined by the Contractor, as above,
but in all cases not more than two consecutive If the expansion joints incorporate dowels, the dowels
planned contraction joints shall be omitted. shall be of the required dimensions, material and
The remaining contraction joints may be sawn spacing and shall be provided with a close-fitting cap at
at such time as the Contractor may elect within one end. The cap shall be placed on the free half of
48 hours of the placement of the concrete, but each dowel, which shall be coated, as late as possible
before uncontrolled cracking takes place. before concreting, with a bond-breaking compound
which complies with subclause 02.08 (b).
Where required, dowels shall be installed as
specified in subclause 02.08. Dowelled joints The sealing groove in the upper portion of expansion
shall be at right angles to the longitudinal axis joints shall be sealed with a preformed neoprene
of the pavement. compression seal.

(ii) Contraction joints left unsealed The edges of the expansion joints shall be rounded to a
radius of 5 mm. If so indicated on the Drawings, the top
Unsealed joints shall be sawn to a nominal arrises of these joints shall be bevelled 5 mm at
width of 3 mm and to a tolerance of plus or 45 degrees not before seven days after construction of
minus 0,5 mm. the pavement.
(iii) Contraction joints to be sealed
08.05 Sawing of joints
All joints shall initially be sawn not more than
3 mm wide. In sealed joints the top portion of The joints in the pavement slab shall be sawn by
the groove shall subsequently be reamed to experienced personnel only.
the specified final width and depth not before Except in portions of pavement which incorporate
four days after the initial sawing. dowelled contraction joints, no transverse contraction
Notwithstanding these requirements, the joint shall be constructed within 1,5 m of a transverse
Engineer may direct that all or some joints be volunteer crack. If the planned spacing of transverse
sawn to the required final dimensions in a contraction joints in portions of pavement which do not
single operation if the Contractor demonstrates incorporate dowels in transverse joints would result in
that the quality of the completed joints is locating a transverse contraction joint within 1,5 m of a
comparable with that of joints sawn in two transverse volunteer crack, the transverse contraction
separate operations. joint shall be relocated so that it is not within 1,5 m of
The nominal reamed width of sawn contraction the said transverse volunteer crack.
joints which do not exhibit shrinkage cracking The transverse contraction joints shall be sawn in such
along the side of the pavement shall be as a manner that transverse volunteer cracks will not occur.
shown on the Drawings, with a tolerance of
plus or minus 0,5 mm. Excessive spalling of the arrases will not be allowed
and the Contractor shall use the type of blade and
In respect of the nominal reamed width of equipment best suited to the hardness of the concrete
contraction joints which exhibit shrinkage being sawn.
cracking along the side of the pavement
account shall be taken of the width of cracking, Sufficient standby power saws shall be kept available
and such reamed width shall be as shown on on the Site by the Contractor ready for use at all times
the Drawings when the width of the contraction when concrete is being placed in the pavement.
crack is 1,5 mm or less, and as directed by the Where spalling exceeds 5 mm in depth at any point
Engineer when the width of a contraction crack measured from the top surface of the pavement, joints
exceeds 1,5 mm. shall be repaired with an epoxy-resin mortar as
Joints shall be sealed by a preformed specified in clause 10.
neoprene compression seal as specified in
Immediately after sawing, the joint grooves shall be
subclause 02.07(a).
washed out with a jet of clean water to remove all fine
08.04 Expansion joints material and the joints shall be sealed temporarily with
an approved paper rope.
Expansion joints shall be constructed with vertical
preformed joint filler, dowel bars and supporting cradles No traffic of any kind shall be allowed on the pavement
or assemblies. until all joints have been temporarily sealed.

610-6
08.06 Joint sealing The Contractor shall also demonstrate the methods he
proposes to use for the application of the required
(a) Neoprene compression seals
surface texture, the construction of joints and for the
(i) Material placement of tie bars, dowels, etc.
Neoprene seals shall be as specified in The size of the trial section of pavement for roads and
subclause 02.07(a). The actual configuration parking areas shall in each case depend on the
of the seal shall be as shown on the Drawings, dimensions of the panels and shall be determined by
as specified in the Project Specifications, or as the Engineer on the Site.
approved by the Engineer.
(ii) Installation 09.02 Proceeding with full-scale paving and further
trial pavements
The joint grooves into which the seals are to be
inserted shall be cleaned with a power-driven Unless he has been advised of any deficiencies in the
rotary wire brush. The grooves shall be dry and trial pavement, the Contractor may proceed with full-
shall be finally cleaned with compressed air scale paving ten days after the completion of the trial
immediately before the seals are installed. pavement or at such earlier time as the Engineer may
The sides of the neoprene seal shall be coated allow. In the event of deficiencies occurring in the trial
with an approved lubricant-adhesive pavement, the Engineer may order the Contractor to
compound, as specified in subclause 02.07 (d). break up and reconstruct the trial pavement after
The seal shall be inserted into the joint with repairing any damage to the underlying layers, or he
suitable equipment which will not damage the may allow the Contractor to effect repairs, all as set out
seal during its insertion. The seal shall not be in clause 10 and at his own expense.
stretched to fit into the groove, but a maximum
increase of 10% in the length of the seal after 10 REMEDIAL WORK
installation will be allowed.
10.01 Removal of concrete
The top of the seal shall not be less than
5 mm or more than 7 mm below the Where any section of the pavement which does not
pavement surface. comply with the specified requirements is to be
removed and reconstructed, the entire portion of the
No traffic of any kind shall be allowed on the
slab between the longitudinal and transverse joints shall
pavement before the joints have been sealed
be removed and reconstructed.
either permanently or temporarily.
The size of the sealing strip to be used will 10.02 Removal of high spots
depend on the width of the groove to be sealed. Wherever the Engineer so permits, high spots may be
The Contractor shall not order large quantities removed with approved power cutters or surface
of preformed seals before the quantities planers. Generally this shall apply to spots not
required in the various sizes have been exceeding 10 mm in height. No hand-operated grinding
discussed with and approved by the Engineer. wheels or chisels shall be used. After individual high
spots have been removed, the Contractor shall, if
(b) Liquid sealant in joints between concrete and required, grind the surface to the nearest longitudinal
asphalt pavement and transverse joint so that all the ground areas are
These joints shall be sealed with a hot-pour-type neat rectangular areas with a uniform texture.
joint-sealing compound as specified in On all portions of the pavement where the surface
subclause 02.07 (c). Prior to application, the joints texture has been destroyed or reduced by grinding,
shall be clean without any free water being surface texture shall be restored by grooves being cut
present. Curing compound on joint walls shall be into the concrete surface. The grooves shall be
removed by sand-blasting or with an abrasive approximately 3 mm deep and 10 mm apart.
wheel. Dirt, dust and laitance shall be blown out of
the joint with oil-free compressed air at a pressure 10.03 Repairing of joints
of approximately 600 kPa immediately before the
sealing operation. The sealant shall be applied in Joints along which spalls occur that exceed 5 mm in
accordance with the manufacturer's depth at any point measured from the top surface of the
recommendations, particularly with regard to pavement, or any other joints which in the opinion of the
temperature, which shall be carefully controlled. Engineer are not acceptable, shall be repaired with an
approved epoxy-resin mortar. Some epoxy binder shall
(c) Polysulphide sealant be used to prime the surface being repaired prior to
Polysulphide sealant of the grade scheduled or placement of the mortar mix. The mix shall be shaped
shown on the Drawings shall comply with the to the original proper joint configuration.
requirements of subclause 02.07 (e) and shall be
mixed and applied in strict accordance with the 10.04 Repairing of cracks
manufacturer's instructions after the joints have The Contractor shall be responsible for constructing a
been thoroughly cleaned as specified in pavement that will not show any cracks.
subclause 08.06 (b) above.
Where cracks occur in the pavement which, in the
09 TRIAL PAVEMENT opinion of the Engineer, do not warrant the removal and
reconstruction of the pavement, the Contractor shall
09.01 General repair such cracks as specified hereafter.
Prior to the commencement of full-scale paving, the The cost of repairing cracks or of breaking up, removing
Contractor shall construct a section of trial pavement, and replacing existing slabs shall be borne by the
which is laid as part of the permanent pavement, to Contractor if the first cracks in any slab section between
demonstrate his capability of constructing the pavement joints occur within 30 days of the casting.
in accordance with the Specifications.

610-7
If the first cracks in any slab section between joints Volunteer cracks which do not require epoxy injection
occur more than 30 days after casting, the Contractor shall be routed out and sealed with an approved two-
will be paid for repairing the cracks or replacing the slab component, cold-applied polysulphide sealant which
section. complies with SANS 110, or a polyurethane liquid
sealant which complies with ASTM C-920.
All cracks, except as otherwise provided, shall be
repaired by epoxy being injected over the entire length of The sealant shape factor shall be taken into account for
the cracks under pressure. Cracks which do not require the dimensions of the sealant groove which dimensions
injection with epoxy shall be limited to single continuous shall be approved by the Engineer. Prior to sealing, the
cracks without branch or connecting cracks that - surfaces of the joint shall be cleaned of all traces of
dust, laitance and other foreign material by wire
(a) either begin or end at a longitudinal joint or an brushing, followed by a blowing out with clean, dry
edge of the pavement and, at any point along the compressed air. The joint faces shall be primed with
length of crack, are not within 1,5 m of a transverse primer recommended by the sealant manufacturer. The
joint or other crack that has not been injected with sealant shall be supported by an approved bond-
epoxy; or breaking tape to prevent the underside of the sealant
(b) do not begin or end at a longitudinal joint or edge from adhering to the concrete.
of pavement and, at any point along the length of
crack and 11 CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES
• are not within 1,5 m of any transverse joint, The work described in this section shall be constructed
to the dimensional tolerances given below.
and
11.01 Level and grade
• are not within 300 mm of any longitudinal joint,
edge of pavement or other crack that has not The level tolerances referred to in subclause 05.01 of
been injected with epoxy. section 902 shall be as follows:
Where cracks cross or partly coincide with sawn joints, H90 ± 15 mm
adequate protective measures shall be taken to prevent Hmax ± 20 mm
the entry of epoxy into saw cuts which will reduce the
groove depth, or, at the option of the Contractor, Deviations from the specified longitudinal grade for
accumulations of epoxy in saw cuts shall be removed roads on account of deviations from the specified levels
by resawing to the specified depth prior to opening the shall not exceed those given in subclause 05.05 of
pavement to any traffic, but not later than 72 hours after section 601.
the epoxy has been injected.
11.02 Width of pavements and the alignment of
Epoxy injection shall be completed within 90 working pavement edges
days after the pavement has been placed.
The width of each pavement shall be at least the
When making epoxy-injection repairs, a surface seal specified width.
shall be applied to prevent the loss of epoxy, and entry
ports shall be placed at sufficiently close intervals to The edge of the pavement shall not deviate by more
allow the entire length of the crack to be filled. Surface than 10 mm from the edge of a 3 m long straight-edge
seal materials and injection procedures shall be such placed to touch the edge of the pavement for straight
that damage to the texture and appearance of the sections, or by more than 3 mm from the designated
pavement surface will be prevented after the pavement offset per 3 m length of curve for curved sections.
has been opened to public traffic. Epoxy shall be
11.03 Joints
injected with in-line mixing equipment. Pressure pots
shall not be used. The epoxy shall conform to California Joints shall not deviate by more than 10 mm from their
State Specification 8040-03, but other epoxy adhesives designated positions in the pavement or by more than
and injection methods will be considered if their use can 10 mm from the edge of a 3 m long straight-edge
be supported by conclusive proof of satisfactory placed to touch the line of the joint. There shall be no
performance in concrete roads. discontinuities in the line of joints.
The Contractor shall provide cores of epoxied cracks at 11.04 Thickness
the rate of five relatively evenly spaced cores for each
50 m of epoxied crack. If the total length of cracks to be The thickness tolerances referred to in subclause 05.02
epoxied exceeds 50 m, the rate of coring may be of section 902 shall be as follows:
reduced to one core for each additional 30 m of epoxied D90 21 mm
crack, provided that the Contractor's methods and
Dmax 27 mm
equipment are producing satisfactory results. Cores
shall extend through the entire depth of pavement and Dave 5 mm
shall include the full depth of crack. The locations of
cores will be determined by the Engineer. Cracks where The thickness of the slab shall be determined by
epoxy has penetrated to less than 80% of the crack accurate levelling in the same position at predetermined
depth shall have additional epoxy injected until a random points before and after construction of the slab,
minimum of 80% of the crack depth has been filled. and also by measuring cores drilled from the slab (an
Such cracks may require additional cores for verification average of three measurements per core).
as determined by the Engineer.
All holes which result from coring shall be completely
filled with concrete of the same quality as that used for
constructing the pavement, but with a maximum coarse
aggregate size of 13,2 mm.

610-8
11.05 Cross-section (for roads) Table 610/1
When tested with a 3 m straight-edge laid at right Testing frequency
Test
angles to the road centre line, the surface shall not (one test)
deviate by more than 6 mm from the bottom of the Materials
straight edge.
Aggregates:
11.06 Surface regularity (for roads) Shrinkage10%
For every type of aggregate
FACT
When tested with a rolling straight-edge as described in used or apparent changes in
Flakiness index
subclause 09.03 of section 903, the number of surface properties
Organic impurities
irregularities in excess of 4 mm shall not exceed the
following: Moisture content At the beginning and halfway
through each shift and after
(a) Average number of surface rain showers
irregularities per 100 m taken Grading For every 100 m3 of coarse
over 300 m - 600 m lengths 5 aggregate
3
(b) Number of surface irregularities For every 50 m of fine
taken over 100 m at a time 8 aggregate
Bulking As for moisture content but in
The maximum value of any individual irregularity when respect of volume batching only
measured with the rolling straight-edge or with a 3 m
straight edge laid parallel to the road centre line shall Concrete
3
not exceed 7 mm. 28-day cube For every 100 m of concrete
compressive strength (min 9/day)
12 TESTING Constructional
tolerances
12.01 Process control
Surface levels Every 20 m (5 points per test)*
The tests and testing frequencies shown in table 610/1 Width and edge
shall be the minimum that will be required from the Every 100 m
alignment
Contractor in terms of clause 05 of section 901 for the
purpose of process control. Joint alignment Every 100 m
Thickness (level Every 20 m (2 points per test)*
Note: measurements)
The Contractor is advised to carry out regular * For parking areas, 1 test equals a series of points,
accelerated 18-hour compressive-strength tests in order 5 m apart, in a straight line across the full width of
to predict the 28-day compressive strength of the the parking area, at every 20 m interval.
concrete. The methods of testing and predicting the 28-
(ii) Procedure in the event of failure
day strengths shall be as determined in consultation
with the Engineer. Whenever 18-hour tests indicate that Should, on the basis of the acceptance control
the required 28-day strengths will not be obtained, the plan, the 28-day compressive strengths of
Contractor shall immediately bring about such changes concrete cubes fail to meet the requirements,
in materials and mix proportions as may be necessary the lot represented by these tests shall be
to ensure future compliance. rejected, but the Contractor shall nevertheless
have the right to resubmit the lot on the basis
The Engineer may carry out 28-day compressive- of concrete cores drilled from the pavement in
strength tests and the Contractor will be permitted to a random pattern.
avail himself of these test results instead of carrying out
his own testing. Each lot shall be represented by 12 cores, and
the required average equivalent cube strength,
However, if he elects to do so, it will be entirely at his ignoring outliers, shall not be less than the
own risk, and neither the Engineer nor the Employer will following:
be liable for damages or costs to the Contractor which
may arise from any reliance placed on such tests. La = L s + 1,435 S n
where
12.02 Routine Inspection and testing
La = the required average equivalent cube
Routine inspection and testing will be carried out by the
strength
Engineer in accordance with the provisions of clause 09
of section 902 to test the quality of materials and Ls = the specified 28-day cube compressive
workmanship for compliance with the requirements of strength as specified in
this section. In addition, the following shall apply: subclause 05.01 (d) of this section
(a) Compressive-strength control Sn = Standard deviation of the equivalent
cube strengths.
(i) Test for compliance
The method of coring and testing shall be
Compressive-strength control shall be carried in accordance with SANS method 5865,
out on the basis of the acceptance-control plan and the interpretation of test results shall
as described in section 902. generally be in accordance with the
recommendations of Technical Report
No 11 : Concrete core testing for strength,
published by the Concrete Society London.

610-9
 The equivalent cube strength shall be the (i) Work which does not comply with the
"potential strength" referred to in the strength requirements
above publication. The Engineer's
The acceptance of substandard work at
decision regarding the interpretation of
reduced payment shall only apply to work
the above publication, together with such
which, on the basis of the tests on which it
adaptations as, in his opinion, are
was finally rejected, exhibited not less than
necessary to make allowance for
80% of the required strength. Acceptance
circumstances which differ from those
of work that is substandard in strength shall
contemplated in this publication, shall be
be subject to reduced payment at the
final. When the resubmitted lot fails to
percentage of full payment set out in
meet the requirements stated above, it
table 610/2 below:
shall be rejected, but the Engineer may, in
his sole discretion, permit the Contractor Table 610/2
to resubmit such sections of the lot as, in
the Engineer's opinion, appear to have, in
Average strength
substance, the required strength judging Percentage of
as percentage of
by the cores already taken. full payment
required average
Such sections of the lot shall be (%)
(% to nearest 0,1%)
resubmitted by way of 12 fresh cores
being taken for each section, and the 100 100
required average equivalent cube
strength of each sublot of 12 cores shall 95 - 99,9 90
not be less than that stated above with 90 - 94,9 81
regard to the first resubmission.
85 - 89,9 72
The costs of drilling and testing the cores
shall be for the Contractor's account 80 - 84,9 64
irrespective of the outcome of such tests.
All sections which do not meet the above (ii) Work which does not comply with the
requirements shall be rejected. In the case requirements for average thickness
of rejected work, the Engineer shall have
the option of requiring the Contractor to Where the average thickness of a pavement
remove such defective work and to replace lot fails to meet the specified requirements,
it with work which meets the specified the acceptance of substandard work shall be
requirements, or of accepting substandard subject to reduced payment at the
work at a reduced payment, as described percentage of full payment set out in
in subclause 12.02 (d) below. table 610/3 below:

(b) Relationship between the compressive and Table 610/3

flexural strength of concrete
Average thickness
During paving, the relationship between the Percentage of
28-day compressive and flexural strengths deficiency of concrete
full payment
established by the preliminary tests shall be pavement
(%)
monitored by continuing tests being made at (mm to nearest 0,1 mm)
the discretion of the Engineer.
0,0 - 5,0 100
For this purpose sets of six beams and three 5,1 - 7,5 80
cubes shall be manufactured from the same 7,6 - 10,0 72
batch of concrete and tested for flexural and
compressive strength respectively. 10,1 - 12,5 68

If the test results vary from those established by

the preliminary tests, the specified compressive (iii) Work which does not comply with the
strength, as defined in subclause 05.01 (d), will requirements for both strength and average
be adjusted accordingly. thickness.

(c) Defective work or materials Work which does not comply with the
requirements for both strength and average
Any materials or work which does not comply thickness may be accepted by the Engineer
with the specified requirements shall be at a reduced payment, which is calculated by
removed and replaced with materials or work applying the product of the above reduction
which complies with the specified requirements factors, provided that the quality of the work
or, if the Engineer permits, shall be repaired as is such that the combined reduction factor is
specified in clause 10 of this section so that it not less than 0,64.
will comply with the specified requirements
after having been repaired. 12.03 Tests and testing equipment

(d) Acceptance of substandard work at reduced (a) Tests

payment Reference shall be made to section 903 for
In lieu of requiring the removal of work that has details concerning the following tests which will
been rejected on account of insufficient have to be made:
strength or thickness, the Engineer shall have • Tests on coarse and fine aggregate for concrete
the right to accept such work at a reduced
payment for the pavement concrete in • Flexural-strength test (modulus of rupture)
accordance with the conditions set out below:

610-10
 • Compressive-strength test for concrete cubes sides in the case of curing. The Engineer shall determine
which portions of the pavement will require texturing.
• Testing of concrete cores
• Slump tests The tendered rate for texturing shall include full
compensation for providing the required equipment and
(b) The provision of testing equipment for applying the texturing as specified.
Where provision is made for testing equipment in The tendered rate for curing shall include full
the Schedule of Quantities, the following items of compensation for providing the curing compound and
testing equipment shall be supplied by the for applying it at the specified nominal rate with an
Contractor, on the instructions of the Engineer: approved hand-operated sprayer, as specified. The
tendered price shall also include full compensation for
• Concrete cube testing press (compressive-
the spraying of curing compound in unsealed joints.
strength test)
• Concrete cube moulds (150 mm) Item Unit

• Concrete beam moulds (150 mm x 150 mm x 610.03 Variation in the rate of application
700 mm) of the curing compound litre ( )
(c) Certification, calibration and maintenance of The unit of measurement in respect of increases or
equipment decreases in the rate of application of the curing
compound shall be the litre.
Immediately before it is brought onto the Site, the
press shall be tested and calibrated by an Payment for variations shall be made as specified for
officially recognized and approved agency and variations of other materials in clause 28 of section 001.
shall carry a certificate to that effect, together
Item Unit
with all calibration curves or tables. Thereafter
the Engineer may require the Contractor to have 610.04 Joints
the apparatus retested once a year at no
610.04.01 Expansion joints complete
additional costs to the Employer.
(excluding dowels) metre (m)

13 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 610.04.02 Longitudinal hinge joints

Item Unit 610.04.02.01 Sawn hinge joints (unsealed) metre (m)

610.04.02.02 Sawn hinge joints (sealed) metre (m)
610.01 Concrete pavement
610.04.03 Transverse contraction joints
(Class, thickness and nominal
cement content indicated) 610.04.03.01 Sawn contraction joints
excluding texturing and (sealed) completed in a single
2
curing square metre (m ) operation (width as shown
on Drawings) metre (m)
The unit of measurement shall be the square metre of
pavement placed and finished in accordance with the 610.04.03.02 Sawn contraction joints
Specifications and Project Specifications. No additional (sealed) completed in two
payment over the tendered rate shall be made for any separate operations (width
pavement with an average thickness in excess of that as shown on Drawings) metre (m)
shown on the Drawings. The quantity shall be
calculated from the authorized dimensions of the 610.04.03.03 Sawn contraction joints
completed pavement surface, except when the (unsealed) metre (m)
Drawings show or the Engineer requires local 610.04.04 Dowel bars (mild steel)
deviations from the specified thickness. The volume of (diameter and length
the concrete, in such cases, shall be converted into an
indicated) number (No)
equivalent area in square metres based on the specified
thickness of the slab. 610.04.05 Tie bars (diameter and
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for length indicated) number (No)
procuring and furnishing all materials, the storage of 610.04.06 End caps for dowels at
materials, provision of all plant, determining mix expansion joints number (No)
proportions, for mixing, transporting, placing and finishing
of the concrete, including formwork, repairs to defective 610.04.07 Forming and sealing of
surfaces, grinding and retexturing if required, repairing joints between asphalt
joints and cracks, protecting the pavement against and concrete pavement metre (m)
damage, construction joints and for process control.
The unit of measurement for joints in the pavement
Item Unit shall be the metre of completed joint, except that dowel
bars and tie bars across joints shall be measured
610.02 Texturing and curing of separately by the number of each type installed.
concrete pavement
2 Construction joints as such shall not be measured for
610.02.01 Wire-brush texturing square metre (m ) payment, and the cost thereof shall be deemed to be
610.02.02 Curing square metre (m2) included in the tendered rate for concrete pavement.
However, if the position of a longitudinal construction
The unit of measurement for texturing and for curing joint coincides with that of an unsealed hinge joint, the
shall be the square metre of exposed completed Contractor shall be paid at the rate tendered for the
pavement textured or cured as specified. The quantity type of unsealed hinge joint it replaces, provided that
shall be calculated from the authorized horizontal the requisite number and sizes of tie bars detailed for
dimensions of the completed pavement surface in the the hinge joints are installed.
case of texturing or curing, plus the surface area of slab
610-11
Where the hinge joint replaced by the construction joint The unit of measurement shall be the linear metre of
is a sealed hinged joint, the construction joint shall be crack repaired as specified. Only cracks in slab sections
sawn and sealed and the correct number of tie bars which have not shown any cracks for 30 days after
inserted, in which case payment shall be at the casting shall be measured for payment.
tendered rate for sawn and sealed hinge joints.
The tendered rates shall include full compensation for
The tendered rates for expansion joints shall include full repairing the cracks as specified, including all materials,
compensation for forming the joint complete with joint labour and equipment, but excluding the cost of drilling
filler, the rounding off of corners and chamfering (if cores and having them tested, which shall be paid for
required) and inserting of a compression seal or a under item 610.05.02 above. No cores showing
sealant. defective injection shall be measured for payment.
The tendered rates for longitudinal hinge joints shall Item Unit
include full compensation for sawing the joint, or for
supplying and inserting the preformed compression seal 610.07 Breaking up, removing
or a sealant (if sealing is specified) in the case of sawn and replacing defective
2
joints. slabs square metre (m )
The tendered rate for transverse contraction joints shall The unit of measurement shall be the square metre of
include full compensation for sawing the joint, supplying pavement slab broken up, removed and replaced on
and inserting the preformed compression seal or a account of the presence of cracks. The quantity shall be
sealant (if sealing is specified), and temporary sealing calculated from the horizontal dimensions of the slab
with paper rope. replaced. Only slabs that showed no cracks within the
The tendered rate for dowel bars and tie bars shall first 30 days after casting shall be measured for
include full compensation for the supply, cutting, payment.
placing, the holding in position - which includes The tendered rate shall include full compensation for
supporting framework where required - and the coating breaking up the cracked slab section, removing the
of dowels. concrete, repairing the subbase if necessary, casting a
The tendered rate for end caps shall include full new concrete slab, including all joints, dowels, tie bars,
compensation for the supply of the end caps and for curing and texturing the concrete, and for furnishing all
fixing the caps to dowels at expansions joints. the necessary materials, labour, plant, transport and
other incidentals.
The tendered rate for the forming and sealing of joints
between asphalt and concrete pavement shall include Note:
full compensation for the supply of all plant and
materials necessary for the forming of a joint of required The following item of work, when specified, shall be
dimensions in the bituminous surfacing, cleaning the carried out, measured and paid for in accordance with
joint, and for priming and sealing as specified in the appropriate sections of the Specifications, but shall
subclause 08.06 (b). be listed under this section in the Schedule of
Quantities.
Item Unit
610.05 Coring and testing of cores Item Applicable section

610.05.01 100 mm cores drilled from Steel reinforcement for concrete pavements 703
pavement number (No)
610.05.02 150 mm cores drilled from
pavement and tested for
compressive strength number (No)

The unit of measurement shall be the number of cores

drilled or drilled and tested on the instructions of the
Engineer. Cores drilled by the Contractor at his own
initiative as part of his process control or for the
resubmission of pavement sections which have been
rejected, or for testing cracks sealed at the Contractor's
own cost, shall not be measured for payment.
The tendered rates shall include full compensation for
drilling the test cores and, where applicable, having
them tested at an approved laboratory, and for all
labour, transport, drilling and testing charges and other
incidentals.

Item Unit
610.06 Repairing cracks
610.06.01 By the injection of epoxy resin metre (m)

610.06.02 By routing and sealing with cold-

applied liquid sealant metre (m)

610-12
SERIES 6 : ROADS AND PARKING AREAS Timber posts and spacer blocks shall be treated in
accordance with SANS 10005, using a copper-
SECTION 611 : GUARDRAILS chrome-arsenic compound for timber preservation,
which complies with SANS 673, or using creosote
CONTENTS which complies with the requirements of
SANS 538 or 539. No cutting, drilling or shaping
01 SCOPE will be permitted after creosoting.
02 MATERIALS However, where the cutting of posts is
03 CONSTRUCTION unavoidable, the Engineer may permit the required
04 REQUIREMENTS length to be cut off from the bottom of a post,
05 REMOVAL OF EXISTING GUARDRAILS provided the exposed area is subsequently treated
06 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT with creosote.
01 SCOPE Timber posts shall not exhibit excessive cracking
at the ends, and particularly no cracks aligned at
This section covers the supply, installation and an angle of more than 45° to the guardrail. Posts
maintenance of metal-plate beam guardrails at locations which, in the opinion of the Engineer, exhibit a
and in conformity with the details, dimensions and degree of cracking that would seriously impair
design shown on the Drawings or as directed by the their life or strength shall not be used.
Engineer.
(b) Steel posts
02 MATERIALS Normally only timber posts shall be used to
support the guardrails, but under certain
02.01 Guardrails
conditions, e.g. where the guardrails are placed on
Guardrails shall comply with the requirements of concrete retaining walls, steel posts shall be used.
SANS 1350. The steel posts shall be of the type and size
shown on the Drawings or described in the Project
Dimensions of guardrails and terminal sections shall be Specifications.
as shown on the Drawings.
02.03 Reflector plates
Guardrails shall be supplied together with all bolts, nuts,
washers and fixing materials required other than bolts V-shaped reflector plates shall be manufactured from
for fixing to posts. 1,5 mm thick mild-steel plate to the dimensions shown
on the Drawings. When supplied with galvanized
(a) Galvanizing
guardrails, they shall be galvanized, and when supplied
When galvanized guardrails are called for on the with painted guardrails, they shall be finished in white
Drawings or in the Schedule of Quantities, a hot- baked enamel. The outer surfaces shall be coated with
dip (galvanized) zinc coating that complies with engineering grade retro-reflective material which
the requirements of SANS 32 or SANS 5121 as complies with the provisions of subclause 02.08 of
applicable for coatings on Type A2 articles shall section 612, in the colours shown on the Drawings.
be applied. Galvanized guardrails shall not be Holes for fixing shall be drilled before galvanizing or
nested when stacked for storage. painting.
All bolts, nuts and washers shall have a hot-dip
(galvanized) zinc coating that complies with the 03 CONSTRUCTION
requirements of SANS 32 or SANS 5121 for
03.01 Erection
coatings on Type C1 articles in the case of bolts
and nuts and Type A2 in the case of washers and The holes for the timber posts shall be of a sufficient
reinforcing plates. size to permit the proper setting of the posts and to
allow sufficient room for backfilling and tamping. At
(b) Painting
least 1 m of the posts shall be embedded in the ground.
When painted guardrails are called for, two coats
of zinc-chromate primer as specified in section 806 The holes for the timber posts shall be spaced to suit
shall be applied after manufacture and surface the standard length of guardrail supplied. Where shown
preparation. on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer, posts
shall be set at half spacings. The hole for the concrete
02.02 Guardrail posts block at the end of a length of guardrail shall be neatly
excavated and the top 120 mm shall be cast using
(a) Timber posts formwork.
Timber posts shall be supplied in lengths as The posts, spacer blocks (if applicable) and guardrails
shown on the Drawings and shall comply with the shall be completely erected and set true to line and
requirements of SANS 457 parts 2 or 3 and carry level, so that the rail is at the required height above the
the SANS mark. level of the completed road shoulder. The guardrail
Posts shall have a top diameter of at least shall be suitably braced to prevent any movement, and
150 mm. Posts with a top diameter of up to all the bolts shall be tightened prior to any backfilling of
230 mm will be acceptable, provided posts with holes.
widely varying diameters are not used together in After the Engineer has signified his approval of the
the same length of guardrail. Posts shall be drilled guardrails thus erected, the holes shall be backfilled with
and shaped as shown on the Drawings and shall a 12:1 soil:cement mixture. The material may be mixed
be provided with the necessary bolts, nuts, either by hand or mechanically, and the correct quantity
washers and spacer blocks for fixing. of water shall be added to ensure that the mixture is
placed at or near the optimum moisture content.

611-1
The mixture shall then be placed and thoroughly 06 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
rammed in layers not exceeding 100 mm in compacted
thickness. The approach ends, where the guardrail has Item Unit
to be bent down and anchored, shall be constructed as 611.01 Guardrails on timber posts
shown on the Drawings.
611.01.01 Galvanized metre (m)
When the backfilling is complete and the bracing
removed, the posts must be rigid and vertical and the 611.01.02 Painted metre (m)
guardrail true to line and level and firmly fastened to the
posts. Excess excavated material shall be disposed of The unit of measurement shall be the metre of guardrail
as directed by the Engineer. as erected, excluding end units.
Steel posts shall be erected and fixed as shown on the The tendered rates shall include full compensation for
Drawings. furnishing all plant, materials and labour, for erecting
the guardrails complete with posts, spacer blocks, bolts,
All guardrails shall be erected in such a way that there nuts, washers and reinforcing plates, for excavating and
will be no projecting ends that might interfere with or backfilling post holes, for providing and mixing cement
endanger traffic. The edges and the centre of the rail with the backfill material and for removing surplus
element shall make contact with the spacer block, or excavated material.
with the post where no spacer blocks are used. Where
guardrail elements lap, the end which points in the Item Unit
direction of the traffic shall be on the side of the rail
away from the traffic and, if specified, the guardrails 611.02 Guardrails on steel posts
shall be provided with terminal sections. All splices of
611.02.01 Galvanized metre (m)
rail elements shall be at a post, and plate ends shall
make contact over the entire area of the splice. 611.02.02 Painted metre (m)
Reflector plates shall be fixed in accordance with the The unit of measurement shall be the metre of guardrail
details shown on the Drawings. The reflective surfaces erected, excluding the end units.
shall be arranged with the colours as shown on the
Drawings. The tendered rates shall include full compensation for
furnishing all plant, materials and labour, and for
03.02 Painting erecting the guardrail, complete with posts, spacer
blocks, bolts, nuts, washers and reinforcing plates, for
Before installation, the rail elements shall be cleaned,
excavating and backfilling post holes, including
primed and painted as specified in section 806. After
concrete backfill, and for removing surplus excavated
installation, all abraded or damaged surfaces shall be
material.
repainted with the finishing coat specified in
subclause 08.03 (a) of section 806. Galvanized rail Item Unit
elements shall not be painted, and damaged galvanized
surfaces shall be repaired in accordance with clause 02 611.03 Extra over items 611.01 and
of section 806. 611.02 for horizontally curved
guardrails, factory bent to
When existing guardrails must be repainted, they shall
be thoroughly cleaned with wire brushes and descaled a radius of less than 150 m metre (m)
with suitable tools to remove all rust and loose and
The unit of measurement shall be the metre of curved
oxidized paint. Thereafter they shall be washed down,
guardrail erected, measured in place.
and all exposed steel surfaces shall be given two coats
of zinc-chromate primer followed by two finishing coats, The tendered rate extra over the rates tendered for
as specified in subclause 08.03 (a) of section 806. items 611.01 and 611.02 shall be in full compensation
for the additional costs of supplying and erecting curved
04 REQUIREMENTS sections.
The completed guardrail shall be neat, and there shall Item Unit
be no visible deviations from line and grade. The posts
shall be straight and vertical. The rail beam shall not be 611.04 End units
warped but shall be in a vertical plane and, in the case
of roads, parallel to the road centre line except at flared 611.04.01 End wings number (No)
sections. The painted or galvanized surface of the rail 611.04.02 Terminal sections in
shall be smooth and continuous and free from accordance with the Drawing,
abrasions and scratches. Any damage to the painted
where single guardrail
surface shall be made good at the Contractor's
expense. sections are used number (No)

Guardrails which do not comply with the specified 611.04.03 Terminal sections in
requirements shall be replaced or otherwise made good. accordance with the Drawing,
where double guardrail
05 REMOVAL OF EXISTING GUARDRAILS sections are used number (No)
Where ordered by the Engineer, the Contractor shall The unit of measurement shall be the number of end
dismantle and remove existing guardrails and posts. units of each type erected.
The guardrails shall be carefully removed, the posts
dug out, and the excavations made for removing the The tendered rates shall include full compensation for
posts backfilled and compacted. Guardrails and all labour, plant and materials required to install the end
accessories shall be removed, transported to the point units as shown on the Drawings, including posts,
of re-use or storage and stacked in the positions fittings, the bending of turned-down sections, for
indicated by the Engineer. excavations, formwork, concrete, backfilling and the
removal of surplus backfilling.
611-2
Item Unit
611.05 Additional guardrail posts
611.05.01 Timber number (No)
611.05.02 Steel number (No)
The unit of measurement for guardrail posts erected over
and above the normal spacing shown on the Drawings
shall be the number completed in place.
The tendered rates shall include full compensation for
supplying, excavating, backfilling and erecting additional
posts.
Item Unit

611.06 Reflector plates number (No)

The unit of measurement shall be the number of reflector

plates installed.
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for
supplying all materials and labour required to
manufacture, paint, galvanize and fix the reflector plates
as specified and as shown on the Drawings.

Item Unit

611.07 Dismantling existing guardrails

and posts
611.07.01 Dismantling guardrails metre (m)
611.07.02 Removing posts number (No)

The unit of measurement shall be the metre of existing

guardrail dismantled and the number of existing posts
removed.
The tendered rates shall include full compensation, as
applicable, for dismantling existing guardrails, removing
all posts, transporting material to the point of re-use or
storage, for stacking and for excavating, importing
additional backfill material if required, backfilling and
compacting post holes.

Item Unit
611.08 Repainting existing
guardrails metre (m)

The unit of measurement shall be the metre of single

guardrail repainted.
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for
cleaning the existing guardrails, supplying all the
materials, and repainting the guardrails as specified.

Item Unit
611.09 Re-erection of dismantled
guardrails with new treated
timber posts metre (m)

The unit of measurement shall be the metre of guardrail

as erected, including the end units.
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for
supplying new treated timber posts and spacer blocks,
for the replacement of lost or damaged guardrail fittings,
for cleaning and painting the used guardrails, for
excavating and backfilling post holes, for the re-erection
of the dismantled guardrails complete with all fittings,
and for the removal of surplus guardrail material and
excavated material, all as specified and as shown on the
Drawings.

611-3
SERIES 6 : ROADS AND PARKING AREAS 02.04 Other plate material

SECTION 612 : TRAFFIC SIGNS Other plate material shall be as specified in the Project
Specifications.
CONTENTS 02.05 Aluminium
01 SCOPE Aluminium sections shall be of the sizes detailed on the
02 MATERIALS Drawings, shall be manufactured from grade 6063.T.5
03 MANUFACTURE OF TRAFFIC-SIGN BOARDS alloy and shall comply with the provisions of
AND SUPPORTS BS EN 12020 parts 1 and 2.
04 PAINTING
Aluminium plate shall be manufactured from grade
05 STORAGE AND HANDLING
5251.H.3 alloy and shall conform to the requirements of
06 ERECTION OF TRAFFIC SIGNS
BS EN 537 and shall be 2,0 mm in thickness.
07 PROTECTION AND MAINTENANCE
08 DISMANTLING AND RE-ERECTION OF
02.06 Concrete
EXISTING TRAFFIC SIGNS
09 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Concrete shall be manufactured and placed as
specified in section 704. Class 20/19 concrete shall be
01 SCOPE used for the erection of traffic sign supports, unless
otherwise shown on the Drawings or directed by the
This section covers the supply and erection of Engineer.
permanent traffic signs at the locations indicated on the
Drawings or directed by the Engineer. 02.07 Paint
Overhead traffic-sign supports shall be manufactured in All paints used shall comply with the requirements of
accordance with the requirements of section 809. SANS 1519-2, including the standards mentioned
The signs shall be of the standard regulatory, warning therein.
and information signs as detailed on the Drawings and Except where reflecting surfaces are specified, the
shall be fabricated in accordance with the provisions of surface of painted traffic signs shall not be excessively
the National Road Traffic Act (Act 93 of 1996) and the glossy. The 60° specular gloss measured in accordance
Southern African Development Community Road Traffic with SANS Method 2813 should, if possible, not exceed
Signs Manual, except where otherwise indicated on the 50. No thinners shall be added to the paint.
Drawings.
02.08 Retro-reflective material
02 MATERIALS
Retro-reflective material shall be supplied in the
02.01 Structural steel following grades and shall comply with the requirements
of SANS 1519-1:
The structural steel shall comply with the requirements
of BS 4360 for the type of steel specified or shown on Class I - Engineering-grade retro-reflective
the Drawings. Where specified, all structural steel, material
including tubes, shall be galvanized in accordance with
Class II - Super-engineering-grade retro-reflective
the requirements of SANS 32 quality B1 or SANS 121,
Table 2 or 3, as applicable. material
Class III - High-intensity grade retro-reflective
Steel tubes shall comply with the requirements of
SANS 657-1 and shall be D-shaped. material.

02.02 Bolts, nuts and rivets The material shall be supplied with a pressure-sensitive
or heat-applied adhesive backing protected by a
Steel bolts and nuts shall conform to the appropriate removable liner.
parts of SANS 1700 or SANS 1143. Aluminium bolts
and nuts shall be manufactured from alloy B51S or 02.09 Timber poles for sign supports
D65S. Timber poles for sign supports shall comply with
All steel bolts, nuts and washers shall have a hot-dip SANS 457 part 2 or 3, shall be equal to or better than
(galvanized) zinc coating that complies with the Strength Group B timber poles, and shall be stamped
requirements of SANS 121, Table 2 or 3, as applicable. with the SANS mark. The posts shall be treated with a
preservative as specified below, and after treatment
Blind rivets used for fixing sign faces to square tubing only one cut per pole will be allowed to obtain the
framework shall be 4,76 mm rivets manufactured from correct length and chamfer at the top of the post. The
or coated with a material that will not cause corrosion exposed surface of the cut shall be given two coats of
through electrolytic action. Blind rivets used for joining the appropriate preservative.
aluminium extrusions shall be hardened aluminium blind
rivets. The poles shall be treated with a pressure process as
defined in Paragraph 1 (b) of Schedule B of the
02.03 Chromadek steel plate Regulations for Combating and Preventing the Spread
of Certain Insect Pests affecting Soft Wood, as
Steel plate for road signs shall be 1,40 mm thick published in the Government Gazette of 2 August 1968.
Chromadek G275 galvanized Iscor steel plate, which
has been treated on both sides with an epoxy primer The type of preservation material will be specified in the
followed by a silicon polyester top coat. The total dry Project Specifications, and shall be copper-chrome-
thickness of the treatment shall be at least 0,025 mm. arsenate salts which comply with SANS 673, or
creosote complying with SANS 538 or 539.
Where a reflectorized road sign is required, its reverse
side shall be painted with a dull grey prime coat and the
face with only the specified top coat.
612-1
02.10 Steel reinforcement Unless otherwise specified in the Schedule of
Quantities or the Project Specifications, galvanized
Steel reinforcement shall comply with the requirements steel will not require painting.
of section 703.
Traffic-sign supports shall be constructed in accordance
02.11 Corrosion-protection tape with the details shown on the Drawings.
The corrosion-protection tape used between aluminium Where no details for the construction of sign boards, the
and steel shall be Scotchrap 50 or an equivalent framework of the sign faces or the attachment thereof to
approved material. the supporting framework are shown on the Drawings,
they shall be designed by the Contractor himself, and
03 MANUFACTURE OF TRAFFIC-SIGN he shall submit such details to the Engineer for
BOARDS AND SUPPORTS approval before manufacture.
03.01 Traffic-sign boards
04 PAINTING
Traffic-sign boards shall be manufactured strictly in
accordance with the details tabulated on the Drawings, 04.01 Colours, symbols and legends
and shall be manufactured either from steel plate,
aluminium plate or extrusion, or from particle board, as Paint colours, symbols, legends and borders used on
may be specified on the Drawings. Particle board shall traffic signs shall comply with the regulations of the
normally be used only on traffic signs not exceeding National Road Traffic Act, (Act 93 of 1996) and its
2
10 m in area. Regulations, and also with the requirements of the
Southern African Development Community Road Traffic
Wherever possible, the traffic-sign boards shall be Signs Manual.
manufactured as one unit. Traffic signs which are too
large to be transported as one unit may, with the The colours and shades shall conform to the colours
approval of the Engineer, be manufactured in sections. and shades specified in SANS 1519-2 and shown in
The completed sections shall be assembled in the shop SANS 1091.
prior to delivery to ensure that all the sections fit together
04.02 Preparation of surfaces and application of
properly and that the legends are properly spaced and
aligned. Joints in sign faces shall be provided only at paint
locations and to details approved by the Engineer. The preparation of surfaces and all painting shall be
Direct contact between aluminium plate and steel carried out as specified in SANS 1519-2.
supporting framework shall be avoided by corrosion Unless otherwise specified, only the faces of aluminium
protection tape being applied to the sign face over the road signs will require painting.
contact areas.
04.03 Time of painting
03.02 Welding
Traffic sign boards and legends shall not be painted
All welding of steelwork shall be carried out in more than six months prior to their erection.
accordance with the standards laid down in
BS EN 1011. Welding shall be done before painting. 05 STORAGE AND HANDLING
03.03 Structural steel All traffic signs or portions of traffic signs shall be so
handled and stored in a weatherproof storeroom to
The relevant provisions of section 809 shall apply to all
prevent any permanent deformation or damage to
steel supporting structures for traffic signs.
painted surfaces.
03.04 Aluminium extrusions All unpainted surfaces and steelwork shall be protected
Aluminium extrusions for sign boards shall be joined by against corrosion.
blind rivets or bolts. They shall preferably not be joined
longitudinally, but if this cannot be prevented without 06 ERECTION OF TRAFFIC SIGNS
excessive waste, they shall be joined neatly and the
joints staggered. No sections shorter than 500 mm shall 06.01 Position
be used. Road signs shall be erected in the positions shown on
the Drawings or indicated by the Engineer.
Where aluminium extrusions are to be faced with retro-
reflective background material, it shall be pre-applied to 06.02 Excavation and backfilling
individual sections before assembly, with the material
taken around the face edges of each extrusion for at Excavations for the erection of traffic signs shall be
least 10 mm. Retro-reflective material shall be heated to made according to the dimensions shown on the
facilitate binding around edges without damaging the Drawings. Where the excavations are to be backfilled
material. Where possible the placing of letters across with soil, a 1:12 cement:soil mixture shall be made and
the joint between two extrusions shall be avoided. thoroughly compacted at optimum moisture content in
100 mm thick layers.
03.05 Galvanizing
Where posts or structures are to be fixed in concrete, or
Where the galvanizing of structural steel sign-board where concrete footings are to be cast, the concrete,
frames and sign-board supporting structures is formwork and reinforcement shall comply with the
specified, it shall be done as long after welding as may requirements of the appropriate sections of series 7.
be practicable. However, where this is not feasible, the The holes shall be completely filled with concrete up to
steel sections shall be galvanized before assembly and the level shown on the Drawings or indicated by the
then welded. All welds shall be thoroughly cleaned and Engineer. The upper surface of the concrete shall be
loose material removed and dressed, after which the neatly finished with sufficient fall to ensure proper
welds shall be coated with two coats of an approved drainage.
zinc-rich paint.
612-2
06.03 Erection 612.01.01.02 Area exceeding 2 m2
Traffic signs shall be erected as shown on the Drawings but not 10 m2 square metre (m2)
or as directed by the Engineer. During erection the 612.01.01.03 Area exceeding
structural steelwork shall be firmly bolted and protected 10 m
2
square metre (m )
2

to prevent any buckling or damage being caused during

erection or by the equipment used for erection. 612.01.02 Aluminium extrusions
(type indicated) all
Posts to which signs are to be fixed shall be vertical,
and the undersides of signs shall be horizontal after sizes square metre (m2)
completion of erection. 612.01.03 Sheet steel (Chromadek)
The month and year of erection of the road signs shall with an :
be indicated with white paint on the back of the sign in
612.01.03.01 Area not exceeding
the bottom right-hand corner. The letters and figures
shall be 25 mm in height. 2 m2 square metre (m2)

Where signs are erected with timber poles, all the holes 612.01.03.02 Area exceeding 2 m2
2 2
that are drilled in the timber shall be impregnated with but not 10 m square metre (m )
hot creosote. 612.01.03.03 Area exceeding
2 2
06.04 Field welding 10 m square metre (m )

All welding done during erection shall comply with the The unit of measurement shall be the square metre of
requirements for welding during manufacture. completed traffic-sign surface area.
06.05 Painting on Site The tendered rates shall include full compensation for
the provision of the completed sign board, frame and
All painting done after erection shall comply with the fixing brackets, including painting, galvanizing if
requirements for painting during manufacture. specified, reflective lettering, symbols, legend and
All places where the paintwork has been damaged border, attaching the traffic-sign board to the sign
during erection shall be made good by the Contractor, support, and for all other materials and workmanship,
at his own cost, to the satisfaction of the Engineer. brackets, bolts, nuts, etc, for the completion of the sign-
board faces as specified.
06.06 Time of erection
For payment purposes a distinction shall be made
Traffic signs shall be erected immediately prior to the between traffic-sign boards made from the various
opening of the road or parking area to public traffic, materials specified.
unless otherwise decided by the Engineer.
Item Unit
07 PROTECTION AND MAINTENANCE
612.02 Extra over item 612.01 for -
The Contractor shall protect the completed traffic signs
612.02.01 Background of retro-reflective
against all damage until the road or parking area has
finally been accepted by the Employer, and he shall material of -
maintain the signs until the defects liability period has 612.02.01.01 Engineering grade square metre (m )
2

expired. Damage or defects caused by faulty

2
workmanship or negligence shall be made good by the 612.02.01.02 High-intensity grade square metre (m )
Contractor, at his own cost, to the satisfaction of the
Engineer. 612.02.01.03 Super-engineering
2
grade square metre (m )
08 DISMANTLING AND RE-ERECTION OF 612.02.02 Lettering, symbols and
EXISTING TRAFFIC SIGNS borders of retro-reflective
Where ordered by the Engineer, the Contractor shall material of -
dismantle existing signs and re-erect them at new 612.02.02.01 High-intensity grade square metre (m2)
positions indicated by him. This work shall be done with
as little damage as possible to the signs. 612.02.02.02 Super-engineering
Where required by the Engineer, the signs shall be grade square metre (m2)
repainted or repaired and new materials shall be used The area measured for payment shall be the full area of
for part of or the entire supporting structure. the sign face as measured in item 612.01.
09 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT The tendered rates paid extra over items 612.01.01,
612.01.02 and 612.01.03 shall be in full compensation
Item Unit for the additional cost of supplying retro-reflective
612.01 Sign boards with painted back- background, symbols, lettering and borders of the types
ground, symbols, lettering and specified in each case.
borders in engineering-grade
retro-reflective material with
signboards constructed from -
612.01.01 Aluminium sheet (2,0 mm thick)
with an -
612.01.01.01 Area not exceeding
2 m2 square metre (m2)

612-3
Item Unit Item Unit
612.03 Sign supports 612.06 Dismantling, storing and
re-erecting traffic signs
612.03.01 Structural steel ton (t)
with a surface area of -
The unit of measurement for structural-steel supporting 2
structures shall be the ton of structural steel used. Bolts 612.06.01 Up to 2 m number (No)
and other accessories used in the structure shall not be 612.06.02 2
Over 2 m but not
measured separately and their cost shall be deemed to exceeding 5 m2 number (No)
be included in the rates tendered for structural steel.
2
612.06.03 over 5 m but not
612.03.02 Steel tubing ton (t) exceeding 10 m
2
number (No)
The unit of measurement for supporting structures 612.06.04
2
over 10 m but not exceeding
manufactured from steel tubing shall be the ton of pipes
exceeding 15m2 number (No)
used. Bolts and other accessories shall not be
measured separately and their cost shall be deemed to 612.06.05 etc, in steps of 5 m2
be included in the rates tendered for structural steel.
The unit of measurement shall be the number of signs
612.03.03 Timber (diameter and type of each size group dismantled and re-erected.
indicated) metre (m)
The tendered rates shall include full compensation for
The unit of measurement for timber supporting dismantling the traffic signs and supporting structures,
structures shall be the metre of each diameter post storing and transporting the material to the new site,
used. Bolts and other accessories shall not be and the re-erection of the signs.
measured separately and their cost shall be deemed to
be included in the rates tendered for structural steel. Payment for excavations, new material and concrete
required for re-erection shall be made under the
The tendered rates for sign supports shall include full appropriate item, and any repairs and repainting shall
compensation for the manufacture and erection of the be paid for as extra work. No separate payment shall be
supporting structures, including all bolts, screws, rivets, made for new bolts and nuts required for re-erection,
welding and accessories, together with the painting and the cost thereof shall be included in the rates
required, and for the provision of break-away holes in tendered above.
timber supports.
Note:
Item Unit
The following items of work, when specified, shall be
612.04 Extra over items 612.03.01 and carried out, measured and paid for in accordance with
612.03.02 for providing the appropriate sections of the Specifications, but shall
be listed under this section in the Schedule of
612.04.01 Unpainted galvanized steel
Quantities.
members ton (t)
Item Applicable section
612.04.02 Painted galvanized steel
members ton (t) (a) Formwork for sign footings 702
The tendered rates paid extra over items 612.03.01 and (b) Steel reinforcement for sign footings 703
612.03.02 shall be in full compensation for the
additional costs of providing the treatment specified. (c) Concrete in sign footings 704

Item Unit (d) Overhead traffic sign supports 809

612.05 Excavation and backfilling

for sign supports cubic metre (m3)

The unit of measurement shall be the cubic metre of

excavation measured in place according to the neat
dimensions of the footing or excavations as shown on
the Drawings or directed by the Engineer. In the case of
timber poles not in concrete, the plan area of the
excavated hole shall be taken as 0,16 m2, regardless of
the actual size of the excavated hole.
The tendered rate shall be in full compensation for
excavating, backfilling and compacting the backfill
material, for the disposal of all surplus excavated
material and for the supplying of backfill material and
mixing it with cement.

612-4
SERIES 6 : ROADS AND PARKING AREAS 03 WEATHER LIMITATIONS
Road-marking paint shall not be applied to a damp
SECTION 613 : TRAFFIC MARKINGS
surface or at temperatures lower than 10°C, or when, in
the opinion of the Engineer, the wind strength is such
CONTENTS that it may adversely affect the painting operations.
01 SCOPE 04 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT FOR PAINTING
02 MATERIALS
03 WEATHER LIMITATIONS The equipment shall consist of an apparatus to clean the
04 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT FOR PAINTING surface, a mechanical road-painting machine and all
05 SURFACE PREPARATION additional hand-operated equipment necessary to
06 SETTING OUT OF TRAFFIC MARKINGS complete the work. The mechanical road-marking
07 APPLICATION OF PAINT machine shall be capable of painting at least two lines
08 APPLICATION OF RETRO-REFLECTIVE BEADS simultaneously and shall apply the paint to a uniform film
09 ROAD STUDS thickness at the rate of application specified hereafter.
10 TOLERANCES The machine shall be so designed that it will be capable
11 GENERAL of painting the traffic markings to a uniform width with
12 FAULTY WORKMANSHIP OR MATERIALS sides within the tolerances specified hereafter, without
13 PROTECTION the paint running or splashing. The machine shall further
14 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT be capable of painting lines of different widths by
adjusting the spray jets on the machine or by attaching
01 SCOPE additional equipment to the machine.

This section covers the permanent marking of road and The machine shall be capable of spraying at a speed of
parking area surfaces with white or yellow painted lines not less than 5,0 km/h.
or symbols and the supplying and fixing of retro-
05 SURFACE PREPARATION
reflective road studs as indicated on the Drawings or
where required by the Engineer. Traffic markings shall be applied to bituminous surfaces
only after sufficient time has elapsed to ensure that the
02 MATERIALS painted surface will not be damaged by volatile
substances evaporating from the bituminous surfacing.
02.01 Paint In no case shall traffic markings be applied until at least
(a) Road-marking paint 2 weeks after the completion of the bituminous
surfacing or after any longer period required by the
Road-marking paint shall comply with the Engineer has expired.
requirements of SANS 731 parts 1 and 2.
Before the paint is applied, the surface shall be clean
Premix glass bends shall comply with the and dry and completely free from any soil, grease, oil,
requirements of SANS 51424. acid or any other material which will be detrimental to the
Drop on material such as glass beads, anti-skid bond between the paint and the surface. The portions of
aggregates and mixtures of the two shall comply the surface where the paint is to be applied shall be
with the requirements of SANS 51423. properly cleaned by means of watering, brooming or with
compressed air if required. Where road markings are to
The paint shall be delivered to the Site in sealed
be made on a concrete pavement, all laitance and loose
containers bearing the name of the manufacturer
curing compound shall be removed. Particular care shall
and the type of paint.
be taken to expose a surface of fresh concrete on all
The viscosity of the paint shall be such that it can areas where road studs are to be fixed.
be applied without thinning.
06 SETTING OUT OF TRAFFIC MARKINGS
(b) Retro-reflective road-marking paint
The lines, symbols, figures or marks shall be set out by
Retro-reflective paint shall comply with the
means of paint spots of the same colour as that of the
requirements of SANS 731 parts 1 and 2.
proposed final lines and marks. These spot marks shall
(c) Proprietary brand road-marking paint be at such intervals as will ensure that the traffic
If specified in the Project Specifications, markings can be accurately applied, and in no case
proprietary brand plastic road-marking materials shall they be more than 1,5 m from each other.
Normally spots with a diameter of approximately 10 mm
shall be used.
should be adequate.
(d) Colour
The dimensions and positions of traffic markings shall be
The colours to be used shall be bright white or as shown on the Drawings or as specified in the National
yellow. Road Traffic Act, (Act 93 of 1996) and its Regulations
The colour of the yellow paint shall match colour and the South African Road Traffic Signs Manual. After
Number B49 (golden yellow) in SANS 1091. spotting, the positions of the proposed road markings
such as dotted lines and the starting and finishing points
02.02 Road studs of barrier lines shall be indicated on the road.
Road studs shall be of the size and type indicated on These premarkings must be approved by the Engineer
the Drawings, specified in the Project Specifications or before any painting operations may be started.
listed in the Schedule of Quantities and shall comply
with the relevant requirements of SANS 1442. The positions and outlines of special markings shall be
set out in chalk on the finished road and must be
The Contractor shall submit samples of the type of road approved by the Engineer before they are painted. The
studs he proposes to supply to the Engineer for his use of approved templates will be permissible on
approval prior to delivery. All studs subsequently used condition that the positioning of the markings is approved
shall be of a quality equal to or better than that of the by the Engineer before painting is commenced.
sample.
613-1
The position of road studs shall be marked out on the The excess adhesive shall then be removed immediately
road and shall be approved by the Engineer before they with a suitable solvent. The studs shall be protected
are fixed in position. against impact until the adhesive has hardened.

07 APPLICATION OF PAINT 10 TOLERANCES

The paint shall be applied as figures, signs, letters, Traffic markings shall be constructed to an accuracy
symbols, broken or unbroken lines or other marks, as within the tolerances given below:
shown on the Drawings or directed by the Engineer.
10.01 Width
Paint applied with a machine shall be applied in one
layer. Before the road-marking machine is used on the The width of lines and other markings shall not deviate
permanent Works, the satisfactory working of the from the specified width by more than 10 mm.
machine shall be demonstrated on a suitable site which 10.02 Position
is not part of the permanent Works. If adjustments are
made to the machine, further testing must be done. The position of lines, letters, figures, arrows, retro-
Only when the machine has been correctly adjusted, reflective road studs and other markings shall not
and its use has been approved by the Engineer after deviate from the true position specified by more than
testing, may the machine be used on the permanent 20 mm in the transverse direction, or more than
Works. The operator shall be experienced in the use of 100 mm in the longitudinal direction.
the machine.
10.03 Alignment of markings
After the machine itself has been satisfactorily adjusted,
The alignment of any edge of a longitudinal line shall
the rate of application shall be checked and adjusted, if
not deviate from the true alignment by more than
necessary, before painting on a large scale is
10 mm in 15 m.
commenced.
Where two or three lines are required next to each 10.04 Broken lines
other, the lines shall be made simultaneously with the The length of segments of broken longitudinal lines
same machine. The paint shall be stirred before shall not deviate from the specified length by more than
application, in accordance with the manufacturer's 150 mm.
instructions. The paint shall be applied without thinners
being added. 11 GENERAL
Where, under special circumstances, painting is done In broken lines the length of segments and the gap
by hand, two layers of paint shall be applied. The between segments shall be as indicated on the
second layer shall not be applied before the first layer Drawings. If these lengths are altered by the Engineer,
has dried out sufficiently. As most road-marking paints the ratio of the lengths of the painted section to the
react with the bitumen surface of the road, the paint length of the gap between the painted sections shall
shall be applied with only one stroke of the brush or remain the same. Lines shall not be painted more than
roller at any one point on the road. 3 months before the road or parking area is opened to
public traffic.
Ordinary road-marking paint shall be applied at a
2
nominal rate of 0,42 litre/m , or as directed by the Lines on curves, whether broken or unbroken, shall not
Engineer, and proprietary brand paints shall be applied consist of chords but shall follow the correct radius.
at the rates specified in the Project Specifications.
Where plastic road-marking material is used, the
Road marking shall be completed before a particular Contractor shall produce an approved guarantee from
section is opened to traffic. Each layer of paint shall be the manufacturer as specified in the Project
continuous over the whole area being painted. Specifications.

08 APPLICATION OF RETRO-REFLECTIVE BEADS 12 FAULTY WORKMANSHIP OR MATERIALS

Where retro-reflective paint is required, the retro- If any material which does not comply with the
reflective glass beads shall be applied by means of a requirements is delivered at the Site or is used in the
suitable machine immediately after the paint has been Works, or if any substandard work is carried out, such
applied, in one continuous operation. The rate of material or work shall be removed, replaced or repaired
application of the beads shall be 0,8 kg/litre of paint or as may be required by the Engineer and at the
any such other rate as may be indicated by the Contractor's own cost. Rejected traffic markings and
Engineer. Machines that apply the beads by gravity only paint that has been splashed or has dripped onto the
shall not be used. The beads shall be sprayed onto the surfacing, kerbs, structures or other such surfaces shall
paint layer by means of a pressure sprayer. be removed by the Contractor, at his own cost, in such
a manner that the markings or spilt paint will not again
09 ROAD STUDS show up later.
Road studs shall be of the types indicated on the
13 PROTECTION
Drawings and shall be fixed in the positions indicated
and approved by the Engineer. After paint has been applied, the traffic markings shall
be protected against damage by traffic or by other
Before any studs are fixed, the surface shall be
causes. The Contractor shall be responsible for the
thoroughly cleaned as specified in clause 05. The studs
erection, placing and removal of all warning boards,
shall be fixed to the road surface with an approved
flags, cones, barricades and other protective measures
epoxy resin, in accordance with the manufacturer's
which may be necessary in terms of any statutory
instructions, after the road lines have been completed.
regulations and/or as may be recommended in the
Sufficient adhesive shall be used to give complete
Southern African Development Community Road Traffic
coverage of the contact area and to provide a slight
Signs Manual.
excess. The road studs shall be pressed down onto the
prepared area and all excess adhesive pressed out.

613-2
14 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT The unit of measurement for lettering, symbols or
traffic-island markings shall be the square metre, and
Item Unit the quantity to be paid for shall be the actual surface
613.01 Road-marking paint area of lettering, symbols or traffic-island markings
painted.
613.01.01 White lines (broken or
unbroken) (width of line The tendered rate per kilometre or per square metre, as
the case may be, for the painting of traffic markings
indicated) kilometre (km)
shall include full compensation for procuring and
613.01.02 Yellow lines (broken or furnishing all materials, including the retro-reflective
unbroken) (width of line beads in the case of retro-reflective paint, for the
indicated) kilometre (km) necessary equipment, for painting, protecting and
maintenance as specified, including the setting-out of
613.01.03 White lettering and lettering, symbols and traffic-island markings, but shall
symbols square metre (m2) exclude the setting-out and premarking of lines.

613.01.04 Yellow lettering and Item Unit

symbols square metre (m2)
613.04 Variation in the rate of application
613.01.05 Traffic-island markings
613.04.01 White paint litre ( )
(any colour) square metre (m2)
613.04.02 Yellow paint litre ( )
613.01.06 Kerb markings (any
2
colour) square metre (m ) 613.04.03 Glass beads kilogram (kg)

Item Unit 613.04.04 Proprietary brand plastic

paints litre ( )
613.02 Retro-reflective road-marking
paint The unit of measurement for variation in the rate of
application of paint and glass beads shall be the litre
613.02.01 White lines (broken or and kilogram respectively.
unbroken) (width of line
indicated) kilometre (km) Payment for variations shall be made as specified in
clause 28 of section 001.
613.02.02 Yellow lines (broken or
unbroken) (width of line Item Unit
indicated) kilometre (km)
613.05 Road studs (type stated) number (No)
613.02.03 White lettering and
symbols
2
square metre (m ) The unit of measurement for road studs shall be the
actual number of approved road studs placed.
613.02.04 Yellow lettering and
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for
symbols square metre (m2)
procuring and furnishing all the necessary material,
613.02.05 Traffic-island markings labour and equipment, and for fixing and maintaining as
(any colour)
2
square metre (m ) specified.

Item Unit A distinction shall be made between various types of

road studs.
613.03 Proprietary brand plastic
road-marking material Item Unit
(state particulars) 613.06 Setting out and the pre-
613.03.01 White lines (broken or marking of lines (excluding
unbroken) (width of line traffic-island markings,
indicated) kilometre (km) lettering and symbols) kilometre (km)

613.03.02 Yellow lines (broken or The unit of measurement for setting out lines shall be
unbroken) (width of line the kilometre of lines set out and marked. Where two or
indicated) kilometre (km) three lines are to be made next to each other, the
setting-out of the lines shall be measured only once.
613.03.03 White lettering and
symbols square metre (m 2) The tendered rate shall include full compensation for
setting out and pre-marking the lines as specified,
613.03.04 Yellow lettering and including all materials.
2
symbols square metre (m )
613.03.05 Traffic-island markings
(any colour) square metre (m2)

The unit of measurement for the painting of lines shall

be the kilometre of each specified width of line, and the
quantity paid for shall be the actual length of line
painted in accordance with the instructions of the
Engineer, excluding the length of gaps in broken lines.

613-3
SERIES 6 : ROADS AND PARKING AREAS pH value shall be determined and where the
pH is less than 6 the material shall be treated
SECTION 614: MACADAM LAYERS with lime until the pH is greater than 10.
Where the pH is above 6 the material may be
CONTENTS
used but special attention should be given to
01 SCOPE cover the freshly compacted layer within
02 MATERIALS 12 hours after completion with the overlaying
03 REQUIREMENTS BEFORE ANY MACADAM layer (or prime coat) to prevent evaporation
LAYER IS CONSTRUCTED and salt crystallisation.
04 CONSTRUCTION Where the salinity of the water used for
05 PROTECTION AND MAINTENANCE construction purposes is so high as to cause
06 CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES a considerable increase in the salinity of the
07 ROUTINE INSPECTION AND TESTS material, the Engineer shall be entitled to
08 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT determine the soluble salinity from samples
taken from the compacted layer within
01 SCOPE 24 hours and before the prime coat is
applied. He may then suspend the use of
This section covers the construction of Macadam type
such water source.
base. Macadam pavements consist of high quality
layers constructed with single-sized 13 mm to 53 mm (iv) Grading requirements:
aggregate, which is stabilised by filling the voids with a
suitable material. The grading of the coarse aggregate for the
base shall conform to the following limits:
Drybound Macadam (DM). The coarse aggregate first
needs to be interlocked using appropriate rollers. Sieve Percentage by mass passing
Cohesionless fine filler is then vibrated into the voids size
(mm) 53 mm 37 mm 26,5 mm 19,0 mm 13,2 mm
without the use of water.
75 100
Waterbound Macadam (WM). The coarse aggregate 53 85 - 100 100
also needs to be interlocked using the appropriate
rollers whereafter water may be used to slush the filler 37,5 35 - 70 85 - 100 100
into the voids. The filler may be slightly plastic. 26,5 0– 0 - 50 85 - 100 100
15
Penetration Macadam (PM). Interlock of the coarse 19,0 0-5 0 - 25 0 - 30 85 - 100 100
aggregate needs to be achieved using the appropriate
rollers whereafter a hot tar or bitumen is poured over 13,2 0-5 0-5 0 - 30 85 - 100
the coarse aggregate layer coating the large 9,5 0-5 0 - 30
aggregates. The voids are not filled completely by the 4,75 0-5
tar or bitumen. 0,075
Slurrybound Macadam (SM). The coarse aggregates (b) Fine aggregate
are only orientated by means of light pedestrian type
rollers or plate compactors. A slurry, produced from Fine aggregate used as filler for the Macadam
sand and bitumen emulsion, is forced into the voids base layer shall consist of material approved by
between the coarse aggregate until the voids are filled the Engineer and which can be vibrated in dry
using the same light pedestrian type rollers. The (dry-bound) or slashed and vibrated (waterbound)
slurrybound Macadam may also be applied as to fill the voids of the compacted coarse
surfacing. aggregate. It shall conform to the following
requirements:
Composite Macadam (CM). Consists of a lower portion
of dry- or waterbound Macadam and a top portion of (i) Liquid Limit (LL) shall not exceed 25% when
slurrybound Macadam. tested in accordance with TMH1 method A2.
(ii) Linear Shrinkage (LS) shall not exceed 4%
02 MATERIALS when tested in accordance with TMH1
method A4.
02.01 Water- and drybound Macadam layers
(iii) Plasticity Index (PI) shall not exceed 10%
(a) Coarse aggregate when tested in accordance with TMH1
Coarse aggregate for a Macadam base layer shall method A3.
have been derived from hard, sound, durable rock. (iv) A maximum size of 4,75 mm and the
It shall not contain any deleterious materials such percentage of the material passing a sieve of
as clay, shale, mica, etc, and shall conform to the nominal aperture size 0,075 mm shall not
following requirements: exceed 12%.
(i) The aggregate crushing value (ACV) shall not
(c) Combined density of coarse and fine aggregate:
exceed 29% for base aggregate when
determined in accordance with TMH1 Compaction of coarse aggregate shall continue
method B1. until the coarse aggregate has been thoroughly
(ii) The flakiness index shall not exceed 35% for compacted to “lock-up” condition, until there is no
base coarse aggregate when determined in further movement of the aggregate under the
accordance with TMH1 method B2. compactors and until the condition of the layer is
acceptable. Thereafter the fine aggregate shall be
(iii) The percentage of soluble salts, when tested washed and vibrated into the voids until the voids
in terms of electrical conductivity (EC), shall are full. The layer shall be compacted to a
-1
have an EC value less than 0,15 Sm . minimum density of 86% of apparent relative
Where the EC value is greater than 0,15 the density (ARD - COLTO 8108(b)).

614-1
 The field densities shall be determined by means The penetration and final slurry shall have a
of Rondavel test method (TMH1 method ST11). A stability of not less than 7,0kN, a flow above 2 mm
minimum of four density tests must be conducted but not more than 6 mm, a void content between 2
per linear kilometre or per contract. and 6% and an immersion index of not less than
75. Test specimens of slurry briquettes for the
02.02 Slurry-bound Macadam layers modified Marshall test shall be prepared in
(a) Coarse aggregate accordance with TB-148 (included in TB-1990) of
the International Slurry Surfacing Association.
Coarse aggregate for slurry-bound Macadam
layers shall have been derived from hard, sound, The slump test for production control of the slurry
durable rock and shall conform in all respects to shall be in accordance with test method CPA/C1.
the requirements of coarse Macadam aggregate “The determination of the consistency of
as listed in clause 02.01(a). The specified grading unmodified slow setting bituminous slurry mixes”.
and ACD for the various layer thicknesses must
A flow between 30 and 40 mm should be adequate
conform to the Table below.
for slurry mixes to be penetrated or placed by
(b) Fine aggregate for slurry hand.
The aggregate for slurry shall be an approved The following proportions shall apply for tendering
crusher sand obtained from a parent rock having purposes only:
an ACV not exceeding 30 or a mixture of crusher
- Slurry aggregate 1m3
sand and clean natural sand, where the mixture
3
does not contain more than 25% of natural sand. - Binder 240 litre/m
The aggregate shall be clean, tough, durable, - Cement (by mass if required) 1%
angular in shape and shall conform to the grading
requirements tabled below. The Engineer will - * Water - to achieve specified consistency
order the grade of the fine aggregate required. * Note : Moisture in aggregate must
be taken into account.
Sieve Size Percentage passing by mass
(mm) Fine grade Medium grade (f) Density requirements
6,7 100 The layer shall be compacted to 90% of maximum
4,75 100 82 - 100 theoretical relative density (MTRD - TMH 1 -
method C4)
2,36 90 - 100 56 - 95
1,18 65 - 95 37 - 75 03 REQUIREMENTS BEFORE ANY MACADAM
0,6 42 - 72 22 - 50 LAYER IS CONSTRUCTED

0,3 23 - 48 15 - 37 Before any Macadam layer is constructed, the following

requirements shall be met:
0,15 10 - 27 7 - 20
0,075 4 -12 4 - 12 • The existing subbase must be broomed and cleaned
of all loose material.
Appropriate 75 75
layer thick- 25 30 (top 40 50 (bottom • Any damage to the subbase for example potholes
ness (mm) part) part) must be rectified.
• The Macadam layer shall be supported along the
The sand equivalent according to TMH1 method
other edge during construction by placing the
B19 shall be 35 minimum.
permanent kerbs or, alternatively, approved side
To ensure proper adhesion, the immersion index forms such as re-usable hollow metal sections.
of briquettes made with slurry aggregate and Alternatively, the adjacent shoulder shall be
80/100 penetration-grade bitumen shall not be less completed before the Macadam layer is constructed.
than 75 when tested in accordance with
• No Macadam layer shall be rolled if the underlying
method C5 of TMH1.
layer, either on account of rain or by any other
(c) Bitumen binder cause, is so wet as to constitute a danger of the
underlying layers being damaged.
The bitumen binder shall be either a 60% anionic
emulsion (SANS 309) or a 60% cationic emulsion 04 CONSTRUCTION
(SANS 548).
Crushed stone Macadam material complying with the
(d) Cement and blast-furnace cement (CEM III) shall requirements specified above shall be dumped in
comply with the requirements of SANS 50197-1. quantities sufficient to ensure that the completed layer
Only one of the above materials shall be used will comply with all the requirements with regard to layer
throughout, as alternative usage will produce thickness, level, cross-section and density. Allowance
undesirable colour differences in the surface. shall also be made for sufficient extra material to enable
the layer to be properly formed.
(e) Slurry mix design
The Engineer may order that the Macadam layer be
The Contractor shall, at least two weeks before
constructed in two or more layers, each layer with its
production of the slurry, submit to the Engineer
different aggregate size. In such cases each layer shall
samples of the aggregate, fillers and binders he
be dumped, spread and compacted before the next
proposes to use in the mix together with his
layer is placed so that the combined layer will conform
proposed mix design so that the Engineer may test
to the specified requirements.
the materials and if he is satisfied that it meets the
specified requirements, confirm the use of the
proposed mix.

614-2
The maximum thickness of any Macadam layer specified, or as instructed by the Engineer. If the
compacted in one process shall be 85 mm. Further, Contractor can not produce a proper mix by hand then
where the thickness of a single-sized aggregate base the Engineer may order him to use an approved
exceeds 85 mm, the Macadam layer shall be concrete mixer. The slurry shall then be spread using
constructed in two layers of equal thickness. hand tools such as rakes, squeegees, etc.
The crushed stone material shall be placed to the The slurry squad shall spread each batch over the
correct thickness and level and thoroughly compacted Macadam base. The slurry shall be worked from side to
by vibrating plate compactors or double-drum walk side and criss-cross with the aid of squeegees so as to
behind vibrating rollers. fill as many spaces and voids as possible. The
Macadam base and penetration slurry shall then be
The minimum total centrifugal force of the vibrating worked with a plate or drum vibrating so that the slurry
compactor shall be 1 500 kg. Compaction shall be penetrates into the voids of the coarse aggregate.
continued until the coarse aggregate has been Maneuvering of the plate vibrator compactor needs to
thoroughly compacted to “lock-up” condition, until there be done carefully with no turning on the wet slurry.
is no more movement of the aggregate under the Turning maneuvers to be done on the adjacent ballast
compactors, and until the condition of the layer is or completed sections.
acceptable.
The process of spreading, vibrating and working in
04.01 Water-bound or dry-bound Macadam further layers of slurry shall be repeated until no more
The water- or dry-bound Macadam layer shall be slurry can be worked into the voids in between the
constructed by hand methods. coarse aggregate of the Macadam base. The
completed base shall be firm with a close-knit surface,
(a) Dry-bound free from areas of segregated materials, loose
After the shaped and compacted coarse aggregate aggregate and other irregularities. All excess slurry
layer has been approved, a layer of air-dry filler shall be swept off and the base allowed to dry out to
material of thickness about 20 mm shall be evenly present an exposed mosaic of regular stone faces, free
spread over the surface of the coarse aggregate. of fine aggregate and foreign material. The surface
The layer shall then be rolled with a vibrating roller shall be free from tear cracks, corrugation, rutting,
to work the filler material into the voids of the depressions, undulations, etc, and shaped to within the
coarse aggregate. The process of spreading and tolerances specified in clause 06.
working in further layers of filler material shall be 04.03 Composite Macadam
repeated until no more filler can be worked into the
voids in the coarse aggregate. The composite Macadam base shall be constructed
using hand methods.
(b) Water-bound
The composite Macadam layer shall consist of a bottom
When the filler can not be worked dry, the layer
part using normal Macadam layers (dry- or water-
shall be watered. Watering, rolling and sweeping
bound) and an upper part consisting of a slurry-bound
with suitable brooms shall be carried out and extra
Macadam.
filler added as necessary, until the voids in the
coarse aggregate have been completely filled with The normal Macadam layer (dry- or waterbound) shall
filler and a firm base with a closely knit surface is be constructed as specified in clause 04.01 and to the
obtained, free from areas of segregated materials, thickness and levels specified on the drawings or as
loose aggregate and other irregularities. Care directed by the Engineer. The surface of the thus
shall be taken not to over-water the aggregate and completed Macadam (dry- or waterbound) shall then be
by doing so soften the supporting layer. All broomed to remove the filler sand to a depth between
excess fines shall be swept off and the base 5 mm and 10 mm. The thus removed material shall
allowed to dry out to present an exposed mosaic leave adequate space for slurry-bound Macadam to be
of regular stone faces, free of fine aggregate and keyed into and shall be to the approval of the Engineer.
foreign material. When it is necessary to enable
excess slushed fines and water to be removed to An overlaying slurry-bound Macadam shall then be
prevent saturation of the base layer, the constructed as specified in clause 04.02 and to the
Contractor shall provide temporary openings in the thickness and levels specified on the drawings or as
confining structure and make good the openings directed by the Engineer. The capping slurry-bound
when the operation has been completed. Macadam shall be properly worked, vibrated and keyed
into the underlying normal Macadam base until there
The finished layer shall be true to level and cross- are no voids left within the composite layer.
section, uniform and smooth, free from
corrugations, humps and depressions and shaped The completed surface of the composite Macadam shall
to within the tolerances specified in clause 06. be free from tear cracks, corrugations, rutting,
depressions, undulations, etc, and shaped to within the
04.02 Slurry-bound Macadam tolerance specified in clause 06.
The slurry-bound layer shall be constructed using hand
04.04 Final slurry layers
methods.
It may be specified that the completed Macadam base
The slurry for constructing the slurry-bound Macadam
be sealed with a slurry seal. A final slurry shall then be
shall conform to the requirements of clause 02.02. No
applied in accordance with the TRH3 requirements.
penetration slurry shall be laid when the air temperature
is less than 10°C, and in any event not during rain or The materials and mix designs shall conform to the
when free water is present. specified requirements as listed in clause 02.02.
After the shaped and compacted coarse aggregate
layer has been approved, a layer of penetration slurry
shall be placed evenly over the surface. The slurry
shall be mixed by hand using the correct proportion

614-3
A moist burlap drag shall be drawn over the final slurry Permanent drainage of Macadam layers must be
to ensure an overall and even texture. The burlap will provided at the lowest point of vertical curves,
be dragged perpendicular across the centreline of the where Macadam layers meet impermeable
road. Should breaking of the emulsion, segregation of pavement layers, at catchpits, etc. Such drains
the mix or formation of lumps occur during the shall consist of an approved geotextile or 12 mm
application of slurry, the slurry operations shall be drainage pipes installed on top of the subbase
discontinued at once and any defective material layer underneath the kerb, all as shown on the
removed from the road. Successive strips of slurry Drawings or directed by the Engineer.
shall overlap transversely by not less than 25 mm or
Such drains shall be constructed, measured and
more than 150 mm. Any overlapping and any omitted
paid for in accordance with Section 501 of these
areas shall be rectified with squeegees. The Contractor
Specifications.
shall ensure that either edge of the slurry is finished to
the prescribed widths and lines. All stones dislodged in
the process of applying the slurry shall be removed on 05 PROTECTION AND MAINTENANCE
the same day on which the slurry seal has been The Contractor shall protect and maintain the
applied. All spillage of slurry or excess slurry shall be completed Macadam layer at his own expense until the
neatly removed from the road and spoiled. surfacing is applied. Maintenance shall include the
Where slurry is spread by hand, the slurry squad shall immediate repair of any damage to or defects in the
complete the spreading of each batch onto the road, layer and shall be repeated as often as is necessary.
using squeegees before the next is discharged. The Repairs shall be made so as to ensure an even and
slurry shall be worked from side to side and criss-cross uniform surface to be restored after completion of the
with the aid of squeegees so as to fill as many spaces repair work. Heavy traffic shall not be allowed directly
as possible. on any layer for at least two days, or any other period
which the Engineer may authorised.
The finished slurry layer shall present a smooth, dense
and homogenous surface, true to level and camber on 06 CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES
cross fall and free from tear cracks, corrugation, rutting
or any other irregularity. It shall be free from The completed crushed stone layer shall comply with
depression or elevations and when a straight edge two construction tolerances in clause 601.05. However, the
metres long is laid on the treated surface parallel or at limits for surface regularity specified under
right angles to the centreline of the road, the surface clause 601.05.06 shall be relaxed to 10, 15 and 10 for
shall nowhere vary from the lower edge by more than sub-paragraph (a), (b) and (c) respectively.
3 mm along the treated area. The outer edge of the
slurry shall be formed neatly in a straight line to the 07 ROUTINE INSPECTION AND TESTS
widths ordered by the Engineer.
Routine inspections and tests will be made by the
No slurry shall be laid when the air temperature is less Engineer to determine whether the quality of material
than 10°C and in any event not during or when free and workmanship complies with the requirements of this
water is standing on the surface. section.
04.05 General
08 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
(a) Kerbs and gutters
Item Unit
Care shall be taken during rolling to ensure that
concrete edging, kerbs and gutters already laid are 614.01 Cleaning of subbase square metre (m2)
not displaced or damaged. Care shall be taken to
The unit of measurement shall be the square metre of
protect all kerbing and guttering from slurry or
cleaned subbase. The tendered rate shall include full
bitumen spray by covering it with suitable protective
compensation for removing all loose material, brooming,
material during construction. Any concrete edging,
kerbs or gutters spoiled or damaged during removal and spoil .
construction shall immediately be replaced or
Item Unit
repaired by the Contractor at his own expense.
614.02 Macadam base constructed
(b) Excess crushed stone material
from crushed stone
Excess crushed stone material shall not be spread aggregate obtained from
over the shoulder or side fills, but shall be loaded commercial sources,
and removed from the road. It shall not be re-used including the filler
unless it has been re-screened, re-tested and sand and slurry:
again approved for use.
614.02.01 Dry- or waterbound Macadam
It shall not be mixed with approved material unless
screened, tested and again approved for use on its 614.02.01.01 (Thickness indicated
2
own. in mm) square metre (m )

(c) At junctions with existing bituminous surface, the 614.02.01.02 Etc. for other
2
new base shall not be feathered-off to obtain thicknesses square metre (m )
continuity of grade, but the existing work in the
vicinity of the joint shall be cut back so as to 614.02.02 Slurry-bound Macadam
ensure a full depth compacted Macadam base. 614.02.02.01 (Thickness indicated
(d) Drainage of Macadam base 2
in mm) square metre (m )
The construction of waterbound Macadam layers
shall always be from a high point downwards to 614.02.02.02 Etc for other
2
ensure proper drainage of the layer during thicknesses square metre (m )
construction.

614-4
The unit of measurement for this item shall be the Item Unit
square metre of completed Macadam base in place and
compacted to the specified requirements. The quantity 614.06 Repairing portholes and
shall be calculated from the specified dimensions of the damaged areas in the
layer as shown on the Drawings or according to cross- existing subbase
section levels or prescribed by the Engineer.
614.06.01 Chemical stabilized gravel
Measurement of a composite Macadam base shall
distinguish between the lower dry- or water-bound with (percentage
3
portion and upper slurry-bound portion of the composite indicated) % cement cubic metre (m )
layer. 614.06.02 Slurry with aggregate
3
cubic metre (m )
The tendered rate for this payment item shall include
full compensation for procuring, finishing and placing all The unit of measurement for repairing potholes and
materials including the crushed aggregate and filler, damaged areas in the existing subbase shall be the
crusher sand, penetration slurry (including sand and cubic metre of chemically stabilized gravel or slurry with
emulsion), for hauling the material over an unlimited aggregate placed in accordance with the specified
free-haul distance, for rolling, slurring, applying bitumen requirements. The quality will be computed in
emulsion at the specified rated, correcting the layers, accordance with the authorized dimensions of the layer
mixing, placing, compacting, finishing, as well as and as specified by the Engineer.
process control testing, protecting and maintaining the
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for
work as specified.
providing the gravel material (G5 quality), stabilizing
Item Unit agent, for all mixing, placing, compacting the gravel to
93% Mod AASHTO density and finishing the area in
614.03 Bituminous binder and accordance with the required lines and levels. The
cement variation tendered rate shall also include full compensation for
excavating the existing subbase, cleaning the area of
614.03.01 Anionic emulsion (60% bitumen) litre ( ) loose material and disposing thereof as specified.
614.03.02 Cationic emulsion (60% bitumen) litre ( )
614.03.03 Cement ton (t)
The unit of measurement in respect of variations shall
be the litre of binder measured at mixing temperature
and the ton of cement from that specified in the nominal
mix. Payment for variations shall be made as specified
in clause 28 of Section 001.
Item Unit
614.04 Slurry variations for slurry-
bound Macadam
The unit of measurement of slurry in item 614.04 in
respect of an increase or decrease in the specified
rates of applications shall be the cubic metre of slurry
3 2
used in comparison with a nominal rate of 0.046 m /m .
for a 150 mm thick base layer. Should a thinner or
thicker base layer be called for, then the nominal rate
will be increased or decreased in direct proportion.
Payment for variations shall be made as specified in
clause 28 of Section 001.

Item Unit
614.05 Final slurry using 60%
emulsion binder
614.05.01 (Thickness indicated
2
in mm) square metre (m )
614.05.02 Etc for other
2
thicknesses square metre (m )
Note: Payment for the penetration slurry in the slurry-
bound Macadam base is not included under
this item, but under item 614.02.02. Payment
for the final slurry seal on top of the Macadam
base falls under this item.

The unit of measurement shall include full

compensation for procuring and furnishing the binder,
active filler, other authorised chemicals, water and all
other materials for mixing and constructing the slurry,
trail sections, curing, rolling, furnishing, demarcating
areas and for all plant labour, handwork and incidentals
necessary to complete the work as specified.

614-5
SERIES 7 : STRUCTURES The Engineer shall be entitled, as often as he may
deem it necessary during the course of excavation, to
SECTION 701 : FOUNDATIONS FOR STRUCTURES instruct the Contractor to make additional foundation
investigations and to carry out tests at or below the
CONTENTS founding level in order to establish safe bearing
pressures and founding depths.
01 SCOPE
02 MATERIALS 03.02 Stream flow
03 GENERAL
Stream flow shall be maintained and freshwater life
04 COFFERDAMS, ARTIFICIAL ISLANDS
shall be preserved at all times. Stream crossings shall
AND DEWATERING
be constructed without the stream flow being disrupted
05 EXCAVATION
at the point of crossing. On completion of the work, all
06 FOUNDING
surplus excavated materials, materials used in
07 UTILIZATION OF EXCAVATED MATERIAL
cofferdams, artificial islands and other temporary works,
08 BACKFILL AND FILL NEAR STRUCTURES
and also in situ material, shall be removed to the
09 FOUNDATION FILL
original stream-bed level or from such lower level as
10 GROUTING OF ROCK FISSURES
may be specified or required by the Engineer. The
11 FOUNDATION DOWELS
Contractor shall dispose of all such materials.
12 FOUNDATION LINING
13 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
04 COFFERDAMS, ARTIFICIAL ISLANDS AND
01 SCOPE DEWATERING

This section covers the foundation work for all 04.01 Cofferdams
structures except prefabricated culverts and pipes, and
(a) General
it also covers excavations to accommodate structures
and for the founding of structures, as well as Where necessary, cofferdams shall be
dewatering, cofferdams, backfilling, foundation fill, constructed in waterways, on waterlogged areas
grouting, etc. and on unstable ground to facilitate construction
of the Permanent Works in the dry, to ensure the
Piling is covered under section 807.
lateral stability of or to retain the surrounding
material and to protect the work under
02 MATERIALS construction against flooding. The Contractor
02.01 Rock for foundation fill shall not commence with the construction of a
cofferdam until he has obtained the Engineer's
Rocks shall be hard, angular, field or quarry rocks of a written permission to do so.
quality that will not disintegrate upon exposure to water
Where it is impracticable to dewater a foundation
or the weather. The rocks shall be free from
excavation by pumping methods, the Engineer
overburden, shale, organic and other deleterious
shall have the right to instruct the Contractor to
material. The width and thickness of any rock shall each
construct a cofferdam.
be at least one third of its length. The average mass of
a single rock shall be as specified in the Project (b) Construction requirements
Specifications. Not more than ten per cent of the total
volume of a rock fill shall consist of rocks with a mass of The design and construction of cofferdams shall
less than half the mass specified and not more than ten comply with the requirements of BS 8004 Code
per cent of the volume of rock fill shall consist of rocks of Practice for foundations.
with a mass of more than five times the mass specified. Cofferdams shall be adequately braced, weighted
At least fifty per cent of the total volume of a rock fill and anchored and shall be as watertight as may
shall consist of rocks with a mass greater than the be practicable. Where ordered, a concrete
specified mass. foundation seal of an approved thickness shall be
02.02 Crushed stone for foundation fill constructed before the cofferdam is dewatered.
Cofferdams shall be vented so that the water
Crushed stone shall be clean, hard, durable stone from level inside the cofferdam will never be higher
approved sources. The aggregate crushing value of the than the water level on the outside.
stone shall not exceed 30 when tested in accordance
with method Bl of TMH1. Crushed stone for foundation (c) Protection of substructure
fill shall comply with the grading requirements as No shoring against the permanent structure in
specified in the Project Specifications. the cofferdam shall be allowed until the concrete
has reached a strength of 70% of the specified
02.03 Granular material for foundation fill
28-day compressive strength and the method has
Granular material shall be approved granular material of been approved by the Engineer.
at least gravel subbase material quality.
(d) Removal
03 GENERAL Cofferdams with all sheeting and bracing shall be
completely removed upon completion of the
03.01 Subsurface conditions permanent work.
The Contractor shall note the provisions of the General 04.02 Artificial islands
Conditions of Contract regarding Site conditions.
Where required, artificial islands shall be constructed to
If, during the course of excavation, the load-bearing strata
gain access to foundation positions and to carry out
are found to differ from those shown on the Drawings or
foundation work.
set out in the Project Specifications, the Contractor shall
immediately notify the Engineer in writing.

701-1
The platform for supporting material, plant and 05.03 Excavation limits for payment purposes
equipment shall, where necessary, be consolidated to
For measurement and payment purposes, the limits of
provide firm support. The Contractor may use any
the excavations for structures shall be as shown on the
material he may deem suitable to construct the island.
Drawings.
On completion of the work, the Contractor shall remove
Where no excavation limits are shown on the Drawings
the artificial island and reinstate the Site to the
and the Engineer has decided that formwork has to be
satisfaction of the Engineer.
provided for the sides of a concrete member, the limits
04.03 Dewatering of foundation excavations of the excavation for measurement and payment
purposes shall be the vertical planes 0,6 m outside the
Over and above his general obligations with regard to perimeter of the concrete member for which the
dealing with water as specified in clause 27 of formwork is to be provided, and the founding level
section 001, the Contractor shall be responsible for shown on the Drawings.
preventing the ingress of water into the foundation
excavations. The preventative measures may include In suitable stable material, the excavations shall be
the construction and maintenance of intercepting and carried out and trimmed to the neat dimensions of the
diversion berms and drainage channels, primarily along concrete members shown on the Drawings or as may be
the boundaries of the foundation excavations and further directed by the Engineer so that the excavated surfaces
supported by a grid of longitudinal and cross drainage will act as forms for the casting of the concrete.
channels within the boundaries of the excavations, with
To prevent moisture loss in the concrete where
all channels effectively draining towards lower lying excavated surfaces act as forms for the casting of the
natural drainage routes or pumps, with all the necessary concrete, a foundation lining shall be installed as
bailing and pumping equipment supplied, operated and
specified in clause 12 of this section, or provided that
maintained by the Contractor. The preventative sufficient space has been made available during
measures shall ensure that the foundation excavations
excavation, an additional 50 mm of concrete cover over
are dewatered sufficiently to allow the necessary
and above the specified cover shall be provided, all as
construction operations to be properly executed. specified on the Drawings or as directed by the
The dewatering measures, with the exception of Engineer.
pumping, shall be maintained until the backfilling has
05.04 Over-excavation
been completed, after which all settled silt, mud, etc,
shall be removed from the exposed surfaces where Over-excavation in hard material shall be backfilled with
necessary. Between the various construction stages, the same class of concrete as that in the concrete
pumping may be interrupted as may be decided by the member or with mass concrete as specified or as
Engineer. The draining or pumping of water from directed by the Engineer and shall be at the
foundation excavations shall be done in such a way that Contractor's expense.
no concrete materials will be carried away.
Over-excavation in soft material shall be backfilled with
Where the drainage channels are filled with crushed suitable material approved by the Engineer and shall be
stone, as directed by the Engineer, this stone will be compacted all at the Contractor’s own expense and as
measured for payment as foundation fill. directed by the Engineer.
04.04 Payment 05.05 Unsuitable material
If a lump sum has been set out in the Schedule of Boulders, logs or any other unsuitable excavated
Quantities for the dewatering of foundations and a material shall be taken to spoil.
provisional sum for the construction of cofferdams and
artificial islands, the method of payment for work Where, in the opinion of the Engineer, unsuitable
authorized by the Engineer shall be in accordance with material is encountered at founding level, such material
the provisions of the relevant pay items of clause 13 of shall be removed and replaced with foundation fill in
this section. Work not authorized by the Engineer shall accordance with the requirements of clause 09 of this
not be measured for payment. section and as directed by the Engineer.

If no lump sum or provisional sum has been set out in 05.06 Preparation of the founding surface
the Schedule of Quantities, the tendered rates for Where hard material suitable for founding is
foundation excavations and backfilling shall include full encountered at the founding level, it shall be cut and
compensation for the construction of cofferdams and trimmed to a firm surface, either level, stepped or
artificial islands and for the dewatering of foundations. serrated, as may be required.
05 EXCAVATION Where there are indications that the material at the
founding level will be soft material or hard material that
05.01 Clearing and grubbing, and topsoil will deteriorate rapidly on exposure, the excavation of
The Contractor shall not commence with the the final layer with a thickness of 150 mm shall be
excavations for structures before he has obtained postponed until just before the blinding layer is placed.
written instructions from the Engineer regarding any Where shown on the Drawings or ordered by the
clearing and grubbing and any removal and stockpiling Engineer, excavations shall be extended to a specified
of topsoil that may be required. depth below the undersides of the slabs and footings to
05.02 Reference surface for excavation make provision for the placing of a concrete blinding
layer.
The Contractor shall notify the Engineer in good time of
his intentions to commence with a specific excavation 05.07 Classification of excavation
so that the average surface level of the undisturbed For payment purposes, all the material excavated for
ground from which the excavation is to be measured structures shall be classified as follows:
can be established and agreed on by the Engineer and
the Contractor.

701-2
(a) Hard material • foundation fill,
Boulders of 0,15 m3 each or more in volume, and the surface of the in situ material that has been
material that cannot be excavated except by prepared to receive foundation fill; and
drilling and blasting or with the use of pneumatic
• footings,
tools or mechanical breakers shall be classified as
hard material. the underside of the footings.
(b) Soft material 07 UTILIZATION OF EXCAVATED MATERIAL
All material not classified as hard material shall be Excavated material and material recovered from
classified as soft material. temporary work shall, in so far as it is suitable, be utilized
05.08 Blasting for backfill. Material unsuitable for use as backfill or in
excess of the quantity required to complete the backfill
Where blasting is permitted, it shall be carried out in shall be spoiled or utilized as directed by the Engineer.
accordance with the requirements of clause 18 of
section 001. Excavated material not used for backfill or not taken to
spoil but used in the construction of embankments or
05.09 Deterioration of foundation excavations other parts of the work, as directed by the Engineer, shall
be paid for under foundation excavation as well as under
Where the bottoms or sides of foundation excavations
the relevant item for the purpose for which it is used.
are softened as a result of negligence on the part of the
Contractor in allowing stormwater or other water to No haulage shall be paid for excavated material and
enter the excavation, the softened material shall be imported material for backfill where such material is
removed and replaced with foundation fill as directed by transported within the free-haul boundaries.
the Engineer, at the Contractor's expense.
Excavated and stockpiled material shall be deposited in
05.10 Excavation safety such a manner that it will not endanger the uncompleted
structure either by direct pressure or indirectly by
The Contractor shall take the necessary precautions to overloading the banks contiguous to the structure, or in
safeguard the stability and safety of the excavations any other way.
and adjacent structures.
No person's personal safety shall be placed in jeopardy, 08 BACKFILL AND FILL NEAR STRUCTURES
nor shall any situation be allowed to arise which may 08.01 General
result in damage of any nature whatsoever.
When placing backfill and fill, the following precautions
All excavations shall be carried out strictly in shall be taken:
accordance with the requirements of the Construction
Regulations 2003. • In so far as it is practicable, the material shall be
placed simultaneously to approximately the same
05.11 Inspection elevation on all sides of a structure or structural
No concrete shall be placed before the Contractor has member where appropriate. If conditions require that
backfill or fill be placed appreciably higher on one
properly cleaned the excavation and it has been
inspected and approved by the Engineer. side than on the opposite side, the additional material
on the higher side shall not be placed until authorized
06 FOUNDING by the Engineer and preferably not until the concrete
has been in place for 14 days, or until tests show that
As there may be possible variations in the anticipated the concrete has attained sufficient strength to safely
founding conditions, the dimensions and founding levels withstand any pressure that will be created by the
specified or shown on the Drawings may have to be backfill or fill or by the method of construction.
varied during construction.
• The material behind structural members restrained
The Engineer has full and absolute power in terms of at the top by the superstructure, e.g. portal-type
this Contract to order such variations and to specify the structures, shall be placed as stated on the
actual founding level for each foundation fill and base Drawings or as directed by the Engineer.
during construction, and his decision shall be final and
• The material behind the walls of concrete culverts
binding on the Contractor.
shall not be placed until the top slab has been
The Contractor shall not be entitled to any additional placed and cured, unless otherwise authorized by
payment as a result of any such variation in the the Engineer.
dimensions or founding depths over and above that
provided in clause 13 of this section, regardless of the 08.02 Backfill
stage of construction at which the instruction to vary the Excavated areas around structures, between the structure
dimensions or founding depths is given. However, if as and the vertical walls of the surrounding excavation, shall
a result of such variation order the Contractor is be backfilled with approved material in horizontal layers
compelled to replace machines and equipment with not exceeding 150 mm in depth after compaction, to the
other machines and equipment in order to complete the level of the original ground surface or to the level
work successfully, the Engineer may, at his discretion, specified on the Drawings. Each layer shall be moistened
reimburse the Contractor for additional expenses or dried to the optimum moisture content for the material
incurred, provided that the original machines and and be compacted to a density of not less than 90% of
equipment were suited to the work required prior to the modified AASHTO density, except in a road prism, where
variation order being issued. the material shall be compacted to a density of not less
than 93% of modified AASHTO density.
No base shall be founded unless authorized by the
Engineer. Each founding level shall be accurately In cases where structures are founded on backfill
measured and recorded. material, the density shall be as specified in the Project
Specifications, but shall not be less than 95% of
The term "founding level" used in these Specifications
modified AASHTO density.
shall be deemed to have the following meanings in
respect of -
701-3
08.03 Prevention of wedge action 10 GROUTING OF ROCK FISSURES
Before the fill in the space between a structure and any Where specified, fissures in the rock below and around
adjacent sloping fill and the backfill between a structure the footings shall be sealed by pressure grouting with a
and the sloping sides of the surrounding excavation is neat cement or sand-cement grout with a water cement
constructed, the slope of the fill and of the sides of the ratio as agreed to by the Engineer. The extent of fissuring
excavation shall be benched or serrated in order to shall be established by water testing under pressure.
prevent wedge action between the structure and the fill
Holes of at least 40 mm in diameter shall be drilled in
or the sides of the excavation during backfilling and
positions ordered by the Engineer and grout shall be
compaction.
pumped into these holes under suitable pressure.
The distance between the exposed face of the structure Grouting shall be carried out in 3 m maximum depth
and the toe of the fill or excavation side shall be increments to the maximum depth ordered. Care shall
sufficient to allow proper compaction. be taken to avoid further fracturing of the rock strata by
excessive grouting pressure.
08.04 Fill within restricted area
Grouting of rock fissures shall be carried out only by
The portion of the fill within 3 m of the concrete faces of specialists who are acceptable to the Engineer.
the structure and other portions of the fill shall be
termed "fill within restricted area" only when designated 11 FOUNDATION DOWELS
as such on the Drawings.
Where required, foundation dowels of specified material,
Fill within the restricted area shall comply with the diameter and length shall be installed at the positions and
requirements of clause 10 of section 203, except that it to the dimensions shown on the Drawings or as directed
shall be compacted to a density of not less than 93% of by the Engineer. After exposing, clearing and trimming of
modified AASHTO density. In order to achieve the the rock formation, holes of not less than 40 mm in
specified density, the Contractor shall, where diameter and of specified depths shall be drilled into the
necessary, import material of suitable quality. rock. Prior to the dowels being installed, the holes shall
Payment in accordance with item 701.06 for the be cleaned by water jetting or with compressed air and
construction of fill within restricted areas shall be made shall be filled with a 2:1 sand:cement grout.
only in respect of fill designated as "fill within restricted
12 FOUNDATION LINING
areas" on the Drawings.
Where specified or directed by the Engineer, foundation
09 FOUNDATION FILL lining shall be installed as described hereafter. The
If, during the course of excavation, it is found that the Engineer shall have the right to order the use of lining
material at the indicated founding depth does not have the against the sides of excavations and the underside of
required bearing capacity as specified on the Drawings, footings in lieu of formwork and concrete blinding.
the excavations shall be extended at the discretion of the All surfaces to be lined shall be covered with an
Engineer until satisfactory founding material is approved sheeting to provide a clean, impervious layer.
encountered. The Engineer may then order the Contractor The material shall be of sufficient strength to provide a
to make up the difference in levels with foundation fill. durable working surface and to support the concrete and
Where the foundation fill consists of rock or crushed reinforcement without tearing. The joints between strips
stone, it shall be constructed in accordance with the shall have a 150 mm overlap and the lining shall be held
requirements of the Project Specifications or as directed firmly in position with nails, pegs, etc. Polyethylene
by the Engineer. sheeting with a minimum thickness of 0,150 mm is
generally considered adequate for this purpose.
Foundation fill consisting of granular material shall
comply with the requirements specified in section 601 13 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
for subbase and shall be constructed in layers not
exceeding 150 mm in thickness after compaction. Each Item Unit
layer shall be moistened or dried to optimum moisture 701.01 Additional foundation
content for the material and be compacted to a density investigations provisional sum
of not less than 95% of modified AASHTO density.
A provisional sum is allowed in the Schedule of
Mass concrete fill to be used shall be of the class or mix
Quantities to cover the costs of this work.
specified or directed by the Engineer.
The method of payment for the work authorized by the
Unless otherwise specified or directed by the Engineer,
Engineer shall be in accordance with the provisions of
the foundation fill constructed with rock, crushed stone
the General Conditions of Contract.
or compacted granular material shall be defined by a
prism with vertical sides. The base of the prism lies in Item Unit
the founding plane and coincides with the base of a
prismoid with trapezium-shaped sides which extend 701.02 Excavation for structures
downwards and outwards at an angle of 60° with the 701.02.01 Excavation of soft material
horizontal from the outer edges of the underside of the situated in the following depth
footing down to the founding level. The upper plane of
ranges:
the prism lies in the plane of the underside of the footing.
3
Where shown on the drawings or ordered by the 701.02.01.01 0 m up to 2 m cubic metre (m )
Engineer, a concrete blinding, 75 mm thick and of class 701.02.01.02 Exceeding 2 m
15/19 concrete, shall be placed underneath all footings, up to 4 m
3
cubic metre (m )
except where mass concrete fill is used.
701.02.01.03 Etc in increments
Where mass concrete fill is constructed under a footing, 3
it shall be constructed accurately to the final levels of of 2 m depth cubic metre (m )
the underside of the footing.

701-4
Item Unit Item Unit
701.02.02 Extra over subitem 701.02.01 701.03 Cofferdams and artificial
for excavation in hard islands
material irrespective of
3 703.03.01 Cofferdams provisional sum
depth cubic metre (m )
703.03.02 Artificial islands provisional sum
701.02.03 Extra over subitem 701.02.01
for additional excavation The provisional sums allowed shall be expended in
required by the Engineer accordance with the provisions of the General
Conditions of Contract.
after the excavation has
been completed cubic metre (m3) Item Unit
The limits for the successive depth ranges shall be 701.04 Dewatering of foundation
measured down from the average surface level excavations lump sum
(subclause 05.02 of this section) to the agreed founding
level (clause 06 of this section). Dewatering will be paid for as a lump sum for each
structure or series of structures scheduled separately in
The unit of measurement shall be the cubic metre of
the Schedule of Quantities. The lump sum shall be paid
material measured in the original position before
on a pro rata basis as the work progresses.
excavation. The quantity of excavation for each depth
range shall be calculated from the neat outlines of the The tendered lump sum shall include full compensation
excavation limits shown on the Drawings and the depth for all work and operations required to keep the
of excavation completed within each range. excavations dewatered and dry and for the removal of
Irrespective of the total depth of the excavation, the silt and mud from the exposed concrete surfaces, all as
quantity of material within each depth range shall be specified in subclause 04.03 of this section.
measured and paid for separately. Item Unit
Where no excavation limits are shown on the Drawings
701.05 Backfill to excavations
and formwork has to be provided to the sides of
concrete members, an additional quantity of excavation utilizing -
shall be measured to 0,6 m outside the concrete 701.05.01 Material from the excavation
perimeter to provide a working space. compacted to
Where foundation fill is constructed in an excavation, the 701.05.01.01 90% of modified AASHTO
quantity of excavated material measured for payment density
3
cubic metre (m )
shall be the material excavated between the average
ground surface, as described in subclause 05.02 of this 701.05.01.02 93% of modified AASHTO
section, and the average founding level, based on the density cubic metre (m3)
horizontal dimensions of the founding surface, as
described in clause 09 of this section. 701.05.01.03 96% of modified AASHTO
3
density cubic metre (m )
In no case shall any of the following volumes of
excavation be included in the measurement for payment: 701.05.02 Imported material
compacted to -
• The volume of excavation in excess of the above-
mentioned limits. 701.05.02.01 90% of modified AASHTO
3
• The volume included within the excavated road density cubic metre (m )
prism, contiguous channels, ditches, etc, for which
701.05.02.02 93% of modified AASHTO
payment is provided elsewhere in the Specifications. 3
density cubic metre (m )
• The volume of water or other liquid (except the volume
of mud, muck or similar semi-solid matter, which has 701.05.02.03 96% of modified AASHTO
not resulted from the construction operations and density cubic metre (m3)
which cannot be pumped or drained away).
The unit of measurement shall be the cubic metre of
The tendered rates shall include full compensation for backfill material measured in the excavations. The
excavation in each class of material, including quantity measured shall be calculated from within the neat
overbreak in hard material, the spoiling or stockpiling of outlines defined for the excavation under item 701.02 and
material, the hauling of excavated material within the the height to which the backfilling is constructed.
free-haul boundaries, for any additional excavation the
Contractor may require for additional working space The height shall be determined by the upper surface of
outside the authorized limits, for trimming and cleaning the road prism or the reference ground surface
the bottoms and sides of excavations, and for strutting, (subclause 05.02 of this section), whichever is the
shoring and safeguarding excavations. lower, or the specified level as shown on the Drawings.

If, after a foundation excavation has been completed, The tendered rate for each cubic metre of backfill shall
cleaned and trimmed ready for blinding, the Engineer include full compensation for furnishing all materials
orders further excavations on account of changed from excavation or temporary stockpiles of excavated
dimensions and/or founding conditions, an extra-over material or imported material, and placing all materials
payment (subitem 701.02.03) for the additional within the entire excavation, for transporting the
excavation shall be payable in full compensation for any material within the free-haul boundaries, and for
additional costs to the Contractor over and above the preparing, processing, shaping, watering, mixing and
normal excavation costs. compacting the material to the specified densities.
Overhaul will be paid in respect of material transported Overhaul will be paid for on material imported from
to spoil or stockpile sites provided by the Employer and beyond the defined free-haul boundaries from borrow
which lie outside the free-haul boundaries. pits provided by the Employer.

701-5
Item Unit Item Unit
701.06 Fill within restricted areas 701.10 Drilling of holes for grouting -
(extra over item 203.01) cubic metre (m3) (diameter indicated) metre (m)
The unit of measurement shall be the cubic metre, and The unit of measurement shall be the metre of hole drilled.
the quantity shall be taken as the total volume of
material within the restricted area as defined in The tendered rate shall include full compensation for
subclause 08.04 of this section. The quantity shall not drilling and cleaning the holes as specified.
include the volume of backfill, which is measured and Item Unit
paid for under item 701.05 above.
701.11 Grouting of holes kilogram (kg)
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for all
additional work necessitated due to work being done in The unit of measurement for grouting shall be the mass,
the restricted area and for the increased density in kilograms, of cement used in the grouting operation.
required in the restricted area.
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for
Item Unit providing and pumping the grout into the drilled holes
as specified by the Engineer.
701.07 Foundation fill consisting of
701.07.01 Rock cubic metre (m3) Item Unit

701.07.02 Crushed stone

3
cubic metre (m ) 701.12 Dowelling into rock

701.07.03 Compacted granular 701.12.01 Drilling and cleaning of holes metre (m)
material cubic metre (m3) 701.12.02 Supplying and installing
701.07.04 Mass concrete dowel bars (type and size
(class indicated) cubic metre (m 3) indicated) kilogram (kg)
701.07.05 75 mm thick blinding layer, The unit of measurement for the drilling and cleaning of
class 15/19 concrete cubic metre (m 3) holes in rock shall be the metre of holes drilled.
The unit of measurement shall be the cubic metre of The unit of measurement for the dowel bars shall be the
approved material placed and compacted below the mass, in kilograms, of bars actually provided and
bases as specified or where directed by the Engineer. secured in position.
The quantity of foundation fill to be measured for The tendered rates shall include full compensation for
payment shall be the material contained by the prism drilling and cleaning the holes, and for supplying,
specified in clause 09 of this section for the minimum positioning and grouting the dowel bars as specified.
foundation fill to be constructed, or otherwise the
quantity constructed in accordance with the outlines on Item Unit
the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer. 701.13 Foundation lining
The tendered rates shall include full compensation for (type of material and
2
procuring, furnishing, transporting, placing and thickness indicated) square metre (m )
compacting the material.
The unit of measurement for foundation lining shall be
Overhaul will be paid for rock fill and granular fill in the square metre of concrete surface lined.
accordance with the provisions of section 103.
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for
Item Unit procuring, furnishing and placing all material, and for all
labour and incidentals required for the installation of the
701.08 Establishing equipment on Site foundation lining complete as specified.
for the grouting of rock fissures lump sum
Note:
The tendered lump sum shall include full compensation
for establishing on the Site and the subsequent removal The following items of work, when specified, shall be
of all special plant for the grouting of rock fissures, and carried out, measured and paid for in accordance with
for carrying out operations, the costs of which do not the relevant sections of the Specifications, but will be
vary with the actual amount of work to be done. listed under this section in the Schedule of Quantities.
This work shall be paid for as a lump sum, 75% of Item Applicable section
which will become payable when all equipment is on the
Site and the first hole has been grouted, and the (a) Overhaul on excavated
remaining 25% will become payable after the holes material and on material
have been grouted and the equipment has been imported for backfill
removed from the Site. and foundation fill 103
Item Unit (b) Temporary stockpiling of
701.09 Moving equipment to and excavated material 201
setting it up at each hole to
be drilled for grouting number (No)
The unit of measurement shall be the number of
positions to which the equipment for drilling and grouting
of rock fissures has to be moved and set up in position
(which shall equal the number of holes to be drilled).
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for all
costs involved in moving and setting up the equipment.

701-6
SERIES 7 : STRUCTURES (c) Void formers
Void formers used in permanent work shall be
SECTION 702 : FALSEWORK, FORMWORK AND
subject to the Engineer's approval.
CONCRETE FINISH
Where void formers of a particular type or special
CONTENTS design are required, details of the material, its
thickness, and any relevant information in regard
01 SCOPE thereto will be specified in the Project
02 MATERIALS Specifications or in the Schedule of Quantities or
03 GENERAL on the Drawings.
04 DESIGN
05 CONSTRUCTION Void formers shall be manufactured from material
06 REMOVAL OF FALSEWORK AND FORMWORK that will not puncture, tear or be damaged during
07 FORMED SURFACES : CLASSES OF FINISH the course of construction and shall be of such a
08 REMEDIAL TREATMENT OF FORMED tight construction that it will prevent any undue loss
SURFACES of the mortar component of the concrete through
09 UNFORMED SURFACES : CLASSES OF FINISH leakage. The units shall be sufficiently rigid so that
10 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT they will not be deformed during handling or under
the pressure of the wet concrete.
01 SCOPE Unless otherwise specified, the metal thickness
This section covers the design, supply and erection of for mild-steel spiral-lock-formed (seamed) void
all falsework and formwork used in the construction of formers shall be as follows:
permanent work. (i) Unbraced void formers
This section also describes the classes of concrete- • 0,6 mm for diameters of up to 600 mm
surface finishes on formed and unformed concrete
• 0,8 mm for diameters exceeding 600 mm
surfaces.
and up to 800 mm
02 MATERIALS • 1,0 mm for diameters exceeding 800 mm
and up to 1 000 mm
02.01 General
(ii) Braced void formers
The materials used in the construction of falsework and
formwork shall be suitable for the purpose for which • 0,6 mm for diameters of up to 800 mm
they are required and shall be of a quality that will • 0,8 mm for diameters exceeding 800 mm
produce the standard of work specified. The type, grade and up to 1 000 mm
and condition of the materials shall be subject to the
Engineer's approval. • 1,0 mm for diameters exceeding 1 000 mm
and up to 1 200 mm
02.02 Falsework • 1,2 mm for diameters exceeding
Timber, structural steel and scaffolding used shall be 1 200 mm.
free from defects that may impair the stability of the
The thickness specified for braced void formers
falsework. The jacks, devices, clamps and fittings shall
shall apply to formers internally braced with
all be in a good working order and of an adequate
timber or equivalent braces. The braces shall be
design and strength.
at spacings not exceeding 2,0 m and not further
02.03 Formwork than 1,0 m from the end of each unit. Timber
cross braces shall consist of members with cross-
(a) Tongued and grooved boarding sectional dimensions of at least 50 mm x 50 mm.
Tongued and grooved boarding shall be of All hollow void-former units shall be provided with
suitably dried timber that will not warp, distort or a 12 mm diameter drainage hole at each end.
cause discolouration of the concrete. The widths
of the boards shall be as specified on the (d) Chamfer and recess fillets
Drawings or as directed by the Engineer. Boards Wooden fillets used to form chamfers and
shall be supplied in lengths not shorter than 3 m. recesses on exposed surfaces shall be of new
(b) Steel forms to exposed surfaces material, unless otherwise authorized by the
Engineer. Other materials intended for use as
For a class F3 surface finish for which steel fillets shall be subject to approval by the Engineer.
forms are permitted and for a class F2 surface
finish, the individual and assembled panels shall (e) Jack rods for sliding formwork
be sufficiently rigid and adequately clamped so The jack rods, base plates and couplers shall be
that they will not deform or kick during handling strong enough to carry the design load under all
or under the pressure of the wet concrete. operating conditions without buckling or
The surfaces of forms that are to be in contact becoming distorted or causing damage to the
with concrete shall be clean, free from deposits concrete. Jack rods that are to remain
or adhering matter, weld runs, ridges and spatter permanently embedded in the concrete shall
that will impart irregularities and blemishes to the comply with the requirements of clauses 03 and
concrete surface. They shall also be free from 05 of section 703. Under no circumstances shall
indentations and warps. bent rods be used in the work.
The jack rods which are used shall have a
diameter of at least 25 mm.

702-1
03 GENERAL Particular attention shall be given to the provision of
transverse and diagonal bracing as well as to web
Notwithstanding the Engineer's approval of the design stiffeners on cross bearers.
and drawings prepared by the Contractor for the
falsework and formwork and the acceptance of the 04.03 Formwork
falsework and formwork as constructed, the Contractor
(a) General
shall be solely responsible for the safety and adequacy
of the falsework and formwork and shall indemnify and Formwork shall be designed to be sufficiently rigid
keep indemnified the Employer and the Engineer to ensure that the specified dimensional tolerances
against any injury to or claims by persons or losses of can be achieved under the combined action of self-
or damage to property whatsoever which may arise out weight, dead loads and imposed loads as well as
of or in consequence of the design, construction, use the additional loads resulting from the rate of
and maintenance of the falsework and formwork and/or concreting, the lift cast in one operation, and the
against all claims, demands, proceedings, damages, method of placing and compaction.
costs, charges and expenses whatsoever in respect
(b) Sliding formwork
thereof or in relation thereto.
The Contractor shall be responsible for designing
For works on, over, under or adjacent to any railway the sliding formwork assembly. Prior to
line the Contractor shall, inter alia, comply with the fabrication or bringing the assembly and auxiliary
requirements for the preparation and submission of equipment to the Site, the Contractor shall
drawings for falsework and formwork, and the submit drawings of the complete sliding formwork
submission of certificates for the proper construction assembly to the Engineer for approval. The
thereof, all in accordance with the requirements of the drawings shall show full details of the forms,
owner of such railway line. jacking frames, access ladders, hanging
After construction of the falsework and formwork, and platforms, safety rails and curing skirts, and also
prior to the placing of reinforcing steel and/or the details of the jacks and jack layouts.
placing of concrete, the Contractor shall inspect the The Contractor shall be required to submit to the
falsework and formwork. Dimensions shall be checked, Engineer, before sliding commences, an
unevenness of surface shall be corrected and special instruction manual which details the sliding
attention shall be paid to the adequacy and tightness of technique, the jacking procedure, methods of
bolts, ties and bracings as well as to the soundness of keeping the formwork level, the procedure to be
the foundations. adopted to prevent bonding of the concrete to the
forms and the method of releasing the forms in
The Contractor shall notify the Engineer at least 24 the event of bonding, the instrumentation and
hours in advance of his intention to place concrete, in
monitoring of the slide, correcting for verticality,
order to enable him to inspect all aspects of the twisting and levelness, etc.
completed work. However, before notifying the
Engineer, the Contractor shall satisfy himself that the The formwork panels shall be inclined to give a
work complies with the Specifications in all respects. small taper, and the forms shall be slightly wider
at the bottom than at the top. The taper shall be
Concrete sections with dimensions smaller than designed to produce the specified concrete
200 mm shall not be formed with sliding formwork, thickness at the mid-lift level of the form.
unless approved by the Engineer in writing.
The spacing of the jacks with their jack rods must
Where no provision has been made in the Schedule of be so designed that the dead load of the sliding
Quantities for sliding formwork, the Contractor may, in a formwork assembly, the frictional load, and the
covering letter to the Tender, submit a lump sum which mass of materials, personnel and equipment will
reflects a saving in the costs for the use of sliding be evenly distributed and within the design
formwork in lieu of conventional formwork. The lump capacity of the jacks used.
sum quoted shall be accompanied by priced items for
items 702.08, 702.09, 702.10 and 703.02, all in 05 CONSTRUCTION
accordance with clause 10 of this section and clause 10
05.01 Falsework
of section 703.
The falsework shall be erected in accordance with the
04 DESIGN approved drawings which shall incorporate such
modifications as may be required by the Engineer.
04.01 General
The Contractor shall take precautions to guard against
The Engineer may require the Contractor to submit to him,
deterioration of the foundations during the course of
for his consideration and approval, the design and
construction.
drawings of the falsework and formwork for any structure.
The falsework shall incorporate features that will permit
04.02 Falsework the alignment of the formwork to be adjusted to
The Contractor shall make his own assessment of the compensate for any expected settlement and deflection
allowable bearing pressure on the foundation material and under load.
shall design the footings and falsework to guard against
05.02 Formwork
overloading, differential settlement and unacceptable
overall settlement. In assessing the allowable bearing (a) General
pressure, due consideration shall be given to the effect
The formwork shall be erected to levels calculated
which wetting has on the foundation material.
from the information given on the Drawings. The
When designing the falsework, cognisance shall also be levels shall be adapted to make allowance for the
taken of the redistribution of load that may occur on specified precamber as well as for the expected
account of the effect of temperature, wind force, the deflection and settlement of the fully loaded
prestressing of curved and skewed structures, stage falsework and formwork. The levels shall be set out
construction, flooding and debris. and controlled at intervals not exceeding 2,50 m.

702-2
 For the construction of the formwork the Contractor The hard material shall be sufficiently resilient to
may, subject to the provisions of clause 02 of this ensure that the required quality of work can be
section, use any material suited to and compatible achieved.
with the class of surface finish and dimensional
(d) Openings and chases
tolerances specified for the particular member.
Openings and chases shall only be provided if
Formwork shall be sufficiently rigid to maintain the detailed or authorized by the Engineer. Frames for
forms in their correct position, shape and profile and
openings shall be rigid and firmly secured in
shall be of such tight construction that the concrete position to prevent displacement. Temporary holes
can be placed and compacted without undue loss or shall be so formed that they will not create an
leakage of the mortar component of the concrete. irregular pattern in relation to the rest of the
The joints between contiguous formwork elements exposed formed concrete surface.
shall be closely butted and, where necessary, if
(e) Sliding formwork
undue leakage is expected, the joints shall be
caulked, taped or packed with a sealing gasket, all (i) Plant and equipment
at no extra payment. Paper, cloth or similar Unless otherwise specified in the Project
materials shall not be used for this purpose. Specifications, hoisting equipment for sliding
The formwork construction shall permit accurate formwork that works stepwise with upward
erection and easy stripping without shock, movements of between 10 mm to 100 mm is
disturbance or damage to the cast concrete. acceptable. However, it is preferable to use
Where necessary, the formwork assembly shall linked hydraulic or pneumatic jacks that are
permit the removal or release of side forms reversible and are driven by an electrically
independently of the soffit forms. operated pump, and that can hoist at a steady
rate. The jacks shall have independent controls
Metal supports, ties, hangers and accessories for regulating verticality and levelness. The
embedded in the concrete shall be removed to a jacking system shall ensure that the sliding
depth of not less than the cover specified for the formwork assembly can be evenly hoisted.
reinforcement. The use of wire ties is not permitted.
The use of hoisting systems that work without
All external corners shall be chamfered by the jack rods shall be subject to the Engineer's
fixing of fillet strips into the corners of the formwork approval.
to form 25 mm x 25 mm chamfers. Re-entrant
All equipment shall be thoroughly tested and
angles need not be chamfered unless specified.
inspected before installation and shall be
(b) Formwork to exposed surfaces maintained in a good working order
throughout the sliding operation.
The forms and boards shall be arranged to form a
uniform and regular pattern in line with and The Contractor shall keep adequate back-up
perpendicular to the main axis of the member, plant, equipment and quantities of materials
unless otherwise approved or directed by the on the Site to ensure uninterrupted sliding.
Engineer. (ii) Instrumentation and monitoring
Joints between contiguous members shall, after The Contractor shall supply and install
caulking, taping or sealing, be treated to prevent suitable instrumentation on the sliding
blemishes, stains and undue marks from being platform and foundations and at the sides of
imparted to the concrete surface. the structure for monitoring height, verticality,
Bolt and tie positions shall be so arranged that twisting and levelness at regular intervals.
they will conform to the symmetry of the formwork The equipment used, its utilization and the
panels or boards. Bolts and rivet heads that will be frequency of recording the readings shall be
in contact with the formed surface shall be of the approved by the Engineer.
countersunk type and shall be treated to prevent The Contractor shall be responsible for all
marks from forming in the concrete surface. monitoring work and shall ensure that the
The formwork at construction joints shall be records of all readings and measurements
braced to prevent steps from being formed in the taken are filed systematically and are at all
times available to the Engineer and the
concrete surfaces at the joints between successive
stages of construction. person in control of the sliding operation.
Unless otherwise specified, the verticality of
Where moulding or recess strips are specified,
the structure shall be controlled with laser
they shall be neatly butted or mitred.
alignment apparatus or optical plummets, and
(c) Formwork to open joints the levelness of the sliding forms with a
water-level system with reference control
The requirements in respect of formwork to open points placed at strategic locations.
joints shall, unless otherwise specified, apply only
to cases where the distance between opposite Height and verticality shall be monitored at
concrete surfaces is equal to or less than 150 mm. intervals not exceeding 4 hours. The
measurements shall immediately be plotted
Formwork to open joints shall be constructed to on graphs. When the structure is more than
produce a class F1 surface finish to concealed 10 mm out of vertical the Engineer shall be
surfaces or a class F2 or F3 surface finish which notified immediately.
corresponds to the in-plane surface finish of the
bordering concrete surfaces. The material used (iii) Supervision
and the construction of the formwork shall permit During the entire duration of the sliding
its complete removal to form the open joint. Where operations, a competent person who is fully
polystyrene or a similar material which is acquainted with the sliding technique and the
susceptible to damage is used to form open joints, Contractor's methods of construction shall be
it shall be lined with a hard surface on the side to in attendance on the sliding platform and in
be concreted. control of the sliding operations.
702-3
 (iv) Construction Before concreting is restarted, the form shall
The jacking frame shall be constructed with be adjusted to fit snugly into the hardened
adequate clearance between the underside of concrete so as to avoid steps from forming
on the exposed concrete surface. When
the cross members and the top of the
formwork to allow the horizontal sliding is recommenced, care shall be taken
reinforcement and embedded items to be to prevent the fresh concrete from being
lifted off from the old concrete.
correctly installed. A control procedure shall
be agreed on by the Contractor and the (f) Permanent formwork
Engineer in order to ensure that all the
reinforcement has been placed. At all times Void formers shall be secured in position at
there shall be horizontal reinforcement above regular intervals to prevent displacement and
the level of the top of the formwork panel. distortion during concreting. The void formers shall
be supported on precast concrete blocks or rigid
Guides shall be provided to ensure that the welded steel cradles, all subject to the approval of
vertical reinforcement can be placed the Engineer. The ties securing the void formers
correctly and that the specified concrete shall be attached to the formwork and cross
cover over the reinforcement is maintained. bearers of the falsework. The void formers shall
Where the jack rods are to be recovered, not be tied to or be supported on the
adequate provision shall be made for their reinforcement.
removal without damage being caused to the Fibre-cement plates shall be supported so that the
concrete. plate spans in the direction parallel to the
Where jack rods occur at openings or orientation of the fibres.
chases, adequate lateral support shall be (g) Preparation of formwork
provided to prevent their buckling.
The surfaces of forms that are to be in contact with
Equipment and material shall be distributed
fresh (wet) concrete shall be treated to ensure
on the working platforms, to distribute the
non-adhesion of the concrete to the form and easy
load evenly to the jacks.
release during stripping of the formwork.
Deflector plates shall be provided at the top
of the forms of the outside walls to prevent Release compounds and agents shall be subject
concrete from falling down the outside. to the Engineer's written approval and shall be
applied strictly in accordance with the
The framework, forms and platforms shall be manufacturer's instructions, and every precaution
cleared regularly to prevent the accumulation shall be taken to avoid contamination of the
of concrete remnants. reinforcement, prestressing tendons and
The Contractor shall take all precautions to anchorages. In the selection of compounds and
prevent contamination of the concrete and agents due regard shall be given to the necessity
reinforcing steel by leaking oil or other of maintaining a uniform colour and appearance on
causes. exposed concrete surfaces.

(v) Sliding Before the concrete is placed, all dirt and foreign
matter shall be removed from the forms, which
The Contractor shall give the Engineer forms shall be thoroughly wetted with water.
24 hour's notice of his intention to
commence with a slide. Permission to 06 REMOVAL OF FALSEWORK AND FORMWORK
commence with the slide shall not be given
by the Engineer before the sliding formwork Falsework and formwork shall not be removed before
assembly is fully operative, and the complete the concrete has attained sufficient strength to support
stock of all the materials required for the its own mass and any loads that may be imposed on it.
slide and the back-up plant and equipment This condition shall be assumed to require that, after
are on the Site. the concrete has been placed, the formwork shall
remain in position for the appropriate minimum period of
The Contractor shall ensure that the rate of time given in table 702/1, unless the Contractor can
sliding is such that the concrete at the prove to the satisfaction of the Engineer that shorter
bottom of the formwork has obtained periods are sufficient for fulfilling this condition. In such
sufficient strength to support itself and all case the formwork may be removed after the agreed
loads that may be imposed upon it at the shorter periods of time.
time, and that the concrete does not adhere
to the sides of the forms. Falsework and formwork shall be removed carefully
without shock, disturbance or damage being done to the
The sliding operations shall be continuous,
cast concrete or structure. Weather may be regarded as
without any interruptions, until the full height
"normal" when atmospheric temperatures adjacent to
of the structure is reached, and shall be
the concrete, as measured by a maximum and minimum
geared and organized for an average rate of
thermometer, do not fall below 15°C, and as "cold"
sliding of 350 mm/h.
when temperatures measured in the same way fall
(vi) Interruptions below 5°C. When minimum temperatures lie between
When the sliding operations are delayed for these values, the stripping times shall be between the
periods specified for normal and cold weather.
more than 45 minutes, the Contractor shall
prevent adhesion of the setting concrete to the Any period during which the temperature remains below
formwork panels by easing the forms or by 2°C shall be disregarded in the calculation of the minimum
moving them slightly every 10 minutes, or time which shall elapse before forms are removed.
alternatively, where reversible jacks are used,
by lowering the forms by 10 mm - 25 mm. On continuous reinforced concrete structures, the
Wherever interruptions occur, emergency falsework and supporting formwork shall not be removed
construction joints shall be formed and treated before the concrete of the last pour has reached the
in accordance with clause 08 of section 704. appropriate minimum age given in table 702/1 or the
appropriate minimum strength.
702-4
Where the structure is constructed in stages, the Where sections of structures are required to support
falsework and supporting formwork shall be removed as loads additional to their own mass before the concrete
specified on the Drawings or as directed by the has attained sufficient strength, the removal times
Engineer. shown in table 702/1 shall not apply, and longer periods
of time before the removal of falsework and formwork
In lieu of the times specified in table 702/1, the shall be agreed upon by the Engineer and the
falsework and formwork to soffits of slabs and beams Contractor and shall be confirmed in writing.
may be removed once the concrete has attained 70% of
its specified cube compressive strength. The On prestressed-concrete structures the falsework and
compressive strength of the concrete shall be supporting formwork shall be removed after the full pre-
established from a representative and adequate number stressing force relating to the particular stage of
of cubes that have been stored under conditions that construction has been applied, unless otherwise shown
simulate the field conditions. Similarly, side forms may on the Drawings or directed by the Engineer.
be removed when the concrete has attained a cube
compressive strength of 2 MPa.
Table 702/1
REMOVAL OF FALSEWORK AND FORMWORK : MINIMUM TIME IN DAYS

Type of cement used

Falsework and formwork to - Normal cement Rapid-hardening cement CEM III*

Normal Cold Normal Cold** Normal Cold

weather weather weather weather weather weather
1. Beam sides, walls and
1 2 1 1 2 4
unloaded columns

2. Soffits of slabs and beams:

(a) spans up to 3 m 4 7 2 4 6 10
(b) spans over 3 m up to
10 17 5 10 14 24
6m
(c) spans over 6 m up to
14 24 10 18 21 28
12 m
(d) spans over 12m 21 30 18 28 28 36

* Also applicable to a 50/50 mixture of CEM-I and ground granulated blast-furnace slag.
** Shorter periods may be used for sections with a thickness exceeding 300 mm.

07 FORMED SURFACES : CLASSES OF FINISH 07.04 Class F3 surface finish

07.01 General This finish shall be that obtained by first producing a

class F2 surface finish with joint marks forming a
In addition to complying with the tolerances specified in regular pattern approved by the Engineer to fit in with
clause 03 of section 707, the concrete surface finish on the appearance of the structure. Thereafter all
formed surfaces shall also comply with the following projections shall be removed, irregularities repaired and
requirements. the surface rubbed or treated to form a smooth finish
with a uniform texture, appearance and colour. This
07.02 Class F1 surface finish
surface finish is required on all exposed formed
After surface defects have been remedied in surfaces, unless class F2 finish is specified.
accordance with subclause 08.02 of this section, no
Steel forms shall not be used to form surfaces for which
further treatment of the as-stripped finish shall be
class F3 surface finish has been specified, unless
required. This finish is required on concealed formed
authorized by the Engineer or where provision is made
surfaces.
specifically in the Schedule of Quantities.
07.03 Class F2 surface finish
07.05 Board surface finish
This finish shall be equivalent to that obtained by the
This finish shall be that obtained by using tongued and
use of wrought-thicknessed, square-edge timber panels
grooved timber boarding arranged in a regular pattern
and boards, shutter boards, or from steel forms
approved by the Engineer. The finish is intended to be
arranged in a regular pattern. The finish is intended to
left as struck, but surface defects shall be remedied in
be left as struck, but surface defects shall be remedied
accordance with subclause 08.02 of this section and
in accordance with subclause 08.02 of this section.
large fins trimmed where directed by the Engineer.
While minor surface blemishes and discolourations will 07.06 Protection of surfaces
be permitted, large blemishes and severe stains and
discolouration shall be made good where directed by The Contractor shall ensure that permanently exposed
the Engineer. This surface finish is intended for concrete surfaces are protected from rust marks,
exposed formed surfaces that cannot readily be seen by spillage and stains of all kinds and from any other
the general public, as in the case of culverts, remote damage during construction.
structures and structures with restricted access.

702-5
08 REMEDIAL TREATMENT OF FORMED 09 UNFORMED SURFACES : CLASSES OF
SURFACES FINISH
08.01 General 09.01 Class U1 surface finish
Any remedial treatment to surfaces that may be agreed This surface finish is required on those portions of
on by the Engineer after an inspection has been made concrete slabs which are to receive bituminous or
immediately after the removal of the formwork, shall be concrete surfacing or which are to be covered by
carried out without delay. No surface may be treated backfilling material.
before an inspection has been made by the Engineer.
After the concrete has been placed and compacted as
08.02 Repairs specified in clause 07 of section 704, the top surface
shall be screeded off with a template to the required
Surface defects such as small areas of honeycombing cross-section and be tamped with a tamping board to
cavities produced by form ties, large isolated blowholes, compact the surface thoroughly and to bring mortar to
broken corner edges, etc, shall be repaired with mortar the surface, so as to leave the surface slightly ridged
consisting of a cement:sand ratio equal to that of the but generally at the required elevation.
concrete being repaired.
09.02 Class U2 surface finish
The colour of repaired areas of exposed surfaces shall
match the colour of the surrounding concrete. This surface finish is required on sidewalks, the tops of
wingwalls and retaining walls, on the exposed concrete
For the repair of large or deep areas of honeycombing
shoulders and unsurfaced areas on bridge decks, and
and defects, special methods and techniques, such as
on the inverts of box culverts.
pneumatically applied mortar, pressure grouting, epoxy
bonding agents, etc, may be used as agreed on by the The surface shall first be given a class U1 surface
Engineer. finish, and after the concrete has hardened sufficiently,
it shall be wood-floated to a uniform surface free from
Where, in the opinion of the Engineer, the extent of the
trowel marks. For non-skid surfaces as on sidewalks
honeycombing or defects is such that the effectiveness
and bridge decks, the surface shall thereafter be given
of repair work will be in doubt, the Contractor shall, at his
a broom finish. The corrugations produced shall be
own expense, perform a load test in accordance with
approximately 1 mm deep and uniform in character and
SANS 10160 or any other test that may be required by
width, and shall have a pattern perpendicular to the
the Engineer, to prove that the structural integrity of the
centre line of the pavement.
repaired member is adequate. Should the tests fail or
should the Engineer be of the opinion that the work is 09.03 Class U3 surface finish
substandard or does not comply with the requirements of
the Specifications, he can instruct that the structure shall This surface finish shall be required for bearing areas
be rebuilt in part or in full at the Contractor's expense. and tops of concrete railings. The surface shall be given
a class U1 finish, and after the concrete has hardened
Where the concrete has been damaged by the concrete sufficiently, it shall be floated with a steel float to a
having adhered to the formwork panel, the cracked and smooth surface to within the dimensional tolerance
loose concrete shall be removed; where the fresh specified in subclause 03.07 of section 707.
concrete has lifted off at construction joints, the crack
shall be scraped out immediately on both sides of the Rubbing with a carborundum stone after the concrete
wall to a depth of at least 50 mm. The cavities so has hardened may be done, but under no
formed shall thereafter be repaired as described above. circumstances will plastering be permitted.

08.03 Rubbing of surfaces 10 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

If the finish of exposed formed surfaces does not Item Unit
comply with the requirements in respect of uniformity of
texture, appearance and colour, the Contractor shall, 702.01 Formwork class F1 surface finish
when so instructed by the Engineer, rub down the
exposed surfaces of the entire structure or any part 702.01.01 Single-surface formwork
thereof as specified below. 702.01.01.01 Plane, horizontal square metre (m )
2

The surface shall be saturated with water for at least 702.01.01.02 Plane, sloping square metre (m )
2

one hour. Initial rubbing shall be carried out with a

medium-coarse carborundum stone, with a small 702.01.01.03 Plane, vertical square metre (m2)
amount of mortar in the proportions specified in
subclause 08.02 of this section being used on the face. 702.01.01.04 Curved, cylindrical
2
Rubbing shall be continued until all form marks, (radius given) square metre (m )
projections and irregularities have been removed and a 702.01.01.05 Curved, conical (min
uniform surface has been obtained. and max radii given) square metre (m )
2

The paste produced by the rubbing shall be left in place. 702.01.01.06 Curved, spherical
The final rubbing shall be carried out with a fine (radius given) square metre (m2)
carborundum stone and water. This rubbing shall continue
until the entire surface is of a smooth, even texture and is 702.01.02 Double-surface formwork
uniform in colour. The surface shall then be washed with (both sides measured)
a brush to remove surplus paste and powder. 2
702.01.02.01 Plane, horizontal square metre (m )
Where the concrete surfaces formed by sliding 702.01.02.02 Plane, sloping square metre (m 2)
formwork require treatment for achieving the surface
2
finish specified for the member, the concrete shall, as 702.01.02.03 Plane, vertical square metre (m )
soon as the surfaces are exposed under the formwork,
be floated with rubber-lined floats to the desired finish.

702-6
Item Unit Item Unit
702.01.02.04 Curved, cylindrical 702.05 Permanent void formers
(inside radius given) square metre (m2)
702.05.01 Description of type and
702.01.02.05 Curved, conical size with reference to
2
(inside min and max Drawings square metre (m )
2
radii given) square metre (m )
702.05.02 Ditto for other types
2
702.01.02.06 Curved, spherical and sizes square metre (m )
(inside radius given) square metre (m2)
The unit of measurement shall be the square metre of
702.01.03 Beams concrete area actually formed with permanent void
702.01.03.01 Beam, soffits formers or the area to be formed in accordance with the
(see note 5) square metre (m2) Drawings, whichever is the smaller.

702.01.03.02 Beam, sides square metre (m )

2 The tendered rates shall include full compensation for
the permanent formwork complete as specified,
702.01.04 Columns including anchors to prevent uplift.
702.01.04.01 Square and
2 Item Unit
rectangular square metre (m )
2 702.06 Formwork to openings square metre (m2)
702.01.04.02 Cylindrical square metre (m )
702.01.04.03 Other shapes The unit of measurement shall be the square metre of
2 formwork actually in contact with the final surface of the
(state details) square metre (m )
concrete in accordance with the Drawings.
The unit of measurement for formwork shall be the
The tendered rate shall include compensation for
square metre of formwork actually in contact with the
installing and subsequently removing the formwork.
final concrete surface or the area of the same surface
as shown on the Drawings, whichever is smaller.
Item Unit
The tendered rates shall include full compensation for
702.07 Chamfers larger than
design, erection and subsequent removal of the
formwork and supporting falsework, including the supply 25 mm x 25 mm
of all chamfers up to 25 mm x 25 mm in size and for the 702.07.01 Size and member indicated metre (m)
specified remedial treatment of concrete surfaces.
Eighty (80)% of the work done under this item shall be 702.07.02 Ditto for other sizes metre (m)
paid on removal of the formwork and the remaining 20%
on approval of the formed surface. The unit of measurement shall be the metre length of
chamfer formwork provided. Chamfers smaller than
The following notes shall apply to this pay item: 25 mm x 25 mm will not be measured for payment and
(1) Single-surface formwork shall be formwork their cost shall be deemed to be included in the rates
consisting of a single surface supported only by tendered for formwork.
falsework and not tied to an opposing surface.
The tendered rates shall include full compensation for
(2) Double-surface formwork shall be formwork all labour, equipment and materials necessary to
consisting of two sides (both of which are provide and install the chamfers.
measured for payment) which can be supported in
one direction by ties. Item Unit
(3) Beams and columns will be measured separately 702.08 Establishment on Site
as itemized. for sliding formwork
(4) Surfaces inclined at 10° or less to the horizontal operations lump sum
shall be classed as horizontal surfaces. Surfaces The tendered lump sum shall include full compensation
sloping at between 10° and 85° to the horizontal for the establishment on the Site and the subsequent
shall be classed as sloping surfaces. Sloping removal of the complete sliding formwork assembly,
surfaces exceeding 85° to the horizontal shall be special plant, equipment and incidentals for the sliding
classed as vertical surfaces. Curved surfaces will work, the costs of which will not vary with the actual
not be classed in accordance with their slope. amount of sliding done.
(5) Where provision is made in the Project This work shall be paid for as a lump sum, 75% of
Specifications, formwork for beam soffits shall be which will become payable when the sliding formwork
classed into different heights of support categories. assembly, plant and equipment have been installed on
(6) Items of formwork for which provision is made the Site and is ready to be commissioned for the first
elsewhere shall not be included in this item of slide, and the remaining 25% will become payable after
payment. all the sliding work has been completed and the
aforementioned items have been removed from the
Item Unit Site.
702.02 Formwork, class F2 surface finish Although payment under this item will only be made
702.03 Formwork, class F3 surface finish when the sliding formwork assembly is operational and
ready for the first slide, the tendered lump sum shall not
702.04 Formwork, board finish include the cost of erection for the first slide.
The provisions of item 702.01 shall apply equally to the
above items, which shall be subdivided as in item 702.01.

702-7
Item Unit
702.09 Moving to and setting up
the sliding formwork
assembly at (description of
each structure) number (No)
The unit of measurement shall be the number of
structures, including the first structure, to which the
complete sliding formwork assembly has to be moved
and set up in position ready to be commissioned.
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for all
costs involved in erection for the first structure and in
dismantling, moving and re-erecting the complete
sliding formwork assembly.

Item Unit
702.10 Forming of concrete by
sliding formwork for
(description of each structure
and class of surface finish to
exposed surfaces indicated) metre (m)
The unit of measurement shall be the metre height of
each structure formed by sliding formwork.
The quantity measured shall be the actual height of
each structure formed by the sliding technique.

The tendered rate shall include full compensation for

the forming of concrete by sliding formwork, complete
as specified, and for the remedial treatment of concrete
surfaces.

Notes:
(a) For smaller items of construction work such as
valve boxes, concrete railings, etc, the formwork
can be measured separately without distinction as
to vertical or horizontal formwork, or the formwork
may be included in the price of the concrete.
Where expedient, type items can be measured
complete including excavations, formwork,
concrete, fittings, etc.
(b) Formwork is not usually measured for precast
concrete items as these are itemized complete.
(c) Under certain circumstances the above method of
measuring may require modifications to suit a
particular case.
(d) The types of unformed concrete surfaces which
are to receive a U-type class of finish are specified
in clause 09 of this section. The cost of finishing
such surfaces shall be included in the rates
tendered for concrete, as specified in
subclause 04.05 of section 001.

702-8
SERIES 7 : STRUCTURES 03 STORAGE OF MATERIALS

SECTION 703 : STEEL REINFORCEMENT FOR Steel reinforcement shall be stacked off the ground and,
in aggressive environments, protection shall be
STRUCTURES
provided in the form of sheds or tarpaulins.
CONTENTS
04 BENDING OF REINFORCEMENT
01 SCOPE Reinforcement shall be cut or cut and bent to the
02 MATERIALS dimensions shown on the bending schedules and in
03 STORAGE OF MATERIALS accordance with SANS 82.
04 BENDING OF REINFORCEMENT
05 SURFACE CONDITION High-tensile-steel bars shall not be flame-cut, except
06 PLACING AND FIXING with the approval of the Engineer.
07 COVER Except as provided below, all bars shall be bent cold,
08 LAPS AND JOINTS and bending shall be done slowly, with a steady, even
09 WELDING pressure being used without jerking or impact.
10 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
If approved, the hot bending of bars with a diameter of
01 SCOPE at least 32 mm will be permitted, provided that the
strength of the bars will not depend on cold working.
This section covers the supplying and placing of steel Where hot bending is approved, the bars shall be
reinforcement in concrete structures. heated slowly to a cherry-red heat (not above 840°C)
and, after bending, shall be allowed to cool slowly in air.
02 MATERIALS Quenching with water will not be permitted.
02.01 Steel bars Reinforcing bars that have already been bent shall not
Steel reinforcing bars shall comply with the be rebent at the location of the original bend without the
requirements of SANS 920. Mild steel shall be hot- permission of the Engineer.
rolled bars with plain, round cross-sections. High-yield-
stress steel shall be hot-rolled deformed bars. 05 SURFACE CONDITION
The use of cold-worked bars shall be subject to the Immediately before the concrete is placed around the
written approval of the Engineer. Cold-worked reinforcement, the reinforcement shall be clean, free
reinforcing bars shall bear the SANS mark or from mud, oil, grease, paint, loose rust, loose mill scale
alternatively be subject to consignment inspection by or any other substances that may have an adverse
the SANS at the plant, factory or steel yard, at the chemical effect on the steel or concrete or will reduce
Contractor's expense. the bond.
The type of bar required shall be identified on the 06 PLACING AND FIXING
Drawings by the symbols R, Y or Z in accordance with
SANS 282. Reinforcement shall be positioned as shown on the
Drawings and shall be accurately secured in these
02.02 Welded steel fabric positions within the tolerance given in subclause 03.05
Welded steel fabric shall comply with the requirements of section 707 by means of stools, clips, links, spacers
of SANS 1024. and cover blocks and by tying with 1,6 mm or 1,25 mm
diameter annealed wire, or, where permitted by the
02.03 Mechanical couplers Engineer, by tack welding.
The tensile properties as established by way of a test The cover and spacer blocks required for supporting the
specimen with a maximum gauge length of 610 mm, reinforcement shall be of approved design and material.
which consists of reinforcing bars that have been butt-
jointed with a mechanical coupler, shall comply with the The ends of ties, clips or wire shall not project into the
following requirements: concrete cover.

(a) When tested in accordance with the relevant Where protruding bars will be exposed to the elements
requirements of subclause 5.3 of SANS 920, the for an indefinite period, the bars shall be adequately
tensile properties shall show an improvement of at protected against corrosion and damage and shall be
least 10% on the requirements of SANS 920. properly cleaned before being permanently encased in
concrete.
(b) When the test specimen is subjected to a load
equal to 0,58 of the specified minimum yield force In members that are formed with sliding formwork, mild-
of the bar, the elongation measured on the gauge steel spacer "ladders" for the placing and fixing of the
length shall not exceed the calculated theoretical wall reinforcement shall be used at spacings indicated
elongation for a 610 mm length of bar, based on a on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer. The
stress of 0,58 of the specified minimum yield stress ladders and their design shall be approved by the
of the bar and a modulus of elasticity of 200 GPa. Engineer. The ties of the ladder shall be spaced at
multiples of the horizontal bar spacing in the wall, and
The Contractor shall submit test certificates from a shall be used to secure the horizontal reinforcement.
recognized testing authority to the Engineer, certifying The laps in the horizontal reinforcement shall be
that the couplers offered comply with the specified staggered to ensure that no part of two laps in any four
requirements. consecutive layers will lie in the same vertical plane.
The use of mechanical couplers as well as the type
offered shall be subject to the written approval of the
Engineer.

703-1
07 COVER Additional cover as directed by the Engineer shall be
provided if porous aggregates are used.
The term "cover" in the context of this section shall
mean the clear thickness of concrete between the The cover blocks or spacers required to ensure that the
surface of the reinforcement and the concrete face. specified cover is obtained shall be of a material, shape
and design acceptable to the Engineer.
The cover shall be as shown on the Drawings. Where
no cover is indicated, the cover provided shall be in Where concrete spacer blocks are used, they shall be
accordance with the appropriate values shown in made from a 5 mm maximum size aggregate and shall
table 703/1. The cover shall be within the tolerance be of the same strength and from the same material
given in subclause 03.05 of section 707. source as the surrounding concrete. The blocks shall be
formed in specially manufactured moulds, and the
The cover shall be increased by the expected depth of concrete shall be compacted on a table vibrator and
any surface treatment, e.g. when concrete is bush- afterwards cured, all to the approval of the Engineer.
hammered or when rebates are provided.

TABLE 703/1 :
CONCRETE COVER OVER REINFORCEMENT

Cover (mm)
Description of member/surface to which the
Condition of exposure
cover applies Concrete class
20 25 30 40 50
1. .MODERATE 1.1 Enclosed surfaces
Sheltered from severe rain 1.2 Surfaces protected by an overlay
and not subject to freezing 1.3 Buried structures/members 40 40 30 25 25
while saturated
1.4 Structures/members continuously
1.5 Concrete cast under water 75 75 NA NA NA
1.6 Surface formed with permanent formwork 20 20 20 20 20
1.7 Transnet Limited** structures - as for 2.3 to 2.6
1.8* Piles, cast in situ (wet cast against casing) 40 40 40 40 40
1.9 Piles, cast in situ (dry cast against soil)
50 50 50 50 50
1.10 Piles, cast in situ (wet cast against soil)
1.11 Piles, precast 35 35 35 30 30

2. SEVERE 2.1 Exposed surfaces

NA 50 40 30 25
Exposed to driving rain, 2.2 Buried structures/members
alternate wetting and drying.
Subject to heavy 2.3 Transnet Limited substructures,
NA 50 40 40 40
condensation, freezing while exposed surfaces
wet, corrosive fumes, 2.4 Transnet Limited structures, surfaces in
chemicals, and aggressive NA 50 50 50 50
contract with soil
soils
2.5 Transnet Limited superstructures NA NA 40 40 40
2.6 Transnet Limited superstructures,
NA NA 50 50 50
surfaces in contact with ballast
2.7* Piles, cast in situ (wet cast against casing) 50 50 50 50 50
2.8 Piles, cast in situ (dry cast against soil)
75 75 75 75 75
2.9 Piles, cast in situ (wet cast against soil)
2.10 Piles, precast 40 40 40 35 35

3. VERY SEVERE 3.1 Marine structures NA NA NA 60 50

Exposed to abrasion, and 3.2 Piles, cast in situ (wet cast against casing) NA NA NA 80 80
water with pH below 4,5
3.3 Piles, precast NA NA NA 50 50

* Shall apply to concrete cast under water

** "Transnet Limited structures" shall mean all structures over or within the property of Transnet Limited.

703-2
08 LAPS AND JOINTS Item Unit
Laps, joints, splices and mechanical couplings shall be 703.03 Welded steel fabric for -
made in accordance with the methods and details and 703.03.01 (Description of structure or
at the positions as specified or shown on the Drawings, portion of structure to which
or as agreed on by the Engineer.
it will apply)

09 WELDING 703.03.01.01 (Reference number or

Nominal diameters of
The welding of reinforcement shall be carried out only longitudinal and transverse
where shown on the Drawings or agreed on by the
wires and their nominal
Engineer.
spacing indicated) kilogram (kg)
Flash-butt welding shall be carried out only with the
703.03.01.02 Etc for other pitches and
combination of flashing, heating, upsetting and
diameters
annealing to the Engineer's approval, and only
machines that automatically control this cycle of 703.03.02 Etc for other structures or
operations shall be used. portions of structures.
Metal-arc welding of reinforcement shall be carried out in The unit of measurement for welded steel fabric shall
accordance with SANS 10044 for Grade A welds and the be the kilogram of welded steel fabric in place, and the
recommendations of the reinforcement manufacturers, quantity shall be taken from the bending schedule or
subject to the approval of the Engineer and the calculated from the nett area covered by the mesh,
satisfactory performance of trial joints. excluding laps, in accordance with the dimensions
shown on the Drawings.
Other methods of welding, e.g. resistance welding, may
be used subject to the approval of the Engineer and to The tendered rates shall include full compensation for
their satisfactory performance in trial joints. the supply, delivery, cutting, bending and installation of
the welded steel fabric including all tying wire, spacers
Welded joints shall be full-strength welds, the strength
and waste.
of which shall be assessed by destruction tests on
samples selected by the Engineer. Item Unit
703.04 Reinforcement for -
10 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT (Description of structure or portion
Item Unit of structure to which it will apply)

703.01 Mechanical couplers for - 703.04.01 Mild steel

703.01.01 (Type of steel indicated) - 703.04.01.01 Bars with an 8 mm dia ton (t)
703.04.01.02 Bars with a 10 mm dia ton (t)
703.01.01.01 For (diameter indicated)
mm dia bars number (No) 703.04.01.03 Etc for other diameters
703.04.02 High-yield-stress steel
703.01.01.02 Etc for other diameter bars
703.04.02.01 Bars with an 8 mm dia ton (t)
703.01.02 Etc for other types of steel
703.04.02.02 Bars with a 10 mm dia ton (t)
The unit of measurement shall be the number of 703.04.02.03 Etc for other diameters
mechanical couplers installed for bars of each type and
diameter. 703.04.03 Etc for other types of steel

The tendered rates shall include full compensation for Item Unit
the supply and installation of the mechanical couplers 703.05 Reinforcement for -
complete as specified. (Etc for other structures
or portions of structures)
Item Unit
The unit of measurement shall be the ton of
703.02 Spacer ladders for - reinforcement in place in accordance with the Drawings
703.02.01 (Structure or portion of structure or as authorized by the Engineer.
indicated) ton (t) Clips, ties, separators, stools and other steel used for
positioning reinforcement not included in the bending
703.02.02 Etc for other structures or
schedules, shall not be measured for payment, unless
portions of structures provision has specifically been made therefor in the
The unit of measurement shall be the ton of steel Project Specifications.
spacer ladders in place in accordance with the The tendered rates shall include full compensation for
Drawings or as authorized by the Engineer. The the supply, delivery, cutting, bending, welding and
tendered rates shall include full compensation for the installation of the steel reinforcement as shown on the
supply, delivery, cutting, bending, welding and Drawings including all tying wire, spacers and waste.
installation of spacer ladders including all tying wire,
spacers and waste. Note:
The mass of steel reinforcement shall be computed
from the nominal bar sizes and the nominal mass per
unit length for each nominal bar size.

703-3
SERIES 7 : STRUCTURES (ii) For use in other reinforced concrete members,
the shrinkage of the fine aggregate shall not
SECTION 704 : CONCRETE exceed 175% and that of the coarse aggregate
150% of that of the reference aggregate.
CONTENTS
(iii) For use in mass concrete substructures and
01 SCOPE unreinforced concrete head walls and wing
02 MATERIALS walls, the shrinkage of both the fine and the
03 STORAGE OF MATERIALS coarse aggregate shall not exceed 200% of
04 CONCRETE QUALITY that of the reference aggregate.
05 MEASURING OF MATERIALS Where there is any doubt about the shrinkage
06 MIXING characteristics of aggregates, the Contractor shall
07 PLACING AND COMPACTION submit a certificate from an approved laboratory,
08 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS indicating the shrinkage characteristics of the
09 CURING AND PROTECTION aggregate.
10 ADVERSE WEATHER CONDITIONS
11 PIPES AND CONDUITS (b) The flakiness index of the stone as determined by
12 APPLIED LOADING TMH1 Method B3 shall not exceed 35.
13 PRECAST CONCRETE (c) Aggregates shall not contain harmful amounts of
14 TESTING AND QUALITY CONTROL organic materials such as grass, timber or similar
15 NO-FINES CONCRETE materials.
16 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
(d) Where 38 mm aggregate is used in 30 MPa and
01 SCOPE stronger concrete, the aggregate shall be supplied
in two nominal sizes, the larger of which shall be
This section covers the manufacture, transportation, 38 mm and the smaller of which shall be 19 mm or
placing and testing of concrete used where plain, 13,2 mm. The relative proportions of large and
reinforced or prestressed concrete is specified, and the smaller aggregate used shall be determined by the
manufacture and placing of no-fines concrete. mix design.

02 MATERIALS (e) Aggregates that may be potentially alkali reactive

shall be assessed in accordance with SANS
02.01 Cement Standard Method 1245 and if there is a potential
danger of any alkali aggregate reaction, the
The cement used for concrete shall be any of the Engineer's decision as to the suitability of the
following: aggregate shall be final and binding.
(a) Normal cement conforming to the requirements of (f) Aggregates for concrete in contact with sewage or
SANS 50197-1 (CEM I class 32,5 unless otherwise sewage gases shall be of dolomitic origin. All
approved). concrete for sewers and sewerage works, except
The strength class of the cement shall be 32,5N concrete for the following, shall therefore be made
unless otherwise specified in the Project with aggregates of dolomitic origin:
Specifications or approved by the Engineer. Cement • blinding
extenders, if allowed in terms of the Project • mass concrete for foundation fill
Specifications, shall comply with the requirements of • concrete for encasing and bedding pipes
SANS 1491-1, SANS 1491-2 and SANS 1491-3 for
ground granulated blastfurnace slag, fly ash and The quantity of insoluble matter in respect of
condensed silica fume respectively. concrete made with aggregates of dolomitic origin,
determined according to the method described in
(b) Blast-furnace cement (CEM III class 32,5) SANS 677, Appendix C, shall not be more than 15%.
conforming to the requirements of SANS 50197-1).
02.03 Water
(c) A 50/50 mixture of CEM I and ground granulated
blast-furnace slag conforming to the requirements of Water shall be clean and free from harmful
SANS 1491-1. The cement and ground granulated concentrations of acids, alkalis, salts, sugar or other
slag may be mixed in the concrete mixer together organic or chemical substances. If the water used is not
with the other ingredients of the concrete. obtained from a public drinking-water main, the Engineer
may require the Contractor to have the suitability of the
The use of CEM III or a 50/50 mixture of CEM I and water proved by tests made by an approved laboratory.
ground granulated slag may not be used unless The costs of these tests or any subsequent tests ordered
authorized in the Project Specifications or in writing by by the Engineer shall be borne by the Contractor.
the Engineer.
02.04 Admixtures
The use of CEM III will not be permitted in prestressed
Admixtures shall not be used in concrete without the
concrete members or units.
written approval of the Engineer, who may require that
02.02 Aggregates tests be made before they are used, to prove their
suitability.
Both coarse aggregate (stone) and fine aggregate
(sand) shall comply with the requirements of Admixtures, if allowed, shall comply with the following
SANS 1083, subject to the following: requirements:
(a) The shrinkage of both the fine and the coarse (a) Admixtures shall be used only in liquid form and
aggregate, when tested in accordance with SANS shall be batched in solution in the mixing water by
Standard Method 5836, shall not exceed the means of a mechanical batcher capable of
following limits: dispensing the agent in quantities accurate to
within 5% of the required amount.
(i) For use in prestressed concrete, concrete bridge
decks and slender columns, the shrinkage of (b) Admixtures shall comply with the requirements of
both fine and coarse aggregate shall not exceed ASTM C494/C494M-99a or AASHTO M-194 and
130% of that of the reference aggregate. shall be of an approved brand and type.
704-1
(c) Air-entraining agents shall comply with the The class of strength concrete is indicated by the 28-
requirements of ASTM C-260 or AASHTO M-154. day cube characteristic compressive strength in MPa
(d) Admixtures shall not contain any chlorides. and the maximum size of coarse aggregate in the mix.
Class 30/38 concrete will therefore mean concrete with
a cube characteristic compressive strength of 30 MPa
03 STORAGE OF MATERIALS
at 28 days and a maximum size of coarse aggregate of
03.01 Cement 38 mm.

Cement which is stored on the Site shall be kept under Strength concrete used under this Contract will be one
a cover that provides adequate protection against or more of the classes given in table 704/1 unless
moisture and other factors that may cause deterioration otherwise specified in these Specifications or in the
of the cement. Project Specifications.

Where the cement is supplied in bags, the bags shall be The cement content for any class of concrete shall not
3
closely and neatly stacked to a height not exceeding exceed 500 kg/m of the concrete, unless otherwise
12 bags, and they shall be so arranged that they can be specified.
used in the order in which they were delivered to the The slump of the concrete shall be within the range as
Site. Different brands and/or types of the same brand specified in table 704/3.
shall be stored separately.
Where for reasons of durability or other considerations
The storage of cement in bulk in silos or similar a minimum cement:water (c:w) ratio is specified in the
containers shall be permitted, provided the cement Project Specifications, such concrete shall be
drawn for use is measured by mass and not by volume. designated by the normal designation followed by a "w"
Cement shall not be kept in storage for longer than and the minimum c:w ratio in brackets, e.g. class 30/38
6 weeks from the date of manufacture without the (w/2,0) concrete is class 30/38 concrete with a minimum
Engineer's permission. c:w ratio of 2,0.

The Engineer may order the removal of cement, which In such cases the characteristic strength of the mix
is older than 6 weeks, from the Site or the alteration of shall be based on the specified 28-day characteristic
the design mix if he does allow its use. Alternatively, he compressive strength of the concrete.
may allow the cement to be used in concrete of less Before starting any concrete work on the Site, the
critical importance, as in blinding layers. Contractor shall furnish the Engineer with samples, for
his approval, of the constituent materials of the
03.02 Aggregates concrete and a statement of the mix proportions which
he proposes to use for each class of concrete indicated
Aggregates of different nominal sizes shall be stored
in the Schedule of Quantities.
separately to avoid the intermixing of the different
aggregates and the contamination thereof by foreign Table 704/1
matter.
CLASSES OF CONCRETE
03.03 Storage capacity
Maximum
28-day characteristic
The storage capacity provided and the amount of Class of size of
compressive strength
material stored (whether cement, aggregates or water) concrete aggregate
(MPa)
shall be sufficient to ensure that the progress of the (mm)
work is not interrupted by lack of materials during 15/19 19
concrete-casting operations.
15/38 15 38
03.04 Deteriorated material 20/13 13
Material that has deteriorated or that has been 20/19 20 19
contaminated or otherwise damaged shall not be used
in concrete. Such material shall be removed from the 20/38 38
Site without delay. 25/13 13

04 CONCRETE QUALITY 25/19 25 19

25/38 38
04.01 General
30/13 13
The concrete shall comply with the requirements for
strength concrete or for prescribed-mix concrete, as 30/19 30 19
specified in subclauses 04.02 and 04.03 of this clause. 30/38 38
04.02 Strength concrete 40/13 13
The Contractor shall be responsible for the design of 40/19 40 19
the concrete mix and for the proportions of the 40/38 38
constituent materials necessary to produce concrete
that complies with the requirements specified in 50/13 13
table 704/1 for each class of strength concrete.
50/19 50 19
The Engineer will have the authority to instruct the 50/38 38
Contractor to have the concrete mix designed by a
specialist organization such as SABS Holdings (Pty.) 60/13 13
Ltd. or the Cement and Concrete Institute (CCI), in
60/19 60 19
which case the Contractor will only be reimbursed the
invoiced charges of such organization. 60/38 38

704-2
The samples shall be accompanied by evidence that The Engineer will have the right to vary the proportions
they comply with the requirements for the various of the constituents of the concrete as the work
materials specified. The statement of mix proportions proceeds. Payment for variations will be made at the
shall be accompanied by evidence which will indicate tendered rates as specified in the Project Specifications.
that concrete made with the materials in the proposed
Notes:
proportions will have the specified properties.
• The maximum size of coarse aggregate in mm
Evidence shall be in the form of either -
required in a mix shall be designated as a suffix to
• a statement from an approved laboratory on the the class, e.g. Class 1:4:8/38.
results of tests, or • The ratio of fine to coarse aggregate shall be
• an authoritative report or record of previous use and adjusted to produce a dense, workable mix.
experience. • The total quantity of water shall include that
contained in the aggregates.
The actual mix proportions used as well as any changes
thereto shall be subject to the Engineer's approval, but • The volume of cement in one 50 kg bag of cement
such approval shall in no way relieve the Contractor of shall be taken as 0,033 m 3.
his responsibility to produce concrete with the specified
• The mix should contain only enough water to
properties.
achieve the required consistence. Consistence may
The Contractor is cautioned that the quality of cement be assessed by eye or measured by carrying out the
may vary between consignments to an extent that will slump test (SANS 5862-1).
necessitate adjustments in the cement content of mixes.
Recommended slumps are:
In order to ensure a uniform quality of concrete, the
Contractor shall obtain from the manufacturer the 50 - 100 mm for compaction by mechanical vibration
relevant cement quality data for each consignment to 100 - 150 mm for compaction by hand.
ascertain the required adjustment to the cement content.
This information shall be submitted to the Engineer. 04.04 Consistency and workability

04.03 Prescribed-mix concrete Slump measurements obtained in accordance with the

test prescribed in section 903 on concrete used in the
The Engineer will be responsible for determining the Works shall fall within the ranges specified in table 704/3.
proportions of each constituent material of the
prescribed-mix concrete. The Contractor shall produce The concrete shall be of a suitable workability without
the concrete by using the specified materials and in the the excessive use of water so that it can be readily
proportions ordered by the Engineer. compacted into the corners of the formwork and around
reinforcement, tendons and ducts without segregation
The Contractor shall be responsible for supplying the of the material.
constituent materials for the concrete and he shall furnish
the Engineer, at least four weeks before the start of any 05 MEASURING OF MATERIALS
concrete work on the Site, with samples of each aggregate
(a) Cement
for testing purposes. If the materials comply with the
Specifications, the Contractor shall supply further samples Where cement is supplied in standard bags, it
of sizes indicated by the Engineer for determining the mix shall be assumed that each bag contains 50 kg. All
proportions for each class of concrete. cement taken from bulk storage containers and
from partially used bags shall be batched by mass
The classes of concrete for prescribed mixes shall be
to an accuracy of within 3 per cent.
specified in the Project Specifications, except for the
three "nominal" classes given in Table 704/2 A and B. Table 704/3

Table 704/2A NOMINAL MIXES SLUMP VALUES

(9,5 or 13,2 mm stone) Slump (mm)*
Type of construction
Class Class Class Max Min
Constituent or
1:4:8 1:3:6 1:2:4
property 1. Paving, concrete nosings and 75 50
concrete concrete concrete
precast units
Cement (kg) 50 50 50
2. Prestressed concrete 75 25
3
Aggregate (m ) sand 0,175 0,130 0,100
3. Reinforced foundation walls, 125 50
stone 0,095 0,080 0,070 footings and cast in situ piles
Estimated 28-day (except dry-cast piles)
compressive strength 10 15 20
4. Slabs, beams columns and 125 50
(MPa)
reinforced walls

Table 704/2B NOMINAL MIXES 5. Concrete bases, caissons and 100 25

substructure walls
(19,0 or 26,5 mm stone)
Class Class Class * Where high-frequency vibrators are used, the
Constituent or above values shall be reduced by one-third.
1:4:8 1:3:6 1:2:4
property
concrete concrete concrete (b) Water
Cement (kg) 50 50 50 The mixing water for each batch shall be
3
Aggregate (m ) sand measured, either by mass or by volume, to an
0,170 0,125 0,095
accuracy of within 3 per cent.
stone 0,145 0,120 0,100
Estimated 28-day The amount of water added to the mix shall be
compressive strength 10 15 20 adjusted to make allowance for the moisture
(MPa) content (if any) of the aggregates.

704-3
(c) Aggregates A suitable timing device in a good working order shall
be attached to the mixer to ensure that the minimum
All aggregates shall be measured separately by
mixing time is complied with.
mass, to an accuracy of within 3 per cent, except if
otherwise provided in this clause . The first batch to be run in a clean mixer shall contain
only 2/3 of the required amount of coarse aggregate to
The mass of the aggregates and the water demand
facilitate "coating" of the mixer drum.
of the mix shall be adjusted to make allowance for
the moisture content of the aggregates. Discharge shall be so carried out that the materials in
the mix will not segregate. The mixer shall be emptied
Aggregates for prescribed-mix concrete as specified in completely before it is recharged.
subclause 04.03 of this clause may be measured
separately by volume. 06.04 Maintenance and cleaning of the mixer
Classes 15, 20, 25 and 30 strength concrete may be If the mixer has stopped running for any period in
volume batched in special circumstances, for instance excess of 30 minutes, it shall be thoroughly cleaned
when the volume of concrete required is small. out, particular attention being given to the removal of
Aggregates for other classes of strength concrete may any build-up of materials in the drum, in the loader and
also be volume batched, subject to the approval of the around the blades or paddles. Worn or bent blades and
Engineer and to the quantity of cement being increased, paddles shall be replaced.
3
at the Contractor's expense, by 25 kg/m of concrete Before any concrete is mixed, the inner surfaces of the
over and above that which would have been required in
mixer shall be cleaned and all hardened concrete shall
the case of batching aggregates by mass. be removed.
Batching boxes for volume batching shall be filled without 06.05 Standby mixer
tamping, ramming or consolidation of any kind (other
than that occurring naturally during the filling process), Where sections are cast where it is important for
and shall be screeded off level with the topmost edges. casting to continue without interruption, a standby mixer
shall be held in readiness to run at 15 minutes notice in
Volumes shall be adjusted by supplementary containers case of a breakdown of the stock mixers.
of the appropriate size being used. Adjustments made
by partly filling the batching boxes to marks on their 07 PLACING AND COMPACTION
inside faces will not be permitted.
07.01 General
Fine aggregate shall be tested for bulking at the
beginning of and halfway through each concreting shift, Concrete shall be transported and placed in a manner
and adjustment shall be made to the batch volume to that will prevent segregation or loss of constituent
give the true volume required. materials and contamination.

Cement may not be measured in gauge boxes, and Concrete shall not be placed in any part of the Works until
volume batching shall be planned for whole bags of the Engineer's approval has been given. If concreting is
cement. not started within 24 hours of approval having been given,
approval shall again be obtained from the Engineer.
06 MIXING Concreting operations shall only be carried out during
Note: normal working hours unless the Engineer has
approved of concreting being carried out outside normal
If ready-mixed concrete is delivered to the Site, the working hours, in which case proper lighting
requirements of SANS 878 shall supersede those set arrangements shall be made and the lights shall be in
out in this section. working order by noon. Workmen shall not be allowed
to work in double shifts, and the Contractor shall
06.01 General
provide a fresh team for night shifts.
The materials for concrete shall be mixed by an
The placing and compaction of concrete shall at all
experienced operator. Unless otherwise approved, mixing
times be under the direct supervision of an experienced
shall be carried out in a mechanical batch mixer of an
concrete supervisor.
approved type which shall be capable of producing a
uniform distribution of ingredients throughout the batch. Once concreting has begun, it shall be carried out in a
continuous process between construction joints. Concrete
06.02 Charging the mixer shall be placed within 15 minutes of the mixing being
The sequence of charging shall be approved by the completed and within one hour of mixing having started.
Engineer and, unless otherwise instructed, the same All excavations and other contact surfaces of an
sequence shall be maintained. absorbent nature, such as timber formwork, shall be kept
damp, but no free water shall be permitted to remain on
The volume of the mixed material per batch shall not these surfaces. The formwork shall be clean on the inside.
exceed the manufacturer's rated capacity of the mixer.
07.02 Placing
06.03 Mixing and discharge
Whenever possible, concrete shall be deposited
The period of mixing shall be measured from the time vertically into its final position. Where chutes are used,
when all the materials are in the drum until discharge is their lengths and slopes shall be such as to not cause
commenced. segregation, and suitable spouts or baffles shall be
The mixing period shall be 90 seconds and may only be provided at the lower end to minimize segregation. The
reduced if, on the grounds of site tests, the Engineer is displacement of concrete by vibration instead of direct
satisfied that the reduced mixing time will produce placing will not be allowed.
concrete with essentially the same strength and When casting structural members of substantial
uniformity as concrete mixed for 90 seconds. However, thickness, care shall be taken to avoid layering of the
the reduced mixing time shall not be less than 50 concrete, and in so far as is possible, the entire
seconds or the manufacturer's recommended mixing thickness shall be placed in one pass.
time, whichever is the greater.

704-4
Fresh concrete shall not be placed against concrete Concrete shall not be subjected to disturbance by
that has been in position for more than one hour unless vibration within 4 to 24 hours of compaction.
a construction joint is formed.
Whenever vibration is applied externally, the design of
The pumping of concrete and the equipment to be used the formwork and positioning of vibrators shall be so as
therefor shall be subject to the written approval of the to ensure efficient compaction and the avoidance of
Engineer. Aluminium pipes shall not be used for this surface blemishes.
purpose.
Special attention shall be given to the compaction of
In plain (unreinforced) concrete with at least a 300 mm concrete in the anchorage zones for post-tensioned
thickness, hard, clean plum stones with a mass of cables and behind the anchor plates, in the proximity of
15 kg - 55 kg may, if approved by the Engineer, be joint formers, waterstops and ducts and in all places
included to replace concrete for up to 20% of the total with high concentrations of reinforcing steel or cables.
volume, provided -
In cases where the placing and compaction of concrete
• such plums have no adhering films or coatings; is difficult, a mix containing smaller-sized aggregate
• no plums have a dimension greater than one-third of may be used, but only with the approval of the Engineer
the smallest dimension of the concrete member, or and after a mix containing such aggregate has been
300 mm, whichever is the smaller; designed and tested.
• each plum is surrounded by at least 75 mm of 07.05 Requirements where sliding formwork is used
concrete; and Where sliding formwork is used, the following additional
• each plum is more or less cubic in shape with no requirements shall apply:
dimension being less than 60% of the longest • The Contractor shall take all the necessary measures
dimension. to ensure the continuity of operations. All the
07.03 Placing under water necessary lighting and standby equipment for mixing,
hoisting, placing and compaction shall be provided and
Normally concrete shall be placed only in the dry. all the materials required for completing each structure
Placing under water shall be allowed only in exceptional shall be ready on the Site before casting commences.
circumstances where, in the opinion of the Engineer,
• Concrete shall be cast in uniform layers along the
dewatering before placing is not feasible. No concrete
shall be placed in flowing water. formwork so that the top surface of the concrete will
not vary by more than 150 mm at any part of the
Underwater concrete shall be placed by means of formwork. In addition, the level of the concrete shall
tremies. Full details of the method proposed for use by never be more than 300 mm below the top of the
the Contractor shall be submitted to the Engineer in sliding panel. The working platform must be kept
advance, for his approval. Placing by skip or pipeline clean, and no concrete which has partially dried out
will also be considered in certain circumstances. may be swept into the formwork.
During concreting by tremie, air and water must be • The concrete shall be compacted during and
excluded from the tremie by keeping the pipe filled with immediately after placing. Care shall be taken not to
concrete at all times. When charging the tremie, a plug damage or disturb previously placed concrete. To
formed of suitable paper or sacking shall first be ensure the proper bonding of successive layers, not
inserted in the top of the pipe. Once concreting has more than one hour shall elapse between placing of
begun, the discharge end of the tremie shall be kept the successive layers. If delays do occur, layer
well below the surface of the concrete. Should this seal thicknesses shall be adjusted rather than allowing
be broken, the tremie shall be lifted and plugged before the time between the placing of the successive
concreting is recommenced. Distribution of concrete by layers to exceed one hour.
lateral movement of the tremie will not be permitted. • Attention is drawn to the other requirements
The concrete mix used for underwater placing shall be specified in subclause 05.02 (e) of section 702.
specially designed and approved for this purpose to
ensure good fluidity, plasticity and cohesion. The sand 08 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS
and cement content required for these mixes will 08.01 General
usually be higher than that of normal mixes.
Concreting shall be done continuously up to the
07.04 Compaction construction joints shown on the Drawings or as
Concrete shall be fully compacted by approved means approved, except that, if concreting has to be interrupted
during and immediately after placing. It shall be because of an emergency (such as the mixing plant
thoroughly worked against the formwork, around breaking down or unsuitable weather occurring), a
construction joint shall be formed at the place of stoppage
reinforcement, tendons, ducts and embedded fittings and
into corners in order to form a solid mass free from voids. in the manner that will least impair the durability,
appearance and proper functioning of the concrete.
The concrete shall be free from honeycombing and
planes of weakness and successive layers of the same Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, the exact
position of horizontal construction joints shall be
lift shall be thoroughly bonded together.
marked on the formwork by means of grout checks in
Unless otherwise agreed upon by the Engineer, concrete order to obtain truly horizontal joints.
shall be compacted with vibrators. Internal vibrators shall
be capable of producing not less than 10 000 cycles per Stub columns, stub walls or kickers on footings shall be
minute and external vibrators not less than 3 000 cycles cast integrally with the footings and not afterwards,
even where a different class of concrete is to be used.
per minute. A sufficient number of standby vibrators shall
be held available in case of breakdowns. 08.02 Preparation of surfaces
Vibration shall be applied by experienced labour, and When the concrete has set and while it is still green, the
over-vibration resulting in segregation, surface water and surface film and all loose material shall be removed,
leakage shall be avoided. Contact with reinforcement without disturbing the aggregate, by means of a water
and formwork shall, in so far as is practicable, be jet assisted by light brushing to expose the aggregate
avoided when internal vibrators are used. and to leave a sound, irregular surface.
704-5
Where this is not possible, the surface film shall be The method adopted for curing shall be subject to the
removed after the concrete has hardened, by Engineer's approval and shall not cause staining,
mechanical means appropriate to the degree of contamination or marring of the surface of the concrete.
hardness of the concrete to expose the aggregate and
The curing period shall be continuous for at least 5 days
leave a sound, irregular surface. The roughened
for concrete made with ordinary cement, at least 2 days
surface shall be washed with clean water to remove all
for that made with rapid-hardening cement, and at least
laitance, dirt and loose particles.
7 days if CEM III cement or a mixture of CEM I cement
08.03 Placing fresh concrete at construction joints and ground, granulated blast-furnace slag is used.
When fresh concrete is placed on the same day as that When the ambient air temperature falls below 5°C,
on which the construction joint has been formed, the these minimum curing periods shall be extended by the
fresh concrete shall be cast directly against the face of period during which the temperature of the concrete
the construction joint. was below 5°C.
When concreting recommences a day or more after the Where sliding formwork is used, the concrete shall be
construction joint has been formed, the following protected against the weather and rapid drying out with
procedure shall be followed: a 4 m long skirt attached to the lower perimeter of the
• The construction joint shall be kept continuously wet formwork and hanging over the working platform. The
for a period of at least 2 hours before concreting skirt shall consist of hessian in summer months but of
starts, but any further applications of water shall canvas or other suitable material in winter. The skirt
cease just before reconcreting so that the surface will shall be weighted at the bottom to prevent it from
be just damp when further concreting is commenced. flapping about in windy conditions.

• Any dirt, excess water or loose particles shall be Where sliding formwork is used, the concrete shall be
removed prior to reconcreting being started. cured by fog spraying to keep it continuously wet for the
periods stated above or until a curing compound is
• For horizontal construction-joint surfaces, a freshly applied. The concrete shall be wetted with a fixed
mixed slurry consisting of sand, cement and water spraybar over the full length of the sliding formwork.
mixed in the same proportions as those used in the The spraybar shall be connected to a suitable high-
concrete, approximately 10 mm thick, shall be pressure water supply. Wetting shall be discontinued
applied to the construction-joint surface immediately when the ambient air temperature drops below 5°C, and
ahead of concreting. The slurry must still be in a care shall be taken to ensure that the water will not
plastic state when applied. For vertical construction- erode the fresh concrete surface.
joint faces, a thin coat of a freshly mixed paste of
neat cement and water, made with as little water as 10 ADVERSE WEATHER CONDITIONS
is practicable, shall be applied to the construction
joint immediately before concreting. 10.01 Cold weather
• Epoxy resins specially designed for bonding old Concrete shall not be placed during falling temperatures
concrete to new concrete shall be used at when the ambient air temperature falls below 7°C or
construction joints where so directed by the during rising temperatures when the ambient air
Engineer. The preparation of the construction-joint temperature is below 3°C. When concrete is placed at
surface and the application of the epoxy resin shall air temperatures below 5°C, the temperature of the
be strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's concrete to be placed shall not be allowed to drop
recommendations and the Engineer's instructions. below 10°C before it is placed.
The actual brand and type of resin used shall be
subject to the Engineer's approval. The temperature of placed concrete shall not be
allowed to fall below 5°C until the concrete has attained
09 CURING AND PROTECTION a strength of at least 5 MPa, and the Contractor shall be
responsible for all the necessary protective measures to
Formwork shall be retained in position for the appropriate ensure this. All concrete that has been damaged by
times given in clause 06 of section 702 and, as soon as frost or by the formation of ice in the concrete shall be
is practicable in the opinion of the Engineer, all exposed removed and replaced by the Contractor at his own
concrete surfaces shall be protected from loss of expense.
moisture by one or more of the following methods:
10.02 Hot weather
• Retaining formwork in place for the full curing period.
When the ambient air temperature exceeds 32°C during
• Ponding the exposed surfaces by means of water, a concreting operation, the Contractor shall take
except where atmospheric temperatures are low, i.e. measures, which have been approved by the Engineer,
less than 5°C. to control the temperature of the concrete ingredients
• Covering with sand, or mats made of a moisture- so that the temperature of the placed concrete will not
retaining material, and keeping the covering exceed 25°C. Such measures will include the spraying
continuously wet. of aggregate stockpiles with water to promote cooling
down by evaporation and, where feasible, the shading
• Continuous spraying of the whole area of the
of stockpiles and the area where the concreting is
exposed surfaces with water (only on surfaces
carried out. Curing shall commence immediately after
where ponding or sand cover is not possible).
the concrete has been placed to prevent excessive loss
• Covering with a waterproof or plastic sheeting firmly of moisture.
anchored at the edges.
10.03 Additional precautions where sliding
• Using an approved curing compound applied in formwork is used
accordance with the manufacturer's instructions,
except that where the surface has to be When sliding operations take place in cold weather, the
subsequently waterproofed, coated or gunited, this water only, or the water and aggregate, shall be heated
method may not be used. to ensure that the concrete temperature will not drop
• Steam curing (precast units) below 10°C until it has attained a strength of 5 MPa.

704-6
The Contractor shall make all the necessary • All precast members that have been chipped,
arrangements to heat the material and protect the cracked, warped or otherwise damaged to such an
concrete against loss of heat. Heated water and extent that the damage will, in the opinion of the
aggregate shall be mixed first and the cement added Engineer, impair the appearance, function or
only at temperatures below 30°C. structural integrity of the members, shall be
rejected or, where so allowed, repaired to the
During cold weather the rate of sliding shall be suitably satisfaction of the Engineer.
decreased to ensure that the concrete leaving the
bottom of the formwork will have sufficient strength. 14 TESTING AND QUALITY CONTROL
11 PIPES AND CONDUITS 14.01 Process control
No pipes and conduits other than those shown on the The Contractor's minimum obligations in terms of
Drawings shall be embedded in the concrete without the clauses 04 and 05 of section 901 shall be the following:
Engineer's approval. Pipes and conduits passing
(a) Testing of aggregates
through concrete walls shall be embedded in the wall
simultaneously with the casting of the wall. The clear Coarse aggregate shall be tested for grading once
3
space between such pipes or between such pipes and for every 100 m delivered on Site and fine
3
any reinforcement shall be at least 40 mm or the aggregate once for every 50 m delivered.
maximum size of the aggregate plus 5 mm, whichever
is the greater. The amount of concrete cover over pipes (b) Testing of 28-day compressive strength
and fittings shall be at least 25 mm. The 28-day cube compressive strength of concrete
shall be controlled by the Contractor at not less
The ends of all ferrules used for bracing formwork shall than the following frequencies:
be neatly finished off to the details shown on the
Drawings. Where no details are given on the Drawings,
ferrules shall be cut back and the holes filled in with Volume of lot Minimum No of tests per lot
mortar and finished off flush with the concrete surface. 3
0 - 75 m 3
12 APPLIED LOADING 3
75 - 150 m 4
No load shall be applied to any part of a structure until 3
the specified curing period has expired, and any loading over 150 m 5
applied thereafter shall only be allowed after approval
by the Engineer. The Engineer's decision will be based
on the type of load to be applied, the age of the Notes:
concrete, the magnitude of stress induced and the • A test result shall be the average test value for
propping of the structure. three cubes prepared from the same batch of
concrete.
No structure shall be opened to traffic until test cubes
made of the concrete in all parts thereof have attained • Where the Engineer of his own accord runs a full
the specified minimum 28-day strength. programme of routine tests for 28-day
compressive strength he may, at his sole
13 PRECAST CONCRETE discretion, relieve the Contractor of his obligation
to run his own tests, but in such case any reliance
This clause applies to all reinforced and prestressed placed by the Contractor on the Engineer's tests
concrete members other than precast concrete piles, shall be entirely at the Contractor's risk and no
culverts and pipes in so far as they are dealt with claims resulting from such reliance placed on tests
separately elsewhere in these Specifications. by the Engineer, which may subsequently prove to
All precast members shall be manufactured in have been incorrect, will be considered.
accordance with the requirements specified for cast in (c) Accelerated cube-compressive-strength tests
situ members in so far as these requirements are
relevant. In addition, the following shall apply: In the case of major structures, the Contractor is
advised to carry out regular accelerated
• The Contractor shall take all the necessary safety compressive-strength tests in order to predict the
measures and precautions during the handling and 28-day compressive strength of concrete. The
erection of precast members and shall ensure the methods of testing and predicting 28-day strengths
stability of members as positioned prior to casting shall be as determined in consultation with the
in. Engineer. Whenever accelerated tests indicate
• Where concrete members are precast off Site, the that the 28-day strengths will not be obtained, the
manufacturer shall keep and make available to the Contractor shall immediately effect such changes
Engineer full records of all the concrete mixes and in materials and mix proportions as may be
strength tests pertaining to the members cast. The necessary to ensure future compliance.
Contractor shall notify the Engineer in advance of Accelerated tests shall be additional to the 28-day
the casting dates to arrange for the inspection and routine tests.
testing of precast members. When specified in the Project Specifications, the
• For the purpose of identification, all members shall use of accelerated tests shall be obligatory.
be marked with paint in neat lettering with the (d) Control charts
number of the member shown on the Drawings or
ordered by the Engineer and an identification The Contractor shall institute a system of control
number relating to the manufacturing records. charts depicting test results of all 28-day concrete
Letters, etc shall be so positioned that they will not strengths and, where applicable, accelerated
be visible when the member is placed in its final compressive strengths,
position in the completed structure.

704-7
(e) Record keeping The lot shall be deemed to have met the
requirements for characteristic strength if the
The Contractor shall maintain written records that
"estimated potential strength" of the cores,
indicate the following:
determined as specified in subclause 07.03 of
• The date on which each section was section 903, meets the requirements specified in
concreted, the class of concrete, the time taken clause 05 of section 902 for 28-day cube-
for placing, and the position of the section in compressive-strength tests.
the Works.
(d) Testing ordered by the Engineer
• Daily maximum and minimum temperatures.
Where routine testing of concrete cubes is not
• Nature of samples and dates on which they carried out on the Site by the Engineer, he may
were taken, including identification marks. order the Contractor to have the concrete cubes that
• Results of tests on samples taken and the have been made by the Engineer tested at an
description of each concrete section approved testing laboratory, in which case payment
represented by samples. for such tests shall be made in accordance with the
provisions of section 903.
These records shall be kept in a form agreed upon by
the Engineer, a copy of which shall be supplied to the 15 NO-FINES CONCRETE
Engineer as soon as results become available.
15.01 Materials
14.02 Quality control by the Engineer
Cement, aggregate and water shall comply with the
(a) Criteria for compliance with requirements requirements of clause 02 of this section.
Routine inspection and quality control will be
Each size of aggregate shall be a single-sized
carried out by the Engineer as specified in
aggregate graded in accordance with SANS 1083.
section 901. The criteria for compliance with the
requirements specified for 28-day characteristic 15.02 Classes of no-fines concrete
strength shall be as given in clause 05 of
section 902. No-fines concrete shall be classified by the prefix NF
and the size of the aggregate to be used. Class NF 19
(b) Procedure in the event of failure to comply with the means a no-fines concrete with a 19 mm nominal size
requirements aggregate.
Any lot represented by test cubes which fails to The volume of aggregate per 50 kg of cement for each
meet the criteria specified for the characteristic class of no-fines concrete shall be as depicted in
strength - table 704/4.
• shall be rejected, Table 704/4
or VOLUME OF AGGREGATE
• may be conditionally accepted at reduced
payment, subject to the provisions of clause 07 Class Aggregate per 50 kg cement
of section 902, 3
NF 38 0,33 m
or
NF 19 0,33 m3
• the Contractor may apply for resubmission of the
lot on the basis of cores drilled from the concrete NF 13 0,27 m3
section in question. The methods of taking and
testing cores and evaluating the test results shall 15.03 Batching and mixing
be as described in subclause 07.03 of
section 903. The procedure for determining Cement shall be measured by mass or full bags of
compliance of test results shall be as specified 50 kg each and aggregate shall be measured by volume
hereafter in subclause 14.02 (c). The cost of in approved measuring boxes or barrows.
drilling and testing the cores shall be for the The quantity of water added shall be just sufficient to
Contractor's account, regardless of the outcome form a smooth grout that will adhere to and completely
of the tests on the cores. coat each and every particle of aggregate and to be just
Before cores are taken, the members concerned wet enough to ensure that, at points of contact of the
shall be cured and allowed to age for at least aggregate, the grout will run together to form a small fillet
28 days but for not more than 56 days. to bond the aggregate together. The mix shall contain no
more than 20 litre of water per 50 kg of cement.
Where the Engineer so directs, full-scale load tests
Mixing shall be carried out in an approved batch-type
shall be carried out in accordance with SANS 10160 to
mechanical mixer, but small quantities may be hand-
determine whether a specific structure or member can
mixed.
be accepted. The cost of such tests shall be for the
Contractor's account, regardless of the outcome of the 15.04 Placing
tests. In all cases where concrete has been produced
that fails to meet the strength requirements, the No-fines concrete shall be placed in accordance with
Contractor shall immediately take the necessary the procedure agreed upon by the Engineer. It shall be
remedial action by changing the mix proportions to placed in its final position within 30 minutes of mixing.
obtain the required strength. The no-fines concrete shall be worked sufficiently to
(c) The strength requirements for concrete cores ensure that it completely fills the space to be concreted
and that adjacent aggregate particles are in contact with
The actual number of cores to be taken from a one another. Excessive tamping or ramming shall be
resubmitted lot shall depend on the size of the lot avoided and under no circumstances may the no-fines
and the nature of the structure and will be concrete be vibrated.
determined by the Engineer.

704-8
15.05 Protection The tendered rate for each precast member shall
include full compensation for all work, costs and
All no-fines concrete shall be protected from the equipment necessary for transporting, erecting and
elements and loss of moisture. Protection against loss placing the precast concrete members into position.
of moisture shall be accomplished in one or more of the
following ways: Item Unit
• Retaining formwork in place. 704.04 Epoxy bonding of new
concrete surfaces to old square metre (m2)
• Covering exposed surfaces with sacking or other
approved material kept continuously wet. The unit of measurement shall be the square metre of
• Covering exposed surfaces with plastic sheeting. new concrete surface bonded to the old with an
approved epoxy bonding agent on the instructions of
No-fines concrete placed during cold weather shall be the Engineer in the manner specified in the Drawings or
adequately protected against frost for at least 3 days. the Project Specifications.
Only the surfaces of mandatory construction joints
16 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT bonded in this manner shall be measured for payment.
Item Unit The tendered rate shall include full compensation for
the bonding of old and new concrete with an approved
704.01 Cast in situ concrete epoxy resin, all complete as specified.
704.01.01 (Class of concrete and portion Item Unit
of structure or use
704.05 Cast in situ no-fines concrete
indicated) cubic metre (m 3)
704.05.01 (Class of no-fines concrete
704.01.02 Etc for other classes of
and portion of structure or
concrete and other uses or
use indicated) cubic metre (m3)
portions of the structure
704.05.02 Etc for other classes of no-
The unit of measurement for cast in situ concrete shall be fines concrete and other
the cubic metre of concrete in place. Quantities shall be portions of structures or uses
calculated from the dimensions shown on the Drawings or
authorized by the Engineer. No deduction in volume The unit of measurement for cast in situ no-fines
measured for payment shall be made for the volume of concrete shall be the cubic metre of no-fines concrete in
any reinforcing steel, inserts and pipes or conduits, with place. Quantities shall be calculated from the dimensions
diameters of less than 150 mm embedded in the concrete. shown on the Drawings or authorized by the Engineer.
The tendered rates shall include full compensation for The tendered rates shall include full compensation for
procuring, furnishing and storing the materials, procuring, furnishing and storing the materials, providing
providing all plant, mixing, transporting, placing and all plant, mixing, transporting, placing and working the
compacting the concrete, forming the inserts, concrete and for curing and protecting the concrete.
construction joints (except mandatory construction
joints), and contraction joints, curing and protecting the Item Unit
concrete, repairing defective surfaces, and finishing the 704.06 Precast no-fines concrete units
concrete surfaces as specified. Payment shall
distinguish between the different classes of concrete. 704.06.01 (Indicate class of no-fines
concrete and describe unit with
Item Unit reference to Drawing) number (No)
704.02 Manufacture of precast concrete members
(Indicate class of concrete and 704.06.02 Etc for other classes of no-fines
describe member with reference concrete and units of other types
to Drawing) number (No) and sizes

The unit of measurement shall be the number of The unit of measurement shall be the number of
complete members or elements of each type and size, complete units of each size and type in position in the
in position in the Works. Works.

The tendered rate for each precast member shall The tendered rate for each precast no-fines concrete
include full compensation for all concrete work, all unit shall include full compensation for providing all
formwork, all steel reinforcement and all the materials, labour, plant and formwork required for the
prestressing required to manufacture the member manufacturing of the unit, complete as shown on the
complete, excluding only pre- stressing in connection Drawings, and for transporting and placing the unit in
with in-situ concrete cast subsequent to the placing of position.
the precast members, for which prestressing separate
payment is provided elsewhere in the Schedule of Item Unit
Quantities. 704.07 Design of concrete mixes
Item Unit by a specialist organization
appointed by the Engineer provisional sum
704.03 Transportation and erection of
precast concrete members The provisional sum allowed will be used for
(Description and mass to be given) number (No) reimbursing the Contractor for the actual invoiced
charges paid by him to specialist organizations
The unit of measurement shall be the number of precast appointed by the Engineer for the design of concrete
concrete members of each type and size placed into mixes. No other charges will be paid for.
position.

704-9
SERIES 7 : STRUCTURES (i) Pre-tensioning
A method of prestressing where the tendon is
SECTION 705 : PRESTRESSING OF CONCRETE
tensioned before the concrete has been cast.
CONTENTS (j) Post-tensioning
A method of prestressing where the tendon is
01 SCOPE
tensioned after the concrete has attained its
02 DEFINITIONS
specified strength.
03 MATERIALS
04 EQUIPMENT (k) Pull-in
05 TECHNICAL DATA
06 PRESTRESSING SYSTEMS The elastic shortening of the tendon between
07 DRAWINGS PREPARED BY THE anchors caused by relative movement between the
CONTRACTOR anchorage or coupler components on account of
08 PRECAST WORK seating and gripping action at transfer.
09 PRE-TENSIONING (I) Release
10 POST-TENSIONING
11 LOSS OF PRESTRESS The specified elastic shortening of the external
12 CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES tendon between the anchor and the gripping
13 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT position at the anchorage that shall be achieved at
transfer.
01 SCOPE
(m) Sheath
This section covers the materials, equipment and work The tube or casing which encloses the tendon and
required for prestressing structural concrete members. which temporarily or permanently allows a relative
movement between the tendon and the
02 DEFINITIONS surrounding concrete.
The following definitions and terms shall apply to this (n) Tendon
section:
The prestressing steel which consists of one or
(a) Anchorage more bars, wires or strands, all of which are
The device comprising all the components and tensioned to impart prestress to a concrete
materials required to retain the force in a member.
tensioned tendon and to transmit this force to the (o) Tensioning
concrete of the structure.
The action of inducing and regulating the force in a
(b) Anchorage reinforcement tendon by means of tensioning and measuring
The spiral and other reinforcement which form part equipment.
of the anchorage and which are required to (p) Transfer
strengthen the anchorage and/or to assist in
transmitting the tendon force to the concrete. In the case of post-tensioning, the action of
transferring the force from the tensioning
(c) Bursting reinforcement equipment (jack) to the anchorage.
The reinforcing steel required in and adjacent to In the case of pre-tensioning, the action of
the anchorage zones to resist the tensile stresses transferring the force in the tensioned tendon(s) to
induced in the concrete by the anchorage(s). the concrete.
(d) Cable
03 MATERIALS
The tendon together with the anchorage,
sheathing and all fittings. 03.01 General

(e) Characteristic strength All materials and prestressing systems used in the
prestressing of structural concrete members shall be
The manufacturer's guaranteed tensile strength of subject to the approval of the Engineer.
prestressing steel; no more than 5 per cent of the
test results in a statistical sample shall fall below 03.02 Prestressing steel
this strength.
(a) General
(f) Duct
The type of prestressing steel shall be as
The void formed to house the tendon(s), which designated in the Project Specifications and on the
may be formed by coring, sheaths or extractable Drawings.
cores.
The Contractor shall keep proper records of all
(g) Prestress material analyses and test certificates of the
The stress induced in concrete by tensioned batches of prestressing steel used in the Works.
tendons, Where required by the Engineer, the Contractor
shall produce certificates from recognized testing
(h) Prestressed concrete authorities certifying compliance of the
Structural concrete in which effective internal prestressing steel with the relevant standard
stresses are induced by means of tensioned specifications listed in subclauses 03.02 (b), (c)
tendons. and (d) of this section.

705-1
 Where prestressing steel is available in weld-free (f) Galvanizing
lengths (production lengths) and lengths Galvanized prestressing steel shall not be used
containing welds (standard lengths), the batches unless specified.
delivered on the Site shall be clearly labelled for
identification. (g) Welds
After manufacture, the prestressing steel shall not Prestressing steel used in structural prestressed
under any circumstances be subjected to heat concrete shall be free from welds. Where the steel is
treatment other than that provided for in these supplied in standard lengths, the welds shall be cut
Specifications. out and delivered to the Engineer.
(b) Bars 03.03 Anchorages and couplers
Cold-worked high-tensile alloy steel bars for Anchorages and couplers for use in prestressed
prestressed concrete shall comply at least with the concrete shall comply with the requirements of BS 4447
requirements of BS 4486. and shall be of a proven and approved type, and
The type of prestressing steel shall be indicated in constructed from durable material completely free from
accordance with the requirements of clause 4.2 of imperfections, and they shall not damage, distort or kink
BS 4486, e.g. BS 4486-RR-32-1230 for 32 mm the prestressing steel in a manner that would result in
diameter double-ridged bar with a characteristic reducing the ultimate tensile-strength. They shall,
strength of 1 230 MPa. without failure and/or excessive deformation or
relaxation of the force in the tendons, resist the full
(c) Wires and seven-wire steel strand ultimate tensile strength of the tendons. The
Steel wire and seven-wire steel strand for characteristic value for anchorages and couplers,
determined in accordance with BS 4447, shall not be
prestressed concrete shall comply at least with the
requirements of BS 5896. less than 90%.

The type of prestressing steel shall be indicated in The anchorages shall effectively distribute the force in
accordance with the requirements of clause s 14 the tendon to the structural member and the resulting
and 20 of BS 5896 for wire and strands local stresses and strains in the member shall be so
respectively, e.g.: limited as to prevent damage. Unless otherwise
approved, all anchorages and couplers shall be
(i) BS 5896/2 wire 1770-7-PE-relax 1 for a 7 mm provided with anchorage reinforcement.
diameter plain wire of class 1 relaxation with a
characteristic strength of 1 770 MPa; and Wedges and the insides of barrels or cones shall be
clean to allow the free movement and seating of the
(ii) BS 5896/3 superstrand 1860-12,9-relax 2 for a wedges inside the taper.
12,9 mm diameter superstrand of class 2
relaxation with a characteristic strength of The threads of bars, nuts, anchorages and couplers shall
1 860 MPa. be suitably protected against damage and corrosion. The
protection shall be removed at the last moment and the
(d) Straightness threads shall be properly lubricated before use.
Prestressing bars delivered to the Site shall be
03.04 Sheaths
straight. Only small adjustments for straightness
may be made, which shall be done by hand on the Sheaths shall be of grout-tight construction and of such
Site at temperatures above 5°C and under the material and configuration as will allow the transference
supervision of the Engineer. Where heating is of bond forces from the grout to the surrounding
required, it shall be by means of steam or hot concrete. The properties of the sheath material shall be
water. Bars bent in the threaded portion shall be such that no corrosion attack of the prestressing steel
rejected. will be induced. The sheath shall be sufficiently flexible
to accept the required curvature without kinking, and
Prestressing wire and strand shall be supplied in
shall be strong enough to retain its cross-section and
coils of sufficiently large diameters to ensure that
alignment and to resist damage caused by handling,
the wire and strand will reel-off straight.
transportation, tying and contact with vibrators during
(e) Surface condition concreting. Unless otherwise approved by the Engineer,
the thickness of metal of steel sheaths shall not be less
Prestressing steel shall be clean and free from than 0,4 mm.
faults and defects and harmful films and matter that
may impair its adhesion to the grout or concrete. Metal sheathing shall be delivered to the Site suitably
protected against damage and corrosion. At the time of
The depth of imperfections or pits on the surface incorporation in the structural member, the sheathing
of prestressing steel shall not exceed 0,1 mm for shall be free from loose mill scale, loose rust, lubricants
wire with diameters of up to and including 8 mm, and harmful matter.
or 0,2 mm for bars or wire with diameters
exceeding 8 mm. Galvanized sheathing shall not be used unless specified.
Tendons may be cleaned by wire brushing or by Unless otherwise specified, the internal diameter of the
being passed through a pressure box which sheath shall be at least 10 mm greater than the
contains carborundum powder. Solvent solutions diameter of the tendon. For vertical tendons, and where
shall not be used for cleaning without the approval tendons are to be drawn into cast-in sheaths, the duct
of the Engineer. area shall be at least three times the cross-sectional
area of the tendon.
Prestressing steel shall be delivered to the Site
suitably protected against damage and corrosion. 03.05 Cable supports
Such protection or the use of a corrosion inhibitor,
Supports of reinforcing steel or structural steel suitably
where allowed by the Engineer, shall not have any
braced to prevent buckling under load shall be used to
harmful effects on the steel or concrete or impair
support the cables.
the bond.

705-2
The cable saddles shall be rigid and secured in position 03.08 Protection agents for unbonded tendons
by welding or by equivalent mechanical means to resist
The material used for the permanent protection of
gravitational, vibratory and buoyancy forces.
unbonded tendons shall have the following properties:
Normal web reinforcement shall not be used to support
• It shall remain free from cracks and shall not
cables.
become brittle or fluid within the temperature range
Saddles for external cables shall be of special design of -20°C to 70 °C.
and material to ensure low friction and to prevent the • It shall be chemically stable for the life of the structure.
tendon or parts thereof from grooving the surface. The
saddle plates shall be curved to the required radius to • It shall be non-reactive with the surrounding
prevent the tendon or part thereof from bearing on the materials, i.e. concrete, tendons, wrapping or
end of the plate, and shall incorporate features to sheathing.
ensure the separate seating of individual bars, wires • It shall be non-corrosive or corrosion-inhibiting.
and strands.
• It shall be impervious to moisture.
03.06 Tendon spacers • It shall be sufficiently tough to withstand the
Tendon spacers used inside the ducts to separate abrasion caused when a tendon, precoated with the
individual bars, wires or strands of the tendon shall be material, is drawn into the sheath.
of a proven and approved type and manufactured from • It shall have no appreciable shrinkage or excessive
material that will not induce corrosion of the volume increase.
prestressing steel.
• It shall have a suitable viscosity at ambient
03.07 Grout temperature or require only moderate preheating to
permit injection.
(a) Materials
In addition to the requirements of subclause 02.03 03.09 Testing
of section 704, water shall not contain more than Prestressing steel, anchorages, couplers and grout
500 mg of Cl-ions per litre of water. shall be tested in accordance with the requirements of
Only CEM I Class 32,5N cement which is less subclause 10.02 of section 903. Testing shall be carried
out at the frequencies directed by the Engineer.
than one month old shall be used. The
o
temperature of the cement shall be less than 40 C.
04 EQUIPMENT
Fine aggregate shall consist of siliceous granules,
finely ground limestones, trass or very fine sand. 04.01 General
The aggregate used shall pass through a 0,600 mm All equipment used shall be in a good working order
sieve. The use of fine aggregate shall be subject to and shall be properly maintained.
the approval of the Engineer and shall be restricted
to grout for ducts with diameters larger than 04.02 Tensioning and measuring equipment
150 mm. The aggregate content in the grout shall
Tensioning and measuring equipment shall be able to
not exceed 30% of the mass of the cement.
establish the tendon force to an accuracy of ± 2%
The use of admixtures shall be subject to the during any stage of the tensioning operation.
written approval of the Engineer and will only be
Unless otherwise authorized by the Engineer,
considered after tests have shown that their use
tensioning equipment shall be power driven and shall
improves the properties of the grout, e.g. by
be able to apply a controlled total force gradually
increasing workability, reducing bleeding or
without inducing dangerous secondary stresses in the
entraining air. Admixtures shall be free from any
tendon, anchorage or concrete.
product liable to damage the steel or the grout
itself, such as halides, nitrates, sulphides, The force in the tendon during tensioning shall be
sulphates, etc. The amount of admixture to be measured by direct-reading load cell(s) (dynamometer) or
used shall be in accordance with the shall be obtained direct from pressure gauges fitted in the
manufacturer's instructions. hydraulic system to determine the pressure in the jacks.
(b) Properties of the grout Pressure gauges shall be concentric scale gauges
which comply with the requirements of SANS 1062. The
The mixed grout shall have the following properties: gauges shall not be less than 150 mm in diameter and
(i) The Cl-ions content shall not exceed shall be used within the range of 50 - 90% of their full
750 mg/litre. capacity at maximum service pressures.
(ii) The viscosity of the grout for horizontal cables When pressure gauges which do not use glycerine are
shall be 500 cP - 2 500 cP and that for vertical used, a snubber or similar device shall be fitted to
cables 400 cP - 1 500 cP. Twenty minutes after protect the gauge against a sudden pressure release.
mixing the viscosity shall not exceed 2 500 cP Provision shall also be made for T-connections to which
and 1 500 cP for horizontal and vertical cables supplementary control gauges can be attached when
respectively. required.
(iii) Three hours after mixing, bleeding at 20oC Only self-sealing connections shall be used in the
shall not exceed 2% by volume, and the hydraulic circuit. Where the pressure-input pipe is
maximum bleeding shall not exceed 4%. In connected to the jack, a pipe rupture valve shall be
addition, the separated (bleed) water must be installed in the circuit.
reabsorbed after 24 hours.
Tensioning equipment shall be calibrated before the
(iv) The compressive strength of 100 mm cubes tensioning operation and thereafter at frequent
made from the grout and cured in a moist intervals, as directed by the Engineer, against a master
atmosphere for the first 24 hours and thereafter gauge or proving ring, and the Engineer shall be
in water at 20°C, shall exceed 20 MPa after furnished with a calibration chart. The load-measuring
7 days. devices shall be calibrated to an accuracy of ± 2%.

705-3
Tendon extension shall be measured to an accuracy of (d) Tensioning force
± 2% or ± 2 mm, whichever is the more accurate, and
pull-in and release shall be measured to an accuracy of The maximum tensioning force and the effective
± 2 mm. force at the live anchorage(s), after transfer, as
well as the corresponding stress level in the
04.03 Grouting equipment prestressing steel, for each tendon or group of
tendons. The forces will be given in MN units, and
(a) Mixer the stress levels will be expressed as a
percentage of the characteristic strength.
Only mechanically operated mixers of a type
capable of producing high local turbulences while (e) Extension
imparting only a slow motion to the body of the
grout shall be used. The extension per tendon or group of tendons
under the maximum tensioning force, together with
The mixer shall be equipped with a screen with the modulus of elasticity (E) on which it has been
openings not exceeding 1 mm and shall be based, as well as the release to be attained at
capable of consistently producing grout with a each live anchorage and the pull-in allowed for.
colloidal consistency.
(f) Prestressing losses in tendons
(b) Agitator The losses allowed in the design, which may be
Where the capacity of the mixer is insufficient to fill caused as listed below, will be given as follows:
the duct completely with grout, an agitator shall be
(i) Friction loss
used.
The formula used to determine the tendon/duct
Mechanical agitators only shall be used, which are
friction loss together with the values adopted
capable of maintaining the colloidal condition of
for the friction coefficient (micron) caused by
the grout fill during the storing and injection
curvature, and the wobble factor (k) caused by
processes. The grout shall be delivered at the
the unintentional variation from the specified
structure from the agitator, and the system shall
alignment.
make provision for recirculating the grout from the
pump back to the agitator.
(ii) Elastic deformation of concrete
(c) Injection equipment The elastic factor, which, when multiplied by
The pump shall be of the positive displacement the compressive stress in the concrete
type (piston, screw or similar type), capable of adjacent to the tendon, will give the loss
exerting a constant pressure of at least 10 bars caused by the deformation of the concrete,
and shall incorporate a safety device to prevent
the build-up of pressure above 20 bars. The pump (iii) Creep of concrete
shall be fitted with a pressure gauge and a valve The creep factor which, when multiplied by the
that can be locked off without loss of pressure in compressive stress in the concrete adjacent to
the cable. the tendon will give the loss caused by the
The pump shall be capable of delivering grout in creep of the concrete.
such a way that the speed of the grout in the cable
(iv) Shrinkage of concrete
is between 6 m/min and 12 m/min.
The stress loss caused by shrinkage of the
All connections in the pipes and between the pipe
concrete.
and the cable shall be airtight. Only threaded,
bayonet or similar type connectors shall be used. (v) Relaxation of prestressing steel

05 TECHNICAL DATA The stress loss in MPa at a stress level of 70%

of the characteristic strength of the
The following technical data for pre-tensioned and post- prestressing steel caused by relaxation of the
tensioned structural members, required on the Contract, prestressing steel.
will be supplied on the Drawings:
(g) Anchorages
(a) Tendon alignment The positions where loop or fan-type dead-end
A diagrammatic layout showing the alignment of anchorages may be used.
each tendon or group of tendons in both horizontal
and vertical planes, together with the horizontal (h) Bursting reinforcement
and vertical coordinates and curve equations of The bursting reinforcement for the prestressing
the centroid of the tendon(s), as may be relevant. system on which the design is based.

(b) Tendon system (i) Precamber

The tendon system on which the design is based. The precamber at intervals not exceeding
0,25 times the span length.
(c) Tensioning the tendons (j) Compressive strength of the concrete during
Full particulars regarding the partial tensioning of transfer.
the tendons, the stage during which the tendons The compressive strength to be attained by the
shall be tensioned, and the sequence of tensioning concrete in the relevant member before transfer
to be followed. may be effected.

705-4
06 PRESTRESSING SYSTEMS In his tendered rates the Contractor shall make full
allowance for all costs in connection with the furnishing
The use of all prestressing systems shall be subject to of information, the making of calculations, and the
the written approval of the Engineer. Tenderers are preparation and submission of drawings.
advised to obtain approval for the prestressing system
they intend to use prior to submitting their Tenders. Alternative designs shall comply with clause 05 of
section 001 and the relevant provisions of this section.
Within one month of the award of the Tender or within a
period agreed on by the Engineer, the Contractor shall
08 PRECAST WORK
submit full details of the prestressing system(s),
materials and equipment he intends to use, as well as 08.01 Casting yard on the Site
of the methods he proposes to adopt for the
prestressing and related operations. Subject to the approval of the Engineer, precast work
may be done at any location selected by the Contractor.
The Engineer may, at his discretion, call for further
information in the form of detailed drawings, proof of Before the proposed casting yard is established, the
successful previous use, performance certificates from Contractor shall submit plans to the Engineer which
an approved independent testing authority and demarcate the site and detail the layout of the yard,
calculations substantiating the adequacy of the system. together with a flow diagram of the construction stages
The Contractor shall furnish such information within and storage.
2 weeks of being called upon to do so, or within a
period agreed on by the Engineer. If, after investigating 08.02 Manufacture off the Site
all the information, the Engineer is not satisfied that the The Contractor shall notify the Engineer in advance of
structural member can be prestressed satisfactorily with the date when tensioning of tendons, the casting of
the prestressing system offered by the Contractor, the members, and transfer, as may be relevant, will be
Engineer reserves the right to order the Contractor to undertaken.
use any system which is suited to the work and which is
readily available to the Contractor. Within 7 days of transfer, the Contractor shall furnish
the Engineer with a certificate which gives the tendon
Only minor alterations to the concrete dimensions force(s) and extension(s) attained, the records of the
shown on the Drawings will be considered with a view cube compressive strength, and the age of the concrete
to accommodating the prestressing system finally at transfer.
selected. Major alterations occasioned by the
prestressing system offered by the Contractor which is Test results relating to all aspects of the work shall be
at variance with the tendon system specified in sent to the Engineer as soon as they become available.
subclause 05 (b) of this section, shall be treated as
"alternative offers" and shall be dealt with as specified Where the Engineer requires tests to be carried out on
in clause 05 of section 001. completed members, no member to which the tests
relate shall be dispatched to the Site until the tests have
07 DRAWINGS PREPARED BY THE CONTRACTOR been satisfactorily completed and the members have
been accepted by the Engineer.
All drawings prepared by the Contractor and submitted
to the Engineer for consideration shall comply with the 08.03 Manufacture
requirements of the Engineer. Before work is commenced with, details of the
At least 3 months before he intends to commence with manufacture and phasing of the work shall be submitted
the prestressing work, or within a period agreed on by to the Engineer for approval. After approval, no
the Engineer, the Contractor shall furnish the Engineer changes shall be made to the methods or systems
with drawings detailing the layout and alignment for the without authorization by the Engineer.
individual tendons, the cable supports, modification to The Contractor shall ensure that the specified
the bursting and other reinforcement, anchorage precamber has been incorporated in the formwork. The
recesses, tensioning sequence, tensioning loads and magnitude of precamber shown on the Drawings shall
extensions, as well as requirements for the control of be subject to variation depending on the Contractor's
the tensioning operations. construction programme, and the Contractor shall,
The Contractor will be provided with the necessary before manufacture, ascertain from the Engineer in
standard transparent polyester drawing sheets for the writing, any increase or decrease in precamber. This
preparation of his drawings. These drawings shall be of procedure shall also apply to the cases where no
the same standard as the Contract Drawings. precamber has been specified.

Should the technical data of the prestressing system Lifting and supporting the precast members shall be
finally selected be at variance with the specified made only at the points marked and provided therefor
information, it shall be shown on the drawings prepared on the members.
by the Contractor. Each tendon shall be numbered Precast members which have not been fully tensioned,
separately for identification. or which have not been fully tensioned for the relevant
When required, the Contractor shall submit calculations stage of erection, or which have ungrouted tensioned
in respect of the variation of the tendon force along the tendons, shall not be handled without authorization by
length of the tendon, the expected extension, and the the Engineer.
bursting forces. When members with ungrouted tensioned tendons are
After the drawings and calculations prepared by the handled, any possible slip of the tendon at the
Contractor have been approved by the Engineer, the anchorage shall be guarded against.
forces, stresses and extensions shown thereon shall not Prestressed precast concrete members shall also
be departed from without authorization by the Engineer. comply with the requirements of clause 13 of
No work shall be commenced on the prestressing work section 704.
before the relevant drawings have been accepted and
signed by the Engineer.

705-5
09 PRE-TENSIONING Suitable protection shall be provided to the threaded
ends of bars.
During the period between tensioning and transfer, the
force in the tendon shall be fully maintained by some After fabrication, the cable ends shall be covered with
positive means. At transfer, detensioning shall take protective wrapping to prevent the ingress of moisture
place slowly to minimize any shock that might adversely into the duct.
affect the transmission length of the tendon.
When the tendon is to be left untensioned for a
In the long-line method of pre-tensioning, sufficient prolonged period after installation, precautions shall be
locator plates shall be distributed throughout the length taken to protect the tendon against corrosion. Corrosion
of the bed to ensure that the straight tendons are inhibitors, oils or similar materials used as lubrication or
maintained in their proper position during concreting. to provide temporary protection shall be completely
Where a number of units are manufactured in line, they removable before permanent protection is effected.
shall be free to slide in the direction of their length to
permit transfer of the tendon force to the concrete along 10.02 Fabrication
the whole line. All the cutting of prestressing steel shall be performed
In the individual mould system, the moulds shall be with a high-speed abrasive cutting wheel or by a
sufficiently rigid to provide the reaction to the tendon method approved by the Engineer. Flame cutting will
force without distortion. not be permitted.

Wherever possible, the mechanisms for holding down Care shall be taken to prevent the prestressing steel or
or holding up deflected tendons shall ensure that the anchorages from coming into contact with splashes
part in contact with the tendon is free to move in the line from flame-cutting or welding processes in the vicinity.
of the tendon to eliminate friction losses. If, however, a Wherever possible, all bars, wires or strands tensioned
system is used that develops a frictional force, this in one operation shall be taken from the same parcel of
force shall be determined by test and due allowance prestressing steel. The tendon or cable shall be labelled
shall be made therefor. to show the tendon or cable number and to identify the
For single tendons, the deflector in contact with the parcel from which the steel has been taken.
tendon shall have a radius of not less than 5 times the Where bars, wires or strands in a tendon are not
tendon diameter for wire or 10 times the tendon tensioned simultaneously, tendon spacers shall be used
diameter for a strand, and the total angle of deflection in accordance with the recommendations for the
shall not exceed 15°. prestressing system or, in the absence thereof, as
Transfer of the tendon force to the concrete shall be directed by the Engineer.
effected in conjunction with the release of hold-down and Cables shall be fitted at both ends with pipes with
hold-up forces as may be approved by the Engineer. diameters of at least 10 mm for the injection of grout or
Transfer shall not be effected until cube-compressive- protection agents. The ends of the injection pipes shall
strength tests on the concrete show that the concrete of be fitted with a clamp, valve or device capable of
the particular member has attained a compressive withstanding a pressure of at least 15 bars without loss
strength of at least 2,5 times the maximum working of grout or protection agent.
compressive stress in the concrete or a compressive Vent pipes with a diameter of at least 25 mm shall be
strength of 35 MPa, whichever is the greater. The provided in the ducts at every high point, change of
transmission length is affected by the concrete strength, sheath cross-section, and at such intermediate positions
and the necessary modification for the concrete strength as may be required by the Engineer for the satisfactory
at transfer shall be made in conjunction with the Engineer. grouting/protection of long tendons. The vent pipes shall
The tendons shall be cut off flush with the end of the extend to at least 750 mm above the concrete and shall
member and the exposed ends covered with a heavy comply with the requirements for injection pipes.
coat of bituminous compound or epoxy resin, as Connections to and joints in sheaths shall be made
specified in the Project Specifications or as approved by grout-tight either by special fittings or by taping. With
the Engineer. bonded systems the length of taping shall not exceed
six sheath diameters. Where oversleeves are used,
10 POST-TENSIONING equal overlaps shall be provided over each length of
sheathing. Joints in adjacent sheaths shall be
10.01 Storage, handling and protection
staggered at least 300 mm apart.
During storage, transit and construction, and after
10.03 Installation
installation, the sheaths, prestressing steel, anchorages
and couplers shall be protected against corrosion, The installation of tendons shall not commence until the
damage or permanent deformation. The manner and requirements of clause 07 of this section have been
extent of protection required will depend on the complied with.
environmental conditions and the length of time before
permanent corrosion protection is applied, and shall be The cable, sheath or extractable core shall be accurately
approved by the Engineer. Under severe corrosive installed to the specified alignment and securely held in
conditions the materials shall be stored in weather-proof position both vertically and horizontally at intervals
sheds. All materials shall be stored clear of the ground appropriate to its rigidity so that it will not be displaced
and while in storage shall not be exposed to the during concreting either by weight of the concrete or
weather. buoyancy. The spacing of the cable supports shall
furthermore ensure that the tendon can be installed to a
When prestressing steel has been stored on the Site for smooth alignment without kinks and within the tolerance
a prolonged period and there is evidence of specified in subclause 03.06 of section 707. A spacing of
deterioration of the steel, the Engineer may call on the 1,0 m - 1,5 m should generally not be exceeded.
Contractor to prove by tests that the quality of the steel
has not been significantly impaired and that it still Extractable cores shall not be coated with release agent
complies with the provisions of these Specifications. unless approved by the Engineer.

705-6
Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, the alignment Where partial tensioning of the tendons is
of the tendon within a distance of 1,0 m from the live required, the work shall be executed in
anchorage and/or coupler shall be straight. Anchorages accordance with the details on the Drawings or as
shall be set perpendicular to the tendon axis and be directed by the Engineer. In his tendered rates the
firmly secured in position so that they will not move Contractor shall make allowance for all additional
during concreting. External anchorages shall be seated costs which he may incur as a result of having to
on a thin mortar bedding to bear evenly on the concrete tension partially only some of or all the tendons at
surface and axially to the tendon. any one stage or on any instant.
Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, the minimum (c) Assembly of equipment and safety precautions
concrete cover over the outside surface of the sheath or
cable support shall comply with the requirements of The tensioning and measuring equipment shall be
clause 07 of section 703, except that the cover shall be assembled for tensioning in exactly the same way
not less than 50 mm in the case of sheaths. as that in which they are combined for calibration.

The spacing of cables will depend on the size of the The Contractor shall take all the necessary safety
cable and shall be so as to achieve the proper placing precautions to prevent accidents from happening
and compaction of the concrete. on account of the malfunctioning or failure of any
part of the equipment or material, and he shall
Immediately before concreting, the Contractor shall accept full responsibility for injury to persons
inspect the sheaths for grout-tightness and shall seal all and/or damage to property resulting therefrom.
damaged and suspect sections.
(d) Friction
External tendons shall be installed to the same
standards and accuracy as specified herein for internal The Engineer may require the Contractor to
tendons. The tendons shall be temporarily supported at perform friction tests on designated tendons and to
regular intervals along the straight length between revise the relevant theoretical extensions in order
saddles. The supports shall consist of rigidly to compensate for any discrepancy between the
constructed frames secured to the concrete face. values adopted in the design and the test results.
10.04 Concrete strength Where applicable, allowance shall be made in the
tensioning force to compensate for friction loss in
Full tensioning of all or part of the tendons shall not
the jack and in the anchorage.
commence until the cube-compressive-strength tests on
the concrete of the particular member show a compressive (e) Tensioning
strength of 35 MPa or 2,5 times the maximum working
compressive stress induced in the concrete by the Tensioning shall be carried out under the
tendons to be tensioned, whichever is the greater. supervision of a technician skilled in the use of the
prestressing system and equipment and the
Where all or some of the tendons are to be partially methods of tensioning to be adopted.
tensioned initially, tensioning shall not commence
before the concrete has attained the compressive Tensioning shall not commence before the
strength indicated on the Drawings. Engineer has been advised of each tensioning
operation and has given his approval for the work
The compressive strength of the concrete shall be to start.
determined from cubes manufactured and tested in
accordance with clause 14 of section 704, which have The technician and operators shall be supplied
been cured under the same conditions as the structural with a schedule listing the sequence of tensioning
member which is to be prestressed. The number of of the various tendons and a tensioning record
concrete cubes required for this purpose shall be as sheet showing the theoretical gauge readings,
agreed upon with the Engineer. jacking forces, extensions, release and pull-in for
each tensioning operation. The record sheet shall
10.05 Tensioning furthermore make provision for the entering of the
(a) Preparation corresponding information recorded and
observations made during tensioning. A graph of
Within 2 hours of the concrete having been placed, the tensioning force and/or gauge reading versus
the Contractor shall demonstrate that the sheaths theoretical extensions shall be appended to the
are free from obstructions, that extractable cores record sheet and the actual extensions measured
can be removed and, where the design permits, for each load increment shall be plotted on the
that all tendons are free to move in the ducts. graph. Copies of the completed record sheets and
Thereafter all water in the ducts shall be expelled graphs shall be submitted to the Engineer within
with compressed air and the cables sealed until 24 hours of the completion of each tensioning
tensioning takes place. operation.
Before tensioning is commenced, side forms and The Contractor shall note that the extensions shall
other restraining elements shall be released or be regarded as an indirect measurement of the
removed to give the structural member the tensioning force and that it shall serve as a control
freedom to deform under the induced force. on the tensioning force applied.
(b) Tensioning sequence The protruding ends of all bars, wires or strands
The sequence of tensioning to be followed shall be shall be clearly marked for the accurate measuring
as shown on the Drawings and/or the drawings of extension, release and pull-in.
prepared by the Contractor in terms of clause 07 Before tensioning is commenced on external
of this section. tendons, a small load shall be applied to each
In his tendered rates the Contractor shall make tendon, commencing with the uppermost tendon.
allowance for all additional costs which he may The force shall be sufficient to take up all slack
incur as a result of having to tension fully only some and to prevent entanglement of the tendons.
of the tendons at any one stage or on any instant.

705-7
 The jacking force shall be increased to Protection and bonding of the tendons shall be
approximately 5 - 10% of the final jacking force in effected within 7 days of the final tensioning of the
order to take up the tendon slack, to determine the tendon(s), or as specified on the Drawings, but
zero position for the extension measurements, and shall not take place without the prior approval of
to check the gripping devices and the position and the Engineer.
alignment of the jacks. Thereafter the load shall be
After the permanent protection or bonding has
increased gradually to the full specified tensioning
been completed, the anchorages shall be encased
force while intermediate gauge readings and
in concrete or grout which shall be bonded to the
extensions are recorded at regular intervals.
old concrete with an epoxy resin designed for this
The final stage of tensioning shall be deemed to purpose or shall be completely coated with a
have been satisfactorily accomplished when all the corrosion-resistant material. The protection
following requirements have been met: afforded shall in every case prevent the ingress of
water or aggressive agents.
• The tendons have been tensioned to the
required force. (b) Preparation of ducts
• The measured extension of individual tendons Before permanent protection and/or bonding of
is within ±6% of the theoretical extensions. tendons is effected, the following precautions shall
• The average variation between the measured be observed:
and theoretical extensions of all the tendons in • The cables shall be checked for blockages by
a structural member is less than ± 3%. means of water injection or compressed air.
• The release and/or pull-in is within ± 2 mm of • Unlined ducts that are to be filled with grout
the theoretical values. shall be flushed with water to wet the concrete.
When the above conditions have not been met • Temporary protection or lubricants which are
individually and collectively, the Contractor shall incompatible with the permanent protection or
immediately advise the Engineer and obtain a bonding shall be removed by flushing with
ruling as to the procedure to be followed. water or an inert solution or by any suitable
method approved by the Engineer.
In the event of the tendon friction being too high,
the Contractor may, subject to the approval of the • On completion of the above, the excess fluid
Engineer, inject an approved lubricant into the shall be expelled from the ducts by means of
sheath after first detensioning the tendon. compressed air or shall be displaced by the
protection agent or grout, as may be relevant.
The cost of the remedial and corrective measures
and of the release and retensioning of tendons, • Any blockages, leakages or factors that may in
which have been occasioned by failure of the any way affect the permanent protection or
operations to meet the above requirements, shall bonding shall immediately be reported to the
be for the Contractor's account. Engineer.
After the tensioning has been accepted by the (c) Mixing
Engineer, the Contractor may cut off the tendons (i) Protection agents
behind the anchorage as described in
subclause 10.02 of this section. The mixing of protection agents shall be
strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's
10.06 Permanent protection and bonding of tendons instructions.
(a) General (ii) Grout
After tensioning, all tendons shall receive The aggregate, if used, and the cement shall
permanent protection against mechanical damage be measured by mass, and the water by
and corrosion. mass or volume.
Internal tendons shall be protected and bonded to The water cement ratio by mass shall be as
the structural member by cement grout or, when low as possible within the range of 0,36 to
permitted by the Engineer, by sand-cement grout. 0,45, consistent with the fluidity requirements
Where bonding is not important, protection may be of subclause 03.07 (b) of this section.
afforded by the use of bitumen, petroleum-based When an admixture is used, it shall be
compounds, epoxy resins, plastics and similar dissolved in a part of the mixing water before
products, all complying with the requirements of it is added to the grout.
subclause 03.08 of this section, and subject to the
approval of the Engineer. Mixing shall commence by two-thirds of the
cement being added to the main part of the
Tendons located outside the structural section (i e mixing water, then the predissolved
external tendons) shall be encased with a dense admixture, if used, and finally the remainder
concrete, a dense mortar, or material which is of the cement. Mixing shall continue for not
sufficiently stable and hard, all subject to the longer than 4 minutes, after which the grout
approval of the Engineer. The encasement shall shall be continually agitated at slow speed
be of the thickness shown on the Drawings. throughout the injection operation.
Where bonding of the tendon to the structural When an aggregate is used in the grout mix,
concrete is required, this shall be achieved by the word "cement" in the preceding
reinforcement of the concrete encasement to the paragraph shall be replaced with the term
structure, as detailed on the Drawings. "cement/aggregate component".

705-8
(d) Injection Grouting shall not be carried out during frosty
(i) General weather, and the same requirements as specified for
concrete in subclause 10.01 of section 704 shall
The injection of permanent protection agents apply. Care shall be taken to see that the ducts are
or grout shall not commence before the completely free from frost or ice before grouting
Engineer has given his permission for the commences after frosty weather.
work to start.
Before injection commences, all air shall be 11 LOSS OF PRESTRESS
expelled from the injection equipment and Any structural member that has lost all or part of its
hoses and all connections checked for air- prestress through the failure or malfunctioning of any
tightness. part of the prestressing component may be rejected by
the Engineer and shall be removed from the Works,
Injection shall take place from the anchorage
or coupler, whichever is situated at the lower unless remedial measures approved by the Engineer
are successfully carried out on the member. No
end of the cable.
payment shall be made in respect of any such remedial
(ii) Protection agents work done or loss suffered by the Contractor in this
The injection of protection agents shall be regard.
strictly in accordance with the instructions of
and the equipment specified by the 12 CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES
manufacturer. The work described in this section shall be constructed
(iii) Grout to the construction tolerances specified in
subclause 03.06 of section 707.
Immediately after mixing and during injection,
the fluidity of the grout shall be tested at 13 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
regular intervals in accordance with
subclause 03.09 of this section. Item Unit
Injection shall be uninterrupted at a rate of 705.01 Prestressing tendons
6 m/min - 12 m/min. As soon as grout with
705.01.01 Longitudinal
the original consistency flows from the
intermediate vent pipes, they shall be tendons meganewton metre (MN.m)
successively closed. Injection shall continue 705.01.02 Transverse
until the grout flowing from the vent at the tendons meganewton metre (MN.m)
free end is of the same consistency as that of
the injected grout. At this stage the vent shall 705.01.03 Vertical tendons meganewton metre (MN.m)
be closed and the final pressure, or a The unit of measurement shall be the meganewton-
pressure of 5 bars, whichever is the greater, metre which is calculated as the product of the
shall be maintained on the grout column for characteristic strength of the prestressing steel in
5 minutes before the valve at the injection megapascals, the cross-sectional area of the tendon in
end is closed. square metres, and the length of the tendon between
All vents shall be kept closed and shall be the faces of the anchorages in metres. In the case of fan
supported vertically until final setting of the and loop anchorages, the "length of the tendon" shall
grout has taken place. include the length of tendon forming the loop or fan.
On vertical cables a riser pipe with funnel The tendered rates shall include full compensation for
shall be fitted to the top anchor to ensure that the preparation and submission of Drawings, the
the separated (bleed) water migrates supply, storage, handling and protection of all materials
upwards without extending into the cable. (excluding anchorages and couplers), the fabrication,
supporting and installation of the cables, the lubrication,
If an expanding agent is used in the grout permanent protection and bonding of the tendons, the
mix, the air vents shall be re-opened after use of all the equipment, and also for all work and
grouting to release any separated water, and incidentals required for completing the work as
shall subsequently be closed again. specified.
Unless a retarder is used in the grout mix, the Item Unit
grout not used within 30 minutes of mixing
shall be discarded. 705.02 Anchorages and couplers

During the course of grouting, 100 mm cubes 705.02.01 Anchorage at jacking

shall be made for testing in accordance with end meganewton (MN)
subclause 03.09 of this section. While the 705.02.02 Anchorage at dead
grout is poured into the cube mould, its sides
end meganewton (MN)
shall be lightly tapped to permit any
entrapped air to escape. 705.02.03 Coupler at jacking
end meganewton (MN)
Precautions shall be taken not to discharge
any escaping grout onto railway lines, public 705.02.04 Coupler at dead
roads or private property. end meganewton (MN)
If a blockage occurs during the course of The unit of measurement shall be the meganewton
grouting, the grouting shall be stopped before which is calculated as the product of the characteristic
the maximum grouting pressure is reached, strength of the prestressing steel in megapascals and
the duct flushed out immediately and the the cross-sectional area of the tendon, effectively
blockage cleared. anchored or coupled, in square metres.

705-9
The tendered rates shall include full compensation for
the supply, storage, handling, fabrication and protection
of the complete anchorage or coupler assembly,
anchorage reinforcement, construction of recesses for
the anchorage or coupler, the tensioning, anchoring-off
and/or coupling and the trimming of tendon ends, the
use of all equipment, and also for all work and
incidentals required for completing the work as
specified.
The coupler shall include the complete assembly
consisting of the anchorage built into the first-stage
construction and the part coupled to it.
The tendered rate for loop or fan anchorages shall
exclude the cost of the length of tendon forming the
loop or fan.
Item Unit
705.03 Extra over item 705.02 for
partial tensioning of
tendons meganewton (MN)

The unit of measurement shall be the meganewton

which is calculated as for item 705.02.
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for
the use of all equipment, as well as for all work and
incidentals required for tensioning and anchoring off the
tendons to the specified partial force.

705-10
SERIES 7 : STRUCTURES (c) Thermosetting chemically curing sealants shall
comply with the requirements of BS 4254 or
SECTION 706 : JOINTS IN STRUCTURES ASTM C 920.
The final IRHD (international rubber hardness
CONTENTS degree) of the sealant shall be 20 ± 5.
01 SCOPE Other sealants may be used if approved by the
02 MATERIALS Engineer after submission of full specifications
03 FILLED AND UNFILLED JOINTS and information by the Contractor.
04 SEALING OF JOINTS
02.04 Preformed elastomeric compression
05 PROPRIETARY EXPANSION JOINTS
06 INSTALLATION OF EXPANSION JOINTS seals
07 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Preformed elastomeric compression seals shall comply
with the requirements of SANS 1023.
01 SCOPE
02.05 Waterstops
This section covers the supply and installation of all
permanent joints that will permit relative movement Waterstops shall be of natural rubber, or plasticized,
between contiguous structural members. virgin, non-biodegradable PVC, and of the type
specified or shown on the Drawings.
02 MATERIALS (a) Natural rubber waterstops shall comply with the
02.01 General requirements of CKS 388.
(b) Flexible polyvinyl chloride (PVC) rubber
All materials used in the forming, construction and
waterstops shall comply with the requirements of
sealing of permanent joints, as well as all proprietary or
CKS 389.
custom-built expansion-joint assemblies shall be
subject to the approval of the Engineer. 02.06 Accessory materials
When required by the Engineer, the Contractor shall (a) Primers
submit test certificates from an approved independent
testing authority to show that the respective materials When a primer is to be used in conjunction with
comply with the specified requirements, or a certificate the sealant, it shall be of the prescribed
from the patent holder or designer to certify that the proprietary material.
manufactured item complies in all respects with relevant (b) Adhesives
product specifications.
Adhesives used in conjunction with preformed
02.02 Joint filler seals shall be of a proven and approved type
which is compatible with the material of the seal.
Joint filler shall consist of sheets or strips of the
following materials complying with the requirements of (c) Bond breakers
the relevant specifications listed:
Polyethylene tape, coated papers, metal foils or
(a) Bitumen-impregnated fibre board and bitumen- similar material may be used where bond breakers
impregnated cork board - US Federal Specification are required.
HH-F-341 F or AASHTO Specification M213.
(d) Back-up material
(b) Resin-impregnated cork board - US Federal
Back-up material shall consist of a compressible
Specification HH-F-341 F.
material of correct width and shape in order to
(c) Flexible foams of expanded polyethylene, ensure that it will be in approximately 50%
polyurethane, PVC or polypropylene - AASHTO compression after installation and that the sealant
Specification M153. can be formed to the specified depth.
(d) Rigid foams of expanded polyethylene, Back-up materials shall be compatible with the
polyurethane or polystyrene - BS 4840 or sealant used. Material containing bitumen or
volatiles shall not be used with thermosetting
BS 3837.
chemically curing sealants.
Other joint-filler materials may be used if approved by (e) Cover plates
the Engineer after submission of full specifications and
information by the Contractor. Steel cover plates shall be of grade 43A steel
which complies with the requirements of
02.03 Sealants BS EN 10025, or of grade 300W steel which
(a) Thermoplastic hot-poured sealants shall comply with complies with the requirements of SANS 1431.
the requirements of US Federal Specification SS-S- Galvanizing shall comply with the requirements of
1401B, BS 2499 or AASHTO Specification M-173. SANS 32 and/or SANS 121, as applicable. Anchor
bolts shall be of stainless steel grade X10CrNi18-
The sealants shall be of the rubberized bituminous 8Co.05-0.155=0.015, which complies with the
type containing a minimum of 20% natural or requirements of BS EN 10088 part 1.
synthetic rubber.
02.07 Storage
(b) Thermoplastic cold-applied sealants shall comply
with the requirements of US Federal Specification All materials used in the forming, construction and
SS-S-200E(2). sealing of permanent joints and all proprietary or
custom built expansion-joint assemblies shall be stored
The sealant shall be of the rubberized bituminous off the ground under cover that provides adequate
type containing a minimum of 20% natural or protection against sunlight, physical or chemical
synthetic rubber. damage or other factors that may cause deterioration.

706-1
03 FILLED AND UNFILLED JOINTS The safe heating temperature shall not exceed the
specified pouring temperature by more than 10°C.
03.01 General
Two-part thermosetting chemically curing sealants shall
Wherever polystyrene or a similar material which is not be applied after expiry of the specified potlife
susceptible to damage is used to form joints, it shall be period, which shall commence once the base and
lined with a hard surface on the side to be concreted. activator of the sealant have been combined.
The hard surface shall be sufficiently resilient to ensure
that the joint and surfaces can be formed free from 04.04 Preformed compression seals
defects.
The seal shall be inserted and secured with a lubricant
03.02 Filled joints adhesive which covers both sides of the seal over the
full area in contact with the inside faces of the joint. The
Filled joints shall be accurately formed to the lubricant adhesive shall be applied immediately before
dimensions shown and with the filler material specified the seal is inserted.
on the Drawings. The filler shall be secured in position
so that it will not be displaced during or after concreting The seal shall be installed in a compressed state, with
if the filler is to remain permanently in the joint. the appropriate equipment, so that the seal will remain
in compression even under the most adverse
03.03 Unfilled joints conditions. The final position of the seal shall be as
shown on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer.
Unfilled joints shall be accurately formed to the
dimensions given on the Drawings, and all external Joints in seals shall be bonded or fused and shall be
corners chamfered or rounded for at least 5 mm. The only at positions agreed on by the Engineer.
concrete face against which the fresh concrete is 04.05 Waterstops
placed shall be treated in good time with an approved
bond breaker. (a) General requirements
The waterstops shall be supplied in unjointed
04 SEALING OF JOINTS standard production lengths. Site jointing shall be
limited to the absolute minimum. Where lengths in
04.01 General
excess of the standard production lengths are
Sealed joints shall be made watertight over the full required, such longer lengths shall preferably be
length of the joints, unless otherwise permitted by the factory-jointed.
Engineer, and the joint dimensions shall be as shown At intersections, transitions and abrupt changes of
on the Drawings. direction, factory-moulded watertight junction
pieces shall be used so that any site jointing can
04.02 Preparation of joints be restricted to simple joints.
The reaming of joints by sawing or other means shall be When a waterstop with a centre bulb is
undertaken at a stage when edge spalling or ravelling intersected, the centre bulb shall be continuous
can be avoided and shall be subject to the Engineer's throughout the intersection irrespective of the
approval. make-up of the intersection.
After removal of the temporary filler material or the (b) Rubber waterstops
breaking-out of the excess concrete, the inside faces of
the joint shall be wire-brushed or grit-blasted to remove All joints shall be vulcanized and shall have a
all laitance and contaminants. Thereafter the joint shall tensile strength of at least eighty (80) per cent of
be cleaned and blown out with compressed air to that of the unjointed material for water-retaining
remove all traces of dust. Solvents shall not be used for structures, and fifty (50) per cent for other
removing contaminants from concrete and porous structures.
surfaces. Site joints shall be vulcanized joints made in
accordance with the requirements of these
Care shall be taken to ensure that primers or adhesives
Specifications and the manufacturer's instructions,
are applied only to surfaces that are absolutely dry. The
and with equipment prescribed or supplied by the
primer or adhesive shall be applied strictly in
manufacturer and approved by the Engineer.
accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Unless
otherwise specified, the primer shall be applied within The vulcanizing process shall be a hot process
the temperature range of 10°C to 40°C and the sealant with strict control on the pressure, the temperature
shall be applied after the curing period of the primer and the time. The vulcanizing temperature shall be
and within the period during which the primer remains between 150°C and 160°C. The rubber shall not
active. be heated above 160°C. The vulcanizing time for
the specific type of rubber of the waterstops
04.03 Sealants involved shall be determined with a curometer for
Sealants shall be applied strictly in accordance with the the above-mentioned vulcanizing temperatures
manufacturer's instructions by a person skilled in the before a vulcanized joint is made. The
use of the particular type of sealant. The trapping of air recommended pressure between the two sections
and the formation of voids in the sealant shall be which must be vulcanized is 3,4 MPa and the
avoided. The sealant shall be finished to a neat minimum allowable pressure is 2,4 MPa.
appearance flush with the edges of the concrete or to The contact faces of the sections to be jointed
the specified depth. shall be accurately and evenly cut at the angle
Thermoplastic hot-poured sealants shall not be poured shown on the Drawings or prescribed by the
into the joints when the temperature of the joint is below Engineer to obtain a precise fit and complete
10°C. contact.

706-2
 Care shall be taken to keep centre bulbs 05.02 Dimensions
unobstructed at the joints so that the lateral
Attention is drawn to the overall dimensions of the
flexibility of the waterstops will not be affected by
expansion joints and to the limiting concrete dimensions
the presence of clotted rubber inside the bulbs.
of that portion of the structure that is to accommodate the
The rubber of the waterstop shall not have any
joints. No alterations to the concrete that will be visible in
porosity or voids between the contact faces of the
the final structure nor any major re-arrangements of the
sections and/or at the finished vulcanized joint,
prestressing anchorages to accommodate joints of
especially at the centre bulb.
excessive size will be be permitted.
The vulcanizing equipment shall comply with the
All joints to be installed along a skew shall be
following minimum requirements:
accurately dimensioned to ensure compliance with
• The heating elements shall be equipped with clause 06 of this section.
an automatic temperature-control device to
In the case of bridges, proprietary expansion joints shall
keep the elements at the required temperature.
include the complete expansion joint assembly traversing
• It shall be equipped with an automatic the roadway, kerbs, sidewalks and median, and shall
temperature-control device to keep the heating include the coping and parapet cover plates as well as
elements at the required temperature, with a the drainage system for draining the expansion joint.
device to measure the temperature at the
vulcanizing plane, a device to measure the 05.03 Design and manufacture
temperature applied to the external faces of the The expansion joint shall be designed to withstand the
rubber, and with a pressure gauge to regulate movements, displacements and rotations specified on
the applied pressure within the specified limits the Drawings in conjunction with the loads prescribed in
in relation to the liquidity of the rubber. the Code of Practice adopted for the design of the
• During the vulcanizing process the pressure structure without overstressing any part in terms of
shall be spread evenly over the entire contact "working load" requirements or exceeding the
area, and the pressure plates shall be sufficiently requirement for serviceability limit state. The cost of any
rigid that they will not bend under the applied strengthening of the supporting member required to
pressure. The cut-out forms of the pressure resist forces imparted by the joint to the structure shall
plates shall fit accurately over the waterstops so be for the Contractor's account.
that all the faces of the waterstops will be in The specified movements, displacements and rotations
contact with the pressure plates. shall be accepted without impairment of the efficacy
• The planes of contact of the two sections of the and the serviceability of the joint.
waterstops to be joined together shall be The expansion joint shall be vibration free and shall
prevented from sliding from each other when comply with the requirements in the Project Specifications
pressure is applied to the plates. in respect of resistance to mechanical wear and other
• A shield shall be available to shield the forms of abrasion, resistance to corrosion, skid
apparatus against wind, rain, etc, when joints resistance, water tightness, riding characteristics and
are made in the open to ensure proper accessibility for inspection, maintenance and repair.
temperature control. Prior to the manufacture of the joints, the Contractor
• The apparatus as a whole shall be safe in all shall submit detail drawings of each expansion joint to
respects and shall comply with all the the Engineer for his acceptance.
appropriate statutory requirements. The expansion joints delivered to the Site shall be
suitably marked to show clearly the sequence and
(c) Plasticized, flexible PVC waterstops
position of installation.
The waterstops shall be manufactured from high-
quality virgin material and shall not contain any 06 INSTALLATION OF EXPANSION JOINTS
scrap or reclaimed material. The waterstops shall No expansion joint or part thereof shall be installed
be light coloured so as to reduce heat absorption before the final surfacing levels have been established
when exposed to sunlight. as based on a complete level survey of the contiguous
The waterstops shall be precision moulded or surfaces. The survey shall be made before the kerbs,
extruded to the required cross-sectional profile, channels or bituminous surfacing is constructed.
they shall be free from porosity or other In the case of bridges, the expansion joint shall form an
imperfections, and shall be provided with eyelets even surface with the road surface on either side, and
so that they can be securely fixed to prevent the deviation across and along the expansion joint shall
displacement during concreting. comply with the requirements of subclause 05.04 of
section 601 for cross-section and subclause 05.06 of
All joints shall be butt-jointed hot-welded joints.
section 601 for surface regularity measured with an
Where joints cannot be factory-made, Site joints
ordinary straight-edge.
shall be made in accordance with the
manufacturer's instructions with equipment On completion of the installation of proprietary
prescribed or supplied by the manufacturer and expansion joint(s), the Contractor shall furnish the
approved by the Engineer. Engineer with a certificate from the manufacturer or
supplier of the joint(s) which certifies that the expansion
05 PROPRIETARY EXPANSION JOINTS joints have been properly installed.
05.01 General The issuing of such a certificate shall not relieve the
Contractor of his responsibilities under the Contract.
The use of any type of expansion joint shall be subject
Payment for the inspection of the joints by the
to the approval of the Engineer. Tenderers are advised
manufacturer or supplier and the issuing of the
to obtain approval for the type of expansion joint they
certificate shall be made in accordance with the
intend to use prior to submitting their Tenders.
provisions of subclause 12.04 of section 903.

706-3
07 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Item Unit
Item Unit 706.05 Joints with preformed
706.01 Proprietary expansion joints elastomeric compression
seals
706.01.01 Prime cost sum allowed for the
706.05.01 Type and size of compression
purchase and taking delivery of
seal and joint stated with
expansion joints PC sum
reference to the Drawings metre (m)
706.01.02 Percentage on prime cost
706.05.02 Etc for other types and sizes
for charges and profit per cent (%)
The unit of measurement shall be the linear metre of
Payment for the purchase and taking delivery of each type and size of joint and compression-seal
proprietary expansion joints shall be in accordance with combination constructed.
the provisions of the General Conditions of Contract.
(See Note 4 at the end of this clause .) The tendered rates shall be in full compensation for
constructing the joint complete as specified, including
Item Unit the cutting of the joint where applicable and the
provision and installation of the compression seal. (See
706.02 Installation of proprietary
Notes 2 and 3 at the end of this clause .)
expansion joints
Item Unit
706.02.01 (Description of joint,
measured per metre) metre (m) 706.06 Joints with waterstops

706.02.02 (Description of joint, 706.06.01 Waterstops in a straight joint

measured per number) number (No) 706.06.01.01 Description of joint, type
The unit of measurement shall be either the metre of and size of waterstop with
complete joint of each type installed or the number of reference to the Drawings metre (m)
complete joints of each type installed. 706.06.01.02 Etc for other types and sizes
The tendered rates shall include full compensation for The unit of measurement shall be the metre of
the supply of all materials not covered under item waterstop installed in a straight joint and measured
706.01, for transport, handling and storage, and for all along its central bulb.
labour, equipment and incidentals required for the
installation of the expansion joint complete as detailed. The tendered rates shall include full compensation for
(See Notes 1, 2 and 4 at the end of this clause .) the supplying, jointing and installing the waterstop, the
joining of waterstops on Site, at crossings and
The tendered rates shall be final and binding, elsewhere, for the additional costs of splitting formwork
irrespective of the type or make of joint finally installed. where waterstops have to be accommodated and,
where applicable, for the provision of joint filler, joint
Item Unit
sealant and accessory materials. (See Notes 2 and 3 at
706.03 Expansion joints as the end of this clause .)
detailed on the Drawings Item Unit
and/or specified in the
Project Specifications 706.06.02 Waterstops in a curved joint
(Description of each type) metre (m) 706.06.02.01 Description of joint, type and
The unit of measurement shall be the metre of complete size of waterstop with
expansion joint of each type installed. reference to Drawings metre (m)

The tendered rate shall include full compensation for 706.06.02.02 Etc for other types and sizes.
the supply of all material, for the manufacture of the The unit of measurement shall be the metre of
expansion joint, for transport, handling and storage, and waterstop installed in a curved joint and measured
for all labour, equipment and incidentals required for the along its central bulb.
installation of the expansion joint complete as detailed.
(See Notes 1, 2 and 3 at the end of this clause .) The work for which allowance shall be made in the
tendered rates for item 706.06.01 shall also apply to the
Item Unit tendered rates for this item.
706.04 Filled joints Item Unit
706.04.01 Type and size of joint 706.06.03 Factory-moulded intersection
stated with reference to pieces
the Drawings metre (m)
706.06.03.01 Description of joint, type
706.04.02 Etc for other types and sizes and size of waterstop, and
the angle of intersection
The unit of measurement for each type and size of filled
joint shall be the linear metre of joint measured along its with reference to the
exposed surface. Drawings number (No)

The tendered rates shall be in full compensation for 706.06.03.02 Etc for other types, sizes
constructing the joint complete as specified, including and angles.
the provision of joint filler, joint sealant, and accessory The unit of measurement shall be the number of each
materials. (See Notes 2 and 3 at the end of this type and size of intersection piece installed.
clause .)

706-4
The tendered rates shall include full compensation for
supplying and installing the intersection piece, the
joining of the intersection piece on Site with straight or
curved waterstops, for splitting formwork where
required and, where applicable, for the provision of joint
filler, joint sealant and accessory materials. (See
Notes 2 and 3 below.)

Notes:
(1) Open joints (joints without filler or sealant) shall
not be measured and paid for under this
section but under item 702.01.
(2) The rates for items in this section shall include full
compensation for all formwork necessary for the
construction of the joint if the joint is less than
150 mm deep.
Where the joint is more than 150 mm deep, the
rates shall include for the forming of any recesses
required, but formwork for the opposing inside
faces of the joint shall be measured and paid for
under section 702, except that, where a joint filler
is used, no formwork will be measured over an
area where concrete is cast against a joint filler
which also acts as permanent formwork.
(3) Filled joints, open joints, joints with preformed
elastomeric compression seals and joints with
waterstops shall be measured and paid for as such
and not as expansion joints even though they may
also function as expansion joints.
(4) Separate payment shall not be made for the
supply and/or installation of the seal in the
proprietary expansion joint or the seal between
concrete or epoxy nosing.

706-5
SERIES 7 : STRUCTURES 03.02 Footings

SECTION 707 : CONSTRUCTION TOLERANCES (a) Position 15 mm

FOR STRUCTURES (b) Horizontal alignment:
(i) Horizontal alignment of individual
CONTENTS
elements 5º
01 SCOPE (ii) Horizontal alignment of elements
02 DEFINITIONS as they collectively determine the
03 TOLERANCES horizontal alignment of the
04 USE OF TOLERANCES structure as a whole 1 minute

01 SCOPE (c) Dimensions:

This section covers the requirements in regard to the (i) Leading dimensions in plan ± 25 mm
construction tolerances applicable to the various (ii) Thickness + 25 mm or- 15 mm
structures and structural elements.
(d) Levels:
02 DEFINITIONS Average level of slabs, footings, etc ± 25 mm
Except where otherwise specified, the following aspects 03.03 Vertical elements such as columns,
of construction to which tolerances apply shall have the
walls, piers, abutments, etc
meanings assigned to them below:
(a) Position 10 mm
02.01 Position
(b) Horizontal alignment:
The position of a structure or structural element shall be
the horizontal position of its reference line(s) and/or Horizontal alignment of walls, piers,
reference point(s) in relation to the overall setting-out of abutments and column groups 2 minutes
the Works as shown on the Drawings.
(c) Dimensions:
02.02 Horizontal alignment Leading dimensions of walls,
The horizontal alignment of a structure or structural piers, abutments, etc ± 25 mm
element shall be the horizontal alignment of its reference (d) Thickness of walls, piers and
line(s) in relation to the overall setting-out of the Works abutments and cross-sectional
as shown on the Drawings. Deviation from true horizontal dimensions of columns:
alignment shall be measured in degrees of an arc.
(i) Plus tolerance 25 mm
02.03 Leading and cross-sectional dimensions
(ii) Minus tolerance: 3% of the specified
The leading and cross-sectional dimensions of a dimensions within the
structure or structural element shall be the dimensions range of 5 mm to 25 mm
relating to width, length, height, thickness, etc which
collectively determine its shape as shown on the (e) Levels:
Drawings. Dimensional tolerances which do not relate to
Average levels of finished or
leading or cross-sectional dimensions shall be shown on
trimmed/cut columns, piers,
the Drawings.
walls, abutments, etc ±10 mm
02.04 Levels
(f) Verticality:
The level of any structure or structural element shall be (i) In the case of ordinary formwork: 1 in 400
the level of the upper or lower surface, as the case may Maximum 25 mm
be, with reference to an established datum level on the
Site as shown on the Drawings. (ii) In the case of sliding formwork: 1 in 200
Maximum 50 mm
02.05 Surface regularity
(g) Surface regularity:
Surface regularity is the shape of a surface with
reference to a 3 m straight-edge (or template in the case (i) In the case of ordinary
of curved surfaces) placed on the surface. formwork 3 mm

The tolerance on surface regularity is expressed as a (ii) In the case of sliding

distance by which the surface tested may deviate from a formwork 6 mm
straight-edge (or template in the case of curved surfaces)
held against the surface. 03.04 Horizontal elements of the super-
structure such as beams, slabs, etc
03 TOLERANCES (a) Position 10 mm
The tolerances given below are the maximum permissible (b) Horizontal alignment:
deviations from the specified dimensions, levels,
alignment, positions, etc, as shown on the Drawings of Superstructure as a whole 1 minute
the structures or structural elements.
(c) Dimensions:
03.01 Foundation fill Leading dimensions in plan ± 25 mm
(a) Average level of top of fill ± 25 mm

707-1
(d) Thickness of slabs, width and 03.07 Bearings
depth of beams:
Bearings shall be installed to within 5 mm of the
(i) Plus tolerance 15mm positions shown on the Drawings and to within 2 mm of
the required levels.
(ii) Minus tolerance: 3% of the specified
dimensions within the range Dimensional tolerances for elastomeric bearings shall
of 5 mm to 15 mm comply with the requirements of BS 5400 part 9.2.

(e) Surface regularity 3 mm 03.08 Miscellaneous

03.05 Reinforcing steel (a) Chamfers:

Except for the requirements set out below, no tolerances Fillets used to form chamfers shall be made to a
are given for the placing and fixing of reinforcing steel. tolerance of 1 mm in cross-sectional dimensions,
However, the steel shall be neatly and accurately fixed in and the actual chamfer on the concrete shall not
a manner that is consistent with proper workmanship and vary by more than 3 mm from the specified
the structural integrity of the member. The following dimensions, as measured from a 3 m straight-
requirements shall apply specifically: edge.

(a) Tension steel (b) Kerbs, copings, sidewalks, bridge railings,

parapets, etc:
The actual position of tension steel shall not deviate
from the true position by an amount that would The elements shall be constructed to the specified
reduce the effective lever arm by more than 2% of dimensions within a tolerance of plus or minus
the overall depth of the member, or 10 mm, 5 mm on any dimension. The alignment shall not
whichever is the greater. deviate from the true alignment by more than
10 mm in any place nor shall the alignment deviate
(b) Concrete cover by more than 5 mm from the true alignment over
any length of 5 m.
The concrete cover on reinforcing
steel + 20 percent
04 USE OF TOLERANCES 2
or - 0 percent
Attention is drawn to the requirements of clause 25 of
(c) Spacing between bars section 001 regarding the use of tolerances. In addition,
The spacing between closely spaced parallel bars, the following shall apply:
especially in beams and columns, shall, unless
Notwithstanding the tolerances stated in this section, the
otherwise detailed, be not less than the maximum
Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that all
size of aggregate used in the concrete.
components of the work will finally fit together properly
(d) Bending of reinforcement and he shall be solely responsible for the cost of
rectifying defects and poor fitting arising from any
The requirements of SANS 282 regarding deviations from the specified dimensions regardless of
dimensional tolerances for the cutting and bending the tolerances specified in this section but having regard
of reinforcing steel shall apply, with the proviso that to any tolerances specified on the Drawings.
the other requirements stated in this clause shall
be met even if the tolerances in SANS 282 are not
exceeded.

03.06 Prestressing
Prestressing tendons shall be placed and maintained in
position within the following accuracies:
(a) In the direction of the width
of the member:
(i) For members of up to
200 mm in depth ± 20 mm
(ii) For members exceeding
200 mm in depth ± 10 mm
(b) In the direction of the depth
of the member:
(i) For members of up to
200 mm in depth ± 0,025 x depth
(ii) For members over 200 mm
in depth ±,010
x depth within the
tolerance range of
± 5 mm to ± 25 mm

707-2
SERIES 8 : SPECIFIC WORKS The cost of supplying the special tie-rods as well as of
filling the cavities left by the tie-rod cones shall be
SECTION 801 : CONCRETE RESERVOIRS included in the rates tendered for formwork under the
appropriate pay items of section 702.
CONTENTS
04 JOINTS
01 SCOPE Only horizontal construction joints will be permitted in
02 PLANT reservoir walls. The walls shall be cast in lifts of such
03 FORMWORK height that each lift can be poured without interruption
04 JOINTS in one continuous operation during normal working
05 CONCRETE hours. Concreting shall be carried out from a point on
06 CRUSHED STONE ON ROOF SLAB the circumference of the wall, simultaneously in both
07 LIGHTNING PROTECTION directions, so as to close the gap with fresh concrete.
08 MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS
09 STERILIZATION OF RESERVOIRS Where a joint space is indicated between the bottom of
10 TESTING FOR WATERTIGHTNESS the wall of a prestressed reservoir and its footing, the
11 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT reinforcement for the wall shall be supported in a
manner that will cause its weight not to rest on the
01 SCOPE materials that form the joint space. The material forming
the joint space shall be removed within 14 days of the
This section covers various requirements and items of concrete in the first 2 m height of the wall having been
work associated with the construction of concrete placed, unless otherwise instructed by the Engineer.
reservoirs and which are not covered by other sections
of these Specifications. Some of the items in this 05 CONCRETE
section, however, apply to other water-retaining
structures such as pumping stations, sedimentation Concrete obtained from commercial sources and
tanks, etc. delivered to the Site in a ready-mixed condition may be
used for the construction of a reservoir only with the
Engineer’s approval.
02 PLANT
All concrete used for the construction of a reservoir
Where the Contractor elects to place a crane inside the shall be watertight, and special care shall be taken by
circumference of the reservoir wall for the duration of the Contractor to ensure watertightness particularly at
the period of construction, he shall communicate with the construction joints.
the Engineer in good time to ensure that the design and
layout of the panels which form the roof slab and floor
06 CRUSHED STONE ON ROOF SLAB
allow for such positioning of the crane. Where sections
of the roof and floor have to be redesigned to The crushed stone shall be clean and dust-free and
accommodate the crane, the costs of such redesign and shall pass through a 25 mm mesh sieve and shall be
the increased cost of construction shall be borne by the retained on a 12 mm mesh sieve. The thickness of the
Contractor. stone layer shall be as shown on the Drawings.
The Contractor shall at his own cost provide elevated The stone shall not be placed without the permission of
storage tanks of adequate capacity to ensure that the Engineer and not until the concrete of the roof slab
sufficient water will be available before the has reached the design strength.
commencement of every major concrete-casting
operation. The stone shall be immediately spread into position on
the roof and no heaping-up of the stone will be allowed.
All items of plant required for the concreting operations
shall be available in sufficient numbers and in a good 07 LIGHTNING PROTECTION
working order to ensure the availability of adequate
plant on standby. All electrically and mechanically When specified in the Project Specifications, reservoirs
powered plant shall be duplicated by mechanically shall be protected from the effects of lightning by the
powered standby plant to ensure uninterrupted installation of a lightning-protection system which
concreting operations in the event of a power or complies with the requirements of SANS 10313.
mechanical failure of the main plant. No separate
The Contractor shall obtain the services of a firm
payment will be made to the Contractor for providing
specializing in the supply and installation of such
plant for standby purposes.
systems. The firm which shall be approved by the
Engineer, shall submit drawings of the system to SABS
03 FORMWORK Holdings (Pty.) Ltd for approval, and work may
Only approved tie-rods which consist of solid rods commence only after the approved plan has been
submitted to the Engineer. The air-termination system
(which remain embedded in the concrete) with
removable ends shall be used to hold the formwork of which shall be installed on the circumferential parapet
wall on the roof shall be bonded to the steel
the reservoir walls. The removable tie-rod ends shall be
such that they can be removed without damaging the reinforcement of the wall in the case of reinforced-
concrete, and no permanently embedded parts of such concrete reservoirs, and to surface-mounted down-
conductors in the case of prestressed-reinforced-
tie-rods shall have less than 50 mm cover to the
finished concrete surface. concrete reservoirs, and special care shall be taken to
prevent the corrosion of the reinforcement or any form
The cavities left in the concrete after the tie-rod end of electrolysis from taking place.
cones have been removed shall be soundly caulked
with cement mortar to which an approved shrinkage- Where the reinforcement is used as down-conductors,
reducing agent has been added, and shall be neatly care shall be taken to ensure that, wherever such
reinforcing is spliced, positive bonding between the bars
finished to a smooth surface uniform with that of the
surrounding concrete. forming the splice is obtained.

801-1
The reinforcement shall be bonded to the earthing In the event of an appreciable leakage being evident or
system at points directly below the air-terminal bonds, visible at any stage of the filling or testing, or in the
and the joint between the wall and ring foundation shall, event of the final degree of watertightness being
for this purpose, be bridged in an approved manner. unsatisfactory, the Contractor shall, when so ordered by
the Engineer, discontinue such filling or testing and
Where surface-mounted down-conductors have to be shall, at his own expense, take approved steps to rectify
installed on reinforced-concrete reservoirs as a result of the leakage, until a test proves that a sufficient degree
the Contractor's failure to make the necessary provision of watertightness has been obtained.
for the wall reinforcement to be used as down-
conductors, the additional costs of installing the surface The watertightness of the reservoir roof shall be tested
conductors shall be to the Contractor's account. before that of the reservoir itself by water being
continuously sprinkled over the roof in an approved
08 MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS manner so that a film of water is maintained on the
surface of the slab. The roof shall be considered
Items such as internal and external access ladders, watertight if no damp patches are visible on the
manhole covers and frames, locking devices, handrails, underside after 48 hours of sprinkling.
ventilators, rainwater outlets and downpipes, flashings,
etc, for the reservoir shall be manufactured, supplied Before the expiry of the defects liability period, the
and installed to details and in positions as shown on the Engineer shall have the right to retest the structure for
Drawings. Ladders and handrails, when made of steel, watertightness, results of such further tests will be
shall be manufactured in accordance with section 809. made available for the information of the Contractor. In
the event of these tests indicating an unsatisfactory
Prior to drilling bolt holes into the concrete for the degree of watertightness, the Engineer will, before
installation of any of the above items, the Contractor issuing the final certificate, again require the Contractor
shall, by using a cover meter, ensure that no reinforcing to rectify the leakage, at his own expense, in such a
steel is obstructing the proposed bolt-hole positions. manner as will cause the least interruption of the water
supply to consumers and as will ensure the soundness
09 STERILIZATION OF RESERVOIRS of the work, to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
Before a reservoir is sterilized, the roof shall have been Should the failure of the reservoir to pass the first or
tested for watertightness as set out in clause 10 below, any subsequent test for watertightness necessitate the
and the pipelines serving the reservoir shall have been draining of the structure, the Employer reserves the
sterilized as described in clause 13 of section 402. The right to utilise the water by discharging it into its water-
reservoir shall then be thoroughly cleaned out and reticulation network, in which case the Contractor :
washed down with clean water.
(i) shall not have to pay for the subsequent refilling of
The roof, beams, columns and walls shall thereafter be the reservoir;
thoroughly sprayed down, using pressurized equipment,
and the floors shall be scrubbed with water containing (ii) shall, if applicable, reimburse the Employer for any
0,015 g per litre of chloride of lime. additional costs incurred to make the water fit for
consumption; and
On completion of the sterilization, the sterilizing solution
shall be run to waste before the reservoir is filled for (iii) shall not be entitled to claim for extra time whilst
testing its watertightness. waiting for the water to be discharged into the
network.
Should additional work be required to be done inside
the reservoir after the watertightness test has been The costs of retesting the reservoir for watertightness
completed, the reservoir shall be resterilized at the shall be borne by the Contractor.
Contractor's expense.
11 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
10 TESTING FOR WATERTIGHTNESS
Item Unit
Water for the initial filling will be supplied free of charge
801.01 Crushed stone on
by the Employer.
reservoir roof cubic metre (m3)
The structure shall be filled with water at a uniform rate
not exceeding 2,0 m in 24 hours until the top water level The unit of measurement shall be the cubic metre of
has been reached. The water level will then be carefully stone placed in position as specified and to the
noted and recorded by the Engineer in relation to a thickness as shown on the Drawings.
fixed bench-mark, and the structure shall be allowed to Item Unit
remain filled for a period of two weeks to permit
complete absorption of water by the concrete. 801.02 Lightning protection lump sum
Any loss of water which may have occurred shall then The unit of measurement for installing a lightning-
be made up by again filling the structure to the top protection system shall be the lump sum.
water level and by allowing the water to remain
undisturbed for a period of not less than four days. The The tendered sum shall include full compensation for
structure shall be considered to be watertight if the drop obtaining SABS Holdings (Pty) Ltd approval of the
in level in 96 hours (less the drop caused by drawings, and for installing and testing the lightning-
evaporation) does not represent more than 0,06% of the protection system on the reservoir as specified on the
volume of the reservoir. approved drawings.

The evaporation shall be measured by the mean drop in Item Unit

level caused by the evaporation of the water in three 801.03 Miscellaneous items -
flat containers floating in the water, being recorded.
801.03.01 Measured by number
The Contractor is free to attend the taking of all
measurements by the Engineer. 801.03.01.01 (Description of item) number (No)

801-2
Item Unit
801.03.02 Measured by linear metre
801.03.02.01 (Description of item) metre (m)
801.03.03 Measured by area
801.03.03.01 (Description of item) square metre (m2)
801.03.04 Measured by volume
3
801.03.04.01 (Description of item) cubic metre (m )
801.03.05 Tendered for in a lump sum
801.03.05.01 (Description of item) lump sum
The unit of measurement shall be the number, linear
metre, square metre, cubic metre or lump sum as
applicable to each item.
The tendered rate (or sum) shall include full
compensation for the supply of all the required
materials, fabrication, loading, transporting to the Site,
off-loading and erection. They shall also include full
compensation for all nuts, bolts, rivets, washers,
holding-down bolts where specified, for cutting, waste
and for temporary bracing.

Item Unit
801.04 Sterilization of reservoir lump sum
The unit of measurement for sterilization shall be the
lump sum.
The tendered sum shall include full compensation for all
labour, equipment, water, chemicals and other materials
required for sterilizing the reservoir as specified.

Item Unit
801.05 Testing the reservoir for
watertightness lump sum
The unit of measurement for testing for watertightness
shall be the lump sum.
The tendered sum shall include full compensation for
the provision of all labour, plant and materials
necessary for testing the reservoir for watertightness as
specified, and to the satisfaction of the Engineer.

Note:
The following items of work, when specified, shall be
carried out and paid for in accordance with the relevant
sections of the Specifications, but will be listed under
this section of the Schedule of Quantities.

Item Applicable section

(a) Bearings 808
(b) Structural steel items 809

801-3
SERIES 8 : SPECIFIC WORKS 05 FORMWORK
Formwork shall comply with the requirements of
SECTION 802 : CAST IN SITU CONCRETE SEWERS section 702 as well as the requirements of this clause.

CONTENTS 05.01 Pneumatic rubber formwork

The Contractor may, when so permitted in the Project
01 SCOPE Specifications, use pneumatic formwork for forming the
02 INFORMATION TO BE SUPPLIED WITH inside surface of cast in situ concrete sewers. Such
TENDERS formwork shall be SO.CA.P pneumatic rubber formwork
03 EXCAVATION or of an approved similar material.
04 BACKFILLING
05 FORMWORK Pneumatic formwork shall incorporate a constant
06 STEEL REINFORCEMENT pressure-regulating apparatus and shall be used strictly
07 CONCRETE in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions.
08 JOINTS Copies of such instructions as well as photographs,
09 TOLERANCES pamphlets and other information which may assist in
10 TESTING determining the suitability of the formwork shall be
11 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT submitted with the tender as specified in clause 02.
Tenderers shall furthermore supply not only full details
01 SCOPE regarding their own experience in using pneumatic
formwork, but also the details necessary to prove that
This section covers the construction of cast in situ
the manufacturer of the formwork, is experienced in
concrete sewers and shall be read in conjunction with
both its manufacture and its use.
the sections of these Specifications listed under
clause 11 of this section. In the event of any 05.02 Formwork to invert of sewer
discrepancy between the sections listed under
clause 11 and this section, the provisions of this Irrespective of the type of formwork used, the
section shall take precedence. construction of the sewer in one complete concrete-
casting operation will not be allowed. Construction
joints shall be positioned as shown on the Drawings.
02 INFORMATION TO BE SUPPLIED WITH
TENDERS The method used to form the invert of the sewer must
ensure a dense and watertight concrete, monolithic with
Whenever the construction of in situ concrete sewers is the invert footing.
specified or when their construction is offered as an
alternative to specified precast concrete pipes, the The building-up of inverts that are curved in section by
Contractor shall supply the following information with hand-packing the concrete or by similar means and
his tender (in the case of an alternative offer, this then by floating it to the required dimensions will not be
information shall be additional to the information allowed unless provided for in the Project
required in clause 05 of section 001): Specifications.

Full details of the formwork to be used and of the The I, in the covering letter to his tender (as specified in
construction sequence that will be adopted. clause 02), shall include details regarding his proposals
to form and construct the invert of the sewer.
Full details of his proposed method of forming the
invert of the cast in situ sewer. 05.03 Removal of formwork
The minimum periods of time required, before internal
03 EXCAVATION as well as external formwork may be removed in
respect of cast in situ sewers, are based on the use of a
The excavation of trenches, the preparation of trench
special-class-strength concrete as specified in
bottoms and the excavation of manholes and related
clause 07 and shall be 20 hours under normal weather
structures such as junction structures and inlet and
conditions and 40 hours under cold weather conditions
outlet structures for siphons, shall be carried out in
as defined in section 702, irrespective of the type of
accordance with the provisions of section 202 and must
cement used.
be approved by the Engineer before any subsequent
activities are commenced. Where normal classes of concrete are used, the
removal of formwork shall be in accordance with the
The minimum trench width shall be the width of the times specified in section 702.
sewer foundation slab plus an additional 600 mm on
each side of the foundation slab, unless otherwise 06 STEEL REINFORCEMENT
specified in the Project Specifications or authorized by
the Engineer in writing. Steel reinforcement for in situ sewers shall comply with
the requirements of this clause in addition to the
Only trenches excavated to the required depth will be appropriate requirements of section 703.
measured for progress payment purposes.
The minimum cover of concrete over reinforcement
04 BACKFILLING shall be as shown on the Drawings. Where the
minimum cover is not indicated, the minimum concrete
Backfilling of the sewer shall not commence until tests cover measured from the outside of a bar to the
have shown that the concrete has attained the specified concrete surface shall, unless otherwise directed by the
cube strength. Engineer, be not less than the following values:
Backfilling with selected material to a height of 300 mm (a) Surfaces exposed to sewage and
above the top of the sewer shall be carried out as sewer gases 75 mm
specified in clause 11 of section 302, whereas the (Including the sacrificial layer of
balance of the trench shall be backfilled as specified in 35 mm)
clause 13 of section 202.

802-1
(b) Surfaces not exposed as in (a) (iii) Invert level ± 10 mm
and surfaces adjacent to backfill 40 mm
(iv) Irregularity in invert when
tested by a 3 m straight-edge ± 3 mm
07 CONCRETE
(v) Wall thickness :
Concrete for cast in situ sewers and related structures
shall contain only dolomitic aggregates and shall Plus tolerance 15 mm
comply with the requirements of section 704.
Minus tolerance: 3% of the
07.01 Special-strength concrete specified dimensions
within the range
The concrete specified for use in the construction of cast
5 mm to 15 mm
in situ sewers and related structures shall be special-
strength concrete designated as class SSC 30/19/360.
10 TESTING
This special-class-strength concrete shall comply with
Details of tests to be carried out on the completed
all the requirements specified for class 30/19 strength
sewer will be specified in the Project Specifications,
concrete in section 704, except that the cement content
when applicable.
per cubic metre of concrete shall not be less than
360 kg/m3 or more than 400 kg/m3 and that the
cement:water ratio shall not be less than 2,0. 11 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT

The cement used shall be ordinary CEM I, class 32,5N Measurement and pay items for the various types of
unless the use of other types of cement such as rapid- work involved in the construction of the cast in situ
hardening cement or sulphate-resisting cement is concrete sewer shall be the applicable items provided
specified in the Project Specifications. under the following sections of these Specifications:

07.02 Concreting Section 202 : Trenching

The sequence of construction of the various parts of the Section 302 : Construction of sewers
sewer shall be determined by the requirement that no Section 702 : Falsework and fixed formwork
formwork shall be erected against previously cast
concrete which has not as yet hardened sufficiently to Section 703 : Steel reinforcement
withstand, without being damaged, the stresses induced
by the formwork during erection and by the placing of Section 704 : Concrete
fresh concrete. Section 706 : Joints in structures.

08 JOINTS
Construction joints shall be formed in positions as
shown on the Drawings and in accordance with the
requirements of section 704. Expansion joints shall be
constructed between the individual sections of the
sewer and shall comply with the requirements of
section 706. Details of the expansion joints and their
spacing shall be as shown on the Drawings.
The sealing of the expansion joints on the inside of the
sewer shall only be undertaken by a specialist firm
recommended by the sealant manufacturer and
approved by the Engineer and shall not be undertaken
until the concrete is at least 21 days old and until the
Engineer has authorized the commencement of the
sealing work.

09 TOLERANCES
With reference to the requirements of clause 25 of
section 001, cast in situ sewers shall be constructed to
the specified dimensions within the following tolerances
which, where applicable, shall replace the structural
tolerances specified in clause 03 of section 707:
(a) Thickness of concrete cover over
reinforcement - 0 mm, + 10 mm
(b) Sewer
(i) Position in plan :
Maximum deviation 25 mm
(ii) Grade : maximum deviation
from the specified grade
expressed as a percentage
of the specified grade 10%

802-2
SERIES 8 : SPECIFIC WORKS (v) Boxing in and trimming
Placing the correct quantity of ballast between
SECTION 803 : RAILWAY WORK the sleepers and on the ballast shoulders to form
the profile shown on the Drawings.
CONTENTS
(vi) Check rail
01 SCOPE A length of rail installed adjacent and parallel to
02 ABBREVIATIONS the rails of a track to prevent derailment.
03 DEFINITIONS
(vii) Cleaning ballast (screening ballast)
04 MATERIALS
05 PLANT AND EQUIPMENT Removing all ballast and fouling matter to a
06 EARTHWORKS specified depth below the required rail level and
screening it to remove the fouling matter,
07 TRACK WORK
including oversized and undersized stone,
08 TOLERANCES returning the ballast to the track, and tamping it.
09 TESTING AND INSPECTION
10 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT (viii) Construction siding
A railway track built for the purpose of handling
01 SCOPE construction traffic, or an incomplete new line on
which construction traffic is handled.
This section covers the earthworks and trackwork for
the construction of sidings to be used for the (ix) Curving a rail
conveyance of railway traffic from main lines of Giving a rail a permanent set of the required
Transnet Limited onto and on property not belonging to radius by means of a rail-bending machine or a
Transnet Limited, by locomotives belonging to Transnet jim-crow.
Limited or the owner of the siding.
(x) Destressing of rails
The trackwork includes track renewal, rerailing,
The procedure by which temperature and other
resleepering, the relaying of tracks and the upgrading
stresses in long welded and continuous rails are
and maintenance of the sidings where, in each case,
brought to within acceptable limits.
new or second-hand material is used.
(xi) Diamond crossing
All work shall be carried out in accordance with the
requirements of The Provision and Construction of An arrangement of crossings that enables a train
Private Sidings, as published by the Office of the Chief to cross a track without being diverted from one
Civil Engineer of Transnet Limited Specification E7 : track to another.
Specification for Works on, over, under or adjacent to a (xii) Down-let
Railway Line.
A lined drain to carry stormwater down a slope.
02 ABBREVIATIONS (xiii) Railway formation
For the purposes of this section, the abbreviations listed The prepared surface on which the ballast and
below shall apply and shall have the meanings given. track are laid.
BC : Beginning of curve (xiv) Gauge
EC : End of curve The shortest distance between the running
LWR : Long welded rail edges of the two rails of a track.
PI : Point of intersection (xv) Insulating joint (block joint)
PWI : Permanent Way Inspector of Transnet A rail joint where the adjacent rails are
Limited electrically insulated from each other.
PWM : Permanent way material (xvi) Laying a track
Laying sleepers on the formation at the correct
03 DEFINITIONS spacing and square to the centre line, placing
For the purposes of this section, the following words rails on the sleepers, applying or tightening the
and expressions shall have the meanings hereby sleeper and rail fastenings, adjusting the gauge
assigned to them, except where inconsistent with the and expansion gaps and packing the sleepers.
context. (xvii) Lifting and tamping
(i) Ballast Lifting the track from any elevation to the final
Crushed stone of a specified type and grading required level, and tamping it.
used to support the sleepers. (xviii) Long welded rails
(ii) Ballast train Rails which have been welded into lengths
A train with trucks for loading or unloading exceeding 36 m in length, and which may be
ballast, permanent way material or other material subsequently welded in the track into continuous
required for carrying out the Contract. lengths without any fish-plated joints.

(iii) Ballasting (xvix) Machine (heavy-weight)

The operation of supplying ballast and of placing A machine which may be used on a track under
it to support and complete a railway track. occupation only and which requires the use of
mechanical means for being removed from the
(iv) Beginning of a turn-out track.
The stock rail joint.

803-1
(xx) Machine (light-weight) (xxxii) Railway track
A machine which may be used on a track not See permanent way.
necessarily under occupation and which can be
(xxxiii) Realigning (recentring) a track
removed expeditiously by operators without the
use of mechanical means or special assistance. Moving a track sideways to correct errors in
alignment which have not been brought about by
(xxi) Maintaining slewing.
When applied to earthworks, drains and
(xxxiv) Relaying
permanent way, maintain shall mean doing the
day-to-day repairs and adjustments necessary to Performing the combined operations defined as
keep earthworks and drains in a good order and resleepering and rerailing.
the track fit for trains to run at the prescribed (xxxv) Rerailing
speeds.
Removing the rails and rail fastenings from the
(xxii) Municipal railway sidings track and replacing them with either new or
Railway tracks built for the purpose of handling second-hand rails and rail fastenings of the
goods traffic from railway lines of Transnet same or a different mass and/or length, with a
Limited to individual privately owned railway minimum disturbance of the sleepers or ballast.
sidings, and shall include municipal railway (xxxvi) Resleepering
feeder lines.
Removing the sleepers and sleeper fastenings
(xxiii) Occupation from the track, replacing them with either new or
A right granted by the owner of a railway line for second-hand sleepers and sleeper fastenings of
work to be carried out on an open line or a the same or a different type, at the same or a
service line under specified conditions, also at different spacing, all with the minimum
specified times. disturbance of ballast, and thereafter tamping to
give a running top with the minimum temporary
(xxiv) Open line restriction in speed.
A running line of any length outside the limits of
(xxxvii) Respacing the sleepers
the station yard or, in the case of a siding
extension, the service line (or running line of any Loosening the sleeper fastenings and moving the
length) beyond the signalling limits. sleepers along the length of the track to the
required spacing and thereafter tightening the
(xxv) Packing sleeper fastenings and tamping to give a running
Inserting approved material under a sleeper top capable of carrying trains without a speed
without prior lifting the track, in such a way that restriction.
the sleeper will have an even bearing over at
(xxxviii) Retamping
least 450 mm of its length under each rail seat
for the full width of the sleeper, and will carry a Lifting the track to the required final rail level,
train without damage being done to the recentring it, then tamping and trimming the
permanent-way material. ballast, all after the track has been opened to
construction traffic.
(xxvi) Partial resleepering
(xxxix) Running line
Removing from the track and replacing some of
the existing sleepers as described under A line which is required for the purpose of
resleepering. running trains from one point to another and
where the point-to-point distance exceeds 1 km.
(xxvii) Permanent way
(xL) Running rail
The permanent-way material and ballast laid and
fixed in proper position for the safe passage of The rails comprising a running line.
trains. (xLi) Service line
(xxviii) Permanent way material That portion of the private siding that lies
The rails and fastenings, sleepers and between the track of Transnet Limited and the
fastenings, dowels, splice joints, insulating joints, beginning of the exchange yard or the first
stop blocks and foot guards, except ballast and shunting line or staging line of a private siding.
points and crossing, used for building a railway (xLii) Shunting lines
track.
Lines that are provided for the shunting of trains
(xxix) Points and crossings and on which frequent stops will be made.
The pre-assembled or cast components of turn- (xLiii) Siding
outs, single and double slips, scissors and
diamond crossings, back, front and pull rods, A portion of a private siding which lies on land
and switch boxes. belonging to Transnet Limited.

(xxx) Private siding (xLiv) Siding extension

A length of railway track owned by a person or A portion of any private siding which lies on land
an organization other than Transnet Limited, not belonging to Transnet Limited.
which is connected to a track of Transnet (xLv) Sleeper
Limited.
An item of permanent-way material designated to
(xxxi) Rail fastenings support the rails and to hold them at the correct
Fish plates, fish bolts, washers, nuts and gauge.
insulating material.

803-2
(xLvi) Sleeper fastenings and from such other sources of supply as may be
The metal, insulating, elastic or plastic specified or approved from time to time.
components used for fastening the rails to the (b) Fill material
sleepers.
Fill material shall comply with the requirements of
(xLvii) Slewing a track subclause 03.02 of section 203, except that
Moving a track sideways to locate it accurately compaction shall be to 93% of modified AASHTO
on a new centre line. density.

(xLviii) Splice joint (c) Material for subballast layer

An expansion joint inserted in a track laid with Material for the subballast layer, whether stabilized
long welded rails. or not, shall not contain any rocks or stones the
maximum dimension of which exceeds 75 mm.
(xLix) Staging lines The material shall have a plasticity index not
Lines provided specifically for the staging of exceeding 10 and a CBR of at least 25% at
trucks for the purpose of sorting, loading or specified in situ density. Compaction of the
unloading. material shall be to 95% of modified AASHTO
density.
(L) Subballast layer
04.02 Materials for trackwork
The uppermost layer of the railway formation.
(a) General
(Li) Superelevation
The difference in level between the outer and All materials shall be subject to the Engineer's
inner rails of a curved track. approval.

(Lii) Table drain Except in the case of wood sleepers which shall
be new the PWM supplied may be new or
A drain along the edge of the formation. second-hand and of the size (or mass), class, or
(Liii) Take-off turn-out type specified in the Project Specifications or as
scheduled.
The turn-out from which a siding commences.
(b) Rails
(Liv) Tamping (tamping ballast or tracks)
Placing and compacting sufficient ballast under Rails shall be of class B or better and of standard
the sleepers to form a firm interlocking mass section. They shall be sound, free from flaws,
which will support the sleepers at the correct cracks, splits, and corrosion, and shall have at
level and enable trains to run without speed least one good running edge. Rails shall be at
restrictions. least 6 m in length and shall preferably be of the
nominal lengths of 12 m or 18 m. Welds shall be
(Lv) Total occupation at least 3 m from fish-plated or welded joints.
Closing of the line to public traffic for a specified Where second-hand rails are used :
period. The line will not be reopened until the
Permanent Way Inspector of Transnet Limited (i) Rail ends shall not be battered in excess of
certifies that it is safe to do so. 2 mm;
(Lvi) Transition curve (ii) A length of at least 300 mm shall be
A curve with a uniform rate of change of cropped to remove damaged rail ends;
curvature which connects a straight with a
(iii) Rails shall not have more than the
circular curve.
maximum wear given in the last column of
(Lvii) Turn-out table 803/1 appropriate to the mass per
An arrangement of switches and crossings which metre of the rails; and
enables a train to be diverted from one track to (iv) Rails shall have no holes through the web
another, and includes single and double slips. other than fish-bolt holes, which holes shall
(Lviii) Undercut not be flame-cut.
An excavation made below the formation level or Table 803/1
below the bottom of an embankment for the
removal of unsuitable material. MAXIMUM PERMISSIBLE WEAR OF
RAILS
(Lix) Vertical curve
A curve connecting two grades so as to give a Height of rail in mm Side wear
gradual change in vertical direction from one Nominal (min) in kg/m
grade to the other. mass of Class (max)
rail in
(Lx) Work permit kg/m All
Authority granted by Transnet Limited for work to A B C
classes
be done near an open line, a loop line, a
shunting line or near any other track of Transnet 57 156,5 152,7 148,7 7,5
Limited. 48 142,6 139,3 136,2 5,2
04 MATERIALS 40 121,0 118,2 115,7 3,1
04.01 Materials for earthworks 30 105,2 103,0 100,7 2,3
(a) General *21 - - - 1,6
Materials for use in fill and subballast layers shall * Maximum crown wear 3,0 kg/m.
be obtained from cuttings, approved borrow pits

803-3
(c) Junction rails (i) Turn-outs, slips and crossings
Junction rails shall be at least 6 m in length and Turn-outs, slips and crossings shall be supplied
made up of pieces with a length of at least 3,0 m. complete with crossing bearers of steel or wood
Welded joints in junction rails shall not interfere and the appropriate rail-to-bearer fastenings. The
with the sleeper spacing. Junction rails shall supply of turn-outs, slips and crossings shall also
have the same nominal mass and shall be of the include stocks and guards, stocks and switches,
same class as the rails in the existing track at the sole plates, closure rails, lead rails, internal fish
one end and of the same class of rail as specified plates, fish bolts and nuts, connecting rods, pull
for the siding at the other end. rods, steel-plate foot guards, switch boxes, and all
other fittings, fastenings, and accessories and,
(d) Junction fish plates where applicable, notched sole plates and gauge
Junction fish plates shall have been plates.
manufactured in an approved manner. (j) Stop blocks
(e) Fish bolts, nuts and washers Stop blocks of the fixed type or sliding type shall
Fish bolts and nuts shall match the type of fish- be constructed of class B or a better class of
plates supplied. Washers shall be of the double- second-hand rails of the same mass per metre as
coil type. Second-hand fish bolts and nuts shall, that of the rails to which they are connected, and
in the opinion of the Engineer, be sound in all shall include buffer beams, hardwood bumper
respects, and shall be used only with new spring blocks, running rails and fastenings, accessories,
washers (of the correct size). and bearers.

(f) Sleepers and crossing timbers and bearers (k) Derail devices

(i) Wood sleepers and crossing timbers Derail devices shall be of the type(s) scheduled or
given on the Drawings. They may consist of a
Wood sleepers and crossing timbers and standard Hayes type, or a stock-and-switch type
bearers shall be of new approved hardwood compounded with the take-off set of points, or a
or of an approved type of laminated standard scotch block manufactured from 30 kg/m
softwood, in each case free from splits and rail or from any suitable rolled-steel section that is
other imperfections such as dry rot, knot- not too heavy to handle. Each scotch block shall
holes, worm-holes, borer damage, and fungal be supplied with the additional sleepers and
attack. fastenings required and fitted with a stout chain
(ii) Steel sleepers and eye bolt to ensure locking in either the on or
the off position.
Steel sleepers shall be to a design approved
by Transnet Limited. They shall be supplied (I) Clearance markers
with rail-to-sleeper fastenings to suit the type Clearance markers shall consist of lengths of rail
of sleeper and the rail section being laid. or other approved material with a nominal length of
(iii) Concrete sleepers 1,7 m.
Concrete sleepers shall be of the siding type (m) Insulated rail joints (block joints) and rail bonds
with sleeper fastenings, all as approved by Insulated rail joints shall consist of laminated-wood
Transnet Limited. fish plates, approved insulation, and insulating
(g) Fish-plates shims with a thickness of at least 5 mm between
rails.
Fish plates shall be supplied in pairs and shall be
of the correct design for the type of rail being laid. Rail bonds shall consist of :
Fish-plates shall be sound in all respects and (i) in the case of a signal bond, at least two
second-hand fishplates shall be in such condition strands of copper wire with a diameter of at
that the remaining draw is at least 5 mm when the least 4 mm, and
fish bolts are pulled up to a torque of 340 Nm.
Fish-bolt holes shall not be worn or deformed. (ii) in the case of a traction bond, braided copper
wire with a cross-sectional area of at least
(h) Rail-to-sleeper fastenings 20 mm2, bonded to the rails in an acceptable
manner.
Sole plates shall be of a type to suit the rail
sections specified, and the rail shall have an (n) Ballast
inward cant of 1 in 20. Second-hand sole plates
shall be in a sound condition without any Ballast shall consist of approved hard broken
noticeable ridges on the rail-flange seat. hornfels, dolerite, tillite, quartzite, or similar
crushed stone that complies with requirements for
Rail chairs and check-rail chairs shall be suitable single-sized crushed stone for roads with a
for use with the rail sections specified, and shall nominal size of 53,0 mm as given in SANS 1083,
be supplied complete with rail-to-chair fastenings. except that the nominal aperture size of the largest
Second-hand rail chairs and check-rail chairs shall sieve used for the grading shall be 63,0 mm
be in a sound condition. (instead of 75,0 mm) and, instead of the
appropriate ACV specified in SANS 1083, the
Coach screws for hardwood sleepers shall be of
stone shall have an abrasion resistance of 34 as
size M22, type B galvanized, provided that type A
determined by the Los Angeles abrasion test. The
shall be used where the nominal thickness of the
flakiness index shall be as specified for crushed-
base plate is 30 mm.
stone pavement layers in TRH 14.
Type B galvanized coach screws shall be used
Samples and a grading analysis of the stone
with softwood and laminated softwood sleepers.
proposed by the Contractor to be used as a ballast
Fastenings used with concrete sleepers shall be of
shall be submitted to the Engineer for examination
a type acceptable to Transnet Limited.
and approval.

803-4
(o) Sign boards 07 TRACK WORK
Whistle boards, siding-number boards, and any 07.01 General
other railway sign boards required shall be of
(a) Safety
standard Transnet Limited pattern, shall be
painted in accordance with standard Transnet In addition to complying with the requirements of
Limited practice, and shall comply with the clause 17 of section 001 and in order to protect life
regulations of Transnet Limited. In the case of and property when working or when handling
level crossings, road signs shall conform to the equipment or material on or near running lines, the
requirements of the National Road Traffic Act Contractor shall take all precautions necessary for
(Act 93 of 1996). keeping personnel, plant and materials outside the
space defined by the fixed structure gauge as
05 PLANT AND EQUIPMENT depicted in specification E7 of Transnet Limited,
All tools and equipment for the handling of material and except that, when work is being carried out under
the proper completion of the work shall be provided by occupation conditions, personnel and plant may be
the Contractor. within the said space.

Power or hand-operated equipment shall be of a type When trucks loaded with PWM are handled, rail
approved for the type of fitting being fastened or the transporters, whether moved manually or
operation being carried out. mechanically, shall be propelled not faster than at
6 km/h on sidings with a length of less than 600 m.
The use of ballasting machinery will be permitted.
However, any heavy-weight and light-weight machines (b) Construction standards
intended for use on a track on which Transnet Limited The permanent way shall be constructed in
undertakes shunting shall be subject to approval by the accordance with the details shown on the siding
Engineer. plan and the requirements of Transnet Limited.
06 EARTHWORKS The Contractor shall ensure that he and his
workmen are familiar with and shall comply with
06.01 General the requirements of Permanent Way Instructions
published by the Chief Civil Engineer, Transnet
Earthworks shall comprise the construction of fills and
Limited, Johannesburg, and of Transnet Limited
the subballast layer, which work shall be carried out in
Specification E7: Specification for Works on, over,
accordance with sections 201 and 203. Minor variations
under or adjacent to a Railway Line, and
to the requirements of these sections are set out in this
E10: Specification for Plate laying and Ballasting.
clause.
(c) Setting out
06.02 Shallow cuts and fills of depth up to 300 mm
The Engineer will place pegs on the centre line of
Where the in situ material at formation level is straights and at each PI, BC, and EC, and the
acceptable, the top 200 mm or such other depth as may Contractor shall be responsible for the detailed
be directed shall be compacted to the density specified setting out of tracks and the provision of lift pegs.
for the subballast layer of embankments and finished to
the correct level. Unsuitable soil below formation level (d) Supervision
shall be removed by excavation to depths, widths, and The Contractor shall appoint a competent and
lengths as directed to permit the placing and experienced supervisor who has adequate
compacting to the specified density of backfill. Rock permanent-way experience and is a qualified
shall be removed to a depth below the finished level of platelayer, and trackwork shall be carried out only
200 mm or such other depth as may be directed, and under the personal supervision of the supervisor.
shall be replaced by approved compacted material.
The Engineer may stop the work at any time if
06.03 Fill layers such supervisor has not been appointed by the
Contractor or is not available on Site.
(a) The portion of the fill between the subballast and
1 m below the subballast shall be constructed of (e) Stacking and handling of PWM
material containing no lumps or stones with a Material shall be placed clear of the space defined
maximum dimension in excess of 75 mm and shall by the fixed structure gauge, and shall be stacked
be deposited in layers of thickness, before at least 3 m from the centre line of any track. With
compacting, not exceeding 300 mm. the exception of wood sleepers, PWM shall not be
(b) The portion of the fill more than one metre below the stacked on ash.
subballast level shall also be constructed in layers Rails shall be stacked, crown uppermost, on an
with a maximum uncompacted thickness of 300 mm even bed and so supported as to prevent bending
but by using material containing no lumps or stones and twisting.
larger than 300 mm.
Steel sleepers shall be stacked clear of the ground
(c) Rock excavated from cuttings shall only be used in with alternate layers at right angles to each other,
the portion of the fill described in (b) above and shall bottoms facing down, and in lots of not more than
be deposited in layers of thickness at least sufficient 100.
to accommodate the bulk of the material, provided
that the thickness of the uncompacted layer does Wood sleepers shall be stacked in lots of about
not exceed 750 mm. fifty. The sleepers of the first layer shall be
supported at each end by two parallel sleepers
06.04 Subballast layer placed on the ground. Subsequent layers shall be
The subballast layer shall be at least 200 mm thick and stacked so that the sleepers will rest with one end
shall be constructed from material complying with the on those below and with the other end on a
requirements of subclause 04.01(c) of this section. sleeper placed across the layer below, which will
give a stack in which every second layer is
horizontal and all alternative layers are sloping.

803-5
 The top layer shall be a sloping layer (to facilitate (c) Steel sleepers
drainage) and shall be covered with a protective Steel sleepers that show signs of obvious damage
layer of gravel. The ground within 6 m of each shall not be used. Clip bolts shall be lubricated
stack of wood sleepers shall be cleared of all
with an approved lubricant before they are
grass and weeds. tightened, but the clip and rail flange shall be kept
Concrete sleepers shall be stacked to a height not free from all lubricant. All clip bolts shall be fitted
exceeding 2,5 m. with spring washers unless otherwise directed.
Bags with rail and sleeper fastenings shall be The sleeper/clip combination shall be such that the
finished trackwork is laid to the gauge required in
stacked clear of the ground. Bolts and nuts shall be
terms of subclause 07.05 of this section.
oiled and stacked under cover to prevent rusting.
(d) Concrete sleepers
(f) Transport
Railway trucks loaded with PWM shall be No concrete sleepers shall be used if they show
unloaded within 36 h of the trucks being placed. any defect or sign of failure of the concrete, or if
the seat or shoulder to receive the rail or sole plate
The Contractor shall bear the cost of any
demurrage charges directly attributable to his has been damaged for more than a quarter of its
neglecting to unload within the specified time. length in any direction.
Surfaces of concrete sleepers, sole plates, and
07.02 Laying of sleepers chairs, and the surfaces of rails that bed on rubber
(a) General pads shall be brushed and cleaned immediately
before rail-laying.
Sleepers shall be laid square to the rails and
properly bedded. The nominal spacing of sleepers Rubber pads shall be thoroughly cleaned and,
shall be as shown on the Drawings. Welded joints while the rail is being laid, they shall be accurately
shall be so located that they will not interfere with positioned. Pads that show signs of distortion,
sleepers' spacing. All sleeper fittings shall be kept either during or after plate laying, shall be
clean while plate laying is in progress. Spring clips, removed and refitted correctly. Concrete sleepers
where used, shall be fitted in an approved manner. that are damaged because the fittings were
Coach-screw threads shall be dipped in creosote incorrectly assembled or were not kept clean, shall
before the coach screws are screwed down, and T- be removed from the track and from the Site of the
bolt threads shall be suitably lubricated before the Works.
bolts are tightened. Unless otherwise directed, the Concrete sleepers may not be handled carelessly
torque applied when sleeper fastenings are or dropped. Various makes of concrete sleepers
tightened shall be 340 plus or minus 20 Nm. and different types of fastenings shall not be
(b) Wood sleepers mixed in the track.
Hardwood sleepers shall be laid with the heart The Contractor shall obtain combinations of
down on the prepared formation. Holes for coach sleeper clips and details of sleeper fastenings from
screws, with a diameter of 13 mm for softwood and the Engineer and he shall ensure that the
17 mm for hardwood, shall be drilled through the combinations and fastenings do, in fact, give the
sleeper and square to the upper surface of the required gauge before he proceeds to use the
sleeper. Durable wood taper plugs or dowels with material.
a length of 25 mm shall be inserted and driven to Concrete sleepers may not be used on curves
the bottom of the holes, which shall be filled with sharper than those with a 240 m radius with 30 kg
creosote before the coach screws are screwed rails or a 300 m radius with heavier rails.
home. Coach screws shall not be hammered in. If
a coach screw is withdrawn from a sleeper and the To achieve uniformity, concrete sleepers with
hole is not to be re-used, the hole shall be plugged identical fastenings shall be grouped together in
the sections to be re-sleepered. This grouping
at once with a durable wood taper plug dipped in
creosote or tar. shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer
before the sleepers are ordered.
If sole plates or chairs with tapered keys are to be
used, the holes at only one end of the wood 07.03 Straightening and bending of rails
sleeper may be bored before the sleeper is placed Before placing rails on sleepers and before bending
in the track. The holes at the other end of the them for use in a curve, the Contractor shall remove all
sleeper must be drilled after the rails have been kinks in the rails.
laid to the correct gauge and keyed to the chairs.
During each bending operation the rail shall be so
Tapered or spring keys in chairs must be driven in supported on rollers that it will be free to move. Bending
the direction of traffic on unidirectional lines and may be done with a Jim-crow or by means of any other
as the Engineer directs on bi-directional lines. approved bending machine.
If chairs with clip or spring fastenings are to be
Rail bending shall be carried out only when the rail
used, all the holes in wood sleepers may be drilled
temperature exceeds 5°C. A rail with a length of 18 m
by using a template before the sleepers are placed or less that is bent for use in a curve shall be curved
in the track. over its full length. A rail with a length exceeding 18 m
If the Contractor drills holes in wood sleepers shall be curved over 6 m at both ends for a curve with a
incorrectly, he shall, at his own cost, plug the radius exceeding 500 m, and throughout its length for a
faulty holes with dowels of the correct diameter, curve with a radius of 500 m and less.
125 mm long, dipped in creosote. If more than
Subject to the aforementioned, curved track rails shall
4 holes are drilled incorrectly in any sleeper, the
be uniformly bent in accordance with the standard offset
sleeper will be condemned and the cost of its
for the length of rail used and the radius of the curve.
replacement, including that of handling and
transport to the Site, will be recovered from the
Contractor.

803-6
07.04 Laying of rails (iii) 26 mm for 40 kg/m and 30 kg/m rails.
(a) General All burrs and rough edges shall be removed after
Except where the Contractor is required, in terms drilling.
of the Project Specifications and the Schedule of (e) Jointing
Quantities, to supply and install a take-off turn-out,
rails shall be laid from the end of a take-off turn- In the case of electrified lines with bonded rails,
out that has already been installed (by Transnet fish-plated joints shall be assembled with the nuts
Limited, in the case of track owned by Transnet on the gauge side of the rails. The fishing surfaces
Limited). PWM surfaces that bear on pads shall be of fish plates and the threads of fish bolts shall be
brushed clean before insertion of the pads. Each oiled or greased immediately before the joints are
second-hand rail shall be laid with the better assembled, and the fastenings shall be tightened
running edge on the gauge side. Second-hand to a torque of 340 ± 20 Nm. Spring washers shall
rails shall be matched for height. be fitted under all the nuts.

If there is a mismatch of more than 1 mm in a Junction fish plates may be used where required
running line laid or rerailed with reconditioned as a temporary measure during rerailing
rails, the crowns of the rail ends shall be built up operations, or at stop blocks, or for joints at turn-
or ground on a slope flatter that 1 in 200 to reduce outs involving different rail sections.
the mismatch to a maximum of 1 mm when the fish
Before any items of permanent way material are
plates are in position and the fish bolts are pulled
assembled, all contact surfaces shall be cleaned,
up tight.
oiled, greased or black-leaded and polished as
No grinding or building-up is to be done to rail required, except the contact surfaces between the
ends in yard tracks laid with reconditioned rails. rails, sleepers and sleeper fastenings which shall
be kept free from oil, grease or any foreign matter.
If any track is to be laid or rerailed with second-
hand rails which have not been reconditioned, the Junction rails shall be used for joining rails of
Contractor shall select the rails and lay them so different profile.
that, after the fish plates have been installed and
Temporary closure rails inserted to allow trains to
the fish bolts tightened, any mismatch in height will
pass during rerailing may be flame-cut to any
not exceed 2,5 mm. In running lines, the rail end at
length but shall be secured to all the supporting
such joints shall be built up and/or ground on a
sleepers. Fish-bolt holes need not be drilled in
slope flatter than 1 in 200 to reduce the mismatch
such temporary closure rails, but the fish plates
to 1 mm.
shall be fastened with at least 2 clamps at each
(b) Locating of joints joint.

Rails shall be laid with square joints. On curves If a temporary closure rail is left in the track
where special rails are 75 mm shorter than rails overnight, both ends must be fish-plated and
used on straights, the lead at joints shall not fastened with 4 fish bolts. The length of the
exceed 40 mm, and where special rails 100 mm temporary closure rail shall be at least 3,5 m.
shorter than straight rails are used, the lead shall
Rail joints near turn-outs, bridges and level
not exceed 50 mm. Where no special rails are
crossings shall be made where directed by the
supplied, the lead of one rail on the other on
Engineer.
curves shall not exceed 60 mm.
(f) Level crossings
To ensure, when necessary, that the lead does not
exceed 60 mm, the Contractor shall cut the end of On lines within 30 m of an electrified line, the
the rail so that one fish-bolt hole is in the correct Contractor shall, before use, tar that length of any
position and shall drill an additional fish-bolt hole. rail which must be buried at level crossings.
Closure rails should preferably be at least 6 m in
length but shall, in any event, be at least 3,5 m in 07.05 Gauging and fastening of rails to sleepers
length, and shall be secured to at least 5 sleepers.
(a) Gauging
(c) Expansion gaps (i) Except where otherwise specified (see (ii)
Expansion gaps shall be left at joint in accordance below), the gauge shall be 1 065 mm for
with the temperature of the rail and the relevant standard straight track. On curves the gauge
requirements given in table 803/2. shall conform to the appropriate values given in
table 803/3.
(d) Cutting and drilling
(ii) At the beginning and end of untransitioned
Rails shall be cut with an approved rail saw or circular curves, the widening of the gauge shall
cutting disc. Rails shall not be cut with flame be carried out by the gauge on the straight
cutters or cold sets. The cut surface shall be being gradually increased at the rate of 5 mm
planar and perpendicular to the long axis of the per 12 m until the gauge for the curve is
rail. If possible, the cut shall be so located that any attained at the beginning of the circular curve.
remaining fish-bolt hole will be serviceable.
(iii) At the beginning and end of transitioned
Fish-bolt holes shall be drilled with an approved circular curves, the widening of the gauge shall
rail drill. If fish-bolt holes are drilled incorrectly, a be carried out by the gauge on the transition
piece of rail shall be cut off and fresh holes drilled curve being gradually increased from a point
at the Contractor's expense. Fish-bolt holes shall 6 m inside the beginning of the transition curve
not be flame-cut. The nominal diameters of fish- to a point 6 m short of the beginning of the
bolt holes shall be : circular curve. The increase in the gauge shall
(i) 35 mm for 57 kg/m rails, be at the rate of 5 mm per quarter of the length
of the transition curve.
(ii) 32 mm for 48 kg/m rails, and

803-7
(b) Fastening to wood sleepers
Switches shall fit the stock rail closely and accurately
Where sole plates are used on wood sleepers, with a full bearing against the head and shall rest
coach screws shall be screwed home tightly with a normally on the slide chairs.
box spanner until the full width of the overlap
firmly grips the flange of the rail (see also No part of a turn-out shall have wear in excess of the
subclause 07.02). For 22 mm diameter coach maximum given in table 803/1, except that the minimum
screws, the diameter of holes in wood sleepers height of stock rails of stocks and guards and any
shall be 17 mm. Threads of each coach screw crossing shall be as follows:
shall be dipped in creosote before the coach 57 kg rail 155 mm
screw is inserted in a sleeper. Coach screws shall
not be hammered in. 48 kg rail 140 mm
40 kg rail 117 mm
(c) Fastening to steel sleepers
30 kg rail 105 mm.
Gauge clips and bolts for steel sleepers shall be
so combined during fastening that the finished Each set shall closely match the rails in the line in
track will be of the specified gauge. which it is inserted. Tumbler weights of switch boxes
shall be painted with one coat of an approved primer
(d) Fastening to concrete sleepers and two coats of an approved white paint.
Clips for concrete sleepers shall be applied or 07.09 Stop blocks
removed only by means of the recommended and
approved puller or lever, as may be applicable. Stop blocks shall be laid, jointed, lifted, tamped, and
Clips that are not designed to be driven in shall not boxed in as specified in subclauses 07.04, 07.05 and
be driven in. 07.07 of this section. Stop blocks shall be painted with
one coat of an approved primer and two coats of an
07.06 Superelevation
approved white paint.
Curves shall be provided with the relevant
superelevation given on the Drawings or specified in the 07.10 Clearance markers
Project Specifications and for the operating conditions Clearance markers shall be placed between converging
given in the Project Specifications. The superelevation tracks at points where the distance between centres is
of curves in yard tracks shall not exceed 10 mm. The 3,45 m in the case of a 1 065 mm gauge track, and
rate of change of superelevation shall be uniform and 2,75 m in the case of a 610 mm gauge track. The
shall not exceed 1 in 500. No negative superelevation markers shall consist of second-hand rails bedded with
will be accepted. the flange uppermost (or other approved material
07.07 Lifting, tamping and boxing in acceptably bedded) and level with the adjoining ground,
or ballast, or excess fill, as may apply. The exposed
Ballast shall be spread at the rate stated in the Project surface of each clearance marker shall be painted with
Specifications or given on the Drawings or Scheduled. one coat of an approved primer and two coats of an
After plate laying, the track shall be lifted uniformly and approved white paint.
evenly, both rails together, care being taken to ensure
that the top of the track is kept in line. The track shall 07.11 Filling between tracks
be brought to its proper height by successive lifts, each
The spaces between tracks where shunters and other
not exceeding 100 mm.
operating staff are required to walk shall be filled with -
Sleepers shall be firmly tamped underneath the rails but
(a) clean-washed power-station ash with good
only lightly tamped at the centre. Each sleeper shall be
drainage properties, or
tamped to the same degree of firmness. Joint sleepers
shall be tamped last. (b) an approved fill material,
After tamping, ballast shall be made up and boxed into to within 50 mm of the required finished level.
line in a neat and workmanlike manner. The finished The upper 50 mm shall be filled with aggregate
ballast shall have a top width of 2,6 m and a slope of with a nominal size of 6,7 mm.
1:1,5 on the shoulders. The top of the ballast shall be
level with the tops of the sleepers except that, in the 07.12 Derail devices
case of concrete sleepers, it shall be level with the tops
of the centre portions of the sleepers. Derail devices shall be supplied and installed by the
Contractor in the positions shown on the Drawings or as
On completion, the track shall be true to line, curvature, directed. Each derail device shall be painted with one
and grade, and the entire work shall present a neat and coat of an approved primer and two coats of an
workmanlike appearance. approved white paint.
07.08 Turn-outs, slips and crossings 07.13 Signboards
Turn-outs, slips and crossings shall be constructed Signboards shall be installed in the positions shown on
complete with crossing bearers, standard switch boxes, the Drawings. In the case of level crossings, road signs
and foot guards to the standard gauges and clearances shall be erected in accordance with the requirements of
required by Transnet Limited (see Transnet Limited the National Road Traffic Act, (Act 93 of 1996) and to
specification E 10). the correct clearances laid down in the relevant
regulations of Transnet Limited.
Working parts shall slide freely on the slide chairs.

803-8
 Table 803/2

EXPANSION GAPS FOR DIFFERENT LENGTHS OF RAIL

Nominal length of rail in m

9 and 10 12 18 36
In areas of high In areas of moderate
Temperature Gap Temperature Gap Temperature Gap temperature temperature
°C in mm °C in mm °C in mm Temperature Gap Temperature Gap
°C in mm °C in mm
-5 to 10 7 -5 to 10 8 -5 to 5 12 10 to 20 15 5 to 15 15

10 to 25 5 10 to 20 7 5 to 20 9 20 to 30 12 15 to 20 12

25 to 40 3 20 to 30 5 20 to 30 6 30 to 35 9 20 to 25 9

40 to 50 1 30 to 40 3 30 to 45 3 35 to 45 6 25 to 35 6

50 and over 0 40 to 50 1 45 and over 0 45 to 50 3 35 to 40 3

50 and over 0 50 to 60 0 40 to 50 0

Table 803/3

TRACK GAUGES ON CURVES

Not check-railed Check-railed

Radius in m
Specified gauge Maximum permissible Specified gauge Maximum permissible
in mm gauge in mm in mm gauge in mm

Less than 135 1 085 1 105 1 090 1 105

Equal to 135 and up to 150 1 080 1 100 1 085 1 105

Over 150 and up to 175 1 075 1 095 - -

Over 175 and up to 200 1 070 1 090 - -

Over 200 1 065 1 085 - -

08 TOLERANCES 09 TESTING AND INSPECTION

Permissible tolerance limits shall be as follows: 09.01 Testing of earthworks

08.01 For earthworks Testing of earthworks shall comply with the

requirements of clause 13 of section 203.
The formation shall be constructed to the same
dimensional tolerances as given for fill in clause 12 of 09.02 Inspection of trackwork
section 203. When construction is complete, the Contractor shall
08.02 For trackwork furnish the Engineer with a Certificate of Completion in
the form required by Transnet Limited. The Contractor
The permissible deviation (PD) shall be within the shall attend upon the PWI or other Transnet Limited
appropriate limits of the following limits in respect of officials during the checking of clearances, gauges,
degree of accuracy III in the case of a private siding, superelevations and other features of trackwork. At his
and degree of accuracy II of work done on Transnet own cost, the Contractor shall rectify work that, in the
Limited tracks (see table 803/4). opinion of the PWI, does not comply with the
requirements of Transnet Limited.

803-9
 Table 803/4

TOLERANCES FOR TRACKWORK

Permissible deviation
Degree of accuracy
III II
mm mm
(a) Track alignment
PD from true staked centre line ± 20 ±6
PD from true level of track ± 20 ±3
(b) Track gauge (straights)
PD from gauges specified in subclause 07.05 ±3 ±3
(c) Straightness of track
PD from a 5 m straight line ±5 ±2
(d) Superelevation
PD at any two points 1 200 mm apart ±4 ±3
PD at any point in the track ± 14 ± 12
(e) Sleeper spacing
PD from nominal spacing specified ± 25 ± 25
PD at joint sleepers ± 10 ± 10
(f) Circular curves
PD from the standard offset for offsets measured on a 10 m chord ±5 ±5
(g) Structure clearance
PD of clearance for track laid adjacent to fixed structure - 0 + 10 - 0 + 10
(h) Platform level
PD from specified height between rail level and platform level ± 20 ±3
(i) Sleeper dimensions
PD from nominal length - 0 + 75 *
PD from nominal width - 0 + 75 *
PD from nominal depth - 0 + 25 *
PD from parallel (top and bottom) ± 10 *
PD from parallel (sides) ± 25 *

* As stated in the Project Specifications if a better accuracy than degree of accuracy III is required.

10 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Item Unit

Notes: 803.01 Excavation and borrow to
fill and subballast layer
(a) Pay items for earthworks
(soft material)
All pay items under section 203 : Mass 803.01.01 Compaction to a percentage
earthworks, shall apply to the construction of
of modified AASHTO density:
earthworks for railway sidings, except
item 203.01, which is to be replaced with pay 803.01.01.01 Fill to 93% of modified
item 803.01 below. The contents of the note at the AASHTO density cubic metre (m3)
beginning of clause 14 of section 203 shall also
apply to the taking of cross-sections for the 803.01.01.02 Subballast layer to 95%
calculation of quantities for earthworks for railway of modified AASHTO
sidings. density cubic metre (m3)

(b) Payment for down-lets 803.01.02 Rock fill processing and

3
compaction cubic metre (m )
Down-lets shall be measured and paid for under
the relevant pay items of section 503. 803.01.03 Twelve-pass roller-
compaction cubic metre (m3)

803-10
The unit of measurement shall be the cubic metre of 803.02.08 Fish bolts, nuts and spring
material measured in the compacted fill and subballast washers
layers. The quantity measured shall be computed after
clearing and grubbing and the removal of topsoil and 803.02.08.01 (Type stated) set
completion of any preparatory construction-bed 803.02.08.02 Etc for other types
treatment which may have been ordered by the
Engineer. For measurement a distinction shall be made 803.02.09 Stop blocks complete
between the three alternative methods of processing including buffer
and compacting.
803.02.09.01 (Type stated) number (No)
Material excavated for the construction of open drains,
subsurface drains, culverts, bridge foundations and 803.02.09.02 Etc for other types
other structures shall, if it is of a suitable quality and if
803.02.10 Etc for other items
directed by the Engineer, be used for the construction
of the fill or subballast, and payment shall be made The unit of measurement for the supply, delivery and
under this item notwithstanding any payment previously stockpiling of the various items of trackwork shall be the
made for the excavation of such material. All such ton, number, set or pair as scheduled.
material shall be classified as soft excavation. The
tendered rates shall also include full compensation for The rates tendered shall also include full compensation
for the cost of stockpiling the material.
removing and disposing of up to 5% of oversized
material after processing, including transport within the Item Unit
specified Site boundaries, except where material is
obtained from borrow pits found by the Contractor. 803.03 Lay and Install plain track
work complete using :
For payment purposes a distinction shall be made
between the three methods of processing and 803.03.01 (Class of rail stated) metre (m)
compacting specified, as itemized above. Compaction 803.03.02 Etc for other classes
to 98% of proof density shall be paid at the rate
tendered for subitem 803.01.01 in accordance with The unit of measurement for laying and installing plain
subclause 05.02 of section 203. track work (PWM) shall be the metre of each class of rail
laid complete and approved but excluding ballasting.
Item Unit Measurement shall be along the centre line of the track
803.02 Supply, deliver and stockpile and no deductions will be made for the lengths occupied
track work: by turn-outs (other than take-off turn-outs), slips,
crossings, stop blocks, short-radius curves, etc, as they
803.02.01 Rails will be paid for as "extra over" to the plain track work.
803.01.01.01 (Length and class of rail stated) ton (t) Where measurement starts at take-off turn-outs, it will
be made from the stock rail joint.
803.01.01.02 Etc for other lengths and classes
The tendered rates shall include full compensation for
803.02.02 Sleepers transporting the materials from the stockpiles, for
803.02.02.01 (Type and length of sleeper sorting, laying and installing the material as may apply,
stated) number (No) for selecting second-hand rails where specified, for
alignment of the completed track, the cost of having all
803.02.02.02 Etc for other types and lengths materials inspected by the PWI before use, and the cost
of fees payable to Transnet Limited for inspection and
803.02.03 Rail-to-sleeper fastenings for rails testing of the siding on completion of the work.
other than check and running rails
Item Unit
803.02.03.01 (Type of fastening stated) number (No)
803.04 Extra over Item 803.03 for laying
803.02.03.02 Etc for other types and installing the following:
803.02.04 Rail-to-sleeper fastenings for 803.04.01 Tracks on short-radius curves
check and running rails
803.04.01.01 (Range of radius stated) metre (m)
803.02.04.01 (Type and fastening stated) set 803.04.01.02 Etc for other ranges of radii
803.02.04.01 Etc for other types 803.04.02 Turn-outs (excluding take-off
803.02.05 Turn-outs, slips and crossings turn-outs)
complete but excluding sleepers 803.04.02.01 (Angle of turn-out stated) set
803.02.05.01 (Type and angle stated) set 803.04.02.02 Etc for other angles
803.02.05.02 Etc for other types and angles 803.04.03 Slips
803.02.06 Sleepers for turn-outs, slips and 803.04.03.01 (Angle of slip stated) set
crossings, including fastenings 803.04.02.02 Etc. for other angles
803.02.06.01 (Type and angle stated) set 803.04.04 Crossings
803.02.06.01 Etc for other types and angles 803.04.04.01 (Angle of crossing stated) set
803.02.07 Fish plates 803.04.04.02 Etc for other angles
803.02.07.01 (Type stated) pair (pr) The unit of measurement shall be the metre of curved
803.02.07.01 Etc for other types rail or the number of sets of turn-outs, slips or crossings
installed and approved.

803-11
The tendered rates shall be extra over the rates Item Unit
tendered under item 803.03 and shall include full
803.09 Replace sleepers
compensation for all extra costs involved for carrying
out the work as specified or as detailed on the 803.09.01 With rails in position
Drawings. Distinction shall be made between different 803.09.01.01 (Type and length stated) number (No)
curves, turn-outs, slips and crossings.
803.09.01.02 Etc for other types and lengths
Item Unit
803.09.02 On turn-outs, slips and
803.05 Supply and Install take-off crossings
turn-out complete set
803.09.02.01 (Type and angle stated) set
The unit of measurement shall be the number of take-off 803.09.02.02 Etc for other types and angles
turnouts installed complete and approved. The tendered
rate shall include full compensation for all the activities The unit of measurement shall be the number of each
as specified in the payment paragraph of item 803.03 as type and length of sleeper replaced and the number of
well as for the cost of taking temporary occupation, sets of sleepers replaced for each angle of turn-out, slip
cutting rails, removing an appropriate length of track and crossing.
owned by Transnet Limited and the handing-over of
The tendered rates shall include full compensation for
such material in a dismantled form to Transnet Limited,
opening the ballast, releasing sleeper fastenings,
as well as for slewing in (or installing by other means)
removing old sleepers to stockpile and supplying and
and connecting up the take-off turn-out.
inserting new sleepers, cleaning fastenings, replacing
Item Unit old fastenings with new ones if necessary, revamping
the ballast, aligning the track, and for boxing-in.
803.06 Welding of rails into
long lengths number (No) Item Unit
803.10 Replace the following:
The unit of measurement shall be the number of welded
joints constructed and approved. 803.10.01 Rails
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for all 803.10.01.01 (Length and class of rail stated) ton (t)
labour, plant and materials needed for completing the 803.10.01.02 Etc. for other lengths and classes
work as specified.
803.10.02 Turn-outs, slips and crossings
Item Unit
803.10.02.01 (Type and angle stated) set
803.07 Provide and distribute 803.10.02.02 Etc for other types and angles
ballast and lift, tamp, and
box-in the track cubic metre (m3) The unit of measurement shall be the ton of each length
and class of rail replaced or the number of sets of turn-
The unit of measurement shall be the cubic metre of outs, slips and crossings replaced for each different angle.
ballast placed in the final position in accordance with
the specified cross-section under all tracks, turn-outs, The tendered rates shall include full compensation for
stop blocks, etc. No deduction will be made for the removing existing rail fittings, removing rails or sets,
volume of stone displaced by the sleepers. cleaning and oiling fittings ready for re-use, supplying
and laying new rails or sets, using new or original rail
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for
fittings, realigning the track, lifting the released rails,
supplying, stockpiling if necessary, placing and
and transporting them to designated stockpile.
compacting the ballast, for all transport, for lifting the
trackwork in successive lifts to the required level and for Item Unit
the boxing-in of the tracks, all as specified. Ballast
placed in excess of the specified dimensions shall not 803.11 Reballasting
be measured for payment. 803.11.01 Repack and box-in existing
Item Unit track work :

803.08 Provide and install miscellaneous 803.11.01.01 By mechanical methods metre (m)
items 803.11.01.02 By manual methods metre (m)
803.08.01 Rail lubricator 803.11.02 Remove and screen existing
803.08.01.01 (Type stated) number (No) ballast :
3
803.08.01.02 Etc. for other types 803.11.02.01 By mechanical methods cubic metre (m )
803.08.02 Etc. for other items 803.11.02.02 By manual methods cubic metre (m3)
The unit of measurement shall be the number of items The units of measurement shall be the metre of track-
such as lubricator, clearance marker, track sign, work repacked and boxed-in with ballast, or the cubic
insulating block joint, etc, provided and installed to the metre of ballast removed, screened and replaced.
satisfaction of the PWI. Distinction shall be made between mechanical and
The rates tendered shall include full compensation for manual methods of carrying out the work.
all labour, plant and materials necessary for providing The rates tendered shall include full compensation in
and installing the item as specified or as shown on the the case of subitem 803.11.01 for all costs involved to
Drawings. repack and box in the trackwork and, in the case of
subitem 803.11.02 for the sampling, removal,
screening, recovery and profiling of the ballast, for
lifting, packing and boxing-in of the track work and for
disposal of screenings to sites found by the Contractor.

803-12
SERIES 8 : SPECIFIC WORKS (h) Pipe boring pits
Excavations at either end of the boring operation
SECTION 804 : PIPE JACKING AND BORING from and between which boring and pipe
installation are carried out.
CONTENTS
(i) Reception pit
01 SCOPE An excavated shaft located at the end of a jacked
02 APPLICATION section of a pipeline, from which the shield is
03 DEFINITIONS recovered.
04 MATERIALS
05 PLANT (j) Shield
06 DESIGN A device located at the leading end of the jacking
07 SAFETY structure, which is intended to provide protection
08 SURVEYING for workmen at the leading end and to prevent the
09 BLASTING collapse of the face of the tunnel excavation.
10 CONSTRUCTION
11 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS (k) Thrust pit
12 TOLERANCES An excavated shaft at the starting point of a
13 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT jacking operation, in which the jacking structure
and other equipment are installed and from which
01 SCOPE the jacking operations are carried out.
This section covers the insertion, by jacking and boring, (l) Thrust plate
of underground pipes without disturbing the surface.
A steel plate placed against the end of the pipe
against which the jack operates, and which is
02 APPLICATION intended to ensure that the jacking forces are
The information regarding pipe jacking contained in this spread uniformly over the end face of the pipe.
section is not limited to the jacking of circular precast (m) Thrust block
concrete pipe sections but also applies in general to the
jacking of rectangular, square and arched precast- A temporary structure constructed inside the thrust
concrete sections. pit for the purpose of transferring the jacking
forces to the adjacent soil.
Where boring is to be carried out, the Contractor shall,
as is the case for jacking, make use of an approved
04 MATERIALS
specialist firm.
04.01 Pipes
03 DEFINITIONS
Unless otherwise specified, the pipes for jacking shall
For the purposes of this section, the following words
be reinforced concrete pipes of the SC type and D-load
and expressions shall have the meanings hereby
designation 100D which comply with the relevant
assigned to them except where inconsistent with the
requirements of SANS 677. The actual diameters of
context.
pipes supplied shall be not less than the nominal
(a) Intermediate jacking station diameters given on the Drawings or stated in the
Schedule of Quantities. In addition to withstanding the
A transverse joint in a jacked structure at which
specified two (or three) edge-bearing test load, the
jacking is performed.
pipes shall be capable of withstanding, without being
(b) Jacking damaged, the maximum longitudinal force to be
transmitted by the jacks during jacking.
The action of pushing a pipeline into position.
Pipes for pipe boring shall be any of the pipes specified
(c) Jacking frame under sections 106, 301 and 401.
A frame on which the jacks are mounted and
through which the jacking forces are transmitted. 04.02 Other precast-concrete sections

(d) Jacking structure Any precast-concrete sections, other than pipes, to be

jacked shall comply with the requirements specified in
An assembly comprising the jacking frame, the the Project Specifications and as shown on the
permanent pipes to be jacked, and the shield. Drawings.
(e) Lead pipe 04.03 Intermediate jacking stations
A pipe that has a rebated end over which the
trailing end of the shield is fitted and which is Under certain circumstances it may be necessary to
intended to be the first pipe to be used in the provide one or more intermediate jacking stations
jacking process. between the thrust and reception pits. Such stations
shall consist of a pair of modified jacking pipes. In order
(f) Pilot hole to protect and form the joint between these pipes, the
Contractor shall provide cylindrical mild steel sleeves
A hole with a maximum diameter of 50 mm, drilled
with a wall thickness of at least 8 mm and of such
to ensure that a subsequently bored, larger hole,
length that they overlap the pipes for a distance of at
will be properly aligned.
least 150 mm on each side of the joint.
(g) Pipe boring
The work involved in boring a horizontal hole and
inserting a pipe therein.

804-1
05 PLANT Before commencing work in the vicinity of any structure,
the Contractor shall make a detailed examination of the
05.01 General structure, record its condition, and submit a copy of
The Contractor shall in the case of jacking, provide and such record to the Engineer.
use suitable equipment for handling pipes and placing
them in position for jacking, for jacking the pipes, for the 08 SURVEYING
lubrication of the outer surface of the pipeline, and for
08.01 General
excavation within the pipe and in the case of pipe
boring, for boring the hole and for jointing and inserting The Contractor shall take measurements before and
the pipes. after each jacking or boring operation and shall record
any change in line or level (or both) of any road, rail
05.02 Jacks
track or other service or structure being traversed. A
The jacks shall be fitted with a suitably calibrated copy of the records shall be submitted to the Engineer
pressure gauge in a good working order which will on the same day.
enable the actual jacking forces to be read at any time
during the jacking operation. To transfer the load from 08.02 Working under roadways
the jacks to the pipes, suitable thrust plates and Before commencing work under a roadway, the
spacers shall be provided. Contractor shall measure levels on the road surface
05.03 Shield directly above the jacking line and for a distance of at
least 5 m on each side of the jacking line. These levels
A suitable shield for fitting to the front of the lead pipe shall be measured at 500 mm intervals and 300 mm
shall be provided by the Contractor to protect workmen from the edges of the surfacing. In order to facilitate
and prevent the collapse of the face or roof of the control of the measuring of levels, the exact position of
excavation ahead of the jacked structure. The shield each spot height shall be discreetly marked on the road
shall be directionally adjustable. surface before the levels are measured.
05.04 Lighting After completion of the Works, the Contractor shall
remeasure the levels in the same manner as before,
The Contractor shall provide adequate lighting for the and he shall submit to the Engineer the final records of
execution of the Works. levels taken before and after jacking. The submission of
05.05 Guides such records shall be a prerequisite for any
consideration by the Engineer of the acceptability or
Where necessary, guides shall be provided within the otherwise of the Works or the issue of any certificate of
thrust pit to facilitate initial directional control of the completion.
pipes.
If, within the Defects Liability Period, the road shows
05.06 Ventilation any sign of settlement in the vicinity of the jacked pipe,
the road authority may remeasure the levels on the
Sufficient ventilation shall be provided to remove dust Site.
and to ensure safe working conditions.
The Contractor shall be held responsible for the
06 DESIGN rectification, to the satisfaction of the road authority and
the Engineer, of any deformation that occurs in the road
The Contractor shall furnish detailed design surface as a result of the jacking operation during the
calculations, specifications and working drawings to said period of one year.
explain his methods of installation and of providing
temporary support for the road, rail track, or other Should level measurements in accordance with this
service or structure and any modifications to structures subclause also be required in respect of boring, it will
required before pipe jacking commences. The above be specified in the Project Specifications.
information shall, when required by the Engineer, also
be provided in the case of pipe boring. 08.03 Checking the alignment of the pipeline

The design shall be carried out by a professional The Contractor shall check the line and the level of the
engineer with adequate experience in this field. pipeline at least once during the installation of each
Calculations, specifications and drawings shall be pipe length and shall take such corrective action as may
signed by the engineer responsible for their preparation. be necessary. A copy of the results of all checks and a
statement of any corrective measures taken shall be
07 SAFETY available for inspection on the Site, and a copy shall be
given to the Engineer on the same day.
07.01 General
09 BLASTING
The Contractor shall at all times observe adequate
safety precautions on the Site as specified in clause 17 No blasting will be allowed for pipe boring. For pipe
of section 001. Permission to proceed with the Works jacking, no blasting shall be carried out without the prior
shall not in any way detract from the obligations and written permission of the Engineer, and without the
liabilities of the Contractor in regard to such safety or to necessary approval or clearance having been obtained
the adequacy of the jacking structures and methods of from the relevant authority.
working.
10 CONSTRUCTION
07.02 Safety of existing works
10.01 General
The pipeline shall be jacked or bored through under the
relevant road, railway or other service or structure Jacking, excavation, boring and other specialized work
without disrupting the traffic and without disturbing the shall be undertaken only by persons fully conversant
alignment or levels of the road surface, the tracks, or with the work.
other relevant service or structure to an extent that may
impair the safety of traffic or of the service or structure.

804-2
Jacking and boring operations shall commence at the (c) Jacking of pipes
lower level of the pipeline. Should Site conditions
Excavation shall be such that overbreak is kept to
necessitate or permit jacking or boring to be carried out
a minimum. No material shall be removed in
from the higher level of the pipeline, the Engineer's
advance of the leading edge where the leading
written approval shall be obtained before the work
edge is in unstable or loose material. If the
commences.
material at the face starts to slip or run, excavation
The Contractor shall not commence any work until the shall be stopped immediately and the Contractor
Engineer has specified, in writing, that the Contractor shall take such action as may be necessary to
may proceed. stabilize the material before excavation is
resumed.
10.02 Excavation
Should any unforseen cavities be exposed during
Subject to the provisions of clause 09 above, the jacking, such voids shall be filled immediately with
appropriate requirements of sections 201 and 202 shall grout in a manner approved by the Engineer.
apply.
To ensure a minimum of overbreak, the first
(a) Classification of materials excavated concrete pipe used shall be so rebated that the
The materials excavated shall be classified as outside diameters of the shield and the pipeline
follows for payment purposes: will not differ substantially.
(i) Hard material: The Contractor shall ensure that the head of the
excavation is drained at all times.
Material which cannot be excavated efficiently
except with the use of pneumatic tools, blasting Under no circumstances will jetting be permitted.
or wedging and splitting, and shall include
3
boulders exceeding 0,15 m in volume. 10.03 Jacking procedure
Each pipe shall be advanced by means of hydraulic
For pipe boring operations, the material
jacks of adequate capacity which bear against a
penetrated will be classified as hard when the
suitable thrust plate so as to distribute the thrust of the
Contractor can prove that the work cannot be
jacks uniformly over the end face of the pipe.
efficiently carried out by using normal boring
equipment and some other method, such as The rear end of each jack shall so bear against a
rock drilling, has to be used. suitably designed structure as to transfer the force to
the surrounding material and to distribute it evenly over
(ii) Soft material: an area large enough to ensure that the bearing
All material not classified as hard material. capacity of the soil will not be exceeded and that no
structure in the vicinity of the thrust pit will be disturbed.
Notwithstanding the above classification, all material in
previously constructed fills, embankments and The Contractor may, with the written permission of the
pavement layers and through which jacking or boring is Engineer, inject a suitable lubricant through preformed
carried out, shall be classified as soft material. holes in the structure or in the shield. Resilient packing
material shall be inserted between the faces of
The decision of the Engineer as to the classification of successive pipe units so as to distribute the thrust
the material shall be final and binding, and any evenly over the circumference of the pipes.
objection as to the classification shall be made before
At the conclusion of a day's work, the shield shall be
the pipes are jacked or, in the case of pipe boring,
jacked up to the tunnel face. If intermediate jacking
some method other than boring is used.
stations are used, the trailing units shall be jacked
Special reference shall be made to clause 16 of forward until the jacks in the intermediate stations are in
section 001 regarding the classification of excavated the unextended position. Spacers shall be placed
material in restricted areas. between the jacking frame and the pipe with all the
jacks being in the unextended position and ready to
(b) Thrust and reception pits and pipe boring pits jack in an emergency.
The Contractor shall be responsible for excavating 10.04 Pipe boring
the pits in the positions indicated on the Drawings
at each end of the section of pipeline or sleeve After the pits have been completed, and on the written
that is to be jacked. These pits shall be of instructions of the Engineer, a pilot hole shall be drilled
dimensions at least equal to the minimum using suitable equipment. After the pilot hole has been
dimensions needed for the Contractor's equipment inspected and approved, it shall be enlarged by boring
and for safe and efficient working. The to the diameter required for the installation of the
approximate dimensions of the pits that the specified pipe.
Contractor intends to excavate shall be agreed 10.05 Grouting and sealing
upon with the Engineer before work commences.
The excavated material shall be stockpiled for Before each jacking operation, the Contractor shall
later backfilling. determine, in an approved manner, the average cross-
section of the completed excavation ahead of the
The sides of the pits shall be adequately pipeline and shall submit his calculations to the
supported by timbers or by other approved means. Engineer on the same day.
Where a pit adjoins a railway line or a heavily used
road, the sides of the pit shall be shored during the These cross-sections, together with the external pipe
entire operation to prevent any movement caused diameter, shall be used for calculating the approximate
by vibration arising from rail or road traffic from volume of grout that will be needed after the entire
occurring. jacking operation has been completed and will assist in
determining whether all voids have been grouted.
The Contractor shall ensure that the pits are
dewatered at all times.

804-3
When the jacked pipeline is in its final position, a sand - Permissible tolerance limits shall be as follows:
cement grout shall be injected to fill all voids between
(a) Pipe jacking
the jacked pipeline and the surrounding material. The
grout shall have a strength equal to or better than a (i) In plan ± 100 mm
grout consisting of one part of cement and four parts of (ii) Vertical ± 50 mm
sand and shall have a slump of 120 mm.
(iii) Horizontal and vertical
Grouting shall commence at the lower end of the displacement between
pipeline, and the grout shall be injected through holes
units at joints 10 mm maximum
drilled through walls of each pipe section.
These holes, which will also be used for checking the Adjustment to line or level or both shall be gradual, and
progress of the grout, shall be positioned in each side the manufacturer's permissible angular deflection of the
of the pipe on the line of its horizontal diameter, and pipes shall not be exceeded at any point.
also in the soffit of the pipe. (b) Pipe boring
All holes in the pipeline shall be sealed with an approved (i) In plan ± 100 mm
epoxy sealant after the grouting has been completed.
(ii) Vertical ± 100 mm
The grouting of the pipes installed by means of pipe
boring shall be carried out only on the written 13 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
instructions of the Engineer and in a manner approved
by the Engineer. The grout shall be the same as the Item Unit
grout specified above for jacked pipes.
804.01 Establishment on Site for
10.06 Backfilling
804.01.01 Pipe jacking lump sum
When jacking has been completed and the jacking frame
804.01.02 Pipe boring lump sum
and shield have been dismantled, the thrust and
reception pits shall be backfilled to the extent indicated The tendered lump sums shall include full
on the Drawings or as laid down in the Project compensation for the establishment on Site and the
Specifications or determined by the Engineer on the Site. subsequent removal of all special equipment and plant
The pipe boring pits shall be backfilled, only when so for pipe jacking or boring, including the thrust block
instructed by the Engineer, using excavated or imported when applicable, for maintaining the safety of existing
structures, services, roads, railways, etc, for bracing,
material compacted to at least the density of the
undisturbed surrounding material. lighting, watching, dewatering and surveying, and for
maintaining all temporary works until the work is
When the installed pipe is part of a pipeline, the boring completed.
pits will form part of the pipeline trench and as such shall
be backfilled in the manner specified in sections 106, This work will be paid for as a lump sum, 80% of which
202, 302 and 402 as applicable. Payment for such becomes payable when all equipment is on the Site and
backfilling will be made under the applicable sections. jacking or boring has commenced, and the remaining
20% will become payable after the work has been
Surplus excavated materials shall be disposed of as completed, the equipment removed and the Site
specified in the Project Specifications or as determined reinstated to a condition acceptable to the Engineer.
by the Engineer on Site.
Item Unit
11 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS 804.02 Access to and from the
If an alternative design by the Contractor has been thrust and reception pits lump sum
accepted or if the structure shown on the Tender
The tendered lump sum shall include full compensation
Drawings has been modified to suit the jacking method,
the Contractor shall, on completion of the work and for the provision and maintenance of access roads to
before the final payment is made, supply the Engineer the thrust and reception pits, the negotiations with land
owners where applicable, the erection and maintenance
with transparencies showing details of the completed
structure. Each such transparency shall be certified by of temporary gates, fences and road signs where
applicable, and for the removal and reinstatement of the
the Contractor to be an accurate reflection of the work
access roads and temporary works on completion of the
as constructed.
jacking operations to the satisfaction of the Engineer
and landowners concerned.
12 TOLERANCES
Subject to any requirements of the Project Specifications The work will be paid for in two installments as
imposed on account of the gradient(s) of the pipeline or specified in pay item 804.01.
in view of the purpose for which it is required, the pipes Item Unit
shall be positioned within the tolerances given below.
804.03 Excavating in soft material for
Should the difference between the actual and the
specified position or alignment of the finished pipeline 804.03.01 Thrust and reception pits lump sum
exceed the value of the said tolerance to an extent as to
804.03.02 Pipe boring pits lump sum
involve additional costs in respect of locating, installing,
supporting or maintaining any service of which the jacked The tendered lump sums shall include full
or bored pipe forms part or that has been designed to be compensation for all work necessary for excavating the
laid through the jacked or bored structure, the Contractor pits to suit the Contractor's equipment, for excavating
shall bear such additional costs, provided that the details by hand where applicable, for shoring the sides of the
of the work to be done to relocate, install, or support the excavation, and for stockpiling the excavated material
said service have been provided and the order for the at predetermined sites. The work shall be carried out as
work to be done (by the Contractor or by others) has specified in the appropriate clauses of sections 201 and
been given by the Engineer within 30 working days of the 202 (see also subclause 10.02 (b) of this section).
completion of the jacking or boring operation.

804-4
Ninety per cent (90%) of the lump sum tendered under The tendered rate shall include full compensation for
subitem 804.03.01 shall become payable when the the supply, delivery and storing the pipes, for rubber
excavations have been completed and jacking has rings, packing pieces, and the flexible sealing of joints
commenced and the remaining 10% after the thrust between intermediate jacking pipes.
block and shoring have been removed.
Item Unit
The lump sum tendered under subitem 804.03.02 shall
be paid when the pits have been excavated and the 804.07 Jacking of pipes through :
boring has commenced.
804.07.01 Soft material cubic metre (m3)
Item Unit
804.07.02 Hard material cubic metre (m3)
804.04 Extra over item 804.03
for excavating hard The unit of measurement shall be the cubic metre of
material cubic metre (m )
3 material removed at the working face. The volume of
material shall be determined from the outside diameter
The unit of measurement shall be the cubic metre of of the pipe and the length of pipe jacked.
material measured in the original position before
excavation and classified as hard in terms of sub- The tendered rates shall include full compensation for
clause 10.02 (a). The dimensions of the excavation handling and positioning the pipes, jacks and subsidiary
shall be agreed on as specified in subclause 10.02 (b) materials; for jacking the pipes; for drilling and
of this section. subsequently sealing the grouting holes in pipe barrels;
for lubricating; for the provision of ancillary jacking
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for all equipment at intermediate stations and for transporting
extra work and effort required for excavating in hard excavated material through the pipe, lifting it to ground
material. level, and loading and carting it off to spoil sites found
Item Unit by the Contractor.

804.05 Backfilling the Should the dumping sites be provided by the Employer,
overhaul will be payable where material is transported
804.05.01 Thrust and reception outside the free-haul boundaries.
pits with
3 Distinction shall be made between hard and soft
804.05.01.01 Excavated material cubic metre (m ) material as classified in terms of subclause 10.02(a).
804.05.01.02 Imported material cubic metre (m3)
Item Unit
804.05.02 Pipe boring pits with
804.08 Boring of holes through :
3
804.05.02.01 Excavated material cubic metre (m )
804.08.01 Soft material
804.05.02.02 Imported material cubic metre (m3)
804.08.01.01 Diameter of hole stated metre (m)
The unit of measurement for subitem 804.05.01 shall be
the cubic metre of suitable excavated or imported 804.08.01.02 Etc. for other diameters
material used for backfilling the thrust and reception pits
804.08.02 Hard material
to the extent indicated on the Drawings, laid down in the
Project Specifications or determined by the Engineer. 804.08.02.01 Diameter of hole stated metre (m)
The unit of measurement for subitem 804.05.02 shall be 804.08.02.02 Etc. for other diameters
the cubic metre of suitable excavated or imported
material used for backfilling the pipe boring pits to the The unit of measurement shall be the metre length of
extent determined by the Engineer. hole bored and approved.
The tendered rates shall include full compensation for The tendered rates shall include full compensation for
loading approved material previously excavated or all labour, equipment (other than equipment provided
alternatively for loading the material from approved under item 804.01), materials and appurtenant work
borrow pits, for transporting it to where required and for necessary to bore the hole including the pilot hole in the
off-loading, and placing the material. positions indicated and as specified and for removing
any bored material to spoil sites found by the
The tendered rate shall also include full compensation
Contractor. Should spoil sites be provided by the
for compacting the material in respect of
Employer, overhaul will be payable where material is
subitem 804.05.01, in 150 mm thick layers to 90% of
transported outside the free-haul boundaries.
modified AASHTO density and in respect of
subitem 805.04.02, in 150 mm thick layers to a density Item Unit
of at least that of the surrounding undisturbed material.
804.09 Supplying, jointing and
Material shall be imported only on the instructions of the inserting pipes
Engineer and overhaul will be payable where the
material is transported outside the free-haul boundaries 804.09.01 State type, class and diameter
from sources provided by the Employer. of pipe metre (m)
Item Unit 804.09.02 Etc. for other types, classes
804.06 Supply of pipes to be jacked and diameter of pipes
(description, type and diameter The unit of measurement shall be the metre of each
stated) metre (m) size and type of pipe supplied, jointed and inserted.
The unit of measurement shall be the metre of The tendered rates shall include full compensation for
completed jacked pipeline measured between the ends supplying the pipes, for jointing the pipes where
of the completed pipeline continuously through necessary and for inserting the pipes in the bored hole.
intermediate jacking stations and shall include
intermediate jacking pipes.

804-5
Item Unit
804.10 The grouting of voids for
pipe jacking
804.10.01 Unforseen and exposed
during jacking kilogram (kg)
804.10.02 Between pipeline and
surrounding material
after jacking has been
completed
804.10.02.01 Pipe diameter stated metre (m)
804.10.02.02 Etc for other pipe diameters

The unit of measurement for subitem 804.10.01 shall be

the mass, in kilograms, of cement used in the grouting
operation. The quantity of cement shall be based on a
grout mixture consisting of one part cement and four
parts of sand by volume. The volume of one pocket of
3
cement (50 kg) shall be taken as being 0,033 m .
The unit of measurement for subitem 804.10.02 shall be
the metre of each size of pipe grouted.
The tendered rates shall include full compensation for
all plant, material and labour necessary for carrying out
the work as specified.
Item Unit
804.11 The grouting of voids
for pipe boring
804.11.01 Pipe diameter stated metre (m)
804.11.02 Etc for other pipe diameters

The unit of measurement shall be the metre of each

size of pipe grouted on the instructions of the Engineer.
The tendered rates shall include full compensation for
all plant, material and labour necessary for carrying out
the work in a manner approved by the Engineer.
Item Unit
804.12 Timbering and shoring left
temporarily in the thrust
and reception pits and
pipe boring pits week

The unit of measurement shall be the number of weeks

during which the timbering and shoring is left in position
for another contractor to construct manholes, etc, under
a separate contract.
This item will only apply where the jacking and boring
work is carried out under a separate contract or under a
nominated subcontract.
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for
the removal of the timbering and shoring by the pipe-
jacking or pipe-boring contractor when it is no longer
required and within one week of having been instructed
to do so by the Engineer, in writing.
Note:
The following item of work, when specified, shall be
carried out, measured and paid for in accordance with
the relevant sections of the Specifications, but shall be
listed under this section in the Schedule of Quantities.
Item Applicable section
(a) Overhaul on excavated or
imported material 103

804-6
SERIES 8 : SPECIFIC WORKS Cement shall be stored off the ground in dry
storage and shall be used in the order of delivery.
SECTION 805 : BUILDING WORK Cement that has become affected by dampness
shall not be used. Cement containing hard lumps
CONTENTS is not fresh and shall be removed from the Site.

01 SCOPE (c) Aggregate

02 BRICKWORK, PLASTERWORK AND Fine aggregate shall be naturally occurring sand or
CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHES shall consist of crushed rock or gravel, and shall be
03 IRONMONGERY hard, clean and free from adherent coatings or other
04 GLAZING deleterious matter. Sand for plaster and mortar shall
05 CARPENTRY AND JOINERY comply with the requirements of SANS 1090,
06 ROOF SHEETING AND ACCESSORIES whereas the aggregates for normal and granolithic
07 PLUMBING floor screeds shall comply with the requirements of
08 ELECTRICAL WORK BS EN 13139 and BS EN 13813 respectively.
09 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
(d) Water
01 SCOPE
Water shall be clean and free from clay, silt, oil,
This section covers the various construction activities acid, alkali, organic or other matter which would
associated with the erection of buildings which form part impair the required strength and durability of the
of certain civil projects. mortar, plaster or floor screed.
Building work shall be carried out in accordance with (e) Wall ties
the National Building Regulations and the information
contained in this section. Wall ties for cavity walls shall comply in all
respects with the requirements of SANS 28 and
Work appurtenant to the erection of buildings such as shall be of the type and size specified in the
earthworks, concrete work, structural steelwork, etc, Project Specifications or on the Drawings. Wall ties
shall be carried out as specified in the appropriate for double leave walls shall be flat metal ties of
sections of these specifications and will be measured cross-sectional area 20 mm x 3 mm or as approved
and paid for under those sections. by the Engineer, placed in accordance with the
requirements of SANS 0164-1 or as specified in
02 BRICKWORK, PLASTERWORK AND the Project Specifications or on the drawings. The
CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHES use of single-wire wall ties will not be permitted.
General (f) Damp-proof sheeting
The design and construction of unreinforced and reinforced Damp-proof sheeting shall comply with SANS 248,
masonry walling shall be carried out in accordance with the type FV for fibre felt, or SANS 952, type B for
recommendations and requirements of the SANS Codes of embossed polyethylene sheeting.
Practice 10164-1 and 10164-2 respectively.
02.02 Construction of brickwork
02.01 Materials
(a) Bricks (a) Cement mortar
Burnt clay bricks shall comply with SANS 227 and The mortar class shall be as specified in the
shall be of the strength class specified in the Project Specifications or indicated on the
Project Specifications or shown on the drawings. drawings. If no mortar class is specified, mortar
shall be strength class II (7 MPa compressive
Concrete masonry units shall comply with strength at 28 days). Mortar class III shall only be
SANS 1215. The use of concrete masonry units used if so specified, and the use of mortar class I
will only be permitted if so specified in the Project will not be permitted.
Specifications or approved by the Engineer in
writing. Cement mortar shall, unless otherwise specified,
Satisfactory proof of the load-bearing capacity of consist of 1 part of common cement (CEM I ) to
the bricks offered shall be submitted before 6 parts of sand by volume for mortar class II. If
deliveries are made to the Site. masonry cement is used, the mortar shall consist
of 1 part of masonry cement to 5 parts of sand by
Air bricks shall be well-burnt terracotta and shall volume. The use of lime to increase the workability
be free from cracks and blemishes and shall be of mortar shall only be permitted with the written
lined with copper mosquito gauze. approval of the Engineer. Only lime complying with
Three samples of each type of brick shall be SANS 523 shall be used, and lime shall only be
submitted to the Engineer for approval. All used with common cement and not with masonry
subsequent deliveries shall be of a standard equal cement. A maximum of 40 of lime per 50 kg bag
to or better than that of the approved samples of cement is permitted and the mix proportions of
cement and sand shall remain unaltered.
(b) Cement
If mortar class I is required in terms of the Project
The cement used in mortar and plaster shall be
Specifications, the mortar shall consist of 1 part of
CEM I strength class 32,5 N complying with common cement to 4 parts of sand, or alternatively
SANS 50197-1, or masonry cement strength class of 1 part of masonry cement to 3 parts of sand.
22,5 X complying with SANS 50413-1. CEM I
strength class 42,5 shall only be used if so specified The ingredients for cement mortar shall be
in the Project Specifications. Under no measured in proper gauge boxes on a boarded
circumstances shall masonry cement used in the platform and thoroughly mixed. Alternatively, mixing
manufacture of concrete and the various types of may be by means of an approved mechanical batch
cement shall be stored separately on the Site. mixer.

805-1
 Only when the dry ingredients have been (c) Reinforced brickwork
thoroughly mixed and a mixture of uniform colour
The construction of reinforced brickwork shall be
has been obtained may the water be added in
in accordance with the requirements of SANS
small quantities, mixing after each addition, to
Code of Practice 10164-2: The Structural use of
obtain mortar with the required consistency, i.e. a
Masonry.
soft and plastic mix.
Reinforced masonry will be indicated and specified
Cement mortar shall be used within two hours of
as such in the Project Specifications and on the
adding water to the mix and shall not be used after
drawings. Temporary support for reinforced
two hours or if it has begun to set. Mortar shall be
brickwork shall be left in position for at least
turned over frequently until it is used to prevent it
7 days unless otherwise approved or instructed by
from setting.
the Engineer.
(b) Brickwork
(d) Key for plaster
Dimensions of all brickwork shall be set out and
Joints of load bearing brickwork receiving plaster
built as shown on the drawings. Notwithstanding
shall not be raked out to give a key for plastering
the tolerances given in Section 707 of the
or rendering unless approved by the Engineer in
Standard Specifications, the accuracy of the
writing.
building shall be such as to enable other building
components to be built into the masonry. (e) Damp-proofing
Burnt clay bricks shall be kept wet before laying A damp-proof course shall be laid over the full
and the top of brickwork shall be wetted before any width of all the walls at a minimum height of
further bricks are laid. In the case of facing work 150 mm above the final ground level or wherever
care shall be taken to ensure that staining of the else it may be required, and it shall be lapped for
face of the wall resulting from the wetting of the at least 150 mm at angles and joints. A damp-
bricks does not occur. Concrete bricks and building proof course shall also be laid and stepped up
blocks shall not be wetted before being laid. Bricks under all external sills.
shall be well buttered with mortar before being laid
and all joints shall be thoroughly flushed up as the (f) General
work progresses. All joints to face brickwork shall Rough and fair cutting shall be performed as
be neatly made and key drawn with a 6 mm key. required, and the brickwork shall be fitted around
Brickwork shall be carried up in a uniform manner any steel work. Face brickwork shall be cut and
with no portion being raised more than 1 m above fitted to suit fittings.
an adjacent portion. The height of walling built in a Sleeves, holes and chases for pipes, conduits,
day shall not exceed 1,3 m without the approval of switch boxes, distribution boards and the like shall
the Engineer in writing. All perpends, quoins, etc as far as possible be left or formed during the
shall be kept strictly true and square and the erection of the masonry. Chasing of completed
whole properly bonded together. walls or the forming of holes shall only be carried
Brickwork shall be built in stretcher bond or English out with the written approval of the Engineer and
bond as specified on the drawings. Walls of one then only with a tool designed to cut the units
building unit thickness shall be built in stretcher cleanly. No horizontal or diagonal chases shall be
bond. Bats shall not be used except where permitted.
required for the bond. All joints shall be 10 mm
wide and four courses shall measure 340 mm. 02.03 Plasterwork

Whenever the thickness of a solid wall built in (a) General

stretcher bond is composed of more than one The faces to be plastered must be clean and free
structural unit, walls shall be bonded together with from dust and other loose material. The use of
wall ties or a complete course of headers to every admixtures in mixes for a bonding coat shall only
five courses of stretchers. Unless otherwise be allowed if approved by the Engineer. If
specified in the Project Specifications or on the approved, admixtures shall be used in strict
drawings, wall ties shall be placed not more than accordance with the manufacturer’s specifications
450 mm apart in every fifth course of brickwork, and recommendations.
and shall be staggered vertically. At discontinuities
in the brickwork such as control joints and at Plaster shall, unless otherwise specified, consist of
openings, the ties shall be positioned not more 1 part of common cement (CEM I) to 6 parts of
than 4 courses of brickwork apart along the sand by volume. If masonry cement is used, the
periphery of the opening and 150 mm from the mortar shall consist of 1 part of masonry cement to
opening. The minimum depth of embedment of the 5 parts of sand by volume. The use of lime to
wall ties into each leaf shall be 50 mm. increase the workability of plaster shall only be
permitted with the written approval of the
Cavity walls shall be built to the thickness Engineer. Only lime complying with SANS 523
specified. Unless otherwise specified, the leafs of shall be used, and lime shall only be used with
a cavity wall shall be tied together with wall ties in common cement and not with masonry cement. A
accordance with the requirements of SANS 0164-1. maximum of 40 of lime per 50 kg bag of cement
Face brickwork shall be kept perfectly clean and is permitted and the mix proportions of cement and
rubbing down of the brickwork shall not be sand shall remain unaltered.
allowed. Scaffold boards shall be turned back Foundation walls or walls under constantly damp
during heavy rain to avoid splashing. Soiled conditions shall be plastered using a mix
brickwork shall be cleaned at the Contractor’s consisting of 1 part of common cement to 4 parts
expense, and the cleaning method shall be of sand or 1 part of masonry cement to 3 parts of
approved by the Engineer. sand.

805-2
 A minimum amount of water is to be used but it
(b) Plaster coats shall be sufficient to allow adequate compaction.
A plastered finish may consist of a combination Batches not used within 45 minutes after water
of one or more of the following: has been added to the mix shall not be used and
shall be discarded.
(i) A single coat or first coat, comprising one
application of a 1:6 cement:sand mixture Screeds shall be laid on concrete surfaces which
with a wood or steel-float finish. are uniform, clean and free of dust, oil or any other
contamination. The laitance on the base concrete
If a first coat, the plaster shall be wood-
shall be removed by scabbling or scarification until
floated and then scratched, raked or
the coarse aggregate is cleanly exposed. If
otherwise roughened to provide a
directed by the Engineer or specified in the Project
mechanical key for the second coat, which
Specifications, the screed shall be bonded to the
shall be applied within 24 hours. Should it
base concrete using a sand-cement bonding grout
be impossible to apply the second coat
consisting of equal volumes of common cement
within 24 hours, the first coat shall be kept
and fine, clean sand mixed thoroughly with water
moist until the second coat is applied.
to obtain a consistency of thick paint. The grout
(ii) A second coat comprising one application shall be stirred continuously and used within
of a 1:6 cement:sand mixture with a wood- 30 minutes of mixing. The screed shall be laid on
float finish. the grouted surfaces within a period of 10 to
(iii) A finishing coat comprising a 1:1,5 gypsum: 20 minutes after the grout has been applied and
sand mixture with a steel-float finish. while the grout is still visibly wet. If an alternative
bonding agent is approved or specified by the
(c) Thickness Engineer, it shall be applied strictly in accordance
with the manufacturer’s specifications.
The total thickness of the plaster finish shall be
13 mm minimum and 20 mm maximum. The floor area which the Contractor intends to
screed in one operation shall be approved by the
(d) Workmanship Engineer, but shall generally be as large as is
All plaster work shall be finished smooth and practically possible in monolithic construction.
ready to receive paint. Plaster shall be flush with Where joints are present in the base concrete,
the faces of all switch and plug boxes, the joints in screeds shall coincide as nearly as
interiors of which shall be kept free from plaster. possible with joints in the bases. The edges of
joints in screeds which will not be covered
Plastered surfaces shall be plumb and jambs subsequently shall be rounded to a 3 mm radius.
and reveals shall be formed square. The
plasterer shall cut out and make good all cracks, The surface of the screed shall be finished off as
blisters and other defects and leave the plaster specified or as directed by the Engineer to a true
work, on completion, in a state which is and smooth finish. The entire screed surface
acceptable to the Engineer. shall be free from loose or raised particles of
aggregate, trowel marks or from any
02.04 Concrete floor finishes irregularities, humps or depressions exceeding
Unless otherwise specified, finishes to concrete 5 mm when measured from a 3 m straight edge.
floors shall comply with the requirements of Screeds shall be cured for a period of not less
SANS 10109-2. The repair of floor finishes not than 7 days directly after being placed as
in compliance with the Project Specifications directed by the Engineer, and shall be protected
shall be done in accordance with the from damage. The proposed method of curing
requirements of SANS 10109-2. The type of shall be to the Engineer’s approval.
finish to concrete floors shall be as specified in
the Project Specifications or on the Drawings. No moisture-sensitive finish shall be laid on
Screeds shall be provided where indicated on screeds unless a reliable moisture test shows
the Drawings or specified in the Project that the screed is sufficiently dry to receive the
Specifications. The surface finish and the covering.
thickness of the screed shall be as specified on At completion of curing, the floors shall be
the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer. No covered up and protected against damage until
payment will be made for floor screeds which all other work has been completed.
have to be constructed as a result of the
Contractor failing to place and finish concrete (b) Granolithic screeds
floors to the required specifications. Cement shall be CEM I strength class 32,5 N
(a) Normal screeds complying with SANS 50197-1 unless otherwise
specified or approved by the Engineer. Fine
Normal (bonded) screeds shall be applied to aggregates shall also comply with SANS 50197-1.
hardened concrete. Monolithic screeds which are Sand shall comply with the requirements of
to be applied to concrete still in its plastic state, SANS 1083. Granolithic screeds shall have a mix
or unbonded screeds on hardened concrete shall proportion of 1 part of cement to 2 parts of
only be constructed if so specified in the Project aggregate by volume unless otherwise specified.
Specifications or indicated on the Drawings. A minimum amount of water required to produce
The cement used in screeds shall be CEM I a workable mix shall be used. Batches not used
strength class 32,5 N complying with within 45 minutes after water has been added to
SANS 50197-1 unless otherwise specified or the mix shall not be used and shall be discarded.
approved by the Engineer. The sand shall The screed shall be rendered with a wood float
comply with the requirements of SANS 1083. and struck off with a steel trowel after set has
commenced.
Normal screeds shall have a mix proportion of
1 part of cement to 4 parts of sand by volume.
805-3
 The granolithic mixture shall be floated onto the Frames shall be of the widths required to suit the
concrete floor slab within 12 hours of the latter thickness of the walls into which they are built and
having been laid. Where this cannot be done shall be fitted with suitable tie bars and braces at
within 12 hours, the concrete surfaces shall be the bottom. Three lugs to be built into the
thoroughly hacked, cleaned, watered and treated brickwork shall be provided on each jamb.
with an approved cement slurry or with an
approved bonding agent, as may be directed, Rebates in frames and transoms for doors shall be
before the granolithic screed is laid. of the widths required to suit the thicknesses of the
doors and shall be fitted with a pair of approved
Where a tinted granolithic screed is specified, it steel butt hinges set flush into recesses in the
shall be placed in two layers, a lower layer placed frames. 4,5 mm thick reinforcing plates shall be
to within 6 mm of the finished level and an upper welded to the backs of the frames at hinge positions.
layer into which the pigment has been mixed. No
dusting on of colouring material will be allowed. Heads of frames over double doors shall be drilled
where required to form keeps for bolts and shall be
The surface of all granolithic screeds shall be kept fitted with one rubber buffer for each leaf of the door.
damp for a period of at least 7 days after laying by Frames for single doors shall be fitted with approved
covering it with polyethylene sheeting or by thickly chromium striking plates and an adjustable striking-
covering it with wet sand, sawdust or hessian kept plate keeper boxed in at the back of the frame by a
moist by frequently sprinkling it with water. At welded-on sheet-metal box. The frames shall be
completion of curing, the floors shall be covered fitted with a minimum of two rubber buffers.
up and protected against damage until all other
work has been completed. Frames shall be protected against twisting and
damage during transit and erection.
The granolithic screeds shall be not less than
20 mm thick, finished to falls as shown on the (c) Pressed-steel doors
Drawings. The floor area to which the Contractor Pressed-steel doors shall be manufactured from
intends to apply the granolithic screed in one 1,6 mm thick steel plate. The doors shall be of
operation shall be approved by the Engineer, but standard design, pressed to shape with 40 mm
shall generally be as large as is practically reveals all round. The doors shall be strengthened
possible in monolithic construction. Where joints with full-length vertical V-shaped or other
are present in the base concrete, joints in the approved sectional strengthening ribs projecting to
screed shall coincide as nearly as possible with the outer face. Two horizontal stiffening rails shall
joints in the bases. The edges of joints in screeds also be welded to the inner face of the doors.
which will not be covered subsequently shall be
rounded to a 3 mm radius. Unless otherwise A door shall be hung on a pair of 100 mm long steel
specified in the Project Specifications or approved butt hinges with loose pins. The leaves of the hinges
by the Engineer the maximum tolerance in the shall be welded to both the door and the door frame,
surface flatness of the finished screed shall not and a 1,6 mm thick steel plate shall be welded to the
exceed 5 mm when measured from a 3 m straight inner face of the door to protect the lock.
edge. Thresholds shall be finished with granolithic
One leaf of double doors shall be fitted at the top
screeds 25 mm thick, treads 25 mm thick, and
and bottom with approved 150 mm cast brass
risers 20 mm thick, including rounded nosings and
barrel bolts in an approved manner and the other
reedings.
leaf shall be fitted with a lock, the striking plate of
Edges next to walls shall be finished with which shall be fixed to the first leaf.
projecting skirting, 75 mm high, with rounded top
Where indicated on the Drawings, doors shall be
edges, unless otherwise specified or instructed by
fitted with louvered ventilation grills of approved
the Engineer.
design, backed with insect and vermin-proof gauze
screening.
03 IRONMONGERY
(d) Steel window frames
03.01 Materials
All steel window frames shall comply with
(a) General SANS 727 and shall be of the types and sizes
All steel and iron work shall be delivered clean and shown on the Drawings.
free from rust, pitting or other defects. Shop Standard industrial types of steel window frames
primings shall be applied before delivery and shall shall be constructed from rolled mild-steel industrial
consist of a coat of red oxide paint, or any other sections, 35 mm wide by 3 mm thick, with opening
approved anti-rust paint on all surfaces. sections constructed from standard residential
Unless otherwise specified, all materials shall sections, 25 mm wide by 3 mm thick, welded at
conform at least to the appropriate SANS or BS angles and properly jointed at intersections.
standards where such standards apply to Window frames shall be formed perfectly flat, truly
ironmongery, steel, cast iron or any other related square and properly jointed at all angles, and the
materials. opening portion shall fit properly on all faces and
(b) Pressed steel door frames shall open and close freely.

Pressed steel door frames shall comply with Glazing bars shall be continuous with jointed
SANS 1129 and shall be manufactured from intersections, the ends being neatly tenoned into
1,6 mm thick mild-steel sheeting, pressed to the the frame and securely welded in position.
required shapes, properly mitred, welded and Frames shall be fitted with standard fixing lugs.
reinforced, with all welding neatly cleaned off.

805-4
 Opening sections shall open as indicated on the (b) Putty
Drawings, and shall be fitted with steel hinges with
All putty shall comply with the requirements of
brass pins. Pivots shall be fitted with bronze ring
SANS 680.
centres.
Putty shall not be too hard or soft or caked when
Side hung or top hung opening sections shall be
used, and shall dry evenly without crazing or
fitted with brass handles and friction stays. Bottom
cracking.
hung sections shall be fitted with friction pivots and
spring catches. Defective putty shall be cut out and replaced by
the Contractor at his own expense, and any
Weather bar drips shall be attached to the fixed
broken glass shall also be so replaced and putty
frames for the complete width of the window at the
so repainted.
head of outward opening sections. Composite
windows shall preferably be delivered to the Site fully 04.02 Glazing
assembled, complete with mullions and transoms.
Glass shall be cut in panes to suit all glazed openings
(e) Door locks and handles with sufficient clearance all round to prevent cracking
by expansion, contraction or vibration.
All door locks shall comply with the requirements
of SANS 54 and shall be of approved manufacture In all cases the glass shall be well bedded and back-
and pattern. All locks shall be supplied with two puttied and installed as specified in SANS Code of
keys. Keys shall be distinctly numbered with Practice 10137.
consecutive numbers and each key shall be
stamped with the same number as that of the lock All putty shall be carefully trimmed, cleaned off and
which it controls. No two locks in any one building neatly finished off straight with smooth surfaces and
may have the same key. sharp mitres. A paint primer shall be applied as soon as
the putty has dried out sufficiently to prevent shrinkage
External doors shall be fitted with four-lever heavy- cracks from forming.
duty mortice locks, which shall be master-keyed.
The entire glazing operation shall be cleaned before the
All locks shall be properly installed and, after premises are handed over for occupation.
completion, striker plates shall be adjusted and the
locks serviced. 05 CARPENTRY AND JOINERY
Door handles shall be of cast zinc of approved 05.01 General
manufacture and pattern.
(a) Materials
(f) Miscellaneous fittings All timber used for structural purposes shall be of
All retaining devices for doors and windows as well the grade specified and shall comply with the
as fittings such as coat hooks, retaining hooks, requirements of SANS 1783-1 or SANS 1783-2.
etc, shall be of solid brass. All fittings shall be Structural timber shall be carefully selected and of
secured by screws or set screws of the same the best quality, free from large or dead knots,
material and finish as the fitting. shakes, waney edges or other defects. Purlins and
brandering shall comply with the requirements of
Fittings to be fixed to plastered walls, masonry or SANS 1783-4. Finger-jointed structural timber
floors shall be fixed direct by means of patent shall comply with the requirements of SANS 10096
plastic or fibre plugs fitted into drilled holes. and laminated timber with the requirements of
Door stops shall be provided at every door and SANS 1460.
shall be 40 mm diameter rubber stops. Hardwoods and softwoods for joinery shall comply
with SANS 1099 and SANS 1783-3 respectively
03.02 Installation of doors and windows
and suitable species shall be used for the various
All built-in door and window frames shall be set straight, purposes.
plumb and level, and shall operate to the satisfaction of
Unless otherwise specified, all materials shall
the Engineer after fixing has been completed.
conform to the appropriate SANS or BS
Fittings shall be either removed, or wrapped and protected specification where such standards exist for nails,
from damage, until all rough trades have been completed. screws, bolts, adhesives, etc.

04 GLAZING (b) Preservative treatment

04.01 Materials All structural timber shall be given a preservative

treatment suitable for the duty for which the timber
(a) Glass is intended in accordance with SANS 10005, and no
Glass shall comply with the requirements of CKS 55. untreated timber shall be used. The preservative
The quality of all window glass shall be such that treatment shall not impair the final finish. The timber
surface deterioration will not develop after glazing. shall be impregnated throughout. When surface
coating is specified, the compounds applied on the
All glass shall be free from bubbles, waviness, surfaces of the timber shall form an unbroken film.
scratches, stains or other imperfections.
(c) Priming
Unless otherwise specified, sheet glass for glazing
shall be flat-drawn clear glass of ordinary glazing The jointing surfaces of all joints exposed to the
quality and of the thicknesses indicated below : weather and built-in portions of frames shall be
2
thickly primed except where adhesives are specified.
For panes not exceeding 0,75 m in area 3 mm
2
Carpentry and joinery items which are prepared for
For panes exceeding 0,75 m but not painting by the manufacturer, shall be knotted and
2
exceeding 1,5 m in area 4mm primed before being dispatched to the Site.

805-5
 Primed surfaces shall be touched up where (d) Joints
necessary during the progress of the work or Where joints are not specifically indicated, they
where Site adjustments have been made. shall be the recognised forms of joints for each
05.02 Carpentry work position. The joints shall be so made as to comply
with part 2 of BS 1186.
(a) Scope of work
(e) Doors and frames
Carpentry work shall be carried out in a manner
consistent with good workmanship and in Door frames, linings, panel doors, framed, ledged
compliance with the Drawings. and braced doors, flush doors, sliding doors, etc,
shall be supplied or made by the joiner and shall
The carpenter shall perform all cutting away and be installed, fitted or hung as detailed on the
making good in attendance upon all other trades Drawings.
and he shall provide and maintain temporary
coverings required for the protection of any All timber shall be wrought and prepared for oiling,
finished work that might be damaged if left staining, varnishing or painting.
unprotected during the progress of the work. (f) Skirtings, cornices, etc
(b) Dimensions Skirtings, cornices, etc shall not be installed until
after the wall coverings have been applied, the
Unwrought timber shall be as sawn and shall be to
flooring laid and ceilings installed, unless
the dimensions and within the tolerances specified
otherwise specified.
in the relevant SANS Standard Specifications
mentioned in subclause 05.01 (a). (g) In situ joinery
(c) Jointing In situ joinery work shall not be executed until after
all floor, wall and ceiling surfaces have been
Unless otherwise specified, all joints shall be
formed or constructed, unless otherwise
secured by means of a suitable type and a
instructed.
sufficient number of approved connectors. All
joints shall be carefully made in such a way that (h) Ceilings
they will not impair the strength and stiffness of the Ceilings shall consist of plaster board or fibre-
beams or members.
cement panels as shown on the Drawings and
(d) Timber roof construction shall be nailed to the brandering or suspended
from the roof structure. The panels shall be
The plates, joists, rafters, purlins, brandering and separated by exposed tees and insulated with a
other pieces used for the construction of the roof 50 mm thick fibreglass wool blanket where shown
and trusses shall be of the dimensions, spacing on the Drawings.
and construction, as shown on the Drawings.
All the joints in the framework shall be of the most 06 ROOF SHEETING AND ACCESSORIES
appropriate type, accurately formed and 06.01 Materials
adequately secured with fasteners as specified.
(a) Roof sheeting
05.03 Joinery work
(i) Galvanized-steel sheeting
(a) Scope of work
Galvanized-steel sheeting shall have a
Joinery work shall consist of the manufacture, minimum ungalvanized thickness of 0,5 mm
delivery to the Site, and fixing in the buildings, of and shall be of the profile as scheduled or
all joinery shown on the Drawings. shown on the Drawings. The sheeting shall
comply with the requirements of SANS 3575
Except where a special finish is specified, the
or SANS 4998 as applicable for Class Z600
Contractor shall have all stairs, landings, doors,
coating and shall have been passivated.
shelves and other joinery work cleaned and
scrubbed down and shall leave all his work in a (ii) Fibre-cement sheeting
good order to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
Fibre-cement sheeting shall have a minimum
(b) Dimensions thickness of 5 mm, shall be of the profile as
scheduled or shown on the Drawings, and
All wrought timber shall be sawn, planed, drilled or shall comply with the relevant requirements
otherwise machined or worked to the correct sizes of SANS 685.
and shapes shown on the Drawings.
(b) Fasteners
Reasonable tolerance shall be provided at all
connections between joinery works and the Fasteners and washers shall comply with the
building structure to compensate adequately for requirements of SANS 1273, shall be durable, and
any irregularities, settlements or any other shall be protected against corrosion to a standard at
movements. least equal to the standard of corrosion protection of
the sheeting material with which they are to be
(c) Fabrication used. Fasteners to be used with fibre-cement
The joiner shall perform all the necessary sheeting shall be hot-dip galvanized fasteners.
mortising, tenoning, grooving, matching, tonguing, Bolts and rivets used with galvanized sheeting shall
housing, rebating and all the other works be at least 4 mm in diameter, and those used with
necessary for correct jointing. He shall also fibre cement sheeting, at least 6 mm in diameter.
provide all metal plates, screws, nails and other
fixings that may be necessary for doing the Self-tapping screws and blind rivets may be used
specified joinery work properly. for side-stitching and as fasteners for ridging,
flashings, etc.

805-6
(c) Rainwater goods and flashings suspended enamelled cast-iron cistern with the
flush pipe connected to the flushing rim of the
Rainwater goods such as launders, gutters, down-
closet with rubber cone joints, and a solid heavy-
pipes, etc, and flashings shall be of the size and
duty plastic seat with cover, hinges and buffers.
materials as scheduled or shown on the Drawings,
and the materials shall, if similar, comply with the (c) Urinals
same requirements as specified for the sheeting.
All rainwater goods shall be supplied complete Urinals shall be of the type detailed or scheduled,
with adequate quantities of suitably shaped of white glazed vitreous china, wall mounted, with
brackets and fasteners. an automatic or a manual flushing system, and
chromium-plated fittings.
(d) Sealants
(d) Wash hand basins
Sealants shall comply with the requirements of
SANS 110, SANS 1254 or SANS 1305 as Wash hand basins shall be of white glazed vitreous
applicable or with the sheeting manufacturer's china or enamelled cast iron, wall mounted on a pair
recommendations as approved by the Engineer. of cast-iron brackets, and fitted with chromium-plated
fittings consisting of two taps, outlet and chain, and
06.02 Construction supplied with a plug and an anti-siphon trap.
Wherever possible, the roof sheets shall be of a single (e) Sinks
length from eave to eave. However, if these lengths
exceed the standard sheet lengths, the number of laps Sinks shall comply with the requirements of
shall be kept to a minimum and shall conform to the SANS 242 and shall be complete with cabinet,
manufacturer's recommendations for the roof slopes chromium-plated outlet, anti-siphon trap, plug,
indicated. End laps shall occur only at purlins and each chain and two bib taps or one mixer tap, all as
sheet shall extend beyond the purlin or rail by 150 mm. detailed or as scheduled.

Sheeting shall be fixed to purlins with approved screws, (f) Pipes and tubing
each complete with a galvanized steel washer over an Pipes used in plumbing work shall comply with the
approved sealing grommet. requirements of SANS 746 for cast-iron pipes and
The sides of sheets shall be lapped over for a minimum SANS 62-1 and SANS 62-2 for steel pipes. Copper
of one corrugation or according to the manufacturer's tubing shall comply with the requirements of
recommendations and shall be stitched with approved SANS 460, and malleable cast-iron fittings with the
self-tapping screws or blind rivets. requirements of SANS 14. Pipes of other materials
shall be as specified in the Project Specifications.
All laps in sheeting shall be sealed with an approved
sealant. Swarf, grindings and surplus fasteners shall be 07.02 Construction
removed from the roof on completion. Holes for
fasteners shall be drilled and not punched. Plumbing shall be carried out strictly in accordance with
the Drawings and with the National Building Regulations.
Flashings, ridging, eaves closers, etc, shall be of the
size and shape necessary to suit the sheeting used. Steel pipes and their malleable cast-iron fittings shall be
Flashings shall be of an approved type and shall be joined with red lead and hemp, lead pipes shall have
properly cut, lapped, shaped, dressed and fixed in an wiped soldered joints, and cast-iron pipes shall be
approved manner to render a waterproof finish. joined by caulking with hemp and metallic lead.
Provision shall be made for expansion and contraction Soil pipes from WCs shall have an internal diameter of
in long lengths and at expansion joints of the building. a minimum of 100 mm and shall be fitted with a pan
Gutters shall be fixed on suitable brackets and shall fall connector and an access bend (or an access junction
to outlets, all as directed by the Engineer. Gutters and where a vent pipe is used), and carried through walls
brackets shall be standard units. and into the ground for connection to the sewer. Vent
pipes shall be fitted with approved balloon gratings.
All downpipes shall be watertight and shall be fixed
25 mm clear of the finished wall face or structure by Waste pipes from basins and sinks shall have an
means of suitable brackets, and at approved spacings. internal diameter of a minimum of 32 mm and shall
The positions of the downpipes shall be as directed by discharge into gulleys. Bends for waste pipes shall
the Engineer. incorporate cleaning eyes.
Cisterns, basins and sinks shall be connected to the
07 PLUMBING pipe system with 12 mm diameter copper service pipes,
07.01 Materials and chromium-plated stop-cocks shall be installed for
isolation and maintenance purposes.
(a) General
All materials shall be of the best quality and shall 08 ELECTRICAL WORK
be approved by the Engineer before installation. The electrical wiring of buildings shall be carried out by
Cracked, chipped, dented or faulty items or registered and licensed electricians in accordance with
materials shall be replaced at the Contractor's the requirements of SANS 10142-1 and the regulations
expense. Glazed ceramic sanitary ware shall of the Employer.
comply with the requirements of SANS 497 and all
other materials shall comply with the standards as The electrician shall work in close co-operation with the
specified, scheduled or shown on the Drawings. Contractor to ensure that all conduits, switchboards,
plug boxes and switch boxes are installed in their
(b) Water closet (WC) suites correct position.
WC suites shall consist of a white glazed vitreous The work shall be carried out in accordance with the
china closet with an S or P trap and seat lugs, a Drawings and to the satisfaction of the Engineer and
14 litre low-level matching flat-bottomed flushing the Local Authority.
cistern placed and fixed on the closet, or a

805-7
09 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT Item Unit
Item Unit 805.04.03 Steel window with frame,
including glazing and sills
805.01 Brickwork
(type and size indicated) number (No)
805.01.01 230 mm thick, outside face:
The unit of measurement shall be the number of steel
(class indicated), inside
door frames, steel doors with frames, and steel
face : (class indicated) square metre (m2)
windows with frames installed complete as specified.
805.01.02 230 mm thick, (class
2 The tendered rates shall include full compensation for
indicated) square metre (m )
the installation of the steel doors, windows, and frames,
805.01.03 115 mm thick, (class including the supply of all materials, manufacturing,
indicated)
2
square metre (m ) installing, hinges, handles, locks, barrel bolts, retaining
devices, door stops, stays and any other work
The unit of measurement shall be the square metre of necessary to complete the work as specified or as
each type of brickwork built, calculated from the leading shown on the Drawings. The tendered rate for windows
dimensions of the brickwork. Areas of pipes, etc, built shall also include full compensation for glazing, window
into brickwork shall not be included in the areas sills, as specified, and damp-proof sheeting.
measured. At corners and intersections common to
more than one brick wall, the areas shall be measured Item Unit
only once.
805.05 Structural timber
The tendered rates shall include full compensation for
the construction of the brickwork complete as specified, 805.05.01 Plates (grade and sizes
including pointing, the building-in of conduits, beams, indicated) metre (m)
pipe sleeves, doors, windows, the raking-out of joints, 805.05.02 Beams (grade and sizes
damp-proof course, etc. indicated) metre (m)
Item Unit 805.05.03 Joists (grade and sizes
805.02 Plaster work indicated) metre (m)

805.02.01 Single coat or first coat 805.05.04 Rafters (grade and sizes
(thickness indicated) indicated) metre (m)
2 805.05.05 Purlins (grade and sizes
805.02.01.01 Wood-float finish square metre (m )
indicated) metre (m)
805.02.01.02 Steel-float finish square metre (m2)
805.05.06 Roof trusses complete
805.02.02 Second coat (Drawing No indicated) number (No)
(thickness indicated) square metre (m2)
2 The unit of measurement shall be the metre of
805.02.03 Finishing coat square metre (m ) individual types of timber elements or number of
The unit of measurement shall be the square metre of complete trusses installed.
each type of coat completed as specified. The tendered rates shall include full compensation for
The tendered rates shall include full compensation for the supply of all materials, manufacture, cutting, waste,
the construction of the plasterwork, including the supply jointing and installation of the timber as shown on the
of all materials, mixing, applying, finishing, forming Drawings.
reveals, joints, etc, complete as specified. Item Unit
Item Unit 805.06 Ceilings
805.03 Concrete Floor Finishes 805.06.01 Plaster-board ceiling
(type and thickness
805.03.01 Normal screeds
indicated)
(thickness indicated) square metre (m2)
2
805.06.01.01 Fixed ceiling square metre (m )
805.03.02 Granolithic screeds
2
(thickness indicated)
2
square metre (m ) 805.06.01.02 Suspended ceiling square metre (m )

The unit of measurement shall be the square metre of 805.06.02 Fibre-cement ceiling
floor screed laid, as specified, on floors, steps or areas (thickness indicated)
shown on the Drawings or as designated by the 805.06.02.01 Fixed ceiling
2
square metre (m )
Engineer. 2
805.06.02.02 Suspended ceiling square metre (m )
The tendered rates shall include full compensation for
the construction of the floor screeds, including the The unit of measurement shall be the square metre of
supply of all materials, mixing, laying, finishing, the fixed or suspended ceiling installed complete as
forming of nosings, reedings, skirtings, etc. specified.

Item Unit The tendered rates shall also include full compensation
for the construction of the ceilings, including the
805.04 Ironmongery exposed tees, insulation blanket and brandering as
805.04.01 Steel door frames specified, as well as the suspension system where
(type and size indicated) number (No) applicable.
805.04.02 Steel door with frame
(type and size indicated) number (No)

805-8
Item Unit The tendered rate shall include full compensation for
the installation of the ventilators, including the supply of
805.07 Joinery all materials, manufacturing and sealing and for the
805.07.01 Items measured by number cutting of roof sheeting.

805.07.01.01 Doors (type and size Item Unit

indicated) number (No)
805.12 Miscellaneous work
805.07.01.02 Other items measured
805.12.01 Painting of buildings
by number number (No)
805.07.02 Items measured by length 805.12.01.01 (Building indicated) lump sum

805.07.02.01 Skirtings (size indicated) metre (m) 805.12.01.02 Etc. for other buildings

805.07.02.02 Other items measured 805.12.02 Plumbing in buildings

by length metre (m)
805.12.02.01 (Building indicated) lump sum
The units of measurement shall be the number or metre 805.12.02.02 Etc. for other buildings
of each type and/or size of joinery item specified.
805.12.03 Wiring of buildings
The tendered rates shall include full compensation for
the supply of all materials, manufacture, cutting, waste, 805.12.03.01 (Building indicated) lump sum
fixing and installation of the joinery items.
805.12.03.02 Etc. for other buildings
Item Unit The unit of measurement for all painting, plumbing and
805.08 Roof sheeting electrical wiring to be carried out at each building shall
be the lump sum.
805.08.01 Galvanized (type and
profile indicated)
2
square metre (m ) The lump sums tendered shall also include full
compensation for all temporary works and safety
805.08.02 Fibre cement (profile precautions and for the protection of the Works, for
2
indicated) square metre (m ) fittings, etc in the case of wiring, the replacement of
defective work and cleaning up after completion, all as
805.08.03 Etc for other materials specified, for painting in section 806, and for plumbing
The unit of measurement shall be the square metre of and wiring in this section and in the applicable
net area of roof sheeting installed. The area of overlaps regulations.
shall not be measured for payment. Note:
The tendered rates shall include full compensation for The following items of work, when specified, shall be
the installation of the sheeting, including the supply of carried out, measured and paid for in accordance with
all materials, cutting, installing, sealing, stitching, the relevant sections of the Specifications, but shall be
flashings, ridging and eaves closers, and any other listed under this section of the Schedule of Quantities.
work necessary for installing the sheeting complete as
specified. Item Applicable section

Item Unit Reinforcing steel for reinforced masonry 703

805.09 Gutters (size and material Concrete infill in reinforced masonry 704
to be indicated) metre (m)
Testing of concrete infill 903
805.10 Rainwater downpipes
(size and material indicated) metre (m)
The unit of measurement shall be the metre of each
size of gutter or rainwater downpipe installed where
directed by the Engineer.
The tendered rates shall include full compensation for
the installation of the gutters and downpipes, including
the supply of all materials, cutting, installing, jointing,
and brackets. The tendered rate shall also include full
compensation for stop ends, nozzles, shoes, goose
necks, galvanized-wire gratings in gutter outlets, and
any other work necessary for installing the gutters and
downpipes as specified.
Item Unit
805.11 Roof ventilators
(type and material indicated) number (No)

The unit of measurement shall be the number of roof

ventilators installed as shown on the Drawings or
directed by the Engineer.

805-9
SERIES 8 : SPECIFIC WORKS Each priming coat and each undercoat of paint shall be
inspected and approved by the Engineer before any
SECTION 806 : PAINTING subsequent undercoat or finishing coat is applied.

CONTENTS All finishing colours shall be as specified in the Project

Specifications, as shown on the Drawings, or as
01 SCOPE directed by the Engineer.
02 GENERAL
03 MATERIALS 03 MATERIALS
04 INSPECTION AND PRELIMINARY WORK
05 WORKMANSHIP AND FINISHES Paints shall comply with the requirements of the
06 PAINTING OF PLASTER, CONCRETE OR appropriate specifications below:
BRICK SURFACES 03.01 Primers
07 PAINTING OF WOODWORK
SANS 312 Red-lead based for structural steel
08 PAINTING OF METAL SURFACES
09 PAINTING OF FLOOR SCREEDS SANS 678 For wood
10 PAINT THICKNESS SANS 679 Zinc chromate for steel
11 INSPECTION
SANS 723 Etch-wash primer for metals
12 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
SANS 912 Calcium plumbate for galvanized iron
01 SCOPE SANS 926 Zinc-rich epoxy for steel
This section covers the preparation of surfaces, 03.02 Undercoats
painting, and painting materials for the decoration and
protection of metal, concrete, wood and other surfaces SANS 681 : For all undercoats
which are exposed to non-corrosive or mildly corrosive 03.03 Finishing coats
conditions only.
SANS 515 For interior use, flat and egg-shell finish
Where surfaces which are exposed to severe conditions
are to be protected, the painting systems, the factory's SANS 630 For interior and exterior use, high-gloss
quality-control measures, any supervisory measures, enamel
and other appropriate information will be specified in SANS 1586 For interior and exterior use, emulsion
the Project Specifications. paint
02 GENERAL SANS 684 For exterior use on structural steel
No paint shall be applied to any surface containing SANS 801 For interior and exterior use, epoxy-tar
traces of dust, grit, grease, oil, loose rust, millscale or paint
corrosion products of any kind or to any surface that is SANS 802 For interior and exterior use, bituminous
not free from moisture. Where necessary, surfaces shall aluminium paint
be thoroughly washed to remove all traces of soluble
salts and/or corrosive air-borne contaminants prior to SANS 887 For interior use, glossy and egg-shell
painting, and the surfaces shall be dried and painted varnish.
immediately thereafter. The Contractor shall furnish the Engineer with the
Welding shall be completed in so far as it is possible following information and details regarding the paints
before painting commences, but in cases where welding and decorative materials for the painting system he
can be done only at a later stage, no paint shall be applied proposes to use, for written approval:
to within 75 mm of the proposed weld position unless
(i) The name of the manufacturer and trade name.
otherwise specified. Welds and adjacent parent metal shall
be abrasive blasted and/or ground and all contaminants (ii) The brand, type or grade of paint and the
such as flux shall be removed prior to painting. appropriate SANS specification.
Surfaces of members which are to rest on concrete or (iii) Manufacturer's data sheets, colour references,
other floors or which will be otherwise inaccessible after instructions for use, including surface preparation,
erection shall receive the full paint system prior to sealers, primers, undercoats, finishing coats, coat
erection. thicknesses and curing periods, which shall all be
Damaged paint areas on metal surfaces shall be considered as being part of these Specifications if
cleaned, rust spots removed where applicable and the approved by the Engineer.
surrounding paint which is still intact shall be feathered (iv) Safeguards to protect the applied paint from
for a distance of 20 mm beyond the damaged area. damage until the work is accepted by the
Spot priming and repair shall consist of all the coats Engineer.
previously applied and shall overlap the damaged area.
(v) The shelf or pot life of materials, if applicable.
Damaged galvanized areas shall be cleaned and any
rust spots and any flakes of the coating surrounding the (vi) An undertaking by the manufacturer or supplier
damaged area removed. The coating shall then be that the proposed paint system is suitable for its
restored by zinc spraying or soldering, or painting with a intended use and that the various coats of paint
zinc-rich paint, as may be approved by the Engineer. are compatible with one another.
Where the shop coat is allowed to age for a few months Where proprietary brands are used, the manufacturer's
before the final painting is done, light sanding or priming and all subsequent coats of paint suitable for
rubbing with steel wool or scrubbing with clean water that particular brand shall be employed in accordance
using a bristle brush shall be carried out. with the manufacturer's instructions.
Steel to be embedded in concrete shall not be painted
below 50 mm from the final level of the concrete.

806-1
No other materials of a similar nature and quality or Upon completion, the Contractor shall, in the case of
from another manufacturer may be used instead of buildings, clean all glass, remove all paint spots from
those approved unless permission to do so has been walls, floors and fittings, and leave the premises clean
obtained from the Engineer, in writing. and fit for occupation.
All materials shall be brought onto the Site in containers All inflammable materials, comprising solvents,
sealed by the manufacturer. Paints shall not be mixed thinners, wiping cloths, etc, shall be placed in tightly
with another paint of a different quality, type, brand or closed containers and properly disposed of.
colour, or thinned or adulterated in any way, but shall
be used as supplied by the manufacturer. Any mixing or 06 PAINTING OF PLASTER, CONCRETE OR
tinting required shall be carried out by the BRICK SURFACES
manufacturer. 06.01 Surface preparation
Tinting of paint on the Site by the Contractor will only be Surfaces for painting shall be prepared by sand- papering,
allowed with the written permission of the manufacturer scraping or wire-brushing to remove loose material, dust,
and the Engineer. laitance, scum or other deleterious materials or high spots.
Defective areas shall be cut out where necessary and
04 INSPECTION AND PRELIMINARY WORK made good with an approved non-shrink filler. Cracks
shall be cut out, suitably keyed, and given a coat of an
Before commencing paintwork, the Contractor shall
approved bonding agent before the filler is applied. All
carefully inspect the surfaces to be painted to satisfy
patches shall be rubbed down to an even surface.
himself that the surfaces are in a satisfactory or
Surfaces shall be washed and allowed to dry.
acceptable condition to receive the paint system
specified. Surfaces shall be treated with neutralizing liquid for
walls, and if the surface is coarse or textured, either one
All metal fittings and fastenings shall be removed where full coat of pigmented wall sealer or one full filler coat
applicable before the preparatory processes are shall be applied in addition to the neutralizing liquid.
commenced. On completion, the metal fittings and
fastenings shall be cleaned and refitted in position. 06.02 Paint application

05 WORKMANSHIP AND FINISHES Prior to the emulsion paint being applied, the surface
shall be sealed with an approved clear sealer and
Paint may be applied by spray, brush or roller primed with an undercoat diluted to 50%. Emulsion
depending on the materials used, the surface to be paint (PVA or acrylic) shall then be applied in two
painted, and the manufacturer's instructions. finishing coats.
Every coat of paint, irrespective of the method of Egg-shell finish (alkyd oil based), oil gloss paint or
application, shall be adequately and permanently keyed enamel gloss paint shall be applied as follows: one coat
or bonded to the base material or previously applied of universal undercoat shall be applied and it shall be
coat, and shall be evenly distributed, continuous, free followed by one coat of a mixture comprising 50% of the
from sags, runs, brush marks, pin holes or other undercoat and 50% of the paint to be used for the
imperfections, and shall dry to a smooth finish. finishing coat. A finishing coat of semi-gloss egg-shell,
or oil gloss paint or enamel gloss paint shall then be
An approved water trap and air-regulating valve shall be applied.
furnished and installed on all equipment used in spray
painting. 07 PAINTING OF WOODWORK
Before painting the interiors of buildings they shall be 07.01 Surface preparation
cleaned and the floors shall be washed and kept free
from dust during the progress of the interior work. The surfaces shall be cleaned, sandpapered and
rubbed down to a smooth, even face before painting.
The Contractor shall protect all nearby surfaces against The moisture content of the timber shall not be more
disfigurement by spatters, splashes and smirches of than 20% at the time when the first coat is applied. All
paint or paint materials. The Contractor shall be cracks, shakes or scars shall be filled flush with a filler
responsible for any damage by paint or dirt caused by approved by the Engineer before painting. The surface
his operations to vehicles or property or injury to shall then be washed with cleaner and allowed to dry.
persons and he will be required to provide protective
measures to prevent any such damage or injury and 07.02 Primer application
make good, where required, at his own expense. One coat of an approved wood primer shall be applied.
If passing traffic creates dust which may harm or spoil After open-grained timber has been prepared and
the appearance of external painted surfaces, the primed, the grain shall be stopped and filled with
Contractor shall sprinkle the adjacent areas with water, synthetic filler and rubbed down with water paper.
at his own cost, for a sufficient distance on each side of All new woodwork shall be properly primed on all
the location where painting is being done. surfaces and edges before being fixed in position. All
woodwork not previously painted shall be given a prime
Undercoats shall be tinted by the manufacturer to
distinguish between successive coats. coat, well brushed in.

The final coats or finishing coats of paint shall be 07.03 Paint application
applied after all the other work in the vicinity has been One coat of universal undercoat shall be applied
completed. followed by one coat of mixture comprising 50% of the
undercoat and 50% of the paint to be used for the
The painter shall keep some of the final paint in reserve
finishing coat. A finishing coat of oil gloss paint or
in the event of his having to make good any patching
enamel gloss paint or semi-gloss egg-shell (alkyd oil
which may be required as a result of damage or
based) paint shall then be applied.
unforeseen circumstances.

806-2
07.04 Varnish finish As soon as the rinsed guardrails are dry, a
finishing coat of high-gloss enamel shall be
Prepare, stop and apply two coats of gloss varnish or applied to a dry-film thickness of not less than
egg-shell varnish. 0,250 mm. This shall be followed by a second
coat, as before within 48 hours.
08 PAINTING OF METAL SURFACES
The guardrails shall preferably be given both
08.01 General finishing coats before erection, but where this
Wherever possible, all painting shall be done at the cannot be done, the Engineer may allow the
fabricator's works, but where this is not feasible, the finishing coats to be applied after erection,
Engineer may permit the application of the undercoat provided that all the mating surfaces and
and finishing coats to be carried out on the Site, in inaccessible spots be painted with the finishing
which case a prime coat shall be applied at the coats before erection.
fabricator's works prior to the members being The total dry-film thickness of all the coats of paint
dispatched to the Works. on guardrails shall not be less than 0,900 mm.
08.02 Surface preparation The surfaces of steel and cast-iron articles, such
as floor gratings, grids and manhole covers, shall,
The preparation of metal surfaces shall comply with
after a thorough brushing to remove loose rust, be
SANS Code of Practice 10064 and shall receive the
painted with two coats of epoxy-tar paint, each at
greatest care to ensure rust-free conditions prior to the
least 0,230 mm thick.
paint system being applied.
(b) Galvanized iron and steel
All surfaces shall be prepared by loose paint, rust,
plaster, scale, dust, dirt, grease, etc, being removed All traces of protective coating shall be removed
and by the defective paint surfaces being repaired or with galvanized iron cleaner, and two coats of
patched before painting or repainting. Damaged shop- calcium plumbate primer shall be applied. One
primed surfaces shall be thoroughly cleaned of rust and coat of tinted universal undercoat and two finishing
patched with a prime coat. coats of alkyd resin-based synthetic enamel gloss
paint shall be applied.
08.03 Paint application
(c) Non-ferrous metals
(a) Iron and steel work
Surfaces of aluminium, copper, etc, shall be
All iron and steel work shall be properly primed prepared and cleaned, and one coat of self-etch
with a red-lead-based primer where steel work is zinc-chromate wash primer shall be applied. One
likely to be exposed to the elements for longer coat of universal tinted undercoat and two finishing
than 30 days. Zinc-chromate primer may be used coats of enamel gloss paint shall then be applied.
where overpainting will be completed within 30 Where non-ferrous metals are not to be painted,
days of priming. Metal-etch wash primers may be the surfaces shall be cleaned, polished and two
used under dry conditions where overpainting will coats of lacquer applied.
be completed within 24 hours of priming. The dry-
film thickness of the prime coat shall not be less 09 PAINTING OF FLOOR SCREEDS
than 0,300 mm.
Where chemicals could cause damage to floors, such
After priming, one coat of universal undercoat floors shall be painted with an approved epoxy paint.
shall be applied. If necessary, the undercoat shall The type of paint to be used will be specified in the
be tinted to a shade just lighter than the desired Project Specifications and will depend on the types of
finish with approved liquid stainers. The dry-film chemicals that are used.
thickness shall not be less than 0,250 mm.
The preparation of such floor screeds for painting and
The two finishing coats shall either be of alkyd the subsequent application of paints shall be carried out
resin-based synthetic enamel, gloss or matt oil strictly in accordance with the manufacturer's
paint, or as specified elsewhere. The dry-film instructions.
thickness shall not be less than 0,250 mm per
coat. 10 PAINT THICKNESS
When mating surfaces are brought together, both Unless otherwise specified, all coats of paint, whether
surfaces shall have been given the full treatment prime coat, undercoat or finishing coat, shall have a
specified, but where this cannot be done, each dry-film thickness of not less than 0,200 mm,
surface shall be given a copious coating of primer irrespective of the method of application.
and the surfaces drawn together while the paint is
still wet. 11 INSPECTION
The portion of structural steel members to be The Contractor shall provide the necessary equipment
buried in soil, and all bases to a height of 500 mm to establish whether the primers, undercoats and
shall be given two coats of an epoxy-tar primer finishing coats have been applied to the correct
instead of the zinc-chromate primer specified for thickness and at the correct applications. The Engineer
other surfaces. may take samples of the paints during painting
operations for testing and quality control.
Ungalvanized guardrails shall receive two coats of
zinc-chromate primer with a dry-film thickness of 12 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
0,200 mm per coat before being dispatched to the
Site. Unless otherwise specified in the Project Specifications
or in other sections of these Specifications where
Before the first finishing coat is applied, the painting is required, no separate payment shall be
guardrails shall be thoroughly washed down to made for painting, the cost of which shall be included in
remove all traces of salt and other airborne the tendered rates for the supply, manufacture and
corrosive materials and dirt or other contaminants. erection of the items to be painted.
806-3
SERIES 8 : SPECIFIC WORKS (i) Test pile
Any pile which is to be tested,
SECTION 807 : PILING
(j) Underream
CONTENTS
A conical enlargement excavated at the bottom
01 SCOPE end of a cast in situ pile before concrete is placed.
02 DEFINITIONS
03 DESIGN 03 DESIGN
04 MATERIALS 03.01 Piling layout
05 PLANT AND EQUIPMENT
06 PILING PLATFORMS The piling layout, the proposed sizes and/or capacity
07 SURVEYING and types of the piles, together with the steel
08 CONSTRUCTION reinforcement and class of concrete required, shall be
09 TEST LOADING as detailed and specified on the Drawings unless
10 TOLERANCES otherwise specified in the Project Specifications.
11 DEFECTIVE PILES
03.02 Alternative pile and pile layout designs
12 GUARANTEE
13 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT The critical design-load combinations acting on the
underside and at a position indicated on the pile-capping
01 SCOPE slab, the maximum allowable settlement or uplift of the
pile-capping slab, and the technical data necessary for
This section covers the construction of bearing and
designing alternative piles and/or piling layouts will be
tension piles of concrete or steel or a combination of
provided on the Drawings. Alternative designs shall
these materials. comply with the provisions of clause 05 of section 001.
02 DEFINITIONS 03.03 Details to be furnished by the Contractor
For the purposes of this section the following words and In all cases where the choice of the type of pile to be
expressions shall have the meanings hereby assigned used is left to the Contractor, the full particulars,
to them, unless inconsistent with the context. specifications, calculations and drawings of the piles he
proposes to use shall be submitted with his tender.
(a) Bulbous base
The Contractor shall, where applicable, submit the
An enlargement of the shaft of a cast in situ
following information to the Engineer before doing any
concrete pile which is formed at the base of the
piling work:
pile by the hammering-in of semi-dry concrete.
(a) The method of driving the piles and casings or
(b) Cut-off level forming the holes;
The level to which a completed pile is trimmed and (b) the method of dealing with obstructions;
which is 75 mm above the underside of the pile
cap, unless otherwise specified in the Project (c) the mass of the hammer;
Specifications. (d) the set for the last ten blows;
(c) Dolly (e) the size of bulbous bases, if any;
A cushion of hardwood or other material placed on (f) the method of placing and compacting concrete in
top of the helmet to receive the blows of the the case of cast in situ piles;
hammer. (g) the method of keeping reinforcing steel in place
(d) Helmet during the placing and compaction of the concrete
in cast in situ piles;
A cover temporarily placed on top of a pile to
prevent damage during driving. (h) details of permanent or temporary casing, if any.

(e) Loads 04 MATERIALS

(i) Working load : The theoretical load to be
04.01 Concrete and reinforcement
carried by a pile under ordinary service
conditions. The materials used for concrete and reinforcement in
piles shall comply with the relevant requirements of the
(ii) Test load : A load equal to twice the working
appropriate sections of series 7. The concrete shall be
load and applied to a test pile to confirm its
of the strength specified in the Project Specifications or
suitability for the load at the specified
given on the Drawings.
allowable settlement or uplift.
(f) Obstruction 04.02 Permanent casings

An obstruction to the installation of a pile as Permanent casings for cast in situ piles shall be of
defined in more detail in subclause 08.07. sufficient strength and rigidity to ensure that they can be
installed without distortion and will remain undamaged
(g) Raking pile during the placing of adjacent piles. They shall be
sufficiently watertight to prevent water from leaking
A pile designed to be installed at an inclination to
the vertical. through the casing walls during the placing of concrete.
Where a steel casing is designed to provide part of the
(h) Rock socket
strength of the pile, joints in the casing shall be butt-
A hole formed in rock formation on which a pile is welded in accordance with BS EN 1043-1 and
founded and into which the bottom end of the pile BS EN 1043-2.
is cast.

807-1
04.03 Precast-concrete piles 07.03 Level and alignment
The piles shall be of reinforced or prestressed concrete Prior to and during the course of installation of piles, the
and shall be manufactured, handled, stored and level and alignment of the piling frame shall be
installed in accordance with BS 8004 and SANS 10088. constantly checked, and any deviation shall be
unless otherwise specified in these Specifications. corrected immediately.

05 PLANT AND EQUIPMENT 08 CONSTRUCTION

The plant and equipment used for driving piles, for 08.01 Cast in situ concrete piles
forming holes, or for other methods of sinking piles shall
be in a good working order and shall meet with the (a) Reinforcement
Engineer's approval. All machinery shall comply with
the relevant clauses of the Factories, Machinery and Reinforcement shall not be placed in the pile holes
Building Work Act, (Act No 22 of 1941), as amended, until immediately before concreting. Before the
the Occupational Health and Safety, (Act No 85 of reinforcement is placed, the bottom of the hole
1993) and the Construction Regulations 2003. shall be thoroughly cleaned of mud, water and any
loose or soft material.
Installation equipment shall be of a design that will
ensure that piles can be installed in their proper Steel reinforcement shall be accurately kept in
positions and to their correct alignment and slope. position without damage being done to the sides of
the hole or the reinforcing cage. Spacers shall be
Equipment for the inspection of pile shafts shall be used to keep reinforcement at the required
provided and operated in accordance with the latest distance from the inside face of the casing and
amendment or edition of the Code of Practice relating to wall of the pile hole and shall not give rise to
The Safety of Persons working in small diameter shafts zones through which ground water may penetrate
and Test Pits for Civil Engineering purposes obtainable towards the reinforcement. Reference shall be
from the South African Institution of Civil Engineers. made to clause 07 of section 703 in regard to the
minimum cover over the reinforcement.
06 PILING PLATFORMS
The longitudinal bars shall project above the cut-
Piling platforms shall include the prepared in situ off point by the distance indicated on the
material, or any temporary structure, excluding the Drawings, or by a minimum of forty three (43)
piling equipment, constructed to obtain a level platform times the bar diameter if no dimension is
from which the piling operations can be carried out, as indicated.
well as the provision of access to the platform.
The splicing of the reinforcement will be permitted,
The foundation material required to support the piling
and the Contractor shall keep available on the Site
plant and equipment shall, where necessary, be sufficient steel reinforcement so that an additional
consolidated to provide firm support. The Contractor may length of pile reinforcement can be assembled
use any material he deems suitable for the construction
whenever necessary.
of piling platforms, but shall note that obstructions to
piling encountered within the artificially constructed The assembly of this additional reinforcement shall
platform material shall not be measured and paid for. be carried out expeditiously and before the
concreting of any specific pile commences. If
On completion of the piling, the Contractor shall remove
splices have to be provided, the longitudinal bars
the artificially constructed platforms as well as the
shall overlap by a distance of forty three (43) times
access thereto, and shall reinstate the Site to the
the diameter of the bar, or as required by the
satisfaction of the Engineer.
Engineer.
For the purposes of this specification, piling platforms
(b) Concreting of piles
shall not be regarded as artificial islands as specified in
section 701. The concreting of the piles shall not commence
before the Engineer has given his permission to do
07 SURVEYING so.
07.01 Setting out The concrete, while being proportioned to ensure
The Contractor shall set out the pile positions and shall adequate strength, shall be sufficiently workable to
stake these positions with a durable marker. Where the enable proper placing and shall be thoroughly
level from which the piling is undertaken is above the compacted by approved means. Extraction of the
underside of the pile-capping slab, due allowance shall temporary casing during concreting shall be done
be made for the offset of the raking piles so that the pile in such a way that no damage is caused to the
at the underside of the pile-capping slab is in the pile, and that the advancing concrete level is at all
correct position. times kept considerably above the temporary
casing's trailing edge. Concrete shall generally be
07.02 Ground surface for piling placed in the dry, but where, in the opinion of the
Prior to the commencement of piling work, the Engineer, this is impracticable, it shall be placed
Contractor shall notify the Engineer in good time with a by means of a tremie.
view to ensuring that levels are taken of the ground The following requirements shall apply when
surface, so that an average ground surface from which concrete is placed by tremie:
the piling is to be measured can be established and
agreed on between the Engineer and the Contractor. (i) The cement content shall be not less than
400 kg/m3 and the slump shall be such that
Where piling at a site is preceded by excavation or the concrete of the specified strength and the
construction of fill, the surface from which piling is to be desired density can be obtained.
undertaken shall be formed as near as possible to the
underside of the pile-capping slab, as directed by the
Engineer.

807-2
 (ii) A temporary or permanent casing shall be (c) Lengthening of precast piles
installed to the full depth of the hole to
prevent fragments of earth from dropping Wherever required, the piles shall be lengthened
from the sides into the concrete. When by such means and methods as may be approved
concreting is done below drilling mud, the by the Engineer. Care shall be taken to ensure
temporary casing may not be necessary that the additional length of pile joined is truly axial
except near the top. to the original pile within the tolerance
requirements for straightness set out in clause 10
(iii) The hopper and tremie shall form a closed of this section.
system which cannot be penetrated by water.
Driving shall not be resumed until the pile
(iv) The tremie pipe shall be at least 150 mm in extension and any bonding agent used has
diameter for 19,0 mm aggregate and larger attained the required strength.
for larger aggregates.
08.03 Steel piles
(v) The concrete shall be placed in a manner
that will prevent the mixing of water and Hollow steel piles may be filled with concrete and,
concrete. The tremie pipe shall penetrate into provided that adequate load-transfer connections are
the concrete at all times. provided between the steel and concrete, the concrete
may be deemed to assist in carrying the load.
(vi) Concreting of that part of the pile below the
water level in the casing shall be completed Wherever steel piles are used, they shall be given
in one operation and the method of placing protective coatings of bitumen, coal-tar pitch or
the concrete shall be maintained throughout. synthetic resins to the satisfaction of the Engineer or as
specified in the Project Specifications. Adequate
(vii) All tremies shall be scrupulously cleaned allowance, depending on the severity of the subsurface
before and after use. conditions, shall be made in the cross-sectional area of
steel to compensate for a possible reduction in the pile
Concrete shall be placed in a manner that will wall thickness on account of abrasion or corrosion
prevent segregation of the aggregates. during the service life of the pile.
08.02 Precast-concrete piles Steel piles shall be used only where permitted in writing
(a) Manufacture by the Engineer.

The piles may be manufactured in a factory or in a 08.04 Driving

casting yard on the Site of the Works. The (a) Installation equipment
Contractor shall ensure that the factory or casting
yard is open for inspection by the Engineer at all Piles and pile casings shall be driven with a gravity
reasonable times. hammer, a rapid-action power hammer, or by other
approved means. During driving operations, the
The relevant requirements of section 704 shall hammer shall not damage any permanent
apply to the concrete work. component of the pile. Pile-driver leaders shall be
so constructed as to afford freedom of movement
The piles shall be cast in approved moulds on a
to the hammer, and they shall be held in position
rigid, horizontal platform. Particular care shall be
to ensure adequate support for the pile or pile
taken to secure the reinforcement, coupler sockets
casing during installation. Inclined leaders shall be
and pile shoes accurately in position. Adequate
used in installing raking piles.
provision shall be made for the lifting of piles.
The heads of precast concrete piles shall be
Each pile shall be clearly marked with the date of protected with packings of resilient material, care
casting and a reference number and with distance being taken to ensure that the packing is evenly
marks from the tip of the pile at one metre spread and held in place. A helmet shall be placed
intervals. over the packing and shall be provided with a dolly
Piles shall be cured for a sufficient period to of hardwood or other material.
develop the strength required to withstand, without (b) Water jetting
damage to the pile, the stresses caused by
handling, transport, storing and driving. The piles The Contractor may employ water jetting to install
shall be driven in order of age, but shall not be piles in granular material. Jetting shall be
driven before the concrete in the pile has attained discontinued before the leading end of the pile has
the specified strength. reached a depth of 80 per cent of the anticipated
final depth or a depth as agreed on with the
(b) Handling, transport and storage Engineer. After jetting, the piles or their casings
shall be driven to the required depth, level or set.
Care shall be taken at all stages of lifting, handling
and transporting to ensure that the piles are not (c) Installation sequence
damaged or cracked.
Unless otherwise specified or ordered, the
Piles shall be stored on firm ground that will not sequence of installing piles will be left to the
settle unequally under the weight of the stack of Contractor. However, the sequence of driving piles
piles. The piles shall be placed on timber supports in a group shall be programmed to minimize the
that are truly level and so spaced as to avoid creation of consolidated blocks of earth into which
undue bending of the piles. The supports in the the piles cannot be driven or which cause fictitious
stack shall be located vertically above one penetration values.
another.

807-3
 Piling shall generally commence at the centre of (c) Bulbous bases
the group and shall be extended progressively to
Bulbous bases shall comply with the requirements
the perimeter piles, unless otherwise agreed on by
of subclause 08.04 (e).
the Engineer.
The installation of piles shall be undertaken in (d) Inspection of preformed holes
such a manner that no structural damage, Immediately before the reinforcement is to be
distortion or positioning defects will be caused to installed or the concrete is to be placed, the
previously installed piles or casings. Engineer shall be informed thereof so that he can
inspect the pile holes. When piles are to be
(d) Heaving of piles
underreamed, the excavation shall be inspected
In soils in which the installation of piles may cause twice, the first time before underreaming
previously installed piles to heave, accurate level commences to ensure that suitable founding
marks shall be placed on each pile immediately material has been obtained, and the second time
after installation and all piles that have heaved after underreaming has been completed to give
shall be redriven to the required resistance, unless approval for the casting of the pile.
redriving tests on neighbouring piles have shown
this to be unnecessary. Piles shall not be 08.06 Rock sockets
concreted nor shall any pile-capping slab be
Where required, rock sockets to the required
constructed until the piles within a heave-influence
dimensions shall be formed in a rock formation which is
zone have been redriven as required.
of adequate strength, quality and thickness to transmit
(e) Bulbous bases the specified load.
Where required, bulbous bases shall be formed For the classification of rock in terms of this subclause,
after the driven casing has reached the required the classification as specified in subclause 08.07 (b) (iv)
depth. The base shall be formed by the shall apply.
surrounding subsoil being progressively displaced
by concrete which is placed by repeatedly being 08.07 Obstructions
hammered by a gravity hammer. The size of the
(a) Definitions
base will depend on the compressibility of the
surrounding subsoil but shall in no case have a (i) Identified obstructions
diameter of less than 1,5 times the diameter of the
pile. Identified obstructions shall mean any
obstructions that have been described on the
08.05 Augering and boring Drawings or in the Project Specifications and
for which provision for payment for the
(a) Auger and bore pile holes penetration thereof has been made in the
Augering and boring of pile holes shall be carried Schedule of Quantities.
out as expeditiously as local conditions may (ii) Unidentified obstructions
permit, taking due account of services or other
restrictions on the Site. Where provision has been made in the
Schedule of Quantities in terms of item 807.08
Holes shall be cleaned after augering and boring for penetrating identified obstructions, and
in order to obtain a clean and level surface. obstructions which have not been described
are encountered, such obstructions shall be
Where indicated by the Engineer, suitable casing classified as unidentified obstructions and shall
shall be installed in those portions of the augered be paid for under item 807.09, subject to the
holes where the sides are in danger of caving in condition that the rate of penetration drops to
before concreting is completed. below that achieved for identified obstructions
While the casing is being extracted, care shall be when the same methods and effort are used, or
taken to avoid lifting the concrete and damage to subject to additional methods and effort over
the pile. and above those required for identified
obstructions being required for penetrating the
The use of water for augering and boring holes or obstruction.
for any other purpose where it may enter the hole
will not be permitted. Surface water shall not be Where no provision has been made in the
allowed to enter the hole. Schedule of Quantities for penetrating
identified obstructions and obstructions are in
(b) Underreaming fact encountered, and, after the methods
specified in the submission in terms of
Where required, the hole shall be enlarged or subclause 03.03 have been resorted to it is
belled out to form an underream. The excavated found that the holes cannot be formed in the
earth shall be removed so as to not damage the proper positions and at the correct inclinations
wall of the hole. and depths, and the Contractor has to resort to
The shape of the underream shall be that of a additional methods to form the pile holes
truncated cone with base diameter depending on successfully, such obstructions shall be
the bearing capacity of the founding material, but it classified as unidentified obstructions.
shall be not less than one and a half times the (b) Classification of materials
shaft diameter. The base angle of the cone
between the inclined face and the horizontal plane For piling only the following classifications of
shall be not less than 60°. material shall apply in respect of the identification
Full safety measures shall be enforced to protect and description of obstructions.
workmen working down a pile hole.

807-4
 (i) Matrix 08.08 Determination of pile length
The matrix shall comprise that part of the The design of the piles and pile groups, and the
material that will pass through a quantities in the Schedule of Quantities are based on
50 mm x 50 mm mesh sieve. the subsurface data shown on the Drawings or
contained in the Project Specifications.
(ii) Coarse gravel
The Engineer will determine the depth of piles as work
Coarse gravel shall comprise that part of the proceeds.
material (stones, pebbles, cobbles, etc) that will
pass through a 200 mm x 200 mm mesh but will The length of piles will be determined by measuring
not pass through a 50 mm x 50 mm mesh. down from the specified cut-off level to the founding
level of the piles. The founding level for piles shall be
(iii) Boulders the underside of the underream, bulbous base, rock
Boulders shall mean any rock mass with a socket, the tip of the pile shoe or lower pile end,
uniaxial compressive strength of at least 3 MPa whichever may be relevant.
that will pass through a square opening with Should there be variations in the subsurface conditions
dimensions equal to the maximum sized boulder as regards material and the height of the water table,
specified in the Schedule of Quantities but that the Engineer shall be informed immediately.
will not pass through a 200 mm x 200 mm mesh.
If the Contractor is not satisfied that the piles will be
(iv) Rock formation capable of carrying the specified loads at the depths
A rock formation shall be a rock mass with a determined by the Engineer, he shall have the right to
uniaxial compressive strength of at least 3 MPa vary the length of pile to reach a founding depth at which
that will not pass through a square opening he is willing to guarantee the load-bearing capacity of
with dimensions equal to the maximum sized the pile. Such additional length of pile installed shall be
boulder specified in the Schedule of Quantities. measured in accordance with these Specifications and
shall be paid for at the tendered rates.
Where a boulder is penetrated and part of it is
left imbedded in the wall of the hole, such In order to determine final pile lengths and founding
boulder obstruction shall be classified as rock levels, the Engineer may require additional foundation
formation. investigations to be made and/or that the piles be test-
loaded in accordance with subclause 09.
For the identification of rock in terms of this
subclause, the following classification shall apply: 08.09 Piling records

(1) Soft rock : material with a uniaxial For each pile installed, records of the information listed
compressive strength ranging from 3 MPa below, if applicable, shall be kept in a form prescribed
to 10 MPa. by the Engineer, a copy of which shall be submitted to
the Engineer as soon as practicable.
(2) Hard rock : material with a uniaxial
compressive strength in excess of 10 MPa. (a) The effort used to drive the pile and the resistance
to penetration at founding.
(c) Driven displacement and prefabricated piles
(b) A description of the subsurface material, the
Where obstructions make it difficult to install driven presence of ground water and the quality of the
displacement and prefabricated piles in the positions material on which the pile is founded.
and at the inclination shown and to the proper
lengths by the methods specified in the submission (c) The quality of the materials used in the construction
in terms of subclause 03.03, the Contractor shall or manufacture of the pile as well as of the
resort to additional methods feasible for the type of permanent casing if used. The method of placing
pile. If a pile cannot be installed successfully after and compacting the concrete in cast in situ piles.
resorting to such methods, the Engineer may order (d) The method of founding the piles, i.e. by way of
that an additional pile or piles be installed. All such bulbous bases, underreams, rock sockets, etc, and
additional work and piles shall be paid for in their dimensions.
accordance with the appropriate tendered rates or,
failing which, under item 807.10. (e) The working load of the pile.

(d) Augered and bored pile holes (f) The length of the pile and the accuracy of
installation in respect of position and inclination.
Where identified or unidentified obstructions are
encountered when augered and bored holes for 08.10 Reinforcement
piles are formed, the Engineer may require that The reinforcement for the piles will be scheduled on the
the extent of the obstructions be investigated by Drawings for quantity purposes only. The number, size,
the Contractor by drilling into the obstruction with a type, the arrangement of bars and the required cover,
core-drilling rig, a percussion rig or a jack hammer, will be shown. The Contractor shall detail the
as may be decided on by the Engineer. reinforcement to suit the pile lengths and will be at
The Contractor shall supply any of the above liberty to substitute bars of different diameters, spacings
equipment within 24 hours of his receiving written and types on a basis of equivalent strength, subject to
instructions from the Engineer. the approval of the Engineer.

Payment for investigating obstructions and for time Lateral reinforcement shall be mild steel or hard-drawn
lost whilst the investigations are in progress, as steel wire, either helical or in the form of stirrups.
well as payment for eventually penetrating the Lateral reinforcement for precast piles shall comply with
obstructions after the investigations have been BS 8004, and full details of all the reinforcement for
completed, shall be made against the appropriate precast piles shall be provided by the Contractor.
pay items provided in the Schedule of Quantities.

807-5
The reinforcement shall be assembled in rigid cages The final rebound shall be recorded 24 hours after the
that will not deform during handling. The space inside entire test load has been removed.
the cage shall remain unobstructed to facilitate
During the test the pile shall first be loaded to 50 per
concreting.
cent of the test load, and then fully unloaded and
08.11 Stripping of pile heads reloaded to the full test load, and then unloaded.
Precast piles shall be installed to a level of at least The allowable settlement or uplift shall be as specified
1,0 m above the cut-off level and cast in situ piles shall on the Drawings or in the Project Specifications. The
be concreted to a level of at least 150 mm above the test load will be indicated in the Schedule of Quantities.
cut-off level. The excess concrete shall be so stripped
off that the remaining sound concrete will project 75 mm 10 TOLERANCES
into the pile-capping slab.
The work specified in this section shall conform to the
The concrete shall be so stripped off as to avoid tolerances given below:
damage to the pile below the cut-off level. In the case of
such damage or of defective concrete being in the 10.01 Position
completed pile, the damaged/defective concrete shall be Position in plan ±100 mm
cut away and made good with new concrete well-bonded
to the old concrete, or the pile shall be replaced, as 10.02 Diameter or dimensions of sides
directed by the Engineer all at the Contractor's cost.
Prefabricated piles + 25 mm, - 5 mm
The main reinforcement from the piles shall extend for a
minimum distance of 43 bar diameters beyond the cut- Cast in situ piles + tolerance : not specified
off level into the pile-capping slab. This reinforcement - tolerance : 0 mm
shall be left straight, unless otherwise detailed or
10.03 Pile-head level
directed by the Engineer.
Average level of trimmed/cut pile head ± 10 mm
08.12 Construction of the pile-capping slab
10.04 Verticality
The Contractor shall not be permitted to construct the
pile-capping slab before the Engineer has confirmed in Verticality or rake 1,5°
writing that all the relevant load tests have been
completed and that the piles have been accepted. 10.05 Straightness

09 TEST LOADING For precast piles the permissible maximum deviation

from straight is 5 mm for piles up to 3 m long and 1 mm
09.01 General more for each additional metre of pile length.
The Engineer may order certain selected piles to be
tested for settlement or uplift and will indicate such piles 11 DEFECTIVE PILES
in writing. The procedure for test loading shall comply The test pile and the piles represented by a test pile
with the requirements of SANS 10088, unless otherwise shall be classified as being defective if, in terms of
specified hereinafter. During the period of testing, the clause 09, they are found to have an inadequate
driving of other piles that may affect the testing shall bearing capacity, or an inadequate resistance to
cease. extraction, or excessive settlement or uplift. Defective
The Contractor shall provide the necessary plant, piles shall also include piles damaged beyond repair,
equipment, instruments and labour for carrying out the piles with structural defects, or piles that do not comply
test and for determining accurately the settlement or with the tolerance requirements of clause 10.
uplift of the piles under each increase or decrease of Defective piles shall be corrected at the Contractor's
load. The plant, equipment and instruments used and expense by way of one of the following methods
the testing procedure to be followed shall meet with the approved by the Engineer:
approval of the Engineer.
(a) Extracting the pile and replacing it with a new pile.
Within two days of completing the test, the Contractor
shall supply the Engineer with the test results and (b) Installing a new pile adjacent to the defective pile.
neatly plotted graphs of settlement or uplift as a
function of load, load as a function of time and (c) Lengthening the pile to the correct length if it is
settlement or uplift as a function of time. defective in length only.
(d) Altering the design to meet the new conditions
09.02 Loading caused by the defective pile(s).
The test load for both bearing and tension piles shall be
applied in increments of 20% of the specified working 12 GUARANTEE
load, unless otherwise specified in the Project
The Contractor shall be liable, for a period of 3 years
Specification or determined by the Engineer. Successive
from the date of completing the last pile on the contract,
load increments shall not be applied until the rate of
for the cost, up to the limit of the guaranteed amount, of
settlement or rise under the acting load has stabilized to a
all damages direct or consequential as well as for the
rate of movement not exceeding 0,10 mm in 20 minutes.
cost of all remedial work resulting from defective piles.
When the loading has been completed, the full test load The Contractor shall provide a written guarantee
shall be maintained until the movement is less than underwritten by an approved insurance company to
0,2 mm in a 24-hour period. Unloading shall be made in bear all costs for which the Contractor shall become
decrements of 20% of the specified working load at legally liable under the aforesaid conditions, subject to
intervals of not less than 20 minutes. a limit as specified in the Project Specifications. Such a
guarantee shall specifically state that it in no way limits
After each load reduction, the pile movements shall be the rights of the Employer to recover damages or costs
recorded on all gauges to an accuracy of 0,1 mm at time by other means.
intervals of 0,5, 1, 2, 5, 10 and 20 minutes, and every
30 minutes thereafter until the next change of load.

807-6
13 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 807.05.01.03 Etc in increments of 5 m depth
Item Unit 807.05.02 Bored holes
807.01 Establishment on Site 807.05.02.01 0 m to 10 m metre (m)
for piling lump sum 807.05.02.02 Exceeding 10 m up to 15m metre (m)
The tendered lump sum shall include full compensation for 807.05.02.03 Etc in increments of 5 m depth
the general levelling of the piling sites, the establishment
on Site and subsequent removal therefrom of all special The limits for the successive depth ranges shall be
plant and equipment for piling, and for carrying out measured down from the average ground surface
operations, the cost of which does not vary with the actual (subclause 07.02) to the agreed founding level
amount of piling done. The lump sum shall not exceed (subclause 08.08).
15% of the total amount tendered for the piling unless
The unit of measurement shall be the metre of hole
otherwise provided for in the Project Specifications.
formed.
This work will be paid for in a lump sum, 75% of which will
Irrespective of the total depth of hole, the quantity within
become payable when all the equipment is on the Site and
each depth range shall be measured and paid for
the first pile has been installed, and the remaining 25%
separately.
will become payable after the piles have been completed
and the equipment has been removed from the Site. The tendered rates for forming augered holes shall
include full compensation for augering and for disposing
Item Unit of surplus material resulting from the formed hole.
807.02 Additional foundation The tendered rates for forming bored holes shall include
investigations provisional sum full compensation for boring, supplying, installing and
A provisional sum is allowed in the Schedule of extracting the driven temporary casing, as well as for
Quantities to cover the costs of work carried out for the disposal of surplus material excavated from the
purposes set out in subclause 08.08. formed hole.

The method of payment for the work authorized by the Item Unit
Engineer shall be in accordance with the provisions of 807.06 Driving temporary casing for
the General Conditions of Contract. driven displacement-piling
Item Unit systems to form holes for
piles of (diameter indicated)
807.03 Piling platforms lump sum
through material situated in
This work will be paid for in a lump sum for each the following successive
structure or series of structures scheduled separately in depth ranges
the Schedule of Quantities. Seventy five per cent (75%)
of the lump sum will become payable when this work has 807.06.01 0 m to 10 m metre (m)
been constructed, and the remaining 25% will become 807.06.02 Exceeding 10 m up to 15 m metre (m)
payable after the piling platforms have been removed.
807.06.03 Etc in increments of 5 m depth
The tendered lump sum shall include full compensation
for the construction, maintenance and protection of piling The limits for the successive depth ranges shall be
platforms and any other work or operation required to measured down from the reference ground surface
ensure a level and stable platform as specified. (subclause 07.02) to the agreed founding level
(subclause 08.08).
Item Unit
807.04 Moving equipment to and The unit of measurement shall be the metre of hole
formed.
setting it up at each pile
position number (No) Irrespective of the total depth of hole, the quantity within
each depth range shall be measured and paid for
The unit of measurement shall be the number of separately.
positions to which the installation equipment has to be
moved and set up in position. The quantity measured The tendered rates shall include full compensation for
shall be the number of piles installed plus the number of supplying, driving and subsequently extracting the
piles redriven on instruction of the Engineer. The temporary casing.
redriving of defective piles will not be measured for
payment. Item Unit

The tendered rate shall include full compensation for all 807.07 Manufacturing, supplying and
costs for moving and setting up the equipment. delivering prefabricated piles
(type and size indicated) metre (m)
Item Unit
The unit of measurement shall be a metre of accepted
807.05 Auger or bore holes for prefabricated pile manufactured and delivered on the
piles of (diameter indicated) Site in accordance with the Engineer's written
through material situated instructions.
in the following successive
depth ranges The tendered rate shall include full compensation for
supplying all the materials, manufacturing, transporting
807.05.01 Augered holes and delivering to the point of use, and for handling the
prefabricated piles.
807.05.01.01 0 m to 10 m metre (m)
807.05.01.02 Exceeding 10 m up to 15 m metre (m)

807-7
Item Unit Item Unit
807.08 Installation of prefabricated piles 807.10 Forming augered and bored
(type and size indicated) through pile holes through
material situated in the following unidentified obstructions provisional sum
successive depth ranges A provisional sum is allowed in the Schedule of
807.08.01 0 m to 10 m metre (m) Quantities to cover the costs of this work.

807.08.02 Exceeding 10 m up to 15 m metre (m) The method of payment for the work authorized by the
Engineer shall be in accordance with the provisions of
807.08.03 Etc in increments of 5 m depth the General Conditions of Contract.
The limits for the successive depth ranges shall be Item Unit
measured down from a level 75 mm above the
807.11 Driving temporary casings
underside of the pile-capping slab to the agreed
founding level (subclause 08.08). for driven displacement-piling
systems or installing
The unit of measurement shall be the metre of pre- prefabricated piles through
fabricated pile installed, measured to the nearest 0,1 m. unidentified obstructions provisional sum
That part of the prefabricated pile projecting above a
level 75 mm above the underside of the pile-capping A provisional sum is allowed in the Schedule of
slab shall not be measured and paid for. Quantities to cover the costs of this work.
Irrespective of the total length of pile installed, the The method of payment for the work authorized by the
quantity within each depth range shall be measured and Engineer shall be in accordance with the provisions of
paid for separately. the General Conditions of Contract.
The tendered rates shall include full compensation for Item Unit
the hoisting and driving of the pile.
807.12 Extra over items 807.05, 807.06
Item Unit and 807.08 for raking piles
807.09 Extra over item 807.05, 807.12.01 Formed holes for piles of
irrespective of depth, to form (diameter and rake indicated) metre (m)
augered and bored pile holes 807.12.02 Prefabricated pile
through identified obstructions (type, size and rake indicated) metre (m)
consisting of -
The unit of measurement shall be the metre of pile hole
807.09.01 Coarse gravel with a matrix formed or prefabricated pile installed to the rake shown.
content of less than (maximum
percentage indicated) metre (m) The tendered rates shall include full compensation for
all additional work and costs for forming pile holes or
807.09.02 Boulders (maximum size installing prefabricated piles to the rake shown.
indicated) metre (m)
Item Unit
807.09.03 Soft rock metre (m)
807.13 Forming underreams for piles
807.09.04 Hard rock metre (m) of (diameter indicated) number (No)
The unit of measurement shall be the metre of pile hole The unit of measurement shall be the number of pile
formed through the identified obstruction, measured holes underreamed.
from the depth at which the identified obstruction has
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for all
been encountered, to the depth at which normal piling
can be resumed. work to be carried out in forming the underream.

The tendered rates shall include full compensation for Item Unit
all the additional costs and the work required to form 807.14 Forming of bulbous bases for
the pile hole through the identified obstruction. piles of (diameter indicated) number (No)
Notes: The unit of measurement shall be the number of
(a) Subitem 807.09.01 : The matrix content indicated bulbous bases formed.
shall be the percentage by volume of matrix in a The tendered rates shall include full compensation for
material containing coarse gravel. Where the all work to be carried out in forming the bulbous bases,
maximum percentage indicated is exceeded, such but shall exclude payment for the concrete forming the
material shall not be classified as an identified bulbous base.
obstruction, and payment for forming holes through
such material shall be made under item 807.05 Item Unit
only. Unless otherwise specified, the maximum 807.15 Extra over item 807.05 for
percentage of matrix shall be accepted as 60%.
socketing piles into the
(b) Where obstructions other than those provided for in rock formation
this item are present, they shall be described on the
Drawings and/or in the Project Specifications and 807.15.01 Soft rock metre (m)
shall be provided for in the Schedule of Quantities 807.15.02 Hard rock metre (m)
under extensions to this item.
The unit of measurement shall be the metre of the
penetration of the pile hole into the rock formation.

807-8
The tendered rates shall include full compensation for The tendered rate shall include full compensation for the
all work to be carried out to socket into the rock supply and storage of all materials, for providing all plant,
formation. Distinction shall be made between soft rock for mixing, transporting, placing, compacting and curing
and hard rock. the concrete, and for repairs to defective concrete.
Item Unit For payment purposes a distinction shall be made
between the different classes of concrete.
807.16 Installing and removing
temporary casings in augered Item Unit
holes for piles of (diameter 807.20 Extra over item 807.19 for
indicated) metre (m) concrete cast under water cubic metre (m3)
The unit of measurement shall be the metre of temporary The unit of measurement shall be the cubic metre of
casing installed as directed by the Engineer, or shown on concrete cast under water, the quantity being calculated
the Drawings, or specified in the Project Specifications. as for item 807.19, except that the length of pile under
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for the water shall be measured from the founding level to the
supply, installation and removal of temporary casings. water surface in the hole immediately before the
concrete is cast.
Item Unit
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for all
807.17 Installing permanent pile additional work, costs and extra cement required to
casing for piles of place the concrete under water.
(diameter indicated) metre (m)
Item Unit
The unit of measurement shall be the metre of
permanent casing installed as directed by the Engineer, 807.21 Splicing/joining prefabricated
or shown on the Drawings, or specified in the Project piles for lengthening (size of
Specifications. pile indicated) number (No)
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for The unit of measurement shall be the number of
the supply and installation of permanent pile casing. splices/joints in prefabricated piles for each size of pile.
Item Unit The tendered rate shall include full compensation for all
work required for splicing/joining the piles in
807.18 Steel reinforcement in cast
accordance with the Specifications.
in situ piles
Item Unit
807.18.01 Mild steel ton (t)
807.22 Stripping/Cutting pile heads
807.18.01.01 Bars with an 8 mm dia. ton (t) (type and diameter/size of pile
807.18.01.02 Bars with a 10 mm dia. ton (t) indicated) number (No)

807.18.01.03 Etc. for other diameters The unit of measurement shall be the number of heads
of each type and diameter/size of pile stripped/cut.
807.18.02 High-yield-stress steel ton (t)
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for
807.18.02.01 Bars with an 8 mm dia. ton (t) providing all tools and the stripping/cutting of the pile
heads.
807.18.02.02 Bars with a 10 mm dia. ton (t)
Item Unit
807.18.02.03 Etc for other diameters
807.23 Establishment on Site for
The unit of measurement for steel bars shall be the ton the load-testing of piles lump sum
of reinforcement in place in accordance with the
Drawings or as authorized by the Engineer. The tendered lump sum shall include full compensation
for the establishment on the Site and the subsequent
Clips, ties, separators and other steel used for removal of all special plant and equipment required for
positioning reinforcement shall not be measured. carrying out load tests on piles, the costs of which do
The tendered rates shall include full compensation for not vary with the actual number of load tests to be done.
the supply, delivery, cutting, bending, welding and fixing
Item Unit
of steel, including all tying wire, spacers, supports and
waste. 807.24 Load tests on piles
(compression/tension,
Item Unit
diameter/size and test
807.19 Cast in situ concrete in load (kN) indicated) number (No)
piles, nder reams, bulbous
bases and sockets (class of The unit of measurement shall be the number of load
tests actually performed, on the written instructions of
concrete indicated) cubic metre (m3)
the Engineer, for each specified test load.
The unit of measurement shall be the cubic metre of
Test piles, but not anchor piles, shall be measured as
concrete placed in the cast in situ piles, underreams,
specified above for permanent piles. Anchor piles shall
bulbous bases and sockets. The quantity measured for
be deemed to form part of the testing equipment under
payment shall include the quantity calculated from the
this item.
nominal pile diameter and length of pile from the
founding level to 75 mm into the pile-capping slab, plus The tendered rate shall include full compensation for
the additional quantity of concrete in the underream, the installation of anchor piles and anchors where
bulbous base and socket, as may be relevant. necessary, the performing of the load tests and the
processing and submission of results.

807-9
Item Unit Should the Engineer instruct the Contractor to move to
another pile position instead of waiting for the
807.25 Establishment on Site of the investigations to be completed, payment will not be
following equipment for the made under this item but under item 807.04 when the
investigation of obstructions: equipment is moved to another pile position and again
when the equipment is returned on the instructions of
807.25.01 Core-drilling rig lump sum
the Engineer.
807.25.02 Percussion rig lump sum
807.25.03 Jack hammer lump sum
The tendered lump sums shall include full
compensation for establishment on Site within 24 hours
of receiving the Engineer's instructions, and the
subsequent removal of the different types of plant and
equipment required for carrying out the investigation of
obstructions in augered or bored pile holes, the costs of
which do not vary with the actual number of
investigations done.
Item Unit
807.26 Moving to and setting up
the drilling equipment
for each investigation
807.26.01 Core-drilling rig number (No)
807.26.02 Percussion rig number (No)
807.26.03 Jack hammer number (No)
The unit of measurement shall be the number of
positions to which each type of equipment has to be
moved and set up in position.
The tendered rates shall include full compensation for
providing access and working platforms, for all costs of
moving and setting up the equipment and, where
necessary, for the removal of accesses and working
platforms on completion of the investigation.
Item Unit
807.27 Investigations of obstructions
with the use of :
807.27.01 Core-drilling rig metre (m)
807.27.02 Percussion rig metre (m)
807.27.03 Jack hammer metre (m)
The unit of measurement shall be the metre depth of
hole drilled by each type of equipment through the
obstruction, irrespective of the type of material drilled or
the depth of the obstruction below the surface.
The tendered rates shall include full compensation for
all labour and material costs in respect of performing
the drilling operation as instructed. The rate tendered
for subitem 807.27.01 shall also include the cost of
extracting the cores.
Item Unit
807.28 Standing time for piling
equipment during
investigations hour (h)
The unit of measurement shall be the number of hours
that piling equipment must stand idle waiting for the
completion of the investigations on the instructions of
the Engineer.
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for
the equipment being removed temporarily from the pile
position, holding it available in a good working
condition, and for returning it on completion of the
investigation.

807-10
SERIES 8 : SPECIFIC WORKS (e) Stainless-steel plate
Stainless-steel plate used in conjunction with PTFE
SECTION 808 : BRIDGES
to form low-friction sliding surfaces shall comply with
the requirements of BS 1449: Part 2 for Steel
CONTENTS 316S16. The texture of the sliding surface shall be
equal to or better than 0,20 micron Ra, in
01 SCOPE accordance with the requirements of BS 1134-1,
02 MATERIALS parts 1 and 2.
03 BEARINGS
04 CONCRETE PARAPETS (f) Stainless-steel dowels and bolts
05 METAL RAILINGS Stainless steel used for the manufacture of dowels
06 BRIDGE NUMBER PLATES and holding-down and anchor bolts shall comply
07 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS with the requirements of BS EN 10088-1 and
08 CONCRETE-SURFACE-FINISH BS EN 10250-4 for Steel X5 CrNiMo17/12/2,
REQUIREMENTS C 0,07.
09 WEEP HOLES, DRAINAGE PIPES AND
CHANNELLING (g) Steel plate
10 DRAINAGE TO RETAINING WALLS AND
ABUTMENTS Steel used for plate reinforcement in laminated
11 PROVISION FOR SERVICES elastomeric bearings shall comply with the
12 TOLERANCES requirements of BS EN 10025 for Grade 5275 steel.
13 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT (h) Mortar
01 SCOPE Mortar beddings for the seating of bearings shall be
composed of an approved sand:cement or
This section covers various items of work associated sand:epoxy resin mortar, or may consist of an
with the construction of bridges which are not covered approved proprietary mortar. The mortar shall
by other sections of these Specifications. Some items of comply with the following strength requirements:
this section, however apply to structures other than
bridges. (i) Sand:cement mortar
The 7-day compressive strength of 150 mm
02 MATERIALS cubes made from the mortar and cured in a
02.01 Materials for bearings moist atmosphere for the first 24 hours and
thereafter in water of 20°C shall not be less
(a) General than 1,5 times the average contact stress
under the bearing, or 15 MPa, whichever is
When requested by the Engineer, the Contractor
the greater.
shall submit test certificates from an approved
independent testing authority to show that the (ii) Sand:epoxy-resin mortar
respective materials conform to the specified
requirements, or a certificate from the patent The cured compressive cube strength of the
holder or designer certifying that the mortar shall not be less than twice the
manufactured item complies in all respects with average contact stress under the bearing or
the relevant product specifications. 20 MPa, whichever is the greater.

(b) Roofing felt (iii) Proprietary mortar

Roofing felt shall be 3-ply and shall comply with The strength requirements for proprietary
the requirements of SANS 92 for Type 60 roofing mortars shall be in accordance with either (i)
felt. or (ii) above, as may be relevant.

(c) Elastomer 02.02 Materials for parapets, railings and sidewalks

The elastomer used in the manufacture of (a) Concrete

bearings shall be natural rubber or synthetic All concrete work shall be carried out in accordance
rubber. with the requirements of series 7.
(i) Natural rubber shall comply with the
(b) Structural steel
requirements of BS 1154 for natural rubber
Groups Z60 and Z70. Structural steelwork shall be carried out in
accordance with the provisions of section 809.
(ii) Synthetic rubber shall comply with the
requirements of BS 2752 for synthetic
03 BEARINGS
rubber Compounds with an IRHD hardness
as specified in the Project Specification. 03.01 Roofing felt
(d) Polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) sheet Roofing felt used as bearing strips shall consist of at
PTFE used in conjunction with stainless-steel least 3 layers laid on the bearing surface to the
plates to form low-friction sliding surfaces shall dimensions shown on the Drawings.
be unfilled (virgin) PTFE and shall comply with Where lubricated linings are specified, the roofing felt
the requirements of BS EN ISO 13000 part 1 and shall be saturated with used motor oil and thereafter
2 for Grade 1 Type 1 PTFE. liberally dusted with graphite powder before it is laid on
The sliding surface of the PTFE may be either the bearing surface.
smooth or dimpled.

808-1
03.02 Elastomeric bearings Copies of test results and certificates for the
above-mentioned testing shall be submitted by
(a) Technical data the Contractor to the Engineer in good time to
The following technical data for the elastomeric enable the Engineer to assess the information
bearings will be supplied on the Drawings, and before the bearings are installed.
shall also be supplied on drawings prepared and The dimensional tolerances on bearing pads
submitted by the Contractor: shall comply with the requirements of
(i) Design loads and deformations subclause 03.07 of section 707.
The critical design-load combinations and Before the bearings are dispatched to the Site of
coexisting rotations and horizontal the Works, each bearing, with the exception of
displacements for each bearing or group of large bearings as provided in the Project
identical bearings. Specifications, shall be subjected simultaneously
to a vertical load equal to 150% of the maximum
(ii) Size and construction of bearing design load and to a sheer distortion equal to
The size and construction of the bearing shall 150% of the maximum design value. The
be designated by : bearings shall be visually inspected for defects
by the Engineer and shall at no stage under this
L x B x n(t) test show any cracks visible to the naked eye, or
where other defects. The cost of this testing shall be
included in the rate tendered for the supply and
L = length of bearing in the transverse installation of the bearing pads.
direction, in mm
B = width of bearing in the span 03.03 Proprietary bearings
direction, in mm (a) General
t = thickness of individual elastomer This clause covers custom-built bearings and
layers, in mm bearings manufactured under licence, except
n = number of elastomer layers. elastomeric bearings. Combined bearings
consisting of an assembly of an elastomeric
The steel plates shall be encased in an bearing in conjunction with a low-friction sliding or
elastomer layer of at least 3 mm thick. mechanical component, shall fall under this clause.
(iii) Hardness and type of elastomer The Tenderer may base his tender on any
The IRHD and type of elastomer, viz. the bearing that complies with the specified
natural or synthetic rubber, from which the requirements, provided that the efficacy of the
specified bearings are to be manufactured. bearing has been verified by tests and successful
previous use, evidence of which, as well as
(iv) Identification information on the bearing's durability and
Each bearing shall be identified by a number. suitability for the specified use, shall be
submitted to the Engineer for consideration.
(b) Alternative bearings
Details of the product guarantee shall be
Where alternative bearings are offered by the submitted with the tender.
Contractor, they shall be designed in accordance
with the requirements of BS 5400 Section 9.1 for (b) Drawings and approval
the loadings and deformations shown on the Prior to manufacture, the Contractor shall submit
Drawings. the following information to the Engineer for
consideration:
Where a bearing is offered which consists of a
rubber which differs from that which is specified, (i) The manufacturer's specification containing
the bearing shall be redesigned to make detailed information on the design
allowance for the variation in hardness and/or standards, materials, manufacture and
type of rubber. technical data.
(c) Inspection and testing (ii) Drawings complying with the provisions of
subclause 05.03 of section 001 showing the
On completion of the manufacture of the
bearing construction and installation
bearings, the Contractor shall submit bearing
details.
pads selected by the Engineer, or specially
manufactured sample pads authorized by the All bearings used in the permanent Works shall
Engineer, to an independent testing authority for be subject to the approval of the Engineer.
testing. The tests to be undertaken shall be as
directed by the Engineer and shall comply with (c) Technical data
the relevant requirements of subclause 10.01 of The following technical data for the proprietary
section 903. Payment for this testing, for any bearings required for the Contract will be
damaged bearing pads, and for sample pads supplied on the Drawings, and shall also be
shall be made in accordance with the provisions supplied on the drawings prepared by the
of subclause 12.04 of section 903. Contractor for submission to the Engineer :
A variation of plus or minus 20% shall be (i) Design loads and movement
permitted between the actual and theoretical
stiffness for compression and shear of the The maximum and minimum vertical loads
elastomer. Where this variation is exceeded, and coexisting horizontal loads as well as
acceptance of the pads shall be at the sole the maximum horizontal load and
discretion of the Engineer. coexisting vertical load.

808-2
 The maximum values in each direction of (v) The thickness of the stainless-steel sliding
the reversible and irreversible movements plate shall be not less than 1,25 mm. The
and the rotation about each axis. plate shall be either recessed into or
bonded to the base and, in addition, riveted
(ii) Mechanical fit
or bolted to the base. The edges of the
Mechanical fit on unidirectional and fixed plate shall be sealed to prevent the ingress
bearings expressed as the maximum of moisture between the plate and the
permissible slack (play) between the shear base.
transfer members of the bearing which are
(vi) The slack (play) between the shear transfer
required to resist the applied horizontal
members of unidirectional and fixed
loads.
bearings shall not exceed 2 mm, unless
(iii) Identification otherwise specified.
Identification of each bearing by a number, (vii) Only silicone grease of an approved type
the degree of freedom of movement (fixed, shall be used as lubricant between the
multi- or unidirectional) and the type of sliding surfaces.
bearing (spherical, elastomer pot, etc).
(viii) The bearing shall be provided with tight-
(d) Design fitting seals to prevent the ingress of dust
or deleterious matter onto the moving parts.
The bearings shall be designed to accept the The seals shall be of an approved type and
specified load combinations in conjunction with shall be sufficiently durable to last for
the maximum eccentricity and rotation, without longer than 50 years.
overstressing any part in terms of working load
requirements or exceeding the requirements for (ix) The assembled bearing shall be supplied
the serviceability limit. with welded or bolted lugs or straps,
temporarily securing the moving parts firmly
Unless otherwise specified in the Project in position to ensure that no undesirable
Specifications or on the Drawings, the following relative movement occurs before or during
shall be complied with: construction.
(i) The maximum average pressure on the (x) The bearing shall be recessed into adaptor
projected area of the PTFE shall not plates, or shall be of such construction as
exceed 45 MPa and 30 MPa under will facilitate the removal of the bearing
maximum load and under dead load from the installed position without damage
respectively. The maximum peak pressure being done to any part of the bearing or the
on the PTFE shall not exceed 60 MPa. surrounding material after the relevant
structural member has been raised by
(ii) The maximum average contact stress and
15 mm or by the distance specified.
maximum edge stress on the concrete or
mortar bedding shall not exceed 20 MPa (xi) Anchor and holding-down bolts shall be of
and 25 MPa respectively. the material specified on the Drawings.
(iii) The initial peak static coefficient of friction (xii) Corrosion protection of the exposed steel
shall not exceed 0,06 and the final static surfaces, with the exception of the
coefficient of friction shall not exceed 0,04. stainless-steel sliding plate, shall be as
follows :
(iv) The bearing shall be of such overall
dimensions as to fit into the space allowed (1) Preparation of the surfaces by
for its installation. Major alterations to the abrasive blasting to a finish equal to
contiguous members will not be the Sa 3 finish of ISO 8501-01.
considered.
(2) Metal spraying of the surfaces with
(e) Construction zinc in accordance with the
requirements of BS EN 22063, Table 1
Unless otherwise specified in the Project ZN 200.
Specifications or on the Drawings, the following
requirements shall be complied with : (3) Coating of the zinc-sprayed surfaces
within 4 hours with a sealer
(i) The IRHD of the elastomer disc in the pot compatible with the zinc and the
type of bearing shall be 50 ± 5 or 55 ± 5. subsequent coat of paint.
The elastomer shall be protected along the
edge of the disc by either a metal sealing (4) Application of a coat of high-build
ring or a capping ring moulded integrally chlorinated rubber paint of a minimum
with the disc along the perimeter. dry-film thickness of 0,75 mm and of a
colour which differs from that of the
(ii) The thickness of the elastomer disc shall final coat of paint.
not be less than 0,066 times its diameter.
(5) Application of a final coat of high-build
(iii) The PTFE shall be not less than 3 mm thick chlorinated rubber paint of a minimum
and shall be recessed into the supporting dry-film thickness of 0,75 mm and of a
base to a depth of 0,5 times the thickness dark grey colour.
of the PTFE plus or minus ± 0,2 mm.
Surfaces in contact with concrete shall receive at
(iv) The minimum dimension of individual PTFE
least the treatment described in (1) and (2)
areas shall not be less than 50 mm and
above.
their spacing shall be such as to ensure the
equal distribution of stress throughout the
contiguous members.

808-3
(f) Inspection and testing Before the bearing is incorporated into the structure, it
shall be cleaned to remove all deleterious substances
The Engineer may require that tests be carried
and adhering matter, and shall be thereafter wrapped in
out to verify compliance of the bearing with the
polyethylene sheeting and adequately sealed to prevent
Specifications and/or its performance under the
mortar and slush from seeping through onto the bearing
design loads. Payment for this testing shall be
during the course of construction.
made in accordance with the provisions of
subclause 12.04 of section 903. After installation, the polyethylene wrapping shall be
Test certificates of all tests carried out shall be removed, the bearing and the space around the bearing
made available to the Engineer. thoroughly cleaned, and the lugs removed as directed
by the Engineer.
The Contractor shall give the Engineer at least
7 days notice prior to the final assembly of the On completion of the installation of proprietary
bearings to enable the Engineer to inspect the bearings, the Contractor shall furnish the Engineer with
bearings at the factory. a certificate from the manufacturer or supplier of the
bearings certifying acceptance of the installation.
Under no circumstances may bearings be taken Notwithstanding the issuing of such a certificate, the
apart and reassembled on the Site, except when manufacturer or supplier shall not accept any
it is an unavoidable feature of the installation responsibility for the installation of the bearings and
procedure, in which case the dismantling, shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibilities
installation and reassembly shall be under the under the Contract. Payment for the inspection of the
supervision of qualified personnel. bearings by the manufacturer or supplier and the
Rehabilitation, modification and repair work to issuing of the certificate will be made in accordance
bearings shall be carried out only in the factory or with the provisions of subclause 12.04 of section 903.
at an approved engineering works.
04 CONCRETE PARAPETS
03.04 Storage and handling
Concrete parapets shall be either solid concrete para-
The bearings shall at all times be stored under cover pets or open concrete parapets with concrete railings.
and clear of the ground, to protect them from sunlight,
oils and chemicals. The bearings shall not be stacked in Concrete railings shall be cast in situ or precast or a
a manner or on a surface that will cause distortion of combination of the two, as shown on the Drawings.
the bearings. Wherever possible, precast elements shall be placed
with the unformed surface downwards or outwards.
The bearings shall be handled with care to ensure that
they will not be subjected to impact loads or any other
05 METAL RAILINGS
condition that may be harmful.
Metal bridge railings shall be constructed to details as
03.05 Installation of bearings
shown on the Drawings and in accordance with the
The concrete surface on elements required to receive provisions of section 809.
bearings shall comply with the requirements of
All steelwork shall be painted in the shop and on the
subclause 09.03 of section 702. Plastering of the
Site in accordance with the provisions of section 806. If
surface will not be permitted under any circumstances.
called for on the Drawings or in the Schedule of
Before the mortar bedding is constructed, the concrete Quantities, steelwork shall be galvanized and painted;
surface shall be chipped back to expose the aggregate galvanizing shall be done after manufacture, in
and leave a sound irregular surface. Bonding of the accordance with SANS 32, quality B1 or SANS 121,
mortar bedding to the concrete surface shall be in Table 2 or 3, as applicable.
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations
and the Engineer's instructions. The dimensions of the 06 BRIDGE NUMBER PLATES
bedding shall be such that the load can be spread at an
angle of 45° throughout the bedding. However, the Bridge number plates shall be fixed in the position and
thickness of the bedding shall be not less than 15 mm according to the method of fixing shown on the
and 25 mm for proprietary and elastomeric bearings Drawings. The concrete surface on which the plate is to
respectively, neither shall the maximum thickness be fixed shall be suitably prepared before any adhesive
exceed 50 mm. is applied, by roughening and removing all surface
laitance.
Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, the bearings
shall be installed on a horizontal plane and shall be in
07 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS
full contact with the concrete and bedding surfaces.
Prior to construction of the sidewalks, including kerbs
To accommodate soffit irregularities and camber in the
and copings, the bridge deck shall be accurately
case of precast members, the member shall be lowered
surveyed to establish final lines and levels. The
onto a mortar skim on top of the bearing. The member
previously cast bridge-deck area shall be prepared as
shall thereafter be propped until the mortar skim has
specified in clause 08 of section 704 to receive sidewalk
hardened.
concrete.
The bearings shall be accurately installed to the
Forms shall be accurately set to final lines and levels
specified level, alignment and orientation, all within the
and shall be firmly held in position during the placing of
construction tolerances in accordance with
the concrete. Stops at the ends of sections shall be
subclause 03.07 of section 707 and the details shown
accurately placed to ensure that the joints between the
on the Drawings.
adjacent sections are truly perpendicular to the surface
Where the bearing has long sliding plates, they shall be of the concrete and at right angles to the edge of the
rigidly supported to prevent distortion under the weight road or to the skew angle of the deck at the expansion
of the wet concrete and the construction loads. joint.

808-4
After removal of the forms, the exposed surfaces of the Ducts shall be provided with stoppers and draw wires
kerbs and copings shall be rubbed in accordance with and shall be proved, all in accordance with the
the requirements of subclauses 08.01 and 08.03 of requirements of section 106.
section 702. All edges shall be rounded to a radius of
20 mm, unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. No separate payment shall be made where ducts are
installed in the bridge parapets and end blocks, and the
rates tendered for the parapets and end blocks shall
08 CONCRETE-SURFACE-FINISH include full compensation for the provision and
REQUIREMENTS installation of the ducts complete with stoppers, draw
All formed concrete surfaces of parapets and sidewalks wires and, where applicable, inspection eyes.
shall have a class F3 surface finish as specified in Where ducts are installed below the level of the bridge
subclause 07.04 of section 702, and all unformed sidewalk, payment shall be made in accordance with
concrete surfaces shall have a class U3 surface finish item 106.04 of section 106.
in accordance with clause 09.03 of section 702.
Where ducts are made of cast in situ concrete
09 WEEP HOLES, DRAINAGE PIPES AND channels, such channels shall be constructed,
CHANNELLING measured and paid for in accordance with the
provisions of section 704.
Weep holes, drainage gullies, pipes and channelling
shall be provided in accordance with the details shown 12 TOLERANCES
on the Drawings or as ordered by the Engineer.
12.01 Bearings
Weep holes shall not be placed within 40 mm of any
reinforcement and shall be cleaned to permit the free Bearings shall be installed within the construction
flow of water on completion of the work. tolerances in accordance with subclause 03.07 of
section 707.
Drainage pipes shall be non-metal pipes of the material
called for on the Drawings and shall, on completion, be 12.02 Parapets, concrete railings and sidewalks
cleared of all foreign matter and the interior surface left
Parapets, concrete railings and sidewalks shall be
smooth.
constructed within the tolerances specified in
Cast in situ concrete channelling shall be provided next subclause 03.08 of section 707.
to kerbing where shown on the Drawings and according
12.03 Metal railings
to the details provided. Concrete work shall be carried
out in accordance with the provisions of section 704 Metal railings shall be constructed within the tolerances
and channelling shall be given a class U2 surface finish specified for structural steel in section 809.
as specified in subclause 09.02 of section 702. The
channelling shall be bonded to the bridge-deck concrete
13 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
in accordance with the provisions of clause 08 of
section 704. Item Unit
808.01 Proprietary bearings
10 DRAINAGE TO RETAINING WALLS AND
ABUTMENTS 808.01.01 The prime cost sum allowed for
purchasing and taking delivery
10.01 General of bearings PC sum
Drainage shall be provided behind and through the 808.01.02 Percentage on prime cost
retaining walls and abutments as indicated on the for charges and profit per cent (%)
Drawings or ordered by the Engineer.
Payment for purchasing and taking delivery of
10.02 No-fines concrete blocks proprietary bearings complete with anchor bolts and/or
dowels will be in accordance with the provisions of the
Blocks shall be of the class of no-fines concrete and to General Conditions of Contract.
the dimensions specified and shall be placed before
backfilling is done. Item Unit

10.03 Synthetic-fibre filter fabric 808.02 Installation of proprietary

bearings (description of
Synthetic-fibre filter fabric used in conjunction with no- each type and class) number (No)
fines concrete blocks shall be of the type and grade
shown on the Drawings or specified in the Project The unit of measurement shall be the number of
Specifications. Filter fabric shall be placed as shown on complete bearings of each type and class installed.
the Drawings and shall be protected against sunlight
and mechanical damage during storage and installation. The tendered rate shall include full compensation for
the supply of all materials not covered under
item 808.01, the construction of the bedding, transport,
11 PROVISION FOR SERVICES handling and storage, and for all labour, equipment and
Service ducts shall be fixed and cast into position in incidentals required for the installation of the bearings
accordance with the requirements of clause 11 of complete as detailed.
section 704 and the details shown on the Drawings. The tendered rate shall be final and binding,
The pipes and fittings to be used for the construction of irrespective of the type or make of bearings finally
ducting shall be as shown on the Drawings and shall installed.
comply with the requirements of clause 02 of
section 106.

808-5
Item Unit Item Unit
808.03 Bearings (description of 808.08 Weep holes as shown on
each type and class) number (No) the Drawing (description
and size) metre (m)
The unit of measurement shall be the number of
complete bearings of each type and class installed. Item Unit
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for 808.09 Drainage gullies for bridge
the supply of all materials, including anchor bolts and/or decks as shown on the
dowels, for the construction of the bedding, the Drawing (description of
manufacture of the bearings, transport, handling and each type) number (No)
storage, and for all labour, equipment and incidentals
required for the installation of the bearings complete as Item Unit
detailed, as well as for the testing of bearings as may
be relevant. 808.10 Drainage pipes (types and
size indicated) metre (m)
Item Unit
The unit of measurement shall be the metre of weep
808.04 Bearing strips (description holes and drainage pipes and the number of deck
of the material and number drainage gullies of each type and size installed.
of layers) square metre (m2)
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for
The unit of measurement shall be the square metre of the supply of all materials, the manufacture and
bearing area lined with the specified material, installation of weep holes, drainage pipes and gullies.
irrespective of the number of layers placed.
Item Unit
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for
808.11 Precast no-fines concrete
the supply of all materials, for transport, handling and
storage, and for all labour and incidentals required for drainage blocks (class of
the installation of the bearing strips complete as concrete and size of blocks
detailed. indicated) number (No)

Item Unit The unit of measurement shall be the number of blocks

in position in the Works.
808.05 Bridge parapets/metal
railings (description of type) metre (m) The tendered rate for each block shall include full
compensation for providing all materials, labour, plant
The unit of measurement for bridge parapets/metal and formwork, for manufacturing the blocks complete as
railings and transitions shall be the metre of parapet shown on the Drawings and specified in clause 15 of
(including railing if any) or railing, complete as shown section 704.
on the Drawing, measured overall, excluding end blocks
(if any). Parapets and railings shall be considered to Item Unit
include all work above the level of the top of the 808.12 Synthetic-fibre filter fabric
sidewalk or, when not placed on a sidewalk, above the
(type and grade
top of the bridge-deck concrete, wing wall or retaining 2
wall and shall also include any kerbing and coping indicated) square metre (m )
forming an integral part of the parapet. The unit of measurement shall be the square metre of
The tendered rate for bridge parapets and railings shall filter fabric installed as specified, including the specified
include full compensation for all concrete, formwork, overlap.
railings and other materials, including fastenings, The tendered rate shall include full compensation for
anchor bolts, etc, required for attaching the railings to supplying, cutting and installing the filter fabric and for
the structures and for the manufacture, erection and wastage.
finishing of the railings. The rates shall exclude only the
cost of reinforcing steel, as this shall be measured and Note:
paid for under another pay item.
The following items of work, when specified, shall be
Item Unit carried out, measured and paid for in accordance with
the relevant sections of the Specifications, but will be
808.06 End blocks number (No) listed under this section of the Schedule of Quantities.
The unit of measurement for bridge end blocks shall be Item Applicable section
the number of end blocks constructed complete as
shown on the Drawing. (a) Service ducts (installed below sidewalk
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for all level) 106
materials, labour, plant and other incidentals required
for constructing the end blocks complete as specified, (b) Formwork and concrete finish for
excluding only reinforcing steel. sidewalks and services channels 702
Item Unit (c) Steel reinforcement for sidewalks,
808.07 Bridge number plates number (No) parapets, end blocks and services channels 703

The unit of measurement shall be the number of bridge (d) Concrete for sidewalks and services
number plates supplied and installed. The tendered channels 704
rates shall include full compensation for supplying and
installing the number plates as specified.

808-6
SERIES 8 : SPECIFIC WORKS and minimum tensile strengths of both being not less
than those of the parent metal.
SECTION 809 : STRUCTURAL STEELWORK
Welding consumables shall be compatible with the
CONTENTS material to be welded.
02.06 Paints
01 SCOPE
02 MATERIALS Paints shall comply with the requirements specified in
03 CODES OF PRACTICE clause 03 of section 806.
04 SHOP DETAILS
05 FABRICATION AND ASSEMBLY 03 CODES OF PRACTICE
06 ERECTION The design, where undertaken by the Contractor, shall
07 TESTING comply with the requirements of SANS 10162 parts 1, 2
08 TOLERANCES and 4.
09 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
Welding shall be in accordance with SANS 10044
01 SCOPE parts 1 to 5.
This section covers the manufacture, transportation and 04 SHOP DETAILS
erection of structural steelwork.
When specified in the Project Specifications, the
02 MATERIALS Contractor shall prepare shop details. Immediately on
receipt of design drawings and calculations, the
02.01 Structural steel
Contractor shall satisfy himself that the design drawings
Structural steel shall comply with the following contain all the information required for the preparation
requirements: Mild steel: BS 4360, grade 43A; or of the shop details, supporting calculations, and any
SANS 1431, grade 300W. other necessary drawings. The shop details and other
drawings shall be submitted in duplicate to the Engineer
High yield stress steel: BS 4360 grade SOB; or for approval at least one month (or such other period as
SANS 1431, grade 350W. may be stated in the Project Specifications) before the
The dimensions and properties of rolled-steel sections commencement of fabrication.
shall comply with the prescriptions given in the The Contractor's drawings shall be complete in every
structural-steel tables issued by the SA Institute of Steel respect (including welding details which shall be fully
Construction. described) and shall be checked by the Contractor prior
02.02 Steel tubes to submission. One copy of each drawing will be retained
by the Engineer and, within 2 weeks (or such other
Steel tubes shall comply with the requirements of period as may be stated in the Project Specifications) of
SANS 657-1. the date of receipt by the Engineer, the other copy will
02.03 Bolts, nuts and washers be returned to the Contractor with the Engineer's
comments or written approval as the case may be.
Ordinary bolts and nuts shall mean bolts acting in
bearing and shear rather than in the friction-grip mode Before the commencement of fabrication, the
and shall comply with the requirements of the Contractor shall obtain the Engineer's approval, in
appropriate parts of SANS 1700 or SANS 1143. writing, of the shop details. The approval given by the
Engineer relates to structural adequacy and does not
Washers for ordinary bolts and nuts shall comply with absolve the Contractor from the responsibility for
the requirements of SANS 1149. dimensional accuracy.
High-strength friction-grip bolts, nuts and washers shall 05 FABRICATION AND ASSEMBLY
comply with the requirements of SANS 1282 and shall
be capable of being reliably tensioned to the 05.01 General
appropriate load recommended in SANS 10094. Both before and after fabrication, all structural steel
Other friction-grip fasteners equal to the above may be shall be within the tolerances specified in clause 08 and
used subject to the Engineer's approval. shall be flat, straight (unless required to be formed to
another shape) and free from twists.
Bolts, nuts and washers shall be of the material shown on
the Drawings or specified in the Project Specifications. 05.02 Identification

02.04 Rivets At all stages of fabrication, structural steel other than

grade 300W and 43A shall be positively identified by
Mild-steel rivets shall comply with the requirements of grade by means of a suitable marking system.
SANS 435. High-tensile rivets shall be so manufactured
that they can be driven and their heads formed 05.03 Cutting
satisfactorily without the physical properties of the steel Cutting may be done by sawing, shearing, cropping or
being impaired. flame cutting provided that the method used will not
02.05 Welding consumables adversely affect the material properties.

Welding electrodes shall comply with the re Edges shall be free from any defects or distortions, and
all burrs, notches and similar defects shall be removed.
quirements of SANS 455. The handling and storage of
all consumables shall be in accordance with 05.04 Holes for fasteners
BS EN 1043-1 and BS EN 1043-2. Holes for fasteners shall not be formed by flame cutting.
Holes in light members not thicker than 12 mm or the
Welding consumables used shall be appropriate for
diameter of the hole, whichever is the smaller, may be
producing weld metal that will yield all-weld test
punched.
specimens as specified in BS 709, the minimum yield
809-1
Holes for fasteners up to 25 mm in diameter shall not All loose, eccentric-headed, badly formed, burnt or
be more than 2 mm bigger than the fastener diameter, otherwise defective rivets shall be cut out and replaced
and for larger fasteners not more than 3 mm bigger than at the Contractor's expense.
the fastener diameter.
05.12 Corrosion protection
Holes for friction-grip fasteners shall be in accordance
(a) Painting
with SANS 10094.
After fabrication and before removal from the place
All burrs shall be removed from holes before assembly.
of manufacture, steelwork shall be painted as
05.05 Joints in compression specified in section 806. Where the finishing coats
are to be applied on the Site, the shop painting
The abutting surfaces of joints which depend on contact shall include the application of an undercoat.
for the transmission of load shall be accurately
prepared so that the full area intended for bearing is in Galvanized steel shall not be painted unless painting
contact as specified in clause 08. is specifically called for in the Specifications.

05.06 Hollow sections (b) Sprayed metal coatings

Where steel surfaces are to be given a sprayed
Unless protection against corrosion is provided by other
metal coating, it shall be carried out in accordance
means approved by the Engineer, the interior of any
with the requirements of BS EN 22063. The type of
hollow section shall be sealed to prevent the ingress of
metal used shall be as specified in the Schedule of
water into the interior of the member. Vent holes for
Quantities or as shown on the Drawings and,
galvanizing shall be sealed after galvanizing has been
unless otherwise specified, the nominal thickness
completed.
of the metal coating shall be 0,15 mm.
05.07 Alignment of holes (c) Galvanizing
All matching holes for fasteners or pins shall be Where the galvanizing of structural steelwork is
accurately aligned so that the fasteners can be inserted called for, the members shall be hot-dip galvanized.
freely through the assembled members in a direction at Structural steel members shall be given a coating in
right angles to the faces in contact. Drifting to align the accordance with SANS 32, quality B1 or SANS 121,
holes shall not distort the metal or enlarge the holes. Table 2 or 3, as applicable. Sheet steel and strip
05.08 Welding shall be given a Class M coating in accordance with
SANS 3575 or SANS 4998 as applicable.
Welding shall be carried out in accordance with the
All nuts, bolts, screws and threaded articles shall
requirements of SANS 10044. Particular attention shall
be hot-dip galvanized in accordance with the
be given to the following points:
requirements of SANS 121, Table 2 or 3, as
• Welding techniques shall be such as to avoid undue applicable.
distortion and minimize shrinkage stresses.
Cut ends and small damaged areas shall be
• All slag shall be removed. repaired by the application of a zinc-rich paint or
• Where specified in the Project Specifications in zinc spraying.
respect of certain work, the welders for welding in the 06 ERECTION
workshop or on Site shall have passed the tests for a
Grade 1 welder as laid down in SANS 10044 part 4. 06.01 General

05.09 Bolting Apart from the requirements of the Constructions

Regulations 2003, where required in the Project
The parts to be joined shall be firmly drawn together. Specifications, details of the method of erection shall be
Where necessary, washers shall be tapered to give the submitted to the Engineer for approval. All structural
bolt heads and nuts a full bearing. Where bolt holes steel shall be so stored, transported, handled and
have clearances greater than those specified and are erected that it will not be subjected to undue stress and
acceptable to the Engineer, washers shall be used will not be damaged.
under the bolt heads and nuts.
06.02 Safety during erection
The length of each bolt shall be such that, after tightening,
at least one full thread will project through the nut and at During erection of a structure, the steelwork shall be
least one full thread (in addition to the thread run out) will bolted, braced or otherwise secured so as to make
remain clear between the nut and the unthreaded shank. adequate provision for all erection loads.

05.10 Friction-grip fastening 06.03 Alignment

The use of friction-grip bolts shall be in accordance with Each part of a structure shall be aligned as soon as
SANS 10094. Where use is made of other types of possible after erection. Members shall not be permanently
friction-grip fasteners, they shall comply with the connected until a sufficient part of the structure has been
requirements of SANS 10094 for equivalent fasteners, aligned, levelled, plumbed and temporarily connected to
and shall be assembled and tightened to not less than ensure that it will not be displaced during the erection or
the load at permanent set as specified in SANS 10094. alignment of the remainder of the structure.

05.11 Riveting 06.04 Corrections

Wherever possible, riveting shall be done with Drift pins, jacking equipment and the like shall not be
pneumatic equipment. used to bring improperly fabricated members into place.
A moderate degree of cutting and reaming may be
Riveted members shall have all parts firmly drawn employed for correcting minor misfits, but only if, in the
together and aligned before riveting is done. Every rivet opinion of the Engineer, it will not detract from the
shall, when driven, completely fill the hole and have a appearance or strength of the structure. The flame
well-formed head or, if countersunk, shall completely fill cutting of holes will not be permitted without the written
the countersink. approval of the Engineer.
809-2
06.05 Repairs to paintwork 08.05 Bearing surfaces
Repairs to paintwork shall be carried out in accordance Where two steel surfaces are required to be in contact
with the provisions of section 806. in bearing, the maximum clearance between the
bearing surfaces shall not exceed 1 mm when the
07 TESTING members in contact are aligned.
07.01 Testing by the Engineer 08.06 Accuracy of erection
The Engineer may nominate a testing authority to inspect Steelwork shall not be out of plumb over any vertical
the Works and to conduct such tests as he may consider distance by more than 5 mm or 1/1000 of the distance,
necessary to test compliance with the Specifications. whichever is the greater.
Where required, test samples of welds shall be prepared
by the Contractor, free of charge, for testing purposes. Handrails shall, in the opinion of the Engineer, be
visually straight and of the specified shape.
The Contractor shall, where required, pay for the cost of
testing as described above and shall be reimbursed in 09 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
accordance with clause 12.04 of section 903.
Item Unit
07.02 Process control 809.01 Structural steel items
Welds shall be regularly inspected and tested by the 809.01.01 Measured by mass
Contractor in terms of his obligations described in
section 901. This shall include the visual inspection of 809.01.01.01 (Description of item) ton (t)
welds to ensure that there is no undercutting, no uneven 809.01.02 Measured by linear metre
lengths, no porosity or no evidence of cracking, and that
809.01.02.01 (Description of item) linear metre (m)
full fusion has been achieved. If required by the
Engineer, cores containing weld and adjacent parent 809.01.03 Measured by area
material shall be cut out in doubtful areas. The cores 809.01.03.01 (Description of item) square metre (m2)
shall be polished and examined and the hole made good.
809.01.04 Measured by number
08 TOLERANCES
809.01.04.01 (Description of item) number (No)
Fabrication and assembly tolerances for structural steel
shall be as follows: The unit of measurement shall be the ton of structural
steel contained in the structural item as erected, the
08.01 General metre of completed item as installed, the square metre
of completed item as installed or the number of units of
Unless otherwise specified herein or in the Project each item complete as installed.
Specifications or on the Drawings, fabrication and
assembly tolerances on the dimensions for structural For items measured by mass, no deductions in mass
steel shall be plus or minus 2 mm. Holes for shall be made for punching, borings, sheared edges,
connections shall be drilled or punched and aligned as milling, planing and cut-outs and no additions in mass
specified in subclauses 05.04 and 05.07 respectively. shall be made for rivets, bolts, nuts, washers, welding
fillets or temporary bracing. Tolerances and other
08.02 Cross-section permissible deviations shall be ignored.
The tolerances on cross-sectional dimensions of rolled The tendered rates shall include full compensation for
sections shall be as specified in the Structural Steel preparing shop details where required in terms of the
Tables published by the SA Institute of Steel Construction. Project Specifications, the supply of all the required
08.03 Straightness materials, fabrication, process control, loading,
transporting to the Site, off-loading and erection. They
A structural member, before erection, shall not deviate shall also include full compensation for all nuts, bolts,
from straightness (or the specified shape) by more than rivets, washers, holding-down bolts where specified, for
the following: cutting, waste and temporary bracing, and for
• For compression members and beams (other than transportation.
purlins and sheeting rails) : 1/1 000 of the length Item Unit
between points which are laterally restrained.
809.02 Corrosion protection by
• For other members : 1/500 of the overall length, but
not more than 25 mm. 809.02.01 Painting

08.04 Length 809.02.01.01 (Description of item) lump sum

809.02.02 Sprayed metal coating (type
The length of a member shall not deviate from its
intended length by more than the following: of metal and the thickness
of coating indicated)
• For compression members faced at both ends for
bearing purposes : ± 1 mm. 809.02.02.01 (Description of item) lump sum
809.02.03 Hot-dip galvanizing
• For other members : + 0 - 4 mm.
809.02.03.01 (Description of item) lump sum
• For members such as trusses and lattice girders the
above tolerances apply to the members as a whole. The unit of measurement shall be the lump sum.
• The length of component parts shall be such that the The tendered rates shall include full compensation for
member can be properly assembled with the applying the specified corrosion protection, including
required accuracy. surface preparation, materials, labour, tools, equipment
and all the necessary incidentals.

809-3
SERIES 9 : QUALITY CONTROL 04 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES
The responsibility for producing work and workmanship
SECTION 901 : GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
and for supplying materials conforming in all respects to
the specified requirements shall be that of the Contractor.
CONTENTS
For this purpose he shall employ the necessary
supervision, inspection, testing and other facilities as may
01 SCOPE be necessary to ensure compliance with the requirements
02 DEFINITIONS of the Specification. Where necessary, any process of the
03 ENGINEER'S RESPONSIBILITIES manufacture of materials such as concrete or asphalt
04 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES used in the Works shall be controlled by a method of
05 PROCESS CONTROL process control as described in clause 05 hereinafter.
06 ACCEPTANCE CONTROL
07 CONDITIONAL ACCEPTANCE OF Any work or materials not conforming to the
SUBSTANDARD WORK Specifications shall be removed and replaced with work
08 REMEDIAL WORK or materials conforming to the Specifications or, subject
09 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT to the Engineer's approval, be improved by such
remedial measures as the Engineer may approve so
01 SCOPE that they will conform to the Specifications.
This section covers the general responsibilities of the The Contractor shall from time to time submit items of
Contractor for ensuring that the quality of workmanship work which have been completed to the Engineer for
and materials provided under the Contract comply with approval. Before submitting such work, he shall conduct
the requirements of the Contract. It also describes the such tests and inspections as may be necessary to
Engineer's responsibilities and authority regarding establish conformance with the requirements specified
acceptance control and lays down general principles in and shall submit the results of such tests and inspections
dealing with substandard work and remedial measures. together with his application for approval. The Contractor
shall be responsible for ensuring that all work is
02 DEFINITIONS eventually submitted to and approved by the Engineer.

For the purpose of this section in particular and these Materials used in the construction of the Works shall be
Specifications in general, the following words and systematically inspected and, where applicable, tested
expressions shall, unless inconsistent with the context, by the Contractor to ensure compliance with the
have the meanings hereby assigned to them. specified requirements. Copies of the results of such
tests or inspections shall be furnished to the Engineer
(a) Acceptance control as soon as they become available.

The systematic inspection and testing by the 05 PROCESS CONTROL

Engineer, for the purpose of establishing
compliance with the requirements specified, of the Where specified in the case of work such as layerwork
materials and workmanship produced under this for roads, and in the case of materials produced on the
Contract by the Contractor. Site such as concrete, the Contractor shall institute a
system of process control to ensure that only work and
(b) Process control materials conforming to the Specifications are produced.
The systematic control by the Contractor of the The Contractor shall use such recognised methods of
properties and quality of materials and workmanship process control as are described in the draft publication
produced under this Contract, in order to ensure TRH5 Statistical concepts of quality assurance and their
that they will comply with the requirements application in road construction. The actual methods
specified. It includes the testing by the Contractor of and the frequency of testing shall be subject to the
materials and workmanship where necessary. Engineer's approval, but in the case of limited
production the Engineer may relax these requirements.
03 ENGINEER'S RESPONSIBILITIES
The Contractor's attention is drawn to the various
In respect of quality control the Engineer's sections of the Specifications where the minimum
responsibilities are to observe and inspect the quality of requirements regarding the required frequency of
work and workmanship produced under this Contract. testing are set out in the relevant clauses. These are
This shall not be deemed to imply that the Engineer will the minimum requirements, and the Contractor shall,
necessarily be able to inspect each and every aspect of where necessary to ensure compliance with adequate
each item of work produced or to observe every action confidence, increase the frequency of testing.
or method of operation employed in constructing the
The Contractor shall take immediate steps to rectify any
Works. Acceptance of any item of work will therefore
not necessarily mean that the Engineer has inspected deviation or danger of deviation from the specified
requirements indicated by his process-control system,
and approved all aspects of work accepted, and any
and the Engineer will have the authority to inspect and
faults or defects discovered after acceptance shall be
rectified by the Contractor if the Engineer so requires be given details of tests and testing procedures to
satisfy himself that the Contractor is carrying out an
and at the Contractor's own cost. Any reliance therefore
placed by the Contractor on the acceptance given by adequate process-control system.
the Engineer shall be at his own risk.
06 ACCEPTANCE CONTROL
The Engineer will be responsible for the acceptance or
rejection of all the work and materials supplied under All work produced under this Contract shall be subject
this Contract as and when such work or materials are to acceptance control in the sense that it shall be
submitted for approval by the Contractor. submitted to the Engineer for final acceptance.

901-1
The Contractor shall institute a systematic procedure of In particular, remedial measures shall ensure full
submission that will ensure that all elements of the work compliance with the Specifications of the final product,
are submitted for acceptance. shall neither endanger nor damage any other part of the
Works, and shall be carefully controlled and submitted
The Engineer will inspect and test such work for to the Engineer for examination when completed or at
conformance with the specified requirements and on the any intermediate stage as may be required.
basis of such tests and inspections either accept or
reject such work. 09 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
In recognition of the fact that the properties of work and
Full compensation for the Contractor's obligations
materials produced are subject to inherent variation regarding quality control as described in this section,
which would inevitably result in a small percentage of including the costs of supervision, tests and the
tests on each property falling outside the specified
establishment of testing facilities on the Site, if
limits, a system of judgment for compliance based on necessary, shall be included in payment, at the
statistical concepts has, wherever possible, been
tendered rates, for the construction of the relevant
introduced to ensure with a predetermined measure of
items of work or materials and payment at the tendered
confidence that no work containing more than an
rates for his preliminary and general items.
acceptable percentage of defects is accepted.
Where such statistical methods of judgement cannot be
used on account of practical difficulties, full compliance
with the specified properties is required.

07 CONDITIONAL ACCEPTANCE OF SUB-

STANDARD WORK

Where work is submitted for approval and found not to

comply with the Specifications, the Contractor shall be
responsible for breaking down and removing such work
and replacing it with work that conforms to the specified
requirements.
In certain instances it is recognised that the financial
consequences to the Contractor by having to remove
and replace substandard work may be very serious,
whereas the reduced performance of such work, if
accepted, may have less serious implications for the
Employer. In view of the overall benefits of accepting
such work at reduced payment, the Engineer will be
entitled, but not obliged, to accept such work
conditionally at reduced payment if, in his absolute
discretion, this procedure may be desirable in the
circumstances.
Conditional acceptance of substandard work shall be
subject to the conditions specified in clause 09 of
section 902 and to the following:

(a) Each offer of conditional acceptance and the

corresponding reduced payment shall be subject
to confirmation by the Engineer.

(b) Conditional acceptance or an offer of conditional

acceptance shall not constitute a waiver of the
requirements of the Contract but shall be regarded
as a supplementary agreement in terms thereof.

08 REMEDIAL WORK
When any part of the work or any equipment or any
material is found upon examination by the Engineer not
to conform to the requirements or is at any stage after
final acceptance damaged so that it no longer conforms
to the requirements of the Specifications, the Engineer
may order its complete removal and replacement, at the
Contractor's expense, with satisfactory work, equipment
or material, or he may permit the Contractor to apply
remedial measures in order to make good any such
defects or damage.
The actual remedial measures taken shall at all times
be entirely at the Contractor's own initiative, risk and
cost, but subject to the Engineer's approval.

901-2
SERIES 9 : QUALITY CONTROL 03 DEFINITIONS

SECTION 902 : STATISTICAL JUDGEMENT SCHEME FOR For the purposes of this section the following words and
ACCEPTANCE CONTROL symbols shall have the following meanings:

CONTENTS 03.01 Lot

A lot is a sizeable portion of work or quantity of material
01 SCOPE
which is assessed as a unit for the purposes of quality
02 GENERAL
control, and selected to represent material or work
03 DEFINITIONS
produced by essentially the same process and from
04 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
essentially the same materials.
05 PROCEDURES
06 CONTROLLING MORE THAN ONE PROPERTY
03.02 Random sample
07 CONDITIONAL ACCEPTANCE
08 PROCESS CONTROL BY THE CONTRACTOR A random sample is a group of "n" test measurements
09 ROUTINE TESTS AND INSPECTION BY THE at "n" separate test positions or on "n" sample portions
ENGINEER obtained from the lot in an unbiased manner.
01 SCOPE Random sampling shall mean stratified random
sampling, unless inconsistent with the context.
This section describes the scheme used for
determining, by means of tests and measurements and
by applying statistical judgement procedures, whether 03.03 Sample mean ( x n )
certain requirements specified in the Specifications in
regard to the properties of materials and workmanship x n is the arithmetic mean of a set of "n" test results
constituting the sample.
are being complied with.
It also covers the requirements in regard to the control 03.04 Specification limit (Ls )
to be exercised by the Contractor for monitoring the
quality of his work and materials and the routine tests This is the limit value of the property of any product
and inspections to be carried out by the Engineer. outside which not more than a specified percentage of
the population of values representing an acceptable
02 GENERAL product property is allowed to lie. The specification limit
may be a single lower limit Ls or a single upper limit s,
Certain requirements and limit values are laid down in
the Specifications in regard to the properties of or a double limit L s , consisting of a lower limit s and
materials and workmanship to be supplied. Tests shall an upper limit s.
be conducted and measurements taken for controlling
the relevant properties of the workmanship and 03.05 Acceptance limit for sample mean (La)
materials supplied, and the results of such tests and
measurements shall be assessed on the basis of the This is the limit value of a product property within which
prescribed criteria for compliance with the specified the sample mean shall lie for a product to be
requirements. acceptable.
Wherever possible, acceptance criteria shall be For a lower-limit specification, this acceptance limit is
determined by way of statistical principles described in denoted by La For an upper-limit specification, this
this section. Wherever impracticable and where no
acceptance limit is denoted by a. For a double-limit
statistical judgement criteria have been prescribed, the
specification, the lower and upper limits are denoted by
specified requirements and limit values shall be fully
complied with. La and. a.

Despite acceptance of those properties judged by these 03.06 Acceptance limits for individual test values ( e)
statistical methods, the materials or work submitted will
be rejected when other properties (which are not This is the limit values of a product property within
controlled by statistical methods) fail to comply with the which the sample values representing a product shall lie
requirements of the Specifications, or where there are for the product to be acceptable.
other causes for rejection such as obviously defective
workmanship or excessively variable properties, visible The limit values will depend on the sample sizes "n" and
signs of poor workmanship, and similar considerations may be a lower limit Le, an upper limit e, or double limits
which constitute sufficient grounds for rejecting the Le and e.
work without any further testing.
The Engineer shall be entitled to assess separately any 03.07 Conditional acceptance
specified portion of a lot if, in his opinion, it exhibits
significant deviations as compared with the remainder This is the acceptance of a lot at reduced payment in
of the lot. lieu of rejection. Conditional acceptance shall be
subject to the provisions of clause 07.
In order not to change the Contractor's or the
Employer's risks, the statistical judgement scheme shall 03.08 Outliers
be strictly adhered to in all cases where it is used, and
decisions based on this scheme shall not be altered. It Where, in a sample, one or more test results differ
shall be a condition of this Contract that the theoretical significantly from the other values obtained, this
validity of the statistical judgement scheme be accepted difference could be ascribed to an assignable cause, in
and that the validity of the decisions made on the basis which case such test result shall be regarded as an
of this judgement scheme cannot be disputed on the outlier and disregarded when assessing the lot. To
grounds of statistical theory or a specified or implied determine whether or not a test result is an outlier, the
producer’s risk, or unjust on the grounds of enrichment. method given in subclause 04.04 shall be adopted.

902-1
03.09 First submission 04.02 Random sampling
The submission of a lot for approval will be classified as When any lot is tested, whether a normally sized lot or
a first submission when actually submitted for the first an isolated section which clearly exhibits an abnormal
time or when submitted for a second time on the basis variation of the properties under consideration, all
of a second set of test values which shall be regarded samples shall be taken in a stratified random pattern.
as a first submission in terms of sub clause 04.05, For this purpose use shall be made of tables of random
because the properties of the first and the second sets numbers, and the instructions in publication TMH5,
of test values differ significantly. Sampling for Road Construction Materials, shall be
followed.
03.10 Re-submission
04.03 Sample sizes
The submission of a lot for approval for a second time
shall be classified as a resubmission should it be For purposes of acceptance control, the Engineer will,
regarded as a resubmission in terms of subclause 04.05, in advance, determine sample size "n". The larger the
as the properties of the first and second sets of test sample, the more reliable the result will be, and no
values do not differ significantly. sample sizes may be smaller than those given in
subclause 05.01.
03.11 Payment-reduction factor (f r )
04.04 Outliers
This is the factor by which payment at contract rates
shall be multiplied for calculating payment for Test results shall be scanned for possible outliers.
conditionally accepted work. Where there is reason to believe that a test result may
be erroneous, it shall, if possible, be re-examined by
04 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS further testing, and, if there is reasonable evidence to
suggest that the test result is erroneous, it shall be
04.01 Determining the lot size regarded as an outlier, rejected, and replaced with a
fresh test result. Where repeating a test or re-examining
(a) Road-construction layers a test result is impossible, the method described below
shall be used for identifying outliers:
The lot size shall normally be a section
compacted in one process where essentially the Calculate the value of To from
same materials and construction equipment have
been used. Where production is on a continuous xo x n
To
basis, a lot shall normally mean the product of Sn
one day's work and shall not exceed the product
of two full days' work. However, a lot of any where xn and Sn are the arithmetic mean and the
smaller size may be ordered by the Engineer sample standard deviations respectively, and xo is the
where -
value of the test result differing most from the mean.
the properties under investigation exhibit
abnormal local variation within the normal lot Compare the value of To with the value of T for the
size; applicable value of "n", from the following table:
an area is obviously of a different quality than
the rest; No of observations (n) Critical values (T)
the rate of production is very high.
4 1,46
(b) Concrete 5 1,67
6 1,82
The lot size shall be determined by the Engineer, 7 1,94
with due regard to the size and the type of 8 2,03
structure in which the concrete is placed, the
9 2,11
specific portion of the structure, and the total
quantity of concrete placed in a day. The lot sizes 10 2,18
in concrete structures could therefore vary 11 2,23
considerably, and, particularly in the case of 12 2,29
small structures, it could be necessary to 13 2,33
combine samples of the same grade of concrete 14 2,37
from different structures, provided the concrete 15 2,41
has been obtained from the same concrete plant 16 2,44
and has been cast in the same period. 17 2,47
18 2,50
(c) Other
19 2,53
In other cases, as for example in material 20 2,56
stockpiles where the definition of a lot in
accordance with subclause 03.01 does not apply
directly, the Engineer will determine lot sizes in If the absolute value of To is greater than T, then xo is
accordance with circumstances pertaining to an outlier.
each case.

902-2
04.05 Re-submission Outliers shall be identified, disregarded, and, if
possible, replaced.
Where a lot has been accepted conditionally or has
been rejected, the Engineer may agree to its The lot will be considered to comply with the
resubmission for approval if - requirements for layer thickness if -
it has been reworked and the Engineer is satisfied at least 90% of all the thickness measurements
that a proper attempt was made to improve the taken before any thickness repairs are made is
properties which were unacceptable; equal to or greater than the specified thickness,
or minus the D90 tolerance specified in the appropriate
section; and
where, in his opinion there are valid technical
the mean layer thickness of the lot is not less than
reasons therefore.
the specified thickness, minus the D mean tolerance.
In both cases a fresh sample shall be taken, and a fresh
(second) set of test values determined. Isolated spots where the actual thickness is less than
The first and second sets of test values shall then be the specified thickness less the Dmax tolerance shall be
compared with each other to determine whether their repaired so as to fall within the D 90 tolerance.
properties differ significantly.
05.03 Relative compaction of pavement layers
Where in the opinion of the Engineer a significant
difference does occur, the submission of the lot shall be At least 4 relative density determinations shall be taken
regarded as a first submission and assessed as such, in the case of selected layers and at least 6 in the case
and only the second set of test values shall then be of all other pavement layers in accordance with a
used for this purpose. random pattern. After outliers have been examined and
replaced, compliance with the specified density
Where in the opinion of the Engineer no significant requirements shall be determined as follows:
difference occurs, the submission of the lot shall be
regarded and assessed as a resubmission. Where a lot The sample mean xn shall be at least equal to or
is resubmitted, it shall be assessed on the same basis
higher than the acceptance limit (La) for the sample
as a first submission, except that the original and the
second set of sample results shall be combined for mean as given in table 902/1, and no single test value
purposes of assessment. shall be lower than the acceptance limit (Le) for single
values.
05 PROCEDURES
05.04 Cementitious-binder content of stabilized
The statistical judgement procedures described below layers and uniformity of mix
will apply to the corresponding product properties for
Take 10 samples according to a random pattern and
purposes of acceptance control.
determine their cementitious-binder content. Examine
05.01 Surface levels of fills and pavement layers the results for outliers and replace them if any.

At least 50, but preferably more, level measurements As described in subclause 08.04(a) of section 903, the
shall be taken according to a stratified random pattern test results shall be adapted to make provision for the
of each lot of completed layer work, and the specified presence of minerals, which may affect the test results
levels shall then be determined. Outliers shall be in the material to be stabilized.
identified and examined. The quantity of cementitious binder in the mixed
The lot will be considered to comply with the material determined by taking 10 samples per lot and
requirements in respect of surface levels if, before any testing them as specified, shall fall within the following
repair work is undertaken, at least 90% of the level limits:
measurements show a deviation from the specified
The mean cementitious-binder content shall be not
levels which is smaller than the H90 tolerance specified
less than 91% of the specified binder content.
in the relative sections in regard to each layer.
The cementitious binder content in not more than
Isolated spots, where the surface levels deviate by
2 of the 10 samples may be lower than 70% of the
more than the appropriate Hmax tolerance of the specified binder content.
specified levels shall be repaired to bring the deviation
to within the H90 tolerance. The requirements for uniformity of the mix shall apply
only on condition that the variation of these adjustments
05.02 Layer thicknesses of pavement layers fall within the limits specified in subclause 08.04(a) of
At least 30, but preferably more, layer thicknesses shall section 903.
be determined in accordance with a stratified random
05.05 05.05 Binder content of asphalt
pattern for each lot of completed layer work. Layer
thicknesses may be determined by means of level Take at least 4 specimens of asphalt in a random
measurements taken before and after construction of pattern and determine the binder content. Examine the
the layer in exactly the same position, but may be results and replace any outliers as specified.
augmented by thickness measurements taken by means
of holes made in the layer. In the case of asphalt layers,
the Engineer may require thickness determinations to be
made only by means of measurements on drilled cores,
in which case the minimum number of cores per lot shall
be 20 instead of 30.

902-3
902-4
Determine the sample mean and assess the lot by 06 CONTROLLING MORE THAN ONE PROPERTY
using the following criteria: The binder content of
asphalt mixes shall not deviate from the specified Where more than one property of a lot is being
binder content by more than the values given in controlled, the lot shall be accepted if all the properties
table 902/2. comply with the specified requirements, but if one or
more of the properties do not comply with the
Table 902/2 requirements, the lot shall be rejected, or it may be
conditionally accepted subject to the provisions of
ACCEPTANCE LIMITS FOR BITUMINOUS- clause 07.
BINDER CONTENT
07 CONDITIONAL ACCEPTANCE
Maximum deviation of the
sample mean from the specified 07.01 General
Sample size binder content (% of binder)
(number) Where a lot is rejected under the statistical judgement
Gap-graded Continuous and scheme described in this section but the test results are
and semi-gap- open-graded such that the lot complies with the requirements for
graded mixes mixes conditional acceptance specified hereafter, the
Engineer may accept the lot conditionally, that is, the lot
2 0,51 0,37
may be accepted at reduced payment in lieu of
3 0,44 0,33 complete rejection, provided that -
4 0,41 0,30
• conditional acceptance shall be in the sole
5 0,38 0,28
discretion of the Engineer and is not an option which
6 0,36 0,27 may be exercised by the Contractor or a right he
7 0,35 0,26 may claim;
8 0,33 0,25 • the lot is approved in respect of all other
requirements not judged by the statistical judgement
scheme;
• the Contractor shall have the option to remove and
Maximum deviation of any single
reinstate at his own cost conditionally accepted work
test value from the specified
Sample size with work which complies with the requirements for
binder content (% of binder)
(number) acceptance at full payment;
Gap-graded and Continuous and
semi-gap- open-graded • conditional acceptance and the corresponding
graded mixes mixes reduced payment shall apply only in respect of the
work and properties listed in subclause 07.02 below.
2 0,76 0,54
3 0,81 0,58 Table 902/3
4 0,84 0,60 ACCEPTANCE FACTORS FOR STRENGTH
5 0,87 0,62 CONCRETE
6 0,89 0,64
7 0,91 0,65 Sample size (n) A (MPa) B (MPa)
8 0,92 0,66 3 0,5 3,9
4 1,1 4,2
05.06 Concrete : 28 day cube compressive strength 5 1,4 4,5
Take at least the minimum number of samples as given 6 1,7 4,7
in table 902/4 according to a random pattern and make 7 1,9 4,9
test cubes. Test them for cube compressive strength 8 2,1 5,0
after 28 days. Examine the results for outliers and
9 2,2 5,2
disregard if any. The results are then assessed
according to the criteria set out below. 10 2,3 5,3
11 2,4 5,4
A lot will comply with the requirements for the 12 2,5 5,5
characteristic strength if it meets the following 13 2,6 5,6
requirements: 14 2,7 5,7
15 2,7 5,8
(1) x Ls A where
x = a mean value of the 28-day cube
Table 902/4
compressive strength tests
MINIMUM SAMPLE SIZES FOR STRENGTH
Ls = characteristic strength specified in CONCRETE (STRUCTURAL)
subclause 04.02 of section 704, e.g.
for class 20/38 concrete Ls = 20 MPa Volume of lot (m )
3
Minimum sample size

A = the applicable value given in Table 902/3 0 - 20 4

21 - 40 6
(2) No single test value is lower than the value 41 - 70 9
LS B where 71 - 100 12
B = the applicable value given in Table 902/3.
101 - 150 14
>150 16

902-5
07.02 Properties to which conditional acceptance Case 2
applies
The lot complies with the requirements for individual test
Conditional acceptance may be applied in respect of the values but not with the requirements for sample mean.
properties of structures listed below in table 902/5.
The lot may be accepted conditionally on condition that
Table 902/5 the sample mean xn lies within the rejection limit L1
given in table 902/6.
PROPERTIES TO WHICH CONDITIONAL
ACCEPTANCE MAY APPLY Table 902/6

Property Structure
REJECTION LIMITS ( Lr and L' r ) FOR THE
SAMPLE MEAN ( xn )
Relative compaction (i) Asphalt base or surfacing
(ii) Chemically stabilized layers Rejection limits
Property Structure
Bituminous-binder Asphalt base or surfacing ( Lr and L r )
content Relative (a) Chemically Lr = (La - 2,0)%
Cementitous-binder Chemically stabilized layers compaction stabilized relative
layers. compaction
content
28-day cube All structural concrete (b) Asphalt base Lr = (La - 1,0)%
compressive (excepting concrete pavements) or surfacing relative
compaction
Notes: Cube All strength-concrete
compressive (excluding pavement Lr = 0,85La
1. See sub clause 12.02 of section 610 for details
strength concrete)
regarding reduced payments in the case of defective
concrete strength or layer thickness in concrete Bituminous- Asphalt Lr = (La - 0,2)%
pavements. binder content binder
% Lr (L a 0,2)%
2. Conditional acceptance shall not apply to crushed-
stone layers, but where compaction to 88% of Cementitious- Chemically stabilized
apparent density has been specified but cannot be Lr = 0,80 La
binder content layers
attained, the Engineer may accept the layer at
payment at the rate for compaction to 86% of
apparent density on condition that the layer 07.04 Determining the payment reduction factor (fr )
complies with the requirements for this compaction
standard. Where a lot is conditionally accepted, compensation will
be reduced by multiplying the tender rates for the items
concerned, as set out below, with the payment
07.03 Criteria for conditional acceptance
reduction factor fr .
In terms of the judgment scheme two requirements shall
The factor fr is determined as follows in regard to the
always apply to the properties to which conditional
two cases set out in subclause 07.03 above.
acceptance applies, viz one in relation to the sample
mean ( xn ) , and one in relation to individual test values x n. Case l
A lot may be conditionally accepted when it complies
with one of the two requirements for acceptance, but The lot complies with the requirements for sample mean,
not with the second requirement provided it complies but not in all cases with the requirements for single
with the requirements for conditional acceptance in values.
relation to the second requirement. There are therefore f r is always taken as being equal to 0,85.
always two cases:
Case 2
Case l
The lot complies with the requirements for single
The lot complies with the requirement for sample mean, values, but not with the requirements for sample mean
but not in all cases with the requirement for individual (xn).
test values.
For conditional acceptance at a lower limit
The lot may be accepted conditionally, subject to the
following additional conditions: xn Lr
• In regard to the relative compaction of pavement
fr 0,67 0,3
La Lr
layers, the bituminous-binder content of asphalt
and the concrete cube compressive strength, not For conditional acceptance at an upper limit
more than one test value may not comply with the
requirements of individual test values.
L r xn
• In regard to the cementitious-binder content, the fr 0,67 0,3
Lr La
binder content may be below 70% of the specified
binder content in not more than 13 cases.
(See clause 03 for definitions of symbols).

902-6
07.05 Applying the payment-reduction All sections of completed work shall be submitted to the
factor Engineer for routine inspection and testing, and the
Contractor shall not cover up or construct any work on
The payment-reduction factor shall be applied to the top of sections of completed work before being advised
following payment items as may apply and be by the Engineer of the outcome of his tests and
described in the Specifications: inspection. The Contractor shall arrange the submission
of work for testing in a manner as will afford the
• Chemically stabilised layers Engineer reasonable opportunity for inspecting and
Items 604.01, 604.02 and as applicable, 203.01 or testing.
601.02 and 601.03
• Asphalt base and surfacing
Items 606.01 and 606.02

• Concrete
Items 704.01, 704.02 and 704.03
No reduction shall apply to payment items for
formwork, reinforcing or tendons.

• General
Where payment items are incorporated in the Project
Specifications or have been amended in the
Schedule of Quantities, the payment-reduction factor
shall apply to the payment items corresponding to
the payment items mentioned above.
Where a lot is conditionally accepted in regard to
more than one property, the payment-reduction factor
for each property shall be calculated, and the factor
giving rise to the largest reduction shall be applied,
except in the case of concrete pavements when the
provisions of subclause 12.02 of section 610 shall be
referred to.

08 PROCESS CONTROL BY THE CONTRACTOR

The requirements of clause 04 of section 901 shall
apply in respect of the Contractor's obligation to
institute and implement a control system for monitoring
the quality of the work and materials supplied.
For continuous concrete and asphalt-production
processes, the Engineer may order the Contractor to
augment the above control system by introducing a
process-control system for monitoring the various
properties to be controlled. The specific system to be
applied shall be subject to the Engineer's approval, and
the attention of the Contractor is drawn to the systems
described in clause 4.4 of TRH5, which will normally be
regarded as suitable.
The Contractor shall take immediate steps to rectify any
deviation from the specified requirements indicated by
his process-control system, and the Engineer shall have
the right to inspect and be given all details of tests and
testing procedures in an order to satisfy himself that the
Contractor is implementing an adequate process-control
system.

09 ROUTINE TESTS AND INSPECTION BY THE

ENGINEER
The Engineer will at regular intervals inspect and test
materials and completed work for compliance with the
specified requirements, and, where applicable, the
specified judgement scheme will be applied. The testing
frequencies and sample and lot sizes for routine testing
shall be at the Engineer's discretion.

902-7
SERIES 9 : QUALITY CONTROL (b) The specifications, test methods, codes of
practice and co-coordinating specifications of the
SECTION 903 : TESTING Standards South Africa (abbreviated SANS and
CKS).
CONTENTS
(c) The specifications of the British Standards
01 SCOPE Institution (abbreviated BS).
02 TESTING LABORATORIES AND EQUIPMENT (d) The specifications of the American Society for
03 STANDARD METHODS OF TESTING Testing and Materials (abbreviated ASTM).
04 THE COSTS OF TESTING
05 PROCEDURES FOR TAKING AND (e) The specifications of the American Association of
SUBMITTING SAMPLES OF MATERIALS State Highway and Transportation Officials
06 TESTS ON AGGREGATES (abbreviated AASHTO).
07 TESTS ON CONCRETE Note:
08 THE SAMPLING AND TESTING OF
ROAD-CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS In all cases the latest amendment or revision which is
09 TESTS FOR THE SURFACE REGULARITY valid on the closing date of the Tender is implied when
AND TEXTURE OF PAVEMENTS reference is made to any one of the above standards in
10 STRUCTURAL TESTS the Specifications.
11 TESTS ON PIPELINES
12 CLASSIFYING THE TESTS 04 THE COSTS OF TESTING
13 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
04.01 Process control
01 SCOPE The cost of testing undertaken by the Contractor in
This section describes the requirements for testing terms of his obligations under clause 04 of section 901
laboratories and testing equipment and the various for purposes of process control, including the taking of
sampling and testing methods to be used for testing the samples, reinstating where samples have been taken,
properties of the materials and workmanship to be and all testing equipment, labour, materials, etc, shall
provided under this Contract. be included in the rates tendered for the various items
of work supplied and will not be paid for separately.
These requirements shall apply to all tests and testing
carried out for the purposes of this Contract whether 04.02 Producing certificates
carried out by or on behalf of the Engineer or the
Contractor. Where the properties of materials or manufactured
products are required in these Specifications to comply
Certain sampling and testing procedures not covered in with specified specifications published by a standards
the other sections of the Specifications by reference to authority, the Contractor shall produce, when called
the standard methods mentioned in clause 03 are given upon to do so, certificates from the manufacturer
in this section. confirming that the materials or products supplied
comply with the relevant specifications. The cost of
02 TESTING LABORATORIES AND EQUIPMENT providing such certificates shall be borne by the
When the Contractor elects to carry out all or part of his Contractor. Where specified that a product shall comply
testing by using independent laboratories, the with an SANS specification, it will mean that the product
laboratories must be approved in advance by the shall carry the SANS mark, in which case a certificate
Engineer for each Contract. Should, in the opinion of will not be required.
the Engineer, the standard of work produced by such
04.03 Testing materials and products covered by
laboratories be not acceptable, he may in his absolute
certificates
discretion withdraw any approval previously given for
the use of such a laboratory and the Contractor shall The Engineer shall be entitled to take samples of and
not be entitled to any damages or other compensation order tests to be made on products and materials in
as a result of such withdrawal of approval. respect of which certificates of compliance may be
When the Contractor elects to do his own testing, the required as described in sub clause 04.02 above. The
laboratory and equipment, and the quality, training and Contractor shall be paid at the appropriate rates if the
experience of the personnel manning the laboratory shall cost of such tests are itemized in the Schedule of
be such as will ensure proper testing and shall furthermore Quantities, and, if no appropriate rates exist, such tests
be subject to the Engineer's approval. All equipment shall shall be classed as extra work in terms of the General
be regularly calibrated and tested for accuracy. Conditions of Contract, provided that such tests indicate
compliance with the Specifications, otherwise the cost
The Engineer's laboratories will be subject to the same shall be borne by the Contractor.
requirements as those of the Contractor.
05 PROCEDURES FOR TAKING AND
03 STANDARD METHODS OF TESTING SUBMITTING SAMPLES OF MATERIALS
Testing shall be done in accordance with the Where the Contractor is required in these Specifications
appropriate standard method specified in the to submit samples of materials or mixtures to the
Specifications and, where no standard method is Engineer for approval prior to their being used in the
specified, testing shall be done in accordance with the Works, the use of these materials or mixtures without
methods described in the following documents, in order the Engineer's written approval shall constitute default
of precedence. on the part of the Contractor. All samples shall be
(a) Standard Methods of Testing Road Construction submitted in sufficient time for proper testing.
Materials, published by the National Institute for The Engineer's approval of any material or mixture shall
Transport and Road Research as part of the in no way relieve the Contractor of his obligation to
series Technical Methods for Highways provide materials, mixtures and workmanship in
(abbreviated TMH1 and TMH6). accordance with the Specifications.

903-1
All samples for testing shall be taken in a random Concrete Society Technical Report No 11, published by
pattern unless otherwise ordered by the Engineer. the Concrete Society (Great Britain).
The Engineer shall have full access to the Works for the The instructions of this report shall be followed to
taking of samples. The Contractor shall render any determine the "estimated potential strength", which
assistance necessary for the taking of samples and shall be compared with the specified 28-day cube
shall be responsible for the reinstatement of pavement strength specified for each type of concrete. The
layers or other structures at the positions where corrections to be applied to the actual core strength to
samples have been taken. Full compensation for allow for excess voidage, any included steel, and the
rendering assistance with sampling and for length/diameter ratio of cores shall be as stated in this
reinstatement where samples are taken shall be publication, and the correction for curing history shall be
included in the rates tendered for the various items of determined by the Engineer in accordance with this
work tested, and no additional payments will be made in publication and such other information as he may
this respect. consider appropriate.
Table 903/1 shall serve as a guide for the submission of The Engineer's decisions regarding the properties,
materials in respect of the time and quantity required for suitability and measure of compliance of the concrete
testing, approval and mix design. As the time stated in represented by cores tested as described above shall
this schedule makes no allowance for possible rejection be final and binding.
and resubmission of alternative materials, the
Contractor shall submit any doubtful material at an early 07.04 Flexural strength test (modulus of rupture)
stage and together with alternative materials in order to The procedure for sampling and the making, curing,
minimize any delays with regard to the final approval. storing and testing of test beams and the moulds used
The Contractor shall note that any samples submitted shall be in accordance with SANS method 5864.
direct to the Engineer's laboratory for approval shall be 07.05 Strength of finishes to concrete floors
accompanied by a letter signed by the Contractor.
The procedure for assessing the strength and
06 TESTS ON AGGREGATES compliance with the specifications of concrete floor
toppings and screeds shall be in accordance with the
Aggregates shall be tested on a regular basis by the methods specified in SANS 10109-2
Contractor as part of his process control as they are
being produced or delivered to the Site. The minimum 08 THE SAMPLING AND TESTING OF ROAD-
testing frequency shall be as given in table 903/2. CONSTRUCTION MATERIALS
07 TESTS ON CONCRETE 08.01 General
07.01 The making, curing and 28-day compressive- The sampling of all road-construction materials shall be
strength determination of concrete test cubes. carried out in accordance with the methods specified in
TMH5. The testing of road-construction material shall
The making, curing and compressive-strength be carried out in accordance with the methods specified
determination of concrete test cubes shall be carried
in TMH1, except that, in respect of concrete testing and
out in accordance with SANS method 5863. In addition, sampling, the provisions of clause 07 above shall apply.
the following shall apply:
In addition, and more specifically, the provisions of the
(a) One test result shall be the average value of three
subclauses below shall apply in respect of the various
compressive-strength determinations done on cubes
tests and options described in the documents referred
prepared from the same sample. Different test
to above.
results from tests on production concrete must be
obtained from separate batches of concrete. 08.02 The sampling and testing of soils, gravels and
(b) Test cubes prepared from concrete produced on the crushed stone in fills and pavement layers
Site shall preferably be laboratory-moulded and (a) Sampling
cured. The concrete shall be hand mixed after it has
been transported to the laboratory, and the Samples for the determination of maximum dry
specimens shall be moulded within 30 minutes of density (MDD) and optimum moisture content
mixing. (OMC) shall be taken as follows after the mixing
operations have been completed.
(c) Field-made specimens shall be handled with
extreme care and shall on no account be jarred or Establish the positions for field-density
dropped during transport to the laboratory for curing. determinations in accordance with Chapter 4 of
On no account may specimens be transported on TMH5. At the positions of the field-density
the back of a truck without their being placed on determinations, mark a strip 1 m wide across the
foam plastic at least 75 mm thick. full width of the road and sample the material at
four or five positions across the full width of the
07.02 The consistency or slump test strip and for the full depth of the layer. Combine
the samples of each strip into one sample.
The consistency or slump test shall be performed in
accordance with SANS 5862-1. (b) Maximum dry density (MDD) and optimum
moisture content (OMC)
07.03 Concrete core testing for strength
The samples are prepared and tested in
Where sections of concrete which have failed to meet accordance with Test Method A7 of TMH1. Prior to
the Specifications are desired to be further examined by compaction, the entire sample shall be brought to a
the extraction and testing of concrete cores, 100 mm or moisture content approximately 2% below the
150 mm cores shall be drilled and tested. The sampling expected optimum moisture content by the addition
and testing procedure to be followed shall be in of water or by mixing to facilitate drying-out. The
accordance with SANS 5865, and the interpretation of apparent density of crushed-stone material shall be
the test results shall be in accordance with the determined in accordance with the method
publication Concrete Core Testing for Strength - described in sub clause 08.01 (e) below.

903-2
 Table 903/1

SCHEDULE OF QUANTITIES AND TIMES FOR THE SUBMISSION OF MATERIALS FOR QUALITY
APPROVAL AND MIX DESIGN

Submission for quality approval Submission for quality approval

only and mix design
Material
Proposed use Min time to be Min time to be
submitted
allowed for Min quantity to allowed for Min quantity to
testing and be submitted testing, approval be submitted
approval and mix design

Crushed stone Coarse aggregate 2 weeks 50 kg of each size 10 weeks 150 kg of each
for concrete of stone size of stone for
each class of
t
Bituminous 2 weeks 50 kg of each size N/A N/A
surface dressing of stone
Asphalt mixes 2 weeks 50 kg of each size 6 weeks 100 kg of each
of stone size of stone

Crushed-stone 3 weeks 50 kg of each size N/A N/A

base or subbase of stone

Crusher dust Fine aggregate for 2 weeks 50 kg of each size 10 weeks 150 kg of each
and/or sand concrete of dust fraction type proposed for
use for each class
of concrete

Asphalt mixes 2 weeks 15 kg of each size 6 weeks 150 kg of each

of dust fraction type proposed for
use
Slurry seal or 2 weeks 15 kg of each type 6 weeks 50 kg
sand seal proposed for use

Gravel Subbase and/or 4 weeks 200 kg of each N/A N/A

base sample

Other materials
e.g. paint,
As specified As directed by the Engineer
cement, additives,
etc

(c) Determination of field densities (e) Determination of the apparent density of crushed-
stone materials
Field densities may be determined in accordance
with Method A10(a) or A10(b)T of TMH1 for soils The apparent density of crushed-stone material
and gravels and shall be determined in accordance shall be determined as follows:
with one of the methods described in Method
A10(b)T for crushed-stone layers. In the event of a (i) Apparatus
dispute over test results, only Method C (direct • A balance to measure 5 kg accurately to
transmission) of Method A10(b)T shall be used for within 0,5 g.
crushed-stone layers, and this method or Method
A10(a) in the case of soil or gravel layers. • A pycnometer, e.g. a preservative jar with a
flat ground rim.
(d) Time limitations
• A temperature-controlled bath with a
For chemically stabilized layers, the OMC and thermostat capable of controlling the
MDD determinations shall be completed within the temperature to 25°C + 1°C.
time limits given, and field-density determinations
shall be completed within 24 hours of completing • A thermometer 0°C - 100°C.
the compaction of the layer. Where the latter • A drying oven capable of maintaining
requirement cannot be complied with in the case temperatures between 105°C and 110°C.
of retesting, due allowance shall be made for any
increase or decrease in density occurring in some • Towels.
stabilized materials over a period of time after
compaction. • 10% Teepol solution,

The MDD, OMC and field-density determinations

for unstabilized materials shall preferably be
completed within 24 hours of completing the
compacting of the layers.

903-3
903-4
(ii) Method (iv) Notes:
• Take 3 000 g - 4 000 g of the material as (1) Do not add any chemicals other than
obtained from a density hole in the road. Teepol solution to water.
All the material obtained from the hole
should preferably be used. If it is too (2) No suction should be applied to the
much for one pycnometer, the material water to remove the air.
can be divided between two pycnometers. (3) The temperature of the water should be
• Dry the material to a constant mass in an 25°C plus or minus 1°C and no other
oven at 105°C-110°C. temperature should be used.

• Make sure that the pycnometer is clean (4) Where two pycnometers are used, the
and determine its mass, together with that apparent density shall be calculated
of a marked sheet of glass. from the weighted average of the two
results.
• Place the dried sample in the pycnometer
and determine the mass of the 08.03 Testing of bitumen, tar and asphalt
pycnometer, glass sheet and sample
(a) Tests described in standard specifications for
together. (The sample should not exceed
tars, bitumens and bituminous emulsions
half the volume of the pycnometer.)
Whenever specified or ordered by the Engineer,
• Add clean water to the pycnometer until it
the Contractor shall supply him with certificates
is approximately three-quarters full. Add
issued by the manufacturer or the specifying
three drops of the 10% Teepol solution to
authority that the bitumen, tar or bituminous
the water, close the pycnometer and
emulsions delivered to the Site comply with the
shake it thoroughly for one to two minutes.
test requirements specified in the relevant
• Fill the pycnometer with water almost to specifications.
the brim and place it in a thermostatically The Engineer shall have the authority to order
controlled bath at 25°C. Leave it for the Contractor to have such materials tested by
30 minutes without disturbing. an approved laboratory for compliance with all or
• Remove the pycnometer without shaking any of the requirements specified. The results of
or jarring it and place it on a spread-out such tests shall be submitted direct to the
towel. Fill it with water and slide the glass Engineer by the testing laboratory and, if
sheet carefully over the brim from one requested, copies of results shall be sent to the
side. Make sure that no air bubbles are Contractor.
trapped beneath the glass sheet. Dry the The cost of tests shall be borne as specified in
pycnometer and the glass sheet carefully clause 12.
all over and determine the mass of the
filled pycnometer plus the glass sheet. (b) Determination of air permeability of compacted
Marshall specimens
• Remove the contents of the pycnometer,
clean it, and fill it in the same manner with Air-permeability determinations for compacted
water with a temperature of 25°C. Dry the Marshall specimens shall be carried out as
pycnometer and determine the mass of described in the NITRR publication TRH8.
the pycnometer filled with water, together (c) Determination of film thickness
with the glass sheet.
The film thickness of the binder in asphalt mixes
(iii) Calculation shall be determined as described in the NITRR
publication TRH8.
The apparent density of the material is
calculated as follows: 08.04 Tests relating to chemical stabilization of
soils and gravels
Mass of pycnometer + glass sheet =a
(a) Test for cementitious binder content
Mass of pycnometer + glass sheet+
material =b The test method used for determining the
cementitious binder content of soils, gravels or
Mass of material only = (b - a) crushed stone that has been mixed with a
chemical stabilizing agent shall be determined by
Mass of pycnometer + material +
the Engineer and may be any test method
water + glass sheet =c
regarded by the Employer as being acceptable at
Mass of pycnometer + water + the time.
glass sheet =d When determining the cementitious binder
Apparent density of material = content, due allowance shall be made for the
presence of naturally occurring MgO or CaO in
(b a) the unstabilized material which may affect the
results of such tests. If the standard deviation of
(d a) (c b) the natural CaO plus MgO content of the
untreated material exceeds 0,35%, any
determination of the cementitious binder content
shall be ignored.

903-5
 Sample holes shall be spaced at random or as A metal wedge 100 mm long and 50 mm wide shall be
directed by the Engineer transversely as well as constructed with a taper of 7,5 in the horizontal and 1,0
longitudinally over the area to be tested, and if in the vertical and tapering to a feather edge (50 mm
the material is road-mixed, samples shall be wide). Parallel lines spaced at 7,5 mm intervals shall be
taken from the top and bottom of each hole. The engraved on the sloping face, which shall be numbered
minimum number of samples per test shall be 10. to indicate the positions where the wedge is 1,0 mm,
2,0 mm, etc, thick.
(b) Canvas-patch test for the spread rate of
cementitious binder When measuring surface irregularities, the 3,0 m
straight-edge, which shall have sharp right-angled
The following method shall be used to determine corners at the bottom, shall be placed on the road and
the spread rate of the chemical stabilizing agent the wedge inserted below the straight-edge at the
when bulk distributors are used. position where a surface irregularity is to be measured.
At least 10 clean canvas patches, each measuring The size of the irregularity shall be determined
1 m x 1 m, are placed flat on the road in selected according to the mark to which the wedge can be
positions in relation to the bulk distributor's track. inserted, thin end first, without the straight-edge being
After the passage of the bulk distributor, the lifted.
canvas patches are carefully lifted and all the
material on the patches is transferred to a 09.03 The use of a rolling straight-edge for
container and the mass measured. The total mass measuring surface irregularities
of stabilizing agent on each patch is then recorded The rolling straight-edge to be used shall be the type
and the average rate of application is determined. designed by the Transport and Road Research
Instead of canvas patches, flat metal trays may be Laboratory of Great Britain (TRRL) and manufactured
used for collecting the stabilizing agent. by Messrs Farnel and Company, or any other type
approved by the Engineer.
09 TESTS FOR THE SURFACE REGULARITY AND
TEXTURE OF PAVEMENTS The machine shall be calibrated on a purpose-made
calibrating bed and the bell set to register exactly at the
09.01 Determination of texture depth on gap-graded required deflection. During measuring care shall be
asphalt surface course with precoated chips taken to move the machine at a suitably slow speed and
and on concrete pavements with wire-broom not so fast that it will register incorrectly as a result of
texture vibrations, sway or other effects induced by movement
over an irregular surface.
The texture depth shall be determined by the sand-
patch test as described below: The number of irregularities exceeding the specified
limit and the distance traversed shall be recorded, and
Sand required: the number of irregularities per 100 m shall be
Dry, natural sand with a rounded particle shape, which calculated for each run.
will pass through a 0,300 mm sieve and will be retained Further recommendations regarding the operation and
on a 0,150 mm sieve. maintenance of the rolling straight-edge are contained
in the TRRL Report No 290/1970.
Method
The surface irregularities on each carriageway shall be
• Demarcate a 450 mm wide strip on the surface to be measured by two runs of the rolling straight-edge, suitably
tested with chalk line marks. spaced over the width of the carriageway, as directed by
• Measure 500 m of dry sand and pour it onto the the Engineer. Where the Engineer and the Contractor
surface at the beginning of the demarcated strip. agree, one run instead of two runs may be made.

• Spread the sand slowly and evenly between the 10 STRUCTURAL TESTS
lines with a rubber squeegee, and apply a fair
amount of pressure. The following tests shall apply specifically with regard to
structures and structural elements:
• Ensure that the entire surface between the lines is
covered with sand. 10.01 Tests on laminated elastomeric bearings
• Keep on spreading the sand with slow strokes while The following tests shall be performed on the completed
exerting pressure on the squeegee until no more bearings, sample pads or test specimens prepared for
sand is displaced. the purpose, as may be relevant:
• Measure the length of the strip to the nearest Bond test, tests to BS 1154 or BS 2752, weathering
1111 test, compression and shear-stiffness tests.
10 mm. The texture depth in mm is ,
a (a) Bond test
where a is the length of the sand strip a in mm. The test specimens for this purpose shall be
prepared from one of the selected bearings or
09.02 Straight-edge test for surface irregularities on sample pads which may have been used
surfaces with coarse surface textures previously for tests specified in subclause (c)
below.
When measuring surface irregularities on surfaces with
coarse surface textures, such as grooved concrete The test shall be performed in accordance with
pavements, crushed-stone pavement layers, natural Method B as specified in BS 903 : Part A21.
gravel base, asphalt with rolled-in chips, surface The adhesion value during separation shall not
dressings and other similar surfaces, the following be less than 9 N/mm width of the test specimen.
procedure shall be followed:

903-6
(b) Test to BS 1154 or BS 2752 10.02 Prestressed concrete : Testing of pre-
stressing steel, anchorage assemblies,
The test specimens shall be prepared either as for
couplings and grout
the bond test or from test sheets made from the
rubber used in the manufacture of the bearing. (a) General
The physical properties of the rubber in respect Where so directed by the Engineer, the
of hardness, tensile strength, elongation at break Contractor shall make arrangements for samples
and compression set shall comply with the of the materials intended for use in the Works to
requirements specified in BS 1154 or BS 2752, be tested by an approved independent testing
both in the "as received" and in the aged authority. The costs of testing prestressing steel,
condition. anchorage assemblies and couplings shall be
The respective tests shall be as described in the paid for as specified in subclause 12.04 of this
relevant part of BS 903, viz: section. Control testing of the viscosity and
bleeding of grout shall be regarded as part of the
Determination of hardness BS 903 : Part A26 Contractor's duties under process control and
shall not be paid for separately.
Determination of tensile
strength and elongation at Material represented by samples failing to meet
break BS 903 : Part A2 the specified requirements shall be removed and
replaced by suitable material.
Determination of compression
set BS 903 : Part A6 (b) Anchorages and couplers
Anchorages and couplers shall be tested in
Accelerated aging tests BS ISO 188
accordance with the requirements of sub-
(c) Weathering test clause 03.03 of section 705. The anchorages and
couplers shall be assembled according to the
The tests shall be performed as specified in practical application on the construction Site,
BS ISO 4665. using all the components which are necessary for
At the end of the test period, and after having anchoring, but excluding the sheathing.
been subjected to an ozone concentration of 50 (c) Prestressing steel
plus or minus 5 parts per hundred million at 50°C
plus or minus 1°C, the test specimens shall be Prestressing steel shall be tested in accordance
free from cracks visible to the naked eye. with the requirements of subclause 03.02 of
section 705. Should any test piece fail to satisfy
(d) Compression and shear-stiffness tests the specified requirements for the prestressing
(i) Compression stiffness steel, the material represented by that sample
shall not be used without it being further tested,
The bearings or sample pads shall be loaded and if further testing is unsuccessful, it shall be
to 150% of the design load, which load shall replaced with materials conforming to the
be maintained for a period of 2 minutes. The specifications.
loading shall then be reduced to 10% of the
design load and maintained at this value for (d) Grout
10 minutes when gauge readings shall be The fluidity of grout shall be measured with a flow
taken. The bearings or sample pads shall cone, immersion apparatus or a viscometer. The
then be reloaded to 150% of the design load instrument shall be accurately calibrated in a
and maintained at this value for 10 minutes. laboratory so that the specified viscosity of the
Gauge readings shall be taken and used in grout can be controlled satisfactorily.
conjunction with the earlier readings to
evaluate the stiffness. The procedure for conducting the flow-cone test
for measuring the fluidity of grout shall be as
The compression stiffness shall be plus or follows:
minus 20% of the theoretical value.
Unless otherwise approved by the Engineer,
(ii) Shear stiffness the flow cone shall be as shown in figure 1,
A testing procedure similar to that for testing page 903-10.
the compression stiffness shall be followed, Immediately after the grout has been mixed,
the loading being such as will maintain the pre-wetted flow cone, which is held firmly
steady shear distortions of 10% and 150% with its top rim in a level position, shall be
respectively of the design shear distortion. filled with grout to the level indicated by the
In practice it may be convenient to test two preset pointer, whilst the bottom orifice is
bearings or sample pads attached to a held closed by putting a finger over it.
common shear plate, where one of the
bearings is tested in compression. As soon as the required volume of grout
(± 1 750 m ) is reached, the finger shall be
The shear stiffness shall be within plus or
removed to allow the grout to flow out freely
minus 20% of the theoretical value.
through the bottom orifice. The flow time for
Provided that the performance in both emptying the cone shall be determined to the
compression and shear tests is satisfactory, the nearest second with a stop watch.
bearings shall subsequently be used for The times obtained during grouting shall be
installation in the structure. No surface flaws
compared with the times determined in the
shall become apparent during the tests, and laboratory for grouts of the specified
bearings or sample pads shall not show any viscosities.
irregularities in their deflected shape.
903-7
 The bleeding of grout shall be measured in a 12 CLASSIFYING THE TESTS
metal or glass container which has an
internal diameter of approximately 100 mm For the purposes of this section tests are defined as
and a height of approximately 120 mm. The follows:
grout and water levels in the container shall Ordinary tests are tests which are constantly conducted
be controlled with a metal bridge into which by the Contractor on a regular basis in terms of
two adjustable studs A and B are secured. clauses 04 and 05 of section 901, for which no specified
For details of the apparatus see figure 2, pay items have been provided, and which include the
page 903-10. following, inter alia:
The procedure for determining the bleeding of Tests for determining the properties of all natural
grout shall be as follows: materials such as sand, stone, water, soil, gravel,
Studs A and B in the metal bridge shall be so etc. provided by the Contractor for use in the Works.
adjusted and locked that the distances from Tests on processed natural materials such as
the lower tips of the studs to the bottom of aggregate for concrete, asphalt and seals,
the container will be approximately 100 mm purchased or produced on Site by the Contractor.
and 107 mm respectively. The volumes VA
Tests for determining the properties of products
and VB for the container at the respective
such as concrete and asphalt, etc, produced
levels of the stud settings shall thereafter be specially for use on the Works by the Contractor, or
determined to the nearest millilitre. purchased from commercial producers or
The container shall be filled with freshly subcontractors.
mixed grout to a level where the grout will Tests on completed elements of construction such
just touch the tip of stud A, which points as fills, pavement layers, concrete structures, etc,
downwards. The bridge shall then be for establishing compliance with the specified
removed and the container tightly sealed to properties.
prevent evaporation. The container shall then
be stored at 20°C and kept free from Special tests are tests which have to be conducted by
vibrations for the entire duration of the test. the Contractor only at the specific request of the
Engineer, and include the following:
Three hours after the grout has been mixed,
the container shall be opened and the free Tests on commercial products such as cement, lime,
(bleed) water poured off. The bridge shall be paint, bituminous products, pipes, valves, and
placed over the container with the tip of stud bridge bearings. The requirements are specified as
B pointing downwards, and water shall be a whole or in part with reference being made to the
poured onto the grout with a measuring specifications of a standards organisation such as
apparatus until the water touches the tip of Standards South Africa.
stud B. The volume of water added shall be
determined to the nearest millilitre and shall Special tests on structures or elements of structures
be designated as V. to determine their efficacy, for the payment of which
clear provision has been made in the Specifications
The percentage bleeding shall be calculated and the Schedule of Quantities.
from the formula -
Any test requested by the Engineer purely for
( VB V) purposes of acceptance control. Such tests,
1 x 100 however, will not be classified as a special test if the
VA
test is requested because the Contractor has
neglected to conduct sufficient or proper tests in
10.03 The testing of welds in structural steel terms of clause 04 of section 901 and with a view to
(a) Visual inspection of welds submitting the result to the Engineer for his approval
of completed work or materials.
Welds shall be visually inspected to check that -
Payment will be made under the pay items of clause 13
(i) they are substantially uniform in appearance
only in regard to special tests. Payment for ordinary
and that there is no cracking or unacceptable
tests shall be included in the rates tendered by the
undercutting or porosity,
Contractor for the items of work to which the ordinary
(ii) full fusion is being obtained while welding is tests relate.
in progress, and
13 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
(iii) dimensional requirements in accordance with
BS 5135 are satisfied. Item Unit
(b) Destructive and non-destructive testing 903.01 Provision of testing equipment
Destructive and non-destructive testing shall be 903.01.01 Concrete-cube testing press number (No)
carried out as specified in SANS 10044-3.
903.01.02 Concrete-beam testing press number (No)
11 TESTS ON PIPELINES 903.01.03 150 mm x 150 mm x 150 mm
concrete-cube moulds number (No)
See section 303 for the testing of sewers and
section 403 for the testing of water pipelines.

903-8
Item Unit 903.03.03 Compressive-strength tests
903.01.04 700 mm x 150 mm x 150 mm on concrete cores number (No)
concrete-beam moulds number (No) 903.03.04 Asphalt tests on cores number (No)
903.01.05 Concrete-mould vibrating table number (No) The unit of measurement shall be the number of tests
903.01.06 Concrete and asphalt core-drilling made in accordance with the Engineer's instructions.
machine for 100 mm and 150 mm
The tendered rates under subitems 903.03.01 and
cores number (No) 903.03.02 shall include full compensation for preparing
903.01.07 Concrete and asphalt saw number (No) the samples, curing, storing and dispatching the
samples to an approved laboratory, and for having the
903.01.08 Air meter for concrete mix number (No) tests performed.
903.01.09 Rolling straight-edge number (No)
The tendered rates for subitems 903.03.03 and
The unit of measurement shall be the number of each 903.03.04 shall include full compensation for
item provided by the Contractor for the period required. dispatching the cores to an approved laboratory for
preparing and testing the cores.
The tendered rates shall include full compensation for
supplying, installing, testing, calibrating and maintaining Payment will not be made for any special test should
the equipment and for replacing any defective the test indicate that the Specifications have not been
equipment. Seventy five per cent (75%) of the amount complied with.
tendered will be paid when the equipment is supplied
Item Unit
and installed if necessary, and the remaining 25% when
the equipment is no longer required and is removed 903.04 Special tests on welded
from the Site on the Engineer's instructions. specimens
Item Unit 903.04.01 Specimen welded connection
903.02 Extraction of concrete (type stated) number (No)
and asphalt cores for 903.04.02 Etc for other types.
special tests
The unit of measurement shall be the number of
903.02.01 Extraction of cores when a coring specimens of each type successfully tested.
machine has been ordered under item
The tendered rates shall include full compensation for
903.01.06
the provision of all materials, equipment and labour to
903.02.01.01 100 mm concrete cores number (No) make up the specimen and for testing it to destruction.

903.02.01.02 150 mm concrete cores number (No) Payment will only be made where the test indicated
compliance with the Specifications.
903.02.01.03 100 mm asphalt cores number (No)
Item Unit
903.02.02 Extraction of cores
including the provision 903.05 Special test for the solubility
of a coring machine of concrete according to
SANS 677 Appendix C' number (No)
903.02.02.01 100 mm concrete cores number.(No)
The unit of measurement shall be the number of tests
903.02.02.02 150 mm concrete cores number (No) carried out by an approved laboratory in accordance with
the requirements of subclause 02.02(f) of section 704.
903.02.02.03 100 mm asphalt cores number (No)
The tendered rate shall include full compensation for all
The unit of measurement shall be the number of cores the material, transport, labour and equipment necessary
extracted and suitable for testing as ordered by the for testing the samples of concrete made with
Engineer. aggregates of dolomitic origin, for solubility and for
The tendered rates under subitem 903.02.01 shall testing the sample.
include full compensation for all labour required for Payment will not be made if a special test indicates
extracting the cores. The tendered rates under subitem non-compliance with the Specifications.
903.02.02 shall include full compensation for all the
labour tools and equipment required for extracting Item Unit
cores. In both cases the rates shall include the making
903.06 Other special tests requested
good where cores have been extracted.
by the Engineer
No payment will be made under this item if the special 903.06.01 Cost of testing prime cost sum
tests for which the cores are to be used do not qualify
(PC sum)
for payment under item 903.03.
903.06.02 Charge on prime cost sum percentage (%)
Item Unit
903.03 Special tests on concrete Payment for special tests as requested by the Engineer
and asphalt in terms of clause 12 will be made in accordance with
the provisions of the General Conditions of Contract.
903.03.01 Compressive-strength tests on Payment will not be made for any special test should
concrete cubes number (No) the test indicate that the Specifications have not been
complied with.
903.03.02 Modulus of rupture tests on
concrete beams number (No)

903-9
903-10
ANNEXURE A

LIST OF STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS AND CODES OF PRACTICE TO WHICH

REFERENCE IS MADE IN THE SPECIFICATIONS

SOUTH AFRICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS (SANS)

Reference Description
SANS 4 Locks, latches and associated furniture for doors (domestic type)
SANS 14 Malleable cast iron fittings threaded to ISO 7-1
SANS 28 Metal ties for cavity walls
SANS 32 Internal and/or external protective coatings for steel tubes - Specification
for hot dip galvanized coatings applied in automatic plants
SANS 62-1 Steel pipes. Part 1: Pipes suitable for threading and of a nominal size
not exceeding 150 mm
SANS 62-2 Steel pipes. Part 2: Screwed pieces and pipe fittings of a nominal size
not exceeding 150 mm.
SANS 92 Bituminous roofing felt
SANS 110 Sealing compounds for the building industry, two-component,
polysulphide base
SANS 121 Hot dip galvanized coatings on fabricated iron & steel articles -
Table 2 or 3 Specifications and test methods
SANS 135 Metallic coatings - Electrode deposited coatings of nickel plus chromium
and of copper plus nickel plus chromium
SANS 201 Fine content and dust content sieve analysis of aggregates
SANS 227 Burnt clay masonry units
SANS 242 Stainless steel sinks with draining boards (for domestic use)
SANS 248 Bituminous damp-proof courses
SANS 280 Hole location in fencing posts and droppers (105-1)
SANS 282 Bending dimensions and scheduling of steel for concrete
SANS 307 Penetration grade bitumens
SANS 308 Cutback bitumen
SANS 309 Anionic bitumen road emulsions
SANS 435 Mild steel rivets
SANS 455 Covered electrodes for the manual arc welding of carbon and carbon
manganese steels
SANS 457-2 Wooden poles, droppers, guard posts and spacer blocks. Part 2:
Softwood Species
SANS 457-3 Wooden poles, droppers, guard posts and spacer blocks. Part 3:
Hardwood Species
SANS 460 Plain-ended solid drawn copper tubes for potable water
SANS 497 Glazed ceramic sanitary ware
SANS 515 Decorative paint for interior use
SANS 538 High temperature wood preserving creosote
SANS 539 Wood preserving creosote (lurgi-gasification process)
SANS 546 Cast iron fittings for asbestos-cement pressure pipes
SANS 548 Cationic bitumen road emulsions
SANS 558 Cast iron surface boxes and manhole and inspection covers and frames
SANS 559 Vitrified clay sewer pipes and fittings
SANS 630 Decorative high gloss enamel paints

i
SANS 657-1 Steel tubes for non-pressure purposes. Part 1: Sections for scaffolding,
general engineering and structural applications
SANS 664 Cast iron gate valves for waterworks
SANS 673 Mixtures of copper-chromium-arsenic compounds for timber preservation
SANS 675 Zinc-coated fencing wire (plain and barbed)
SANS 677 Concrete non-pressure pipes
SANS 678 Primers for wood for interior and exterior use
SANS 679 Zinc chromate primers for steel
SANS 680 Glazing putty for wooden and metal window frames
SANS 681 Undercoats for paints
SANS 684 Structural steel paint
SANS 685 Fibre-cement sheets (flat and profiled)
SANS 719 Electric welded low carbon steel pipes for aqueous fluids (large bore)
SANS 723 Wash primer (metal etch primer)
SANS 727 Windows and doors made from rolled mild steel sections
SANS 731-1 Road and runway markings. Part 1: Single-pack solvent-borne and
water-borne paints
SANS 731-2 Road and runway markings. Part 2: Single-pack water-borne paints
SANS 746 Cast-iron pipes and pipe fittings for use above ground in drainage
installations
SANS 748 Road tar binders prepared from coke oven crudes
SANS 749 Road tar binders prepared from Lurgi-gassification crudes
SANS 791 Unplasticized poly vinyl chloride (PVC-U) sewer and drain pipes and pipe
fittings
SANS 801 Epoxy-tar paints
SANS 802 Bituminous aluminium paint
SANS 819 Fibre-cement pipes, couplings and fittings for sewerage, drainage and
low-pressure irrigation
SANS 824 Lime for soil stabilization
SANS 878 Ready-mixed concrete
SANS 887 Varnish for interior use
SANS 912 Calcium plumbate primer
SANS 920 Steel bars for concrete reinforcement
SANS 921 Pitch-impregnated fibre pipes, couplings and fittings
SANS 926 Two pack zinc-rich epoxy primer
SANS 927 Precast concrete kerbs, edgings and channels
SANS 935 Hot-dip (galvanized) zinc coatings on steel wire
SANS 952 Polyolefin film for damp-proofing and waterproofing in buildings
SANS 966-1 Components of pressure pipe systems. Part 1: Unplasticized poly (vinyl
chloride) (PVC-U) pressure pipe systems
SANS 966-2 Components of pressure pipe systems. Part 2: Modified poly (vinyl
chloride) (PVC-M) pressure pipe systems
SANS 974-1 Rubber joint rings (non-cellular). Part 1: Joint rings for use in water,
sewer and drainage systems
SANS 986 Precast reinforced concrete culverts
SANS 1023 Preformed elastomeric compression joint seals
SANS 1024 Welded steel fabric for reinforcement of concrete
SANS 1058 Concrete paving blocks
SANS 1062 Pressure and vacuum gauges
ii
SANS 1083 Aggregates from natural sources - Aggregates for concrete
SANS 1090 Aggregates from natural sources - Aggregates for plaster and mortar
SANS 1091 National colour standard for paint
SANS 1099 Hardwood furniture timber
SANS 1123 Pipe flanges
SANS 1128-1 Fire fighting equipment. Part 1: Components of underground and above-
ground hydrant systems
SANS 1128-2 Fire fighting equipment. Part 2: Hose couplings, connectors and branch
pipe and nozzle connections
SANS 1129 Steel doorframes
SANS 1143 Mushroom- and countersunk-head bolts and nuts
SANS 1149 Flat and taper steel washers
SANS 1151 Portable rechargeable fire extinguishers - Halogenated hydrocarbon type
extinguishers
SANS 1217 The production of painted and powder-coated steel pipes
SANS 1223 Fibre-cement pressure pipes and couplings
SANS 1260 Invert bitumen emulsion
SANS 1273 Fasteners for roof and wall coverings in the form of sheeting
SANS 1282 High-strength bolts, nuts and washers for friction-grip joints
SANS 1294 Precast concrete manhole sections and slabs
SANS 1305 Sealing compounds for the building industry, one-component,
silicone-rubber-base
SANS 1350 Guardrails for roads (w-section)
SANS 1373 Chain-link fencing and its wire accessories
SANS 1431 Weldable structural steels
SANS 1442 Roadstuds
SANS 1460 Laminated timber (glulam)
SANS 1519-1 Road signs. Part 1: Retro-reflective sheeting material
SANS 1519-2 Road signs. Part 2: Performance requirements for road signs
SANS 1586 Emulsion paints
SANS 1601 Structured wall pipes and fittings of unplasticized poly (vinyl chloride)
(PVC-U) for buried drainage and sewerage systems
SANS 1620 Barbed tape security barriers
SANS 1700 Fasteners
SANS 1783-1 Sawn softwood timber. Part 1: General Requirements
SANS 1783-2 Sawn softwood timber. Part 2: Stress graded structural timber and
timber for frame wall construction
SANS 1783-3 Sawn softwood timber. Part 3: Industrial timber
SANS 1783-4 Sawn softwood timber. Part 4: Brandering and battens
SANS 2813 Paints and Varnishes - Determination of Specular gloss of non-metallic
paint films at 20, 60 and 85
SANS 3575 Continuous hot-dip zinc-coated steel sheet of commercial, lock-forming
and drawing qualities
SANS 4427 Polyethylene (PE) pipes for water supply - Specifications
SANS 4998 Continuous hot-dip zinc-coated carbon steel sheet of structural quality
SANS 5121 Water covering capacity of aluminium pigment for paint
SANS 5767 Cleanliness of blast-cleaned steel surfaces for painting (assessed by
pictorial standards)
SANS 5769 Cleanliness of blast-cleaned steel surfaces for painting (assessed by
freedom from dust and debris)
iii
SANS 5772 Profile of blast-cleaned steel surfaces for painting (determined by
micrometer profile gauge)
SANS 5832 Organic impurities in fine aggregates (limit test)
SANS 5836 Effect of fine and coarse aggregate on the shrinkage and expansion of
cement: aggregate mixes (mortar prism method)
SANS 5838 Sand equivalent value of fine aggregates
SANS 5841 Aggregate crushing value of coarse aggregates
SANS 5842 FACT value (10% fine aggregate crushing value) of coarse aggregates
SANS 5846 Abrasion resistance of coarse aggregates (Los Angeles machine
method)
SANS 5847 Flakiness index of coarse aggregates
SANS 5848 Polished stone value of aggregates
SANS 5855 (1) Free water content of aggregates
SANS 5856 Bulking of fine aggregates
SANS 5862-1 Concrete tests - Consistence of freshly mixed concrete - Slump test
SANS 5862-2 Concrete tests - Consistence of freshly mixed concrete -Flow test
SANS 5862-3 Concrete tests - Consistence of freshly mixed concrete - Vebe test
SANS 5862-4 Concrete tests - Consistence of freshly mixed concrete - Compacting
factor and compaction index
SANS 5863 Concrete tests - Compressive strength of hardened concrete
SANS 5864 Concrete tests - Flexural strength of hardened concrete
SANS 5865 Concrete tests - The drilling, preparation and testing for compressive
strength of cores taken from hardened concrete
SANS 10005 The preservative treatment of timber
SANS 10044 Welding: Parts 1-7
SANS 10064 The preparation of steel surfaces for coating
SANS 10088 Pile foundations
SANS 10090 Community Protection against Fire
SANS 10094 The use of high-strength friction grip bolts
SANS 10096 The manufacture of finger-jointed structural timber
SANS 10102-1 Selection of pipes for buried pipelines. Part 1: General provisions
SANS 10102-2 Selection of pipes for buried pipelines. Part 2: Ridged pipes
SANS 10109-1 Concrete floors part 1: Bases to concrete flooring
SANS 10109-2 Concrete floors part 2: Finishes to concrete floors
SANS 10112 The installation of polyethylene and poly (vinyl chloride) PVC-U and PVC-
M pipes
SANS 10137 The installation of glazing in buildings
SANS 10142-1 The wiring of premises. Part 1: Low-voltage installations
SANS 10143 Building drawing practice
SANS 10160 The General procedures and loadings to be adopted for the design of
buildings
SANS 10161 The design of foundations for buildings
SANS 10162-1 The structural use of steel. Part 1: Limit states design of hot-rolled
steelwork
SANS 10162-2 The structural use of steel. Part 2: Limit states design of cold formed
steelwork
SANS 10162-4 The structural use of steel. Part 4: The design of cold-formed stainless
steel structural members
SANS 10164-1 The structural use of masonry Part 1: Unreinforced masonry walling

iv
SANS 10164-2 The structural use of masonry Part 2: Structural design and
requirements for reinforced and pre-stressed masonry
SANS 10268-1 Welding of thermoplastics - Welding processes. Part 1: Heated-tool
welding
SANS 10268-2 Welding of thermoplastics - Welding processes. Part 2: Electrofusion
welding
SANS 10268-3 Welding of thermoplastics - Welding processes. Part 3: Electrofusion
welding
SANS 10268-4 Welding of thermoplastics - Welding processes. Part 4: Hot-gas
extrusion welding
SANS 10268-5 Welding of thermoplastics - Welding processes. Part 5: Solvent welding
SANS 10268-6 Welding of thermoplastics - Welding processes. Part 6: Ultrasonic
welding, staking and insertion
SANS 10268-10 Welding of thermoplastics - Welding processes. Part 10: Weld defects
SANS 10313 The protection of structures against lightning
SANS 10400 The application of the National Building Regulations
SANS 50197-1 Cement. Part 1: Composition, specifications and conformity criteria for
common cements
SANS 50197-2 Cement. Part 2: Conformity evaluation
SANS 50413-1 Masonry cement. Part 1: Specification
SANS 50413-2 Masonry cement. Part 2: Test Methods
SANS 51423 Road marking materials - Drop on materials - Glass beads, anti-skid
aggregates and mixtures of the two
SANS 51424 Road marking materials - Premix glass beads

SANS CO-ORDINATING SPECIFICATIONS)

Reference Description
CKS 55 Glass for glazing
CKS 82 Steel posts, stays, standards and droppers for strained wire fences
CKS 146 Gates, steel with tubular frames (for farm and domestic use)
CKS 176 Galvanized corrugated steel drainage pipes
CKS 388 Rubber waterstops
CKS 389 Flexible poyvinyl chloride waterstops
CKS 437 Components of curved galvanized corrugated steel structures in compacted
earth surrounds

v
 TMH’s & TRH’s (Dept of Transport)

Reference Description
TMH5 Sampling methods for road construction materials.:
TMH6 Special methods for testing roads.
TRH5 Statistical concepts of quality control and their application in road
construction.

TMH1 Standard methods of testing road construction materials.

TMH2 National standard for the spraying performance of binder distributors.

TRH3 Surfacing seals for rural and urban roads and compendium of design
methods for surfacing seals used in the RSA
TRH8 Selection and design of hot-mix asphalt surfacings for highways

TRH14 Guidelines for road construction materials

BRITISH STANDARDS INSTITUTION (BS)

Reference Description

BS 78-2 Specification for cast iron Spigot and socket pipes (vertically cast) and
spigot and socket fittings
BS EN 512 Fibre Cement Products. Pressure pipes & joint
BS EN 537 Parts 1 - 4. Aluminium and Aluminium alloys
BS EN 593 Industrial valves. Metallic butterfly valves
BS EN 681-1 Elastomeric seals. Material requirements for pipe joint seals used in
water and drainage applications. Vulcanized rubber.
BS EN 681-2 Elastomeric seals. Material requirements for pipe joint seals used in
water and drainage applications. Thermoplastic elstomers.
BS 812-101 Guide to sampling and testing aggregates
BS 903 Physical testing of rubber
BS EN 1043-1 Destructive tests on welds in metallic materials. Hardness test on arc
welded joints
BS EN 1043-2 Destructive tests on welds in metallic materials. Micro hardness testing
on welded joints
BS 1134-1 Assessment of surface textures. Methods and Instrumentation
BS 1134-2 Assessment of surface textures. Guidance and General Information
BS 1154 Natural rubber compounds - Specification
BS 1186-2 Timber for and workmanship in joinery. Specification for workmanship
BS 1377-3 Method of test for soils for civil engineering purposes. Chemical and
electro-chemical tests
BS 1449 part 2 Steel plate, sheet and strip. Specification for stainless and heat-
resisting steel plate, sheet and strip.
BS 2035 Specification for cast iron flanged pipes and flanged fittings
BS 2499-1 Hot applied joint sealants for concrete pavements
BS 2752 Specification for chloroprene rubber compounds
BS 3837-1 Specification for expanded polystyrene boards
BS 4254 Specification for two-part polysulphide-based sealants
BS 4447 Specification for the performance of prestressing anchorages for
post-tensioned construction

vi
BS 4486 Specification for hot rolled and processed high tensile alloy steel bars
for the prestressing of concrete
BS ISO 4665 Methods of testing vulcanised rubber (903-7)
BS 4840-2 Rigid polyurethane (PUR) foam in slab form. Specification for PUR
foam for use in refrigerator cabinets, cold rooms and stores.
BS 5400 part 9.2 Steel, concrete and composite bridges
BS 5896 Specification for high tensile steel wire and strand for the prestressing
of concrete
BS 5911-114 Precast concrete pipes, fittings and ancillary products. Specification for
porous pipes.
BS 8004 Code of practice for foundations
BS EN 10025 Hot rolled products of non-alloy structural steels. Technical delivery
instructions
BS EN 10088-1 Stainless steels. List of stainless steels
BS EN 10224 Non-alloy steel tubes and fittings for the conveyance of aqueous liquids,
including water for human consumption.
BS EN 10250-4 Open die. forgings for general Engineering purposes - Stainless steels

BS EN 12020-1 Aluminium and aluminium alloys. Extruded precision profiles in alloys

EN AW-6060 and EN AW-6063. Technical conditions for inspection
and delivery
BS EN 12020-2 Aluminium and aluminium alloys. Extruded precision profiles in alloys
EN AW-6060 and EN AW-6063. Tolerances on dimensions and form
BS EN 13101 Steps for underground man entry chambers. Requirements, marking,
testing and evaluation of conformity
BS EN 13139 Aggregates for mortar
BS EN 13813 Screed material and floor screeds. Screed material. Properties and
requirements
BS EN 22063 Metallic and other inorganic coatings. Thermal spraying. Zinc,
aluminium and their alloys
BS EN ISO Plastics. Polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) semi-finished products.
13000-1 Requirements and designation
BS EN ISO Plastics. Polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) semi-finished products.
13000-2 Preparation of test specimens and determination of properties

AMERICAN ASSOCIATION OF STATE HIGHWAY AND

TRANSPORTATION OFFICIALS (AASHTO)

Reference Description
AASHTO M 213 Pro-formed expansion joint fillers for concrete paving and structural
construction (non-extruding and resilient bituminous types)
AASHTO M 148 Liquid membrane-forming compounds for curing concrete
AASHTO M 153 Pre-formed expansion joint fillers for concrete paving and structural
construction (non-extruding and resilient non-bituminous types)
AASHTO M-154 Chemical admixtures for concrete (704-1)
AASHTO M-173 Hot-poured elastic concrete joint sealer
AASHTO M-194 Air-entraining admixtures for concrete (704-1)

vii
 AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS (ASTM)

Reference Description
ASTM-C 260 Air entraining admixtures for concrete
ASTM-C 494/C494M Chemical admixtures for concrete
ASTM-C 920 Sealants, Elastomeric joint
ASTM-D 2835 Lubricant for installation of preformed compression seals in concrete
pavements

US FEDERAL SPECIFICATIONS

Reference Description
SS-S-200E(2) Sealant, joint, two component, jet blast resistant, for Portland Cement
Concrete Pavement.
SS-S-1401C(1) Sealant, joint, non-jet fuel resistant, Hot applied, for Portland Cement
Concrete and Asphalt Pavements
HH-F-341 F Fillers, expansion-joint; bituminous (asphalt and tar) and non-bituminous
for concrete

viii
 MISCELLANEOUS PUBLICATIONS REFERRED TO IN THE SPECIFICATIONS

Reference Organization Description

AWWA C205-00 American Water Cement-Mortar Protective Lining and Coating
Works Association for steel Water pipe - 4 in (100 mm) and
larger
DIN 3202 Part 4 Face to face and centre to face dimensions
of valves
ANSI/API 116.1 Rev 67: American National Two component elastomeric scaling
Standards Institute compounds for the building trade.
ISO 8501-1 Swedish Standard: Standard booklet with high quality colour
pictures for the preparation of steel
substrates before application of paints and
related products
8040-03 California State Binder (adhesive), Epoxy resin base
Specification
API 1104 American Welding of Pipelines and Related Facilities
Petroleum Institute
Southern African Southern African Development Community Road Traffic Signs
Development Community Manual
International Slurry Slurry-bound Macadam
Surfacing Association
South African Institution The Safety of Persons Working in small diameter shafts and Test
of Civil Engineers Pits for Civil Engineering Purposes
(SAICE)
WISA Operator's Handbook on Sewage Purification chapter 25: Safety
Precautions.
Transnet Limited Specification E7 : Specification for Works on, over, under or
adjacent to a railway line.
Specification E10: Specification for plate laying and ballasting.
The provision and construction of private sidings.
Permanent way instructions.
Concrete Manufacturer’s Concrete Pipe Handbook.
Association
National Building X/Bou 2-34: The NBRI air test for sewers and drains.
Research Institute (CSIR)
The Concrete Society Technical Report No 11: Concrete core testing for strength.
(Great Britain)
Transport and Road TRRL Report No 290/1970: Methods of texturing new concrete
Research Laboratory road surfaces to provide adequate skidding resistance.
(Great Britain)
Dept of the Environment Technical Memorandum (Bridges) No BE 1/76.
of Great Britain
Southern Africa Institute Structural steel tables.
of Steel Construction 7th Revision 1997

ix
 GOVERNMENT ACTS AND REGULATIONS

Atmospheric Pollution Prevention Act, 1965 (Act 45 of 1965)

Construction Regulations 2003, Government Gazette No 25207
Engineering Profession Act, 2000 (Act 46 of 2000)
Environmental Conservation Act, 1989 (Act 73 of 1989)
Mineral and Petroleum Resources Development Act, 2002 (Act 28 of 2002)
Minerals Act, 1991 (Act 50 of 1991)
National Environmental Management Act, 1998 (Act No 107 of 1998)
National Monuments Act, 1969 (Act 28 of 1969)
National Parks Act, 1976 (Act 57 of 1976)
National Road Traffic Act, 1996 (Act 93 of 1996)
Regulations for combating and preventing the spread of certain insect pests affecting soft wood,
Government Gazette, 2 August 1968
The Atmospheric Pollution Prevention Act, 1965 (Act 450 of 1965)
The Conservation of Agricultural Resources Act, 1983 (Act 43 of 1983)
The Explosives Act, 2003 (Act 2615 of 2003)
The Explosives Regulations, 2002
The Mines Health and WorksSafety Act ,1996, (Act 27 of 1996)
The National Water act, 1998 (Act 36 of 1998)
The Occupational Health and Safety Act, 1993 (Act 85 of 1993)